Autodesk Auto CAD 2012 User’s Guide Enu V2

User Manual: autodesk AutoCAD - 2012 - User’s Guide Free User Guide for Autodesk AutoCAD Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 2422

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

AutoCAD 2012

User's Guide

February 2011

2011 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be
reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries:
3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, Algor, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo),
ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface,
Autodesk, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backburner,
Backdraft, Beast, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion,
Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit,
DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert,
DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Fempro, Fire, Flame, Flare, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel,
GDX Driver, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, Illuminate Labs AB (design/logo), ImageModeler,
iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LiquidLight, LiquidLight (design/logo), Lustre, MatchMover,
Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moldflow, Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, Moldflow Plastics Insight, Moldflow Plastics Xpert, Moondust, MotionBuilder,
Movimento, MPA, MPA (design/logo), MPX, MPX (design/logo), Mudbox, Multi-Master Editing, Navisworks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Opticore,
Pipeplus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, RealDWG, Real-time Roto,
Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer, Reveal, Revit, RiverCAD, Robot, Showcase, Show Me, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage,
Softimage|XSI (design/logo), Sparks, SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StormNET, StudioTools, ToolClip, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, U-Vis,
ViewCube, Visual, Visual LISP, Volo, Vtour, WaterNetworks, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI.
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Published by:
Autodesk, Inc.
111 McInnis Parkway
San Rafael, CA 94903, USA

Contents

Part 1

Get Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 1

Find the Information You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Access Help and Other Sources of Information . . . . .
Overview of InfoCenter and Autodesk Exchange .
Learn the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View the Product Readme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where to Find the AutoCAD Express Tools . . . . . . .
Join the Customer Involvement Program . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2

.
.
.
.
.
.

.3
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7

Get Information from Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Obtain General Drawing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Count Objects Within a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Part 2

The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Chapter 3

Tools in the Application Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
The Application Menu . . .
Search for Commands .
Access Common Tools
Browse Files . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

. 15
. 15
. 16
. 17

iii

Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . .
The Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the Ribbon . . . . . .
Display and Organize the Ribbon .
Customize the Ribbon . . . . . .
Cursors in the Drawing Area . . . . . .
Viewport Controls . . . . . . . . . . . .
The ViewCube Tool . . . . . . . . . . .
The UCS Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 22
. 25
. 25
. 26
. 31
. 34
. 34
. 36
. 36

Other Tool Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Access the Classic Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Status Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Application Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Drawing Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Keytips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
The Command Line Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Enter Commands on the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Enter System Variables on the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window . . . . . . . . . 51
Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line . . . . . . 53
Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window . . . . . . . . . . 55
Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images . . . . . . . . . . 62
Create and Use Command Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Change Tool Palette Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Control Tool Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Customize Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Organize Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Save and Share Tool Palettes and Tool Palette Groups . . . . . . . 82
DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Overview of DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Understand the DesignCenter Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Access Content with DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Add Content with DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online . . . . 95
Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Overview of Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Understand the Relationship between Content Explorer and
Content Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Understand the Content Explorer Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Understand How Content Is Indexed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Understand Watched Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Manage Content Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

iv | Contents

Basic Searching with Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Searching with Content Explorer . . . . . . . . .
Manage Saved Searches in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . .
Browse Folders with Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter Results in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sort and Group Results in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . .
Customize the View in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform Tasks with Files in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . .
Perform Tasks with Objects in Content Explorer . . . . . . .
Streamline Searches with User-Created Properties in Content
Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 125
. 126
. 128
. 131
. 132
. 133
. 135
. 136
. 137

. . 139
. . 143

Customize the Drawing Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Set Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Up the Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Options for 3D Modeling with Perspective Projection .
Switch Between Model and Named Layouts . . . . . . . .
Specify Application Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows . . . . . . . . .
Control the Display of Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Task-Based Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles) . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Back an Action Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Migrate Custom Settings and Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 149
. 149
. 158
. 164
. 169
. 175
. 183
. 189
. 193
. 195
. 199
. 201

Part 3

Start and Save Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Chapter 6

Start a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Overview of Starting a New Drawing . . . . . .
Specify Units and Unit Formats . . . . . . . . .
Determine the Units of Measurement . . .
Set the Unit Format Conventions . . . . .
Use a Drawing Template File . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Identifying Information to Drawings . . . .
Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing .

Chapter 7

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 205
. 207
. 207
. 210
. 211
. 214
. 216

Open or Save a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Open a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Part of a Large Drawing (Partial Load) .
Work with Multiple Open Drawings . . . . . .
Preview Open Drawings and Layouts . .

.
.
.
.

. 221
. 226
. 228
. 229

Contents | v

Switch Between Open Drawings . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing .
Transfer Information between Open Drawings . .
Save a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Find a Drawing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify Search Paths and File Locations . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

.
.
.
.
.
.

. 230
. 234
. 237
. 238
. 244
. 245

Repair, Restore, or Recover Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Repair a Damaged Drawing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Create and Restore Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Recover from a System Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Chapter 9

Maintain Standards in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Overview of CAD Standards . . . . . . . .
Define Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Drawings for Standards Violations .
Translate Layer Names and Properties . . .

.
.
.
.

. 257
. 260
. 262
. 270

Part 4

Control the Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Chapter 10

Change Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Pan or Zoom a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save and Restore Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control the 3D Projection Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Parallel and Perspective Views . . . . . .
Define a Perspective Projection (DVIEW) . . . . . . .
Define a Parallel Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choose Preset 3D Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles .
Change to a View of the XY Plane . . . . . . . . . . .
Shade a Model and Use Edge Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model . . . . . . .
Customize a Visual Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 11

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 275
. 280
. 284
. 284
. 286
. 288
. 290
. 291
. 293
. 294
. 294
. 299
. 314

Use Viewing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Specify 3D Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of 3D Views . . . . . . . . .
Use 3D Navigation Tools . . . . . . . .
Walk and Fly Through a Drawing . . .
Create a 3D Dynamic View (DVIEW) .
Use ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of ViewCube . . . . . . . . .

vi | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 323
. 323
. 325
. 328
. 332
. 334
. 334

ViewCube Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Reorient the View of a Model with ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . 339
Change the UCS with ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Navigate with SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Overview of SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Wheel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Navigation Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Navigation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Define and Change Views with ShowMotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Overview of ShowMotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Create and Modify Shots and Shot Sequences . . . . . . . . . . 383
Play Back a Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Define a 3D View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Overview of Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Create a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Change Camera Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Create Preview Animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Create Motion Path Animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Control a Camera Motion Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Specify Motion Path Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Record a Motion Path Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Use Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Available Navigation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Reposition and Reorient the Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Control the Display of Navigation Tools on the Navigation
Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Use 3Dconnexion 3D mouse to Navigate Views . . . . . . . . . 409

Chapter 12

Display Multiple Views in Model Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Set Model Space Viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Select and Use the Current Viewport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Save and Restore Model Layout Viewport Arrangements . . . . . . . . 418

Part 5

Organize Drawings and Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Chapter 13

Create Single-View Drawings (Model Space) . . . . . . . . . . 423
Quick Start for Model Space Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Draw, Scale, and Annotate in Model Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Chapter 14

Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space) . . . . . 431
Quick Start for Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Understand the Layout Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Work with Model Space and Paper Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Contents | vii

Work in Model Space . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work on a Named Layout . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Model Space from a Layout Viewport .
Export a Layout to Model Space . . . . . . . .
Create and Modify Layout Viewports . . . . . . . .
Control Views in Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . .
Scale Views in Layout Viewports . . . . . . .
Control Visibility in Layout Viewports . . . .
Scale Linetypes in Layout Viewports . . . . .
Align Views in Layout Viewports . . . . . . .
Rotate Views in Layout Viewports . . . . . . .
Reuse Layouts and Layout Settings . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 15

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 436
. 437
. 440
. 443
. 446
. 450
. 450
. 453
. 459
. 460
. 463
. 466

Work with Sheets in a Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Quick Start for Sheet Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understand the Sheet Set Manager Interface . . . . . .
Create and Manage a Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Organize a Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Modify Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Include Information with Sheets and Sheet Sets .
Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets . . . . . . . .
Use Sheet Sets in a Team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 471
. 473
. 476
. 476
. 479
. 482
. 491
. 495
. 500

Part 6

Create and Modify Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Chapter 16

Control the Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Work with Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Object Properties . . . . . . . . . .
Display and Change the Properties of Objects .
Copy Properties Between Objects . . . . . . . .
Work with Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Layers to Manage Complexity . . . . . . .
Create and Name Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties . . .
Override Layer Properties in Viewports . . . . .
Filter and Sort the List of Layers . . . . . . . . .
Reconcile New Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use New Layer Notification . . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Layer States . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the Current Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Color of an Object . . . . . . . . .

viii | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 507
. 507
. 509
. 513
. 514
. 514
. 516
. 522
. 525
. 529
. 536
. 542
. 543
. 547
. 555
. 555
. 558

Use Color Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the Current Linetype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Linetype of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Linetype Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines . . .
Control Lineweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Lineweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Lineweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the Current Lineweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Lineweight of an Object . . . . . . . . . . .
Control the Display Properties of Certain Objects . . . . . . .
Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills,
Lineweights, and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control the Transparency of Objects . . . . . . . . . . .
Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed . . . . .
Control the Display of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 17

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 561
. 563
. 564
. 565
. 568
. 569
. 571
. 573
. 574
. 575
. 577
. 579
. 581
. 582

.
.
.
.

. 582
. 586
. 587
. 589

Use Precision Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) . . . . .
Control the User Coordinate System (UCS) . . . . . . . .
Work with Named UCS Definitions and Preset
Orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign UCS Definitions to Viewports . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the Dynamic UCS with Solid Models . . . . . . . . .
Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon .
Enter Coordinates to Specify Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Coordinate Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter 2D Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter 3D Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Dynamic Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snap to Locations on Objects (Object Snaps) . . . . . . . . . .
Use Object Snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Object Snap Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Visual Aids for Object Snaps (AutoSnap) . . . . . . .
Override Object Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrict Cursor Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Grid and Grid Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode) . . . . . . . . . .
Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock an Angle for One Point (Angle) . . . . . . . . . . .
Combine or Offset Points and Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . .
Combine Coordinate Values (Coordinate Filters) . . . . .

. . . . 591
. . . . 591
. . . . 594
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 596
. 599
. 601
. 603
. 606
. 606
. 609
. 614
. 619
. 626
. 626
. 630
. 631
. 633
. 635
. 635
. 642
. 643
. 648
. 648
. 648

Contents | ix

Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking) .
Track to Offset Point Locations (Tracking) . . . . .
Specify Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter Direct Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset from Temporary Reference Points . . . . . .
Specify Intervals on Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extract Geometric Information from Objects . . . . . . .
Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations . . .
Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information . . .
Use a Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the QuickCalc Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the Command Prompt Calculator . . . . . . .

Chapter 18

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 651
. 654
. 655
. 655
. 657
. 657
. 662
. 663
. 664
. 670
. 670
. 687

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 691
. 691
. 693
. 698
. 701
. 705
. 706
. 707
. 712
. 714
. 719
. 721
. 723
. 728
. 730
. 730
. 731
. 733
. 738

Select and Modify Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Select Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Objects Individually . . . . . . .
Select Multiple Objects . . . . . . . .
Prevent Objects from Being Selected .
Select Objects by Properties . . . . . .
Customize Object Selection . . . . . .
Group Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correct Mistakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erase Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard . .

x | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Create Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Draw Linear Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw Rectangles and Polygons . . . . .
Draw Multiline Objects . . . . . . . . .
Draw Freehand Sketches . . . . . . . . .
Draw Curved Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw Polyline Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw Donuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw Helixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw Construction and Reference Geometry .
Draw Reference Points . . . . . . . . . .
Draw Construction Lines (and Rays) . .
Create and Combine Areas (Regions) . . . . .
Create Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 19

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 741
. 741
. 744
. 747
. 749
. 753
. 759
. 766
. 769
. 772

Modify Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choose a Method to Modify Objects . . . .
Modify Objects Using Grips . . . . . . . . .
Move or Rotate Objects . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects . . . .
Change the Size and Shape of Objects . . .
Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects . . . .
Disassociate Compound Objects (Explode) .
Modify Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Helixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Multilines . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 775
. 776
. 777
. 787
. 796
. 821
. 832
. 845
. 846
. 853
. 858
. 860

Add Constraints to Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
Overview of Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constrain Objects Geometrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . .
Display and Verify Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . .
Modify Objects with Geometric Constraints Applied . . .
Infer Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constrain Distances and Angles between Objects . . . . . . . .
Overview of Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . .
Apply Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control the Display of Dimensional Constraints . . . . .
Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied .
Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations . . . . . . .
Overview of Formulas and Equations . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager . . . . .
Organize Parameters into Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 865
. 870
. 870
. 872
. 878
. 882
. 885
. 888
. 888
. 892
. 897
. 899
. 903
. 904
. 905
. 910

Part 7

Define and Reference Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913

Chapter 21

Work with Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Overview of Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings . . . . . .
Overview of Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . .
Work With Action Parameters in Blocks . . . .
Work With Constraint Parameters in Blocks .
Remove Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 22

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 915
. 917
. 922
. 922
. 923
. 926
. 927

Create and Modify Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929

Contents | xi

Define Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Blocks Within a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks . . . . . . . .
Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks .
Nest Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Block Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Tool Palettes to Organize Blocks . . . . . . . . .
Create Construction Geometry Within a Block . . . .
Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Block Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define Block Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extract Data from Block Attributes . . . . . . . . . .
Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) . . . . . . .
Modify Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify a Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify the Data in Block Attributes . . . . . . . . . .
Modify a Block Attribute Definition . . . . . . . . . .
Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode) . . . . . . .

Chapter 23

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 929
. 929
. 931
. 934
. 936
. 937
. 938
. 938
. 939
. 940
. 942
. 946
. 947
. 953
. 953
. 956
. 957
. 962

Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Overview of Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Quick Start to Creating Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Create and Edit Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
Overview of the Block Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
Create Custom Block Authoring Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
Test Blocks Within the Block Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Modify Dynamic Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974
Add Constraints to Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
Overview of Constraints in Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . 976
Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
Control Constrained Blocks with the Parameters Manager . . . . 979
Use a Block Properties Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
Identify Fully Constrained Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
Add Action Parameters to Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
Overview of Actions and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
Add Parameters to Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Specify Distance and Angle Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block . . . . . . . . . . . 1017

Part 8

xii | Contents

Work with 3D Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023

Chapter 24

Create 3D Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Overview of 3D Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves .
Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces . .
Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding . . . .
Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping . . . .
Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting . . . . .
Create a Solid or Surface by Revolving . . . .
Create Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Creating 3D Solids . . . . . . .
Create 3D Solid Primitives . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Polysolid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create 3D Solids from Objects . . . . . . . .
Combine or Slice 3D Objects . . . . . . . . .
Check 3D Models for Interferences . . . . .
Create Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Creating Surfaces . . . . . . . .
Create Procedural Surfaces . . . . . . . . . .
Create NURBS Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Associative Surfaces . . . . . . . . . .
Create Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Creating Meshes . . . . . . . .
Create 3D Mesh Primitives . . . . . . . . . .
Construct Meshes from Other Objects . . . .
Create Meshes by Conversion . . . . . . . .
Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) . . . . . . . .
Create Wireframe Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add 3D Thickness to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 25

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1025
. 1030
. 1030
. 1034
. 1038
. 1042
. 1046
. 1049
. 1049
. 1052
. 1066
. 1068
. 1073
. 1078
. 1080
. 1080
. 1086
. 1097
. 1103
. 1111
. 1111
. 1116
. 1136
. 1143
. 1147
. 1152
. 1156

Modify 3D Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159
Overview of Modifying 3D Objects . . . . . .
Use Gizmos to Modify Objects . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Using Gizmos . . . . . . . .
Use the Gizmos . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotate 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scale 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Grips to Modify Solids and Surfaces . . . .
Use 3D Subobject Grips . . . . . . . . . .
Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects . . .
Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces .
Modify 3D Subobjects . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move, Rotate, and Scale 3D Subobjects .
Modify Faces on 3D Objects . . . . . . .
Modify Edges on 3D Objects . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1159
. 1161
. 1161
. 1163
. 1167
. 1170
. 1172
. 1176
. 1176
. 1179
. 1183
. 1186
. 1186
. 1189
. 1193

Contents | xiii

Modify Vertices on 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Complex 3D Solids and Surfaces . . . . . . . .
Display Original Forms of Composite Solids . . . . .
Modify Composite Solids and Surfaces . . . . . . . .
Shell and Remove Redundancies in 3D Objects . . .
Press or Pull Bounded Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Facets to Faces on Solids and Surfaces . . . . . .
Modify the Properties of 3D Solids, Surfaces, and Meshes .
Modify Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Modifying Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim and Untrim Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extend a Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillet a Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit NURBS Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyze Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Mesh Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Modifying Meshes . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Mesh Smoothness Levels . . . . . . . . . .
Refine Mesh Objects or Subobjects . . . . . . . . . .
Add Creases to Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Mesh Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Close Mesh Gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for Working with Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify 3D Solids and Surfaces Using Inventor Fusion . .

Chapter 26

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1200
. 1202
. 1203
. 1205
. 1207
. 1210
. 1212
. 1213
. 1218
. 1218
. 1220
. 1223
. 1224
. 1225
. 1228
. 1238
. 1238
. 1243
. 1248
. 1250
. 1253
. 1258
. 1261
. 1268

Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models . . . . . . . . 1269
Create Drawings from 3D Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models .
Create Drawings from Other 3D CAD Models . . . . . . . .
Work with Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Section Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Section Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save and Publish Section Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Flattened View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1269
. 1269
. 1295
. 1296
. 1296
. 1298
. 1303
. 1312
. 1317

Part 9

Annotate

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321

Chapter 27

Work with Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
Overview of Annotations . . . . . . . .
Scale Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Scaling Annotations
Set Annotation Scale . . . . . . .
Create Annotative Objects . . . .

xiv | Contents

.
.
.
.
.

. 1323
. 1324
. 1325
. 1327
. 1329

Display Annotative Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351
Add and Modify Scale Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353
Set Orientation for Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356

Chapter 28

Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills . . . . . . . . .
Specify Hatch and Fill Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control the Appearance of Hatches . . . . . . . . .
Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill . . . . . . . . .
Control the Hatch Origin Point . . . . . . . .
Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns . . . . . .
Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills . .
Control the Display of Hatch Boundaries . . .
Control the Draw Order of Hatches and Fills .
Modify Hatches and Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Hatch Properties . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation .
Reshape a Hatch or Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-create the Boundary of a Hatch or Fill . . .
Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects . . . . . . . .

Chapter 29

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1359
. 1367
. 1372
. 1372
. 1378
. 1381
. 1383
. 1386
. 1389
. 1389
. 1389
. 1391
. 1392
. 1394
. 1395

Notes and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
Overview of Notes and Labels . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Creating Text . . . . . . . . . .
Create Single-Line Text . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Multiline Text . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Edit Columns in Multiline Text .
Import Text from External Files . . . . . . .
Create Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Leader Objects . . . . . . . . .
Create and Modify Leaders . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Leaders Using Grips . . . . . . . . .
Work with Leader Styles . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Content to a Leader . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Fields in Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Hyperlinks in Fields . . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign Text Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Text Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Text Obliquing Angle . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Horizontal or Vertical Text Orientation .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1399
. 1402
. 1402
. 1406
. 1410
. 1434
. 1438
. 1439
. 1439
. 1441
. 1449
. 1451
. 1454
. 1458
. 1458
. 1464
. 1467
. 1469
. 1469
. 1472
. 1479
. 1481
. 1482

Contents | xv

Change Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Changing Text . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Single-Line Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Multiline Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Find and Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Text Scale and Justification . . . . . . . .
Check Spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use an Alternate Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Using an Alternate Text Editor . . . .
Format Multiline Text in an Alternate Text Editor .

Chapter 30

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1483
. 1483
. 1484
. 1486
. 1489
. 1491
. 1493
. 1497
. 1497
. 1498

.
.
.
.
.

. 1503
. 1507
. 1511
. 1514
. 1518

Dimensions and Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
Understand Basic Concepts of Dimensioning . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts of a Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Associative Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compare Dimension Styles and Variables . . . . . . . .
Control Dimension Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Dimension Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Dimension Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the Scale for Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Linear Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Radial Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Ordinate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Arc Length Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Existing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify A Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions .
Override a Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Geometric Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Geometric Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . .
Material Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Datum Reference Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Projected Tolerance Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvi | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503
Create and Modify Tables . . . .
Link a Table to External Data . .
Work with Table Styles . . . . .
Add Text and Blocks to Tables .
Use Formulas in Table Cells . .

Chapter 31

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1523
. 1523
. 1526
. 1527
. 1530
. 1530
. 1531
. 1533
. 1543
. 1554
. 1567
. 1570
. 1570
. 1579
. 1586
. 1589
. 1591
. 1592
. 1592
. 1617
. 1618
. 1621
. 1621
. 1623
. 1624
. 1625

Composite Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625

Part 10

Plot and Publish Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627

Chapter 32

Specify Settings for Plotting and Publishing . . . . . . . . . . 1629
Save Plot Settings as Named Page Setups . . . . . . . . . .
Reuse Named Page Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify Page Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select a Printer or Plotter for a Layout . . . . . . . .
Select a Paper Size for a Layout . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determine the Drawing Orientation of a Layout . .
Set the Plot Area of a Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust the Plot Offset of a Layout . . . . . . . . . .
Set the Plot Scale for a Layout . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the Lineweight Scale for a Layout . . . . . . . .
Select a Plot Style Table for a Layout . . . . . . . . .
Set Shaded Viewport and Plot Options for a Layout .
Other Ways to Create Page Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the Layout Wizard to Specify Page Setups . . . .
Import PCP or PC2 Settings into a Layout . . . . . .
Use Named Page Setups with Sheet Sets . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 33

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1629
. 1632
. 1635
. 1636
. 1637
. 1642
. 1643
. 1644
. 1646
. 1648
. 1649
. 1651
. 1653
. 1653
. 1654
. 1655

Print or Plot Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
Overview of Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use a Page Setup to Specify Plot Settings . . . . .
Select a Printer or Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify the Area to Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position the Drawing on the Paper . . . . . . . .
Specify the Printable Area . . . . . . . . .
Set the Position of the Plot . . . . . . . . .
Set Drawing Orientation . . . . . . . . . .
Control How Objects Are Plotted . . . . . . . .
Set Plot Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Shaded Viewport Options . . . . . . .
Set Options for Plotted Objects . . . . . . .
Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects .
Use Color-Dependent Plot Style Tables . .
Use Named Plot Style Tables . . . . . . . .
Change Plot Style Settings . . . . . . . . .
Preview a Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot Files to Other Formats . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot DWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot DWFx Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1659
. 1664
. 1666
. 1667
. 1668
. 1672
. 1672
. 1673
. 1674
. 1674
. 1674
. 1677
. 1681
. 1685
. 1694
. 1695
. 1702
. 1714
. 1715
. 1716
. 1717

Contents | xvii

Plot to DXB File Formats . .
Plot to Raster File Formats .
Plot Adobe PDF Files . . . .
Plot Adobe PostScript Files .
Create Plot Files . . . . . . .

Chapter 34

.
.
.
.
.

. 1718
. 1719
. 1721
. 1723
. 1724

Publish Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727
Overview of Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Modify a Drawing Set for Publishing . .
Create a Paper or Plot File Drawing Set . . . . . . . .
Publish an Electronic Drawing Set . . . . . . . . . .
Publish a Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Republish a Drawing Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Electronic Drawing Sets with Autodesk Design
Set Publish Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Publish 3D DWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print 3D Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
Review .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1727
. 1730
. 1734
. 1737
. 1742
. 1750
. 1751
. 1753
. 1758
. 1766

Part 11

Share Data Between Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769

Chapter 35

Reference Other Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1771
Overview of Referenced Drawings (Xrefs) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nest and Overlay Referenced Drawings . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Paths to Referenced Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detach Referenced Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update and Archive Referenced Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update Referenced Drawing Attachments . . . . . . . . . .
Archive Drawings That Contain Referenced Drawings
(Bind) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clip External References and Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Referenced Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit a Referenced Drawing in a Separate Window . . . . . .
Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks . .
Use the Working Set to Edit Referenced Drawings and
Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Back Edited Referenced Drawings and Blocks . . . . .
Edit Referenced Drawings and Blocks with Nesting, OLE, or
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolve Referenced Drawing Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolve Missing External References . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolve Circular External References . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolve Name Conflicts in External References . . . . . . .

xviii | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1771
. 1774
. 1774
. 1780
. 1782
. 1787
. 1788
. 1788

.
.
.
.
.

. 1791
. 1793
. 1797
. 1797
. 1799

. . 1802
. . 1804
.
.
.
.
.

. 1806
. 1808
. 1808
. 1809
. 1810

Track External Reference Operations (Log File) . .
Increase Performance with Large Referenced Drawings .
Overview of Demand Loading . . . . . . . . . . .
Unload Xrefs in Large Drawings . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Demand Loading in Large Drawings . .
Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes . . . . . . .
Set Paths for Temporary Xref File Copies . . . . .

Chapter 36

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1812
. 1815
. 1815
. 1816
. 1816
. 1818
. 1820

Link and Embed Data (OLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823
Overview of Object Linking and Embedding . . . . . . .
Import OLE Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings .
Link OLE Objects in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Embed OLE Objects in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . .
Export OLE Objects from Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit OLE Objects in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 37

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1823
. 1826
. 1826
. 1827
. 1830
. 1833
. 1835

Work with Data in Other Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1839
Convert Drawing File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understand the Effect of Format Changes . . . . . . . .
Save Conversion Settings for Later Use . . . . . . . . .
Save Lists of Files for Batch Conversions . . . . . . . . .
Import Other File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Autodesk 3ds MAX Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import FBX Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import 3D Point Cloud Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import ACIS SAT Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert DXF and DXB Files to DWG Format . . . . . .
Import MicroStation DGN Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import IGES Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import STEP Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Pro/ENGINEER Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Rhino Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import CATIA Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import SolidWorks Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import JT Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import UGS NX Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Parasolid Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert WMF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attach Files as Underlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Underlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attach, Scale, and Detach Underlays . . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Underlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage and Publish Drawings Containing Underlays .
Attach Raster Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1839
. 1841
. 1846
. 1848
. 1849
. 1849
. 1850
. 1851
. 1856
. 1856
. 1857
. 1864
. 1866
. 1868
. 1870
. 1871
. 1874
. 1876
. 1878
. 1880
. 1882
. 1884
. 1884
. 1885
. 1895
. 1909
. 1916

Contents | xix

Overview of Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attach, Scale, and Detach Raster Images . . . . . . .
Modify Raster Images and Image Boundaries . . . .
Manage Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tune Raster Image Performance . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Drawings to Other File Formats . . . . . . . . . .
Export DWF and DWFx Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export FBX Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export MicroStation DGN Files . . . . . . . . . . .
Export IGES files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export WMF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Raster Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export PostScript Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export ACIS SAT Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Stereolithography STL Files . . . . . . . . . .
Use Drawings from Different Versions and Applications .
Work with Drawings in Earlier Releases . . . . . . .
Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats . .
Work with AutoCAD Drawings in AutoCAD LT . . .
Work with Custom and Proxy Objects . . . . . . . .

Chapter 38

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1916
. 1919
. 1923
. 1929
. 1935
. 1938
. 1938
. 1940
. 1941
. 1942
. 1944
. 1946
. 1948
. 1949
. 1951
. 1952
. 1953
. 1954
. 1954
. 1960
. 1963
. 1966

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1969
. 1971
. 1974
. 1975
. 1977
. 1980
. 1986
. 1987
. 1991
. 1994
. 1994
. 1995
. 1997
. 1999
. 2002

Access External Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003
Overview of Using External Databases . . . . . . . . . .
Access a Database from Within Drawings . . . . . . . .
Configure a Database for Use with Drawing Files .
View Data in a Database Table . . . . . . . . . . .

xx | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Extract Data from Drawings and Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . 1969
Overview of Data Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extract Data Using the Data Extraction Wizard . . .
Start the Data Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select the Source for a Data Extraction . . . . .
Select Objects for Data Extraction . . . . . . .
Organize and Refine the Extracted Data . . . .
Use Table Styles for Data Extraction Tables . .
Link an Excel Spreadsheet to Access Data . . . . . .
Output Extracted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update Extracted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Updating Extracted Data . . . . .
Update Extracted Data Manually . . . . . . . .
Update Data Extraction Table Automatically .
Modify a Data Extraction Table . . . . . . . . . . .
Detach a Data Extraction Table . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 39

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

. 2003
. 2005
. 2005
. 2008

Edit Data in a Database Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Database Records to Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Edit Links and Link Templates . . . . . . . . .
Identify and Select Existing Links . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Find and Correct Link Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Link Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Labels to Display Database Information in the Drawing . .
Create and Edit Labels and Label Templates . . . . . . . .
Update Labels with New Values from the Database . . . .
Use Queries to Filter Database Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Construct Simple Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the Query Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use SQL Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combine Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save and Reuse Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Share Link and Label Templates and Queries with Other Users .
Work with Links in Files from Earlier Releases . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Files with Autodesk Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 2013
. 2015
. 2015
. 2020
. 2023
. 2024
. 2026
. 2026
. 2031
. 2032
. 2032
. 2034
. 2037
. 2040
. 2041
. 2044
. 2046
. 2047
. 2051

Part 12

Collaborate with Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2053

Chapter 40

Protect and Sign Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2055
Drawing Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Encryption . . . . . . . . .
Protect Drawings with Encryption . . . .
View Password-Protected Drawings . . .
Sign Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Digital Signatures . . . . . .
Personally Sign Drawings . . . . . . . . .
View Drawings with Digital Signatures .

Chapter 41

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 2055
. 2055
. 2056
. 2059
. 2061
. 2061
. 2063
. 2071

Use the Internet for Collaboration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2077
Get Started with Internet Access . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Using Hyperlinks in a Drawing . . .
Use a Hyperlink to Access a File or a Web Page .
Use a Hyperlink to Create an Email Message . .
Use Hyperlinks in Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use a Hyperlink to Start a New Drawing . . . . .
Work with Drawing Files over the Internet . . . . . .
Open and Save Drawing Files from the Internet .
Share Drawing Files Internationally . . . . . . .
Access Buzzsaw for Project Collaboration . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 2077
. 2078
. 2078
. 2080
. 2084
. 2085
. 2086
. 2087
. 2088
. 2092
. 2094

Contents | xxi

Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration .
Work with Xrefs over the Internet . . . . . . . . .
Insert Content from a Website . . . . . . . . . . .
Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission . .
Review and Markup Files with Design Review . . . . . .
Use the Publish to Web Wizard to Create Web Pages . .
Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings . . . . .

Chapter 42

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 2101
. 2105
. 2106
. 2109
. 2119
. 2121
. 2122

Use Markups for Design Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2125
Overview of Using Markups for Design
Publish Drawings for Review . . . . . .
Insert Markups . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Markups . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Respond to Markups . . . . . . . . . .
Republish a Markup Set . . . . . . . . .

Review .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.

. 2125
. 2126
. 2127
. 2127
. 2132
. 2134

Part 13

Render Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2137

Chapter 43

Draw 2D Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2139
Set Isometric Grid and Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2139
Draw Isometric Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2141

Chapter 44

Add Lighting to Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2143
Overview of Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow . . . . . . . . .
Illuminate a Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Point Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Spotlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Weblights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Distant Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning a Shape to a Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust and Manipulate Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control the Display of Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Light Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Light Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun and Sky Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incorporate Luminaire Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Lights in Drawings from Previous Versions of
AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Drawings into 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . .

xxii | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 2143
. 2147
. 2150
. 2150
. 2152
. 2159
. 2165
. 2176
. 2178
. 2180
. 2180
. 2182
. 2186
. 2194
. 2198
. 2200

. . . . 2200
. . . . 2201

Chapter 45

Materials and Textures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2203
Overview of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Manage Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Browse Material Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create New Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage and Organize Materials . . . . . . . . .
Modify Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apply Materials to Objects and Faces . . . . . . . . .
Use Maps for Added Realism . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Map Channels for Added Texture Realism .
Understand Map Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Map Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Mapping On Objects and Faces . . . . . .

Chapter 46

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 2203
. 2204
. 2204
. 2209
. 2215
. 2217
. 2219
. 2219
. 2221
. 2222
. 2222
. 2224
. 2230
. 2235

Render 3D Objects for Realism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2239
Overview of Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prepare a Model for Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understand Face Normals and Hidden Surfaces . . . .
Minimize Intersecting and Coplanar Faces . . . . . .
Balance Mesh Density for Smooth Geometry . . . . .
Set Up the Renderer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the Render Settings Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Custom Render Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control the Rendering Environment . . . . . . . . .
Basics of Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the Render Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Render Views, Selected Objects, or Cropped Content .
Set Output Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Material Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Sampling to Improve Image Quality . . . . . .
Use Shadows in Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ray-traced Reflections and Refractions . . . . . . . .
Benefits of Indirect Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . .
Final Gathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rendered Image Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save and Redisplay Rendered Images . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save a Rendered Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redisplay a Rendered Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Copies of Rendered Images . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Models with Other Applications . . . . . . . . . .
Update Legacy Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 2239
. 2241
. 2241
. 2243
. 2245
. 2248
. 2249
. 2251
. 2253
. 2257
. 2257
. 2258
. 2262
. 2264
. 2265
. 2268
. 2271
. 2271
. 2274
. 2276
. 2277
. 2280
. 2280
. 2282
. 2283
. 2283
. 2284

Contents | xxiii

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2287
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2327

xxiv | Contents

Part 1: Get Information

Find the Information You
Need

There are various ways to find information about how to use this program, and multiple
resources are available.
This AutoCAD is often intuitive, but when you do need to look something up, you can save
time and avoid frustration if you use the Help system to find information. The Help system
is organized in a structured design that makes information easy to locate.

Access Help and Other Sources of Information
You can use InfoCenter to search for information, and to access Autodesk
Exchange for online services and resources.

Overview of InfoCenter and Autodesk Exchange
InfoCenter provides a convenient way to search for topics in the Help system,
sign in to Autodesk ID, open Autodesk Exchange, and display the options in
the Help menu. It can also display product announcements, updates, and
notifications.

TIP For best results when you use the Search box in InfoCenter or in Autodesk
Exchange, enter at least two keywords.

Autodesk Exchange for AutoCAD
Autodesk Exchange provides a web-based experience directly within the
product. Included are tabs that access the following sources of information:
■

Home. Provides a wide variety of content, including announcements,
expert tips, videos, and links to blogs. When enabled for online access, the
Home tab also includes access to the Knowledge Base, Communication
Center, and Subscription Center.

■

Apps. Offers popular accessories, libraries, and plug-ins for purchase.

■

Help. Opens the AutoCAD Help system.

NOTE The tabs for online sources are not available in all languages, products, and
installations. Autodesk Exchange can be configured for offline use only, in which
case only the Home and Help tabs are displayed.

Receive Product Updates and Announcements
Whenever new information is available, InfoCenter notifies you by displaying
a balloon message. Click the link in the balloon message to open the article
or announcement.
If you don’t want to receive balloon notifications, in the Options dialog box,
System tab, turn off Balloon Notification.

Quick Reference
Commands
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

Learn the Product
For the latest information about Autodesk training, visit
http://www.autodesk.com/training or contact your local Autodesk office.

Authorized Training Centers

More than 1,200 ATC sites are available
----- worldwide to meet your needs for
discipline-specific, locally based training.

4 | Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need

Autodesk Official Training
Courseware

Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC) is
technical training material developed by
----- Autodesk. You can purchase AOTC from your
local reseller or distributor, or you can order it
online from the Autodesk Store.

e-Learning

Autodesk e-Learning for Autodesk Subscription
----- customers features interactive lessons organized
into product catalogs.

Autodesk Developer Network

The Autodesk Developer (ADN) program provides
----- support for full-time, professional developers who
want to build software based on Autodesk
products.

Consulting

Autodesk Consulting provides services that help
----- set up processes and provide critical training that
will help increase productivity so you can
capitalize on the power of your products.

Partner Products and Services

Visit the Partner Products & Services page for a
----- list of resources available for your Autodesk
product and your industry.

View the Product Readme
You can find late-breaking information about this software in the online
Readme.
It is suggested that you read through the online Readme for the latest
information about recommended hardware, updated installation instructions,
and known software problems.

View the Product Readme | 5

View the online readme

Where to Find the AutoCAD Express Tools
The AutoCAD Express Tools contain a library of productivity tools designed
to help you extend the power of AutoCAD.
They are easy to use, easily integrated into your menus and toolbars, and cover
a wide range of functions, including dimensioning, drawing, and selecting
and modifying objects.
The AutoCAD Express Tools are installed as a Typical installation of AutoCAD.
If you do not want them installed, you must disable them during installation
by selecting the Express Tools option on the Select the Installation Type page.
For more detailed information about using Express Tools, refer to the AutoCAD
Express Tools Help system found on the Express menu (in the Classic Menu
Bar on page 39).
NOTE Express Tools are available in their original form, in English only, and are
not supported. Double-byte characters are not supported.

To verify if Express Tools are loaded
■

At the Command prompt, enter EXPRESSTOOLS to enable the tools.
You can install the AutoCAD Express Tools as part of the AutoCAD
installation, or you can add them later using Add or Remove Programs on
the Control Panel.

To access the Express Tools and their toolbars
■

To display the Express menu, enter EXPRESSMENU at the Command
prompt.

■

To display the Express toolbars, right-click next to any docked toolbar.
Click EXPRESS, and select an Express toolbar. Repeat these steps until all
of the Express toolbars you want are displayed.
TIP With the Express toolbars displayed, select a workspace and save it. The
Express Tools toolbars will then always be included with that workspace.

6 | Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need

Join the Customer Involvement Program
If you participate in the Customer Involvement Program (CIP), specific
information about how you use AutoCAD is forwarded to Autodesk. This
information includes what features you use the most, problems that you
encounter, and other information helpful to the future direction of the
product.
See the following links for more information.
■

Learn more about the Autodesk Customer Involvement Program:
http://www.autodesk.com/cip

■

Read the Autodesk Privacy Statement: http://www.autodesk.com/cipprivacy

When you join, you will be able to view reports that can help you optimize
your use of AutoCAD.
To turn the CIP on or off
1 On the InfoCenter toolbar, to the right of the Help button, click the
drop-down arrow.
2 Click Customer Involvement Program.
3 In the Customer Involvement Program dialog box, select to start or stop
participating.
4 Click OK.

Join the Customer Involvement Program | 7

Get Information from
Drawings

You can retrieve general information from a drawing including identifying information and
the number of objects that it contains.
There are types of information stored in a drawing that are not specific to objects within the
drawing, but provide useful information to help you understand the behavior of the drawing,
the settings of system variables, the number of objects, descriptive information, and so on.

Obtain General Drawing Information
You can retrieve general information about the drawing file and its settings.
This information includes the following:
■

Custom descriptive information about the drawing (DWGPROPS)

■

General drawing settings (STATUS)

■

Amount of time spent in the drawing (TIME)

This information can help you document a drawing, displays a variety of drawing
settings such as the total number of objects in the drawing, amount of free space
on your disk drive, and total amount of time spent in the drawing file.
See also:
■

Enter System Variables on the Command Line on page 49

■

Add Identifying Information to Drawings on page 214

■

Extract Geometric Information from Objects on page 662

■

Compare Dimension Styles and Variables on page 1531

Quick Reference
Commands
DWGPROPS
Sets and displays the file properties of the current drawing.
SETVAR
Lists or changes the values of system variables.
STATUS
Displays drawing statistics, modes, and extents.
TIME
Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing.

System Variables
CDATE
Stores the current date and time in decimal format.
DATE
Stores the current date and time in Modified Julian Date format.
SAVENAME
Displays the file name and directory path of the most recently saved drawing.

Count Objects Within a Drawing
You can count objects within a drawing using the QSELECT command.
The QSELECT command displays the Quick Select dialog box, which allows
you to create a selection set based on the filtering criteria. You can filter
selection sets by property such as color or linetype, and by object type.
Creating a selection set based on the filtering criteria in the Quick Select dialog
box, allows you to count specified types of objects within a drawing.

10 | Chapter 2 Get Information from Drawings

To count specified types of objects in a drawing

1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select.
2 In the Quick Select dialog box, do one of the following:
■

In the Apply To List, select Entire Drawing.

■

Click the Select Objects button to select a group of objects. Press Enter.
In the Apply To list, select Current selection.

3 In the Object Type list, select the type of object you want to count.
4 In the Properties list, select a property that belongs to the type of objects
you want to count.
5 In the Operator list, select = Equals.
6 In the Value list, select the property value of the type of objects you want
to count.
7 Click OK.
The number of objects displays at the Command prompt.

Quick Reference
Commands
QSELECT
Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria.

Count Objects Within a Drawing | 11

Part 2: The User Interface

Tools in the Application
Window

Use the Application menu, ribbon, and other elements in the application window to access
frequently used commands, and control the operation of the product.

The Application Menu
Click the application button to search for commands, as well as access tools to
create, open, and publish a file.

Search for Commands
Perform a real-time search for commands on the Quick Access toolbar, in the
application menu, and on the ribbon.
The Search field displays at the top of the application menu. Search results can
include menu commands, basic tooltips, and command prompt text strings.
You can enter a search term in any language.

Quick Reference
Commands
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

Access Common Tools
Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.
Click the application button to quickly
■

Create, open, or save a file

■

Audit, recover, and purge a file

■

Print or publish a file

■

Access the Options dialog box

16 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window

■

Close AutoCAD

NOTE You can also close AutoCAD by double-clicking the Application button.

Quick Reference
Commands
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

Browse Files
View, sort, and access supported files that you have recently opened.

Recent Documents
View the most recently used files with the Recent Documents list.
Files display in the Recent Documents list with the most recently used file at
the top by default.

Browse Files | 17

Pinned Files
You can keep a file listed regardless of files that you save later using the push
pin button to the right. The file is displayed at the bottom of the list until you
turn off the push pin button.

Sort and Group Options
Use the drop-down list at the top of the Recent Documents list to sort or group
files by
■

File name

■

File size

■

File type

■

Date the files were last modified

To change the preview display options for recent documents
1 Click the Application menu and then, click Recent Documents.
2 Under the Search text box, click the Display Options menu.
3 Select a display option.

NOTE The preview display option you choose remains in both the Recent
Documents and Open Documents lists.

18 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window

To change the number of recent documents listed
1 Click Tools ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, click the Open and Save tab.
3 In the Application Menu ➤ Number of Recently Used Files text box,
enter the number of recent documents to be listed. You can choose any
number between 0 and 50.

Quick Reference
Commands
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

Currently Open Documents
View only files that are currently open with the Open Documents list.
Files display in the Open Documents list with the most recently opened file
at the top. To make a file current, click the file in the list.

Browse Files | 19

To change the preview display options for currently open documents
1 Click the Application menu and then, click Open Documents.
2 Under the Search text box, click the Display Options menu.
3 Select a display option.

20 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window

NOTE The preview display option you choose remains in both the Recent
Documents and Open Documents quick menus.

Quick Reference
Commands
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

Preview Documents
View a thumbnail of files in the Recent Documents and Open Documents
lists.

Browse Files | 21

When you hover over a file in either of the lists, a preview of the file is
displayed along with the following information:
■

Path where the file is stored

■

Date the file was last modified

■

Version of the product used to create the file

■

Name of the person who last saved the file

■

Name of the person who is currently editing the file

You can also include a thumbnail of the file next to the files in the list. To
change the file icon to a thumbnail preview, click the drop-down list at the
top of the Recent Documents or Open Documents lists and choose small icons,
large icons, small images, or large images.

Quick Reference
Commands
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

Quick Access Toolbar
Display frequently used tools with the Quick Access toolbar.

22 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window

View Undo and Redo History
The Quick Access toolbar displays options to undo and redo changes to your
file. To undo or redo a less recent change, click the drop-down button to the
right of the Undo and Redo buttons.

Add Commands and Controls
Add unlimited tools to the Quick Access toolbar. Tools that extend past the
maximum length of the toolbar are displayed in a flyout button.

Quick Access Toolbar | 23

To add a ribbon button to the Quick Access toolbar, right-click the button on
the ribbon and click Add to Quick Access toolbar. Buttons are added to the
right of the default commands on the Quick Access toolbar.

Move the Quick Access Toolbar
Place the Quick Access toolbar either above or below the ribbon using the
Customization button.

See also:
■

Quick Access Toolbars

■

Toolbars on page 40

To add a command to the Quick Access toolbar
1 Right-click the Quick Access toolbar.
2 Click Customize Quick Access Toolbar.
3 In the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor, drag a command from the
Command list to the position you want it to be displayed on the Quick
Access toolbar.
For multiple commands, hold down CTRL and select the commands.
4 Click OK.

To remove a command from the Quick Access toolbar
1 Right-click the command you want to remove.
2 Click Remove from Quick Access Toolbar.

24 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window

Quick Reference
Commands
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.

The Ribbon
The ribbon is a palette that displays task-based tools and controls.

Overview of the Ribbon
The ribbon is displayed by default when you open a file, providing a compact
palette of all of the tools necessary to create or modify your drawing.

Quick Reference
Commands
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
RIBBON
Opens the ribbon window.
RIBBONCLOSE
Closes the ribbon window.

The Ribbon | 25

System Variables
MTEXTTOOLBAR
Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar.
RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT
Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or
double-click an object.
RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM
Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon
property controls or a contextual tab.
RIBBONDOCKEDHEIGHT
Determines whether the horizontally docked ribbon is set to the height of
the current tab or a predetermined height.
RIBBONSELECTMODE
Determines whether a pickfirst selection set remains selected after a ribbon
contextual tab is invoked and the command is completed.
RIBBONSTATE
Indicates whether the ribbon palette is open or closed.
TABLETOOLBAR
Controls the display of the Table toolbar.

Display and Organize the Ribbon
The ribbon is displayed horizontally or vertically.
The horizontal ribbon is displayed across the top of the file window. You can
dock the vertical ribbon to the left or right of the file window.
The vertical ribbon can also float in the file window or on a second monitor.

Ribbon Tabs and Panels
The ribbon is composed of a series of panels, which are organized into tabs
labeled by task. Ribbon panels contain many of the same tools and controls
available in toolbars and dialog boxes.

26 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window

Some ribbon panels display a dialog box related to that panel. The dialog box
launcher is denoted by an arrow icon, , in the lower-right corner of the
panel. The dialog box launcher indicates that you can display a related dialog
box. Display the related dialog box by clicking the dialog box launcher.

To specify which ribbon tabs and panels are displayed, right-click the ribbon
and, on the shortcut menu, click or clear the names of tabs or panels.

Floating Panels
If you pull a panel off of a ribbon tab and into the drawing area or onto another
monitor, that panel floats where you placed it. The floating panel remains
open until you return it to the ribbon, even if you switch ribbon tabs.

Slideout Panels
An arrow in the middle of a panel title,
, indicates that you can slide out
the panel to display additional tools and controls. Click on the title bar of an
open panel to display the slideout panel. By default, a slideout panel

Display and Organize the Ribbon | 27

automatically closes when you click another panel. To keep a panel expanded,
click the push pin,

, in the bottom-left corner of the slideout panel.

Contextual Ribbon Tabs
When you select a particular type of object or execute some commands, a
special contextual ribbon tab is displayed instead of a toolbar or dialog box.
The contextual tab is closed when you end the command.

Checkboxes
Checkboxes allow you to toggle an option on or off. A third, indeterminate
state occurs if the setting differes for multiple objects.

28 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window

Radio Buttons
Depending on the available space in the vertical or horizontal ribbon, radio
buttons can collapse into a single button. A single radio button works as a
toggle, allowing you to cycle through each item in the list, or as a split button,
where the top half of the radio button is a toggle button and clicking on the
arrow icon in the lower half displays a drop-down of all items in the list.

Sliders
When an option can be executed with varying intensity, the slider allows you
to control the setting from lower to higher, or reverse.

See also:
■

Create Task-Based Workspaces on page 189

To display the ribbon
■

Click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Ribbon.
NOTE The ribbon displays the ribbon panels associated with the workspace
you used last.
To display the ribbon panels associated with a specific workspace, click
Tools menu ➤ Workspaces.

Display and Organize the Ribbon | 29

To minimize the ribbon
1 The first button toggles the between the full ribbon state, the default
ribbon state, and the minimize ribbon state.
2 The second drop-down button allows you to select the minimize ribbon
state. These are the four minimize ribbon states:
■

Minimize to Tabs: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab titles are
displayed.

■

Minimize to Panel Titles: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab and
panel titles are displayed.

■

Minimize to Panel Buttons: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab
titles and panel buttons are displayed.

■

Cycle Through All: Cycles through all four ribbon states in the order,
full ribbon, minimize to panel buttons, minimize to panel titles,
minimize to tabs.

To display or hide a ribbon panel
■

Right-click anywhere inside the ribbon. Under Panels, select or unselect
the name of a panel.

NOTE Some tabs include additional panels that are hidden by default.

Quick Reference
Commands
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
RIBBON
Opens the ribbon window.
RIBBONCLOSE
Closes the ribbon window.

30 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window

System Variables
MTEXTTOOLBAR
Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar.
RIBBONBGLOADRIBBONCONTEXTSELECT
Controls whether ribbon tabs are loaded into memory by a background
process during idle processor time.
RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT
Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or
double-click an object.
RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM
Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon
property controls or a contextual tab.
RIBBONDOCKEDHEIGHT
Determines whether the horizontally docked ribbon is set to the height of
the current tab or a predetermined height.
RIBBONSELECTMODE
Determines whether a pickfirst selection set remains selected after a ribbon
contextual tab is invoked and the command is completed.
RIBBONSTATE
Indicates whether the ribbon palette is open or closed.
TABLETOOLBAR
Controls the display of the Table toolbar.

Customize the Ribbon
You can customize the ribbon in the following ways:
■

You can create and modify ribbon panels using the Customize User
Interface Editor. See Ribbon in the Customization Guide.

■

You can associate a customizable tool palette group with each tab on the
ribbon. Right-click the ribbon tab to display a list of available tool palette
groups.

Customize the Ribbon | 31

■

You can change the order of ribbon tabs. Click the tab you want to move,
drag it to the desired position, and release.

■

You can change the order of ribbon panels. Click the panel you want to
move, drag it to the desired position, and release.

■

You can convert toolbars into ribbon panels using the Customize User
Interface Editor. See Ribbon in the Customization Guide.

See also:
■

Ribbon

To associate a tool palette group with a ribbon tab

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
2 In the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor, Customize tab, in the
Customizations In pane, click the plus sign (+) next to the
Workspaces node to expand it.
3 Select the workspace that has the ribbon tab for which you want to assign
a tool palette group.
4 In the Workspace Contents pane, click the plus sign (+) next to the Ribbon
Tabs node to expand it.
5 Select the ribbon tab that you want to assign a tool palette group.
6 In the Properties pane, in the ToolPalette Group box, click the down
arrow and select the tool palette group you want to assign to the ribbon
tab.
7 Click OK.

To display the tool palette group associated with a ribbon tab
■

Right-click a ribbon tab and click Show Related Tool Palette Group.

32 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window

Quick Reference
Commands
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
RIBBON
Opens the ribbon window.
RIBBONCLOSE
Closes the ribbon window.

Customize the Ribbon | 33

Cursors in the Drawing Area
In the drawing area, the appearance of the cursor changes depending on what
you are doing.
■

If you are prompted to specify a point location, the cursor appears as
crosshairs

■

If you are prompted to select an object, the cursor changes to a small square
called a pickbox

■

When you are not in a command, the cursor appears as a combination of
the crosshairs and pickbox cursors

■

If you are prompted to enter text, the cursor appears as a vertical bar

In the following illustrations, these cursors are displayed in order.

You can change the size of the crosshairs and pickbox cursors in the Options
dialog box (the OPTIONS command). For more information on customizing
these and other interface elements, see Set Interface Options on page 149.

Quick Reference
Commands
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

System Variables
CURSORSIZE
Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size.
PICKBOX
Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.

Viewport Controls
Viewport controls are displayed at the top-left corner of each viewport, and
provide a convenient way of changing views, visual styles, and other settings.

34 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window

The labels display the current viewport settings. For example, the labels might
read
[+] [Top] [2D Wireframe]
You can click within each of the three bracketed areas to change the settings.
■

Click + to display options for maximizing the viewport, changing the
viewport configuration, or controlling the display of navigation tools.

■

Click Top to choose between several standard and custom views.

■

Click 2D Wireframe to choose one of several visual styles. Most of the
other visual styles are used for 3D visualization.

See also:
■

Save and Restore Views on page 280

■

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model on page 294

Quick Reference
Commands
VIEW
Saves and restores named model space views, layout views, and preset views.
VSCURRENT
Sets the visual style in the current viewport.

Viewport Controls | 35

System Variables
VPCONTROL
Controls whether the menus for viewport tools, views, and visual styles that
are located in the upper-left corner of every viewport are displayed.

The ViewCube Tool
The ViewCube is a handy tool to control the orientation of 3D views.
This tool is available in most Autodesk products, and provides a common
experience when you switch between products.

Alternatively, you can use the 3DORBIT command to drag 3D views, and
right-click for additional 3D viewing options.
See also:
■

Use 3D Navigation Tools on page 325

Quick Reference
Commands
NAVVCUBE
Indicates the current viewing direction. Dragging or clicking the ViewCube
tool rotates the scene.

The UCS Icon
The drawing area displays an icon representing the XY axis of a rectangular
coordinate system called the User Coordinate System, or UCS.

36 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window

You can select, move, and rotate the UCS icon to change the current UCS.
The UCS is useful in 2D, and essential in 3D. For more information about the
UCS, see Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) on page 591.
You can control whether the UCS icon is visible, and change its appearance,
with the UCSICON command, Properties option.
See also:
■

Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) on page 591

■

Control the User Coordinate System (UCS) on page 594

■

Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon on page 603

Quick Reference
Commands
PLAN
Displays an orthographic view of the XY plane of a specified user coordinate
system.
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
UCSICON
Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS
icon.

The UCS Icon | 37

Other Tool Locations

Use common tools in the classic menu bar, toolbars, tool palettes, status bars, shortcut menus,
and Design Center to find more commands, settings, and modes.

Access the Classic Menu Bar
Display pull-down menus from the classic menu bar using one of several
methods. You can also specify alternate menus.
The classic menu bar can be displayed at the top of the drawing area. The classic
menu bar is displayed by default in the AutoCAD Classic workspace.
NOTE The classic menu bar is turned off by default in both the 2D Drafting and
Annotation and 3D Modeling workspaces.

You can specify menus to display in the menu browser for all workspaces by
customizing a CUIx file and loading it into the program.

See also:
■

Create Task-Based Workspaces on page 189

■

“Pull-down and Shortcut Menus” in the Customization Guide

To display the classic menu bar
■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click the Customization drop-down menu
➤ Show Menu Bar.

Quick Reference
System Variables
MENUBAR
Controls the display of the menu bar.

Toolbars
Use buttons on toolbars to start commands, display flyout toolbars, and display
tooltips. You can display or hide, dock, and resize toolbars.
Toolbars contain buttons that start commands. When you move your mouse
or pointing device over a toolbar button, the tooltip displays the name of the
button. Buttons with a small black triangle in the lower-right corner are flyout
toolbars that contain related commands. With the cursor over the icon, hold
down the left button on your mouse until the flyout toolbar displays.
The Quick Access toolbar at the top of the application window is displayed
®
by default. This toolbar is like those found in Microsoft Office programs. It
®
contains frequently used AutoCAD commands such as PLOT, UNDO, and
REDO, as well as Microsoft Office standard commands such as New, Open,
and Save. For more information about the Quick Access toolbar, see Quick
Access Toolbar on page 22.
NOTE You can turn a toolbar into a ribbon panel using the Customize User
Interface dialog box.

Display or Hide, Dock, and Resize Toolbars
You can display or hide toolbars, and you can save your selections as a
workspace. You can also create your own toolbars.

40 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

NOTE You can choose from a list of toolbars from the View tab, Windows panel
on the ribbon.
A toolbar displays as floating or docked. A floating toolbar displays anywhere
in the drawing area, and you can drag a floating toolbar to a new location,
resize it, or dock it. A docked toolbar is attached to any edge of the drawing
area. A toolbar docked at the top edge of the drawing area is located below
the ribbon. You can move a docked toolbar by dragging it to a new docking
location.
See also:
■

Create Task-Based Workspaces on page 189

■

“Toolbars” in the Customization Guide

■

Ribbon in the Customization Guide

To display a toolbar
1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Toolbars.
2 Select a toolbar from the list.
TIP You can also right-click any toolbar and select a toolbar from the shortcut
menu.

Quick Reference
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.

System Variables
TOOLTIPS
Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user
interface elements.

Toolbars | 41

Status Bars
The application and drawing status bars provide useful information and
buttons for turning drawing tools on and off.

Application Status Bar
The application status bar displays the coordinate values of your cursor,
drawing tools, and tools for Quick View and annotation scaling.
You can view the drawing tool buttons as icons or text. You also can easily
change the settings of snap, polar, osnap, and otrack from the shortcut menus
of these drawing tools.

You can preview and switch between open drawings and layouts in a drawing.
You can also display tools for scaling annotations.
With the Workspace button, you can switch workspaces and display the name
of the current workspace. The lock button locks the current positions of the
toolbars and windows. To expand the drawing display area, click the Clean
Screen button.

42 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

To control the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray
1 Right-click in an unused area of the application status bar.
2 In the Status Bar drop-down, click Tray Settings.
3 In the Tray Settings dialog box, select or clear the following display
options:
■

Display Icons from Services. Displays the tray at the right end of the
status bar and displays icons from services. When this option is cleared,
the tray is not displayed.

■

Display Notifications from Services. Displays notifications from services
such as Communications Center. When the Display Icons from
Services option is cleared, this option is unavailable.

4 If Display Notifications from Services is selected, set a time for a
notification to be displayed, or select Display Until Closed.
5 Click OK.

To control the display of buttons on the status bar
1 Right-click in an unused area of the application status bar.
2 In the Status Bar drop-down, select any button name to change the
display.

To control the display of cursor coordinates on the status bar
1 Right-click in an unused area of the application status bar.
2 In the Status Bar drop-down, select or clear Cursor Coordinate Values.

Quick Reference
TRAYSETTINGS
Controls the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray.

System Variables
STATUSBAR
Controls the display of the application and drawing status bars.

Application Status Bar | 43

WORKSPACELABEL
Controls whether to display the name of the current workspace in the status
bar.

Drawing Status Bar
The drawing status bar displays several tools for scaling annotations.
Different tools display for model space and paper space.
When the drawing status bar is turned on, it displays at the bottom of the
drawing area. When the drawing status bar is turned off, the tools found on
the drawing status bar are moved to the application status bar.
When the drawing status bar is turned on, you can use the Drawing Status
Bar menu to select which tool to display on the status bar.

To turn the drawing status bar on or off
1 Right-click in an unused area of the application status bar.
2 In the Status Bar drop-down, click Drawing Status Bar.

To control the display of buttons on the drawing status bar
■

Click the arrow to the right of the drawing status bar and select or clear
any option name.

Quick Reference
System Variables
STATUSBAR
Controls the display of the application and drawing status bars.

Keytips
Use the keyboard to access the Application menu, Quick Access toolbar, and
ribbon.

44 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Press the Alt key to display shortcut keys for common tools in the application
window.
When you select a keytip, more keytips are displayed for that tool.

The Command Line Window
Enter Commands on the Command Line
You can enter a command by using the keyboard. Some commands also have
abbreviated names called command aliases.
Commands, system variables, options, messages, and prompts are displayed
in a dockable and resizable window called the command window. The bottom
line of the command window is called the command line. The command line
displays the operation in progress and provides an inside view of exactly what
the program is doing.

The Command Line Window | 45

■

To enter a command by using the keyboard, type the full command name
on the command line, and then press Enter or Spacebar.

■

To repeat the previous command, press Enter or Spacebar without entering
a command.

NOTE When Dynamic Input is turned on and is set to display dynamic prompts,
you can enter commands in a tooltip near the cursor.

Display Valid Commands and System Variables
By default, AutoCAD automatically completes the name of a command or
system variable as you type it. Additionally, a list of valid choices is displayed
from which you can choose. Use the AUTOCOMPLETE command to control
which automatic features that you want to use.
If the automatic completion feature turned off, you can type a letter on the
command line and press TAB to cycle through all the commands and system
variables that begin with that letter. Press Enter or Spacebar to start the
command or system variable.

46 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Enter Alternate Names of Commands
Some commands also have alternate names. For example, instead of entering
line to start the LINE command, you can enter l. Alternate command names
are called command aliases and are defined in the acad.pgp file.
To define your own command aliases, see Create Command Aliases in the
Customization Guide.

Specify Command Options
When you enter commands on the command line, you see either a set of
options or a dialog box. For example, when you enter circle at the Command
prompt, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan, tan, radius)]:
You can specify the center point either by entering X,Y coordinate values, or
by using the pointing device to click a location in the drawing area.
To choose a different option, enter the letters capitalized in one of the options
in the brackets. You can enter uppercase or lowercase letters. For example, to
choose the three-point option (3P), enter 3p.

Execute Commands
To execute commands, press Spacebar or Enter, or right-click your pointing
device after entering command names or responses to prompts. The
instructions in Help assume this step and do not specifically instruct you to
press Enter after each entry.

Repeat and Cancel Commands
If you want to repeat a command that you have just used, press Enter or
Spacebar, or right-click your pointing device at the Command prompt.
You also can repeat a command by entering multiple, a space, and the
command name, as shown in the following example:
Command: multiple circle
To cancel a command in progress, press ESC.

Interrupt a Command with Another Command or System Variable
Many commands can be used transparently: that is, they can be entered on the
command line while you use another command. In the Command Reference,
transparent commands are designated by an apostrophe in front of the
command name.

Enter Commands on the Command Line | 47

To use a command transparently, enter an apostrophe (') before entering the
command at any prompt. On the command line, double angle brackets (>>)
precede prompts that are displayed for transparent commands. After you
complete the transparent command, the original command resumes. In the
following example, you turn on the dot grid and set it to one-unit intervals
while you draw a line, and then you continue drawing the line.
Command: line
Specify first point: 'grid
>>Specify grid spacing (X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect] <0.000>: 1
Resuming LINE command
Specify first point:
Commands that do not select objects, create new objects, or end the drawing
session usually can be used transparently. Changes made in dialog boxes that
you have opened transparently cannot take effect until the interrupted
command has been completed. Similarly, if you reset a system variable
transparently, the new value cannot take effect until you start the next
command.
See also:
■

“Keyboard Shortcuts” in the Customization Guide

To copy a command you have recently used
1 Right-click within the command line.
2 Click Recent Commands.
3 Click the command that you want to use.

To change the automatic completion options for the command line
1 Right-click anywhere within the command window.
2 On the menu, click AutoComplete.
3 Click an option.

Quick Reference
AUTOCOMPLETE
Controls what types of automated keyboard features are available at the
Command prompt.

48 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

MULTIPLE
Repeats the next command until canceled.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
PASTECLIP
Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing.

System Variables
AUTOCOMPLETEDELAY
Controls the amount of time that elapses before automated keyboard features
display at the Command prompt.
AUTOCOMPLETEMODE
Controls what types of automated keyboard features are available at the
Command prompt.
CMDNAMES
Displays the names of the active and transparent commands.
TOOLTIPSIZE
Sets the display size for drafting tooltips, and for automatic completion text
at the Command prompt.

Enter System Variables on the Command Line
System variables are settings that control how certain commands work.
They can turn on or turn off modes such as Snap, Grid, or Ortho. They can
set default scales for hatch patterns. They can store information about the
current drawing and about program configuration. Sometimes you use a system
variable in order to change a setting. At other times you use a system variable
to display the current status.
For example, the GRIDMODE system variable turns the dot grid display on
and off when you change the value. In this case, the GRIDMODE system
variable is functionally equivalent to the GRID command. DATE is a read-only
system variable that stores the current date. You can display this value, but
you cannot change it.

Enter System Variables on the Command Line | 49

Bitcode Variables
Some system variables are controlled using bitcodes. With these system
variables, you add values to specify a unique combination of behaviors. For
example, the LOCKUI system variable provides the following bitcode values:
0

Toolbars and windows not locked

Docked toolbars locked

Docked or anchored windows locked

Floating toolbars locked

Floating windows locked

Thus, if LOCKUI is set to 1 + 4 = 5, only docked and floating toolbars are
locked; docked, anchored, and floating windows are not locked.
NOTE You can examine or change a system variable's setting transparently, that
is, while using another command; however, new values may not take effect until
the interrupted command ends.

To change the setting of a system variable
1 At the Command prompt, enter the system variable name. For example,
enter gridmode to change the grid setting.
2 To change the status of GRIDMODE, enter 1 for on or 0 for off. To retain
the current value of the system variable, press Enter.

To see a complete list of system variables
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Set Variable..
2 At the Variable Name prompt, enter ?.
3 At the Enter Variable(s) to List prompt, press Enter.

Quick Reference
SETVAR
Lists or changes the values of system variables.

50 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window
You can edit text in the command window to correct or repeat commands.
Use the standard keys:
■

Up, Down, Left Arrow, and Right Arrow

■

Insert, Delete

■

Page Up, Page Down

■

Home, End

■

Backspace

You can repeat any command used in the current session by cycling through
the commands in the command window with Up ArrowCtrl and Down Arrow
and pressing Enter. By default, pressing Ctrl+C copies highlighted text to the
Clipboard. Pressing Ctrl+V pastes text from the Clipboard to the text window
or the command window.
If you right-click in the command window or text window, a shortcut menu
is displayed from which you can access the six most recently used commands,
copy selected text or the entire command history, paste text, and access the
Options dialog box.
For most commands, a command line with two or three lines of previous
prompts, called the command history, is sufficient for viewing and editing.
To see more than one line of command history, you can scroll through the
history or resize the command window by dragging its border. For commands
with text output, such as LIST, you might need a larger command window,
or you can press F2 to use the text window.

Use the Text Window
The text window is a window similar to the command window in which you
can enter commands and view prompts and messages. The text window
displays a complete command history for the current work session. Use the
text window to view lengthy output of commands such as LIST, which displays
detailed information about objects you select. To move forward and backward
in the command history, you can click the scroll arrows along the right edge
of the window.
Press SHIFT with a key to highlight text. For example, press SHIFT+HOME in
the text window to highlight all text from the cursor location to the beginning
of the line.

Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window | 51

To copy all the text in the text window to the Clipboard, use the COPYHIST
command.
To save commands to a log file, use the LOGFILEON command.
See also:
■

Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window on page 55

■

Use Dynamic Input on page 619

To close the text window
■

At the Command prompt, enter graphscr.

NOTE You can also close the text window by pressing F2, or using the standard
Windows controls.

To copy text from the text window to the command line
1 If the text window is not displayed, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤

Text Window.
2 Select the text you want to copy.
3 Right-click in the command window or text window. Click Paste to
Command Line.
The text is copied to the Clipboard and then pasted on the command
line. After you press Enter, the commands are executed in sequence, like
a script. You can also use Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V to copy and paste text.

To display the text window

■

Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Text Window.

The text window is displayed in front of the drawing area.

52 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Quick Reference
COPYCLIP
Copies selected objects to the Clipboard.
COPYHIST
Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard.
GRAPHSCR
Switches from the text window to the drawing area.
LOGFILEOFF
Closes the command history log file opened by LOGFILEON.
LOGFILEON
Writes the contents of the command history to a file.
PASTECLIP
Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing.
TEXTSCR
Opens the text window.

System Variables
LOGFILEMODE
Specifies whether the contents of the command history are written to a log
file.
LOGFILENAME
Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current
drawing.
LOGFILEPATH
Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a
session.

Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line
You can display prompts on the command line instead of using a dialog box,
or switch back again. This option is useful primarily when using scripts.

Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line | 53

Some functions are available both on the command line and in a dialog box.
In many cases, you can enter a hyphen before the command to suppress the
dialog box and display prompts on the command line instead. For example,
entering layer on the command line displays the Layer Properties Manager.
Entering -layer on the command line displays the equivalent command line
options. Suppressing the dialog box is useful for compatibility with earlier
versions of AutoCAD® and for using script files. There may be slight differences
between the options in the dialog box and those available on the command
line.
These system variables also affect the display of dialog boxes:
■

ATTDIA controls whether INSERT uses a dialog box for attribute value
entry.

■

CMDNAMES displays the name (in English) of the currently active
command and transparent command.

■

EXPERT controls whether certain warning dialog boxes are displayed.

■

FILEDIA controls the display of dialog boxes used with commands that
read and write files. For example, if FILEDIA is set to 1, SAVEAS displays
the Save Drawing As dialog box. If FILEDIA is set to 0, SAVEAS displays
prompts on the command line. The procedures in this documentation
assume that FILEDIA is set to 1. Even when FILEDIA is set to 0, you can
display a file dialog box by entering a tilde (~) at the first prompt.

FILEDIA and EXPERT are useful when you use scripts to run commands.

To use the command line version of a command
■

For most commands, enter minus (-) in front of the command.

■

For dialog boxes that open and save files, set the FILEDIA system variable
to 0.

Quick Reference
GRAPHSCR
Switches from the text window to the drawing area.

54 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

System Variables
ATTDIA
Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value
entry.
CMDNAMES
Displays the names of the active and transparent commands.
EXPERT
Controls whether certain prompts are issued.
FILEDIA
Suppresses display of file navigation dialog boxes.

Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window
Change the position and display of the command window to suit the way
you work.

Dock the Command Window
By default, the command window is docked. The docked command window
is the same width as the AutoCAD window. If text that is entered becomes
longer than the width of the command line, the window pops up in front of
the command line to show the full text of the line.
Undock, or float, the command window by dragging it away from the docking
region. The docking region is an edge of the AutoCAD application window
that allows you to dock a toolbar, palette, or the command window. You can
move the floating command window anywhere on the screen and resize its
width and height with the pointing device.
Dock a floating command window again by dragging it to the docking region
of the AutoCAD window.

Anchoring the Command Window
The command window can be anchored on the left or right side of the
AutoCAD window. By anchoring the command window it remains on screen,
but in a minimized state, which allows you to bring it back up when needed.
This also helps to increase the amount of visible drawing area. The command
window must be floating before an anchoring side can be selected. To anchor

Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window | 55

the command window make sure it is floating, and then right-click over its
title bar and select either Anchor Left or Anchor Right.

Resize the Command Window
You can resize the command window vertically by dragging the splitter bar,
which is located on the top edge of the window when it is docked on the
bottom and at the bottom edge of the window when it is docked at the top.

Hide the Command Window
Hide and redisplay the command line by doing one of the following:
■

Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Command Line.

■

Click Tools menu ➤ Command Line.

■

Press Ctrl+9.

When you hide the command line, you can still enter commands. However,
some commands and system variables return values at the command line, so
you may want to redisplay the command line in those instances.
NOTE For information about display options (such as auto-hide or transparency)
for dockable windows, see “Control the Display of Dockable Windows” in the
topic Set Interface Options on page 149.

To float the command window
■

Click the move handle (the double bars) on the left edge of the docked
command window and drag the command window away from the docking
region until it has a thick outline. Then drop it in the drawing area of the
AutoCAD window.

To make the floating command window transparent
1 In the floating Command window, click the Properties button and select
Transparency.
2 In the Transparency dialog box, move the slider to the left to make the
command window less transparent and to the right to make it more
transparent.
The range is from opaque to transparent. When the Turn Off Transparency
for All Palettes option is selected, the command window cannot be made
transparent.

56 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

To dock the command window
■

Click the title bar and drag the command window until it is over the top
or bottom docking region of the AutoCAD window. When the command
window becomes the same width as the AutoCAD window, release the
mouse button to dock it.
The docking region is an edge of the AutoCAD application window that
allows you to dock a toolbar, palette, or the command window.

■

Right-click the title bar of the Command window, and select Allow
Docking.
NOTE You can control whether the command window docks by right-clicking
the title bar of the command window and then clicking Allow docking.

To resize the command window when it is docked
1 Position the cursor over the horizontal splitter bar so that the cursor
appears as a double line and arrows.
2 Drag the splitter bar vertically until the command window is the size you
want it to be.

To hide the command window

■

Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Command Line.

NOTE Some commands and system variables return values at the command line,
so you may want to display the command line in those instances. To display the
command line when it's hidden, press Ctrl+9. Alternate method:

Quick Reference
COMMANDLINE
Displays the Command Line window.
COMMANDLINEHIDE
Hides the Command Line window.

Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window | 57

System Variables
PALETTEOPAQUE
Controls whether palettes can be made transparent.

Shortcut Menus
Display a shortcut menu for quick access to commands that are relevant to
your current activity.
You can display different shortcut menus when you right-click different areas
of the screen. Shortcut menus typically include options to
■

Repeat the last command entered

■

Cancel the current command

■

Display a list of recent user input

■

Cut, copy, and paste from the Clipboard

■

Select a different command option

■

Display a dialog box, such as Options or Customize

■

Undo the last command entered

You can customize right-click behavior to be time-sensitive, so that a quick
right-click acts the same as pressing Enter, and a longer right-click displays a
shortcut menu.
Shortcut menus can be customized using a customization (CUIx) file. The
main CUIx file is called acad.cuix by default.
See also:
■

“Create Submenus” in the Customization Guide

To display a shortcut menu
1 Move the cursor over an area, feature, or icon.
2 Right-click your mouse, or press the equivalent button on your pointing
device.
A shortcut menu relevant to the cursor location is displayed. If one or
more objects are selected when you right-click in the drawing area, an

58 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

editing-oriented shortcut menu is displayed. You can also display a
shortcut menu during PAN or ZOOM.

To turn off shortcut menus in the drawing area
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, under Windows Standard
Behavior, clear Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area.
3 To control Default, Edit, and Command shortcut menus individually,
select Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area. Right-Click Customization.
4 In the Right-Click Customization dialog box, under Default Mode or Edit
Mode, select one of the following options to control what happens when
you right-click in the drawing area and no command is in progress:
■

Repeat Last Command. Repeats the last command. Selecting this
option turns off the Default and Edit shortcut menus. Right-clicking
is the same as pressing Enter.

■

Shortcut Menu. Displays the Default or Edit shortcut menu.

5 Under Command Mode, select one of the following options to determine
what happens when you right-click in the drawing area while a command
is in progress:
■

Enter. Turns off the Command shortcut menu. Right-clicking is the
same as pressing Enter.

■

Shortcut Menu: Always Enabled. Displays the Command shortcut
menu.

■

Shortcut Menu: Enabled When Command Options Are Present.
Displays the Command shortcut menu only when options are
currently available in the Command prompt. In a Command prompt,
options are enclosed in square brackets. If no options are available,
right-clicking is the same as pressing Enter.

In addition to turning the Default, Edit, and Command shortcut menus
on and off, you can customize the options that are displayed on them.
For example, you can add options to the Edit shortcut menu that are
displayed only when circles are selected.

To turn on time-sensitive right-click behavior
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.

Shortcut Menus | 59

2 In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, under Windows Standard
Behavior, click Right-Click Customization.
3 In the Right-Click Customization dialog box, select Turn on Time-Sensitive
Right-Click.
You can specify the duration of the longer click. The default is 250
milliseconds
4 Click Apply & Close.
5 In the Options dialog box, click OK.

To control the display of recent input
1 At the Command prompt, enter inputhistorymode.
2 Enter a sum of one or more of the following values:
■

0. No history of recent input is displayed.

■

1. History of recent input is displayed at the Command prompt with
access through Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys.

■

2. History of recent input for the current command is displayed in
the shortcut menu.

■

4. History of recent input for all commands in the current session is
displayed in the shortcut menu.

■

8. Markers for recent input of point locations are displayed in the
drawing.

The default value is 15.
3 (Optional) At the Command prompt, enter cmdinputhistorymax.
4 Enter a value to control how many unique values entered at a prompt
are remembered and available to be displayed as recent input.

Quick Reference
COPYCLIP
Copies selected objects to the Clipboard.
COPYHIST
Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard.

60 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
CUTCLIP
Copies selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
PAN
Moves the view planar to the screen.
PASTECLIP
Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
TRAYSETTINGS
Controls the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray.
U
Reverses the most recent operation.
ZOOM
Increases or decreases the magnification of the view in the current viewport.

System Variables
CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX
Sets the maximum number of previous input values that are stored for a
prompt in a command.
INPUTHISTORYMODE
Controls the content and location of the user input history.
PICKFIRST
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command.

Shortcut Menus | 61

SHORTCUTMENU
Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus are
available in the drawing area.
TRAYICONS
Controls whether a tray is displayed on the status bar.
TRAYNOTIFY
Controls whether service notifications are displayed in the status bar tray.
TRAYTIMEOUT
Controls the length of time (in seconds) that service notifications are
displayed.

Tool Palettes
Tool palettes are tabbed areas within the Tool Palettes window that provide
an efficient method for organizing, sharing, and placing blocks, hatches, and
other tools. Tool palettes can also contain custom tools provided by third-party
developers.

Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images
You can create a tool by dragging objects from your drawing onto a tool
palette. You can then use the new tool to create objects with the same
properties as the object you dragged onto the tool palette.
Tool palettes are tabbed areas within the Tool Palettes window. The items you
add to a tool palette are called tools. You can create a tool by dragging any of
the following, one at a time, onto your tool palette:
■

Geometric objects such as lines, circles, and polylines

■

Dimensions

■

Blocks

■

Hatches

■

Solid fills

■

Gradient fills

■

Raster images

62 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

■

External references (xrefs)

■

Tables

■

Lights

■

Cameras

■

Visual styles from the Visual Styles Manager

■

Materials from the Materials Browser palette

NOTE When you drag an object onto a tool palette, you can switch to a different
tab by hovering over the tab for a few seconds.
You can then use the new tool to create objects in your drawing with the same
properties as the object you dragged to the tool palette. For example, if you
drag a red circle with a lineweight of .05 mm from your drawing to your tool
palette, the new tool creates a red circle with a lineweight of .05 mm. If you
drag a block or xref to a tool palette, the new tool inserts the block or xref
with the same properties into your drawing.
When you drag a geometric object or a dimension onto a tool palette, the
new tool is automatically created with an appropriate flyout. Dimension tool
flyouts, for example, provide an assortment of dimension styles. Click the
arrow on the right side of the tool icon on the tool palette to display the flyout.
When you use a tool on a flyout, the object in the drawing has the same
properties as the original tool on the tool palette.

Insert Blocks and Attach References
You can choose to be prompted for a rotation angle (starting from 0) when
you click and place a block or xref. This option ignores the angle specified
under Rotation in the Tool Properties dialog box. The rotation angle prompt
does not display if you drag the block or xref, or if you enter Rotate at the
initial insertion Command prompt.
Blocks that are placed by dragging from a tool palette must often be rotated
or scaled after placement. You can use object snaps when dragging blocks
from a tool palette; however, grid snap is suppressed during dragging. You
can set an auxiliary scale for a block or hatch tool to override the regular scale
setting when you use the tool. (An auxiliary scale multiplies your current scale
setting by the plot or dimension scale.)
Blocks inserted from a tool palette are automatically scaled according to the
ratio of units in both the block and the current drawing. For example, if the

Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images | 63

current drawing uses meters as units and a block uses centimeters, the unit
ratio is 1 m/100 cm. When you drag the block into the drawing, it is inserted
at 1/100 scale.
NOTE In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, the Source Content Units
and Target Drawing Units settings are used when Drag-and-Drop Scale is set to
Unitless, either in the source block or target drawing.

Update Block Definitions on Tool Palettes
A block definition in your current drawing does not update automatically
when you modify the block in the source drawing. To update a block definition
in the current drawing, right-click the block tool on the tool palette and click
Redefine on the shortcut menu.
If the Redefine option is unavailable, then the block definition source is a
drawing file rather than a block within a drawing file. To update a block
definition that was created by inserting a drawing file, use DesignCenter. For
more information, see Add Content with DesignCenter on page 91.
NOTE If you move the source drawing file for a block tool to a different folder,
then modify the tool that references it by right-clicking the tool and, in the Tool
Properties dialog box, specifying the new source file folder.
See also:
■

Control Tool Properties on page 72

■

Customize Tool Palettes on page 76

■

Create Task-Based Workspaces on page 189

■

Add Content with DesignCenter on page 91

■

Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows on page 175

To open a block on a tool palette in the Block Editor
1 If the Tool Palettes window is not already displayed, click View tab ➤

Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes.
2 On the block icon’s shortcut menu, click Block Editor.

64 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

NOTE A block on a tool palette may reside in another drawing. The drawing that
contains the block definition is opened in the Block Editor.

To add or remove a tool flyout
1 On a tool palette, right-click the geometric object or dimension tool
whose flyout you want to add or remove. Click Properties.
2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, under Command, click in the Use
Flyout box.
3 In the drop-down list, select Yes if you want to add a flyout, or select No
if you want to remove one.
4 Click OK.
NOTE If you remove the flyout from a tool but then add the flyout back, the
image, name, and description (the tooltip) that displays on the tool palette
for each tool on the flyout will not be accurate. To correct this, return the
image, name, and description of the flyout tool to the default settings. See
To change the image, name, and description of a flyout tool to the default
settings.

To customize a tool flyout
1 On a tool palette, right-click the geometric object or dimension tool
whose flyout you want to customize. Click Properties.
2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, under Command, click in the Flyout
Options box. Click the [ ] button.
3 In the Flyout Options dialog box, select the tools that you want to hide
or show on the flyout. Click OK. (You must select at least one tool.)
4 In the Tool Properties dialog box, click OK.

To be prompted for a rotation angle when placing a block or xref from a tool
palette
1 In a tool palette, right-click a block or xref tool. Click Properties.
2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, under Insert, click Prompt for Rotation.
3 In the drop-down list, select Yes.
4 Click OK.

Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images | 65

NOTE This option ignores the angle specified in the Rotation box of he Tool
Properties dialog box. The rotation angle prompt does not display if you drag
the block or xref, or if you enter rotate at the initial insertion Command
prompt.

Quick Reference
CUSTOMIZE
Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups.
TOOLPALETTES
Opens the Tool Palettes window.
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE
Closes the Tool Palettes window.
UNITS
Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision.

System Variables
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE
Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
INSUNITSDEFTARGET
Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
PALETTEOPAQUE
Controls whether palettes can be made transparent.
TPSTATE
Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed.

Create and Use Command Tools
You can create a tool on a tool palette that executes a single command or a
string of commands.

66 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

You can add frequently used commands to a tool palette. When the Customize
dialog box is open, you can drag tools from a toolbar or the Customize User
Interface (CUI) Editor to a tool palette.
NOTE You cannot drag commands from the Quick Access toolbar to a tool palette.
Once you add a command to a tool palette, you can click the tool to execute
the command. For example, clicking a Save tool on a tool palette saves a
drawing just as the Save button on the Quick Access toolbar does.
You can also create a tool that executes a string of commands or customized
®
commands, such as an AutoLISP routine, a VBA macro or application, or a
script.
NOTE Even though the tools on palettes can be clicked when the Customize User
Interface (CUI) Editor is displayed, the end results might be unpredictable. It is
best to not use any of the tools on a palette while the Customize User Interface
(CUI) Editor is displayed.

To create a command tool from a toolbar button
NOTE You cannot drag commands from the Quick Access toolbar.
1 Make sure the toolbar that contains the command you want to add to
the tool palette is displayed.
If the required toolbar is not displayed, on the ribbon, click View tab ➤
Windows panel ➤ Toolbars ➤ and then a loaded customization group
and the toolbar to display. You can also click Tools ➤ Toolbars from the
menu bar and select a toolbar from the list.

2 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes.
NOTE Even though you will not make any changes in the Customize dialog
box in this procedure, it must be displayed when you add command tools
to a tool palette.
3 In the program, drag a command (button) from a toolbar to the tool
palette and, without releasing the button on the pointing device, move
the cursor to the place on the tool palette where you want the tool.
A horizontal line appears to indicate where the tool will be located.
4 Release the button on the pointing device.

Create and Use Command Tools | 67

5 In the Customize dialog box, click Close.

To create a command tool from the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
If the CUI Editor is covering the Tool Palettes window, then move the
CUI Editor to the side.
2 In the Command List pane, drag a command to the tool palette and,
without releasing the button on the pointing device, move the cursor to
the place on the tool palette where you want the tool.
A horizontal line appears to indicate where the tool will be located.
3 Release the button on the pointing device.
4 In the CUI Editor, click Close.

To create a command tool that executes a custom command sequence
(Advanced)

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes.
2 In the program, drag a command from a toolbar to the tool palette and,
without releasing the button on the pointing device, move the cursor to
the place on the tool palette where you want the tool.
3 Release the button on the pointing device.
4 On the tool palette, right-click the tool. Click Properties.
5 In the Tool Properties dialog box, change the name and description to
appropriate strings based on the macro, AutoLISP routine, or script.
6 Under Command, in the Command String box, enter a string of
commands or customized commands, such as an AutoLISP routine,
ObjectARX command, a VBA macro, or a script.
7 Click OK.

To use a command tool
1 On a tool palette, click a command tool or drag and drop the tool into
the drawing that you want to use.

68 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

2 Follow any Command prompts that are shown.

Quick Reference
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
CUSTOMIZE
Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups.
TOOLPALETTES
Opens the Tool Palettes window.
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE
Closes the Tool Palettes window.

Change Tool Palette Settings
The options and settings for tool palettes are accessible from shortcut menus
that are displayed when you right-click in different areas of the Tool Palettes
window.
You can dock the Tool Palettes window on the right or left edge of the
application window. Hold the Ctrl key if you want to prevent docking as you
move the Tool Palettes window.
Tool palette settings are saved with your profile.
The Tool Palettes window shortcut menu includes
■

Allow Docking. Toggles the ability to dock or anchor the palette window.
If this option is selected, the palette window can be docked when you drag
it over a docking area at the side of the application window. A docked
window adheres to the side of the application window and causes the
drawing area to be resized. Selecting this option also makes Anchor Right
and Anchor Left available.

■

Anchor Left or Anchor Right. Attaches the palette window to an anchor
tab to the left or right side of the application window. The palette window
rolls open and closed as the cursor moves across it. When an anchored
palette window is open, its content overlaps the drawing area. An anchored
palette window cannot be set to stay open.

Change Tool Palette Settings | 69

■

Auto-hide. Controls the display of the palette window when it is floating.
When this option is selected, only the title bar of the palette window is
displayed when the cursor moves outside the palette window. When this
option is cleared, the palette window stays open continuously. You can
display the title bar of palette window as either icons or text from the
shortcut menu of the title bar.

■

Transparency. Sets the transparency of the palette window so it does not
obscure objects under it.

■

Views. Changes the display style and size of the icons on a tool palette.

See also:
■

Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows on page 175

To change the rollover behavior of the Tool Palettes window
■

In the Tool Palettes window, at the top of the title bar, click the Auto-Hide
button.

NOTE Rollover behavior is available only when the Tool Palettes window is
undocked.

To change the transparency of the Tool Palettes window
1 In the Tool Palettes window, at the top of the title bar, click the Properties
button. Click Transparency.
2 In the Transparency dialog box, under General, adjust the level of
transparency for the Tool Palettes window when it does not have focus.

70 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

3 Under Rollover, adjust the level of transparency for the Tool Palettes
window when it has focus.
4 Click OK.
NOTE Transparency is available when the Tool Palettes window is undocked
or anchored.

To change the icon display style in the Tool Palettes window
1 Right-click a blank area inside the Tool Palettes window. Click View
Options.
2 In the View Options dialog box, click the icon display option that you
want to set. You can also change the size of the icons.
3 Click the list box under Apply To, and then select either Current Palette
or All Palettes.
4 Click OK.

Quick Reference
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
TOOLPALETTES
Opens the Tool Palettes window.
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE
Closes the Tool Palettes window.

System Variables
PALETTEOPAQUE
Controls whether palettes can be made transparent.
TPSTATE
Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed.

Change Tool Palette Settings | 71

Control Tool Properties
You can change the properties of any tool on a tool palette.
Once a tool is on a tool palette, you can change its properties. For example,
you can change the insertion scale of a block or the angle of a hatch pattern.

To change tool properties, right-click on a tool, and click Properties to display
the Tool Properties dialog box. The Tool Properties dialog box has the following
categories of properties:
■

Command. Controls the display of a tool flyout and the tools command
string.

■

Camera and Clipping. Controls the view that a camera defines.

■

Attenuation, Rendered Shadow Details, and Geometry. Controls the
lighting characteristics for a light tool.

■

Face Settings, Lighting, and Environment Settings, and Edge Settings.
Controls the visual characteristics for a visual style tool.

■

Table. Controls the table style, numbers of rows and columns, and flow
direction.

■

Insert, Attach, or Pattern properties. Control object-specific properties
such as scale, rotation, and angle.

■

General properties. Override the current drawing property settings such
as layer, color, and linetype.

72 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

You can expand and collapse the property categories by clicking the arrow
buttons.

Specify a Different Icon for a Tool
You can replace the icon for a tool with an image that you specify. This is
useful when the automatically generated icon is too cluttered to be easily
recognizable.
To replace the image, right-click the tool in the tool palette and click Specify
Image.
To restore the default image for a tool, right-click the tool and click Remove
Specified Image.

Update the Icon for a Tool
The icon for a block, xref, or raster image in a tool palette is not automatically
updated if its definition changes. If you change the definition for a block,
xref, or raster image, you can update the icon by right-clicking the tool in the
palette and clicking Update Tool Image. You must save the drawing before
you can update the tool image.
™

Alternatively, you can delete the tool, and then replace it using DesignCenter .

Specify Overrides for Tool Properties
In some cases, you may want to assign specific property overrides to a tool.
For example, you may want a hatch to be placed automatically on a
pre-specified layer, regardless of the current layer setting. This feature can save
you time and reduce errors by setting properties automatically when creating
certain objects.
The Tool Properties dialog box provides areas for each possible property
override.
Layer property overrides affect color, linetype, lineweight, plot style, and
transparency. Layer property overrides are resolved as follows:
■

If a layer is missing from the drawing, that layer is created automatically.

■

If a layer to which you are adding content is currently turned off or frozen,
the layer is temporarily turned on or thawed.

To change the property of a tool on a tool palette
1 On a tool palette, right-click a tool. Click Properties.

Control Tool Properties | 73

2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, click any property in the list of
properties and specify the new value or setting.
■

Properties listed under the Insert, Attach, or Pattern category control
object-specific properties such as scale, rotation, and angle.

■

Properties listed under the General category override the current
drawing property settings such as layer, color, and linetype.

■

Auxiliary scale for a block or a hatch tool overrides the regular scale
setting when the tool is used. (An auxiliary scale multiplies your
current scale setting by the plot scale or the dimension scale.)

You can resize the Tool Properties dialog box by dragging an edge, or you
can expand and collapse the property categories by clicking the arrow
buttons.
3 Click OK.
NOTE If you specify an image, name, or description for a tool that has a
flyout, that image, name, and description are displayed on the tool palette
for each tool on the flyout. To return the flyout tool's image, name, and
description to their default settings, leave the corresponding boxes blank in
the Tool Properties dialog box.

To refresh the image of a block tool on a tool palette
1 On a tool palette, right-click a tool.
2 Click Update Tool Image.
NOTE You must save the drawing before you can update the tool image.

To change the image of a tool on a tool palette
1 On a tool palette, right-click a tool. Click Specify Image.
2 In the Select Image File dialog box, locate and select the image file you
want to use.
3 Click Open to assign the new image.
NOTE If you specify an image for a tool that has a flyout, that image is
displayed on the tool palette for each tool on the flyout.

74 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

To restore the image, name, and description of a flyout tool to the default
settings
1 On a tool palette, right-click a tool. Click Properties.
2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, right-click in the image area. Click
Remove Specified Image.
3 Click in the Name box and delete the text.
4 Click in the Description box and delete the text.
5 Click OK.
NOTE Leaving the Image, Name, and Description boxes blank in the Tool
Properties dialog box will return the flyout tool's image, name, and description
to their default settings.

Quick Reference
CUSTOMIZE
Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups.
TOOLPALETTES
Opens the Tool Palettes window.
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE
Closes the Tool Palettes window.
TPNAVIGATE
Displays a specified tool palette or palette group.

System Variables
PALETTEOPAQUE
Controls whether palettes can be made transparent.
TPSTATE
Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed.

Control Tool Properties | 75

Customize Tool Palettes
You can add tools to a tool palette with several methods.
You can create new tool palettes using the Properties button on the title bar
of the Tool Palettes window and add tools to a tool palette with the following
methods:
■

Drag any of the following onto your tool palette: geometric objects such
as lines, circles, and polylines; dimensions; hatches; gradient fills; blocks;
xrefs; raster images; tables; lights; cameras; visual styles from the Visual
Styles Manager; materials from the Material Browser.

■

Drag drawings, blocks, and hatches from DesignCenter to the tool palette.
Drawings that are added to a tool palette are inserted as blocks when
dragged into the drawing.

■

Use the Customize dialog box to drag toolbar buttons to a tool palette.

■

Use the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor to drag commands to a tool
palette from the Command List pane.

■

Use Cut, Copy, and Paste to move or copy tools from one tool palette to
another.

■

Manage tool palettes by creating new palettes from scratch, renaming,
deleting or moving palettes with the shortcut menu.
NOTE It is not recommended to create or rename tool palettes when the
Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor is displayed.

■

Create a tool palette tab with predetermined content by right-clicking a
folder, a drawing file, or a block in the DesignCenter tree view, and then
clicking Create Tool Palette on the shortcut menu.

76 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

■

You can associate a customizable tool palette group with each panel on
the ribbon. Right-click the ribbon panel to display a list of available tool
palette groups.

NOTE If the source drawing file for a block, xref, or raster image tool is moved to
a different folder, you must modify the tool that references it by right-clicking the
tool and, in the Tool Properties dialog box, specifying the new source file folder.

Rearranging Tools and Tool Palettes
Once tools are placed on a tool palette, you can rearrange them by dragging
them around or by sorting them. You can also add text and separator lines to
tool palettes.
You can move a tool palette tab up and down the list of tabs by using the tool
palette shortcut menu or the Customize dialog box. Similarly, you can delete
tool palettes that you no longer need. Tool palettes that are deleted are lost
unless they are first saved by exporting them to a file. You can control the
path to your tool palettes on the Files tab in the Options dialog box. This path
can be to a shared network location.

Customize Tool Palettes | 77

Read-Only Tool Palettes
If a tool palette file is set with a read-only attribute, a lock icon is displayed
in a lower corner of the tool palette. This indicates that you cannot modify
the tool palette beyond changing its display settings and rearranging the icons.
To apply a read-only attribute to a tool palette, right-click the tool palette
(ATC) file in one of the following locations:
■

Windows XP: :\Documents and Settings\\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD
2012\\\Support\ToolPalette\Palettes

■

Windows Vista or Windows 7: :\users\\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD
2012\\\Support\ToolPalette\Palettes

On the shortcut menu, click Properties. On the General tab, select Read-only
and click OK.

To create a tool palette

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes.
2 In the Tool Palettes window, at the top of the title bar, click the Properties
button. Click New Palette.
3 In the in-place text box, enter a name for the new palette.

To associate a tool palette group with a ribbon panel

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes.
2 On the ribbon, right-click a ribbon tab and click Tool Palette Group.
3 Click an available tool palette group from the list.
4 Click Tools menu ➤ Workspaces ➤ Save Current As.
5 In the Save Workspace dialog box, enter a name for the new workspace
or select a name from the drop-down list. Click Save.

78 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

To display the tool palette group associated with a ribbon panel
■

Right-click a ribbon panel and click Show Related Tool Palette Group.

To add text to a tool palette
1 Right-click a blank area inside the Tool Palettes window. Click Add Text.
2 In the text box, add the text you want to display in the window.
3 If necessary, drag the text to the appropriate location in the window.

To add a separator line to a tool palette
1 Right-click a blank area inside the Tool Palettes window. Click Add
Separator.
2 If necessary, drag the separator to the appropriate location in the window.

Quick Reference
CUSTOMIZE
Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups.
TOOLPALETTES
Opens the Tool Palettes window.
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE
Closes the Tool Palettes window.

System Variables
PALETTEOPAQUE
Controls whether palettes can be made transparent.
TPSTATE
Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed.

Organize Tool Palettes
Organize tool palettes into groups and control which groups are displayed.

Organize Tool Palettes | 79

For example, if you have several tool palettes that contain hatch patterns, use
CUSTOMIZE to create a new palette group called Hatch Patterns. Then add
all of your tool palettes that contain hatch patterns to the Hatch Pattern group.
When you set the Hatch Pattern group current, only the tool palettes in that
group are displayed in the Tool Palettes window.

Location of Tool Palettes and Tool Palette Groups
The default path for tool palette files is set on the Files tab of the Options
dialog box, under Tool Palettes File Locations. Tool palettes can be stored in
multiple locations, allowing you to use both user-created and company specific
tool palettes.
Tool palette groups are saved in the current AutoCAD profile.
For information on sharing tool palettes and tool palette groups, see Save and
Share Tool Palettes and Tool Palette Groups on page 82.

To create a tool palette group

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes.
2 In the Customize dialog box, under Palette Groups, right-click in the
lower, blank area. Click New Group.
NOTE If there are no groups listed in the Palette Groups area, you can also
create a group by dragging a tool palette from the Palettes area into the
Palette Groups area.
3 Enter a name for the tool palette group.
4 Click Close.

To add a tool palette to a tool palette group

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes.
2 In the Customize dialog box, drag a tool palette from the Palettes area
into a group in the Palette Groups area.
3 Click Close.

80 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

To copy a tool palette from one group to another

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes.
2 In the Customize dialog box, under Palette Groups, select the tool palette
that you want to copy.
3 Press Ctrl while you drag the selected tool palette to another group.
A copy of the tool palette is displayed in the new location.
4 Click Close.

To display a tool palette group
1 Right-click the title bar of the Tool Palettes window.
2 Click the name of the tool palette group that you want to display.

To display all tool palettes
■

Right-click the title bar of the Tool Palettes window. Click All Palettes.

To delete a tool palette group

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes.
2 In the Customize dialog box, under Palette Groups, right-click a tool
palette group. Click Delete.
3 Click Close.

Quick Reference
CUSTOMIZE
Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups.
TOOLPALETTES
Opens the Tool Palettes window.
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE
Closes the Tool Palettes window.

Organize Tool Palettes | 81

TPNAVIGATE
Displays a specified tool palette or palette group.

Save and Share Tool Palettes and Tool Palette Groups
Export and import tool palette files (XTP) and tool palette group files (XPG)
to share with others.
NOTE For read-only tool palette files, a lock icon is displayed in a lower corner of
the tool palette. This indicates that you cannot modify the tool palette beyond
changing its display settings and rearranging the icons.

Export Tool Palettes and Tool Palette Groups
In some cases, when you export a customized tool palette, an image folder
with the same name as the exported tool palette is automatically created in
the same location as the XTP file. This image folder contains the icon images
used in the exported tool palette. The folder is created when you export a tool
palette that contains any of the following:
■

User-created content tools

■

Command tools that contain user-defined tool palette icons (images)

WARNING Avoid copying tool palette (ATC) files between releases. Doing so can
cause potential problems when migrating to a future release. For more information,
see Migrate Custom Settings in the Customization Guide.

Import Tool Palettes and Tool Palette Groups
If you are importing tool palettes and tool palette groups, import all tool
palettes first. Once all tool palettes are imported, you can them import the
exported tool palette groups.
When you import a customized tool palette, the image folder must be in the
same location as the imported XTP file in order for the icons to appear in the
tool palette.
Tool palettes can be used only in the AutoCAD release in which they were
created. For example, you cannot use a tool palette that was created in
AutoCAD 2012 with AutoCAD 2005. You can migrate tool palettes from
previous releases to the current release using Migrate Custom Settings.

82 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

WARNING If you share tool palettes with someone who is not using the same
AutoCAD-based product or release in which they were created, it is possible that
the tools might not work properly or be accessible.
See also:
■

Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles) on page 193

To export a tool palette or tool palette group

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes.
2 In the Customize dialog box, do one of the following:
■

Export a tool palette. Under Palettes, right-click a tool palette. Click
Export.

■

Export a tool palette group. Under Palette Groups, right-click a tool
palette group. Click Export or Export All to export all tool palette
groups.

3 In the Export dialog box, specify a file name and location. Click
Save.
4 Click Close.

To import a tool palette or tool palette group

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes.
2 In the Customize dialog box, do one of the following:
■

Import a tool palette. Under Palettes, right-click and click Import.

■

Import a tool palette group. Under Palette Groups, right-click any
tool palette group or an empty area, and click Import.

3 In the Import dialog box, locate the file you want to import. Click
Open.
4 Click Close.

Save and Share Tool Palettes and Tool Palette Groups | 83

Quick Reference
CUSTOMIZE
Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups.
TOOLPALETTES
Opens the Tool Palettes window.
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE
Closes the Tool Palettes window.

DesignCenter
You can drag content from any source drawing to your current drawing. You
can drag drawings, blocks, and hatches to a tool palette. Source drawings can
be on your computer, on a network location, or on a website. In addition, if
you have multiple drawings open, you can use DesignCenter to streamline
your drawing process by copying and pasting other content, such as layer
definitions, layouts, and text styles between drawings.

Overview of DesignCenter
With DesignCenter, you can
■

Browse for drawing content such as drawings or symbol libraries on your
computer, on a networked drive, and on a web page

■

View definition tables for named objects such as blocks and layers in any
drawing file and then insert, attach, or copy and paste the definitions into
the current drawing

■

Update (redefine) a block definition

■

Create shortcuts to drawings, folders, and Internet locations that you access
frequently

■

Add content such as xrefs, blocks, and hatches to a drawing

■

Open drawing files in a new window

■

Drag drawings, blocks, and hatches to a tool palette for convenient access

84 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Quick Reference
ADCENTER
Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.
ADCNAVIGATE
Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path.

System Variables
ADCSTATE
Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed.

Understand the DesignCenter Window
You can control the size, location, and appearance of DesignCenter.

The Organization of the DesignCenter Window
The DesignCenter window is divided into the tree view on the left side and
the content area on the right side. Use the tree view to browse sources of
content and to display content in the content area. Use the content area to
add items to a drawing or to a tool palette.
Undocked, the DesignCenter window is displayed as shown.
Below the content area, you can also display a preview or a description of a
selected drawing, block, hatch pattern, or xref. A toolbar at the top of the
window provides several options and operations.

Control the Size, Location, and Appearance of DesignCenter
You can control the size, location, and appearance of DesignCenter. Many of
these options can be set by right-clicking and selecting an option on the
shortcut menu.
■

Resize DesignCenter by dragging the bar between the content area and the
tree view or by dragging an edge of the window.

■

Dock DesignCenter by dragging it over the right or left docking region of
the application window until it snaps into the docked position. You can
also dock the DesignCenter window by double-clicking its title bar.

Understand the DesignCenter Window | 85

■

Undock DesignCenter by dragging the area above the toolbar away from
the docking region. Pressing Ctrl while dragging prevents docking.

■

Anchor DesignCenter by choosing Anchor Right or Anchor Left from the
shortcut menu. An anchored DesignCenter window rolls open and closed
as the cursor moves across it. When an anchored DesignCenter window
is open, its content overlaps the drawing area. It cannot be set to stay open.

■

When DesignCenter is floating, use Auto-hide to set it to roll open and
closed as the cursor moves across it.

The DesignCenter Toolbar
The DesignCenter toolbar controls navigation and display of information in
the tree view and the content area. For information about these buttons, see
the ADCENTER command. The same navigation and display options are
available on the shortcut menu. Right-click in the DesignCenter content area
to display the menu.
See also:
■

Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows on page 175

To change the DesignCenter rollover behavior

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 Right-click the DesignCenter title bar. Click Auto-hide.
When the DesignCenter rollover option is turned on, the DesignCenter
tree view and content area disappear when you move your cursor off the
DesignCenter window, leaving only the title bar. When you move your
cursor over the title bar, the DesignCenter window is restored.

To prevent DesignCenter from docking

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 On the DesignCenter title bar, click Propert. Press Ctrl as you move your
mouse.

86 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

To display and hide the DesignCenter tree view

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Tree View Toggle.

Quick Reference
ADCENTER
Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.
ADCNAVIGATE
Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path.

System Variables
ADCSTATE
Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed.

Access Content with DesignCenter
The tree view in the left portion of the DesignCenter window and the four
DesignCenter tabs help you find and load content into the content area.

Folders Tab
The Folders tab displays a hierarchy of navigational icons, including
■

Networks and computers

■

Web addresses (URLs)

■

Computer drives

■

Folders

■

Drawings and related support files

Access Content with DesignCenter | 87

■

Xrefs, layouts, hatch styles, and named objects, including blocks, layers,
linetypes, text styles, dimension styles, table styles, multileader styles, and
plot styles within a drawing

Click an item in the tree view to display its contents in the content area. Click
the plus (+) or minus (-) sign to display and hide additional levels in the
hierarchy. You can also double-click an item to display deeper levels.
Right-clicking in the tree view displays a shortcut menu with several related
options.

DesignCenter Tabs and Autodesk Seek
The Open Drawings, History, and DC Online tabs, and Autodesk Seek provide
alternate methods of accessing content.
■

Open Drawings. Displays a list of the drawings that are currently open.
Click a drawing file and then click one of the definition tables from the
list to load the content into the content area.

■

History. Displays a list of files opened previously with DesignCenter.
Double-click a drawing file from the list to navigate to the drawing file in
the tree view of the Folders tab and to load the content into the content
area.

■

DC Online. Provides content from the DesignCenter Online web page
including blocks, symbol libraries, manufacturer's content, and online
catalogs.

■

Autodesk Seek. Provides content from the Autodesk Seek web page
including blocks, symbol libraries, manufacturer's content, and online
catalogs. Autodesk Seek is not available in all regions and products.

NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is turned off by default. You can
enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility on page 97. However, it is not
available in English-language versions of the product.

Bookmark Frequently Used Content
DesignCenter provides a solution to finding content that you need to access
quickly on a regular basis. Both the tree view and the content area include
options that activate a folder called Favorites. The Favorites folder can contain
shortcuts to content on local or network drives as well as in Internet locations.
When you select a drawing, folder, or another type of content and choose
Add to Favorites, a shortcut to that item is added to the Favorites folder. The

88 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

original file or folder doesn't actually move; in fact, all the shortcuts you create
are stored in the Favorites folder. The shortcuts saved in the Favorites folder can
®
be moved, copied, or deleted using Windows Explorer.

To change the source of the content displayed in DesignCenter

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 On the DesignCenter window, click one of the following tabs:
■

Folders. Lists your local and network drives.

■

Open Drawings. Lists the drawings that are currently open.

■

History. Lists the last 20 locations accessed through DesignCenter.

■

DC Online. Displays online content from the Web.

■

NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is turned off by default.
You can enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility on page 97. However,
it is not available in English-language versions of the product.

To change the folder of the Home button in DesignCenter

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 In the DesignCenter tree view, navigate to the folder that you want to
set as home.
3 Right-click on the folder. Click Set as Home.
When you click the Home button, DesignCenter will automatically load this
folder.

To add items to the Favorites folder in DesignCenter

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.

Access Content with DesignCenter | 89

2 Right-click the item in the DesignCenter tree view or content area. Click
Add to Favorites.

To display the contents of the Favorites folder in DesignCenter

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 In DesignCenter, click the Favorites button.
When you are working in the tree view, you can use the Folders tab to
navigate to the Favorites folder.

To organize your DesignCenter Favorites folder

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 In DesignCenter, click the Favorites button.
3 Right-click the background in the content area. Click Organize Favorites.
Your Autodesk Favorites folder is opened in a window.

Quick Reference
ADCENTER
Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.
ADCNAVIGATE
Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path.
SEEK
Opens a web browser and displays the Autodesk Seek home page.

System Variables
ADCSTATE
Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed.

90 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Add Content with DesignCenter
The right portion of the DesignCenter window operates on the content
displayed.
Double-clicking an item in the content area displays successive levels of detail.
For example, double-clicking a drawing image displays several icons, including
an icon for blocks. Double-clicking the Blocks icon displays images of each
block in the drawing.

Add Content to a Drawing
You can add content from the content area into your current drawing using
several methods:
■

Drag an item to the graphics area of a drawing to add it using default
settings, if any.

■

Right-click an item in the content area to display a shortcut menu with
several options.

■

Double-click a block to display the Insert dialog box; double-click a hatch
to display the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box.

You can preview graphical content such as a drawing, xref, or block in the
content area, and you can display a text description if available.

Update Block Definitions with DesignCenter
Unlike xrefs, when the source file of a block definition is changed, block
definitions in the drawings that contain that block are not automatically
updated. With DesignCenter, you decide whether a block definition should
be updated in the current drawing. The source file of a block definition can
be a drawing file or a nested block in a symbol library drawing.
From the shortcut menu displayed when you right-click a block or drawing
file in the content area, click Redefine Only or Insert and Redefine to update
the selected block.

Open Drawings with DesignCenter
With DesignCenter, you can open a drawing from the content area using the
shortcut menu, pressing Ctrl while dragging a drawing, or dragging a drawing
icon to any location outside the graphics area of a drawing area. The drawing
name is added to the DesignCenter history list for quick access in future
sessions.

Add Content with DesignCenter | 91

Add Items from DesignCenter to a Tool Palette
You can add drawings, blocks, and hatches from DesignCenter to the current
tool palette.
■

From the DesignCenter content area, you can drag one or more items to
the current tool palette.

■

From the DesignCenter tree view, you can right-click and, from the shortcut
menu, create a new tool palette from the current folder, drawing file, or
block icon.

When you add drawings to a tool palette, they are inserted as blocks when
you drag them into the current drawing.
NOTE You can select multiple blocks or hatches from the content area to add
them to a tool palette.

To create a tool palette containing DesignCenter content

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 Do one of the following:
■

Right-click an item in the DesignCenter tree view. Click Create Tool
Palette. The new tool palette contains the drawings, blocks, or hatches
from the item you selected.

■

Right-click the background in the DesignCenter content area. Click
Create Tool Palette. The new tool palette contains the drawings, blocks,
or hatches from the DesignCenter content area.

■

Right-click a drawing in the DesignCenter tree view or content area.
Click Create Tool Palette of Blocks. The new tool palette contains the
blocks from the drawing you selected.

You can drag additional drawings, blocks, or hatches from the
DesignCenter content area to the tool palette.

To load the content area from the DesignCenter Search dialog box

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.

92 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

2 In DesignCenter, use one of the following methods:
■

Drag the item from the search results list into the content area.

■

Double-click the item in the search results list.

■

Right-click the item in the search results list. Click Load into Content
Area.

3 In the DesignCenter content area, double-click the Blocks icon.

To load the content area of DesignCenter with a symbol library

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Home.
3 In the content area, double-click the symbol library drawing that you
want to load into the DesignCenter and then double-click the Blocks
icon.
The symbol library you selected is loaded into the DesignCenter content
area.
NOTE You can set your home folder to any folder that contains symbol library
drawings. If your home folder is set to a different path, navigate to a folder that
contains symbol library drawings and right-click on the folder. Click Set as Home.

To load the content area of DesignCenter with hatch patterns

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Search.
3 In the Search dialog box, click the Look For box. Click Hatch Pattern
Files.
4 On the Hatch Pattern Files tab, in the Search for the Name box, enter *.
5 Click Search Now.
6 Double-click one of the hatch pattern files that was found.
The hatch pattern file you selected is loaded into DesignCenter.

Add Content with DesignCenter | 93

To open a drawing from DesignCenter

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 In DesignCenter, do one of the following:
■

Right-click the drawing icon in the DesignCenter content area. Click
Open in Application Window.

■

Press Ctrl and drag the drawing icon from the DesignCenter content
area to the drawing area.

■

Drag the drawing icon from the DesignCenter content area to a
location anywhere outside the drawing area of the application window.
(If you drag the drawing icon into the drawing area, a block is created
in the current drawing.)

To update a block definition with DesignCenter

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 Right-click a block in the DesignCenter content area. Click Redefine Only
or Insert and Redefine.
NOTE If the source of the block that you want to update is an entire drawing
file rather than a block definition within a drawing file, right-click the drawing's
icon in the DesignCenter content area. Click Insert as Block.

To open a block from the DesignCenter window in the Block Editor

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
2 On the block icon’s shortcut menu, click Block Editor.

Quick Reference
ADCENTER
Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.

94 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

ADCNAVIGATE
Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path.

System Variables
ADCSTATE
Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed.

Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online
DesignCenter Online provides access to pre-drawn content such as blocks,
symbol libraries, manufacturers' content, and online catalogs.

Overview of DesignCenter Online
DesignCenter Online provides access to pre-drawn content such as blocks,
symbol libraries, manufacturers' content, and online catalogs. This content
can be used in common design applications to assist you in creating your
drawings.
To access DesignCenter Online, click the DC Online tab in DesignCenter.
Once the DesignCenter Online window is open, you can browse, search, and
download content to use in your drawing.

NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is disabled by default. You can
enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility on page 97. However, it is not
available in English-language versions of the product.

Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online | 95

In the DesignCenter Online window, two panes are displayed—a right pane
and a left pane. The right pane is called the content area. The content area
displays the items or folders that you selected in the left pane. The left pane
can display one of the following four views:
■

Category Listing. Displays folders containing libraries of standard parts,
manufacturer-specific content, and content aggregator websites.

■

Search. Searches for online content. You can query items with Boolean
and multiple-word search strings.

■

Settings. Controls how many categories and items are displayed on each
page in the content area as a result of a search or folder navigation.

■

Collections. Specifies the discipline-specific content types that are displayed
in DesignCenter Online.

You choose the view by clicking the heading at the top of the left pane.

Once you select a folder in the left pane, all of its content is loaded into the
content area. You can select an item in the content area to load it into the
preview area. Items can be downloaded by dragging them from the preview
area into your drawing or tool palette, or by saving the items to your computer.
NOTE If the DC Online tab is not available in DesignCenter and you want to access
DesignCenter Online, see your network or CAD administrator.

DesignCenter Online Privacy
DesignCenter Online is an interactive feature that must be connected to the
Internet to deliver content and information. Each time DesignCenter Online
is connected, it sends information to Autodesk so that the correct information
can be returned. All information is sent anonymously to maintain your privacy.
The following information is sent to Autodesk:
■

Product Name. The name of the product in which you are using
DesignCenter Online

■

Product Release Number. The version of the product

■

Product Language. The language version of your product

96 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

■

Random Number Identifier. DesignCenter Online assigns a random number
identifier to each person who uses the feature. This identifier is used to
retain your Collections and your Settings views each time DesignCenter
Online is used.

Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent from DesignCenter
Online to monitor how it is being used and how it can be improved. Autodesk
will maintain information provided by or collected from you in accordance
with Autodesk's published privacy policy, which is available on
http://www.autodesk.com/privacy.

Turn the DC Online Tab On or Off
The CAD Manager Control utility turns the DC Online tab in DesignCenter
on and off. Information about how to use the utility is available after you
install the utility from the Installation Wizard by running the utility and
clicking Help in the CAD Manager Control Utility window.

To install the CAD Manager Control utility
1 Insert the product DVD, or the first CD, into your computer's drive.
2 In the Installation Wizard, click Install Tools And Utilities.
3 On the Welcome to the Installation wizard page, click Next.
4 Choose Autodesk CAD Manager Tools 4.0 on the Select the Products to
Install page. Click Next.
5 Review the Autodesk software license agreement for your country or
region. You must accept this agreement to procede with the installation.
Choose your country or region, click I Accept, and then click Next.
NOTE If you do not agree to the terms of the license and wish to terminate
the installation, click Cancel.
6 On the Review - Configure - Install page, click Install if you want to accept
the default install location.
If you want the utility installed in a different installation path, click
Configure, set the path and then click Configuration Complete and then
Install.
7 Click Finish when the Installation Complete page is displayed.

Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online | 97

Quick Reference
ADCENTER
Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.

Understand DesignCenter Online Content Types
With DesignCenter Online, content is categorized into folders.
In the DesignCenter Online folders, you can retrieve discipline-specific content.
The content that you can retrieve includes the following:
■

Standard Parts. Generic standard parts that are commonly used in design.
These parts include blocks for architectural, mechanical, and GIS
applications.

■

Manufacturers. Blocks and 3D models that can be located and downloaded
by clicking a link to a manufacturer's website.

■

Aggregators. Lists of libraries from commercial catalog providers can be
searched for parts and blocks.

You use the Collections view to select the categories of online content that
you want to display in the Category Listing view.
NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is disabled by default. You can
enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility on page 97. However, it is not
available in English-language versions of the product.

To view online content folders in the Category Listing view
■

In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading, and
then click Category Listing.

The category folders are displayed in the left pane of the window.

Retrieve Content from the Web
You can download content from the Web and use it in your drawings.

98 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Browse for Content
When you use the Category Listing view, you can click the folders in the left
pane to view their contents. These folders may contain other folders.

When you click a folder or an item inside a folder, the contents are displayed
in the Content area. When you click a block, graphical and descriptive
information about the block is displayed in the preview area.

Search for Content
When you search for online content with DesignCenter Online, you can query
items with Boolean and multiple-word search strings in the Search view. You
can access Search by clicking the magnifying glass or by choosing Search from
the drop-down heading at the top of the left pane.

Control the Number of Categories and Items in a Page
By using the Settings view, you can control how many categories or items are
displayed on each page in the content area as a result of a search or folder
navigation.

Collections
You can choose the type of content to navigate and search. In the Collections
pane, you can specify the content types that are displayed each time you open
DesignCenter Online. For example, if you use architectural blocks in your
drawings, you select collections that contain architectural items. Once you
make your selection, categories that you specified are displayed.

Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online | 99

Download Content
To download content from the Web, locate the folder containing the content
that you want to use. Then, click a thumbnail image of the content in the
content area. The content is displayed in the preview area along with
information about the content. You can drag the block directly from the
preview area into a drawing or tool palette, or you can save it to your computer
to be used later.
See also:
■

Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings on page 2122

To search for content in DesignCenter Online
1 In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading,
and then click Search.
2 In the Search view, enter a single word or multiple-word strings.
NOTE The Need Help link provides more information about searches,
including examples of Boolean searches.

To specify content collections
1 In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading,
and then click Collections.
2 In the Collections view, click the check boxes of the collections that you
want to use.
3 Click Update Collections.
The categories that you have selected are displayed in the left pane.

To download content to your computer
1 In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading,
and then click Category Listing.
2 In the Category folders, click a content item.
3 In the Preview area, under the image of the content item, click Save This
Symbol As.
4 In the Save As dialog box, specify the location on your computer and the
file name.

100 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

5 Click Save.
The content is downloaded to your computer.

To download content to your drawing
1 In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading,
and then click Category Listing.
2 In the Category folders, click a content item to display it in the Preview
area.
3 Drag the image from the Preview area into your drawing or tool palette.

Quick Reference
ADCENTER
Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.

Content Explorer
With Content Explorer, you can search for and access design files and design
objects locally or on network servers without leaving the CAD environment.

Overview of Content Explorer
Content Explorer aggregates design content from different folders that have
been specified for monitoring by the Content Service.
With Content Explorer you can index design content for quick access, catalog
the objects in each file, and search for content in local folders, network folders,
and the Autodesk Seek Library.
With Content Explorer, you can
■

Browse and search design content in local folders, network folders, and
the Autodesk Seek Library and immediately access files and objects from
within the AutoCAD environment

■

Browse into DWG files and access and insert blocks, layers, linetypes, styles,
etc.

■

Search for objects, all text, attributes (including block attributes), and files
in specified local and network folders.

Content Explorer | 101

NOTE Specify the Autodesk Seek Library download folder as a watched folder
and any downloaded files will also be indexed.
■

Pinpoint specific block references or text strings and automatically navigate
to the containing file

■

Open any file from Content Explorer and zoom to any attribute within it

■

Save search parameters for instant access to design content that meets your
design needs

■

Customize how search results are displayed to streamline your work
environment

NOTE Folders on the local computer or a network computer must be specified
as watched folders before their contents can be cataloged and indexed.

Understand the Relationship between Content Explorer and
Content Service
Content Service is a companion component to the Content Explorer search
client installed with AutoCAD and the AutoCAD verticals.
Content Service is an indexing service that monitors the activity in watched
folders on the computer where it is installed. While monitoring these watched
folders, Content Service continuously updates an index with critical metadata
associated with all design files and design objects in those watched folders.
When you perform a search with Content Explorer, the index maintained by
Content Service is examined for matches to the search criteria. Since the index
is continually updated by Content Service, the search results appear
immediately. With this real-time search capability, you can create custom
searches for thousands of design files and design objects, and instantly display
only those files and objects you need for your design.
If you plan to search folders on several different network computers, Content
Service must be installed on each network computer and the folders added to
the watched folder list for indexing. Any machine running AutoCAD or an
AutoCAD vertical with Content Explorer can access the network machines
running Content Service for real-time search results.

102 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

NOTE Refer to the Content Service help for more information.

Personal vs. Public Content Service
Content Service is installed as either a personal service or a public service,
depending on how it will be used.
Personal Service
■

Whenever AutoCAD is installed, Content Service is automatically installed
on the local system as a personal service. This means that you are going
to be using AutoCAD to access design files and will be managing watched
folders with Content Explorer in AutoCAD.

Public Service
■

If you do not intend to use AutoCAD on a network machine, but you want
to add watched folders on that machine, then you will use Content Service
as a public service. This means that you must manually install Content
Service on the network machine. Watched folders can then be managed
with the Autodesk Content Service - Administration Console. However,

Understand the Relationship between Content Explorer and Content Service | 103

AutoCAD users on other machines will be able to search them and access
them.
NOTE Refer to the Content Service help file for more information on using
Content Service on a network machine.

Understand the Content Explorer Window
Content Explorer is a powerful indexing and searching application with a
compact and efficient design similar to the AutoCAD External References
Manager window.
Just as with other secondary windows in AutoCAD, you can configure
transparency, auto-collapse, and docking preferences. See Specify the Behavior
of Dockable Windows on page 175 for more information on configuring the
Content Explorer window.

104 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Image

Feature

Description

Back

Recalls the last results you viewed.
The last results can be from browsing, searching, or recalling a saved
search.
For example, you’ve performed a
search that returned multiple results. You double-clicked on a file to
browse its contents. Click Back to
return to the search results.

Understand the Content Explorer Window | 105

Image

Feature

Description
You can click Back until you reach
the first search performed since
starting the Content Explorer session.

Climbs the breadcrumbs path one
step at a time.
You can click Up until you reach
the top level for the specified content source.

Home

Click Home to return to the top
level of the Home. This view shows
the local folders that are currently
watched and indexed.
Watched folders on the local machine can be added and removed
at the top level of Home.

Autodesk Seek

Click Autodesk Seek to switch to
the Autodesk Seek library. This
content source gives you access to
the products available on the
Autodesk Seek web site.

Network Machine

Click Network Machine to return
to the top level of a Network Machine. This view shows the network
folders that are currently watched
and indexed.
Watched folders on the network
machine can be added and removed on the Content Service Administration Console. See the Content Service help for more information.

Search field

Enter a search string in the Search
field to locate the files and objects
that meet the specified criteria.

106 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Image

Feature

Description
Only the current content source is
searched.
Results are displayed based on the
current filter settings.

Recent Searches

Click Search to perform a search.
Click the Search drop-down arrow
to display previous searches.

Saved Searches

Click Saved Searches to save the
current search string.
Select the saved search drop-down
to display the list of saved searches.
You can also delete saved searches,
edit the names of existing searches,
and save new searches in this context menu.

Add Watched Folder

Click Add Watched Folder to add
a new local folder to Home for
monitoring and indexing. You may
also add a folder by dragging and
dropping a folder from your Windows Explorer window into Home.

Results and Pending display

Folders are constantly indexed for
any changes, additions, or deletions. When a folder is in the process of being indexed and not all
of the information is available yet,
a pending icon will appear in this
window.

Filter

Click Filter to enable your current
filter settings. Click the filter dropdown to specify which types of files
and objects are displayed when you
browse or search a folder.
When a filter is active, the icon
highlights to let you know that not

NOTE The Filter feature is disabled when browsing and
searching in Autodesk Seek.

Understand the Content Explorer Window | 107

Image

Feature

Description
everything is being displayed,
based on your filter requisites.

View Options

Click View Options to cycle through
icon size. Click the View Options
drop-down arrow to configure the
icon size, whether the folders are
displayed in thumbnail or detailed
view, which labels are displayed,
and how the results are grouped.

Configure Settings

Click Configure Settings to add,
remove, enable, and disable content sources.

To Launch Content Explorer
Access Content Explorer with one of these methods:
■

Go to the Plug-ins tab and click Explore.

■

Enter CONTENTEXPLORER on the command line.

To Close Content Explorer
Close Content Explorer with one of these methods:
■

Select the Close icon in the Content Explorer window.

■

Enter CONTENTEXPLORERCLOSE on the command line.

You can also toggle the window so that it is not displayed by clicking the
Explore button again.

108 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

To Determine State of Content Explorer Window
■

Enter CONTENTEXPLORERSTATE on the command line to retrieve a read-only
variable indicating whether the Content Explorer window is open or closed.

Understand How Content Is Indexed
When a folder is specified as a watched folder, the Content Service, a
companion component to Content Explorer, indexes all of the design files
and design objects in the folder, including associated metadata.
Content Service continues to monitor the folders in the background and
updates the index to reflect any changes to design objects and files, including
new objects and folders, edits to existing files, and deletions.
When Content Explorer performs a search, it references the index maintained.
Since the index is constantly updated with changes, Content Explorer obtains
real-time results immediately.

Indexing Stages
The indexing occurs in three stages, with deeper indexing occurring with each
stage. The stages can be determined by the thumbnails displayed in the
Content Explorer window.
Stage
1

Icon Displayed

Description
File has been discovered by the indexer.
By the end of this stage, file name and
standard Windows properties have been
extracted. You can search for file names
and Windows properties, but you cannot
explore the content within the file.
NOTE Since all text and attributes in the
files are indexed, the initial index of the
files contained in the watched folders may
take some time to complete.

Understand How Content Is Indexed | 109

Stage

Icon Displayed

Description

Thumbnail and DWG-specific file properties
have been discovered. During this stage,
all objects and any text in the drawing, including block attributes, are being indexed.
You can now search for DWG properties,
but you cannot explore the content within
the file.

File is completely indexed.
You can now explore or search for content
within the file.

There was an issue while indexing this file.
Select the file and press CTRL+ I for more
information regarding the issue.

What Is Indexed
All text and attributes in the files are indexed, including block attributes. In
addition, the following objects are indexed when a folder is selected for
monitoring:
■

Block definitions

■

Block references

■

Dimstyles

■

Layers

■

Layouts

■

Linetypes

■

Multileaderstyles

110 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

■

Tablestyles

■

Textstyles

■

Xrefs

■

Hyperlinks

View Indexing Statistics in Content Explorer
You can review the indexing status of your files on the Statistics tab of the
Configure Settings dialog.
To review the indexing statistics in Content Explorer
1 In Content Explorer, click Configure Settings.
2 On the Configure Settings dialog, select either your local computer or a
network content source and click the Statistics tab.

3 Review the percentage of folders that have been indexed and the
percentage of files that have been indexed in those folders.
For example, in the image above, 100 percent of the folders have been
indexed without error but only 21 percent of the files have been indexed
so far.
4 Click the View Log File button to review a more detailed list of indexing
events and determine any issues.
5 If the indexing service stalled without any current actions, remove the
watched folder and re-add it for indexing.
This action will start the indexing process over and will resolve most
issues.

Understand How Content Is Indexed | 111

NOTE The Statistics tab is also available in the Autodesk Content Service
Administration Console. Refer to the Autodesk Content Service Administration
Console help for more information.

Understand Watched Folders
A watched folder is a folder which has been selected for monitoring and
indexing by the Content Service.
A content source may be the local machine, Autodesk Seek, or designated
network location. When you search a content source that is a local or network
machine, all watched folders are searched. Any design files or objects in those
folders that match the search criteria are returned.
Watched folders can exist on the local machine where AutoCAD or an
AutoCAD vertical is installed, or on a network computer running Content
Service. You can configure which folders are watched in two different places,
depending one whether the folders are local or on a network.

Local Folders
If you are adding local folders to the search index for watching or if you will
be monitoring Autodesk Seek download folders, then you can configure the
watched folders using Content Explorer.

Network Folders
Folders on a network computer must be indexed and monitored by Content
Service. Content Service runs in the background, monitoring activities in the
watched folders and updating a single index to reflect any changes. You can
add and delete watched folders on a network machine in the Autodesk Content
Service-- Administration Console.
There are several rules regarding how Content Service watches folders on a
network computer. It is important to understand these rules before selecting
a folder as a watched folder.

Rules for Watched Folders on a Network Computer
■

The target folder must be configured as shared. If the folder is not shared,
it will not show up on the Select a Folder to Watch list for selection.

■

By allowing Content Service to index a shared folder, you are allowing
anyone to search the contents of that watched folder, even if some of the

112 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

files are read-only. However, users will not be able to access read-only
content; they will only see content if they browse to it or if it meets search
criteria.
■

If the top level of a folder hierarchy is shared and specified as a watched
folder, all of the subfolders are watched and indexed, regardless of the
share setting. If you do not want content inside a folder hierarchy to be
shared, move it to a private location or build a new hierarchy of data to
share.

■

If a top level folder is shared, the contents inside are indexed but parallel
data to that top level folder is not indexed.

Add Watched Folders
You can add folders to the watched folders list in Content Explorer or via the
Autodesk Content Service Administration Console. Generally, you should add
folders to the watched folder list through Content Explorer. However, if you
need to add folders to a watched list and AutoCAD or an AutoCAD vertical
are not installed, then you can use the Autodesk Content Service
Administration Console to specify watched folders.
NOTE Refer to the Autodesk Content Service help for more information.
You can add a folder for watching through Content Explorer based on the
content source that has been selected. Refer to Manage Content Sources on
page 113 for more information.
See also:
■

Understand How Content Is Indexed on page 109

■

Manage Content Sources on page 113

■

Understand the Home Content Source on page 117

■

Understand the Network Content Source on page 122

Manage Content Sources
Content sources are locations where design content is stored.
A content source can be your local drive, a network computer, or a web site
like Autodesk Seek.

Manage Content Sources | 113

You can search only one content source at a time. When searching your local
drive or a network computer, you can search all watched folders for that
content source at the same time or drill down to a specific folder for a smaller
number of files and objects to search.

Select content sources from the source drop-down menu.
The content source type currently selected is represented by a unique icon.
Icon

Content Source
Home. The Home content source represents all watched folders on the local drive.
NOTE If your local machine also serves as
a network machine for others, then you
will only see the Network icon.
Network. The Network content source
represents watched folders on a network
machine. The network machine is identified by its network name.
Autodesk Seek. The Autodesk Seek content
can be browsed, examined, and downloaded from this view.

Content sources can be added, removed, enabled, or disabled in the Configure
Settings dialog box.

114 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

See also:
■

Understand the Home Content Source on page 117

■

Understand the Seek Content Source on page 119

■

Understand the Network Content Source on page 122

To add a content source
Add a new content source to the list of available sources for searching.

1 In the Content Explorer window, click the Configure Settings
icon.
2 On the Configure Settings dialog, click the Add Network Content button.
3 Enter the name of the computer on the network that you want to add to
the Content Source list. This computer must be running Autodesk Content
Service.
NOTE See the Autodesk Content Service help for more information on
configuring watched folders on a network computer.
4 Click OK.

Manage Content Sources | 115

The network computer is added as an available content source.

To remove a content source
Remove content sources which you no longer want to browse or search, or
which are no longer available.

1 In the Content Explorer window, click the Configure Settings
icon.
2 In the Content Sources list, right-click on the content source and select
Remove.
The content source is removed from the list and is no longer available
for browsing or searching.

To disable a content source temporarily
If a network machine becomes unavailable and you do not want it listed for
searching, you can temporarily disable the content source.

1 In the Content Explorer window, click the Configure Settings
icon.
2 In the Content Sources list, clear the check box next to the content source
that you want to disable.
The content source is disabled for searching and browsing, but remains
on the content sources list as an available content source.

To enable a content source

1 In the Content Explorer window, click the Configure Settings
icon.
2 In the Content Sources list, select the check box next to the content
source that you want to enable.
The content source is enabled for searching and browsing.

116 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Understand the Home Content Source
Home represents the local file system folders that are currently being indexed
and monitored.
Folders added to Home are watched for file system events, such as Add, Save,
and Delete. An indexing process keeps a current catalog of the files and objects
located in the watched folders. You can easily locate files in the specified
folders based on search criteria, such as the date last updated, the author, a
property value, or the file type.
You can configure a single location as the source folder for monitoring all
content. You can also create unique file locations as needed, such as an
archived content folder and a current project content folder.
NOTE Network locations are not considered local data sources.
Home consists of local folders which have been identified for indexing. You
can add more folders to Home for indexing and browsing, or remove those
you no longer need
Configure Home by adding and removing folders. Folders in Home will be
monitored for updates and indexed. When you perform a search, only the
content contained in the watched folders is searched.
Feature

Description

Home content source

The Home content source lists the folders
being indexed and additional information
depending on the view selected.

Add Watched Folder

Click Add Watched Folder to add a new
folder to the Home content source for
monitoring and indexing. You may also
add a folder by dragging and dropping a
folder from your Windows Explorer window into the Home content source.
NOTE Adding a folder to the Home does
not move the folder or its contents.
When the Add Watched Folder button is
clicked, a Browse for Folder dialog box
opens for easy navigation to the desired
folder. You can also create a new folder in
the hierarchy by clicking the New Folder

Manage Content Sources | 117

Feature

Description
button on the Browse for Folder dialog
box.
NOTE Folders already added to Home for
indexing are displayed with a red check
mark and are grayed out.

Remove

Right-click on a folder and select Remove
to remove the selected folder location from
the Home content source. You can also
drag a folder from the Home content
source and drop it outside of the window
to remove it from the Home.
A folder which has been removed is no
longer indexed.
NOTE Removing a folder from Home does
not delete the folder from the file system.

See also:
■

Understand Watched Folders on page 112

■

Manage Content Sources on page 113

■

Understand the Seek Content Source on page 119

■

Understand the Network Content Source on page 122

■

Basic Searching with Content Explorer on page 125

To add a folder to Home
1 Launch the Content Explorer window.

2 Click the Home

icon to go to the Home content source.

3 Click Add Watched Folder to open the Browse for Folder dialog box.
4 Navigate to the folder which you want to add to the index and click OK.
The folder is added to Home.
You can also click New Folder and create a new folder in the specified
file hierarchy. Select the new folder and click OK to add it to Home.

118 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

NOTE Adding a folder to Home does not move the folder or its contents.

To remove a folder from Home
1 Launch Content Explorer.

2 Click the Home

icon to go to the Home content source.

3 Right-click on the folder you want to remove from Home and select
Remove from the context menu.
The folder is removed from Home and is no longer indexed.
NOTE Folders removed from Home are not deleted from the file system.

Understand the Seek Content Source
Browse and search for products on Autodesk Seek using the Seek content
source in Content Explorer.
You can explore the detailed specifications for each product or select design
files to download and drag-and-drop into the open drawing.

Examine Products with Autodesk Seek
Double-click on products to view more information about that product, such
as the description or technical specifications. You can also determine which
files are available for download.
NOTE Only .dwg files can be downloaded at this time.

Search with Autodesk Seek
When searching with the Seek content source, you can locate files by
manufacturer or by product specifications. You can also insert files directly
into your drawing without accessing the external web site.

Explore Autodesk Seek Online
The Seek content source displays online content found at Autodesk Seek
(http://seek.autodesk.com). With the Seek content source, you can download

Manage Content Sources | 119

content and insert it directly into your drawing. You can also access the
external web site by clicking View products at Autodesk Seek.
Access the products online by clicking View Products at Autodesk Seek. A web
browser opens directly to the Autodesk seek site online. The results are
displayed according the search you entered in Content Explorer.
NOTE Refer to the section on Autodesk Seek for more information.
Feature

Description

Seek content source

The Seek content source lets you search
for online content on Autodesk Seek and
insert content directly into the open
drawing without ever leaving your design
environment.

View Products at Autodesk Seek

Opens a separate browser that takes you
directly to the Autodesk Seek site where
you can explore available content.

See also:
■

Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings on page 2122

■

Manage Content Sources on page 113

■

Understand the Home Content Source on page 117

■

Understand the Network Content Source on page 122

To explore content
1 Launch the Content Explorer window.

2 Click the Seek

icon to go to the Seek content source.

3 Enter your search parameters in the Search field.
4 Navigate to the product that you want to explore.
5 Right-click on the product and select Explore.
The description and specifications for the product are displayed. You can
also see the DWG files that are available for download.

120 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

NOTE Click the Back button to return to the previous view.

To insert and open content
1 Launch the Content Explorer window.

2 Click the Seek

icon to go to the Seek content source.

3 Enter your search parameters in the Search field.
4 Navigate to the product that you want to insert into your drawing.
5 Perform one of the following actions:
■

To open and insert–Right-click on the file and select Open to download
and open the file.

■

To insert –Drag and drop the file into the CAD environment or
right-click on the file and select insert.

■

To download–Right-click on the file and select download.

With all of the above actions, the file is added to the download folder
specified for Autodesk Seek content.
NOTE If the download folder for Autodesk Seek content is a watched folder,
searches from the Home content source will include downloaded Seek content.

To access Autodesk Seek online
1 Launch Content Explorer.

2 Click the Seek

icon to go to the Seek content source.

3 Click View products at Autodesk Seek.
A separate window launches, taking you directly to the Autodesk Seek
web site.
NOTE See the section on Autodesk Seek for more information.

Manage Content Sources | 121

Understand the Network Content Source
A network content source represents the file system folders that are currently
being indexed and monitored on a network machine.
Folders shown in a network content source are watched for file system events,
such as Add, Save, and Delete. An indexing process keeps a current catalog of
the files and objects located in the watched folders. You can easily locate files
in the specified folders based on search criteria, such as the date last updated,
the author, a property value, or the file type.
You can configure which folders are watched on the network machine in two
ways:
■

If AutoCAD or an AutoCAD vertical is installed on the network machine,
launch Content Explorer and add the folders through the Autodesk Content
Explorer- Configure Settings dialog box.

■

If AutoCAD or an AutoCAD vertical is NOT installed on the network
machine, launch the Autodesk Content Service Administration Console
and add the folders through the Add Watched Folder dialog box.

When you search a network content source, only watched folders on that
network machine are searched. If you need to search a different network
machine, you must select that content source from the Content Source
drop-down.

If AutoCAD or an AutoCAD vertical is installed on the network machine where
you want to add watched folders, you can add and remove watched folders
with Content Explorer on the Autodesk Content Explorer Configure Settings
dialog box.

122 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

NOTE Folders on a network computer must be set as shared to be added as
watched folders on that network computer. Only a network computer running
Content Service can be added as a network content source in Content Explorer.
If the network machine does not have AutoCAD or an AutoCAD vertical
installed, you can specify watched folders for that machine through the
Autodesk Content Service Administration Console.
These folders must be set to shared before you can add them as a watched
folder. If a folder is not configured to be shared, it will not show up on the
list of available folders to add for watching.
NOTE It is recommended that you use Content Explorer to add watched folders
unless you need to add watched folders on a computer where AutoCAD or an
AutoCAD vertical is not installed.
See also:
■

Understand Watched Folders on page 112

■

Manage Content Sources on page 113

■

Understand the Home Content Source on page 117

■

Understand the Seek Content Source on page 119

Manage Content Sources | 123

To add or remove watched folders with Content Explorer

1 In the Content Explorer window, click the Configure Settings
icon.
2 Click Add Watched Folder to launch the Add Watched Folder dialog box.
3 Navigate to the folder that you want to add, select it, and click OK.
The folder is added to the watched folder list.
4 To remove a folder, right-click on the folder in the Watched Folders list
and select remove.
The folder is no longer available for searching or browsing with Content
Explorer.

To add or remove watched folders with the Autodesk Content Service
Administration Console
1 Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the folder that you want to add
as a watched folder.
2 Right click on the folder and select Properties.
3 Select the Sharing tab and verify that the folder is set to Shared. Click
okay to close the Properties dialog box.
4 Launch the Autodesk Content Service Administration Console by
performing one of the following steps:
For Windows XP:
■

Go to Start Menu ➤ Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ Content Service ➤
Content Service - Administration Console.

For Windows 7:
■

Go to Start Menu ➤ All Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ Content Service
➤ Content Service - Administration Console.

5 Click Add Watched Folder.
6 On the Select Watched Folders dialog box, select the folder that you want
to have watched or click New to create a new folder.

124 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

NOTE If the folder you are looking for is not listed, verify that it is configured
as a shared folder.
7 Click OK to add the selected folder to the watched list. Content Service
will now index and monitor all activities in that folder.
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each folder that you want Content Service
to watch.
New watched folders automatically appear in the specified Network
Content source in Content Explorer.
9 To remove a folder from the watched list, right-click the folder and select
remove.
10 Click Yes on the Remove Folder dialog box.
The folder is no longer watched and cannot be searched or browsed with
Content Explorer.

Basic Searching with Content Explorer
The search feature allows you to quickly locate files that meet your search
criteria.
When you enter a search string into the search field, Content Explorer
examines the index and returns the files with a file name, author, keyword,
comment, name, subject, or title that meets the search criteria. Any objects
with a file name that meets the search string are also returned.
In addition to file properties and objects, you can also search for text contained
in:
■

Multiline text

■

Tables

■

Fields

■

Multileaders

■

Dimensions

■

Hyperlinks

Any block attributes which meet the search criteria are also returned.

Basic Searching with Content Explorer | 125

NOTE The search feature is relative. If you have browsed to a subfolder, Content
Explorer will search files and folders within the current folder only.
Search results for local and network content sources are displayed 100 to a
page.
Search results for the Seek content source are displayed 20 to a page.

Search with Wild Cards
You can use wild cards when specifying search criteria.
Wild Cards
*

Represents any number of characters within a string.

Represents a single character within a string.

The search engine assumes a trailing asterisk (*), so you do not need to put
an asterisk at the end of a search phrase.

To perform a basic search with Content Explorer
1 Enter the text string for which you want to search in the Search field.
You can use wild cards when searching.
2 Press Enter or click Search.
Files meeting the search criteria are displayed.
NOTE If your search results are not what you expected, try changing your
filter settings or refining your search.

Advanced Searching with Content Explorer
Advanced searches can be performed using property:value pairings or boolean
operators.
You can refine your searches by using string combinations and value pairings.

Use Property Name and Value Pairs
A property:value pair is the property name and specific value for which you
want to search. To search for a property with a specific value, enter the data
as property:value in the Search field.

126 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

For example, enter author:jsmith in the Search field to find all of the DWG
files where the author was JSmith.
More than one property:value pair can be used in a search string. For example,
you can search for all of the drawing files identified as seating which were
created by jsmith by entering objecttype:seating author:jsmith in the
Search field.
You can create custom properties and values for your files on the AutoCAD
properties dialog box. See Streamline Searches with User-Created Properties
in Content Explorer on page 139 for more information.

Use Attributes and Value Pairs
An attribute:value pair is the block attribute and specific value for which you
want to search. To search for a block attribute with a specific value, enter the
data as attribute:value in the Search field.
For example, enter Designedby:JohnDoe in the Search field to find all of
the objects designed by John Doe.

Search Text for a Specific Value
With the basic search capability, you can enter a text string and the search
engine will return all files with a file name, keyword, title, author, or other
properties that meet the string criteria, as well as any files containing the
string, and objects with names that match the text string. Sometimes this type
of string search will return more results than you need.
Use the text:string pair to search only for text entities, such as leaders, fields,
hyperlinks, MText, tables, or any other text that may show up on a drawing.
This type of search parameter will not search file-level properties, such as
Author or Title.
To search for a specific text string, enter the data as text:string in the
Search field.
For example, enter text:reviewed in the Search field to find all of the files
with text entities containing the string “reviewed.”

Search with Boolean Operators
You can use operators to further refine your search results.
For example, to search for all of the files identified as seating that were not
authored by JSmith, enter objecttype:seating NOT author:jsmith in
the Search field.

Advanced Searching with Content Explorer | 127

Operators
AND

Searches for x AND y in any order. The search granny AND smith returns anything
containing both words.

Searches for either x OR y. The search granny OR smith returns anything containing
either word.

NOT

Searches for x but NOT y. The search granny NOT smith returns anything containing
granny but not smith.

Searches for the exact phrase contained within the quotation marks. The search
"granny smith" returns everything containing the exact phrase granny smith.

To perform and advanced search in Content Explorer
1 Enter the text string or property:value pairing for which you want to
search in the Search field.
Include any operators to further refine your search.
2 Press Enter or click Search.
NOTE If your search results are not what you expected, try changing your
filter settings or refining your search.

Manage Saved Searches in Content Explorer
The saved searches feature allows you to capture a certain search string in a
single click.
You can eliminate all of the steps required to search for specific files or objects
by saving the search string.
For example, you can save a search that locates all of the furniture created by
a specific designer. Any time you want to quickly access furniture, select the
saved search. Since the index is continuously updated, any new files that meet
the search criteria are displayed every time the search is recalled.
You can also delete saved searches, edit the names of existing saved searches,
and save new searches on the Saved Searches drop-down menu.

128 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Save, Edit, and Delete Searches in Content Explorer
Saving and reusing previous searches can save you time. You can manage your
saved searches in the Saved Searches drop-down list.
The five most recently entered search strings are stored in the search field
drop-down list. When you enter text that matches the beginning characters
of a previously entered search string, that search string is recommended.
When the results of a saved search are displayed in the main view, these results
are filtered and grouped based on the current settings. The sort and group
features can be used to further refine how search results are displayed.
Saved searches can be deleted or the search names modified in the saved and

recent searches

drop-down.

To save a search in Content Explorer
1 Perform a search and then click Save Searches

2 Enter a name for the saved search and press Enter.
The search is saved.

To rename a search in Content Explorer
1 From the saved search drop-down list, click Edit
search string that you want to rename.

next to the recent

2 Enter a new name for the saved search and press Enter.
The search is renamed.

To delete a saved search in Content Explorer
■

Click Delete
next to the search you want to remove from the saved
searches drop-down list.

To create a saved search in Content Explorer
1 Perform a search or browse into a file.

Manage Saved Searches in Content Explorer | 129

2 Click the Save Searches

icon.

3 Enter a name for the saved search in the field. The search is added to the
Saved Searches list.

To use a saved search in Content Explorer
Use saved searches at any time for fast access to your indexed files and objects.

■

Click the saved search drop-down
and then select a saved search.
The search is performed. Configure any sorting, icon size, or other settings
to suit your needs.

To set a default search in Content Explorer
The default search is performed whenever the Content Explorer window first
launches. You can change the default search in the saved searches drop-down
menu.

■

Click the saved searches drop-down
and then click to the left of
the saved search that you want to set as your default search. A check mark
indicates that saved search will be the default view when you next open
the Content Explorer window.

■

Click the check mark beside a saved search to clear it and remove the search
as the default.

130 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

TIP Perform a search for files recently modified and then save the configuration
as a default search. Whenever the Content Explorer window launches, a fresh
search is performed and the files you have been using most recently are displayed.

Navigate a saved search in Content Explorer
After performing a saved search, you can see the search that was performed
by examining the breadcrumbs path. You can also return to a previous search
or determine the folder path that was searched.
Determine a search path
■

Hover your mouse over the saved search name in the breadcrumb. A tool-tip
displays the folder path that was searched.

Return to a previous search

■

When you are working within a saved search, click the back
button
to exit the saved search and return to the previous search results.

Browse Folders with Content Explorer
You can easily browse your design files as well as the objects contained within
the files.
■

Double-click a folder to browse the contents of the folder.

■

Double-click a file to browse the objects contained in the file.

■

Double-click on a block definition to browse the block references

■

Click the up
button to go to the parent folder, file, or object of
your current browsing results.
For example, if you are a browsing objects in a file, clicking the Up button
returns you to the parent file. If you are currently browsing block references,
clicking the Up button takes you to the block definition.
NOTE Clicking the Up button is the same as taking one step back in the
breadcrumbs path.

Browse Folders with Content Explorer | 131

■

Click the back

button to return to the previous browsing results.

NOTE If your browse results are not what you expected, try changing your filter
settings.
Using breadcrumbs
■

When browsing, a breadcrumb path records your steps.

■

Click a breadcrumb to jump directly to that location.

■

Click the first breadcrumb to return to the top level of the content source
that you are searching or browsing.

Filter Results in Content Explorer
The filter lets you choose object types, specific dates, date ranges, and relative
dates to display in search or browse results.
Filter settings persist throughout searches and browsing until they are changed
or the filter is deactivated. If you do not get the search or browse results you
expect, try checking your filter settings to make sure they are current.
NOTE The filter feature is disabled when using the Seek content source.

Control Whether the Filter is Turned On or Off

The Filter
icon is a toggle. When the filter is illuminated
, all search and browse results are returned based on the filter settings.

■

If the filter icon is not illuminated
results based on the filter settings.

132 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

, click the filter to view the

■

If the filter icon is illuminated
, click the filter icon to disable it
and see all objects regardless of date and time.

To filter by type in Content Explorer

1 Click the Filter

drop-down and select the Type tab.

2 Select the check boxes for the types of objects you want to display when
you search or browse.
By default, all objects are displayed when searching and browsing.
3 Once all of the settings are determined, click outside the filter menu to
apply the results.

To filter by date in Content Explorer
1 Click the Filter

drop-down and select the Date tab.

2 Select whether you want to filter results by either the file’s create date or
the file’s modified date.
3 Select a relative date from the drop-down menu.
4 Once all of the settings are determined, click outside the filter menu to
apply the results.

Sort and Group Results in Content Explorer
You can control how your results are displayed through sorting and grouping
options.
While a filter lets you refine which objects are displayed when you browse or
search, the sort and group options let you control how those results are
displayed.

Sort Results
By default, there are five columns by which you can sort results:
■

Name

Sort and Group Results in Content Explorer | 133

■

Type

■

Date Created

■

Date Modified

■

Location

Click on a column to sort the results based on that column. Click the column
again to reverse the sort order.

Group Results
Sometimes even after refining a search, it might be handy to group the results
based on a certain property type. You can group results by Name, Type, Date
Created, or Date Modified.
When Group By is turned on, the results are collected together based on the
column selected. For example, if Group By is turned on and the Type column
is selected, the results are collected by the type of object—blocks, dimstyles,
layers, and so on. If the Name column is selected, the results are collected by
alphabetical groupings—A-H, I-P, Q-Z, 0-9, and so on.
Once you have established by which property to group your results, you can
collapse or expand the groups to suit your display preferences.

To sort results
■

Click a column header to sort the results by that column.
Click the column again to reverse the sort order.

To display results in groups

1 Click the View Options
option.

drop-down and select the Group By

2 On the Group By menu select the properties by which you want to group
your browse and search results.
3 Select whether you want the results sorted in Ascending or Descending
order.
4 Click outside the Group By menu to apply the settings.

134 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

To display results without grouping them

1 Click the View Options
disable all groupings.

drop-down ➤ Group By ➤ None to

2 Click outside the Group By menu to apply the changes.

To expand and collapse groups
After selecting how results are grouped, you can control whether grouped
results are hidden or displayed.
■

Click a group heading to expand or collapse that group.

■

Right-click a group header and then select Expand All or Collapse All to
act on all the groups on the page.

Customize the View in Content Explorer
Whenever you search or browse, the results are displayed beneath the search
field.

Click the View Options
icon to configure the icon size and whether
the folders are displayed in thumbnail or detailed view. When thumbnail view
is selected, you can also choose whether or not column headers and object
labels are displayed. You can also choose which column headers are displayed.

To configure icon size

■

Click the View Options

icon to cycle through icon sizes.

The five icon sizes are:
■

Extra large

■

Large

■

Medium

■

Small

■

Extra small

Customize the View in Content Explorer | 135

To configure the display of folder results

1 Click the View Options
drop-down and select either Thumbnail
View or Detail View from the context menu.
2 If Thumbnail View is selected, you can also choose to display the column
headers or the text labels for the folders by selecting their respective check
boxes.

Perform Tasks with Files in Content Explorer
Once you locate your content, you can perform different AutoCAD tasks with
the files.
Task

Access

Explore

Right-click and select Explore to view the
contents of the file.
NOTE You can also double-click on the
file to view its contents. This is the default
action for all files.

Go to Folder

Right-click on a file and select Go to Folder
to go directly to the folder containing that
file.

Open Drawing

Right-click and select Open Drawing to
open the file in the current AutoCAD session. You can also drag and drop a file
from the display window into the AutoCAD
session to open it provided no other files
are currently open.

Open and Find Text

Right-click and select Open and Find text
to open the drawing and locate any text
within.
NOTE If the option is grayed out then
there is no text in the drawing file.

136 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Task

Access
Generally, the command will automatically
highlight and zoom in to the text, except
in these cases:
■

The text is a file-level property so there
is nothing to highlight on the screen.

■

The text is an object definition property that has not been instantiated in
the file. For example, a block attribute
for a block that has not been inserted
would not be higlighted.

NOTE You can instead examine
the properties on the block to see
the text.

Insert

Right-click on the file and select Insert to
insert the file into the current AutoCAD
document. You can also drag and drop the
file from the display window into the current document window to insert it.

Attach

Right-click on the file and select Attach to
attach the file as an Xref to the current
AutoCAD document.

Properties

Right-click on the file and select Properties
to view a read-only list of the properties
stored in the index for the file.

Perform Tasks with Objects in Content Explorer
Once you locate an object, you can perform different AutoCAD tasks with the
objects.
Task

Access

Explore

Double-click on a block definition or rightclick and select Explore to see instances of
the block definition.

Perform Tasks with Objects in Content Explorer | 137

Task

Access

NOTE This feature is available only for
block references.
Go to Folder

Right-click on an object and select Go to
Folder to go directly to the folder containing the object.
Right-click on a block definition and select
Go to Folder to go directly to the parent
file containing the block definition.

Open Drawing

Right-click on an object and select Open
to Open the drawing containing the selected object.

Open and Find Text

Right-click and select Open and Find text
to open the drawing and locate any text
within.
NOTE If the option is grayed out then
there is no text in the drawing file.
Generally, the command will automatically
highlight and zoom in to the text, except
in these cases:
■

The text is a file-level property so there
is nothing to highlight on the screen.

■

The text is an object definition property that has not been instantiated in
the file. For example, a block attribute
for a block that has not been inserted
would not be higlighted.

NOTE You can instead examine
the properties on the block to see
the text.

Open and Zoom

138 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Right-click on the object and select Open
and Zoom to open the drawing in the
current AutoCAD session and highlight the
selected object.

Task

Access

Insert

Right-click on the object and select Insert
to insert the object into the current AutoCAD document. You can also drag and
drop the object from the display window
into the current document window to insert it.

Properties

Right-click on the object and select Properties to view a read-only list of the properties stored in the index for the object.

Streamline Searches with User-Created Properties in Content
Explorer
Searches can be refined based on the properties associated with drawing files.
By adding custom properties to a drawing file, you can create unique tags for
searching and grouping.
For example, if you have several furniture files which you regularly use when
designing, you can add a property to each of the files named FURNITURE
TYPE and give each a suitable value, such as CHAIR. Then when you perform
a search for files with FURNITURE TYPE as a property and the value of CHAIR,
you will retrieve only the files that meet this criterium.

Understand the Drawing Properties Dialog Box in AutoCAD
The AutoCAD properties dialog box contains four tabs that organize the
properties.
Here is a description of each tab:
Tab

Description

General

The General tab contains the basic system
level properties.

Summary

The Summary tab contains file properties
that can be filled in by the user. These
properties include the title, subject, author,
keywords, and comments about the file. If

Streamline Searches with User-Created Properties in Content Explorer | 139

Tab

Description
the file is contained in a watched folder,
when the file is saved, these properties are
indexed and can be searched using Content Explorer.
TIP The property values for the properties
contained in the Summary tab are
searched automatically with a general
search string. Fill in these values as soon
as possible so that you can start refining
your searches using the property:value
search feature.

Statistics

The Statistics tab displays the created and
modified dates for the file. It also displays
the name of the last person to save the file
as well as any revision information related
to the file.

Custom

The Custom tab displays all user-created
properties for the file. Click Add to create
a property:value pair and then Click Save.
If the file is contained in a watched folder,
the new properties are indexed and can
be searched using Content Explorer.

You can create custom property values for different drawing files. These
property values can be used to locate files in watched folders when you search
with Content Explorer.

To add properties to a drawing file
1 From the AutoCAD application menu, select Drawing Utilities ➤ Drawing
Properties.
2 Click the Summary tab and enter the desired values in each of the fields.
3 Click the Custom tab.
4 On the Custom tab, click Add.
5 Enter a new property and the desired value for this file.
6 Click Save to add the property and designated value to the file.

140 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

If the file is already contained in a watched folder, the new property is
automatically indexed. The property and value can be searched using
Content Explorer.

View Properties on an Indexed File or Object
You can view which properties have been indexed on a file or an object.
Knowing which properties have been indexed allows you to create stronger
search strings.
1 Right-click on the object or file for which you want to view the properties
and select Properties.
A window displays all of the properties that have been indexed, including
the default properties and any user-created properties.

Streamline Searches with User-Created Properties in Content Explorer | 141

NOTE Properties in bold are default properties.
TIP Advanced users can add custom properties to the basic search list by
accessing the Connect.Service.exe.config file and following the instructions
under the heading.
2 Select another object or file to view its properties as well.

142 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

The properties window automatically updates to display the properties
that have been indexed on the selected file or object.

Use Saved Searches with User-Created Properties in Content
Explorer
When the Saved Searches feature is used in conjunction with properties and
searching, you can create fast access to the files you use most often.
For example, if you frequently use furniture files when designing, you can
add a FURNITURE TYPE property with suitable values, such as SEATING, to
your furniture files. Then you can create a search that locates all files with the
property FURNITURE TYPE and a value of SEATING, and then save that search
for faster recall the next time you need to locate seating options for your
design.
You can further refine the search by grouping and filtering the results to suit
your working preferences. For example, FURNITURE TYPE results for SEATING
can be grouped in the display window based on whether they have been
modified recently or not.
See also:
■

Advanced Searching with Content Explorer on page 126

■

Manage Saved Searches in Content Explorer on page 128

Troubleshooting Content Explorer
The troubleshooting section provides useful tips for resolving any issues with
Content Explorer.

Content Service is not installed
There are two components that help you locate your files. Content Explorer
is the interface that allows you to browse and search watched folders. Content
Service is the service that indexes the files and enables the searching. When
AutoCAD is first installed, the Autodesk Content Explorer feature is
automatically included in the installation. At the same time, the Content
Service is also installed, but since the service runs independent of AutoCAD,
it shows up as a separate program on the Add and Remove programs list.

Troubleshooting Content Explorer | 143

If you accidentally uninstall the service, the Content Explorer interface will
no longer work within AutoCAD.
To reinstall Content Service
1 Launch the AutoCAD installation wizard.
2 Click the Tools and Utilities button.
3 On the Configure Settings screen, select one of these options under
Autodesk Content Service:
■

For Personal Access - Select this option if you intend to use AutoCAD
with Content Explorer on your personal machine.

■

For Public Access - Select this option if you want to index files on the
local machine so that all Content Explorer users can connect to the
machine and explore and search files.
NOTE See the Content Service help file for more information on planning
your installation.

4 Click Install to start the installation.

You are receiving a Cannot Perform Operation error
If you receive an error in the Content Explorer window stating that you cannot
perform an operation, it may be due to one of the following reasons:
■

If you are trying to access a network conetnt source or Autodesk Seek, you
may not be able to connect because your internet connection is lost or has
been disrupted. Check your internet connection to make sure you are still
connected.

■

If you are trying to access a network content source or Autodesk Seek, and
you DO have a valid internet connection:
■

You might not be able to connect due to a DNS error. You can verify
if this is the problem by trying to connect to the network computer
using Windows Explorer (for example, try connecting to
\\COMPUTERNAME). If you can’t connect in this way, then there may
be a permissions, DNS, or network problem in general. Always make
sure that you can access the network computer using Windows Explorer
first, because if you cannot access the network computer using Windows
Explorer, you will not be able to access the network computer with
Content Explorer either.

144 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

■

The Content Service may have stopped running. Check to make sure
that it is still running by typing Services in the Search box of the
Windows Start menu. In the Services window, locate Autodesk Content
Service in the list of services and make sure that the status is Started
and the Startup Type is Automatic.

■

When trying to connect to a network computer, you may encounter
firewall issues. When installed, an inbound rule is created for the
Windows Firewall that enables Autodesk Content Service on port 50248
using TCP protocol (this applies to the Domain profile). You can check
these settings in the list of Inbound Rules for Windows Firewall.
1 Enter Windows Firewall in the Search box on the Windows Start
menu.
2 When the Windows Firewall window appears, click Inbound Rules
in the left pane, and then locate Autodesk Content Service in the
list of inbound rules.
3 Right-click on Autodesk Content Service and select Properties.
4 Select the Advanced tab.
5 Select the Protocols and Ports tab to see the settings for Autodesk
Content Service.
Make sure that the Autodesck Content Service is on port 50248
and is using TCP protocol. Different settings could cause
connection issues.

You cannot open or insert a file from a network machine in Content Explorer
Autodesk Content Service runs as a local system on the computer where it is
installed. It will index any files that it has access to within the specified
watched folders. Searching is based on the permissions of the local system-even if you are searching from a remote client.
When searching, any user will be able to see any of the files that are indexed.
If a user cannot open and insert any of these files, check that the Windows
permissions for those files allow local system access.

Text and objects within an xref are not searchable
If your files contain external references, the text and objects within those
references won’t be extracted for the parent file. Therefore, text and objects
within an xref won’t be searchable within the content of the parent file.

Troubleshooting Content Explorer | 145

You cannot find the Plug-ins tab on the ribbon or the Explorer button does
not show up on the Plug-ins tab
If the Plug-ins tab does not show up on the ribbon or the Explorer button
does not show up on the Plug-ins tab of the ribbon, one reason might be that
Content Explorer is not loaded as an add-in.
To manually reload Content Explorer as an add-in
1 Go to the AutoCAD command line.
2 Type CUILOAD.
3 If CONTENTEXPLORER is in the list, click the Unload button to unload
it.
4 Browse for the contentexplorer.cuix file.
5 Once you located the file, click the Load button to re-load it.
The Plug-ins tab should now appear on the ribbon with the Explorer
button.
NOTE You can always start Content Explorer from the command line by
entering CONTENTEXPLORER.

Sheet Set Manager dialog opens every time you open a file in Content
Explorer
If the Sheet Set Manager dialog opens every time you open a file in Content
Explorer, it is because of the SSMAUTOOPEN system variable setting. Change
the setting to suppress the dialog. Refer to SSMAUTOOPEN for more
information.

There is no ribbon access in AutoCAD ecscad for Content Explorer
AutoCAD ecscad does not support the ribbon interface. Use the following
commands to open and close the Content Explorer window.
■

To open Content Explorer, enter CONTENTEXPLORER on the command
line.

■

To close Content Explorer, enter CONTENTEXPLORERCLOSE on the
command line.

146 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations

Indexing process is producing errors
There are various reasons why the indexing process might encounter an issue.
If you suspect that there were issues when watched folders were being indexed,
you can review the indexing statistics to find out more about the errors.
To review the indexing statistics in Content Explorer
1 In Content Explorer, click Configure Settings.
2 On the Configure Settings dialog, select either your local computer or a
network content source and click the Statistics tab.

3 Expand the indexing statistics for a file or folder to see a list of known
issues.
4 If the indexing service stalled without any current actions, remove the
watched folder and re-add it for indexing.
This action will start the indexing process over and will resolve most
issues.
NOTE The Statistics tab is also available in the Autodesk Content Service
Administration Console. Refer to the Autodesk Content Service Administration
Console help for more information.

Troubleshooting Content Explorer | 147

148

Customize the Drawing
Environment

You can change many window and drawing environment settings in the Options dialog box.
For example, you can change how often a drawing is automatically saved to a temporary file,
and you can link the program to folders containing files you use frequently.
You can create workspaces to set up a drawing environment that is specific to your drawing
needs. Experiment with different settings until you create the drawing environment that best
fits your needs.

Set Interface Options
You can adjust the application interface and drawing area to match the way
you work.

Set Up the Drawing Area
You can adjust the color and display schemes used in the application and
drawing windows, and control the behavior of general features such as grip
editing behavior.
Many of the settings are available from shortcut menus and the Options dialog
box.
Some user interface elements, such as the presence and location of menu items
and palettes, can be specified and saved using the Customize User Interface
Editor.
Some settings affect how you work in the drawing area:
■

Color Scheme (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). You specify a dark
or light color scheme for the overall user interface. The settings affect the

149

window frame background, status bar, title bar, application menu, toolbars,
and palettes.
■

Background Colors (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). You specify
the background colors used in model space, layouts, and the block editor.
Background colors on the Model tab change to indicate whether you are
working in a 2D design context, 3D modeling (parallel projection), or 3D
modeling (perspective projection).

■

UCS Icon and Crosshairs Cursor (Options dialog box, 3D Modeling tab).
You specify that the 3D display options and labels for the UCS icon can
be set in the 3D Modeling tab of the Options dialog box.

■

UCS Icon Style, Size, and Color (UCS Icon dialog box). You can control
the appearance of the UCS icon in model space and paper space.

■

Color Assignments for X, Y, and Z (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors).
In 3D views, any interface elements that are associated with the UCS X, Y,
and Z axis use special color assignments. The X axis is colored or tinted
red, the Y axis is green, and the Z axis is blue. These tints can be turned on
or off in the Drawing Window Colors dialog box.

■

Clean Screen. You can expand the drawing display area to display only
the menu bar, status bar, and command window with the clean screen
button on the application status bar. Click the button again to restore the
previous setup.

■

View Transitions. You can control whether view transitions are smooth or
instantaneous when you pan, zoom, or change from one view to another
(VTOPTIONS command). The default is a smooth transition.

Tooltips
Several types of tooltips provide pop-up information for interaction with
toolbars, object snaps, and drafting operations.
You can view tooltips in toolbars, the application menu, the ribbon, and dialog
boxes. Initially, a basic tooltip is displayed. If you continue to hover, the
tooltip expands to display additional information. You can customize the
display and content of a tooltip.
See also:
■

Display Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Command Reference

■

User Interface Customization in the Customization Guide

150 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

■

Rollover Tooltips in the Customization Guide

■

Create Tooltips and Extended Help for Commands in the Customization
Guide

To set options
1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu,
click Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, click a tab.
3 Set options as desired.
4 Do either or both of the following:
■

Click Apply to record the current options settings in the system
registry.

■

Click OK to record the current options settings in the system registry
and close the Options dialog box.

To customize the colors of the application window elements
1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu,
click Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Display tab, click Colors.
3 In the Drawing Window Colors dialog box, select context and then the
interface element you want to change.
4 Select the color you want to use from the Color list.
To specify a custom color, select Select Color from the Color list.
5 If you want to revert to the default colors, click Restore Current Element,
Restore Current Context, or Restore All Contexts.
6 Click Apply and Close to record the current option settings in the system
registry and close the dialog box.
7 Click OK to close the Options dialog box.

To change the appearance of view transitions
1 At the Command prompt, enter vtoptions.

Set Up the Drawing Area | 151

2 In the View Transitions dialog box, check one or more of the following
options:
■

Enable Animation for Pan and Zoom. Makes a smooth view transition
during panning and zooming.

■

Enable Animation When View Rotates. Makes a smooth view transition
when the view angle is changed.

■

Enable Animation During Scripts. Makes a smooth view transition
while a script is running.

3 Set the transition speed by moving the slider.
4 To preserve performance, set the minimum frames per second for showing
smooth view transitions. When a smooth view transition cannot maintain
this speed, an instant transition is used.
5 Click OK.

To display hidden message dialog boxes
1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu,
click Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, System tab, under General Options, click
Hidden Messages Settings button.
3 The Hidden Message Settings dialog box is displayed.
4 Check the corresponding dialog box name from the tree directory.
5 Click OK.

To turn tooltips on or off
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Display tab, under Window Elements, click
Show Tooltips.
3 Click OK.

152 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

Quick Reference
Commands
3DCONFIG
Sets options that affect 3D display performance.
CLEANSCREENON
Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command
window.
CLEANSCREENOFF
Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used.
DRAGMODE
Controls the way dragged objects are displayed.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
VIEWRES
Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport.
VTOPTIONS
Displays a change in view as a smooth transition.

System Variables
APPLYGLOBALOPACITIES
Applies transparency settings to all palettes.
CALCINPUT
Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are
evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes.
CLEANSCREENSTATE
Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off.
CURSORSIZE
Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size.

Set Up the Drawing Area | 153

DRAGMODE
Controls the display of objects being dragged.
DRAGP1
When hardware acceleration is used, controls how many vectors the system
draws when you drag objects within a 2D viewport before it checks for a new
input sample from the mouse.
DRAGP2
When software acceleration is used, controls how many vectors the system
draws when you drag objects within a 2D viewport before it checks for a new
input sample from the mouse.
EXTNAMES
Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers)
stored in definition tables.
GLOBALOPACITY
Controls transparency level for all palettes.
GRIPCOLOR
Controls the color of unselected grips.
GRIPHOT
Controls the color of selected grips.
GRIPS
Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
HELPPREFIX
Sets the file path for the Help system.
INSUNITS
Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or
xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing.
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE
Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
INSUNITSDEFTARGET
Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.

154 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

INTELLIGENTUPDATE
Controls the graphics refresh rate.
ISAVEBAK
Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings.
ISAVEPERCENT
Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file.
LAYOUTREGENCTL
Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs.
LOCALE
Displays a code that indicates the current locale.
LOCALROOTPREFIX
Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were
installed.
LOCKUI
Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as
DesignCenter and the Properties palette.
LOGFILEMODE
Specifies whether the contents of the command history are written to a log
file.
LOGFILENAME
Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current
drawing.
LOGFILEPATH
Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a
session.
MTEXTED
Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
OLEQUALITY
Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects.

Set Up the Drawing Area | 155

OLESTARTUP
Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads
when plotting.
OSNAPCOORD
Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override
running object snaps.
PAPERUPDATE
Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a
layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default
for the plotter configuration file.
PALETTEOPAQUE
Controls whether palettes can be made transparent.
PICKADD
Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or
add to it.
PICKAUTO
Controls automatic windowing for object selection.
PICKBOX
Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.
PICKDRAG
Controls the method of drawing a selection window.
PICKFIRST
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command.
PICKSTYLE
Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.
PSTYLEPOLICY
Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when
opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or
when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.

156 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

QTEXTMODE
Controls how text is displayed.
RASTERPREVIEW
Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing.
ROLLOVEROPACITY
Controls the transparency of a palette while the cursor moves over the palette.
ROLLOVERTIPS
Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an
object.
SAVEFILE
Stores the current automatic save file name.
SAVEFILEPATH
Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current
session.
SAVETIME
Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes.
SHORTCUTMENU
Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus are
available in the drawing area.
SHORTCUTMENUDURATION
Specifies how long the right button on a pointing device must be pressed to
display a shortcut menu in the drawing area.
SPLINESEGS
Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline
generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command.
TDUSRTIMER
Stores the user-elapsed timer.
TOOLTIPMERGE
Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip.

Set Up the Drawing Area | 157

TOOLTIPS
Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user
interface elements.
VISRETAIN
Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers.
VTDURATION
Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds.
VTENABLE
Controls when smooth view transitions are used.
VTFPS
Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second.
XLOADCTL
Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the
referenced drawing or a copy.

Set Options for 3D Modeling with Perspective Projection
You can set specific display options when working with 3D models using
perspective projection.
Using the Options dialog box, you can specify the following options when
your 3D model is set to use a perspective view:
■

Ground Plane (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). When perspective
projection is turned on, the XY plane of the UCS displays as a ground plane
with a gradient color. The ground plane displays a gradient from the ground
horizon to the ground origin.

■

Sky (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). The area not covered by the
ground plane is the sky, which displays a gradient color from the sky horizon
to the sky zenith.

■

Underground (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). If the ground
plane is viewed from below ground, the ground plane displays a gradient
from the earth horizon to the earth azimuth.

■

Ground Plane Grid (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). When
perspective projection is turned on, the grid displays as a ground plane grid.
Colors are set for major grid lines, minor grid lines, and axis lines.

158 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

Quick Reference
Commands
3DCONFIG
Sets options that affect 3D display performance.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
VIEWRES
Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport.

Set Options for 3D Modeling with Perspective Projection | 159

CURSORSIZE
Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size.
DCTCUST
Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary.
DCTMAIN
Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary.
DEFPLSTYLE
Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a
drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating
a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
DRAGMODE
Controls the way dragged objects are displayed.
EXTNAMES
Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers)
stored in definition tables.
FILLMODE
Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled
in.
GRIPBLOCK
Controls the display of grips in blocks.
GRIPCOLOR
Controls the color of unselected grips.
GRIPHOT
Controls the color of selected grips.
GRIPS
Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
INSUNITS
Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or
xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing.

160 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

INSUNITSDEFSOURCE
Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
INSUNITSDEFTARGET
Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
INTELLIGENTUPDATE
Controls the graphics refresh rate.
ISAVEBAK
Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings.
ISAVEPERCENT
Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file.
LAYOUTREGENCTL
Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs.
LOCALE
Displays a code that indicates the current locale.
LOCALROOTPREFIX
Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were
installed.
LOCKUI
Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as
DesignCenter and the Properties palette.
LOGFILEMODE
Specifies whether the contents of the command history are written to a log
file.
LOGFILENAME
Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current
drawing.
LOGFILEPATH
Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a
session.

Set Options for 3D Modeling with Perspective Projection | 161

MTEXTED
Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
OLEQUALITY
Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects.
OLESTARTUP
Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads
when plotting.
OSNAPCOORD
Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override
running object snaps.
PAPERUPDATE
Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a
layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default
for the plotter configuration file.
PALETTEOPAQUE
Controls whether palettes can be made transparent.
PICKADD
Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or
add to it.
PICKAUTO
Controls automatic windowing for object selection.
PICKBOX
Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.
PICKDRAG
Controls the method of drawing a selection window.
PICKFIRST
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command.
PICKSTYLE
Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.

162 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

PSTYLEPOLICY
Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when
opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or
when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
QTEXTMODE
Controls how text is displayed.
RASTERPREVIEW
Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing.
ROLLOVERTIPS
Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an
object.
SAVEFILEPATH
Stores the current automatic save file name.
SAVEFILEPATH
Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current
session.
SAVETIME
Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes.
SPLINESEGS
Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline
generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command.
TDUSRTIMER
Stores the user-elapsed timer.
TOOLTIPMERGE
Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip.
TOOLTIPS
Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user
interface elements.
VISRETAIN
Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers.

Set Options for 3D Modeling with Perspective Projection | 163

VTDURATION
Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds.
VTENABLE
Controls when smooth view transitions are used.
VTFPS
Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second.
XLOADCTL
Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the
referenced drawing or a copy.

Switch Between Model and Named Layouts
You can control how you change between the Model and one or more named
layouts.
The classic interface provides a Model tab and one or more layout tabs. To
optimize space in the drawing area, you can turn off these tabs and use the
equivalent buttons on the status bar. The control to change between the two
interface designs is included as an item on the Model and layout tab shortcut
menu, and on the shortcut menu of the Model/Layout button on the status
bar.
NOTE Access to all shortcut menu options is available from the tabs only.

To change the Model and layout tabs to status bar buttons
■

Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab. Click Hide Layout and Model
Tabs.

To turn on the Model and layout tabs
■

On the status bar, right-click the Model or layout button. Click Display
Layout and Model Tabs.

164 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

Quick Reference
Commands
DRAGMODE
Controls the way dragged objects are displayed.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
VIEWRES
Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport.

System Variables
APERTURE
Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels.
CALCINPUT
Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are
evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes.
CLEANSCREENSTATE
Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off.
CURSORSIZE
Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size.
DCTCUST
Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary.
DCTMAIN
Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary.
DEFPLSTYLE
Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a
drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating
a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
DRAGMODE
Controls the way dragged objects are displayed.

Switch Between Model and Named Layouts | 165

EXTNAMES
Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers)
stored in definition tables.
FILLMODE
Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled
in.
GRIPBLOCK
Controls the display of grips in blocks.
GRIPCOLOR
Controls the color of unselected grips.
GRIPHOT
Controls the color of selected grips.
GRIPS
Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
INSUNITS
Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or
xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing.
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE
Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
INSUNITSDEFTARGET
Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
INTELLIGENTUPDATE
Controls the graphics refresh rate.
ISAVEBAK
Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings.
ISAVEPERCENT
Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file.
LAYOUTREGENCTL
Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs.

166 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

LOCALE
Displays a code that indicates the current locale.
LOCALROOTPREFIX
Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were
installed.
LOCKUI
Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as
DesignCenter and the Properties palette.
LOGFILEMODE
Specifies whether the contents of the command history are written to a log
file.
LOGFILENAME
Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current
drawing.
LOGFILEPATH
Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a
session.
MTEXTED
Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
OLEQUALITY
Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects.
OLESTARTUP
Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads
when plotting.
OSNAPCOORD
Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override
running object snaps.
PAPERUPDATE
Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a
layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default
for the plotter configuration file.

Switch Between Model and Named Layouts | 167

PALETTEOPAQUE
Controls whether palettes can be made transparent.
PICKADD
Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or
add to it.
PICKAUTO
Controls automatic windowing for object selection.
PICKBOX
Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.
PICKDRAG
Controls the method of drawing a selection window.
PICKFIRST
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command.
PICKSTYLE
Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.
PSTYLEPOLICY
Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when
opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or
when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
QTEXTMODE
Controls how text is displayed.
RASTERPREVIEW
Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing.
ROLLOVERTIPS
Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an
object.
SAVEFILEPATH
Stores the current automatic save file name.

168 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

SAVEFILEPATH
Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current
session.
SAVETIME
Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes.
SPLINESEGS
Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline
generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command.
TDUSRTIMER
Stores the user-elapsed timer.
TOOLTIPMERGE
Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip.
TOOLTIPS
Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user
interface elements.
VISRETAIN
Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers.
VTDURATION
Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds.
VTENABLE
Controls when smooth view transitions are used.
VTFPS
Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second.
XLOADCTL
Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the
referenced drawing or a copy.

Specify Application Fonts
Change the fonts used in the application window and in the text window.

Specify Application Fonts | 169

You can specify the font that is displayed in both the application and text
windows. To change the application font, use the Display tab (Options dialog
box).
NOTE This setting does not affect the text in your drawings.

To change the font displayed in the Command window
1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu,
click Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Display tab, under Window Elements, click
Fonts.
3 In the Command Line Window Font dialog box, select the appropriate
Font, Font Style, and Size.
An example of the current choices appears under Sample Command Line
Font.
4 Click Apply & Close to record the current option settings in the system
registry and close the dialog box.
5 In the Options dialog box, click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

170 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

Specify Application Fonts | 171

172 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

Specify Application Fonts | 173

174 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows
Windows such as the ribbon, Properties palette, tool palettes, and DesignCenter
can be docked, anchored, or floated.
Settings for these and other options are often changed on a shortcut menu,
available by right-clicking the title bar of the palette or window.
■

Resize. Drag an edge of the window to change its size. If the window has
panes, drag the bar between panes to resize the panes.

■

Allow Docking. Select this option if you want to dock or anchor a dockable
window. A docked window adheres to one side of the application window,
causing the drawing area to be resized.

■

Anchor. Attach, or anchor, a dockable window or palette to the left or right
side of the drawing area. An anchored window rolls open and closed as
the cursor moves across it. When an anchored window is open, its content
overlaps the drawing area. An anchored window cannot be set to stay
open. The Allow Docking option must be selected before you can anchor
a window.

■

Auto-hide. A floating window rolls open and closes as the cursor moves
across it. When this option is cleared, the window stays open continuously.
Docked windows with auto-hide show up as a bar inside the application.

■

Transparency. Sets the degree of transparency for the window and on
mouse over. The window becomes transparent so that it does not obscure
objects under it. The window becomes more opaque when it is moused
over. This option is not available for all windows.

Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows | 175

You can hide all the palettes at once with HIDEPALETTES and turn on all
hidden palettes with SHOWPALETTES.
NOTE If a palette has been turned back on manually and moved, it is not affected
by SHOWPALETTES.

To anchor a dockable window
1 At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Propterties button.
Click Allow Docking.
2 Click the Properties button again. Click Anchor Right or Anchor Left.

To float an anchored window
Do one of the following:
■

At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Properties button.
Clear Allow Docking.

■

When the anchored window is open, drag the window title bar away from
the anchor tab base.

■

Double-click the anchor tab.

176 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

To dock a window or palette
1 At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Properties button.
Click Allow Docking.
2 Click and drag the window or palette to a docking location on the right
or left side of the drawing area.
3 When the outline of the window is displayed in the docking area, release
the button.
NOTE To place a toolbar in a docking region without docking it, hold down
the Ctrl key as you drag.

To undock a window or palette
Use one of the following methods:
■

At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Properties button.
Clear Allow Docking.

■

Double-click the double bars on the side or top of the window.

■

Position the cursor on the double bars at the top or side of the window,
hold down the left button on your pointing device, and drag the window
away from its docked location.

To turn Auto-hide on or off for a floating palette or window
■

At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Auto-hide button.

If Auto-hide is selected, floating windows roll open and closed as the cursor
moves across them. When this option is cleared, the full window stays open
continuously.
NOTE This procedure applies to the Tool palette, DesignCenter, the Properties
palette, and several other palettes.

Quick Reference
Commands
DRAGMODE
Controls the way dragged objects are displayed.

Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows | 177

HIDEPALETTES
Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window.
LOGFILEOFF
Closes the command history log file opened by LOGFILEON.
LOGFILEON
Writes the contents of the command history to a file.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
SHOWPALETTES
Restores the display of hidden palettes.
VIEWRES
Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport.
VTOPTIONS
Displays a change in view as a smooth transition.

178 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

DEFPLSTYLE
Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a
drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating
a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
DRAGMODE
Controls the way dragged objects are displayed.
EXTNAMES
Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers)
stored in definition tables.
FILLMODE
Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled
in.
GRIPBLOCK
Controls the display of grips in blocks.
GRIPCOLOR
Controls the color of unselected grips.
GRIPHOT
Controls the color of selected grips.
GRIPS
Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
INSUNITS
Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or
xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing.
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE
Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
INSUNITSDEFTARGET
Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
INTELLIGENTUPDATE
Controls the graphics refresh rate.

Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows | 179

ISAVEBAK
Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings.
ISAVEPERCENT
Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file.
LAYOUTREGENCTL
Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs.
LOCALE
Displays a code that indicates the current locale.
LOCALROOTPREFIX
Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were
installed.
LOCKUI
Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as
DesignCenter and the Properties palette.
LOGFILEMODE
Specifies whether the contents of the command history are written to a log
file.
LOGFILENAME
Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current
drawing.
LOGFILEPATH
Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a
session.
MTEXTED
Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
OLEQUALITY
Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects.
OLESTARTUP
Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads
when plotting.

180 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

OSNAPCOORD
Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override
running object snaps.
PAPERUPDATE
Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a
layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default
for the plotter configuration file.
PALETTEOPAQUE
Controls whether palettes can be made transparent.
PICKADD
Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or
add to it.
PICKAUTO
Controls automatic windowing for object selection.
PICKBOX
Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.
PICKDRAG
Controls the method of drawing a selection window.
PICKFIRST
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command.
PICKSTYLE
Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.
PSTYLEPOLICY
Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when
opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or
when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
QTEXTMODE
Controls how text is displayed.
RASTERPREVIEW
Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing.

Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows | 181

ROLLOVERTIPS
Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an
object.
SAVEFILEPATH
Stores the current automatic save file name.
SAVEFILEPATH
Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current
session.
SAVETIME
Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes.
SPLINESEGS
Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline
generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command.
TDUSRTIMER
Stores the user-elapsed timer.
TOOLTIPMERGE
Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip.
TOOLTIPS
Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user
interface elements.
VISRETAIN
Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers.
VTDURATION
Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds.
VTENABLE
Controls when smooth view transitions are used.
VTFPS
Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second.

182 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

XLOADCTL
Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the
referenced drawing or a copy.

Control the Display of Toolbars
Similar to dockable windows, you can control the behavior of toolbars.
To display or hide toolbars, right-click any toolbar to display a list of toolbars.
A check mark next to a toolbar name indicates that it is displayed. Click a
toolbar name in the list to display or clear the check mark.
A toolbar can be docked or floating. A docked toolbar is attached to any edge
of the drawing area. A toolbar docked at the top edge of the drawing area is
located below the ribbon. Undock a toolbar by clicking the double bars and
dragging it into the drawing area. You can click the title bar and drag it to a
new location or dock it. Resize a floating toolbar by dragging an edge.

Lock the Position of Toolbars and Dockable Windows
Once you have arranged toolbars and docked, floating, or anchored windows
the way you want them, you can lock their position. Locked toolbars and
windows can still be opened and closed and items can be added and deleted.
To unlock them temporarily, press and hold Ctrl.

To lock the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows
■

Do one of the following:
■

Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Window Locking ➤ Floating
Toolbars/Panels.

■

Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Window Locking ➤ Docked
Toolbars/Panels.

■

Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Window Locking ➤ Floating
Windows.

■

Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Window Locking ➤ Docked
Windows.

A lock icon in the system tray indicates whether toolbars or dockable windows
are locked. To unlock them temporarily, hold down Ctrl.

Control the Display of Toolbars | 183

Quick Reference
Commands
CLEANSCREENON
Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command
window.
CLEANSCREENOFF
Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used.
DRAGMODE
Controls the way dragged objects are displayed.
HIDEPALETTES
Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window.
LOGFILEOFF
Closes the command history log file opened by LOGFILEON.
LOGFILEON
Writes the contents of the command history to a file.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
SHOWPALETTES
Restores the display of hidden palettes.
VIEWRES
Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport.
VTOPTIONS
Displays a change in view as a smooth transition.

System Variables
APERTURE
Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels.

184 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

CALCINPUT
Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are
evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes.
CLEANSCREENSTATE
Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off.
CURSORSIZE
Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size.
DCTCUST
Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary.
DCTMAIN
Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary.
DEFPLSTYLE
Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a
drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating
a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
DRAGMODE
Controls the way dragged objects are displayed.
EXTNAMES
Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers)
stored in definition tables.
FILLMODE
Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled
in.
GRIPBLOCK
Controls the display of grips in blocks.
GRIPCOLOR
Controls the color of unselected grips.
GRIPHOT
Controls the color of selected grips.

Control the Display of Toolbars | 185

GRIPS
Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
INSUNITS
Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or
xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing.
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE
Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
INSUNITSDEFTARGET
Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
INTELLIGENTUPDATE
Controls the graphics refresh rate.
ISAVEBAK
Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings.
ISAVEPERCENT
Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file.
LAYOUTREGENCTL
Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs.
LOCALE
Displays a code that indicates the current locale.
LOCALROOTPREFIX
Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were
installed.
LOCKUI
Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as
DesignCenter and the Properties palette.
LOGFILEMODE
Specifies whether the contents of the command history are written to a log
file.

186 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

LOGFILENAME
Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current
drawing.
LOGFILEPATH
Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a
session.
MTEXTED
Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
OLEQUALITY
Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects.
OLESTARTUP
Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads
when plotting.
OSNAPCOORD
Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override
running object snaps.
PAPERUPDATE
Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a
layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default
for the plotter configuration file.
PALETTEOPAQUE
Controls whether palettes can be made transparent.
PICKADD
Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or
add to it.
PICKAUTO
Controls automatic windowing for object selection.
PICKBOX
Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.
PICKDRAG
Controls the method of drawing a selection window.

Control the Display of Toolbars | 187

PICKFIRST
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command.
PICKSTYLE
Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.
PSTYLEPOLICY
Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when
opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or
when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
QTEXTMODE
Controls how text is displayed.
RASTERPREVIEW
Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing.
ROLLOVERTIPS
Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an
object.
SAVEFILEPATH
Stores the current automatic save file name.
SAVEFILEPATH
Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current
session.
SAVETIME
Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes.
SPLINESEGS
Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline
generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command.
TDUSRTIMER
Stores the user-elapsed timer.
TOOLTIPMERGE
Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip.

188 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

Create Task-Based Workspaces
Workspaces are sets of menus, toolbars, palettes, and ribbon control panels
that are grouped and organized so that you can work in a custom, task-oriented
drawing environment.
When you use a workspace, only the menus, toolbars, and palettes that are
relevant to a task are displayed. In addition, a workspace may automatically
display the ribbon, a special palette with task-specific control panels.
For more information about using the ribbon, see The Ribbon on page 25.
You can easily switch between workspaces. The following task-based workspaces
are already defined in the product:
■

2D Drafting & Annotation

■

3D Modeling

■

AutoCAD Classic

For example, when you create 3D models, you can use the 3D Modeling
workspace that contains only 3D-related toolbars, menus, and palettes.

Create Task-Based Workspaces | 189

Interface items that you do not need for 3D modeling are hidden, maximizing
the screen area available for your work.
When you make changes to your drawing display (such as moving, hiding,
or displaying a toolbar or a tool palette group) and you want to preserve the
display settings for future use, you can save the current settings to a workspace.

Switch Workspaces
You can switch to another workspace whenever you need to work on a different
task from the Workspace icon on the status bar.
NOTE Saved workspaces are also accessible from the Quick Access toolbar.

Create or Change a Workspace
You can create your own workspaces and modify the default workspaces. To
create or change a workspace, use either of the following methods:
■

Display, hide, and rearrange your toolbars and windows, modify your
ribbon settings, and then save the current workspace from the Workspaces
icon in the Quick Access toolbar, status bar, Workspaces toolbar or the
Window menu, or use the WORKSPACE command.

■

For more extensive changes, open the Customize User Interface dialog box
to set up the workspace environment.

190 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

You can control the display order of your saved workspaces and other options
in the Workspace Settings dialog box.
NOTE For more information about creating or modifying workspaces, and how
toolbars and menus interact with workspaces, see Customize Workspaces in the
Customization Guide.

Select a Sample Workspace
You can experiment with the sample workspace included with the product.
This predefined workspace demonstrates how you might use a workspace to
streamline your work tasks.
You can find the sample workspace in the following location:
:\Documents and Settings\\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD
2012\\\Support\acadSampleWorkspaces.cuix
To use the sample workspace, you must first transfer it to your main
customization (CUIx) file. To learn more about transferring a workspace, see
Transfer and Migrate Customization in the Customization Guide.

Workspaces and Profiles
Workspaces work with and complement the control over your drawing
environment that profiles provide.
Workspaces control the display of menus, toolbars, and palettes in the drawing
area. When you use or switch a workspace, you change the display of your
drawing area. You manage your workspaces from the Customize User Interface
dialog box.
Profiles save environment settings including many of your user options, drafting
settings, paths, and other values. Profiles are updated each time you make a
change to an option, setting, or other value. You can manage your profiles
from the Options dialog box.
NOTE When you make changes to the drawing display, the changes are stored
in your profile and are displayed the next time you launch the program, regardless
of your workspace settings. The profile changes are not automatically saved to a
workspace unless you select the Automatically Save Workspace Changes option
in the Workspace Settings dialog box. To preserve profile settings in a workspace,
click Save Current As from the shortcut menu of the workspace icon on the status
bar.
For more information about profiles, see Save and Restore Interface Settings
(Profiles) on page 193.

Create Task-Based Workspaces | 191

To switch workspaces
1 On the status bar, click Workspace Switching.
2 From the list of workspaces, select the workspace you want to switch to.
The workspace with a check mark is your current workspace.

To change workspace settings
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Workspaces ➤ Workspace Settings.
2 In the Workspace Settings dialog box, change workspace settings as
needed.
3 Click OK.

To save a workspace
1 Tools ➤ Workspaces ➤ Save Current As.
2 In the Save Workspace dialog box, enter a name for the new workspace
or select a name from the drop-down list.
3 Click Save.

Quick Reference
Commands
WORKSPACE
Creates, modifies, and saves workspaces and makes a workspace current.
WSSAVE
Saves a workspace.
WSSETTINGS
Sets options for workspaces.

System Variables
WORKSPACELABEL
Controls whether to display the name of the current workspace in the status
bar.

192 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

WSAUTOSAVE
Saves changes you made to a workspace when you switch to another work
space.
WSCURRENT
Returns the current workspace name at the Command prompt and sets a
workspace to current.

Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles)
Profiles store drawing environment settings. You can create profiles for different
users or projects, and you can share profiles by importing and exporting them
as files.
Profiles store settings such as the following:
■

Default search and project file paths

■

Template file locations

■

Initial folder specified in file navigation dialog boxes

■

Default linetype and hatch pattern files

■

Printer defaults

Profile information is typically set on the Files tab of the Options dialog box,
stored in the system registry, and can be exported to a text file (an ARG file).

Use Profiles for Shared Computers or Different Projects
Use the Profiles tab in the Options dialog box to create and save your drawing
environment settings as a profile. If you share your workstation with other
users who use the same login name, you can restore your options by making
the profile current. You can also create and save profiles to use with different
projects. By default, your current options are stored in a profile named
<>. The current profile name, as well as the current drawing
name, are displayed in the Options dialog box.

Transfer Profiles between Computers
Once you save a profile, you can export or import the ARG file to and from
different computers. This is useful for copying, restoring, or standardizing
project-oriented work environments over a network.

Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles) | 193

If you make changes to your current profile during a work session and you
want to save those changes in an ARG file, you must re-export the profile.
When you export the profile with the current profile name, the ARG file is
updated with the new settings.
For more information about profiles, see OPTIONS in the Command Reference.

To make a profile current
1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu,
click Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Profiles tab, select the profile you want to
make current.
3 Click Set Current.
4 Click OK.

To save a profile
1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu,
click Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Profiles tab, click Add to List.
3 In the Add Profiles dialog box, enter a Profile name and Description.
4 Click Apply & Close to record the current option settings in the system
registry and close the dialog box.
5 Click OK.

To make a profile current before starting the program
1 On the Windows desktop, right-click the program icon. Click Properties.
2 In the AutoCAD Properties dialog box, Shortcut tab, under Target, enter
/p currentprofile after the current target directory. For example, to make
the profile User12 current, enter the following in Target:
"c:\Program Files\\acad.exe"/p user12
3 Click OK.
The profile name you enter is the current profile each time you start the
program.

194 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

Quick Reference
Commands
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

System Variables
CPROFILE
Displays the name of the current profile.

Customize Startup
Command line switches can specify a separate startup routine for each project.
You can use command line switches to specify several options when you start
the program. For example, you can run a script, start with a specified drawing
template, and display a specified view when a drawing is opened. With
command line switches, you can also set up several program icons, each with
different start-up options.
Command line switches are parameters you can add to the acad.exe command
®
®
line associated with a Microsoft Windows shortcut icon or the Windows
Run dialog box. You can include several switches within a single command
line. Valid switches are listed in the following table.
/b

Script name

Designates a script to run after you start the
program (b stands for batch process). Scripts
can be used to set up drawing parameters
in a new drawing file. An SCR file type is assumed.

Template file name

Creates a new drawing based on a template
or prototype drawing. A DWT file type is
assumed.

Configuration folder

Specifies the path for the hardware configuration file that you want to use. You can
specify a directory or a particular file. A CFG
file type is assumed.
If you don't set the /c switch, the executable
directory is searched and the ACADCFGW

Customize Startup | 195

or ACADCFG environment variable is used
as a way to define the configuration file and
directory location.
/v

View name

Designates a particular view of the drawing
for display at startup.

/ld

ARX or DBX application

Loads a specified ARX or DBX application.
Use the following format:
\.ARX
If the path or file name contains spaces, then
the path or file name should be wrapped in
double quotes. If no path information is included, the program search path is used.

Support folders

Designates support folders other than the
current folder. Drawing support files include
text fonts, menus, AutoLISP files, linetypes,
and hatch patterns. The maximum number
of folders you can specify in the path is 15.
Each folder name is delimited by semicolons.

Default system pointing
device

Restores the default system pointing device.
It creates a new configuration file
(acad2010.cfg) and renames the previous
configuration file to acad2010.bak.

/nologo

No AutoCAD logo screen

Starts the program without first displaying
the logo screen.

User-defined registry
profile for starting the
program

Specifies a user-defined registry profile for
starting the program. The selected profile is
in effect only for the current session of the
program, unless you make another profile
current in the Options dialog box during
that session.
You create or import profiles on the Profiles
tab in the Options dialog box. With the /p
switch, you can specify the name of a profile
that is listed in the Options dialog box or
the file name of an exported profile (ARG)
file. If the profile does not exist, the current
profile is used.

196 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

/nohardware

Disables hardware
acceleration

Disables hardware acceleration on startup.

/nossm

No Sheet Set Manager
window

Suppresses the display of the Sheet Set
Manager window on startup.

/set

Sheet set

Loads the named sheet set on startup. Use
the following format:
\.DST

Default workspace

Designates which workspace in the loaded
CUIx files should be restored on startup.

/pl

Background plotting/publishing

Publishes a drawing set descriptions (DSD)
file in the background. Use the following
format:
\.DSD

The syntax for using command line switches is
"drive:pathname\acad.exe" ["drawingname"] [/switch "name"]
When using a switch option, you must follow the switch with a space and
then the name of a file, path, or view within quotation marks. For example,
the following entry starts the program from a folder named AutoCAD 2012
with the drawing template arch1.dwt, restores a named view PLAN1, and
executes a script file startup.scr.
"d:\AutoCAD 2012\acad.exe”/t "d:\AutoCAD 2012\template\arch1" /v "plan1"
/b "startup"
The environment settings are resolved in the following way:
■

If you use a command line switch to specify an environment setting, the
command line switch overrides the settings specified in either the Options
dialog box or the environment variable.

■

If a command line switch is not set, the corresponding value set in the
Options dialog box is used.

■

If neither a command line switch nor an Options value is set, the
environment variable value is used.

Customize Startup | 197

NOTE Command line switches and environment variables override values set in
the Options dialog box for the current session only. They do not alter the system
registry.

To start the program with a command line switch
1 Right-click the program icon on the Windows desktop. Click Properties.
2 In the AutoCAD Properties dialog box, Shortcut tab, in the Target box,
edit the parameters for the switch using the following syntax:
"drive:pathname\acad.exe" ["drawing name"] [/switch "name"]
Valid switches are as follows:
/b

Script name (b stands for batch process)

Template file name

Configuration folder

View name

Support folders

Default system pointing device

/nologo

No AutoCAD logo screen

/nohardware

Disables hardware acceleration

User-defined registry profile

/nossm

No Sheet Set Manager window

/set

Sheet Set name

Default workspace

/pl

Background plotting/publishing for a Drawing Set Descriptions (DSD) file

For example, enter "d:\AutoCAD 2012\acad.exe" /t "d:\AutoCAD
2012\template\arch1" /v "plan1" /b "startup"

198 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

3 Click OK.

Play Back an Action Macro
After an action macro is recorded with the Action Recorder, you can play back
the series of recorded commands and input values.
You play back an action macro from the Action Recorder panel. You can also
enter the name of the action macro at the Command prompt. As an action
macro is played back, you might be paused for input or requested to respond
to a message or requested to insert a base point.
Based on the current action or request for user interaction in the action macro,
an icon near the cursor is displayed to indicate when the action macro needs
input in order to continue. A dialog box may be displayed where you enter a
value or use the recorded value.
As an action macro is played back, the series of commands are performed one
after the other until playback is complete or an error is encountered. Some of
the reasons for the playback to stop or fail are as follows:
■

Invalid command. The command that is defined in the action macro is
unknown to AutoCAD. The action macro might have been recorded in a
different product or contains custom commands or macros that are not
loaded.

■

Empty selection. The current action expected a selection set of objects, but
no objects were selected.

■

Macro cancelled. The Cancel button in one of the dialogs boxes was clicked.

Location of Action Macros
When you record an action macro, it is saved to the path defined by the system
variable ACTRECPATH. For playback, paths are defined by the system variable
ACTPATH.
Both sets of paths are used when loading and playing back an action macro.
In the Action Recorder Settings node on the Files tab of the Options dialog
box, you can to set the paths used for both recording and reading action macro
files.

Play Back an Action Macro | 199

Record and Modify Action Macros
Recording and modifying action macros is done with the Action Recorder
panel on the ribbon. To learn how to record and modify action macros, see
Record and Modify Action Macros in the Customization Guide.
See also:
■

Record and Modify Action Macros

To play back an action macro from the Action Recorder panel
1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Action Recorder panel. Click the
down arrow next to the Action Macro list and select the action macro to
play back.
2 Click Play.
3 Follow any Command prompts and dialog boxes displayed to complete
the action macro.

To play back an action macro from the Command prompt
■

At the Command prompt, enter the name of the action macro that you
want to play back and press Enter.
For example, if the action macro command name is DRAWLINE, enter
drawline at the Command prompt and press Enter.

To provide user input during playback
1 Start the playback on an action macro.
2 Follow the prompts displayed at the Command prompt.

To change the location used to search for recorded action macros
1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu,
click Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, in the list of nodes, click the plus
sign (+) next to Action Recorder Settings.
3 Click the plus sign (+) next to Additional Actions Reading File Locations,
and specify a folder path.
4 Click OK

200 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment

Quick Reference
Commands
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
RIBBON
Opens the ribbon window.

System Variables
ACTPATH
Specifies the additional paths to use when locating available action macros
for playback.
ACTRECPATH
Specifies the path used to store new action macros.

Migrate Custom Settings and Files
Migrating from an older release of AutoCAD allows you to use your custom
settings and files in the latest release.
One of the challenges when moving from a previous release of AutoCAD to
the latest release is getting the new release to look and behave like the previous
release. You can use Migrate Custom Settings and the Customize User Interface
(CUI) Editor to migrate and transfer your custom settings and files to the latest
release.
See also:
■

Migrate Custom Settings and Files from Previous Releases in the
Customization Guide

■

Basic Customization in the Customization Guide

■

User Interface Customization in the Customization Guide

Migrate Custom Settings and Files | 201

202

Part 3: Start and Save
Drawings

203

204

Start a Drawing

All drawings start from either a default drawing template file or a custom drawing template
file that you create. Drawing template files store default settings, styles, and additional data.

Overview of Starting a New Drawing
Before you start to draw, you need to decide what system of drawing units that
you will use in the drawing, and then choose a drawing template file appropriate
for those drawing units.

Choose Drawing Units
A drawing unit can equal one inch, one millimeter, or any other system of
measurement. For more information about drawing units, see Determine the
Units of Measurement on page 207.

Choose a Drawing Template File
When you start a new drawing, AutoCAD accesses a drawing template file to
determine many default settings such as unit precision, dimension styles, layer
names, a title block, and other settings. Many of the settings are based on
whether the drawing template file is intended for use with a drawing created
in inches, feet, millimeters,centimeters, or other unit of measurement.

205

Customize a Drawing Template File
By customizing your own drawing template file, you save yourself a lot of
work changing settings, and you also ensure that the settings are standardized.
Choose a drawing template file

Start a new drawing, choose a drawing template
----- file similar to what you need for your discipline
and units of measurement.

Specify units and precision

----- Specify a unit format and precision.

Define various styles

----- Specify values and settings for text, dimensions,
and other styles.

Specify additional settings

----- Determine other settings, including layers, grid
spacing, linetypes, and layouts.

Save the drawing template file

----- Save the file in the Template folder using a DWT
file extension.

You can create several drawing template files for different projects, and you
can choose one when you click New.

206 | Chapter 6 Start a Drawing

Quick Reference
Commands
NEW
Creates a new drawing.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
SAVEAS
Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name.

System Variables
MEASUREMENT
Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern
and linetype files.

Specify Units and Unit Formats
Before you start to draw, you decide on the units of measurement to be used
in the drawing, and set the format, precision, and other conventions to be
used in coordinates and distances.

Determine the Units of Measurement
Before you start to draw, you must decide what one drawing unit represents
based on what you plan to draw. You can convert a drawing between systems
of measurement by scaling it.
Every object you create is measured in drawing units. Before you start to draw,
you must decide what one drawing unit will represent based on what you
plan to draw. Then you create your drawing at actual size with that convention.
For example, the objects in the illustration might represent two buildings that
are each 125 feet long, or a section of a mechanical part that is measured in
millimeters.

Specify Units and Unit Formats | 207

Convert Drawing Units
If you start a drawing in one system of measurement (imperial or metric) and
then want to switch to the other system, use SCALE to scale the model
geometry by the appropriate conversion factor to obtain correct distances and
dimensions.
For example, to convert a drawing created in inches to centimeters, you scale
the model geometry by a factor of 2.54. To convert from centimeters to inches,
the scale factor is 1/2.54 or about 0.3937.
See also:
■

Set the Scale for Dimensions on page 1567

To convert a drawing from inches to centimeters

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Scale.
2 At the Select Objects prompt, enter all.
All objects in the drawing are selected for scaling.
3 Enter a base point of *0,0.
Scaling will be relative to the world coordinate system origin and the
location of the drawing origin will remain at the WCS origin.
4 Enter a scale factor of 2.54 (there are 2.54 centimeters per inch).
All objects in the drawing are now 2.54 times larger, corresponding to
the equivalent distance in centimeters.

To convert a drawing from centimeters to inches

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Scale.

208 | Chapter 6 Start a Drawing

2 At the Select Objects prompt, enter all.
All objects in the drawing are selected for scaling.
3 Enter a base point of *0,0.
Scaling is performed relative to the world coordinate system origin, and
the location of the drawing origin will remain at the WCS origin.
4 Enter a scale factor of 0.3937 (the inverse of 2.54 centimeters per inch).
All objects in the drawing are now smaller, corresponding to the
equivalent distance in inches.

Quick Reference
Commands
UNITS
Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision.
SCALE
Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object
the same after scaling.

System Variables
LUNITS
Sets linear units.
LUPREC
Sets the display precision for linear units and coordinates.
MEASUREINIT
Controls whether a drawing you start from scratch uses imperial or metric
default settings.
MEASUREMENT
Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern
and linetype files.
UNITMODE
Controls the display format for units.

Determine the Units of Measurement | 209

Set the Unit Format Conventions
You can set the format and the number of decimal places to be used when
you enter and display linear and angular units.

Set Linear Units
You can choose from several common conventions to represent the format
and the precision of linear distances and coordinates displayed in the Properties
palette, dynamic input, the status bar, and other locations.
For example, here are three variations of dynamic input.

Set Angular Units
You can specify that positive values of angles are measured either clockwise
or counterclockwise, and the direction of angle 0 (usually East or North). You
can enter angles using grads, radians, or surveyor's units or using degrees,
minutes, and seconds.
If you use surveyor's angles when specifying polar coordinates, indicate whether
the surveyor's angles are in the north, south, east, or west direction. For
example, to enter the relative coordinates for a property line that is 72 feet,
8 inches long with a bearing of 45 degrees north, 20 minutes, 6 seconds east,
enter @72'8"/\“:;?*|=‘
In many cases, the layer names you choose are dictated by corporate, industry,
or client standards.
The Layer Properties Manager sorts layers alphabetically by name. If you
organize your own layer scheme, choose layer names carefully. Use common
prefixes to name layers with related drawing components, this makes it easier
to locate and manipulate groups of layers at a time.
NOTE If you consistently use a specific layering scheme, you can set up a drawing
template with layers, linetypes, and colors already assigned. For more information
about creating templates, see Use a Drawing Template File on page 211.

Copy Layers from Another Drawing
™

You can use DesignCenter to copy layers from any drawing to another by
dragging. For example, you might have a drawing that contains all the standard
layers needed for a project. You can create a new drawing and use DesignCenter
to drag the predefined layers to the new drawing, which saves you time and
ensures consistency between drawings.
You can also drag layers or copy layers by double-clicking or by clicking Insert
on the shortcut menu.
NOTE You need to resolve duplicate layer names before you drag layers from
DesignCenter.

522 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

Select a Layer to Draw On
As you draw, newly created objects are placed on the current layer. The current
layer may be the default layer (0) or a layer you create and name yourself. You
switch from one layer to another by making a different layer current; any
subsequent objects you create are associated with the new current layer and
use its color, linetype, and other properties. You cannot make a layer the
current layer if it is frozen or if it is an xref-dependent layer.

Remove Layers
You can remove unused layers from your drawing with PURGE or by deleting
the layer from the Layer Properties Manager. You can delete only unreferenced
layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing
objects (including objects in block definitions), the current layer, and
xref-dependent layers.
WARNING Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a
shared project or one based on a set of layering standards.

To create a new layer

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties.
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the New Layer button.
A layer name, such as LAYER1, is automatically added to the layer list.
3 Enter a new layer name by typing over the highlighted layer name.
4 To change the properties, click icons.
When you click Color, Linetype, Lineweight, or Plot Style, a dialog box
is displayed.
5 (Optional) Click in the Description column and enter text.
6 Click OK.

To remove an unused layer

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties.
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the layer. Click the Delete Layer
button.

Create and Name Layers | 523

Layers that have objects assigned to them cannot be removed until those
objects are reassigned to a different layer or are deleted. Layers 0 and
DEFPOINTS and the current layer cannot be removed.
3 Click OK.

To purge all unused layers

1 Click File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Purge.
The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of object types with items that
can be purged (removed from the drawing).
2 To purge unreferenced layers, use one of the following methods:
■

To purge all unreferenced layers, select Layers.

■

To purge specific layers, double-click Layers to expand the tree view.
Select the layers to be purged.

3 If the item you want to purge is not listed, select View Items You Cannot
Purge, select the layer, and read the explanation.
4 You are prompted to confirm each item in the list. If you do not want to
confirm each purge, clear the Confirm Each Item to Be Purged option.
5 Click Purge.
6 To confirm the purging of each item, respond to the prompt by choosing
Yes or No, or Yes to All if more than one item is selected.
7 Click Close.

Quick Reference
CLASSICLAYER
Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager.
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.
LAYERPALETTE
Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager.

524 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

PURGE
Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.
CLAYER
Sets the current layer.
LAYERDLGMODE
Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of
the LAYER command.

Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties
You can change the name of a layer and any of its properties, including color
and linetype, and you can reassign objects from one layer to another.
Because everything in your drawing is associated with a layer, it's likely that
in the course of planning and creating a drawing, you'll need to change what
you place on a layer or how you view the layers in combination. You can
■

Reassign objects from one layer to another.

■

Change the name of a layer.

■

Change the default color, linetype, or other properties of the layer.

Reassigning an object to a different layer is useful if you create an object on
the wrong layer or decide to change your layer organization. Unless the color,
linetype, or other properties of the object have been set explicitly, an object
that you reassign to a different layer will acquire the properties of that layer.
You change layer properties in the Layer Properties Manager. Click the icons
to change settings, and rename layers or change descriptions.

Undo Changes to Layer Settings
You can use Layer Previous to undo changes you make to layer settings. For
example, if you freeze several layers and change some of the geometry in a
drawing, and then want to thaw the frozen layers, you can do this with a
single command without affecting the geometry changes. In another example,
if you changed the color and linetype of several layers but later decide you
prefer the old properties, you can use Layer Previous to undo the changes and
restore the original layer settings.
When you use Layer Previous, it undoes the most recent layer change or set
of changes made. Every change you make to layer settings is tracked and can

Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties | 525

be undone with Layer Previous. You can use LAYERPMODE to suspend layer
property tracking when you don't need it, such as when you run large scripts.
There is a modest performance gain in turning off Layer Previous tracking.
Layer Previous does not undo the following changes:
■

Renamed layers. If you rename a layer and change its properties, Layer
Previous restores the original properties but not the original layer name.

■

Deleted layers. If you delete or purge a layer, using Layer Previous does
not restore it.

■

Added layers. If you add a new layer to a drawing, using Layer Previous
does not remove it.

Changes in the Layer Properties Manager can be grouped by enabling Combine
Layer Property Change option in User Preferences tab in the Options dialog
box. Layer creation and deletion will be tracked in the Undo list as unique
items.

To change the layer of one or more objects
1 Select the objects whose layer you want to change.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
3 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the layer that you want to assign
to the objects.
4 Press ESC to remove selection.

To change the default linetype assigned to a layer

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers Panel ➤ Layer Properties

2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the linetype for the layer you want
to change.
3 In the Select Linetype dialog box, if the linetype you need is not displayed,
click Load and use one of the following methods:
■

In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, select one or more
linetypes to load. Click OK to return to the Select Linetype dialog box.

526 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

■

In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, click File to open
additional linetype definition (LIN) files. Select one or more linetypes
to load. Click OK to return to the Select Linetype dialog box.

4 Select the linetype you want to use. Click OK to return to the Layer
Properties Manager.
5 Click OK.

To rename a layer

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select a layer. Click the name or press
F2.
3 Enter a new name.
4 Click OK.

To rename more than one layer

1 Click Format ➤ Rename.
2 In the Rename dialog box, in the Named Objects list, Layers.
3 In Old Name, enter the old name, using wild-card characters; for example,
enter stairs$*.
4 In Rename To, enter the new name using wild-card characters; for
example, enter s_*.
Results for this example are as follows: the layers STAIR$LEVEL-1,
STAIR$LEVEL-2, STAIR$LEVEL-3 are renamed S_LEVEL-1, S_LEVEL-2,
S_LEVEL-3.
5 Click OK.

Quick Reference
CHANGE
Changes the properties of existing objects.

Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties | 527

CHPROP
Changes the properties of an object.
CLASSICLAYER
Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager.
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.
LAYERP
Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings.
LAYERPALETTE
Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager.
LAYERPMODE
Turns on and off the tracking of changes made to layer settings.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
PURGE
Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.
RENAME
Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles.
SETBYLAYER
Changes the property overrides of selected objects to ByLayer.
CLAYER
Sets the current layer.
LAYERDLGMODE
Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of
the LAYER command.
LAYERMANAGERSTATE
Indicates whether the Layer Properties Manager is open or closed.
SETBYLAYERMODE
Controls which properties are selected for the SETBYLAYER command.

528 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

Override Layer Properties in Viewports
You can display objects differently by setting property overrides for color,
linetype, lineweight, transparency, and plot style and apply them to individual
layout viewports.
Using property overrides is an efficient way for displaying objects with different
property settings in individual viewports without changing their ByLayer or
ByBlock properties. For example, objects can be made to display more
prominently by changing their color. Because layer property overrides do not
change the layer’s global properties, you can have objects display differently
in various viewports without having to create duplicate geometry or use xrefs
that have different layer settings.

Property override settings for color and lineweight were set on the Wiring layer
for the viewport on the left. Notice the wiring is a different color and lineweight
than in the right viewport.

When the Layer Properties Manager is accessed from a layout tab, five columns
for layer property overrides are displayed
■

VP Color

■

VP Linetype

■

VP Lineweight

■

VP Transparency

■

VP Plot Style (available only in named-plot style drawings)

Override Layer Properties in Viewports | 529

When a property override is set for a layer, a Viewport Overrides filter is
automatically created in the Layer Properties Manager.

If you do not want to display or plot property overrides, set the
VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE system variable to 0. Objects will display and plot
with their global layer properties.
NOTE Property overrides can still be set even when VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE is
set to 0.
Property overrides that are on xref layers are not retained when the VISRETAIN
system variable is set to 0.

Viewport Property Overrides and Visual Styles
Layer property overrides for color, linetype, and lineweights are displayed in
viewports regardless of the visual style that is current. Although plot style
overrides can be set when the visual style is set to Conceptual or Realistic style,
they are not displayed or plotted.

Identify Layers with Property Overrides
Layers containing property overrides are identifiable in the Layer Properties
Manager when accessed from a layout tab. You can see which layers have
overrides by the following:
■

A background color displays for each layer name, override and
corresponding global property setting.

■

A tooltip displays property override information when the cursor is placed
over the status icon for the layer containing overrides.

■

A different icon displays in the Status column.

■

A predefined filter named Viewport Overrides is displayed in the tree view
where all layers with viewport overrides are listed.

530 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

Layers that are assigned property overrides are also identifiable outside of the
Layer Properties Manager. Other areas of the user interface that indicate which
layers are assigned property overrides are as follows:
■

Layers toolbar. A background color displays behind layer names for the
current viewport. For color overrides, the override color is displayed instead
of the global color.

■

Properties toolbar. Displays ByLayer (VP) and a background color for layers
or objects that are assigned property overrides. Override properties are
displayed for color, linetype, and lineweight instead of global properties.

■

Layers panel on the ribbon. A background color displays behind the layer
names in the Layer drop-down list. Override properties are displayed for
color, linetype, and lineweight instead of global properties.

■

Properties panel on the ribbon. A background color displays behind the
color, linetype, lineweight, and plot style controls. Override properties are
displayed for color, linetype, and lineweight instead of global properties.

■

Properties palette. Displays ByLayer (VP) and a background color for layers
or objects that are assigned property overrides. Override properties are
displayed for color, linetype, and lineweight instead of global properties.

NOTE The background color for viewport overrides can be changed in the Layer
Settings dialog box.

Property overrides that are set on the Lighting layer for the current viewport are
indicated by a blue background color.

Override Layer Properties in Viewports | 531

Identify Viewports with Layer Property Overrides
Use the VPLAYEROVERRIDES system variable to check if the current viewport
contains layer property overrides. When VPLAYEROVERRIDES is equal to 1,
the viewport contains overrides.
You can also use the Properties palette to determine if a viewport contains
overrides. The Properties palette displays a Layer Property Overrides field. The
value that displays is the same as the setting for VPLAYEROVERRIDES.

Remove Layer Property Overrides
When you right-click a layer in the Layer Properties Manager, a shortcut menu
is displayed that lists options for removing property overrides. You can remove
■

A single property override from the selected layer for the selected viewport
or for all selected viewports

■

All property overrides from the selected layer for the selected viewport or
for all selected viewports

■

All property overrides from all layers in the selected viewport or for all
selected viewports

NOTE Another method for removing property overrides is to use the shortcut
menu when you right-click the border of the selected viewport or viewports. You
can remove viewport overrides for all layers for that viewport.

To assign property overrides for the current layout viewport
1 On the layout tab, double-click inside a viewport to make it current.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
3 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the global properties to override
in the VP Color, VP Linetype, VP Lineweight, and VP Plot Style columns.

To remove an override from a layer for the current layout viewport
1 On the layout tab, double-click inside a viewport to make it current.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties

532 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

3 In the Layer Properties Manager, right-click the property override on the
layer you want to remove.
4 Click Remove Viewport Overrides For ➤ Property Override (Color,
Linetype, Lineweight, Plot Style) ➤ In Current Viewport Only.

To remove an override from a layer for all layout viewports
1 On the layout tab, double-click inside a viewport to make it current.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
3 In the Layer Properties Manager, right-click the property override on the
layer to remove.
4 Click Remove Viewport Overrides For ➤ Property Override (Color,
Linetype, Lineweight, Plot Style) ➤ In All Viewports.

To remove all overrides from a layer for the current layout viewport
1 On the layout tab, double-click inside a viewport to make it current.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
3 In the Layer Properties Manager, right-click the layer.
4 Click Remove Viewport Overrides For ➤ Selected Layers ➤ In Current
Viewport Only.

To remove all overrides for all layout viewports
1 Click a layout tab.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
3 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the Viewport Overrides filter.
4 Right-click on any layer. Click Remove Viewport Overrides For ➤ All
Layers ➤ In All Viewports.

Override Layer Properties in Viewports | 533

To check if the current layout viewport contains layer property overrides
1 Double-click within a viewport to make it current.
2 At the Command prompt, enter vplayeroverrides.
If VPLAYEROVERRIDES displays 1, the selected viewport contains layer
viewport overrides. If 0 is displayed, no overrides are found.

To control the transparency of objects or layout viewports on a layer

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties.
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, enter a value between 0 and 90 in the
Transparency or VP Transparency columns for each layer you want to
make transparent.
NOTE The VP Transparency column is only available when a Layout tab is
active.
3 Press Enter.

To not display or plot layer viewport overrides
1 At the Command prompt, enter vplayeroverridesmode.
2 Enter 0.

To change the background color for property overrides

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click Settings.
3 In the Layer Settings dialog box, select a color for the viewport override
background color.
4 Click OK.

To save layer viewport overrides in a layer state
1 On a layout tab, double-click in a viewport to make it active.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer States Manager

534 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

3 In the Layer States Manager, click New.
4 In the New Layer State to Save dialog box, enter a name for the new layer
state, or select a name from the list. (Optional) Add a description.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Close to exit the Layer State Manager.

Quick Reference
CHPROP
Changes the properties of an object.
CLASSICLAYER
Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager.
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.
LAYERP
Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings.
LAYERPALETTE
Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager.
LAYERPMODE
Turns on and off the tracking of changes made to layer settings.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
PURGE
Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.
RENAME
Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles.
CLAYER
Sets the current layer.

Override Layer Properties in Viewports | 535

LAYERDLGMODE
Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of
the LAYER command.
VPLAYEROVERRIDES
Indicates if there are any layers with viewport (VP) property overrides for the
current layout viewport.
VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE
Controls whether layer property overrides for layout viewports are displayed
and plotted.

Filter and Sort the List of Layers
You can control which layer names are listed in the Layer Properties Manager
and sort them by name or by property, such as color or visibility.
A layer filter limits the display of layer names in the Layer Properties Manager
and in the Layer control on the Layers toolbar. In a large drawing, you can
use layer filters to display only the layers you need to work with.
There are two kinds of layer filters
■

Layer property filter Includes layers that have names or other properties
in common. For example, you can define a filter that includes all layers
that are red and whose names include the letters mech.

■

Layer group filter Includes the layers that are put into the filter when you
define it, regardless of their names or properties. Selected layers can be
added from the layer list by dragging them to the filter.

The tree view in the Layer Properties Manager displays default layer filters and
any named filters that you create and save in the current drawing. The icon
next to a layer filter indicates the type of filter. Five default filters are displayed
■

All. Displays all the layers in the current drawing. (Filter is always displayed.)

■

All Used. Displays all the layers on which objects in the current drawing
are drawn. (Filter is always displayed.)

■

Xref. If xrefs are attached to the drawing, displays all the layers being
referenced from other drawings.

■

Viewport Overrides. If there are layers with overrides for the current
viewport, displays all layers containing property overrides.

536 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

■

Unreconciled New Layers. If new layers were added since the drawing was
last opened, saved, reloaded, or plotted, displays a list of new unreconciled
layers. See Reconcile New Layers on page 542 for more information.

NOTE The default filters cannot be renamed, edited, or deleted.
Once you have named and defined a layer filter, you can select it in the tree
view to display the layers in the list view. You can also apply the filter to the
Layers toolbar, so that the Layer control displays only the layers in the current
filter.
When you select a filter in the tree view and right-click, options on the shortcut
menu can be used to delete, rename, or modify filters. For example, you can
convert a layer property filter to a layer group filter. You can also change a
property of all layers in a filter. The Isolate Group option turns off all layers
in the drawing that are not in the selected filter.

Define a Layer Property Filter
A layer property filter is defined in the Layer Filter Properties dialog box, where
you select any of the following properties you want to include in the filter
definition:
■

Layer names, colors, linetypes, lineweights, and plot styles

■

Whether layers are in use

■

Whether layers are turned on or off

■

Whether layers are frozen or thawed in the active viewport or all viewports

■

Whether layers are locked or unlocked

■

Whether layers are set to be plotted

You use wild-card characters to filter layers by name. For example, if you want
to display only layers that start with the letters mech, you can enter mech*.
See “Wild-Card Characters” for a complete list.
The layers in a layer property filter may change as the properties of the layers
change. For example, if you define a layer property filter named Site that
includes all layers with the letters site in the name and a CONTINUOUS
linetype, and then you change the linetype of some of those layers, the layers
with the new linetype are no longer part of the Site filter and are not displayed
when you apply that filter.

Filter and Sort the List of Layers | 537

Layer property filters can be nested under other properties filters or under
group filters.

Define a Layer Group Filter
A layer group filter includes only those layers that you explicitly assign to it.
If the properties of the layers assigned to the filter change, the layers are still
part of the filter. Layer group filters can be nested only under other layer group
filters.
TIP Layers from the layer list can be included in a filter by clicking and dragging
the selected layers to the filter.

Invert a Layer Filter
You can also invert a layer filter. For example, if all the site plan information
in a drawing is contained in multiple layers that include the word site as part
of the layer name, you can display all information except site plan information
by first creating a filter definition that filters layers by name (*site*) and then
using the Invert Filter option.

Sort Layers
Once you have created layers, you can sort them by name or other properties.
In the Layer Properties Manager, click the column heading to sort layers by
the property in that column. Layer names can be sorted in ascending or
descending alphabetical order.

Wild-Card Characters
You can use wild-card characters to sort layers by name.
Character

Definition

# (pound)

Matches any numeric digit

@ (at)

Matches any alphabetic character

. (period)

Matches any nonalphanumeric character

* (asterisk)

Matches any string and can be used anywhere in the search
string

? (question mark)

Matches any single character; for example, ?BC matches ABC,
3BC, and so on

538 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

Character

Definition

~ (tilde)

Matches anything but the pattern; for example; ~*AB*matches
all strings that don't contain AB

[]

Matches any one of the characters enclosed; for example,
[AB]C matches AC and BC

[~]

Matches any character not enclosed; for example, [~AB]C
matches XC but not AC

[-]

Specifies a range for a single character; for example, [A-G]C
matches AC, BC, and so on to GC, but not HC

` (reverse quote)

Reads the next character literally; for example, `~AB matches
~AB

NOTE To filter on a layer name that contains a wild-card character, precede the
character with a reverse quote (`) so that it is not interpreted as a wild-card
character.
See also:
■

Reconcile New Layers on page 542

To quickly filter the display of layers by name

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click in Search for Layer below the tree
view.
3 (Optional) To limit your search, select a layer filter in the tree view.
4 Enter a string of characters, including wild-card characters.
The list view displays all layers whose names match the string. For
example, if you enter *mech*, all layers with the letters mech in their
names are displayed.
This quick filter is discarded when the Layer Properties Manager closes.

Filter and Sort the List of Layers | 539

To filter the display of layers by layer property

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the New Property Filter button.
3 In the Layer Filter Properties dialog box, enter a name for the filter.
4 Under Filter Definition, set the layer properties that you want to use to
define the filter.
■

To filter by name, use wild-card characters.

■

To filter by property, click in the column for the property you want.
Some properties display a dialog box when you click the [...] button.

■

To select more than one value for a property, right-click the row in
the filter definition. Click Duplicate Row. Select another value for that
property in the next row.
For example, the definition for a filter that displays only layers that
are on and are either yellow or red has two rows. The first row of the
filter definition has the On icon and red. The second row has the On
icon and yellow.

5 Click OK.

To filter the display of layer names by selecting layers

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the New Group Filter button.
A new layer group filter named GROUP FILTER1 is created in the tree
view.
3 Enter a name for the filter.
4 In the tree view, click All or one of the other nodes to display layers in
the list view.
5 In the list view, select the layers you want to add to the filter, and drag
them to the filter name in the tree view.
6 Click OK.

540 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

To nest a layer filter under another layer filter

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
2 In the Layer Properties Manager tree view, select a layer filter.
■

A new layer property filter can be nested under a group filter or
another property filter.

■

A new layer group filter can be nested only under another group filter.

3 Right-click. Click New Properties Filter or New Group Filter.
4 Use one of the following methods:
■

For a new property filter, the Layer Properties Filter dialog box is
displayed. Under Filter Definition, set the layer properties that you
want to use to define the filter. Click OK.

■

For a new group filter, a filter is added to the tree view. Rename it,
select the parent filter to display its layers in the list view, and drag
layers from the list view to the new layer group filter.

5 Click OK.

To sort the layer list in the Layer Properties Manager

■

Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties

■

In the Layer Properties Manager, click any column heading.

To reverse the sorting order, click a second time.

To remove a layer from a layer group filter

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
2 In the Layer Properties Manager tree view, select a group filter.
3 Select the layer you want to remove.
4 Right-click in the list view. Click Remove from Group Filter.

Filter and Sort the List of Layers | 541

Quick Reference
CLASSICLAYER
Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager.
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.
LAYERPALETTE
Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager.
LAYERDLGMODE
Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of
the LAYER command.
MAXSORT
Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block names sorted by listing
commands.

Reconcile New Layers
Unreconciled layers are new layers that have been added to the drawing and
have not yet been acknowledged by the user and manually marked as
reconciled.
Reconciling new layers is the process of manually reviewing new layers so that
you can avoid potential errors before plotting your drawing or when restoring
a layer state.
Unreconciled layers are new layers that have been added to the drawing or to
attached xrefs since the layer list was last evaluated. The layer list is checked
for new layers when a command, such as PLOT is used. In new drawings, the
layer baseline is created when the drawing is saved or plotted for the first time.
When a new drawing is first saved, the layer baseline is created, and all layers
present in the saved drawing are considered reconciled (not new). Layers that
are added after a drawing is first saved are considered new unreconciled layers.
NOTE The layer baseline is created when the LAYEREVAL system variable is set to
1 or 2.
When a command that is set in the Layer Settings dialog box or LAYEREVAL
system variable is used, the layer list is checked at that time and compared to
the baseline. If there are new layers, notification will display and the

542 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

Unreconciled New Layers filter is automatically created and activated in the
Layer Properties Manager.
Unreconciled layers become reconciled by right-clicking the layer and clicking
the Reconcile Layer option. Once a layer has become reconciled, it is removed
from the Unreconciled New Layers filter. After all new layers are reconciled,
the Unreconciled New Layers filter is removed.

NOTE You can reconcile multiple unreconciled layers at the same time.

Quick Reference
CLASSICLAYER
Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager.
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.
LAYERPALETTE
Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager.
LAYERDLGMODE
Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of
the LAYER command.
LAYERNOTIFY
Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found.
LAYEREVAL
Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the
drawing or to attached xrefs.

Use New Layer Notification
You can be notified when new layers are added to the drawing before certain
tasks, such as plotting, saving, or restoring a layer state.

Use New Layer Notification | 543

It is important to be aware of new layers that have been added to a drawing
or to an attached xref without your knowledge. You can avoid potential
problems, such as plotting objects that were added to the drawing by the
addition of a new layer.
You can control when to evaluate a drawing for new layers. You can specify
which commands, such as SAVE or PLOT, trigger the program to check the
layer list and alert you of new layers. This can include new layers that have
been added to attached xrefs.
The LAYEREVAL and LAYERNOTIFY system variables work together to control
whether the layer list is evaluated and when notification occurs. Both system
variables are saved in the drawing so you have control over which drawings
are checked for new layers. When a project is started, it may not be necessary
to know when new layers have been created. For drawings that are nearing
completion, it may be important to be aware if new information has been
introduced into the drawing from the addition of new layers.
The LAYEREVALCTL controls the overall Unreconciled New Layer filter list
in the Layer Properties Manager which is evaluated for new layers. When the
New Layer Notification is checked (LAYEREVALCTL = 1), the new layer
notification feature is enabled and functions based on the LAYEREVAL and
LAYERNOTIFY drawing system variables. There should be no filter
(Unreconciled Layer filter) displayed when LAYEREVALCTL = 0. If one is
currently displayed, it will be turned off.
By default, LAYEREVAL is set to detect any new layers that have been added
to attached xrefs but not in the drawing. LAYERNOTIFY is set to notify you
of new layers when opening the drawing, when loading, reloading, or attaching
xrefs, or when restoring a layer state. To make changes to these settings, you
can either use the system variables or the Layer Settings dialog box.
When layer notification is turned on, an Unreconciled New Layers icon displays
on the status bar.

At that time, you can choose to view the new layers by right-clicking the icon
and clicking the View Unreconciled New Layers link from the menu. When
you click the link, the Layer Properties Manager opens, and the Unreconciled
New Layers filter is automatically selected. All new layers that have been added
to the drawing or attached xrefs are displayed in the list view.

544 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

The new layers are unreconciled because they have not yet been reviewed. The
process of manually marking them as reconciled removes them from the
Unreconciled New Layers list. (See Reconcile New Layers on page 542 for more
information.) Until you reconcile the layers, the notification bubble will
display each time the command that triggered the notification is used.
By using the LAYERNOTIFY system variable or the Layer Settings dialog box,
you can turn off layer notification but still have the layer list evaluated for
new layers. Although the notification bubble does not display, you can still
check for new layers by right-clicking the alert icon on the status bar. From
the shortcut menu, click the View Unreconciled New Layers option.

New Layer Notification for Plotting
When the PLOT command is set to display new layer notification in the Layer
Settings dialog box, a dialog box is displayed instead of an icon on the status
bar. A message informs you that there are new layers in the drawing since the
layer list was last checked for new layers. Click Yes in the dialog box to view
the new layer list in the Layer Properties Manager before plotting.

Saving a Template (DWT) File
When saving a drawing as a template (DWT) file, you can choose to save the
layers in the drawing as unreconciled or reconciled in the Template Options
dialog box. By default, all layers are saved as unreconciled, so that when a
new drawing is started using the template, a layer baseline is not yet created
until the drawing is first saved as a DWG file.
If the template file is saved with all layers as reconciled, a layer baseline is
created. That means when new layers are added to the drawing that is created
from the template file, any new layers that are created are unreconciled and
a new layer notification will display when the drawing is first saved or plotted.

Use New Layer Notification | 545

Opening Multiple Drawings
When opening multiple drawings at the same time, an alert displays for each
drawing that contains new layers. This behavior occurs if layer notification is
turned on and the OPEN command is specified in the LAYERNOTIFY system
variable for each drawing.

To set new layer notification on and off

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click Settings.
3 In the Layer Settings dialog box, click Evaluate New Layers Added to
Drawing.
4 Click Notify When New Layers are Present. Select one or more options.
5 Click OK.
6 Click OK to exit the Layer Properties Manager.

To set when new layer notification is displayed

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click Settings.
3 In the Layer Settings dialog box, click Evaluate New Layers Added to
Drawing.
4 Click Notify When New Layers are Present.
5 Select the commands that will cause the layer list to be evaluated for new
layers.
6 Click OK.

Quick Reference
CLASSICLAYER
Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager.

546 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.
LAYERPALETTE
Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager.
LAYERDLGMODE
Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of
the LAYER command.
LAYEREVALCTL
Controls the overall Unreconciled New Layer filter list in Layer Properties
Manager which is evaluated for new layers.
LAYERNOTIFY
Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found.
LAYEREVAL
Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the
drawing or to attached xrefs.

Work with Layer States
You can save layer settings as named layer states. You can then restore, edit,
import them from other drawings and files, and export them for use in other
drawings.

Save, Restore, and Edit Layer States
You can save the current layer settings to a layer state, make changes to the
layer state, and restore them to the drawing later.
You can save the current layer settings in a drawing as a named layer state
and restore them later. Saving layer settings is convenient if you need to return
to particular settings for all layers during different stages in completing a
drawing or for plotting.

Save Layer Settings
Layer settings include layer states, such as on or locked, and layer properties,
such as color or linetype. In a named layer state, you can choose which layer
states and layer properties you want to restore later. For example, you can

Work with Layer States | 547

choose to restore only the Frozen/Thawed setting of the layers in a drawing,
ignoring all other settings. When you restore that named layer state, all settings
remain as they are currently set except whether each layer is frozen or thawed.

Save Layer Property Override Settings
When layers contain viewport property overrides, those settings are saved to
a layer state when the viewport that contains overrides is active.
If the layer state is saved from model space, any layer property override settings
are not included. This is because only one value can be saved for each layer
property in a layer state. If layer property overrides need to be saved in the
layer state, make the viewport active on the layout tab and then save the layer
state.

Restore Layer Settings
When you restore a layer state, the layer settings (layer states and layer
properties) that were specified when the layer state was saved are restored.
You can specify specific settings to restore in the Layer States Manager. The
layer property settings that are not selected remain unchanged in the drawing.
If the drawing contains layers that were added since a layer state was saved,
you can add those layers. By editing the layer state and using the Select Layers
to Add to Layer State dialog box you can select the layers you want to add to
the layer state.
NOTE To be notified when new layers are added to the drawing, use the
LAYEREVAL and LAYERNOTIFY system variables.
When restoring layer states, the following additional behaviors can occur
■

When restoring a layer state, the layer that was current when the layer
state was saved is made current. If that layer no longer exists, the current
layer does not change.

■

If a layout viewport is active when a layer state is restored, and the Visibility
in Current VP restore option is selected, all layers that need to be visible
in the viewport are turned on and thawed in model space. All layers that
should not be visible in the viewport are set to VP Freeze in the current
viewport and the model space visibility is unchanged.

The Layers panel on the RIBBON contains controls for selecting and restoring
saved layer states, including a button to access the Layer States Manager. The
name of the last restored layer state is displayed in the Layers panel. When
the layers are modified so that the current layer state is no longer current,

548 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

“Unsaved Layer State” is displayed instead of the name of the last restored
layer state.

Restore Property Override Settings
When the Apply Properties as Viewport Overrides restore option is selected
in the Layer States Manager, viewport overrides are restored to the viewport
that is current at the time the layer state is restored.
When a layer state is saved in model space and is restored in paper space,
■

You can choose whether color, linetype, lineweight, transparency, or plot
style properties are restored as viewport overrides.

■

Viewport overrides are applied to the current layout viewport.

■

Layers that were turned off or frozen in model space are set to VP Freeze
in the Layer Properties Manager for the active layout viewport.

When a layer state is saved in paper space and is restored in model space,
■

Layer property overrides are restored as global layer properties in model
space.

■

Layers that were frozen in a layout viewport are also frozen in model space.

Edit Saved Layer Settings
Using the Edit Layer State dialog box, you can modify the properties of each
layer saved in a layer state.
All properties other than the layer name can be edited. Properties for multiple
layers can be changed at the same time.
You can also add layers to a layer state through the Select Layers to Add to
Layer State dialog box. For example, if new layers were added since the layer
state was saved, you can add them and resave the layer state. To delete layers,
use the Delete button in the Edit Layer State dialog box.

Layer States in Xrefs
When a drawing containing layer states is inserted in the host drawing, the
xref layer states are displayed in the Layer States Manager. The layer states are
listed by name and can be viewed in the Edit Layer State dialog box.
When an xref containing layer states is attached to the host drawing, those
layer states are also listed in the Layer States Manager. Although they can be
restored, they cannot be edited. Xref layer states are identifiable because the

Work with Layer States | 549

layer state name is preceded by the xref drawing’s name and separated by a
double underscore symbol. (Example: Xref Name__Layer State Name.) When
the xref is bound to the host drawing, layer states are identifiable by $0$ that
displays between the xref name and layer state name. (Example: Xref
Name$0$Layer State Name.)
Layer states from nested xrefs are also included. Layer states from xrefs are
removed from the host drawing when the xref is detached or unloaded.

To save layer settings in a named layer state
1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State.
2 In the Layer States drop-down list, click New Layer State.
3 In the New Layer State to Save dialog box, enter a name for the new layer
state, or select a name from the list.
4 (Optional) Add a description.
5 Click Close.
6 In the Layer States Manager, select the layer properties to restore by
default.
7 (Optional) Select the Turn Off New Layers Not Found in Layer State
option.
When this option is selected and you restore a named layer state, the
drawing looks the same way it did when the named layer state was saved.
8 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager.

To restore a layer state
1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State.
2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States.
3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select a named layer state.
4 Click More to select any specific layer properties you want to restore.
5 Click Restore.

To add layers to a layer state
1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State.
2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States.

550 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select the named layer state that
you want to add layers to.
4 Click Edit.
5 In the Edit Layer State dialog box, click Add.
6 In the Select Layers to Add to Layer State dialog box, select the layers you
want to add.
7 Click OK.
8 Click OK to exit the Edit Layer State dialog box.
9 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager.

To delete layers from a layer state
1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State.
2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States.
3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select the named layer state you
want to delete layers from.
4 Click Edit.
5 In the Edit Layer State dialog box, select the layers to delete and click the
Delete button.
6 Click OK.
7 Click OK to exit the Edit Layer State dialog box.
8 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager.

To include description and material properties to a layer state imported
from a previous release
1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State.
2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States.
3 In the Layer States Manager, select the layer state that was imported from
a previous release.
4 Click Restore to restore the layer state.
5 Open the Layer States Manager. Click New.

Work with Layer States | 551

6 In the New Layer State to Save dialog box, enter a new name for the layer
state. In the Description field, enter descriptive text about the layer
settings.
7 Click OK.
8 (Optional) Click Delete to remove the legacy layer state.
9 Click Close.
Description and material properties are saved with the updated layer state.

To select a layer state to restore
1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State.
2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States.
3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select the layer state you want
to restore.
4 Click More and select any specific layer properties you want to restore.
5 Click Restore.
The Layer States Manager closes.

Quick Reference
LAYERSTATE
Saves, restores, and manages named layer states.
LAYERNOTIFY
Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found.
LAYEREVAL
Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the
drawing or to attached xrefs.

Import and Export Layer States
You can import layer settings from other drawings and export layer states.
You can import layer states that are saved in drawing files (DWG, DWS, and
DWT) and from layer state (LAS) files. When importing layer states from a

552 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

drawing file, you can choose multiple layer states to import from the Select
Layer States dialog box. When exporting layer states, they are created as LAS
files.
If the layer state is imported from a drawing and it contains a layer property,
such as a linetype or plot style that is not loaded or available in the current
drawing, that property is automatically imported from the source drawing.
If the layer state is imported from an LAS file, and it contains linetype or plot
style properties that do not exist in the drawing, a message is displayed
notifying that the property could not be restored.
NOTE When a layer state contains more than one property that cannot be restored
from an LAS file, the message that displays only indicates the first property it
encountered that cannot be restored.
When importing a layer state from an LAS file or from another drawing that
are duplicates of layer states in the current drawing, you can choose to
overwrite the existing layer state or not import it.
Layer states can be imported into a previous release of the program.

Layer States from LMAN
Layer states that were created using the LMAN Express Tool cannot be
imported. A message is displayed that there are no layer states to import.
You can access LMAN layer states in a drawing through the Layer States
Manager. When the Layer States Manager is first opened in a drawing
containing LMAN layer states, they are automatically converted to AutoCAD
layer states. A dialog box displays the number of layer states that have been
converted.

When the current drawing does not contain any named layer states, the LMAN
layer state names are retained. If the current drawing contains layer states,
LMAN layer state names display with the prefix “LMAN” followed by the
original layer state name.

Work with Layer States | 553

To import saved layer settings from another drawing
1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State.
2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States.
3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, click Import.
4 In the Import Layer State dialog box, select a file name with a .dwg, .dws,
or .dwt file name extension. Click Open.
5 In the Select Layer States dialog box, select the layer states to import.
Click OK.
6 To restore the named layer state now, select it in the Layer States Manager.
and click Restore. Click Close to not restore it.
If you restore the named layer state, the Layer States Manager closes.
7 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager.

To import saved layer settings from a layer state (LAS) file
1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State.
2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States.
3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, click Import.
4 In the Import Layer State dialog box, select the LAS file you want to
import layer states from. Click Open.
5 Click Yes to restore the named layer state now. Click No to add it to the
Layer States Manager without restoring it.
If you restore the named layer state, the Layer States Manager closes.
6 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager.

To export a saved layer state
1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State.
2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States.
3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select the named layer state (LAS)
file you want to export. Click Export.
4 In the Export Layer State dialog box, specify where to export the layer
state file.

554 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

5 Click Save to exit the dialog box.
6 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager.

Work with Colors
Color helps to group objects visually. You can assign colors to objects by layer
or individually.

Set the Current Color
You can use color to help you identify objects visually. You can assign the
color of an object either by layer or by specifying its color explicitly,
independent of layer.
Assigning colors by layer makes it easy to identify each layer within your
drawing. Assigning colors explicitly provides additional distinctions between
objects on the same layer. Color is also used as a way to indicate lineweight
for color-dependent plotting.
You can use a variety of color palettes when assigning color to objects,
including
■

AutoCAD Color Index (ACI)

■

True Color

■

PANTONE Colors

■

RAL™ Classic and RAL Design color books

Work with Colors | 555

■

DIC Color Guide

■

Colors from imported color books.

ACI Colors
ACI colors are the standard colors used in AutoCAD. Each color is identified
by an ACI number, an integer from 1 through 255. Standard color names are
available only for colors 1 through 7. The colors are assigned as follows: 1 Red,
2 Yellow, 3 Green, 4 Cyan, 5 Blue, 6 Magenta, 7 White/Black.

True Colors
True colors use 24-bit color definitions to display over 16 million colors. When
specifying true colors, you can use either an RGB or HSL color model. With
the RGB color model, you can specify the red, green, and blue components
of the color; with the HSL color model, you can specify the hue, saturation,
and luminance aspects of the color.

Color Books
AutoCAD includes several standard PANTONE color books. You can also import
other color books such as the DIC color guide or RAL color sets. Importing
user-defined color books can further expand your available color selections.
You install color books on your system by using the Files tab in the Options
dialog box. Once a color book is loaded, you can select colors from the color
book and apply them to objects in your drawings.
All objects are created using the current color, which is displayed in the Color
property of the Properties palette when no object is selected. You can also set
the current color with the Select Color dialog box.
If the current color is set to BYLAYER, objects are created with the color
assigned to the current layer. If you do not want the current color to be the
color assigned to the current layer, you can specify a different color.
If the current color is set to BYBLOCK, objects are created using color 7 (white
or black) until the objects are grouped into a block. When the block is inserted
into the drawing, it acquires the current color setting.

PANTONE® Color Books
Pantone has updated the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM® with the
PANTONE® PLUS SERIES of Publications that provides a chromatic arrangement
of colors. In AutoCAD-based products, the RGB values of the PANTONE Colors

556 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

that are assigned to objects are preserved in all current and legacy drawing
files.
Color book (.acb) files provide access through the Select Color dialog box to
the names of all PANTONE Colors and color books. These .acb files are installed
in the \Support\Color folder in the AutoCAD installation folder.

To set an ACI color for all new objects

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color.
2 In the Object Color drop-down list, click a color to draw all new objects
in that color, or click Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box
and do one of the following:
■

On the Index Color tab, click a color or enter the color name or
number in the Color box.

■

On the Index Color tab, click BYLAYER to draw new objects in the
color assigned to the current layer.

■

On the Index Color tab, click BYBLOCK to draw new objects in the
current color until they are grouped into a block. When the block is
inserted into the drawing, the objects in the block acquire the current
color setting.

3 Click OK.
The Color control displays the current color.

To set a true color for all new objects

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color.
2 In the Object Color drop-down list. click Select Color to display the Select
Color dialog box.
3 In the Select Color dialog box, True Color tab, do one of the following:
■

Select the HSL color model in the Color Model box. Specify a color
by entering a color value in the Color box or by specifying values in
the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance boxes.

Set the Current Color | 557

■

Select the RGB color model in the Color Model box. Specify a color
by entering a color value in the Color box or by specifying values in
the Red, Green, and Blue boxes.

4 Click OK.
The Color control displays the current color.

To set a color from a color book for all new objects

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color.
2 In the Object Color drop-down list, click Select Color.
3 In the Select Color dialog box, Color Book tab, select a color book from
the Color Book box.
4 Select a color by clicking on a color chip. To browse through the color
book, use the up and down arrows on the color slider.
5 Click OK.
The Color control displays the current color.

Quick Reference
COLOR
Sets the color for new objects.
CECOLOR
Sets the color of new objects.

Change the Color of an Object
You can change the color of an object by reassigning it to another layer, by
changing the color of the layer the object is on, or by specifying a color for
the object explicitly.
You have three choices for changing the color of an object:
■

Reassign the object to another layer with a different color. If an object's
color is set to BYLAYER, and you reassign the object to a different layer, it
acquires its color from the new layer.

558 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

■

Change the color assigned to the layer that the object is on. If an object's
color is set to BYLAYER, it acquires the color of its layer. When you change
the color assigned to a layer, all objects on that layer assigned the BYLAYER
color are updated automatically.

■

Specify a color for an object to override the layer's color. You can specify
the color of each object explicitly. If you want to override the
layer-determined color of an object with a different one, change an existing
object's color from BYLAYER to a specific color, such as red.

If you want to set a specific color for all subsequently created objects, change
the Color property on the Properties palette when no objects are selected from
BYLAYER to a specific color.
See also:
■

Override Layer Properties in Viewports on page 529

To change the layer of an object
1 Select the objects whose layer you want to change.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties.
3 In the Layers Properties Manager, click the Layer control.
4 Select the layer that you want to assign to the objects.

To change the color assigned to a layer

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties.
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the color you want to change.
3 In the Select Color dialog box, do one of the following:
■

On the Index tab, click a color or enter the ACI color number (1-255)
or name in the Color box. Click OK.

■

On the True Color tab, select the HSL color model in the Color Model
option and specify a color by entering a color value in the Color box
or by specifying values in the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance boxes.
Click OK.

Change the Color of an Object | 559

■

On the Color Books tab, select a color book from the Color Book box;
select a color by navigating the color book (using the up and down
arrows) and clicking on a color chip. Click OK.

4 Click OK to close each dialog box.

To change the color of objects, overriding the layer's color
1 Select the objects whose color you want to change.

2 Click View tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Properties.
Alternatively, you can right-click one of the objects and then, click
Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, select Color.
An arrow is displayed in the right column.
4 Click the arrow and select a color from the list or click Select Color to
display the Select Color dialog box. If you click Select Color, do one of
the following:
■

On the Index tab, click a color or enter the ACI color number (1-255)
or name in the Color box.

■

On the True Color tab, select the RGB color model in the Color Model
box. Specify a color by entering a color value in the Color box or by
specifying values in the Red, Green, and Blue boxes.

■

On the Color Books tab, select a color book from the Color Book box;
select a color by navigating the color book (using the up and down
arrows) and clicking on a color chip. Click OK.

Quick Reference
CHANGE
Changes the properties of existing objects.

560 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

CHPROP
Changes the properties of an object.
COLOR
Sets the color for new objects.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
CECOLOR
Sets the color of new objects.

Use Color Books
When assigning colors to objects, you can choose colors from color books
that are loaded on your system.
You can choose from a wide range of custom colors when using color books.
Color books include third-party or user-defined files that contain named color
swatches. These colors can be used to enhance presentation drawings as well
as to optimize the variety of color used in your drawings. You can apply color
book colors to objects in your drawings by using the Color Books tab in the
Select Color dialog box.

Install Color Books
Color book files must contain an .acb file extension in order to be recognized
by this program. To access color book colors from the Select Color dialog box,
you must first copy your color book files to a specified color book location.
On the Files tab of the Options dialog box, you can define the path where
color book files are stored. Multiple locations can be defined for the color
book path. These locations are saved in your user profile.
After loading a color book on your system, to access the new colors, you need
to close the Select Color dialog box and then open it again. The new color
book is displayed in the Color Book drop-down list on the Color Books tab.
Once you have loaded a color book, you can apply any colors that are defined
in the book to objects in your drawing.

Browse Color Books
Color books are organized alphabetically into pages that you can browse
through. A page holds up to ten colors. If the color book you are browsing

Use Color Books | 561

through is not organized into pages, the colors are arranged into pages, with
each page containing up to seven colors.

To install a color book

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, click Color Book Locations.
3 Click Add to add a color book location.
4 Enter the new location in the blank path box.
5 Click OK.

To search for color swatches within a color book

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color.
2 In the Object Color drop-down list, click Select Color.
3 In the Select Color dialog box, Color Books tab, select a color book from
the Color Book drop-down list.
You must first select any color swatch in the color book in order to
activate the Color edit box.
4 Under Color, enter the number of the color swatch you would like to
locate and press Tab.
The Color edit box and the New color chip display the requested color
or the color that is the closest match.
5 Click OK to apply the color.

To change the default location of color book files

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, double-click Color Book Locations.
3 Select the following default color book location:
C:\Program Files\[current AutoCAD release number]\support\color

562 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

4 Click the location name to edit the path.
5 Enter the new location in the path box.
6 Click OK.

To define multiple folders for the color book path

Quick Reference
CHANGE
Changes the properties of existing objects.
CHPROP
Changes the properties of an object.
COLOR
Sets the color for new objects.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
CECOLOR
Sets the color of new objects.

Work with Linetypes
You can use linetypes to distinguish objects from one another visually and
make your drawing easier to read.

Work with Linetypes | 563

Overview of Linetypes
A linetype is a repeating pattern of dashes, dots, and blank spaces displayed
in a line or a curve. You assign linetypes to objects either by layer or by
specifying the linetype explicitly, independent of layers.
In addition to choosing a linetype, you can set its scale to control the size of
the dashes and spaces, and you can create your own custom linetypes.
NOTE These linetypes should not be confused with the hardware linetypes
provided by some plotters. The two types of dashed lines produce similar results.
Do not use both types at the same time, however, because the results can be
unpredictable.
Some linetype definitions include text and symbols.

You can define a custom linetype that will orient the imbedded text to keep
it readable automatically.

For more information about controlling text in linetypes, see Text in Custom
Linetypes.
See also:
■

“Custom Linetypes” in the Customization Guide

Quick Reference
LINETYPE
Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.

564 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

REVERSE
Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which
is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing
beginning and ending widths.

Load Linetypes
At the start of a project, you load the linetypes that are required for the project
so that they are available when you need them.
If you want to know what linetypes are already available, you can display a
list of linetypes that are loaded in the drawing or stored in an LIN (linetype
definition) file.
This program includes the linetype definition files acad.lin and acadiso.lin.
Which linetype file is appropriate depends on whether you use imperial or
metric measurements.
■

For imperial units, use the acad.lin file.

■

For metric measurements, use the acadiso.lin file.

Both linetype definition files contain several complex linetypes.
If you select a linetype whose name begins with ACAD_ISO, you can use the
ISO pen-width option when you plot.
You can remove unreferenced linetype information with PURGE or by deleting
the linetype from the Linetype Manager. BYBLOCK, BYLAYER, and
CONTINUOUS linetypes cannot be removed.

To load a linetype

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype.
2 In the Linetype drop-down list, click Other. Then, in the Linetype
Manager dialog box, click Load.
3 In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, select a linetype. Click OK.
If the linetype you need is not listed, click File. In the Select Linetype File
dialog box, select an LIN file whose linetypes you want to list and click.
The dialog box displays the linetype definitions stored in the selected
LIN file. Select a linetype. Click OK.

Load Linetypes | 565

You can hold down Ctrl to select several linetypes or SHIFT to select a
range of linetypes.
4 Click OK.

To list the linetypes loaded in the current drawing

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype.
2 Click anywhere outside the box to close it.

To list the linetypes in a linetype definition file

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype.
2 In the Linetype drop-down list, click Other. Then, in the Linetype
Manager dialog box, click Load.
3 In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, click File.
4 In the Select Linetype File dialog box, select an LIN (linetype definition)
file whose linetypes you want to lit. Click Open.
The dialog box displays the linetype definitions stored in the selected
LIN file.
5 In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, click Cancel.
6 Click Cancel to close the Linetype Manager.

To unload an unused linetype

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype.
2 In the Linetype drop-down list, click Other. Then, in the Linetype
Manager dialog box, select a linetype. Click Delete.
The selected linetype is unloaded. Certain linetypes cannot be unloaded:
BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, CONTINUOUS, and any linetypes currently in use.

566 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

To purge an unused linetype

1 Click Tools tab ➤ Drawing Utilities panel ➤ Purge.
The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of object types with items that
can be purged.
2 To purge unreferenced linetypes, use one of the following methods:
■

To purge all unreferenced linetypes, select Linetypes.

■

To purge specific linetypes, double-click Linetypes to expand the tree
view. Then select the linetypes to be purged.

If the item you want to purge is not listed, select View Items You Cannot
Purge.
3 You are prompted to confirm each item in the list. If you do not want to
confirm each purge, clear the Confirm Each Item to Be Purged option.
4 Click Purge.
To confirm the purging of each item, respond to the prompt by choosing
Yes or No, or Yes to All if more than one item is selected.
5 Click Close.

Quick Reference
LINETYPE
Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.
PURGE
Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.
RENAME
Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles.
MEASUREINIT
Controls whether a drawing you start from scratch uses imperial or metric
default settings.

Load Linetypes | 567

MEASUREMENT
Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern
and linetype files.

Set the Current Linetype
All objects are created using the current linetype.
You can set the current linetype with the:
■

Linetype control on the Properties panel or toolbar

■

Linetype property on the Properties palette

■

Linetype Manager

If the current linetype is set to BYLAYER, objects are created with the linetype
assigned to the current layer.
If the current linetype is set to BYBLOCK, objects are created using the
CONTINUOUS linetype until the objects are grouped into a block. When the
block is inserted into the drawing, those objects acquire the current linetype
setting.
If you do not want the current linetype to be the linetype assigned to the
current layer, you can specify a different linetype explicitly.
The program does not display the linetype of certain objects: text, points,
viewports, hatches, and blocks.

To set the linetype for all new objects

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype.
2 In the Linetype drop-down list, click Other. Then, in the Linetype
Manager dialog box, click Load.
You can hold down Ctrl to select several linetypes or SHIFT to select a
range of linetypes.
3 In the Linetype Manager dialog box, do one of the following:
■

Select a linetype and select Current to draw all new objects with that
linetype.

568 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

■

Select BYLAYER to draw new objects in the linetype assigned to the
current layer.

■

Select BYBLOCK to draw new objects in the current linetype until
they are grouped into a block. When the block is inserted into a
drawing, the objects in the block acquire the current linetype setting.

4 Click OK.
NOTE The Linetype control displays the current linetype. If the linetype you want
to use is already loaded, you can click the Linetype control and click the linetype
to make it current.

To change the linetype assigned to a layer

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties.
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the linetype name you want to
change.
3 In the Select Linetype dialog box, select the linetype you want. Click OK.
4 Click OK again.

Quick Reference
LINETYPE
Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.
CELTYPE
Sets the linetype of new objects.

Change the Linetype of an Object
You can change the linetype of an object by reassigning it to another layer,
by changing the linetype of the layer the object is on, or by specifying a
linetype for the object explicitly.

Change the Linetype of an Object | 569

You have three choices for changing the linetype of an object:
■

Reassign the object to another layer with a different linetype. If an object's
linetype is set to BYLAYER, and you reassign the object to a different layer,
it acquires its linetype from the new layer.

■

Change the linetype assigned to the layer that the object is on. If an object's
linetype is set to BYLAYER, it acquires the linetype of its layer. When you
change the linetype assigned to a layer, all objects on that layer assigned
the BYLAYER linetype are updated automatically.

■

Specify a linetype for an object to override the layer's linetype. You can
specify the linetype of each object explicitly. If you want to override the
layer-determined linetype of an object with a different one, change an
existing object's linetype from BYLAYER to a specific linetype, such as
DASHED.

If you want to set a specific linetype for all subsequently created objects,
change the Linetype property on the Properties palette when no objects are
selected from BYLAYER to a specific linetype.

See also:
■

Override Layer Properties in Viewports on page 529

To change the default linetype assigned to a layer

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties.
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the linetype name you want to
change.
3 In the Select Linetype dialog box, select a linetype.
If the linetype you need is not listed, click Load. Select a linetype and
click OK, or click File to open additional linetype definition (LIN) files.

570 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

4 Click OK to exit each dialog box.

To change the linetype of an object, overriding the layer's linetype
1 Select the objects whose linetype you want to change.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
3 On the Properties palette, click the Linetype control.
4 Choose the linetype that you want to assign to the objects.

Quick Reference
CHANGE
Changes the properties of existing objects.
CHPROP
Changes the properties of an object.
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.
LINETYPE
Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Control Linetype Scale
You can use the same linetype at different scales by changing the linetype
scale factor either globally or individually for each object.
By default, both global and individual linetype scales are set to 1.0. The smaller
the scale, the more repetitions of the pattern are generated per drawing unit.
For example, with a setting of 0.5, two repetitions of the pattern in the linetype
definition are displayed for each drawing unit. Short line segments that cannot
display one full linetype pattern are displayed as continuous. You can use a
smaller linetype scale for lines that are too short to display even one dash
sequence.

Control Linetype Scale | 571

The Linetype Manager displays the Global Scale Factor and Current Object
Scale.
■

The Global Scale Factor value controls the LTSCALE system variable, which
changes the linetype scale globally for both new and existing objects.

■

The Current Object Scale value controls the CELTSCALE system variable,
which sets the linetype scale for new objects.

The CELTSCALE value is multiplied by the LTSCALE value to get the displayed
linetype scale. You can easily change linetype scales in your drawing either
individually or globally.
In a layout, you can adjust the scaling of linetypes in different viewports with
PSLTSCALE.

To change the linetype scale of selected objects
1 Select the objects whose linetype scale you want to change.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
Alternatively, right-click one of the objects. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, select Linetype Scale and enter the new value.

To set the linetype scale for new objects

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype.
2 In the Linetype drop-down list, select Other.
3 In the Linetype Manager, click Show Details to expand the dialog box.
4 Enter a new value for Current Object Scale.
5 Click OK.

To change linetype scale globally

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype.
2 In the Linetype Manager, click Show Details to expand the dialog box.

572 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

3 Enter a new value for Global Scale Factor.
4 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
LINETYPE
Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.

System Variables
CELTSCALE
Sets the current object linetype scaling factor.
LTSCALE
Sets the global linetype scale factor.
PSLTSCALE
Controls the linetype scaling of objects displayed in paper space viewports.

Display Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines
You can center the pattern of a linetype on each segment of a polyline, and
you can control how the linetype is displayed on short segments.
If a line is too short to hold even one dash sequence, the result is a continuous
line between the endpoints, as shown below.

You can accommodate short segments by using a smaller value for their
individual linetype scales. For more information, see Control Linetype Scale
on page 571.

Display Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines | 573

For polylines, you can specify whether a linetype pattern is centered on each
segment or is continuous across vertices throughout the entire length of the
polyline. You do this by setting the PLINEGEN system variable.

To set the linetype display for all new polylines
1 At the Command prompt, enter plinegen.
2 Enter 1 to make the linetype pattern continue throughout the entire
length of two-dimensional polylines, or enter 0 to center the linetype
pattern on each segment.

To change the linetype display of existing polylines
1 Select the polyline whose linetype display you want to change.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, click Linetype Generation and select Enabled
or Disabled.

Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
PLINEGEN
Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline.

Control Lineweights
You can control the thickness of an object’s lines in both the drawing display
and plotting.

574 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

Overview of Lineweights
Lineweights are width values that are assigned to graphical objects as well as
some types of text.
Using lineweights, you can create heavy and thin lines to show cuts in sections,
depth in elevations, dimension lines and tick marks, and differences in details.
For example, by assigning varying lineweights to different layers, you can
easily differentiate between new, existing, and demolition construction.
Lineweights are not displayed unless the Show/Hide Lineweight button on
the status bar is selected.
TrueType fonts, raster images, points, and solid fills (2D solids) cannot display
lineweight. Wide polylines show lineweights only when displayed outside of
the plan view. You can export drawings to other applications or cut objects
to the Clipboard and retain lineweight information.
In model space, lineweights are displayed in pixels and do not change when
zoomed in or out. Thus, you should not use lineweights to represent the exact
width of an object in model space. For example, if you want to draw an object
with a real-world width of 0.5 inches, do not use a lineweight; instead, use a
polyline with a width of 0.5 inches to represent the object.
You can also plot objects in your drawing with custom lineweight values. Use
the Plot Style Table Editor to adjust the fixed lineweight values to plot at a
new value.

Lineweight Scale in Drawings
Objects with a lineweight are plotted with the exact width of the assigned
lineweight value. The standard settings for these values include BYLAYER,
BYBLOCK, and Default. They are displayed in either inches or millimeters,
with millimeters being the default. All layers are initially set to 0.25 mm,
controlled by the LWDEFAULT system variable.
A lineweight value of 0.025 mm or less is displayed as one pixel in model
space and is plotted at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified
plotting device. Lineweight values that you enter at the Command prompt
are rounded to the nearest predefined value.
You set the lineweight units and the default value in the Lineweight Settings
dialog box. You can access the Lineweight Settings dialog box by using the
LWEIGHT command, by right-clicking the Show/Hide Lineweight button on
the status bar and choosing Settings.

Overview of Lineweights | 575

See also:
■

Draw Polylines on page 693

To assign width to polylines

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline.
2 Specify the start point for the first segment in the polyline.
3 Enter w (width).
4 Enter a value for the width at the start of the line segment.
5 Enter a value for the width at the end of the line segment.
6 Specify the endpoint of the first segment of the polyline.
7 Enter w to specify different widths for the next segment, or press Enter
to end the command.

To assign a lineweight to a layer

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties.
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select a layer. Click the lineweight
associated with that layer.
3 In the Lineweight dialog box, select a lineweight from the list.
4 Click OK to close each dialog box.

To set the display scale of lineweights on the Model tab

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Lineweight.
2 In the Lineweight drop-down list, select Lineweight Settings.
3 In the Lineweight Settings dialog box, under Adjust Display Scale, move
the slider to change the scale.
4 Click OK.

576 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

Quick Reference
LWEIGHT
Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.
PLINE
Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc
segments.
LWDEFAULT
Sets the value for the default lineweight.
LWDISPLAY
Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed.
LWUNITS
Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters.

Display Lineweights
Lineweights can be turned on and off in a drawing, and are displayed
differently in model space than in a paper space layout.
■

In model space, a 0-value lineweight is displayed as one pixel, and other
lineweights use a pixel width proportional to their real-unit value.

■

In a paper space layout, lineweights are displayed in the exact plotting
width.

Regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented by more
than one pixel. Turn off the display of lineweights to optimize performance
of the program.
You can turn the display of lineweights on or off by clicking Show/Hide
Lineweight button on the status bar. This setting does not affect the plotting
of lineweights.

Display Lineweights in Model Space
Lineweight display in model space does not change with the zoom factor. For
example, a lineweight value that is represented by a width of four pixels is
always displayed using four pixels regardless of how far you zoom in. If you
want the lineweights on objects to appear thicker or thinner on the Model

Display Lineweights | 577

layout, use LWEIGHT to set their display scale. Changing the display scale
does not affect the lineweight plotting value.
In model space, weighted lines that are joined form a beveled joint with no
end caps. You can use plot styles to apply different joins and endcap styles to
objects with lineweights.
NOTE Different styles of endcaps and joins of objects with lineweight are displayed
only in a full preview using PREVIEW or PLOT.

Display Lineweights in Layouts
In layouts and plot preview, lineweights are displayed in real-world units, and
lineweight display changes with the zoom factor. You can control lineweight
plotting and scaling in your drawing in the Plot dialog box or the Page Setup
Dialog Box.

To display or hide lineweights
Use one of the following methods:
■

Click Show/Hide Lineweight on the status bar.

■

Select or clear Display Lineweight in the Lineweight Settings dialog box.

■

Set the LWDISPLAY system variable to 0 or 1.

578 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

LWDEFAULT
Sets the value for the default lineweight.
LWDISPLAY
Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed.
LWUNITS
Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters.
PLINEWID
Stores the default polyline width.

Set the Current Lineweight
The current lineweight is the lineweight used for any objects you draw until
you make another lineweight current.
All objects are created using the current lineweight. You can set the current
lineweight with the:
■

Lineweight control on the Properties panel or toolbar

■

Lineweight property on the Properties palette

■

Lineweight Settings dialog box

■

CELWEIGHT system variable

If the current lineweight is set to BYLAYER, objects are created with the
lineweight assigned to the current layer.
If the current lineweight is set to BYBLOCK, objects are created using the
default lineweight setting until the objects are grouped into a block. When
the block is inserted into the drawing, it acquires the current lineweight setting.
If you do not want the current lineweight to be the lineweight assigned to
the current layer, you can specify a different lineweight explicitly.
Objects in drawings created in an earlier release of AutoCAD are assigned the
lineweight value of BYLAYER, and all layers are set to DEFAULT. Lineweight
assigned to objects is displayed as a solid fill drawn in the object's assigned
color.

Set the Current Lineweight | 579

To make a lineweight current for creating objects

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Lineweight.
2 In the Lineweight drop-down list, select Lineweight Settings.
3 In the Lineweight Settings dialog box, select a lineweight.
4 Click OK.
NOTE To display the lineweight at its current setting, the Display Lineweight
option must be selected in the Display Lineweight dialog box.

Quick Reference
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.
LWEIGHT
Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.
PEDIT
Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes.
PLINE
Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc
segments.
PLOT
Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.
LWDEFAULT
Sets the value for the default lineweight.
LWDISPLAY
Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed.
LWUNITS
Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters.

580 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

PLINEWID
Stores the default polyline width.

Change the Lineweight of an Object
You can change the lineweight of an object by reassigning it to another layer,
by changing the lineweight of the layer the object is on, or by specifying a
lineweight for the object explicitly.
You have three choices for changing the lineweight of an object:
■

Reassign the object to another layer with a different lineweight. If an
object's lineweight is set to BYLAYER, and you reassign the object to a
different layer, it acquires its lineweight from the new layer.

■

Change the lineweight assigned to the layer that the object is on. If an
object's lineweight is set to BYLAYER, it acquires the lineweight of its layer.
When you change the lineweight assigned to a layer, all objects on that
layer assigned the BYLAYER lineweight are updated automatically.

■

Specify a lineweight for an object to override the layer's lineweight. You
can specify the lineweight of each object explicitly. If you want to override
the layer-determined lineweight of an object with a different one, change
an existing object's lineweight from BYLAYER to a specific lineweight.

If you want to set a specific lineweight for all subsequently created objects,
change the Lineweight property on the Properties palette when no objects are
selected from BYLAYER to a specific lineweight.
See also:
■

Override Layer Properties in Viewports on page 529

To change the line width of a polyline, donut, rectangle, or polygon

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline.
2 Select one or more polyline objects.
3 Enter w (Width) and enter a new width for all segments.
4 Press Enter to end the command.

Change the Lineweight of an Object | 581

Control the Display Properties of Certain Objects
You can control how overlapping objects and certain other objects are
displayed and plotted.

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills,
Lineweights, and Text
You can simplify the display of certain kinds of objects in order to speed
performance.

582 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

Display performance is improved when wide polylines and donuts, solid-filled
polygons (two-dimensional solids), hatches, gradient fills, and text are
displayed in simplified form. Simplified display also increases the speed of
creating test plots.

Turn Off Solid Fill
When you turn off Fill mode, wide polylines, solid-filled polygons, gradient
fill, and hatches are displayed in outline form. Except for patterned hatches
and gradient fills, solid fill is automatically turned off for hidden view and
nonplan views in three dimensions.

Use Quick Text
When you turn on Quick Text mode in drawings that contain a lot of text
using complex fonts, only a rectangular frame defining the text is displayed
or plotted.

Turn Off Lineweights
Any lineweight width that is represented by more than one pixel may slow
down performance. If you want to improve display performance, turn
lineweights off. You can turn lineweights on and off by choosing the
Show/Hide Lineweight button on the status bar. Lineweights are always plotted
at their real-world value whether their display is turned on or off.

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text | 583

Update the Display
New objects automatically use the current settings for displays of solid fill and
text. Except for lineweights, to update the display of existing objects using
these settings, you must use REGEN.
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity on page 516

■

Display Lineweights on page 577

■

Use TrueType Fonts on page 1473

To turn the display of solid fill on or off

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Display tab, under Display Performance, select
Apply Solid Fill.
A check mark indicates that Fill mode is on.
3 Click OK.
4 To display your changes, click View menu ➤ Regen.

To turn the display of text on or off

1 Click Tools ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Display tab, under Display Performance, select
Show Text Boundary Frame Only.
The check mark indicates that text is displayed as a rectangular frame.
3 Click OK.
4 To display your changes, click View menu ➤ Regen.

To turn lineweights on or off

1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Lineweight.

584 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

2 In the Lineweight drop-down list, select Lineweight Settings.
3 In the Lineweight Settings dialog box, select or clear Display Lineweight.
4 Click OK.

Quick Reference
DSETTINGS
Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes,
Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties.
FILL
Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines.
LWEIGHT
Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.
QTEXT
Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects.
REGEN
Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport.
FILLMODE
Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled
in.
LWDISPLAY
Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed.
QTEXTMODE
Controls how text is displayed.
TEXTFILL
Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.
TEXTQLTY
Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text | 585

Control the Transparency of Objects
You can control the transparency level of objects and layers.
Set the transparency level of selected objects or layers to enhance drawings
or reduce the visibility of areas that are included for reference only.
Transparency can be set to ByLayer, ByBlock, or to a specific value.

no transparent objects

selected objects 75% transparent

IMPORTANT For perfomance reasons, plotting transparency is disabled by default.
To plot transparent objects, check the Plot Transparency option in either the Plot
dialog box or Page Setup dialog box.

To control the transparency level of objects
1 Select the objects whose transparency level you want to change.
2 On the Home tab ➤ Properties panel, drag the Transparency slider, or
enter a value from 0 to 90 in the Trasparency box.
3 Press Esc to set the transparency level and clear the selection.
TIP You can also control the transparency level from the Properties palette
by double clicking an object.

586 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

Double clicking hatches or fills displays the Hatch Editor ribbon contextual
tab, which contains a transparency control for these objects.

Quick Reference
CHPROP
Changes the properties of an object.
CHANGE
Changes the properties of existing objects.
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.
CETRANSPARENCY
Sets the transparency level for new objects.
TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY
Controls whether the object transparency is displayed.

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed
You can control which overlapping objects appear to be on top.
Generally, overlapping objects such as text, wide polylines, and solid-filled
polygons are displayed in the order they are created: newly created objects in
front of existing objects.
You can use DRAWORDER to change the draw order (which is the display
and plotting order) of any objects. TEXTTOFRONT changes the draw order of
all text and dimensions in the drawing. HATCHTOBACK changes the draw
order of hatches and gradient and solid fills in the drawing.

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed | 587

NOTE Overlapping objects cannot be controlled between model space and paper
space. They can be controlled only within the same space.

To change the draw order of overlapping objects

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Draw Order drop-down list.
2 From the draw order drop down list, click one of the options.
3 Select the object(s) whose draw order you want to modify and press Enter.
4 Select the reference object(s) and press Enter. (This step is necessary only
for the Bring Above Objects and Send Under Objects options.)

Quick Reference
DRAWORDER
Changes the draw order of images and other objects.
HATCHTOBACK
Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other
objects.
QSELECT
Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria.
REGEN
Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport.
SELECT
Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.
TEXTTOFRONT
Brings text and dimensions in front of all other objects in the drawing.
WBLOCK
Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file.

588 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

DRAWORDERCTL
Controls the default display behavior of overlapping objects when they are
created or edited.
HPDRAWORDER
Controls the draw order of hatches and fills.
SORTENTS
Controls object sorting in support of draw order for several operations.

Control the Display of Objects
Control the display of objects by isolating or hiding a selection set.
Use ISOLATEOBJECTS and HIDEOBJECTS to create a temporary drawing view
with selected objects isolated or hidden. This saves you the time of having to
track objects across layers. If you isolate objects, only the isolated objects
appear in the view. Use UNISOLATEOBJECTS to redisplay the objects. When
you close and reopen the drawing, all previously hidden objects are displayed.
Use the OBJECTISOLATIONMODE system variable to control whether objects
remain hidden between drawing sessions.
The Light Bulb icon on the status bar indicates when one or more objects are
isolated or hidden. Clicking the Light Bulb icon allows you to access options
to isolate, unisolate, or hide objects.

To isolate objects
1 Select the objects you want to isolate.
2 Right-click in the drawing area and select Isolate ➤ Isolate Objects.
Only the selected objects are displayed. All other objects are hidden.
3 To redisplay hidden objects, right-click in the drawing area and select
Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation.

To hide objects
1 Select the objects you want to hide.
2 Right-click in the drawing area and select Isolate ➤ Hide Objects.
The selected objects are hidden.

Control the Display of Objects | 589

3 To redisplay hidden objects, right-click in the drawing area and select
Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation.

To keep objects hidden or isolated between drawing sessions
1 Before hiding or isolating objects, set OBJECTISOLATIONMODE to 1.
2 Hide or isolate objects in your drawing. When you save, close, and reopen
your drawing, the selected objects remain hidden or isolated.

Quick Reference
HIDEOBJECTS
Hides selected objects.
ISOLATEOBJECTS
Displays selected objects across layers; unselected objects are hidden.
UNISOLATEOBJECTS
Displays previously hidden objects.
OBJECTISOLATIONMODE
Controls whether hidden objects remain hidden between drawing sessions.

590 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects

Use Precision Tools

You can use a variety of precision drawing tools to help you produce accurate drawings quickly
and without performing tedious calculations.

Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS)
The UCS is the active coordinate system that establishes the XY plane (work
plane) and Z-axis direction for drawing and modeling.

Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS)
The UCS is the active coordinate system that establishes the XY plane (work
plane) and Z-axis direction for drawing and modeling. You can set the UCS
origin and its X, Y, and Z axes to suit your needs. The UCS is useful in 2D design
and essential in 3D design because it controls features that include
■

The XY plane (or work plane)on which objects are created and modified

■

The horizontal and vertical orientation used for features like Ortho mode,
polar tracking, and object snap tracking

■

The alignment and angle of the grid, hatch patterns, text, and dimension
objects

■

The origin and orientation for coordinate entry and absolute reference angles

■

For 3D operations, the orientation of work planes, projection planes, and
the Z axis (for vertical direction and axis of rotation)

591

Understand the World Coordinate System (WCS)
The WCS is a fixed Cartesian coordinate system. Internally, all objects are
defined by their WCS coordinates, and the WCS and the UCS are coincident
in a new drawing. However, it is usually more convenient to create and edit
objects based on the UCS, which can be customized to suit your needs.

Understand the UCS Icon
The UCS icon indicates the location and orientation of the current UCS. You
can manipulate the UCS icon using grips. For more information, see The UCS
Icon on page 36 and the UCSICON command.

NOTE If the location of the UCS origin is not visible in a viewport, the UCS icon
is displayed in the lower-left corner of the viewport instead.

Understand the UCS in 3D
When you create or modify objects in a 3D environment, you can move and
reorient the UCS anywhere in 3D space to simplify your work. The UCS is
useful for entering coordinates, creating 3D objects on 2D work planes, and
rotating objects in 3D.
NOTE The UCS icon follows the traditional right-hand rule in determining positive
axis directions and rotation directions.

592 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

Change the UCS in Paper Space
You can define a new UCS in paper space just as you can in model space;
however, the UCS in paper space is restricted to 2D manipulation. Although
you can enter 3D coordinates in paper space, you cannot use 3D viewing
commands such as PLAN and VPOINT.
See also:
■

Control the User Coordinate System (UCS) on page 594

■

Work with Named UCS Definitions and Preset Orientations on page 596

To restore the UCS to be coincident with the WCS (World Coordinate System)
■

Click the UCS origin grip, and then click World.

To restore the previous UCS
■

Right-click the UCS icon, and then click Previous.

Quick Reference
Commands
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
UCSICON
Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS
icon.
UCSMAN
Manages UCS definitions.

System Variables
ELEVATION
Stores the current elevation of new objects relative to the current UCS.
PUCSBASE
Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and orientation of
orthographic UCS settings in paper space only.

Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) | 593

UCSFOLLOW
Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another.
UCSNAME
Stores the name of the current coordinate system for the current viewport
in the current space.
UCSORG
Stores the origin point of the current coordinate system for the current
viewport in the current space.
UCSORTHO
Determines whether the related orthographic UCS setting is restored
automatically when an orthographic view is restored.
UCSXDIR
Stores the X direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the
current space.
UCSYDIR
Stores the Y direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the
current space.

Control the User Coordinate System (UCS)
Customize the UCS origin and orientation using the UCS origin and axes
grips, the UCS icon shortcut menu, or the UCS command.
You can align the UCS icon with existing objects, including 3D faces or edges.

To align the UCS with an existing 3D object
1 Click the UCS icon, and then click Move and Align.
2 Drag the UCS icon over the portion of the object with which you want
to align it.
3 Click to place the new UCS.

To define a new UCS origin using the origin grip
1 Click the UCS icon.
2 Click and drag the square origin grip to its new location.

594 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

The UCS origin (0,0,0) is redefined at the point you specify.
TIP To place the origin with precision, use object snaps or grid snaps, or
enter a specific X,Y,Z coordinate.

To specify a new UCS with three points
1 Right-click the UCS icon, and click 3 Point.
2 Specify a new origin point.
3 Specify a point on the positive X axis of the new UCS.
4 Specify a point on the positive portion of the XY plane of the new UCS.

To rotate the UCS about the X, Y, or Z axis
■

Right-click the UCS icon, and click Rotate Axis. Click X, Y, or Z.
As you drag the cursor, the UCS rotates in the positive direction around
the specified axis (see Apply the Right-Hand Rule). You can also specify a
rotation angle.
TIP Hover over the grips at the ends of the X, Y, and Z axes to access the rotate
options.

To change the orientation of the Z axis
1 Right-click the UCS icon, and click Z Axis.
2 Specify a point for the new origin (0,0,0).
3 Specify a point that lies on the positive Z axis.

Quick Reference
Commands
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
UCSICON
Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS
icon.

Control the User Coordinate System (UCS) | 595

UCSMAN
Manages UCS definitions.

System Variables
UCSFOLLOW
Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another.
UCSNAME
Stores the name of the current coordinate system for the current viewport
in the current space.
UCSORG
Stores the origin point of the current coordinate system for the current
viewport in the current space.
UCSORTHO
Determines whether the related orthographic UCS setting is restored
automatically when an orthographic view is restored.
UCSXDIR
Stores the X direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the
current space.
UCSYDIR
Stores the Y direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the
current space.

Work with Named UCS Definitions and Preset Orientations
Create and save as many UCS definitions as you need. Each UCS definition
can have its own origin and X, Y, and Z axes. You can also choose from several
preset orientations.
See also:
■

Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) on page 591

■

Control the User Coordinate System (UCS) on page 594

596 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

NOTE By default, the Coordinates panel is hidden in the Drafting & Annotation
workspace. To display the Coordinates panel, click the View tab, then right-click
and choose Show Panels, and then click Coordinates. In 3D workspaces, the
Coordinates panel is on the Home tab.

To save a UCS definition
1 Right-click the UCS icon, and click Named UCS ➤ Save.
2 Enter a name.
You can use up to 255 characters, including letters, digits, and the special
characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_).

To restore a named UCS definition
■

Right-click the UCS icon, click Named UCS, and then click the UCS
definition you want to restore.

To select a preset UCS orientation

1 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Named UCS.
2 In the UCS dialog box, Orthographic UCSs tab, select a UCS orientation
from the list.
3 Click Set Current.
4 Click OK.
The UCS changes to the selected option.

To rename a UCS definition

1 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Named UCS.
2 In the UCS dialog box, Named UCSs tab, right-click the UCS definition
you want to rename, and click Rename.
3 Enter a new name.
4 Click OK.

Work with Named UCS Definitions and Preset Orientations | 597

To delete a UCS definition

1 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Named UCS.
2 In the UCS dialog box, Named UCSs tab, select the UCS definition you
want to delete.
3 Press Delete.
You cannot delete the current UCS or a UCS with the default name
UNNAMED.

Quick Reference
Commands
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
UCSMAN
Manages UCS definitions.
UCSICON
Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS
icon.

System Variables
PUCSBASE
Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and orientation of
orthographic UCS settings in paper space only.
UCSFOLLOW
Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another.
UCSNAME
Stores the name of the current coordinate system for the current viewport
in the current space.
UCSORG
Stores the origin point of the current coordinate system for the current
viewport in the current space.

598 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

UCSORTHO
Determines whether the related orthographic UCS setting is restored
automatically when an orthographic view is restored.
UCSXDIR
Stores the X direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the
current space.
UCSVP
Determines whether the UCS in viewports remains fixed or changes to reflect
the UCS of the current viewport.
UCSYDIR
Stores the Y direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the
current space.

Assign UCS Definitions to Viewports
To facilitate editing objects in different views, you can define a different UCS
(User Coordinate System) for each view.
Multiple viewports provide different views of your model. For example, you
might set up viewports that display top, front, right side, and isometric views.
To facilitate editing objects in different views, you can create a different UCS
definition for each view. Each time you make a viewport current, you can
begin drawing using the same UCS you used the last time that viewport was
current.
The UCS in each viewport is controlled by the UCSVP system variable. When
UCSVP is set to 1 in a viewport, the UCS last used in that viewport is saved
with the viewport and is restored when the viewport is made current again.
When UCSVP is set to 0 in a viewport, its UCS is always the same as the UCS
in the current viewport.
For example, you might set up three viewports: a top view, front view, and
isometric view. If you set the UCSVP system variable to 0 in the isometric
viewport, you can use the Top UCS in both the top viewport and the isometric
viewport. When you make the top viewport current, the isometric viewport's
UCS reflects the UCS top viewport. Likewise, making the front viewport current
switches the isometric viewport's UCS to match that of the front viewport.
The example is illustrated in the following figures. The first figure shows the
isometric viewport reflecting the UCS of the upper-left, or top, viewport, which
is current.

Assign UCS Definitions to Viewports | 599

The second figure shows the change that occurs when the lower-left, or front,
viewport is made current. The UCS in the isometric viewport is updated to
reflect the UCS of the front viewport.

In previous releases, the UCS was a global setting for all viewports in either
model or paper space. If you want to restore the behavior of earlier releases,
you can set the value of the UCSVP system variable to 0 in all active viewports.

Quick Reference
Commands
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.

600 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

System Variables
UCSNAME
Stores the name of the current coordinate system for the current viewport
in the current space.
UCSVP
Determines whether the UCS in viewports remains fixed or changes to reflect
the UCS of the current viewport.
UCSFOLLOW
Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another.

Use the Dynamic UCS with Solid Models
With the dynamic UCS feature, you can temporarily and automatically align
the XY plane of the UCS with a plane on a solid model while creating objects.
When in a draw command, you align the UCS by moving your pointer over
an edge of a face rather than having to use the UCS command. After you finish
the command, the UCS returns to its previous location and orientation.
For example, you can use the dynamic UCS to create a rectangle on an angled
face of a solid model as shown in the illustration.

In the illustration on the left, the UCS is not aligned with the angled face.
Instead of relocating the UCS, you turn on the dynamic UCS on the status
bar or by pressing F6.

Use the Dynamic UCS with Solid Models | 601

When you move the pointer completely over an edge as shown in the middle
illustration, the cursor changes to show the direction of the dynamic UCS
axes. You can then create objects on the angled face easily as shown in the
illustration on the right.
NOTE To display the XYZ labels on the cursor, right-click the DUCS button and
click Display Crosshair Labels.
The X axis of the dynamic UCS is located along an edge of the face and the
positive direction of the X axis always points toward the right half of the
screen. Only the front faces of a solid are detected by the dynamic UCS.
The types of commands that can use a dynamic UCS include the following:
■

Simple geometry. Line, polyline, rectangle, arc, circle

■

Text. Text, Multiline text, table

■

References. Insert, xref

■

Solids. Primitives and POLYSOLID

■

Editing. Rotate, mirror, align

■

Other. UCS, area, grip tool manipulation

TIP You can easily align the UCS with a plane on a solid model by turning on the
dynamic UCS feature and then using the UCS command to locate the origin on
that plane.
If Grid and Snap mode are turned on, they align temporarily to the dynamic
UCS. The limits of the grid display are set automatically.
You can temporarily turn off the dynamic UCS by pressing F6 or Shift+Z while
moving the pointer over a face.
NOTE The dynamic UCS is available only while a command is active.

To change the UCS dynamically
1 Start a command supported by dynamic UCS.
2 If necessary, click DUCS on the status bar to turn it on.
3 Move your pointer over the edge of a face on a solid model.
4 Complete the command.

602 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

Quick Reference
Commands
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

System Variables
OSOPTIONS
Automatically suppresses object snaps on hatch objects and geometry with
negative Z values when using a dynamic UCS.
UCSDETECT
Controls whether dynamic UCS acquisition is active or not.

Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon
The user coordinate system icon (UCS icon) helps you visualize the current
orientation of the UCS. Several versions of this icon are available, and you
can change its size, location, and color.
To indicate the location and orientation of the UCS, the UCS icon is displayed
either at the UCS origin point or in the lower-left corner of the current
viewport.
You can choose a 2D or 3D style of the icon to represent the UCS when
working in 2D environment. Shaded style of icon is displayed to represent
the UCS in the 3D environment.

Use the UCSICON command to choose between displaying the 2D or the 3D
UCS icon. The shaded UCS icon is displayed for a shaded 3D view. To indicate
the origin and orientation of the UCS, you can display the UCS icon at the
UCS origin point using the UCSICON command.

The UCS Icon and Multiple Viewports
If you have multiple viewports, each viewport displays its own UCS icon.

Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon | 603

Display and Hide the UCS Icon
In some circumstances, you might need to hide the UCS icon. With the
UCSICON command, you can turn off the UCS icon in a single viewport or
all viewports. Each layout also provides a UCS icon in paper space.
You can also hide the UCS icon based on the current visual style, and whether
perspective is turned on. Three system variables are available:
■

Use UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING to hide the UCS icon when the current visual
style is 2D Wireframe.

■

Use UCS3DPARADISPLAYSETTING to hide the UCS icon when perspective
(PERSPECTIVE) is turned off in a viewport with a 3D visual style.

■

Use UCS3DPERPDISPLAYSETTING to hide the UCS icon when perspective
is turned on in a viewport with a 3D visual style.

NOTE These system variables take precedence over the UCSICON setting in
viewports with certain visual styles.

Variations in UCS Icon Types
The UCS icon is displayed in various ways to help you visualize the orientation
of the work plane. The following figure shows some of the possible icon
displays.

You can use the UCSICON command to switch between the 2D UCS icon and
the 3D UCS icon. You can also use the command to change the size, color,
and icon line width of the 3D UCS icon.

604 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

The UCS broken pencil icon replaces the 2D UCS icon when the viewing
direction is in a plane parallel to the UCS XY plane. The broken pencil icon
indicates that the edge of the XY plane is almost perpendicular to your viewing
direction. This icon warns you not to use your pointing device to specify
coordinates.
When you use the pointing device to locate a point, it's normally placed on
the XY plane. If the UCS is rotated so that the Z axis lies in a plane parallel to
the viewing plane—that is, if the XY plane is edge-on to the viewer—it may
be difficult to visualize where the point will be located. In this case, the point
will be located on a plane parallel to your viewing plane that also contains
the UCS origin point. For example, if the viewing direction is along the X axis,
coordinates specified with a pointing device will be located on the YZ plane,
which contains the UCS origin point.
Use the 3D UCS icon to help you visualize which plane these coordinates will
be projected on; the 3D UCS icon does not use a broken pencil icon.
NOTE By default, the Coordinates panel is hidden in the Drafting & Annotation
workspace. To display the Coordinates panel, click the View tab, then right-click
and choose Show Panels, and then click Coordinates. In 3D workspaces, the
Coordinates panel is on the Home tab.

To turn the display of the UCS icon on and off

■

Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Toggle Icon.
The check mark indicates whether the icon is on or off.

To display the UCS icon at the UCS origin

■

Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Origin.
The UCS icon is displayed at the origin of the current coordinate system.
The check mark indicates whether the option is on or off.

To change the appearance of the UCS icon
1 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ UCS Icon Properties.
2 In the UCS Icon dialog box, change the settings.
3 Click OK.

Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon | 605

Quick Reference
Commands
UCSICON
Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS
icon.
VSCURRENT
Sets the visual style in the current viewport.

System Variables
UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING
Displays the UCS icon when the 2D Wireframe visual style is current.
UCS3DPARADISPLAYSETTING
Displays the UCS icon when perspective view is off and a 3D visual style is
current.
UCS3DPERPDISPLAYSETTING
Displays the UCS icon when perspective view is on and a 3D visual style is
current.
PERSPECTIVE
Specifies whether the current viewport displays a perspective view.
UCSICON
Displays the UCS icon for the current viewport or layout.

Enter Coordinates to Specify Points
When a command prompts you for a point, you can use the pointing device
to specify a point, or you can enter a coordinate value at the command prompt.

Overview of Coordinate Entry
You can enter two-dimensional coordinates as either Cartesian (X,Y) or polar
coordinates. When dynamic input is on, you can enter coordinate values in
tooltips near the cursor.

606 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

Cartesian and Polar Coordinates
A Cartesian coordinate system has three axes, X, Y, and Z. When you enter
coordinate values, you indicate a point's distance (in units) and its direction
(+ or -) along the X, Y, and Z axes relative to the coordinate system origin
(0,0,0).
In 2D, you specify points on the XY plane, also called the work plane. The work
plane is similar to a flat sheet of grid paper. The X value of a Cartesian
coordinate specifies horizontal distance, and the Y value specifies vertical
distance. The origin point (0,0) indicates where the two axes intersect.
Polar coordinates use a distance and an angle to locate a point. With both
Cartesian and polar coordinates, you can enter absolute coordinates based on
the origin (0,0), or relative coordinates based on the last point specified.
Another method of entering a relative coordinate is by moving the cursor to
specify a direction and then entering a distance directly. This method is called
direct distance entry.
You can enter coordinates in scientific, decimal, engineering, architectural,
or fractional notation. You can enter angles in grads, radians, surveyor's units,
or degrees, minutes, and seconds. The UNITS command controls unit format.

Display Coordinates on the Status Bar
The current cursor location is displayed as a coordinate value on the status
bar.

There are three types of coordinate display: static, dynamic, and distance and
angle.
■

Static display. Updates only when you specify a point.

■

Dynamic display. Updates as you move the cursor.

■

Distance and angle display. Updates the relative distance (distance Specify the radius of the hole
Coordinate filters work only when the program prompts you for a point. If
you try to use a coordinate filter at the Command prompt, you see an error
message.

Example: Use of Coordinate Filters in 3D
This example shows how to use coordinate filters to create a point object at
the center (centroid) of a 3D object. Hidden lines have been removed for
clarity. The X value of the new point is extracted from the first location
specified, the Y value from the second location, and the Z value from the third.
The three values are combined to form the coordinate values of the new point.
Command: point
Point: .x
of mid
of select object (1)
(need YZ): .y
of mid
of select object (2)
(need Z): mid
of select object (3)

Combine Coordinate Values (Coordinate Filters) | 649

To use coordinate filters to specify a point in 2D
1 At the prompt for a point, enter a coordinate filter (.x or .y).
For example, enter .x to specify the X value first.
2 To extract the first coordinate value, specify a point.
For example, if you entered .x in step 1, the X value is extracted from this
point.
3 To extract the next coordinate value, specify a different point.
The new point location combines the coordinate values extracted from
the points you specified in steps 2 and 3.
NOTE Instead of specifying a point in steps 2 or 3, you can enter a numeric value.

To use coordinate filters to specify a point in 3D
1 At the prompt for a point, enter a coordinate filter (.x, .y, .z, .xy, .xz, or
.yz).
For example, enter .x to specify the X value first.
2 To extract the specified coordinate value(s), specify a point.
For example, if you entered .x in step 1, the X value is extracted from this
point.
3 At the prompt for the remaining coordinates, do one of the following:
■

Extract the remaining coordinate values by specifying a point.

■

Enter another coordinate filter and return to step 2.

For example, if you entered .x in step 1, specify a second point to extract
the Y and Z coordinates simultaneously, or enter .y or .z to specify Y and
Z values separately.
The new point location combines the coordinate values extracted from
the points specified in steps 2 and 3.
NOTE Instead of specifying a point in steps 2 or 3, you can enter a numeric value.

650 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

Quick Reference
Commands
Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier)
Combines X, Y, and Z values from different points to specify a single point.

Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking)
You can draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationship to other
objects along specified directions called alignment paths.
™

AutoTrack helps you draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationships
to other objects. When you turn on AutoTrack, temporary alignment paths
help you create objects at precise positions and angles. AutoTrack includes
two tracking options: polar tracking and object snap tracking.
You can toggle AutoTrack on and off with the Polar and Otrack buttons on
the status bar. Use temporary override keys to turn object snap tracking on
and off or to turn off all snapping and tracking. See the keyboard illustration
in Override Object Snap Settings on page 633.
Object snap tracking works in conjunction with object snaps. You must set
an object snap before you can track from an object's snap point.

Object Snap Tracking
Use object snap tracking to track along alignment paths that are based on
object snap points. Acquired points display a small plus sign (+), and you can
acquire up to seven tracking points at a time. After you acquire a point,
horizontal, vertical, or polar alignment paths relative to the point are displayed
as you move the cursor over their drawing paths. For example, you can select
a point along a path based on an object endpoint or midpoint or an
intersection between objects.
NOTE You can track Perpendicular or Tangent object snap from the last picked
point in a command even if the object snap tracking is off.
In the following illustration, the Endpoint object snap is on. You start a line
by clicking its start point (1), move the cursor over another line's endpoint
(2) to acquire it, and then move the cursor along the horizontal alignment
path to locate the endpoint you want for the line you are drawing (3).

Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking) | 651

Change Object Snap Tracking Settings
By default, object snap tracking is set to orthogonal. Alignment paths are
displayed at 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees from acquired object points. However,
you can use polar tracking angles instead. For object snap tracking, object
points are automatically acquired.
NOTE You can choose to acquire points only when you press Shift.

Change Alignment Path Display
You can change how AutoTrack displays alignment paths, and you can change
how object points are acquired for object snap tracking. By default, alignment
paths stretch to the end of the drawing window. You can change their display
to abbreviated lengths, or no length.

Tips for Using Object Snap Tracking
As you use AutoTrack (polar tracking and object snap tracking), you will
discover techniques that make specific design tasks easier. Here are a few you
might try.
■

Use Perpendicular, End, and Mid object snaps with object snap tracking
to draw to points that are perpendicular to the end and midpoints of
objects.

■

Use the Tangent and End object snaps with object snap tracking to draw
to points that are tangent to the endpoints of arcs.

■

Use object snap tracking with temporary tracking points. At a point prompt,
enter tt, then specify a temporary tracking point. A small + appears at the
point. As you move your cursor, AutoTrack alignment paths are displayed
relative to the temporary point. To remove the point, move the cursor
back over the +.

■

After you acquire an object snap point, use direct distance to specify points
at precise distances along alignment paths from the acquired object snap
point. To specify a point prompt, select an object snap, move the cursor

652 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

to display an alignment path, then enter a distance at the Command
prompt.
NOTE The direct distance entry method is not available while you are using
the temporary override key for object snap tracking.
■

Use the Automatic and Shift to Acquire options set on the Drafting tab of
the Options dialog box to manage point acquisition. Point acquisition is
set to Automatic by default. When working in close quarters, press Shift
to temporarily avoid acquiring a point.

To turn on and turn off object snap tracking

■

Press F11, or click
on the status bar.
To turn object snap tracking on and off temporarily, hold down the F11
key while you work.

To change AutoTrack settings
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Drafting tab, under AutoTrack Settings, select
or clear the following alignment path display options:
■

Display Polar Tracking Vector. Controls alignment path display for
object snap tracking. When cleared, no polar tracking path is
displayed.

■

Display Full Screen Tracking Vector. Controls alignment path display
for object snap tracking. When cleared, an alignment path is displayed
only from the object snap point to the cursor.

■

Display AutoTrack Tooltip. Controls the display of AutoTrack tooltips.
Tooltips tell you the type of object snap (for object snap tracking),
alignment angle, and distance from the previous point.

3 Under Alignment Point Acquisition, select a method for acquiring object
points for object snap tracking:
■

Automatic. Acquires object points automatically. If you select this
option, you can press Shift to not acquire an object point

■

Shift to Acquire. Acquires object points only when you press Shift
while the cursor is over an object snap point.

Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking) | 653

Quick Reference
Commands
DSETTINGS
Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes,
Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

System Variables
AUTOSNAP
Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet.
POLARMODE
Controls settings for polar and object snap tracking.
TRACKPATH
Controls the display of polar and object snap tracking alignment paths.

Track to Offset Point Locations (Tracking)
You can use tracking to specify a point by offsetting vertically and horizontally
from a series of temporary points.
You can use the tracking method whenever you are prompted for a point.
Tracking uses the pointing device to specify a point by offsetting vertically
and horizontally from a series of temporary points. When you start tracking
and specify an initial reference point, the next reference point is constrained
to a path that extends vertically or horizontally from that point. The direction
of the offset is indicated by the rubber-band line. You change the direction
of the offset by moving the cursor through the reference point. You can track
as many points as you need. Typically, you use tracking in combination with
object snaps or direct distance entry.
For example, you can use tracking to find the center point of a rectangle
without using construction lines. Start tracking, and specify the midpoint of
a horizontal line. Drag the cursor vertically and specify the midpoint of a
vertical line (2). Press Enter to accept the point (3) at the center of the rectangle.

654 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

To use tracking to specify a point
1 Start a command, such as the LINE command.
2 Hold down Shift and right-click in the drawing area. Click Tracking.
3 Specify a point.
4 Move the cursor directly up, down, left, or right until you see the
rubber-band line.
The direction of movement affects the tracking direction. Notice that if
you move the cursor from left to right, you must then move it directly
over the last point specified in order to move it up or down.
5 Specify a second point.
6 Press Enter to end tracking.
The start point of the line snaps to the imaginary intersection of the
vertical and horizontal paths extending from the points you specified.
The position is determined by the direction in which you moved the
cursor after specifying the first point.

Quick Reference
Command Modifiers
TRACKING (Command Modifier)
Locates a point from a series of temporary points.

Specify Distances
When specifying a point, you can enter distances, offsets, and measured
intervals.

Enter Direct Distances
You can specify a point by moving the cursor to indicate a direction and then
entering the distance.
To specify a line length quickly, without entering coordinate values, you can
specify a point by moving the cursor to indicate a direction and then entering
the distance from the first point. You can enter calculated distances and points
using the AutoCAD calculator (CAL).

Specify Distances | 655

Both the CAL command and the QuickCalc calculator can be used
transparently to calculate distances and points for commands that require
input. For more information, see Use the QuickCalc Calculator on page 670.
You can use direct distance entry to specify points for all commands requiring
more than one point. When Ortho mode or polar tracking is on, this method
is an efficient way to draw lines of specified length and direction, and to move
or copy objects.
NOTE The direct distance entry method is not available while you are using the
temporary override keys for Ortho mode, object snap tracking, or polar tracking.
See also:
■

Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap on page 643

■

Lock an Angle for One Point (Angle) on page 648

To draw a line using direct distance entry

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line.
2 Specify the first point and then, move the pointing device until the
rubber-band line extends at the same angle as the line you want to draw.
3 Enter a distance at the Command prompt.
The line is drawn at the length and angle you specified.

Quick Reference
Commands
LINE
Creates straight line segments.

Command Modifiers
Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier)
Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor.

656 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

Offset from Temporary Reference Points
You can establish a temporary reference point as a base point for offsetting
subsequent points.
The From command modifier establishes a temporary reference point as a
base point for offsetting subsequent points. The From method does not
constrain the cursor to orthogonal movement. The From method usually is
used in combination with object snaps.

To offset a point from a temporary reference point
1 At a prompt for a point, enter from. Alternately, press Shift and right-click
to display the object snap menu, and then choose From.
2 If you want to offset from a location on an existing object, specify an
object snap method. Then select the object snap point.
3 Enter a relative coordinate (i.e. @1,1).

Quick Reference
Command Modifiers
FROM (Command Modifier)
Locates a point offset from a reference point within a command.

Specify Intervals on Objects
You can mark off equal distances along objects.

Overview of Specifying Intervals on Objects
Provides a high-level overview of two options for marking off equal distances
along objects.
Sometimes you need to create points or insert symbols (blocks) at intervals
on an object.
You can
■

Specify the length of the segments (MEASURE)

■

Specify the number of equal segments (DIVIDE)

Offset from Temporary Reference Points | 657

You can measure or divide lines, arcs, splines, circles, ellipses, and polylines.
With both methods, you can identify the intervals by inserting either a point
or a block.
By specifying points, you can use the Node object snap to align other objects
at intervals on the measured or divided object. By specifying blocks, you can
create precise geometric constructions or insert custom markers. The blocks
can rotate at each insertion point.
You cannot insert a block unless it has already been defined within the
drawing. Variable attributes within the block are not included when you insert
the block references.
The points or blocks you draw using MEASURE or DIVIDE are placed in a
selection set. Therefore, if you want to edit them immediately, you can use
the Previous option of SELECT.
See also:
■

Work with Blocks on page 915

Quick Reference
Commands
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.
DDPTYPE
Specifies the display style and size of point objects.
DIVIDE
Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter
of an object.
MEASURE
Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or
perimeter of an object.
WBLOCK
Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file.

658 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

System Variables
PDMODE
Controls how point objects are displayed.
PDSIZE
Sets the display size for point objects.

Specify Measured Intervals on Objects
You can mark off equal lengths from one end of a selected object.
You can use MEASURE to mark an object at specified intervals. You can mark
the intervals with either points or blocks. The last segment of a measured
object may be shorter than the interval you specify.
The starting point for measurements or divisions varies with the object type.
For lines or open polylines, the starting point is the endpoint closest to the
selection point. For closed polylines, it is the polyline start point. For circles,
it is at the angle from the center point that is equivalent to the current snap
angle. For example, if the snap angle is 0, the circle starts at the three o'clock
position and continues counterclockwise.
If the point marker is displayed as a single dot (the default setting), you may
not be able to see the measured intervals. You can change the style of the
point markers with the Point Style dialog box (DDPTYPE). The PDMODE
system variable also controls the appearance of point markers. For example,
you can change the value to make points appear as crosses.PDSIZE controls
the size of point objects.

To insert points at measured intervals on an object

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Measure.
2 Select a line, arc, spline, circle, ellipse, or polyline.
3 Enter an interval length, or specify points to indicate a length.
Points are placed on the object at the specified intervals.

To insert blocks at measured intervals on an object
1 If necessary, create the block you want to insert.

Specify Intervals on Objects | 659

2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Measure.
3 Select a line, arc, spline, circle, ellipse, or polyline.
4 Enter b (Block).
5 Enter the name of the block you want to insert.
6 Enter y to align the blocks with the measured object. Enter n to use a
rotation angle of 0 degrees.
7 Enter an interval length, or specify points to indicate a length.
Blocks are inserted on the object at the specified intervals.

Quick Reference
Commands
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.
DDPTYPE
Specifies the display style and size of point objects.
MEASURE
Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or
perimeter of an object.

System Variables
PDMODE
Controls how point objects are displayed.
PDSIZE
Sets the display size for point objects.

Divide an Object into Equal Segments
You can divide a selected object into a specified number of equal lengths.

660 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

You can create points or insert blocks on an object at a specific number of
equal intervals. This operation does not actually break an object into individual
objects; it only identifies the location of the divisions so that you can use
them as geometric reference points.

The starting point for measurements or divisions varies with the object type.
For lines or open polylines, the starting point is the endpoint closest to the
selection point. For closed polylines, it is the polyline start point. For circles,
it is at the angle from the center point that is equivalent to the current snap
angle. For example, if the snap angle is 0, the circle starts at the three o'clock
position and continues counterclockwise.
If the point marker is displayed as a single dot (the default setting), you may
not be able to see the segments. You can change the style of the point markers
with the Point Style dialog box (DDPTYPE). The PDMODE system variable
also controls the appearance of point markers. For example, you can change
the value to make points appear as crosses. PDSIZE controls the size of point
objects.

To insert points to mark equal segments

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Divide.
2 Select a line, circle, ellipse, polyline, arc, or spline.
3 Enter the number of segments you want.
A point is placed between each segment.

To insert blocks to mark equal segments on an object
1 If necessary, create the block you want to insert.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Divide.
3 Select a line, arc, circle, ellipse, polyline, or spline.
4 Enter b (Block).

Specify Intervals on Objects | 661

5 Enter the name of the block you want to insert.
6 Enter y to align the blocks with the divided object. Enter n to use a
rotation angle of 0 degrees.
7 Enter the number of segments you want.

Quick Reference
Commands
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.
DDPTYPE
Specifies the display style and size of point objects.
DIVIDE
Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter
of an object.
WBLOCK
Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file.

System Variables
PDMODE
Controls how point objects are displayed.
PDSIZE
Sets the display size for point objects.

Extract Geometric Information from Objects
The inquiry and calculation commands can provide information about objects
in your drawing and do useful calculations.

662 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations
You can obtain information about the relation between two specified points
or multiple points; for example, the distance between points or their angle in
the XY plane.
To determine the relation between points, you can display the
■

Distance between them

■

Angle between the points in the XY plane

■

Angle of the points from the XY plane

■

Delta, or changed, X, Y, and Z distances between them

The ID command lists the X, Y, and Z coordinate values of a specified point.
See also:
■

Overview of Coordinate Entry

To calculate the distance and angle between two points
1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Distance.

2 Specify a first and second point for the distance you want to calculate.
3 Press Enter.
The distance displays at the Command prompt in the current units
format.

Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations | 663

To calculate the distance and angle between multiple points
1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Distance.

2 For the distance you want to calculate, specify a first and second point.
3 For the distance you want to calculate, specify the next point or points.
4 Press Enter.
The distance displays at the Command prompt in the current units
format.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIST
Measures the distance and angle between two points.
ID
Displays the UCS coordinate values of a specified location.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.

System Variables
DISTANCE
Stores the distance computed by the DIST command.

Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information
You can obtain the area, perimeter, and mass properties defined by selected
objects or a sequence of points.
You can calculate the area and perimeter of a sequence of points. You can also
obtain the area, perimeter, and mass properties of any of several types of
objects.

664 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

TIP A fast way to calculate an area bounded by several objects in 2D is to use the
BOUNDARY command. With BOUNDARY, you can pick a point within the area to
create a closed polyline or region. You can then use the Properties palette or the
LIST command to find the area and perimeter of the polyline or region.

Use Commands to Calculate Area
With the MEASUREGEOM and AREA commands, you can specify a series of
points or select an object to calculate area. If you need to calculate the
combined area of multiple objects, you can keep a running total as you add
or subtract one area at a time from the selection set. You cannot use window
selection or crossing selection to select objects.
Total area and perimeter are saved in the AREA and PERIMETER system
variables.
In addition to area, with the MEASUREGEOM command, you can obtain
geometric information from objects such as distance, radius, angle, and volume.

Define an Area
You can measure an arbitrary closed region defined by the points you specify.
The points must lie on a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS.

Calculate the Area, Perimeter, or Circumference of an Object
You can calculate the enclosed area and perimeter or circumference of circles,
ellipses, polylines, polygons, regions, and AutoCAD 3D solids. The information
displayed depends on the type of object selected:
■

Circles. Area and circumference display.

■

Ellipses, closed polylines, polygons, planar closed spline curves, and regions.
Area and perimeter display. For wide polylines, this area is defined by the
center of the width.

Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information | 665

■

Open objects such as open spline curves and open polylines. Area and
length display. Area is calculated as though a straight line connects the
start point and endpoint.

■

AutoCAD 3D solids. Total 3D area for the object displays.

Example: How Various Areas Are Calculated

Combined Areas
Calculate Combined Areas
You can calculate the total area of multiple areas by specifying points or by
selecting objects. For example, you can measure the total area of selected
rooms in a floor plan.

666 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

Subtract Areas from Combined Areas
You can subtract more than one area from a combined area as you calculate.
For example, if you have calculated the area of a floor plan, you can subtract
the area of a room.

Example: Subtraction of Areas from a Calculation
In the following example, the closed polyline represents a metal plate with
two large holes. The area of the polyline is first calculated and then the area
of each hole is subtracted. The area and perimeter or circumference of each
object displays, with a running total after each step.
The Command prompt sequence is
Command: area
Specify first corner point or [Object/Add/Subtract]: a
Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]: o
(ADD mode) Select objects: Select the polyline (1)
Area = 0.34, Perimeter = 2.71
Total area = 0.34
(ADD mode) Select objects: Press Enter
Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]: s
Specify first corner point or [Object/Add]: o
(SUBTRACT mode) Select objects: Select the lower circle (2)
Area = 0.02, Circumference = 0.46
Total area = 0.32
(SUBTRACT mode) Select objects: Select the upper circle (3)
Area = 0.02, Circumference = 0.46
Total area = 0.30
(SUBTRACT mode) Select circle or polyline: Press Enter
Specify first corner point or [Object/Add]: Press Enter

You can also use REGION to convert the plate and the holes to regions, subtract
the holes, and then use the Properties palette or the LIST command to find
the area of the plate.
TIP Use the CAL command or QuickCalc calculator to convert from one system
of area units to another. For more information, see Use the QuickCalc Calculator
on page 670.

Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information | 667

Calculate Mass Properties
With the MASSPROP command, you can analyze 3D solids and 2D regions
for their mass properties including volume, area, moments of inertia, center
of gravity, and so on. In addition, the result of the computations can be saved
to a text file.
See also:
■

Create and Combine Areas (Regions) on page 733

■

Overview of Object Properties on page 507

To calculate an area you define

1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Area.
2 Specify points in a sequence that define the perimeter of the area you
want to measure. Press Enter.
The first and last points connect to form a closed area. The area and
perimeter display in the current units format.

To calculate the area of an object

1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Area.
2 At the Command prompt, enter o (Object).
3 Select an object.
The area and perimeter of the selected object display in the current units
format.

To add an area as you calculate

1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Area.
2 Enter a (Add).

668 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

3 Do one of the following:
■

Specify points to define the area you want to add. Press Enter.

■

Enter o (Object) and select the objects you want to add.
Each new area and a running total of all areas displays in the current
units format.

4 Press Enter twice to end the command.

To subtract an area as you calculate
1 While a combined area displays, enter s (Subtract).
2 Do one of the following:
■

Specify points to define the area you want to subtract. Press Enter.

■

Enter o (Object) and select the objects you want to subtract.

The running total of all areas updates and displays as you define new
areas.
3 Press Enter to end the command.

Quick Reference
Commands
AREA
Stores the last area computed by the AREA command.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MASSPROP
Calculates the mass properties of regions or 3D solids.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information | 669

QUICKCALC
Opens the QuickCalc calculator.
UNITS
Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision.

System Variables
AREA
Stores the last area computed by the AREA command.
PERIMETER
Stores the last perimeter value computed by the AREA or LIST command.

Use a Calculator
You can access a calculator function as you work with the program. You can
use either the QuickCalc calculator interface or the CAL command at
Command prompt transparently while a command is active or not.

Use the QuickCalc Calculator
With the QuickCalc calculator, an interface that looks and functions like a
hand-held calculator, you can perform mathematical, scientific, and geometric
calculations, convert units of measurement, manipulate the properties of
objects, and evaluate expressions.

Overview of QuickCalc
The QuickCalc calculator includes basic features similar to most standard
mathematical calculators.
In addition, QuickCalc has features specific to AutoCAD such as geometric
functions, a Units Conversion area, and a Variables area.
Unlike most calculators, QuickCalc is an expression builder. For greater
flexibility, it does not immediately calculate an answer when you click a
function. Instead, you compose an expression that you can easily edit and,
when you are finished, you click the equal sign (=) or press Enter. Later, you
can retrieve the expression from the History area, modify it, and recalculate
the results.

670 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

With QuickCalc, you can
■

Perform mathematical and trigonometric calculations

■

Access and review previously entered calculations for re-evaluation

■

Use the calculator with the Properties palette to modify object properties

■

Convert units of measurement

■

Perform geometric calculations related to specific objects

■

Copy and paste values and expressions to and from the Properties palette
and the Command prompt

■

Perform computations on mixed numbers (fractions), and feet and inches

■

Define, store, and use calculator variables

■

Use geometric functions from the CAL command

Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 671

Change QuickCalc Size and Appearance
Click the More/Less button on the calculator and only the Input box and
History area are displayed. You can use the expand/collapse arrows to open
and close areas. You can also control the size, location, and appearance of
QuickCalc. See Set Interface Options on page 149.

Quick Reference
Commands
QUICKCALC
Opens the QuickCalc calculator.

672 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

ADCCLOSE
Closes the QuickCalc calculator.

System Variables
QCSTATE
Indicates whether the QuickCalc calculator is open or closed.

Access QuickCalc and Understand Its Behavior
Use QuickCalc directly as you would with a desktop calculator, or use it
transparently within a command or the Properties palette.
There are three ways to work with QuickCalc within the program:
■

Directly from the Tools menu, the Standard toolbar, a shortcut menu, or
the Command prompt

■

Transparently during a command from a shortcut menu or the Command
prompt

■

Transparently from the Properties palette

The method that you choose depends on how you are using QuickCalc.

Use QuickCalc Directly
When you work directly with QuickCalc, you can perform calculations and
unit conversions just as you would with a desktop calculator. You can use the
Windows clipboard (Ctrl+C, Ctrl+V) to transfer the results of your calculations
to other parts of the program or to external programs. Calculations that you
perform directly do not affect or change anything in your drawing.
You can access QuickCalc directly in the following ways:
■

Click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ QuickCalc.

■

On the Standard toolbar, click the QuickCalc button.

■

In the drawing editor (with no command active), right-click and click
QuickCalc.

■

At the Command prompt, enter quickcalc.

■

At the Command prompt, enter qc.

Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 673

Use QuickCalc Transparently from Within a Command
During a command, you can access QuickCalc transparently in the following
ways:
■

Right-click to display the shortcut menu. Click QuickCalc.

■

At the Command prompt, enter quickcalc.

■

At the Command prompt, enter qc.

Calculations that you transfer to the Command prompt affect the drawing.
For example, if you are drawing a line with the LINE command and you pass
an expression to the Command prompt from the calculator, the next point
of the line uses the results, which might be a distance or coordinate value. In
QuickCalc, you click the Apply button to pass the value to the drawing based
on that expression.
NOTE When using QuickCalc transparently to calculate a value for direct distance
entry, Apply transfers the value to the Command prompt. To use the value, position
the crosshairs to determine the direction and then press Enter.

Use QuickCalc Transparently from the Properties Palette
When you want to modify properties and apply evaluated expressions to
objects in your drawing, you can access QuickCalc transparently from the
Properties palette. Use the following method:
■

Click any box in the Properties palette that contains a numeric value. Then
click the QuickCalc button that appears in the box.

■

After calculating a value, transfer the result to the Properties palette by
clicking the Apply button.

The object or drawing property is modified and the changes are displayed in
the drawing.

Calculate Mathematical Expressions in a Dialog Box
You can also enter and evaluate mathematical expressions in a dialog box
using the following format: =expression.
NOTE To evaluate expressions in a dialog box, make sure the system variable,
CALCINPUT, is set to 1.

674 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

To use the QuickCalc calculator
Do one of the following:

■

Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ QuickCalc.

■

Right-click the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. Click QuickCalc.

To use the QuickCalc calculator within a command
Do one of the following:
■

At the Command prompt, enter 'quickcalc or 'qc.

■

Right-click to display a shortcut menu. Click QuickCalc.

To use the QuickCalc calculator with the Properties palette

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
2 Open the Properties palette.
3 Click one or more objects.
4 Click a box with a numeric property.
5 Click the QuickCalc button in the box.

Quick Reference
Commands
QUICKCALC
Opens the QuickCalc calculator.
ADCCLOSE
Closes the QuickCalc calculator.

Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 675

Enter, Evaluate, and Retrieve Expressions
Enter expressions in QuickCalc using standard mathematical rules of
precedence; review and retrieve computations from the History area; and
understand the rules for using imperial units: length, area, and volume.
QuickCalc evaluates expressions according to the following standard
mathematical rules of precedence:
■

Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set

■

Operators in standard order: exponents first, multiplication and division
second, and addition and subtraction last

■

Operators of equal precedence from left to right

The Input box of the calculator is where you enter and retrieve expressions.
With QuickCalc, there are two ways you can enter data in the Input box. You
can either enter expressions using the QuickCalc Number Pad buttons, or you
can use the computer keyboard or numeric keypad. To use the computer
numeric keypad, you must have NUMLOCK on.
To evaluate an expression, click the equal (=) sign on the QuickCalc Number
Pad, or press Enter on the computer keyboard.

Understand the Syntax of Expressions
The syntax for QuickCalc expressions and Command prompt calculator
expressions is identical. For example, to perform an operation on the vector
or coordinates 5,2,0, you enter [5,2,0] in the Input box.
You can use the GETVAR function to read the value of a system variable. The
syntax is
getvar(variable_name)
For more information see CAL.

Use the History Area
The History area keeps an ongoing record of calculations, similar to the paper
tape in a physical desk calculator. You can use the History area to review
previous operations and pass them back to the Input box for re-evaluation
with different parameters.

676 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

Rules for Displaying and Handling Units
QuickCalc adheres to the following rules:
■

Results of calculations are always expressed in decimal format unless a
distance is entered in feet and inches

■

Angular values entered in the Input box are assumed to be degrees
regardless of the settings in the Drawing Units dialog box. To specify
radians, grads, and degrees, append an r, g, or d after the angle value.

■

Results of angular calculations are always expressed in degrees with full
AutoCAD precision.

When the drawing units are set to architectural units, the calculator displays
the results of calculations of imperial units in the architectural format and
rounds to the display precision (LUPREC) specified in the drawing. The results
for all other calculations display in decimal format with full precision.
You can separate feet, inches, and fractional inches with a dash, a space, or
nothing. You can use any of the following syntax cases to enter valid feet-inch
formatted values:
■

5' or 60"

■

5'-9" or 5' 9" or 5'9"

■

5'-1/2" or 5' 1/2" or 5'1/2"

■

5'-9-1/2" or 5' 9-1/2" or 5'9-1/2"

■

5'-9 1/2" or 5' 9 1/2" or 5'9 1/2"

To designate inches for linear calculations, entering double quotes (") is
optional. For example, instead of entering 5'9-1/2", you could enter 5'9-1/2.
WARNING With imperial units, QuickCalc interprets a minus or a dash (-) as a
unit separator rather than a subtraction operation. To specify subtraction, include
at least one space before or after the minus sign. For example, to subtract 9" from
5', enter 5' -9" rather than 5'-9".
You can use QuickCalc to calculate square feet and cubic feet. To enter square
or cubic feet, you must enter units using these abbreviations:
■

sq. ft. or sq ft

■

cu. ft. or cu ft

Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 677

Convert Decimal Units into Imperial Units
For distance measurements, enter an inches sign (") after the number in the
results display. For example, if the computed distance is 15, enter " after the
15, press Enter or click = and the result displays in imperial units as 1'-3".
For computed results, enter the initial values in feet (') and inches (") to display
the results in feet and inches. For example:
■

5 * 6 = 30

■

5" * 6 = 2'-6"

■

5" * 6" = 30 sq. in.

■

5" * 0'-6" = 0.208333333 sq. ft.

To change the font color of values or expressions in the QuickCalc History
area
1 Right-click in the History area. Click either Value Font Color or Expression
Font Color.
2 In the Color dialog box, click a Basic Color or click Define Custom Colors.
With Define Custom Colors, you can select a custom color and add it to
Custom Colors.
3 Click OK.
The colors you selected for values and expressions in the History area are
displayed.

To modify a property in the Properties palette with QuickCalc
1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
2 Select an object.
NOTE If QuickCalc is displayed on your desktop when you work with the
Properties palette, it is temporarily hidden while you use the modal calculator
from within the Properties palette.
3 In the Geometry section of the Properties palette, click on the value of a
property.
A small calculator icon is displayed to the right of the value.

678 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

NOTE Only properties that are displayed with a white background can be
changed.
4 Click the calculator icon.
QuickCalc opens and displays the current value of the object in the Input
box.
5 Perform a calculation on the displayed value and click the equal sign (=)
button.
The new value is displayed in the Input box.
6 Click Apply.
NOTE The Apply button is only available for editable number-based
properties.
The calculator closes and the new value is displayed in the Properties
palette. The object is modified in the drawing.

To obtain X, Y, Z coordinate values for a point using QuickCalc
1 NOTE The QuickCalc toolbar Get Coordinates button uses the cur function.
On the QuickCalc toolbar, click the Get Coordinates button.
QuickCalc temporarily closes and you are prompted to specify a point.
2 In the drawing, click a point.
QuickCalc opens and displays the coordinate values of the point in the
Input box.

To measure the distance between two points using QuickCalc
1 NOTE The QuickCalc toolbar Distance Between Two Points button uses the
dist(p1,p2) function.
On the QuickCalc toolbar, click the Distance Between Two Points button.
QuickCalc temporarily closes and you are prompted to specify two points.
2 In the drawing, click the first point and then the second point.
QuickCalc opens and displays the value of the distance between the two
points in the Input box.

Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 679

To get the angle of a line defined by two points using QuickCalc
1 NOTE The QuickCalc toolbar Angle of Line Defined by Two Points button
uses the ang(p1,p2) function.
On the QuickCalc toolbar, click the Angle of Line Defined by Two Points
button.
QuickCalc temporarily closes and you are prompted to specify two points.
2 Enter the coordinate values for the first point and then the second point.
QuickCalc opens and appends the value of the angle between the two
points to the end of any value or expression already present in the Input
box.

To get the intersection of a line defined by four points using QuickCalc
1 NOTE The QuickCalc Intersection of Two Lines Defined by Four Points button
uses the ill(p1,p2,p3,p4) function.
On the QuickCalc toolbar, click the Intersection of Two Lines Defined
by Four Points button.
QuickCalc temporarily closes and you are prompted to specify four points.
2 Enter the coordinate values for the first point of line one, then the second
point of line one. Next, enter the coordinate values for the first point of
line two, then the second point of line two.
QuickCalc opens and appends the value of the evaluated expression to
the end of any value or expression already present in the Input box.

Quick Reference
Commands
QUICKCALC
Opens the QuickCalc calculator.
ADCCLOSE
Closes the QuickCalc calculator.

680 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

Convert Units of Measurement
In the Units Conversion area of QuickCalc, you can obtain equivalent values
for different units of measurement.
Unit conversions are available for length, area, volume, and angular values.
Based on which unit type you select, you can then select a list of units to
convert from and a list of units to convert to.

The Value to Convert box automatically displays the value from the Input
box. You can also enter a different value. The results of the units conversion
displays in the Converted Value box. You can paste this result to the Input
box by clicking the QuickCalc icon in the Converted Value box.
NOTE In the Value to Convert box, enter decimal values without units.

To convert units of measurement with QuickCalc
1 In the Units Conversion area, select a unit category on the Units Type
list.
2 In the Convert From list, select the type of unit you are converting from.
3 In the Convert To list, select the type of unit you are converting to.
4 In the Value to Convert box, enter the value you want to convert. Press
Enter.
The converted value is displayed in the Converted Value box.

To copy a unit conversion result to the Input box of QuickCalc
■

On the Units Conversion title bar, click the Return Conversion Value to
Input Area button.
The converted value is displayed in the Input box.

To convert radians to degrees using QuickCalc
1 On the Number Pad, enter a value in radians.
2 In the Scientific area, click the r2d button.

Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 681

3 On the Number Pad, click the equal (=) sign.
The conversion is displayed in the Input box.

To convert degrees to radians using QuickCalc
1 On the Number Pad, enter a value in degrees.
2 In the Scientific area, click the d2r button.
3 On the Number Pad, click the equal (=) sign.
The conversion is displayed in the Input box.

Quick Reference
Commands
QUICKCALC
Opens the QuickCalc calculator.
ADCCLOSE
Closes the QuickCalc calculator.

Create and Use Calculator Variables
The Variables area of QuickCalc stores calculator variables that you can access
as needed. Calculator variables can either be constants or functions.
You can use the Variables area to define, store, and retrieve calculator variables.
Calculator variables can either be constants (coordinates/vectors, real numbers,
and integers) or functions. In the Variables area, you can
■

Click a calculator variable to display information such as value, type, and
description in the Details box at the bottom of the Variables area.

■

Double-click a calculator variable to load it into the QuickCalc Input box.

Additional operations are available on the shortcut menus in the Variables
area.

682 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

Create New Calculator Variables
You can create new calculator variables using the shortcut menus in the
Variables area. When defining new calculator variables in the Variable
Definition dialog box, the following rules apply:
■

Constants. Any expression entered in the Value or Expression text entry
box is evaluated before the calculator variable is stored. Calculator variables
that are defined as constants are available “globally.” You can access and
use global constants in different drawings and sessions.

■

Functions. Any expression entered in the Value or Expression text entry
box is stored as text. Functions are evaluated when used in the QuickCalc
Input box.

Create Global Constants
You can use one of the following methods to create global constants:
■

Enter an expression in the Input box using the format $variable_name=value.
For example, to define the golden ratio to 8 decimal places as a global
constant called Phi, enter $Phi=1.61803399 in the Input box.

■

Click the New Variable button in the Variables area title bar. In the
Variables Definition dialog box, click Constant and fill in the other boxes.

■

Right-click the Variables area. Click New Variable.

Access Global Constants
You can access global constants and pass them to the Input box of the
QuickCalc as follows:
■

Double-click a variable in the Variables area of QuickCalc.

■

Click a variable from the list of calculator variables, and click the Return
Variable to Input Area button.

■

Enter a dollar sign ($) followed by the variable name, and press Enter.

To use a global constant in a text or numeric entry box in a window or dialog
box, use the syntax: =$variable_name followed by pressing the END key. For
example, to use the previously mentioned global variable, Phi, enter =$Phi
and press the END key.

Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 683

NOTE In QuickCalc, only constants can be directly referred to by their global
variable names in the text or numeric entry boxes in windows and dialog boxes.

Use Shortcut Functions
Several sample calculator variables have been predefined and stored in the
Shortcut Functions category. These are geometric expressions that combine
CAL functions with the Endpoint Snap mode. The following table describes
the predefined variables that are available in the Variables area of the calculator.
Variable Shortcut For

Description

dee

dist(end,end)

Distance between two endpoints

ille

ill(end,end,end)

Intersection of two lines defined by four endpoints

mee

(end+end)/2

Midpoint between two endpoints

nee

nor(end,end)

Unit vector in the XY plane and normal to two
endpoints

rad

Radius of a selected circle, arc, or polyline arc

vee

vee(end,end)

Vector from two endpoints

vee1

vec1(end,end)

Unit vector from two endpoints

You can easily modify these calculator variables or create your own. For more
information, see the CAL command.

Organize Variables into Categories
You can organize calculator variables in the Variables area under several
categories. This results in a one-level tree structure. The Shortcut Functions
category has already been created and contains several functions.
Use the shortcut menu in the Variables area to create, rename, or delete variable
categories.

To use a predefined variable in a QuickCalc expression
1 In the Variables area, click the variable you want to use.
2 On the QuickCalc Variables title bar, click the Return Variable to Input
Area button.

684 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

The variable is displayed in the Input box as part of your expression.

To create a new variable in QuickCalc
1 On the QuickCalc Variables title bar, click the New Variable button.
2 In the Variable Definition dialog box, under Variable Type, select Constant
or Function.
3 In the Variable Definition dialog box, under Variable Properties Name,
enter a name for the variable. Variable names cannot contain spaces or
special characters.
NOTE When referencing this variable from the Input box, the variable name
must begin with the dollar sign ($) to differentiate it from local LISP variables.
4 Under Variable Properties Group With, click New.
5 In the Category Definition dialog box, under Category Properties Name,
enter a name for the new category.
6 Under Description, enter a description for the new category. Click OK.
7 In the Variable Definition dialog box, under Value or Expression, enter
a value or expression for the new variable.
8 Under Description, enter a description of the new variable. Click OK.
The new variable is now displayed in the Variables area.

To edit a variable in QuickCalc
1 In the Variables area, click the variable you want to edit.
2 On the QuickCalc Variables title bar, click the Edit Variable button.
3 In the Variable Definition dialog box, make the edits to the variable.
Click OK.

To delete a variable in QuickCalc
1 In the Variables area, click the variable you want to delete.
2 On the QuickCalc Variables title bar, click the Delete button.

Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 685

To create a new global constant in the Input box of QuickCalc
■

In the Input box of QuickCalc, enter the following syntax:
$variable_name=value.
For example, you could center $Phi=1.618
NOTE Global variables are not case-sensitive.
QuickCalc adds the global constant to the list of variables in the Variables
area.

To access a global constant from dialog box or window
■

In any text or numeric entry box, enter an expression using the syntax:
=$variable_name followed by pressing the END key.

To evaluate mathematical expressions in a dialog box
1 If necessary, set the CALCINPUT system variable to 1.
2 In a dialog box, in an area where you can enter a numeric value, enter a
mathematical expression in the following format: =expression (for example,
=5+3).
3 Press Alt+Enter on the keyboard.
The expression is evaluated and its value is displayed.

Quick Reference
Commands
ADCCLOSE
Closes the QuickCalc calculator.
QUICKCALC
Opens the QuickCalc calculator.

System Varibles
CALCINPUT
Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are
evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes.

686 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

Use the Command Prompt Calculator
By entering an expression in the Command prompt calculator, you can quickly
solve a mathematical problem or locate points in your drawing.
The CAL command runs the 3D calculator utility to evaluate vector expressions
(combining points, vectors, and numbers) and real and integer expressions.
The calculator performs standard mathematical functions. It also contains a
set of specialized functions for calculations involving points, vectors, and
AutoCAD geometry. With the CAL command, you can
■

Calculate a vector from two points, the length of a vector, a normal vector
(perpendicular to the XY plane), or a point on a line

■

Calculate a distance, radius, or angle

■

Specify a point with the pointing device

■

Specify the last-specified point or intersection

■

Use object snaps as variables in an expression

■

Convert points between a UCS and the WCS

■

Filter the X, Y, and Z components of a vector

■

Rotate a point around an axis

Evaluating Expressions
CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of
precedence.
Mathematical operators in order of precedence
Operator

Operation

()

Groups expressions

Indicates numeric exponent

*, /

Multiplies and divides numbers

+, -

Adds and subtracts numbers

Use the Command Prompt Calculator | 687

Calculating Points
You can use CAL whenever you need to calculate a point or a number within
a command.
For example, you enter (mid+cen)/2 to specify a point halfway between the
midpoint of a line and the center of a circle.
The following example uses CAL as a construction tool. It locates a center
point for a new circle, and then calculates one fifth of the radius of an existing
circle.

Here is the command prompr sequence:
Command: circle
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: 'cal
>> Expression: (mid+cen)/2
>> Select entity for MID snap: Select the notch line (1)
>> Select entity for CEN snap: Select the large circle (2)
Diameter/: 'cal
>> Expression: 1/5*rad
>> Select circle, arc or polyline segment for RAD function: Select the large circle
(3)

To start the Command prompt calculator
Do one of the following:
■

At the Command prompt, enter CAL. Then, enter a CAL expression.

■

At a prompt for a command in progress, enter ‘CAL to start the CAL
command transparently. Then, enter a CAL expression to calculate a value
for that prompt.

688 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools

Quick Reference
Commands
CAL
Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions.

System Variables
CALCINPUT
Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are
evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes.

Use the Command Prompt Calculator | 689

690

Create Objects

You can create a range of objects, from simple lines and circles to spline curves, and ellipses.
In general, you draw objects by specifying points with the pointing device or by entering
coordinate values at the Command prompt.

Draw Linear Objects
A line, the most basic object, can be one segment or a series of connected
segments.

Draw Lines
You can close a sequence of line segments so that the first and last segments
are joined.
You can assign properties to lines including color, linetype, and lineweight. For
more information about properties, see Work with Object Properties on page
507.
You specify the locations that define the endpoints of each line with precision.
You can
■

Enter the coordinate values for an endpoint, using either absolute or relative
coordinates

■

Specify an object snap relative to an existing object. For example, you can
specify the center of a circle as one endpoint of the line

■

Turn grid snap on and snap to a location

There are other methods for creating precise lines. A highly efficient technique
is to offset a line from an existing line, and then trim or extend it to the desired
length.

691

Use polyline objects instead of line objects if you want the segments to be
connected as a single object.
See also:
■

Enter Coordinates to Specify Points on page 606

■

Use Object Snaps on page 626

■

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap on page 635

■

Draw Polylines on page 693

■

Offset an Object on page 815

■

Break and Join Objects on page 843

■

Infer Geometric Constraints on page 885

To draw lines

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line.
2 Specify the start point.
You can use the pointing device or enter coordinate values at the
Command prompt.
3 Complete the first line segment by specifying the endpoint.
To undo the previous line segment during the LINE command, enter u
or click Undo on the toolbar.
4 Specify the endpoints of any additional line segments.
5 Press Enter to end or c to close a series of line segments.
To start a new line at the endpoint of the last line drawn, start the LINE
command again and press Enter at the Specify Start Point prompt.

Quick Reference
Commands
LINE
Creates straight line segments.

692 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

RAY
Creates a line that starts at a point and continues to infinity.
XLINE
Creates a line of infinite length.

Draw Polylines
A polyline is a connected sequence of segments created as a single object. You
can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination of the two.

Polylines are ideal for applications including the following:
■

Contour lines for topographic, isobaric, and other scientific applications

■

Wiring diagrams and printed cicuit board layouts

■

Process and piping diagrams

■

Extrusion profiles and extrusion paths for 3D solid modeling

Polylines can be created with several commands including PLINE, RECTANG,
POLYGON, DONUT, BOUNDARY, and REVCLOUD. All of these commands
result in a LWPOLYLINE (lightweight polyline) object type.
With the 3DPOLY command, you can create non-planar polylines that result
in a POLYLINE object type. Fewer options are available with 3D polylines.
After you create a polyline, you can edit it using grips or PEDIT. You can use
EXPLODE to convert polylines to individual line and arc segments.
NOTE You can convert a spline-fit polyline created with PEDIT into a true spline
object with SPLINE.

Draw Polylines | 693

Create Wide Polylines
You can draw polylines of various widths by using the Width and Halfwidth
options. You can set the width of individual segments and make them taper
gradually from one width to another. These options become available after
you specify a starting point for the polyline.

The Width and Halfwidth options set the width of the next polyline segments
you draw. Widths greater than zero produce wide lines, which are filled if Fill
mode is on and outlined if Fill mode is off.
Intersections of adjacent wide segments are usually beveled. However,
nontangent arc segments, acute angles, or segments that use a dash-dot
linetype are not beveled.

Create Polylines from the Boundaries of Objects
You can create a polyline from the boundaries of objects that form a closed
area with BOUNDARY. A polyline created using this method is a separate
object, distinct from the objects used to create it.
To expedite the boundary selection process in large or complex drawings, you
can specify a group of boundary candidates, called a boundary set. You create
this set by selecting the objects you want to use define the boundary.

See also:
■

Draw Rectangles and Polygons on page 698

■

“Modify Complex Objects” on page 79

■

Break and Join Objects on page 843

■

Control Lineweights on page 574

694 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

■

Infer Geometric Constraints on page 885

To draw a polyline with straight segments

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline.
2 Specify the first point of the polyline.
3 Specify the endpoint of the first polyline segment.
4 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed.
5 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline.
To start a new polyline at the endpoint of the last polyline drawn, start
the PLINE command again and press Enter at the Specify Start Point
prompt.

To draw a line and arc combination polyline

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline.
2 Specify the start point of the polyline segment.
3 Specify the endpoint of the polyline segment.
■

Switch to Arc mode by entering a (Arc) at the Command prompt.

■

Return to Line mode by entering L (Line).

4 Specify additional polyline segments as needed.
5 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline.

To create a wide polyline

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline.
2 Specify the start point of the line segment.
3 Enter w (Width).
4 Enter the starting width of the line segment.

Draw Polylines | 695

5 Specify the ending width of the line segment using one of the following
methods:
■

To create a line segment of equal width, press Enter.

■

To create a tapering line segment, enter a different width.

6 Specify the endpoint of the polyline segment.
7 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed.
8 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline.

To create a boundary polyline

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary.
2 In the Boundary Creation dialog box, in the Object Type list, select
Polyline.
3 Under Boundary Set, do one of the following:
■

To create a boundary set from all objects visible in the current
viewport, select Current Viewport. Avoid this option for large, complex
drawings.

■

To specify which objects to include in the boundary set, click New.
Select the objects that you want to use to create the boundary. Using
this option automatically selects the Existing Set option.

4 Click Pick Points.
5 Specify points within each area that you want to form a boundary
polyline.
This area must be totally enclosed; that is, there can be no gaps between
enclosing objects. You can select more than one area. Click Island
Detection if you want internal closed areas to be included in the boundary
set.
6 Press Enter to create the boundary polyline and end the command.
The command creates a polyline in the shape of the boundary. Because
this polyline overlaps the objects used to create it, it may not be visible.
However, you can move, copy, or modify it just as you can any other
polyline.

696 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

Quick Reference
Commands
3DPOLY
Creates a 3D polyline.
BOUNDARY
Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area.
EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
FILL
Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines.
PEDIT
Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes.
PLINE
Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc
segments.
POLYGON
Creates an equilateral closed polyline.
RECTANG
Creates a rectangular polyline.

Draw Polylines | 697

PLINEGEN
Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline.
PLINETYPE
Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used.
PLINEWID
Stores the default polyline width.

Draw Rectangles and Polygons
You can create rectangles and regular polygons quickly. Creating polygons is
a simple way to draw equilateral triangles, squares, pentagons, hexagons, and
so on.
If necessary, you can use EXPLODE to convert the resulting polyline object
into lines.

Draw Rectangles
Use RECTANG to create closed polylines in a rectangular shape.

Draw Regular Polygons
Use POLYGON to create closed polylines with between 3 and 1,024
equal-length sides. The following illustrations show polygons created using
three methods. In each case, two points are specified.

See also:
■

Draw Polylines on page 693

■

Infer Geometric Constraints on page 885

698 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

To draw a circumscribed polygon

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon.
2 At the Command prompt, enter the number of sides.
3 Specify the center of the polygon (1).
4 Enter c to specify a polygon circumscribed about a circle.
5 Enter the radius length (2).

To draw a polygon by specifying one edge

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon.
2 At the Command prompt, enter the number of sides.
3 Enter e (Edge).
4 Specify the start point for one polygon segment.
5 Specify the endpoint of the polygon segment.

To draw an inscribed polygon

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon.
2 At the Command prompt, enter the number of sides.
3 Specify the center of the polygon.
4 Enter i to specify a polygon inscribed within a circle of specified points.
5 Enter the radius length.

Draw Rectangles and Polygons | 699

To draw a rectangle

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Rectangle.
2 Specify the first corner of the rectangle.
3 Specify the other corner of the rectangle.

Quick Reference
Commands
BOUNDARY
Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area.
EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
POLYGON
Creates an equilateral closed polyline.
RECTANG
Creates a rectangular polyline.

700 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

SNAPANG
Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the
current UCS.

Draw Multiline Objects
Multilines are composed of parallel lines, called elements.
When you draw a multiline, you can use the STANDARD style, which has two
elements, or specify a style that you created previously. You can also change
the justification and scale of the multiline before you draw it.
Multiline justification determines which side of the cursor that the multiline
is drawn, or whether it is centered on the cursor.
Multiline scale controls the overall width of the multiline using the current
units. Multiline scale does not affect linetype scale. If you change the multiline
scale, you might need to make equivalent changes to the linetype scale to
prevent dots or dashes from being disproportionately sized.

Create Multiline Styles
You can create named styles for multilines to control the number of elements
and the properties of each element. The properties of multilines include
■

The total number of elements and position of each element

■

The offset distance for each element from the middle of the multiline

■

The color and linetype of each element

■

The visibility of the lines, called joints, that appear at each vertex

■

The type of end caps that are used

■

The background fill color of the multiline

Draw Multiline Objects | 701

Elements with a positive offset appear on one side of the middle of the
multiline; elements with a negative offset appear on the other side of the
middle of the multiline.
See also:
■

Modify Multilines on page 860

To draw a multiline

1 Click Draw menu ➤ Multiline.
2 At the Command prompt, enter st to select a style.
3 To list available styles, enter the style name or enter ?.
4 To justify the multiline, enter j and select top, zero, or bottom
justification.
5 To change the scale of the multiline, enter s and enter a new scale.
Now draw the multiline.
6 Specify the starting point.
7 Specify a second point.
8 Specify additional points, or press Enter. If you specify three or more
points, you can enter c to close the multiline.

To create a multiline style

1 Click Format menu ➤ Multiline Style.

702 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

2 In the Multiline Style dialog box, click New.
3 In the Create New Multiline Style dialog box, enter a name for the
multiline style and select a multiline style from which to start. Click
Continue.

4 In the New Multiline Style dialog box, select the parameters for the
multiline style. You can also enter a description.
Descriptions are optional and can be up to 255 characters, including
spaces.

Draw Multiline Objects | 703

5 Click OK.
6 In the Multiline Style dialog box, click Save to save the multiline style to
a file (the default is acad.mln). You can save multiline styles to the same
file.
If you create more than one multiline style, save the current style before
creating a new one or you lose the changes to the first style.

Quick Reference
Commands
OFFSET
Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves.
MLINE
Creates multiple parallel lines.
MLSTYLE
Creates, modifies, and manages multiline styles.

System Variables
CMLSTYLE
Sets the multiline style that governs the appearance of the multiline.

704 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

Draw Freehand Sketches
Sketching is useful for creating irregular boundaries or for tracing with a
digitizer.
Draw freehand sketches with the SKETCH command. Freehand sketches
comprise many line segments that are converted into a line, polyline, or spline.
For Splines, you can determine how closely the spline’s curve fits to the
freehand sketch.
For any sketch type, set the minimum length (increment) of the line segments.
Small line segments allow greater accuracy, but they can greatly increase the
drawing file size.
Before sketching, check the CELTYPE system variable to make sure the current
linetype is BYLAYER. When you sketch with dot or dash linetypes, smaller
line segments can become invisible.

Sketch in Tablet Mode
You use Tablet mode with a digitizer. Sketching in Tablet mode is useful for
such things as tracing map outlines from paper directly into a drawing. You
cannot turn off Tablet mode while sketching.
When Tablet mode is on, you can configure the program to map the paper
drawing's coordinate system directly into the world coordinate system. Thus,
there is a direct correlation between the coordinates where screen crosshairs
appear, the coordinates on the tablet, and the coordinates in the original paper
drawing. After configuring the program to match the coordinates of the paper
drawing, you may find that the area shown on the screen is not the area you
need. To avoid this problem, use ZOOM to display the entire work area before
you start to sketch.
With some digitizers, you cannot select the menus while Tablet mode is on.
See your digitizer documentation for details.

Draw Freehand Sketches | 705

To draw freehand sketches
1 At the Command prompt, enter sketch and press Enter.
2 Press Enter again to accept the last saved type, increment, and tolerance
values.
3 Click in the drawing area to begin sketching.
4 As you move the pointing device, freehand line segments of the specified
length are drawn. SKETCH does not accept coordinate input. During the
command, freehand lines are displayed in a different color.
5 Click the endpoint to suspend sketching, allowing you to move around
the screen without drawing. Click a new start point to resume drawing
from the new cursor position.
6 Press Enter to complete the sketch.

Quick Reference
Commands
SKETCH
Creates a series of freehand line segments.

System Variables
DIGITIZER
Identifies digitizers connected to the system.
MAXTOUCHES
SKETCHINC
Sets the record increment for the SKETCH command.
SKPOLY
Determines whether the SKETCH command generates lines, polylines, or
splines.
SKTOLERANCE

Draw Curved Objects
Curved objects are arcs, circles, polyline arcs, donuts, ellipses, and splines.

706 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

Draw Arcs
To create an arc, you can specify various combinations of center, endpoint,
start point, radius, angle, chord length, and direction values.
You can create arcs in several ways. With the exception of the first method,
arcs are drawn counterclockwise from the start point to the endpoint.

Draw Arcs by Specifying Three Points
You can create an arc by specifying three points. In the following example,
the start point of the arc snaps to the endpoint of a line. The second point of
the arc snaps to the middle circle in the illustration.

Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, Center, End
You can create an arc using a start point, center, and a third point that
determines the endpoint.
The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius.
The endpoint is determined by a line from the center that passes through the
third point. The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start
point.
Using different options, you can specify either the start point first or the center
point first.

Draw Arcs | 707

Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, Center, Angle
You can create an arc using a start point, center, and an included angle.
The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius.
The other end of the arc is determined by specifying an included angle that
uses the center of the arc as the vertex. The resulting arc is always created
counterclockwise from the start point.
Using different options, you can specify either the start point first or the center
point first.

The included angle determines the endpoint of the arc. Use the Start, End,
Angle method when you know both endpoints but cannot snap to a center
point.

Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, Center, Length
You can create an arc using a start point, center, and the length of a chord.
The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius.
The other end of the arc is determined by specifying the length of a chord
between the start point and the endpoint of the arc. The resulting arc is always
created counterclockwise from the start point.
Using different options, you can specify either the start point first or the center
point first.

708 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

The length of the chord of the arc determines the included angle.

Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, End, Angle
You can create an arc using a start point, endpoint, and an included angle.
The included angle between the endpoints of the arc determines the center
and the radius of the arc.

Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, End, Direction
You can create an arc using a start point, endpoint, and a tangent direction
at the start point.
The tangent direction can be specified either by locating a point on the desired
tangent line, or by entering an angle. You can determine which endpoint
controls the tangent by changing the order in which you specify the two
endpoints.

Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, End, Radius
You can create an arc using a start point, endpoint, and a radius.
The direction of the bulge of the arc is determined by the order in which you
specify its endpoints. You can specify the radius either by entering it or by
specifying a point at the desired radius distance.

Draw Arcs | 709

Draw Contiguous Tangent Arcs and Lines
Immediately after you create an arc, you can start a line that is tangent to the
arc at an endpoint by starting the LINE command and pressing Enter at the
Specify First Point prompt. You need to specify only the line length.

Immediately after you create a line or an arc, you can start an arc that is
tangent at an endpoint by starting the ARC command and pressing Enter at
the Specify Start Point prompt. You need to specify only the endpoint of the
new arc.
See also:
■

Draw Polylines on page 693

■

Break and Join Objects on page 843

To draw an arc by specifying three points

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Arc drop-down ➤ 3-Point.
2 Specify the start point.
3 Specify a point on the arc.
4 Specify the endpoint.

To draw an arc using a start point, a center point, and an endpoint
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Arc drop-down ➤ Start, Center, End.

2 Specify a start point.
3 Specify the center point.
4 Specify the endpoint.

710 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

To continue an arc with a tangential line
1 Complete the arc.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line.
3 Press Enter at the first prompt.
4 Enter the length of the line and press Enter.

To continue an arc with a tangential arc
1 Complete the arc.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Arc drop-down ➤ Continue.
3 Specify the second endpoint of the tangent arc.

Quick Reference
Commands
ARC
Creates an arc.
LINE
Creates straight line segments.
OFFSET
Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves.
VIEWRES
Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport.

System Variables
ANGDIR
Sets the direction of positive angles.

Draw Arcs | 711

LASTANGLE
Stores the end angle of the last arc entered relative to the XY plane of the
current UCS for the current space.
WHIPARC
Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth.

Draw Circles
To create circles, you can specify various combinations of center, radius,
diameter, points on the circumference, and points on other objects.
You can create circles in several ways. The default method is to specify the
center and the radius. Three other ways to draw a circle are shown in the
illustration.

Draw a Circle Tangent to Other Objects
The tangent point is a point where an object touches another object without
intersecting it. To create a circle that is tangent to other objects, select the
objects and then specify the radius of the circle. In the illustrations below,
the bold circle is the one being drawn, and points 1 and 2 select the objects
to which it is tangent.

712 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

To create a circle tangent at three points, set running object snaps (OSNAP)
to Tangent and use the three-point method to create the circle.
See also:
■

Use Object Snaps on page 626

■

Draw Isometric Circles on page 2141

To draw a circle by specifying a center point and radius or diameter
1 Do one of the following:
■

Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Center,

Radius.
■

Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Center,

Diameter.
2 Specify the center point.
3 Specify the radius or diameter.

To create a circle tangent to two objects
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Tan, Tan, Radius.

The command starts Tangent object snap mode.
2 Select the first object to draw the circle tangent to.

Draw Circles | 713

3 Select the second object to draw the circle tangent to.
4 Specify the radius of the circle.

Quick Reference
Commands
CIRCLE
Creates a circle.
OFFSET
Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves.

System Variables
CIRCLERAD
Sets the default circle radius.
WHIPARC
Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth.

Draw Polyline Arcs
A polyline is a connected sequence of line segments created as a single object.
You can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination of the
two.

Multisegmented lines provide editing capabilities unavailable for single lines.
For example, you can adjust their width and curvature. After you've created
a polyline, you can edit it with PEDIT or use EXPLODE to convert it to
individual line and arc segments. You can
■

Convert a spline-fit polyline into a true spline with SPLINE

714 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

■

Use closed polylines to create a polygon

■

Create a polyline from the boundaries of overlapping objects

Create Arc Polylines
When you draw arc segments in a polyline, the first point of the arc is the
endpoint of the previous segment. You can specify the angle, center point,
direction, or radius of the arc. You can also complete the arc by specifying a
second point and an endpoint.

Create Closed Polylines
You can draw a closed polyline to create a polygon. To close a polyline, specify
the starting point of the last side of the object, enter c (Close), and press Enter.

The Width and Halfwidth options set the width of the next polyline segments
you draw. Zero (0) width produces a thin line. Widths greater than zero
produce wide lines, which are filled if Fill mode is on and outlined if Fill mode
is off. The Halfwidth option sets width by specifying the distance from the
center of the wide polyline to an outside edge.

Taper
When you use the Width option, you are prompted for both a starting and
an ending width. By entering different values, you can taper the polyline. The
starting and ending points of wide polyline segments are in the center of the
line. Intersections of adjacent wide segments are usually beveled. However,
nontangent arc segments, acute angles, or segments that use a dash-dot
linetype are not beveled.

Draw Polyline Arcs | 715

Create Polylines from the Boundaries of Objects
You can create a polyline from the boundaries of overlapping objects that
form a closed area. A polyline created using the boundary method is a separate
object, distinct from the objects used to create it. You can edit it using the
same methods used to edit other polylines.
To expedite the boundary selection process in large or complex drawings, you
can specify a group of boundary candidates, called a boundary set. You create
this set by selecting the objects you want to use to define the boundary.

See also:
■

Modify Splines on page 853

■

Modify Polylines on page 846

■

Break and Join Objects on page 843

■

Control Lineweights on page 574

■

Infer Geometric Constraints on page 885

To draw a polyline with straight segments

716 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

To draw a line and arc combination polyline

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline.
2 Specify the start point of the polyline segment.
3 Specify the endpoint of the polyline segment.
■

Switch to Arc mode by entering a (Arc) at the Command prompt.

■

Return to Line mode by entering L (Line).

4 Specify additional polyline segments as needed.
5 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline.

To create a wide polyline

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline.
2 Specify the start point of the line segment.
3 Enter w (Width).
4 Enter the starting width of the line segment.
5 Specify the ending width of the line segment using one of the following
methods:
■

To create a line segment of equal width, press Enter.

■

To create a tapering line segment, enter a different width.

6 Specify the endpoint of the polyline segment.
7 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed.
8 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline.

To create a boundary polyline

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary.
2 In the Boundary Creation dialog box, in the Object Type list, select
Polyline.

Draw Polyline Arcs | 717

3 Under Boundary Set, do one of the following:
■

To create a boundary set from all objects visible in the current
viewport, select Current Viewport in the list. Avoid this option for
large, complex drawings.

■

To specify which objects to include in the boundary set, click New.
Select the objects that you want to use to create the boundary.
Choosing this option automatically selects the Existing Set option.

4 Click Pick Points.
5 Specify points within each area that you want to form a boundary
polyline.
This area must be totally enclosed; that is, there can be no gaps between
enclosing objects. You can select more than one area.
6 Press Enter to create the boundary polyline and end the command.
The command creates a polyline in the shape of the boundary. Because
this polyline overlaps the objects used to create it, it may not be visible.
However, you can move, copy, or modify it just as you can any other
polyline.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DPOLY
Creates a 3D polyline.
BOUNDARY
Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area.
OFFSET
Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves.
PEDIT
Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes.
PLINE
Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc
segments.

718 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

VIEWRES
Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport.

System Variables
FILLMODE
Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled
in.
HPBOUND
Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY.
PLINECONVERTMODE
Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines.
PLINEGEN
Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline.
PLINETYPE
Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used.
PLINEWID
Stores the default polyline width.

Draw Donuts
Donuts are filled rings or solid-filled circles that actually are closed polylines
with width.
To create a donut, you specify its inside and outside diameters and its center.
You can continue creating multiple copies with the same diameter by
specifying different center points. To create solid-filled circles, specify an inside
diameter of 0.

Draw Donuts | 719

To create a donut

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Donut.
2 Specify the inside diameter (1).
3 Specify the outside diameter (2).
4 Specify the center of the donut (3).
5 Specify the center point for another donut, or press Enter to complete
the command.

Quick Reference
Commands
DONUT
Creates a filled circle or a wide ring.
FILL
Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines.

System Variables
DONUTID
Sets the default for the inside diameter of a donut.
DONUTOD
Sets the default for the outside diameter of a donut.
FILLMODE
Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled
in.

720 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

Draw Ellipses
The shape of an ellipse is determined by two axes that define its length and
width. The longer axis is called the major axis, and the shorter one is the
minor axis.

The illustrations below show two different ellipses created by specifying axis
and distance. The third point specifies only a distance and does not necessarily
designate the axis endpoint.

If you are drawing on isometric planes to simulate 3D, you can use ellipses to
represent isometric circles viewed from an oblique angle. First you need to
turn on Isometric Snap in the Drafting Settings dialog box (DSETTINGS
command).
See also:
■

Draw Isometric Circles on page 2141

■

Break and Join Objects on page 843

To draw an isometric circle
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Drafting Settings.
2 In the Drafting Settings dialog box, Snap and Grid tab, under Snap Type
and Style, click Isometric Snap. Click OK.

Draw Ellipses | 721

3 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ellipse drop-down ➤ Axis, End.

4 Enter i (Isocircle).
5 Specify the center of the circle.
6 Specify the radius or diameter of the circle.

To draw a true ellipse using endpoints and distance

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ellipse drop-down ➤ Axis, End.
2 Specify the first endpoint of the first axis (1).
3 Specify the second endpoint of the first axis (2).
4 Drag the pointing device away from the midpoint, and click to specify a
distance (3) for half the length of the second axis.

To draw an elliptical arc using start and end angles
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ellipse drop-down ➤ Elliptical Arc.

2 Specify endpoints for the first axis (1 and 2).
3 Specify a distance to define half the length of the second axis (3).
4 Specify the start angle (4).
5 Specify the end angle (5).

722 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

The elliptical arc is drawn counterclockwise between the start point and
endpoint.

Quick Reference
Commands
ELLIPSE
Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc.

System Variables
ANGDIR
Sets the direction of positive angles.
PELLIPSE
Controls the ellipse type created with ELLIPSE.

Draw Splines
A spline is a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of points that
influence the shape of the curve.
SPLINE and BLEND create curves called nonuniform rational B-splines (NURBS),
referred to as splines for simplicity.
By default, a spline is a series of blended curve segments of degree 3 (also
called cubic) polynomials. Cubic splines are the most common, and mimic
the splines that are created manually using flexible strips that are shaped by
weights at data points.
In the following example, SPLINE was used to create the highlighted boundary
of the concrete walkway.

Draw Splines | 723

BLEND was used to create splines between lines and arcs for a golf course
design. The resulting splines are tangent to the selected lines and curves
without changing the lengths of the selected objects.
Splines are also used for creating solids and surfaces for 3D modeling. For more
information, see Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves on page
1030.

Understand Control Vertices and Fit Points
You can create or edit splines using either control vertices, or fit points. The spline
on the left displays control vertices along a control polygon, and the spline on
the right displays fit points.

The options available in SPLINE depend on which method is used to create
the spline.
CVSHOW and CVHIDE determine whether the control vertices are displayed
on a spline even when the spline is not selected.
Use the triangular grip on a selected spline to switch between displaying
control vertices and displaying fit points. You can use the round and square
grips to modify a selected spline. For more information, see Modify Splines
on page 853.

724 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

IMPORTANT Switching the display from control vertices to fit points automatically
changes the selected spline to degree 3. Splines originally created using
higher-degree equations will likely change shape as a result.

Create Splines Using Control Vertices
When you create splines using control vertices, the points you specify display
temporary lines between them, forming a control polygon that determines
the shape of the spline.
The advantage of changing the shape of a spline using control vertices is the
fine control this method provides. With this method, you can also specify
lower or higher degree polynomials, including degree 1 (linear), degree 2
(quadratic), degree 3 (cubic), and so on up to degree 10.

Create Splines Using Fit Points
When you create splines using fit points, the resulting curve passes through
the specified points, and is influenced by the spacing of mathematical knots
in the curve.
You can choose the spacing of these knots with the knot parameterization
option, which will result in different curves as shown in the example.

NOTE There is no best choice for knot parameterization for all cases. The chord
length parameterization is commonly used, and the square root (centripetal)
parameterization often produces better curves depending on the data set.

Draw Splines | 725

When the Tolerance value is set to 0, the spline passes directly through the
fit points. With larger tolerance values, the spline passes near the fit points.
Optionally, you can specify the tangent direction for the spline at each end.
NOTE The fit point method always results in a degree 3 spline.

Special Cases
You can create a spline with a parabolic shape by specifying a degree 2 spline
created with exactly 3 control vertices as shown on the left. Degree 3 splines
created with 4 control vertices have the same shape as Bezier curves of degree
3 as shown on the right.

You can close a spline so that the start point and end point are coincident
and tangent. By default, closed splines are mathematically periodic, meaning
that they have the smoothest (C2) continuity at the point of closure.
In the example, both splines are closed, and the point of closure is marked
with a dot. The result of setting the SPLPERIODIC system variable to periodic
is shown on the left, while the result of the legacy setting is shown on the
right.

NOTE The legacy method for creating B-splines by creating a polyline, and then
using the Spline option of the PEDIT command generates only an approximate
“spline-fit” polyline.
See also:
■

Modify Splines on page 853

■

Break and Join Objects on page 843

726 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

■

Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves on page 1030

To draw a spline

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Spline.
2 (Optional) Enter m (Method). Then enter either f (Fit Points) or cv
(Control Vertices).
3 Specify the first point of the spline.
4 Specify the next point of the spline. Continue specifying points as needed.
5 Press Enter to end, or enter c (Close) to close the spline.

To draw a spline tangent to and connecting two lines or curves

1 Click Modify tab ➤ Blend Curves.
2 (Optional) Enter con (Continuity) and enter a tangency option.
3 Select a line or curve near an endpoint.
4 Select another line or curve near an endpoint.

To convert a spline-fit polyline to a spline

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Spline.
2 Enter o (Object).
3 Select a spline-fit polyline and press Enter.
The selected object changes from a polyline to a spline.

Quick Reference
Commands
BLEND
Creates a spline in the gap between two selected lines or curves.

Draw Splines | 727

CVHIDE
Turns off the display of control vertices for all NURBS surfaces and curves.
CVSHOW
Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves.
PEDIT
Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes.
PLINE
Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc
segments.
SPLINE
Creates a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of fit points, or that
is defined by the vertices in a control frame.
SPLINEDIT
Modifies the parameters of a spline or converts a spline-fit polyline to a
spline.

System Variables
PLINECONVERTMODE
Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines.
SPLPERIODIC
Controls whether closed splines and NURBS surfaces are generated with
periodic properties to maintain the smoothest continuity at the closure point
or seam.

Draw Helixes
A helix is an open 2D or 3D spiral.
You can use a helix as a path with the SWEEP command. For example, you
might sweep a circle along a helix path to create a solid model of a spring.
When you create a helix, you can specify the following:
■

Base radius

■

Top radius

728 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

■

Height

■

Number of turns

■

Turn height

■

Twist direction

If you specify the same value for both the base radius and the top radius, then
a cylindrical helix is created. By default, the top radius is set to the same value
as the base radius. You cannot specify 0 for both the base radius and top radius.
If you specify different values for the top radius and the base radius, then a
conical helix is created.
If you specify a height value of 0, then a flat, 2D spiral is created.
NOTE A helix is a spline approximation of a real helix. Length values may not be
completely accurate. However, when you use a helix as a sweep path, the resulting
values will be accurate regardless of the approximation.
See also:
■

Modify Helixes on page 858

■

Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping on page 1038

To create a helix

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Helix.
2 Specify the center point for the base of the helix.
3 Specify the base radius.
4 Specify the top radius or press Enter to specify the same value as the base
radius.
5 Specify the height of the helix.

Draw Helixes | 729

Quick Reference
Commands
HELIX
Creates a 2D spiral or 3D spring.

Draw Construction and Reference Geometry
Construction lines and reference points are temporary objects you create to
help you draw accurately.

Draw Reference Points
Point objects are useful as nodes or reference geometry for object snaps and
relative offsets.
You can set the style of the points and their size relative to the screen or in
absolute units. Changing the style of points
■

Makes them more visible and easier to differentiate from grid dots

■

Affects the display of all point objects in the drawing

■

Requires using REGEN to make the change visible

To set point style and size

1 Click Format menu ➤ Point Style.
2 In the Point Style dialog box, select a point style.
3 In the Point Size box, specify a size, either relative to the screen or in
absolute units.
4 Click OK.

To create a point object
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Multiple Points.

730 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

2 Specify the point location.
You can snap to a point using the Node object snap.

Quick Reference
Commands
DDPTYPE
Specifies the display style and size of point objects.
POINT
Creates a point object.

System Variables
PDMODE
Controls how point objects are displayed.
PDSIZE
Sets the display size for point objects.

Draw Construction Lines (and Rays)
Lines that extend to infinity in one or both directions, known as rays and
construction lines, respectively, can be used as references for creating other
objects.
For example, you can use construction lines to find the center of a triangle,
prepare multiple views of the same item, or create temporary intersections to
use for object snaps.
Infinite lines do not change the total area of the drawing. Therefore, their
infinite dimensions have no effect on zooming or viewpoints, and they are
ignored by commands that display the drawing extents. You can move, rotate,
and copy infinite lines just as you can move, rotate, and copy other objects.
You may want to create infinite lines on a construction line layer that can be
frozen or turned off before plotting.

Construction Lines
A construction line (also known as xlines) can be placed anywhere in
three-dimensional space. You can specify its orientation in several ways. The

Draw Construction Lines (and Rays) | 731

default method for creating the line is the two-point method: you specify two
points to define the orientation. The first point, the root, is the conceptual
midpoint of the construction line, that is, the point snapped to by the
Midpoint object snap.
You can also create construction lines in several other ways.
■

Horizontal and Vertical. Create construction lines that pass through a point
you specify and are parallel to the X or Y axis of the current UCS.

■

Angle. Creates a construction line in one of two ways. Either you select a
reference line and then specify the angle of the construction line from
that line, or you create a construction line at a specific angle to the
horizontal axis by specifying an angle and then a point through which
the construction line should pass.

■

Bisector. Creates a construction line that bisects an angle you specify. You
specify the vertex and the lines that create the angle.

■

Offset. Creates a construction line parallel to a baseline you specify. You
specify the offset distance, select the baseline, and then indicate on which
side of the baseline to locate the construction line.

Rays
A ray is a line in three-dimensional space that starts at a point you specify and
extends to infinity. Unlike construction lines, which extend in two directions,
rays extend in only one direction. Using rays instead of construction lines can
help reduce visual clutter. Like construction lines, rays are ignored by
commands that display the drawing extents.

732 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

To create a construction line by specifying two points

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Construction Line.
2 Specify a point to define the root of the construction line.
3 Specify a second point through which the construction line should pass.
4 Continue to specify construction lines as needed.
All subsequent xlines pass through the first point specified.
5 Press Enter to end the command.

To create a ray

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ray.
2 Specify a starting point for the ray.
3 Specify a point through which the ray should pass.
4 Continue to specify points to create additional rays as needed.
All subsequent rays pass through the first point specified.
5 Press Enter to end the command.

Quick Reference
Commands
RAY
Creates a line that starts at a point and continues to infinity.
XLINE
Creates a line of infinite length.

Create and Combine Areas (Regions)
Regions are 2D enclosed areas that have physical properties such as centroids
or centers of mass. You can combine existing regions into a single, complex
region.

Create and Combine Areas (Regions) | 733

Regions can be used for
■

Extracting design information, such as areas and centroids, using
MASSPROP

■

Applying hatching and shading

■

Combining simple objects into more complex ones with Boolean
operations.

You can create regions from objects that form closed loops. Loops can be
combinations of lines, polylines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, and splines
that enclose an area.
You create regions using the REGION command to convert a closed object
into a region, and the BOUNDARY command to create a region from an area
enclosed by objects. You can combine regions by unifying, subtracting, or
intersecting them.
Objects combined using UNION:

Objects combined using SUBTRACT:

Objects combined using INTERSECT:

734 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

Invalid Boundaries
When a boundary cannot be determined, it might be because the specified
internal point is not within a fully enclosed area. With the BOUNDARY
command, red circles are displayed around unconnected endpoints of the
boundary to identify gaps in the boundary.

The red circles remain displayed even after you exit the command. They are
removed when you specify a closed boundary, or by using REDRAW, REGEN,
or REGENALL.

To define regions

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Region.
2 Select objects to create the region.
These objects must each form an enclosed area, such as a circle or a closed
polyline.
3 Press Enter.
A message at the Command prompt indicates how many loops were
detected and how many regions were created.

Create and Combine Areas (Regions) | 735

To define regions by using boundaries

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary.
2 In the Boundary Creation dialog box, in the Object Type list, select
Region.
3 Click Pick Points.
4 Specify a point in your drawing inside each closed area that you want to
define as a region and press Enter.
This point is known as the internal point.
NOTE You can make a new boundary set to limit the objects used to
determine the boundary.

To combine regions by adding

1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Union.
2 Select one region for the union.
3 Select another region.
You can select regions to unite in any order.
4 Continue selecting regions or press Enter to end the command.
The command converts the selected regions to a new combined region.

To combine regions by subtracting

1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Subtract.
2 Select one or more regions from which to subtract and press Enter.
3 Select the region to subtract and press Enter.
The areas of the second regions you selected are subtracted from the areas
of the first regions.

736 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

To combine regions by finding intersections

1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Intersect.
2 Select one region of the intersection.
3 Select another intersecting region.
You can select regions in any order to find their intersection.
4 Continue selecting regions or press Enter to end the command.
The command converts the selected regions to a new region defined by
the intersection of the selected regions.

Quick Reference
Commands
BOUNDARY
Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area.
INTERSECT
Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces,
or regions.
MASSPROP
Calculates the mass properties of regions or 3D solids.
REGION
Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object.
SUBTRACT
Combines selected 3D solids or 2D regions by subtraction.
UNION
Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition.

System Variables
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.

Create and Combine Areas (Regions) | 737

Create Revision Clouds
Revision clouds are polylines that consist of sequential arcs. They are used to
call attention to parts of a drawing during the review stage.
If you review or redline drawings, you can increase your productivity by using
the Revision Cloud feature to highlight your markups. REVCLOUD creates a
polyline of sequential arcs to form a cloud-shaped object. You can select a
style for a revision cloud: Normal or Calligraphy. If you select Calligraphy,
the revision cloud looks as if it was drawn with a calligraphy pen.
You can create a revision cloud from scratch, or you can convert objects, such
as a circle, ellipse, polyline, or spline, to a revision cloud. When you convert
an object to a revision cloud, the original object is deleted if DELOBJ is set to
1 (the default).
You can set the minimum and maximum default values for the arc lengths
of a revision cloud. When you draw a revision cloud, you can vary the size of
the arcs by using pick points for the smaller arc segments. You can also edit
the individual arc lengths and chord lengths of a revision cloud by adjusting
the pick points.
REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length as a multiple of the DIMSCALE
system variable to provide consistency among drawings with different scale
factors.

Make sure that you can see the entire area to be outlined with REVCLOUD
before you begin the command. REVCLOUD is not designed to support
transparent and real-time panning and zooming.

To create a revision cloud from scratch

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud.
2 At the Command prompt, specify a new minimum and maximum arc
length or specify a revision cloud starting point.

738 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

The default minimum and maximum arc lengths are set to 0.5000 units.
The maximum arc length can be no more than three times the minimum
arc length.
3 Guide the crosshairs along the cloud path. You can click pick points along
the path if you want to vary the size of the arcs.
4 Press Enter at any time to stop drawing the revision cloud.
To close the revision cloud, return to its starting point.

To create revision clouds with a calligraphy pen style

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud.
2 At the Command prompt, enter style.
3 At the Command prompt, enter calligraphy.
4 Press Enter to save the calligraphy setting and to continue with the
command, or press ESC to end the command.

To convert an object to a revision cloud

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud.
2 At the Command prompt, specify a new minimum and maximum arc
length or press Enter.
The default minimum and maximum arc lengths are set to 0.5000 units.
The maximum arc length can be no more than three times the minimum
arc length.
3 Select the circle, ellipse, polyline, or spline that you want to convert to
a revision cloud.
To reverse the direction of the arcs, enter yes at the Command prompt
and press Enter.
4 Press Enter to change the selected object to a revision cloud.

Create Revision Clouds | 739

To change the default values for arc lengths in a revision cloud

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud.
2 At the Command prompt, specify a new minimum arc length and press
Enter.
3 At the Command prompt, specify a new maximum arc length and press
Enter.
The maximum arc length can be no more than three times the minimum
arc length.
4 Press Enter to continue with the command or ESC to end the command.

To edit the individual lengths of arcs or chords in a revision cloud
1 In your drawing, select the revision cloud you want to edit.
2 Move the pick points along the path of the revision cloud to change the
arc lengths and chords.

Quick Reference
Commands
REVCLOUD
Creates a revision cloud using a polyline.

System Variables
DIMSCALE
Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify
sizes, distances, or offsets.
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.

740 | Chapter 18 Create Objects

Select and Modify Objects

You can select objects, view and edit object properties, and perform general and object-specific
editing operations.

Select Objects
You have a wide range of options when you need to select objects for editing
operations.

Select Objects Individually
At the Select Objects prompt, you can select one or more objects individually.

Use the Pickbox Cursor
When the square pickbox cursor is in position to select an object, the object is
highlighted. Click to select the object.
You can control the size of the pickbox in the Options dialog box, Selection
tab.

Select Overlapping or Close Objects
It is sometimes difficult to select objects that overlap or are close together. In
the illustration, two lines and a circle lie within the pickbox.

741

If selection preview is turned on, you can cycle through the objects by rolling
over the object on top to highlight it, or you can press and hold Shift and
then press the Spacebar. When the required object is highlighted, left-click to
select it.
If selection preview is turned off, hold down Shift and Spacebar at a Select
Objects prompt while you left-click to cycle through the objects until the one
you want is highlighted, and then press Enter . Press Esc to turn off cycling.

Remove Selection from Objects
Remove objects from the current selection set by holding down Shift and
selecting them again.
See also:
■

Modify 3D Subobjects on page 1186

■

Modify Composite Solids and Surfaces on page 1205

To select a single object
1 At the Select Objects prompt of any command, move the rectangular
pickbox cursor so that the object that you want to select is highlighted.
2 Click the object.
The object you selected is highlighted.
3 Press Enter to end object selection.
NOTE If the PICKFIRST system variable is set to 1 (noun-verb selection), you
can select objects before entering a command.

To change the size of the pickbox cursor
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 On the Selection tab, under Pickbox Size, move the pickbox size slider
until the pickbox is the size you want to use.
3 Click OK.

To cycle through objects for selection
1 At the Select Objects prompt, hold down Shift + Spacebar. Click as near
as possible to the object you want.

742 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

2 Keep clicking until the object you want is highlighted.
3 Press Enter to select the object.
NOTE If selection preview is turned on, you can cycle through the objects by
rolling over the object on top to highlight it, and pressing and holding Shift and
then pressing Spacebar continuously. When the required object is highlighted,
left-click to select it.

To remove selection from objects
■

Hold down Shift. Click the objects that you want removed from the
selection set.

Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
SELECT
Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.
3DSELECTIONMODE
Controls the selection precedence of both visually and physically overlapping
objects when using 3D visual styles.
HIGHLIGHT
Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips.
LEGACYCTRLPICK
Specifies the keys for selection cycling and the behavior for Ctrl+click.
PICKADD
Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or
add to it.
PICKAUTO
Controls automatic windowing for object selection.
PICKBOX
Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.

Select Objects Individually | 743

PICKDRAG
Controls the method of drawing a selection window.
PICKFIRST
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command.

Select Multiple Objects
At the Select Objects prompt, you can select many objects at the same time.

Specify a Rectangular Selection Area
Specify opposite corners to define a rectangular area. The background inside
the area changes color and becomes transparent. The direction that you drag
your cursor from the first point to the opposite corner determines which
objects are selected.
■

Window selection. Drag your cursor from left to right to select only objects
that are entirely enclosed by the rectangular area.

■

Crossing selection. Drag your cursor from right to left to select objects that
the rectangular window encloses or crosses.

744 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

With a window selection, usually the entire object must be contained in the
rectangular selection area. However, if an object with a noncontinuous (dashed)
linetype is only partially visible in the viewport and all the visible vectors of
the linetype can be enclosed within the selection window, the entire object
is selected.

Specify an Irregularly Shaped Selection Area
Specify points to define an irregularly shaped area. Use window polygon
selection to select objects entirely enclosed by the selection area. Use crossing
polygon selection to select objects enclosed or crossed by the selection area.

Specify a Selection Fence
In a complex drawing, use a selection fence. A selection fence looks like a
polyline and selects only the objects it passes through. The circuit board
illustration shows a fence selecting several components.

Use Other Selection Options
You can see all selection options by entering ? at the Select Objects prompt.
For a description of each of the selection options, see SELECT.

Remove Selection from Multiple Objects
You can enter r (Remove) at the Select Objects prompt and use any selection
option to remove objects from the selection set. If you are using the Remove
option and want to return to adding objects to the selection set, enter a (Add).

Select Multiple Objects | 745

You can also remove objects from the current selection set by holding down
Shift and selecting them again, or by holding down Shift and then clicking
and dragging window or crossing selections. You can add and remove objects
repeatedly from the selection set.

To see a list of options at the Select Objects prompt
■

Enter ? at the Select Objects prompt.

To select objects within an irregularly shaped area
1 At the Select Objects prompt, enter wp (Window Polygon).
2 Specify points that define an area entirely enclosing the objects you want
to select.
3 Press Enter to close the polygon selection area and complete the selection.

To select objects crossing an irregularly shaped area
1 At the Select Objects prompt, enter cp (Crossing Polygon).
2 Specify points that define an area that encloses or crosses the objects you
want to select.
3 Press Enter to close the polygon selection area and complete the selection.

To select objects with a fence
1 At the Select Objects prompt, enter f (Fence).
2 Specify points to create a fence that passes through the objects you want
to select.
3 Press Enter to complete the selection.

To remove several objects from the selection set
1 After selecting objects, at the Select Objects prompt, enter r (Remove).
2 Enter any selection option such as cp (Crossing Polygon) or f (Fence),
and select the objects to be removed from the selection set.
To return to adding objects to the selection set, enter a (Add).

746 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
QSELECT
Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria.
SELECT
Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.
HIGHLIGHT
Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips.
PICKADD
Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or
add to it.
PICKAUTO
Controls automatic windowing for object selection.
PICKBOX
Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.
PICKDRAG
Controls the method of drawing a selection window.
PICKFIRST
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command.
PREVIEWEFFECT
Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of objects.

Prevent Objects from Being Selected
You can prevent objects on specified layers from being selected and modified
by locking those layers.
Typically, you lock layers to prevent accidental editing of particular objects.
Other operations are still possible when a layer is locked. For example, you
can make a locked layer current, and you can add objects to it. You can also

Prevent Objects from Being Selected | 747

use inquiry commands (such as LIST), use object snaps to specify points on
objects on locked layers, and change the draw order of objects on locked layers.
To help you differentiate between locked and unlocked layers, you can do the
following:
■

Hover over an object to see whether a lock icon is displayed

■

Dim the objects on locked layers

NOTE Grips are not displayed on objects that are on locked layers.

To lock or unlock a layer

1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties.
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the padlock for the layers that you
want to lock.
3 Click OK.
If the padlock is closed, the layer is locked and objects on that layer
cannot be selected.

To lock or unlock a layer by selecting an object on that layer
1 Click the Model tab.
2 Do either of the following:
■

Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Lock.

■

Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Unlock.

3 Select an object on the layer you want to lock or unlock.

Quick Reference
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.

748 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

LAYISO
Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects.
LAYLCK
Locks the layer of a selected object.
LAYULK
Unlocks the layer of a selected object.
LAYLOCKFADECTL
Controls the amount of fading for objects on locked layers.

Select Objects by Properties
Use object properties or object types to include objects in a selection set, or
to exclude them.
To quickly define a selection set based on specified filtering criteria, use
■

Quick Select (QSELECT) from the Properties palette to filter selection sets
by property (such as color) and by object type

■

Object Selection Filters dialog box (FILTER) to filter selection sets by
property and by object type

■

Select Similar (SELECTSIMILAR) to select similar objects of the same type
based on specified matching properties

■

AutoLISP function SSGET to create a custom selection filter

If you added a feature classification to an object using Autodesk or a third-party
application, you can select objects by classification property. With object
selection filters, you can name and save filters for future use.
With object selection filters, to filter your selection set based on color, linetype,
or lineweight, consider whether these properties are set to BYLAYER for any
objects in your drawing. For example, an object may appear red because its
color is set to BYLAYER and the layer color is red.
By default, objects of the same type are considered similar if they are on the
same layer, and, for blocks and other referenced objects, have the same name.
Subobjects are only considered at the object level. For example, when a mesh
vertex is selected, SELECTSIMILAR selects other mesh objects, not just the
mesh vertices.

Select Objects by Properties | 749

NOTE If an application such as AutoCAD Map 3D was used to add a feature
classification to an object, and the associated classification (XML) file is present,
you can select objects by classification property. Specifically, you can select a
classification in the Object Type box and a property in the Properties box.
See also:
■

Customize Object Selection on page 753

■

Work with Layers on page 514

To create a selection set using Quick Select

1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select.
2 In the Quick Select dialog box, under Apply To, select Entire Drawing.
3 Under Object Type, select Multiple.
4 Under Properties, select Color.
5 Under Operator, select Equals.
6 Under Value, specify the color.
7 Under How to Apply, select Include in New Selection Set.
8 Click OK.

To exclude objects from the selection set
You can exclude objects from the current selection set by using the Exclude
from New Selection Set option. In the following example, you exclude all
circles with a radius greater than 1 from a set of objects already selected.
1 Select several objects.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select.
3 In the Quick Select dialog box, under Apply To, select Current Selection.
4 Under Object Type, select Circle.
5 Under Properties, select Radius.

750 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

6 Under Operator, select Greater Than.
7 Under Value, enter 1.
8 Under How to Apply, select Exclude from New Selection Set.
9 Click OK.
All circles with a radius greater than 1 are removed from the selection
set.

To append objects to the selection set
You can use Quick Select to append objects to a current selection set. In the
following example, you keep the current selection set and append all objects
in the drawing that contain hyperlinks whose names begin with bld1_.

1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select.
2 In the Quick Select dialog box, select Append to Current Selection Set.
3 In the Object Type box, select Multiple.
4 Under Properties, select Hyperlink.
5 Under Operator, select Wildcard Match.
6 Under Value, enter bld1_*.
7 Under How to Apply, select Include in New Selection Set.
8 Click OK.

To name and save a filtered list
1 At the Command prompt, enter filter.
2 In the Object Selection Filters dialog box, under Select Filter, select a filter
such as Line.
3 Click Add to List.
4 Under Save As, enter a filter name such as Linefilter.
5 Click Save As.
6 Click Apply.

Select Objects by Properties | 751

The filter is applied so you can select, in this case, only lines in the
drawing. If you select objects with a selection, the filter is applied to all
objects in the selection area.

To use a named filter
1 At the Select Object prompt, enter 'filter. (The apostrophe makes it a
transparent command.)
2 In the Object Selection Filters dialog box, under Select Filter, select the
filter you want to use. Click Apply.
3 Use a crossing window to specify objects for selection.
Only the objects selected by the crossing window that match the filter
criteria are selected.

To create a selection set of similar objects
1 Enter selectsimilar.
2 Enter se (settings).
3 In the Select Similar Settings dialog box, select the properties that must
match for objects of the same type to be considered similar.
If no properties are selected, objects of the same type are selected.
4 Click OK.
5 Select object(s) as the selection criteria.
6 Press Enter to select similar objects.

752 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

SELECT
Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.
SELECTSIMILAR
Adds similar objects to the selection set based on selected objects.
PICKADD
Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or
add to it.
PICKAUTO
Controls automatic windowing for object selection.
PICKBOX
Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.
PICKDRAG
Controls the method of drawing a selection window.
PICKFIRST
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command.
SELECTSIMILARMODE
Controls which properties must match for an object of the same type to be
selected with SELECTSIMILAR.

Customize Object Selection
You can control several aspects of selecting objects, such as whether you enter
a command first or select objects first, the size of the pickbox cursor, and how
selected objects are displayed.
For commands that use the Select Objects prompt, you can
■

Enter a command first, and then select objects

■

Select the objects first, and then enter a command

You can also choose
■

Whether objects to be selected are previewed during selection

Customize Object Selection | 753

■

Whether selected objects are highlighted

■

How you define selection areas and how you create selection sets

Select the Command First
When you use an editing command, a Select Objects prompt is displayed and
the crosshairs is replaced with a pickbox. You can respond to the Select Objects
prompt in various ways:
■

Select objects one at a time.

■

Click an empty area. Drag the cursor to define a rectangular selection area.

■

Enter a selection option. Enter ? to display all selection options.

■

Combine selection methods. For example, to select most of the objects in
the drawing area, select all objects and then remove the objects that you
do not want selected.

■

Enter 'filter to use a named selection filter. The apostrophe runs the
command transparently.

Select Objects First
You can use one of two methods to select objects before starting a command:
■

Use the SELECT command, and enter ? to display all selection options. All
objects selected are put into the Previous selection set. To use the Previous
selection set, enter p at the Select Objects prompt of any subsequent
command.

■

When noun/verb selection is turned on, select objects at the Command
prompt before entering a command such as MOVE, COPY, or ERASE. With
this method, you can only select objects by clicking them individually or
by using automatic selection.

■

Enter qselect to filter the selection. Then enter p at the Select Objects
prompt of any subsequent command.

Highlight Objects to Be Selected
Objects are highlighted when the pickbox cursor rolls over them, providing
a preview of which object will be selected when you click. When you specify
an area to select multiple objects, the background of the area becomes
transparent.

754 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

These selection previewing effects are turned on by default. You can turn them
off with the SELECTIONPREVIEW system variable. When the PICKBOX system
variable is set to 0, selection previewing of objects is not available.

Control the Appearance of Selected Objects
By default, selected objects are displayed with dashed lines. You can increase
program performance by setting the HIGHLIGHT system variable to 0. Turning
off selection highlighting does not affect grips on selected objects.

Set Up Default Selection Methods
The default selection methods are:
■

Use selection previewing and selection area effects to preview selection.

■

Select objects before entering a command (noun-verb selection) or after
entering a command. (PICKFIRST)

■

Press Shift to append objects to the selection set. (PICKADD)

■

Click and drag to create a selection window. Otherwise you must click
twice to define the corners of a selection window. (PICKDRAG)

■

Start Window or Crossing selection automatically when you click an empty
space. Otherwise, you must enter c or w to specify window crossing
selection. (PICKAUTO)

■

Change the size of the pickbox. (PICKBOX)

■

Select all objects in a group when you select one object in that group.

■

Include the boundary in the selection set when you select a hatch.

To change the size of the pickbox cursor

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, under Pickbox Size, move the
slider until the pickbox is the size you want to use.
3 Click OK.

Customize Object Selection | 755

To change object selection settings

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, make changes to the Selection
Preview and Selection Modes areas and the pickbox size.
3 Click OK.

To turn on or turn off selection previewing

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, select or clear options as follows:
■

Select the When a Command Is Active option to display the check
mark.

■

Select the When No Command Is Active option to display the check
mark.

■

Select both options to turn on selection preview whenever it is
available.

■

Clear both options to turn off selection preview entirely.

To change the appearance of selection previewing

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, click Visual Effect Settings.
3 In the Visual Effect Settings dialog box, select one of the following
options:
■

Dash. Displays dashed lines.

■

Thicken. Displays thickened lines.

■

Both. Displays dashed and thickened lines.

4 Click OK to exit each dialog box.

756 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

To exclude objects from selection previewing

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, click Visual Effect Settings.
3 In the Visual Effect Settings dialog box, click Advanced Options.
4 In the Advanced Preview Options dialog box, select any of the following
options to exclude objects from selection previewing:
■

Exclude Objects on Locked Layers

■

Xrefs

■

Tables

■

Groups

■

Multiline Text

■

Hatches

5 Click OK to exit each dialog box.

To change the appearance of the selection area

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, click Visual Effect Settings.
3 In the Visual Effect Settings dialog box, change any of the following
settings:
■

Indicate Selection Area. Select to display effects for selection areas.

■

Window Selection Color. Select a color, or click Select Color to display
the Select Color dialog box. (WINDOWAREACOLOR system variable)

■

Crossing Selection Color. Select a color, or click Select Color to display
the Select Color dialog box. (CROSSINGAREACOLOR system variable)

■

Selection Area Opacity. Use the slider to set transparency for selection
areas. The lower the setting, the more transparent the area. A value
of 100 makes the area opaque. (SELECTIONAREAOPACITY system
variable)

Customize Object Selection | 757

4 Click OK to exit each dialog box.

Quick Reference
FILTER
Creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included in a
selection set.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
QSELECT
Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria.
CROSSINGAREACOLOR
Controls the color of the selection area during crossing selection.
DRAGMODE
Controls the way dragged objects are displayed.
HIGHLIGHT
Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips.
PICKADD
Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or
add to it.
PICKAUTO
Controls automatic windowing for object selection.
PICKBOX
Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.
PICKDRAG
Controls the method of drawing a selection window.
PICKFIRST
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command.

758 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

PREVIEWEFFECT
Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of objects.
PREVIEWFILTER
Excludes specified object types from selection previewing.
SELECTIONAREA
Controls the display of effects for selection areas.
SELECTIONAREAOPACITY
Controls the transparency of the selection area during window and crossing
selection.
SELECTIONPREVIEW
Controls the display of selection previewing.
WINDOWAREACOLOR
Controls the color of the transparent selection area during window selection.

Group Objects
A group is a saved set of objects that you can select and edit together or
separately as needed. Groups provide an easy way to combine drawing elements
that you need to manipulate as a unit.
See also:
■

Work with Blocks on page 915

Overview of Groups
A group is a saved set of objects that you can select and edit together or
separately as needed. Groups provide an easy way to combine drawing elements
that you need to manipulate as a unit. You can create them quickly and with
a default name.
TIP Groups are useful in associating 3D solids when you do not want to combine
them with a Boolean operation.
You can change the components of groups as you work by adding or removing
objects.

Group Objects | 759

In some ways, groups resemble blocks, which provide another method of
combining objects into a named set. For example, groups are saved from
session to session. However, you can edit individual objects in groups more
easily than you can edit them in blocks, which must be exploded first. Unlike
blocks, groups cannot be shared with other drawings.

Quick Reference
CLASSICGROUP
Opens the legacy Object Grouping dialog box.
GROUP
Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups.
GROUPDISPLAYMODE
Controls the display and grips on groups, when group selection is on.
PICKFIRST
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command.
PICKSTYLE
Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.

Create Groups
In addition to choosing the objects that will become the members of a group,
you can give the group a name and description.
When you create a group, you can give the group a name and description. If
you copy a group, the copy is given the default name Ax and is considered
unnamed.
The objects in your drawing can be members of more than one group, and
groups themselves can be nested in other groups. You can ungroup a nested
group to restore the original group configuration.
When group selection is on (PICKSTYLE system variable set to 1 or 3), selecting
a member of an exitsting group for inclusion in a new group, selects all
members of the former group. To enable individual seleciton of grouped
objects turn group selection off (PICKSTYLE set to 0 or 2).

760 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Unnamed groups are not listed in the Object Grouping dialog box unless you
select Include Unnamed.
Named groups are not maintained when you use a drawing as an external
reference or insert it as a block. However, you can bind and then explode the
external reference or explode the block to make the group available as an
unnamed group.
NOTE Avoid creating large groups containing hundreds or thousands of objects.
A large group significantly degrades the performance of this program.

To create an unnamed group
1 Select the objects to associate into a group.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Group.
The selected objects are grouped together into an unnamed group, which
is assigned a default name such as *A1.
Unnamed groups are not displayed in the Object Grouping dialog box
unless Include Unnamed Groups is selected.

To create a named group
1 Click Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Group.
2 At the prompt, enter n and type a name for the group.
3 Select the objects to group and press Enter.
The named group is created for the selected objects.

Quick Reference
CLASSICGROUP
Opens the legacy Object Grouping dialog box.
GROUP
Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups.
PICKSTYLE
Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.

Group Objects | 761

Select Objects in Groups
There are several methods for choosing a group, including selecting the group
by name or selecting one of the members of the group.
By default, groups are selectable; that is, selecting any member of a group
selects all the objects in that group. You can then edit the group as a unit.
Selecting an object that belongs to multiple groups selects all groups to which
that object belongs. Turn off group selection to select grouped objects
individually.
TIP Toggle group selection off or on by pressing Ctrl+H or Shift+Ctrl+A.
All members of selectable groups are also selected when you use object selection
cycling (for example, if you want to select an object that lies directly behind
another object). To select groups for editing with grips, use the pointing device
to select the group at the Command prompt.

Select a Group
The easiest way to select a group, with group selection on, is to click a grouped
object. However, if you need to access a nested group or find and select a
specific group, use the Object Grouping dialog box. You also can select groups
by name by entering group and the group name at any Select Objects prompt.

To control whether all grouped objects can be selected individually
Do one of the following:
■

Click Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Group Selection On/Off

■

At the Command prompt, enter pickstyle. Enter 1 to turn on group
selection. Objects within groups can be selected as a group only, not
individually.

■

At the Command prompt, enter pickstyle. Enter 0 to turn off group
selection. Objects within groups can be selected individually only, not as
a group.

■

At any time, turn group selection on and off by pressing either Ctrl+H or
Ctrl+Shift+A.

To control selectability for a specific group
1 Click Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Named Groups.

762 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

2 In the Object Grouping dialog box, under Group Name, click the group
for which you want to change selectability.
3 Under Change Group, click Selectable.
This changes whether objects within the group are either selectable as a
group, subject to the PICKSTYLE system variable. If selectability is turned
off, the objects in a group are selectable only as individual objects. At the
top of the Object Grouping dialog box, under Selectable, each group
displays its current status.
4 Click OK.
TIP At the prompt, enter CLASSICGROUP to open the legacy Object Grouping
dialog box.

To identify which groups an object belongs to
1 Click Home tab ➤ Groups Panel ➤ Named Groups.
2 In the Object Grouping dialog box, under Group Identification, click
Find Name.
3 In the drawing area select an object.
The Group Member List dialog displays the names of all groups to which
the selected object belongs.
4 Click OK to return to the Object Grouping dialog.

Quick Reference
CLASSICGROUP
Opens the legacy Object Grouping dialog box.
GROUP
Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups.
GROUPDISPLAYMODE
Controls the display and grips on groups, when group selection is on.
PICKSTYLE
Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.

Group Objects | 763

Edit Groups
You can modify groups in a number of ways, including changing their
membership, modifying their properties, revising the names and descriptions
of groups, and removing them from the drawing.

Edit Objects as a Group
When group selection is turned on, you can move, copy, rotate, and modify
groups just as you can modify individual objects. If you need to edit objects
within a group, turn off group selection or use grips to edit individual objects.
For more information, see Select Objects in Groups on page 762.
In some circumstances, it is useful to control the order in which objects that
belong to the same group are selected. For example, a custom routine that
generates toolpaths for numerical control devices might depend on a series
of contiguous objects in a specified order.
You can reorder group members in two ways: either change the numerical
position of individual members or ranges of group members, or reverse the
order of all members. The first object in each group is number 0, not number
1.

Change Group Components, Name, or Description
You can specify objects to be added to or removed from a group at any time.
You can also rename a group or change it’s description. If deleting an object
or removing it from a group leaves the group empty, the group remains defined
but without any members.
NOTE Exploding an object such as a block or hatch that belongs to a group does
not automatically add the resulting components to any group.

Remove Groups
You can delete a group definition, to ungroup the contained objects.
As a result, objects are ungrouped but not otherwise changed.

To delete a group
1 In the drawing area, select a group.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Ungroup.
The objects are ungrouped.

764 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

To reorder group members
1 Click Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Named Groups.
2 In the Object Grouping dialog box, under Change Group, click Re-Order.
3 In the Order Group dialog box, under Group Name, select the group to
reorder.
4 To view the current order of this group, click Highlight.
5 In the Object Grouping dialog box, click Next or Previous to view the
objects. Click OK when you have finished viewing the order of the objects.
6 In the Order Group dialog box, under Remove From Position, enter an
object number.
7 Under Enter New Position Number for the Object, enter a new position.
8 Under Number of Objects, enter the object number or range of numbers
to reorder. Click Re-Order.
9 Click OK to close each dialog box.

To add or remove objects
1 Click Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Group Edit.
2 In the drawing area, select a group’
3 At the prompt, do one of the following:
■

enter a to add objects

■

enter r to remove objects

4 Select objects to add to, or remove from, the group.
5 Press Enter.
The objects are added to, or removed from, the selected group.

To rename a group
1 Click Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Group Edit.
2 In the drawing area, select a group’

Group Objects | 765

3 At the prompt, enter rename.
4 Enter a new name.
5 Press Enter.
The group is renamed.

Quick Reference
CLASSICGROUP
Opens the legacy Object Grouping dialog box.
GROUPEDIT
Adds and removes objects from the selected group, or renames a selected
group.
UNGROUP
Disassociates the objects from a group.
PICKSTYLE
Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.

Correct Mistakes
You can backtrack your recent actions using one of several methods.

Undo a Single Action
The simplest method of backtracking is to use the UNDO or U commands to
undo a single action. Many commands include their own U (undo) option so
that you can correct mistakes without leaving the command. When you are
creating lines and polylines, for example, enter u to undo the last segment.
NOTE By default, the UNDO command is set to combine consecutive pan and
zoom commands into a single operation when you undo or redo. However, pan
and zoom commands that are started from the menu are not combined, and
always remain separate actions.

Undo Several Actions at Once
Use the Mark option of UNDO to mark an action as you work. You can then
use the Back option of UNDO to undo all actions that occurred after the

766 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

marked action. Use the Begin and End options of UNDO to define a set of
actions to be treated as a group.
You can also undo several actions at once with the Undo list on the Standard
toolbar.

Reverse the Effect of Undo
You can reverse the effect of a single U or UNDO command by using REDO
immediately after using U or UNDO.
You can also redo several actions at once with the Redo list on the Standard
toolbar.

Erase Objects
You can erase any object that you draw. If you accidentally erase the wrong
object, you can use the UNDO command or the OOPS command to restore
it.
For more information, see Erase Objects on page 769.

Cancel a Command
You can cancel a command without completing it by pressing Esc.

To undo the most recent action
■

Click Edit menu ➤ Undo.

To undo a specific number of actions
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Undo list arrow.
A list of actions that you can undo, starting with the most recent action,
is displayed.
2 Drag to select the actions to undo.
3 Click to undo the selected actions.

To redo an action
■

Click Edit menu ➤ Redo.

Only the action immediately preceding an UNDO command can be reversed
with REDO. You cannot use REDO to repeat another command.

Correct Mistakes | 767

To redo a specific number of actions
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Redo list arrow.
A list of undo actions that you can redo, starting with the most recent
action, is displayed.
2 Drag to select the actions to redo.
3 Click to redo the selected actions.

Quick Reference
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
OOPS
Restores erased objects.
REDO
Reverses the effects of previous UNDO or U command.
MREDO
Reverses the effects of several previous UNDO or U commands.
U
Reverses the most recent operation.
UNDO
Reverses the effect of commands.
UNDOCTL
Indicates the state of the Auto, Control, and Group options of the UNDO
command.
UNDOMARKS
Stores the number of marks placed in the UNDO control stream by the Mark
option.

768 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Erase Objects
There are many ways to delete objects from your drawing and clean up the
display.

Remove Unused Definitions, Styles, and Objects
You can remove unused named and unnamed objects with PURGE. Some of the
unnamed objects you can purge include block definitions, dimension styles,
layers, linetypes, and text styles. With PURGE you can also remove zero-length
geometry and empty text objects.

Delete Duplicate Objects
You can remove duplicate and overlapping lines, arcs, polylines, and segments
of these object types with OVERKILL. Set a tolerance value and specify whether
object properties such as layer, color, or plot style are honored or ignored
when comparing suspected duplicate objects. OVERKILL also provides a
method to consolidate objects.

Clean Up the Display
You can remove stray pixels that are left over from some editing operations
from the display area with the REGEN or REGENALL commands.
See also:
■

Correct Mistakes on page 766

To erase an object

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Erase.
2 At the Select Objects prompt, use a selection method to select the objects
to be erased or enter an option:
■

Enter L (Last) to erase the last object drawn.

■

Enter p (Previous) to erase the last selection set.

■

Enter all to erase all objects from the drawing.

■

Enter ? to see a list of all selection methods.

3 Press Enter to end the command.

Erase Objects | 769

To delete duplicate objects

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Delete Duplicate Objects
2 At the Select Objects prompt, use a selection method to select objects.
3 Press Enter.
The Delete Duplicate Objects dialog box is displayed.
4 Optional:
■

Specify a Tolerance value.

■

Select properties to ignore during object comparison.

■

Set additional options to optimize polyline segments, combine objects,
or maintain associativity.

5 Click OK.
Duplicate objects are deleted.

To restore the last erased object
■

At the Command prompt, enter oops.

The last objects that were removed by ERASE, BLOCK, or WBLOCK are restored.

To cut objects to the Clipboard
1 Select the objects you want to cut.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Cut.

You can also press Ctrl+X.

The objects are available to be pasted into other Windows applications.

To purge an unused linetype

1 Click Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Purge.
The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of object types with items that
can be purged.

770 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

2 To purge unreferenced linetypes, use one of the following methods:
■

To purge all unreferenced linetypes, select Linetypes.

■

To purge specific linetypes, double-click Linetypes to expand the tree
view. Then select the linetypes to be purged.

To remove zero-length geometry and empty text objects

1 Click Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Purge.
The Purge dialog box displays.
2 Select Purge zero-length geometry and empty text objects.
3 Click Purge.
4 Click Close.

Quick Reference
CUTCLIP
Copies selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing.
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing.
OOPS
Restores erased objects.

Erase Objects | 771

OVERKILL
Removes duplicate or overlapping lines, arcs, and polylines. Also, combines
partially overlapping or contiguous ones.
PURGE
Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.
REDRAW
Refreshes the display in the current viewport.
REDRAWALL
Refreshes the display in all viewports.
REGEN
Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport.
UNDO
Reverses the effect of commands.

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard
When you want to use objects from a drawing file in another application, you
can cut or copy these objects to the Clipboard and then paste them from the
Clipboard into the other application.

Cut Objects
Cutting deletes selected objects from the drawing and stores them on the
Clipboard. The objects are now available to be pasted into other programs.

Copy Objects
You can use the Clipboard to copy part or all of a drawing into a document
created by another application. The objects are copied in vector format, which
retains the high resolution in other applications. The information stored in
the Clipboard can then be pasted in other programs.
NOTE If the copied object is embedded, updating the original drawing does not
update the copy embedded in the other program.

772 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Paste Objects
Applications use different internal formats to store Clipboard information.
When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available
formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, the format
that retains the most information is used.
However, you can override this setting and convert pasted information to
AutoCAD format. Because it is the easiest format to edit, the AutoCAD format
is the preferred format for copying objects to and from AutoCAD. It retains
all relevant object information, including block references and 3D aspects.
The Windows metafile (picture) format contains screen vector information,
and files can be scaled and printed without losing resolution. Use this format
to paste objects into Windows applications that support WMF files. Metafiles
pasted into AutoCAD are of higher resolution than bitmapped images (BMP
files) but are not as easily manipulated as AutoCAD objects. Bitmapped images
are raster images consisting of a pattern of pixels and are commonly used by
paint applications.
The color of the object doesn't change when copied to the Clipboard. For
example, white objects pasted onto a white background won't be visible. Use
the WMFBKGND and WMFFOREGND system variables to control whether
the background or foreground is transparent for metafile objects pasted into
other applications.
You can insert a linked or embedded object from the Clipboard into a drawing
with PASTESPEC. If you convert pasted information to AutoCAD format, the
object is inserted as a block reference. To edit the pasted information, use the
EXPLODE command to explode the block reference into its component objects.
When you convert a Windows metafile stored on the Clipboard to AutoCAD
format, you may lose some scaling precision. To retain proper scaling, save
objects in the original drawing as a block (WBLOCK), and then insert them
into AutoCAD using INSERT.

To cut objects to the Clipboard
1 Select the objects you want to cut.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Cut.
You can also press Ctrl+X.
The objects can be pasted into other Windows applications as well.

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard | 773

To copy objects to the Clipboard
1 Select the objects you want to copy.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Copy Clip.
You can also press Ctrl+C.

To paste objects from the Clipboard

■

Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Paste.
You can also press Ctrl+V.
The objects currently on the Clipboard are pasted into the drawing.

To convert pasted information to drawing file format

1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Paste Special.
2 In the Paste Special dialog box, select Paste.
3 From the list of formats, select Picture.
4 Click OK.

Quick Reference
COPYBASE
Copies selected objects to the Clipboard along with a specified base point.
COPYCLIP
Copies selected objects to the Clipboard.
CUTCLIP
Copies selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing.
PASTEBLOCK
Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing as a block.

774 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

PASTECLIP
Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing.
PASTEORIG
Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing using the original
coordinates.
PASTESPEC
Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing and controls the
format of the data.
WMFIN
Imports a Windows metafile.
WMFOPTS
Sets options for WMFIN.
WMFOUT
Saves objects to a Windows metafile.
OLEHIDE
Controls the display and plotting of OLE objects.
WMFBKGND
Controls the background display when objects are inserted in Windows
metafile (WMF) format.
WMFFOREGND
Controls the assignment of the foreground color when objects are inserted
in Windows metafile (WMF) format.

Modify Objects
You can modify the size, shape, and location of objects.
See also:
■

Work with Custom and Proxy Objects on page 1966

■

Modify Existing Dimensions on page 1592

Modify Objects | 775

Choose a Method to Modify Objects
Access object editing options using the following methods:
Methods

Descriptions

Command line

Enter a command and then select the objects to modify. Alternatively, select the
objects first and then enter a command.

Shortcut menu

Select and right-click an object to display
a shortcut menu with relevant editing options.

Double-click

Double-click an object to display the
Properties palette or, in some cases, a dialog box or editor that is specific to that
type of object. (You can specify the doubleclick action for each object type by customizing a CUIx file and loading it into the
program.)

Grips

Use grips to reshape, move, rotate and
manipulate objects:
■

Grip modes. Select an object grip to
work with the default grip
mode—stretch—or press Enter or
Spacebar to cycle through the additional grip modes—move, rotate, scale, and
mirror.

■

Multi-functional grips. For many objects, you can also hover over a grip to
access a menu with object-specific,
and sometimes grip-specific, editing
options.

See also:
■

Change Text on page 1483

■

Select Objects on page 741

■

Modify Existing Dimensions on page 1592

776 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects on page 509

■

Work with Custom and Proxy Objects on page 1966

■

“Double Click Actions” in the Customization Guide

Quick Reference
CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
DRAGMODE
Controls the way dragged objects are displayed.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
SELECT
Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.
DBLCLKEDIT
Controls the double click editing behavior in the drawing area.
DRAGMODE
Controls the way dragged objects are displayed.
GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL
Specifies the access methods for multi-functional grip options.
PICKADD
Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or
add to it.
PICKFIRST
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command.

Modify Objects Using Grips
Grips are displayed at strategic points on selected objects.

Modify Objects Using Grips | 777

Use Object Grips
You can reshape, move, or manipulate objects in other ways using different
types of grips and grip modes.

Overview
You can use grips in different ways:
■

Use grip modes. Select an object grip to work with the default grip
mode—stretch—or press Enter or Spacebar to cycle through the additional
grip modes—move, rotate, scale, and mirror. You can also right-click a selected
grip to see all available options on a shortcut menu.

■

Use multi-functional grips. For many objects, you can also hover over a
grip to access a menu with object-specific, and sometimes grip-specific,
editing options. Press Ctrl to cycle through the grip menu options.

Objects with Multi-Functional Grips
The following objects have multi-functional grips that offer object-specific
and, in some cases, grip-specific options:
■

2D objects: Lines, polylines, arcs, elliptical arcs, and splines.

■

Annotation objects: Dimension objects and multileaders.

■

3D solids: 3D faces, edges, and vertices.

778 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Important Notes
■

Grips are not displayed on objects that are on locked layers.

■

When you select multiple objects that share coincident grips, you can edit
these objects using grip modes; however, any object- or grip-specific options
are not available.

Tips for Stretching with Grips
■

When you select more than one grip on an object to stretch it, the shape
of the object is kept intact between the selected grips. To select more than
one grip, press and hold the Shift key, and then select the appropriate
grips.

■

Grips on text, block references, midpoints of lines, centers of circles, and
point objects move the object rather than stretching it.

■

When a 2D object lies on a plane other than the current UCS, the object
is stretched on the plane on which it was created, not on the plane of the
current UCS.

■

If you select a quadrant grip to stretch a circle or ellipse and then specify
a distance at the Command prompt for the new radius—rather than moving
the grip—this distance is measured from the center of the circle, not the
selected grip.

Limit the Display of Grips to Improve Performance
You can limit the maximum number of objects that display grips. For example,
when a drawing contains hatch objects or polylines with many grips, selecting
these objects can take a long time. The GRIPOBJLIMIT system variable
suppresses the display of grips when the initial selection set includes more
than the specified number of objects. If you add objects to the current selection
set, the limit does not apply.
See also:
■

Choose a Method to Modify Objects on page 776

■

Modify Polylines on page 846

■

Modify Hatches and Fills on page 1389

■

Use Dynamic Input on page 619

■

Use 3D Subobject Grips on page 1176

Modify Objects Using Grips | 779

■

Modify Leaders Using Grips on page 1449

■

Modify Dimension Geometry on page 1593

■

Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings on page 922

To turn on grips
1 At the Command prompt, enter options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, select Show Grips.
3 Click OK.

To edit objects using grips
1 Select the objects to edit.
2 Do one or more of the following:
■

Select and move grips to stretch the object.
NOTE In the case of some object grips, for example, block reference
grips, stretch will move the object rather than stretch it.

■

Press Enter or Spacebar to cycle to the move, rotate, scale, or mirror grip
modes, or right-click the selected grip to view a shortcut menu with
all available grip modes and other options.

■

Hover over a grip to view and access the multi-functional grip menu
(if available), and press Ctrl to cycle through the available options.

3 Move the pointing device and click.
TIP To copy the object, press and hold Ctrl until you have clicked to reposition
the grip.

To stretch multiple objects using grips
1 Select several objects to stretch.
2 Hold down Shift and click several grips so that they are highlighted.
3 Release Shift and select a grip as the base grip by clicking the grip.
4 Move the pointing device and click.

780 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
DYNINFOTIPS
Controls whether tips are displayed for using Shift and Ctrl when editing
with grips.
GRIPBLOCK
Controls the display of grips in blocks.
GRIPCOLOR
Controls the color of unselected grips.
GRIPCONTOUR
Controls the color of the grip contour.
GRIPHOT
Controls the color of selected grips.
GRIPHOVER
Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it.
GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL
Specifies the access methods for multi-functional grip options.
GRIPOBJLIMIT
Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than
the specified number of objects.
GRIPS
Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
GRIPSIZE
Sets the size of the grip box in pixels.
GRIPTIPS
Controls the display of grip tips when the cursor hovers over grips on dynamic
blocks and custom objects that support grip tips.

Modify Objects Using Grips | 781

Make Multiple Copies with Grips
You can create multiple copies of objects as you modify them with any of the
grip modes.
For example, by using the Copy option, you can rotate the selected objects,
leaving copies at each location you specify with the pointing device.

You can also make multiple copies by holding down Ctrl as you select the
first point. For example, with the Stretch grip mode, you can stretch an object,
such as a line, and then copy it to any point in the drawing area. Multiple
copies continue being made until you turn off grips.
NOTE When you use grips to make multiple copies of an annotative on page 2289
object that contains multiple scale representations on page 2318, only the current
scale representation is copied.

Define an Offset Snap or a Rotation Snap
You can place multiple copies at regularly spaced intervals with an offset snap.
The offset snap is defined by the distance between an object and the next
copy. In the lighting layout below, the first copy of the light fixture symbol
is placed at an offset of two units. All subsequent copies are then placed two
units apart.

If you hold down Ctrl while you select multiple copy points with the pointing
device, the graphics cursor snaps to an offset point based on the last two points
you selected. In the illustration below, the midpoint of line 1 is at coordinate
8,5. Based on that midpoint, line 2 was copied using the Ctrl key and Stretch
grip mode; its midpoint is at 9,5. The third line snaps to an offset based on
the coordinate values 10,5.

782 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Similarly, you can place multiple copies at angular intervals around a base
grip with a rotation snap. The rotation snap is defined as the angle between
an object and the next copy when you are using Rotate grip mode. Hold down
Ctrl to use the rotation snap.

To create copies in any grip mode
1 Select the objects to copy.
2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip.
The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is
active.
3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode you
want appears.
Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and
options.
4 Enter c (Copy) or press and hold the Ctrl key while you stretch, move,
rotate, or scale.
Copies continue being made until you turn off grips.
5 Enter or specify the additional input required for the current grip mode.
6 Turn off grips by pressing Enter, Spacebar, or Esc.

Modify Objects Using Grips | 783

To create an offset snap for multiple copies using grips
1 Select the objects to copy.
2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip.
The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is
active.
3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode Move
appears.
Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and
options.
4 Enter c (Copy).
5 Move the cursor and click.
The offset snap is the distance between the grip you selected and the
location you specified for the copy.
6 Hold down Ctrl and place additional copies by specifying additional
locations.
These copies are created at the same offset snap distance as the last copy.
7 Turn off grips by pressing Enter, Spacebar, or Esc.

To create a rotation snap for multiple rotated copies using grips
1 Select the objects to rotate.
2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip.
The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is
active.
3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode
Rotate appears.
Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and
options.
4 Enter c (Copy).
5 Move the pointing device and click.
The rotation snap is the angle between the grip you selected and the
location you specified for the copy.
6 Hold down Ctrl and place additional copies by specifying additional
locations.

784 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

These copies are created at the same rotation snap angle as the first copy.
7 Turn off grips by pressing Enter, Spacebar, or Esc.

To mirror objects and retain the originals using grips
1 Select the objects to mirror.
2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip.
The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is
active.
3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode
Mirror appears.
Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and
options.
4 Hold down Ctrl (or enter c for Copy) to retain the original image, and
specify the second point of the mirror line.
Turning on Ortho mode is often useful when mirroring objects.
5 Turn off grips by pressing Enter, Spacebar, or Esc.

Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
GRIPBLOCK
Controls the display of grips in blocks.
GRIPCOLOR
Controls the color of unselected grips.
GRIPCONTOUR
Controls the color of the grip contour.
GRIPHOT
Controls the color of selected grips.
GRIPS
Controls the display of grips on selected objects.

Modify Objects Using Grips | 785

GRIPSIZE
Sets the size of the grip box in pixels.

Control Grips in Blocks
You can specify whether a block displays a single grip or multiple grips.
You can specify whether a selected block reference displays a single grip at its
insertion point or displays multiple grips associated with the objects grouped
within the block.

See also:
■

Use Object Grips on page 778

■

Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks on page 1011

To turn grips within blocks on or off

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, select or clear Enable Grips
Within Blocks.
3 Click OK.

Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

786 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

GRIPBLOCK
Controls the display of grips in blocks.
GRIPCOLOR
Controls the color of unselected grips.
GRIPCONTOUR
Controls the color of the grip contour.
GRIPHOT
Controls the color of selected grips.
GRIPS
Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
GRIPSIZE
Sets the size of the grip box in pixels.

Move or Rotate Objects
You can move objects to a different location, or change the orientation of
objects by rotating them by an angle or to other objects.

Move Objects
You can move objects at a specified distance and direction from the originals.
Use coordinates, grid snap, object snaps, and other tools to move objects with
precision.

Specify Distance with Two Points
Move an object using the distance and direction specified by a base point
followed by a second point. In this example, you move the block representing
a window. Select the object to be moved (1). Specify the base point for the
move (2) followed by a second point (3). The object is moved the distance
and direction of point 2 to point 3.

Move or Rotate Objects | 787

Use a Stretch-Move
You can also use STRETCH to move objects if all their endpoints lie entirely
within the selection window. Turn on Ortho mode or polar tracking to move
the objects at a specific angle.
A practical example is moving a door in a wall. The door in the illustration is
entirely within a crossing selection, while the wall lines are only partly within
the crossing selection area.

The result is that only the endpoints that lie within the crossing selection
move.

Drag, Grip-Edit, or Nudge Objects
Move selected objects quickly by dragging , grip-editing, or nudging.
Drag objects within a drawing, or between open drawings and other
applications. Dragging with the right button on the pointing device allows
you to specify whether to move, copy, or create a block from the dragged
objects. Dragging disregards all snap settings.
To nudge selected objects in orthogonal increments, press Ctrl + arrow keys.
Snap mode affects the distance and direction in which the objects are nudged.
■

Nudge objects with Snap mode turned off: Objects move two pixels at a
time; movement is relative and orthogonal to the screen, regardless of the
view direction or the UCS orientation.

788 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

■

Nudge objects with Snap mode turned on: Objects are moved in increments
specified by the current snap spacing; movement is orthogonal to the X
and Y axes of the current UCS and relative to the view direction.

See also:
■

Modify Objects Using Grips on page 777

■

Embed OLE Objects in Drawings on page 1830

To move an object using two points

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.
2 Select the objects to move.
3 Specify a base point for the move.
4 Specify a second point.
The objects you selected are moved to a new location determined by the
distance and direction between the first and second points.

To move an object using a displacement

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.
2 Select the object to move.
3 Enter the displacement in the form of a Cartesian, polar, cylindrical, or
spherical coordinate value. Do not include the @ sign, because a relative
coordinate is assumed.
4 At the prompt for the second point, press Enter.
The coordinate values are used as a relative displacement rather than the
location of a base point. The selected objects are moved to a new location
determined by the relative coordinate values you enter.

To move an object from model space to paper space (or vice versa)
1 Click a layout tab.

Move or Rotate Objects | 789

2 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Change Space.
3 Select one or more objects to move.
4 Press Enter.
The object is moved to the new space, and is scaled appropriately to the
new space.

To move by stretching

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Stretch.
2 Select the object by using crossing selection.
The crossing selection must include at least one vertex or endpoint.
Specify crossing selection by clicking, moving your pointing device from
right to left, and clicking again.
3 Do one of the following:
■

Specify the base point for the move, and then specify a second point.

■

Enter the displacement in the form of a Cartesian, polar, cylindrical,
or spherical coordinate value. Do not include the @ sign, because a
relative coordinate is assumed. At the prompt for the second point of
displacement, press Enter.

Any objects with at least one vertex or endpoint included within the
crossing selection are stretched. Any objects that are completely within
the crossing selection are moved without being stretched.

Quick Reference
Commands
CHSPACE
Moves objects between model space and paper space.
MOVE
Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction.

790 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
STRETCH
Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon.

System Variable
SNAPUNIT
Sets the snap spacing for the current viewport.

Command Modifiers
Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier)
Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor.

Rotate Objects
You can rotate objects in your drawing around a specified base point.
To determine the angle of rotation, you can enter an angle value, drag using
the cursor, or specify a reference angle to align to an absolute angle.

Rotate an Object by a Specified Angle
Enter a rotation angle value from 0 to 360 degrees. You can also enter values
in radians, grads, or surveyor bearings. Entering a positive angle value rotates
the objects counterclockwise or clockwise, depending on the base angle
direction setting in the Drawing Units dialog box.

Rotate an Object by Dragging
Drag the object around the base point and specify a second point. Use Ortho
mode, polar tracking, or object snaps for greater precision.
For example, you can rotate the plan view of a house by selecting the objects
(1), specifying a base point (2), and specifying an angle of rotation by dragging
to another point (3).

Move or Rotate Objects | 791

Rotate an Object to an Absolute Angle
With the Reference option, you can rotate an object to align it to an absolute
angle.
For example, to rotate the part in the illustration so the diagonal edge rotates
to 90 degrees, you select the objects to be rotated (1, 2), specify the base point
(3), and enter the Reference option. For the reference angle, specify the two
endpoints of the diagonal line (4, 5). For the new angle, enter 90.

Rotate an Object in 3D
To rotate 3D objects, you can use either ROTATE or ROTATE3D.
■

With ROTATE, you can rotate objects around a specified base point. The
axis of rotation passes through the base point and is parallel to the Z axis
of the current UCS.

■

With ROTATE3D, you can specify the axis of rotation using either two
points; an object; the X, Y, or Z axis; or the Z direction of the current view.

See also:
■

Rotate Views in Layout Viewports on page 463

792 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

To rotate an object

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate.
2 Select the object to rotate.
3 Specify the base point for the rotation.
4 Do one of the following:
■

Enter the angle of rotation.

■

Drag the object around its base point and specify a point location to
which you want to rotate the object.

■

Enter c to create a copy of the selected objects.

■

Enter r to rotate the selected objects from a specified reference angle
to an absolute angle.

To rotate an object to an absolute angle

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate.
2 Select the objects to rotate.
3 Specify the base point for the rotation.
4 Enter r (Reference).
5 Enter a reference angle value or specify two point locations.
This determines an imaginary line that will be rotated to a new angle.
6 Enter the new angle, or specify a point.
The value that you enter for the new angle is an absolute angle, not a
relative value. Alternatively, if you specify a point, the reference angle
will be rotated to that point.

To rotate a 3D object around an axis

1 Click Modify menu ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Rotate 3D.

Move or Rotate Objects | 793

2 Select the object to rotate (1).
3 Specify the start point and endpoint of the axis about which the objects
are to be rotated (2 and 3).
The positive axis direction is from the start point to the end point, and
the rotation follows the right-hand rule (see “Use World and User
Coordinate Systems in 3D” on page 15).
4 Specify the angle of rotation.

Quick Reference
Commands
ROTATE
Rotates objects around a base point.
ROTATE3D
Moves objects about a 3D axis.

Align Objects
You can move, rotate, or tilt an object so that it aligns with another object.
In the following example, two pairs of points are used to align the piping in
2D using the ALIGN command. Endpoint object snaps align the pipes precisely.

794 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

In 3D, use the 3DALIGN command to specify up to three points to define the
source plane followed by up to three points to define the destination plane.
■

The first source point on an object, called the base point, is always moved
to the first destination point.

■

Specifying a second point for either the source or the destination results
in the selected objects being rotated.

■

A third point for either the source or the destination results in further
rotation of the selected objects.

TIP With 3D solid models, it is recommended that you turn on dynamic UCS to
speed the selection of the destination plane.

To align two objects in 2D

1 Click Modify menu ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Align.
2 Select the objects that you want to align.
3 Specify a source point and then the corresponding destination point. To
rotate the object, specify a second source point followed by a second
destination point.
4 Press Enter to end the command.
The selected objects are moved from the source point to the destination
point, and second and third points, if you specify them, rotate, and tilt
the selected objects.

Move or Rotate Objects | 795

To align two objects in 3D

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Align.
2 Select the objects that you want to align.
3 Specify either one, two, or three source points and then the corresponding
first, second, or third destination points. The first point is called the base
point.
The selected objects are moved from the source point to the destination
point, and second and third points, if you specify them, rotate, and tilt
the selected objects.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DALIGN
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D.
ALIGN
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D.

System Variables
UCSDETECT
Controls whether dynamic UCS acquisition is active or not.

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects
You can create duplicates of objects in your drawing that are either identical
or similar to selected objects.

Copy Objects
See also:
■

Modify Objects Using Grips on page 777

796 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

■

Enter Direct Distances on page 655

■

Embed OLE Objects in Drawings on page 1830

■

Array Objects on page 799

You can create duplicates of objects at a specified distance and direction from
the originals.
Use coordinates, grid snap, object snaps, and other tools to copy objects with
precision.
You can also use grips to move and copy objects quickly.

Specify Distance with Two Points
Copy an object using the distance and direction specified by a base point
followed by a second point. In this example, you copy the block representing
an electronic component. Select the original object to be copied. Specify the
base point for the move (1) followed by a second point (2). The object is copied
the distance and direction of point 1 to point 2.

Specify Distance with Relative Coordinates
Copy an object using a relative distance by entering coordinate values for the
first point and pressing Enter for the second point. The coordinate values are
used as a relative displacement rather than the location of a base point.
NOTE Do not include an @ sign as you normally would for relative coordinates,
because relative coordinates are expected.
To copy objects a specified distance, you can also use direct distance entry
with Ortho mode and polar tracking.

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 797

Create Multiple Copies
With COPY, you can create multiple copies from the specified selection set
and base point.
The options include the following:
■

Create copies at specified locations or displacements

■

Automatically space a specified number of copies in a linear pattern.

Move and Copy Objects by Dragging
You can also select objects and drag them to a new location using the left
mouse button over one of the selected objects; press Ctrl to make a copy.
Using this method, you can drag objects between open drawings and other
applications.
If you drag with the right mouse button instead of the left, a shortcut menu
is displayed after you drag the objects. The menu options include Move Here,
Copy Here, Paste as Block, and Cancel.

To copy an object using two points

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.
2 Select the objects to copy.
3 Specify the base point.
4 Specify the second point. Press Enter.

798 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

To create an object based on a selected object
1 Select the object on which to base the new object.
2 Right-click and select Add Selected.
3 Follow the prompts to create an object similar to the selected object.

Quick Reference
Commands
ADDSELECTED
Creates a new object based on the object type and general properties of a
selected object.
COPY
Copies objects a specified distance in a specified direction.
NCOPY
Copies objects that are contained in an xref, block, or DGN underlay.

System Variables
COPYMODE
Controls whether the COPY command repeats automatically.

Array Objects
Create multiple copies of objects that are evenly distributed in a rectangular
or circular pattern, or along a specified path.

Overview of Arrays
Create copies of objects arranged in a pattern called an array.
There are three types of arrays:
■

Rectangular

■

Path

■

Polar

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 799

Control Array Associativity
Associativity allows you to quickly propagate changes throughout an array
by maintaining relationships between items. Arrays can be associative or
non-associative.
■

Associative. Items are contained in a single array object, similar to a block.
Edit the array object properties, such as the spacing or number of items.
Override item properties or replace an item’s source objects. Edit an item’s
source objects to change all items that reference those source objects.

■

Non-associative. Items in the array are created as independent objects.
Changes to one item do not affect the other items.

800 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Create Rectangular Arrays
In rectangular arrays, items are distributed into any combination of rows,
columns, and levels.
A dynamic preview allows you to quickly derive the number and spacing of
rows and columns. Add levels to make a 3D array.

The number of rows and columns and the spacing between the rows and
columns in the array increase or decrease as you move your cursor. By default,
the array has a level of 1.
You can rotate the array around the base point in the XY plane. At creation,
the row and column axes are orthogonal to each other; for associative arrays,
you can later edit the axis angles.

To create a rectangular array
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rectangular Array.
2 Select the objects to array and press Enter.
3 Specify a point for the opposite corner of the grid to set the number of
rows and columns.
A preview grid displays as you define the array.
4 Specify a point for the opposite corner of the grid to set the row and
column spacing.
5 Press Enter.

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 801

Quick Reference
Commands
3DARRAY
Maintains legacy behavior for creating nonassociative, 3D rectangular or
polar arrays.
ARRAY
Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern.
ARRAYCLOSE
Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the
array editing state.
ARRAYEDIT
Edits associative array objects and their source objects.
ARRAYPATH
Evenly distributes object copies along a path or a portion of a path.
ARRAYPOLAR
Evenly distributes object copies in a circular pattern around a center point
or axis of rotation.
ARRAYRECT
Distributes object copies into any combination of rows, columns, and levels.
DSETTINGS
Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes,
Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties.
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
UNITS
Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision.

System Variables
ANGBASE
Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS.

802 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

ANGDIR
Sets the direction of positive angles.
ARRAYEDITSTATE
Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated
while editing an associative array’s source objects.
ARRAYTYPE
Specifies the default array type.
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
SNAPANG
Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the
current UCS.

Create Path Arrays
In path arrays, items are evenly distributed along a path or a portion of a path.
A path can be a line, polyline, 3D polyline, spline, helix, arc, circle, or ellipse.

Control Item Distribution
The distribution of items along the path can be measured or divided.
■

Measure. The array follows the path when it is edited but the number of
objects and spacing do not change. If the path is edited and becomes too
short to display all objects, the count is automatically adjusted.

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 803

■

Divide. The number of objects and the length of the path determine the
spacing of the objects in the array. The objects are always spaced evenly
along the entire length of the path. When the array is associative, the
spacing between the objects automatically adjusts as the length of the path
changes after it is created.

To create a path array

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Path Array.
2 Select the objects to array and press Enter.
3 Select the path curve.
A preview displays as you define the array.
4 (Optional) Enter o (Orientation) and specify a base point, or press Enter
to use the end of the selected path as the base point. And then specify
one of the following methods:
■

Direction to align with the starting direction of the path.

■

Normal. Objects are aligned to be normal to the starting direction of
the path.

5 Do one of the following:
■

Specify the distance between items.

■

Enter d (Divide) to evenly distribute items along the entire length of
the path.

■

Enter t (Total) and specify the total distance between the first and last
items.

■

Enter e (Expression) and define an expression.

6 Press Enter.

804 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

System Variables
ANGBASE
Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS.

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 805

Create Polar Arrays
In polar arrays, items are evenly distributed in a circular motion around a
specified center point or axis of rotation.
When you create a polar array using the center point, the axis of rotation is
the Z axis of the current UCS. You can redefine the axis of rotation by
specifying two points.

806 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

The direction in which the array is drawn depends on whether you enter a
positive or negative value for the fill angle. For associative arrays, you can
change the direction in the Properties palette.

To create a polar array

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Polar Array.
2 Select the objects to array.
3 Do one of the following:
■

Specify a center point.

■

Specify a base point.

■

Enter a (Axis of rotation) and specify two points to define a custom
axis of rotation.

A preview displays as you define the array.
4 Specify the number of items.
5 Specify the angle to fill.
6 Press Enter.
7 Press Enter.
You can also create the array by defining the angle between items.

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 807

ARRAYEDIT
Edits associative array objects and their source objects.
ARRAYPATH
Evenly distributes object copies along a path or a portion of a path.
ARRAYPOLAR
Evenly distributes object copies in a circular pattern around a center point
or axis of rotation.
ARRAYRECT
Distributes object copies into any combination of rows, columns, and levels.
DSETTINGS
Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes,
Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties.
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
UNITS
Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision.

System Variables
ANGBASE
Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS.
ANGDIR
Sets the direction of positive angles.
ARRAYEDITSTATE
Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated
while editing an associative array’s source objects.
ARRAYTYPE
Specifies the default array type.
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.

808 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

SNAPANG
Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the
current UCS.

Edit Associative Arrays
Modify associative arrays by editing the array properties, applying item
overrides, replacing selected items, or editing source objects.

Edit Array Properties
To edit the array properties, use ARRAYEDIT, the Properties palette, or grips.
The type of grips and dynamic menu options displayed depend on the type
of array.

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 809

Apply Item Overrides
Ctrl+click items in the array to erase, move, rotate, or scale the selected items
without affecting the rest of the array. Reset the array to remove all item
overrides.

Replace Items
Replace selected items with other objects. Any item overrides are maintained.
You can also replace all items that reference the original source objects, rather
than selecting individual items.

Edit Source Objects
To edit an item’s source objects, activate an editing state for a selected item.
All changes (including the creation of new objects) are instantly applied to

810 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

all items referencing the same set of source objects. Save or discard your
changes to exit the editing state.

To modify the number of items in a rectangular array
1 Select the array.
2 Hover over the Corner grip to display the grip menu.
The Corner grip is displayed on the first item in the last column of the
rectangular array.
3 Click the Row and Column Count option.
4 Move the cursor to increase or decrease the number of rows and columns
and then click.

To adjust the item spacing between objects in a path array
1 Select the array.
2 In the Properties palette, set the Method property to Measure.
3 Click the Item Spacing grip.
The Item Spacing grip is displayed on the second item in the first row of
the path array. This grip is displayed only when there are three or more
items in the array.
4 Move the cursor along the path to increase or decrease the distance
between the items and then click.

To modify the angle between the items in a polar array
1 Select the array.

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 811

2 Click the Angle Between grip.
The Angle Between grip is displayed on the second item in the first row of
the polar array. This grip is displayed only when there are three or more
items in the array.
3 Move the cursor to increase or decrease the angle between the items and
then click.

812 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

UNITS
Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision.

Limit the Size of Arrays
The number of array elements that can be generated by one ARRAY command
is limited to approximately 100,000.
This limit is controlled by the MaxArray setting in the registry. If you specify
a large number of rows and columns for an array, it may take a long time to
create the copies.
You can change the limit by setting the MaxArray system registry variable
using (setenv “MaxArray” “n”) where n is a number from 100 through
10000000 (ten million).
The MaxArray system registry variable is validated when using the ARRAYEDIT
command. The Array Limit Object task dialog is displayed when the total
count of the modified array exceeds the current MaxArray value.

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 813

NOTE When changing the value of MaxArray, you must enter MaxArray with the
capitalization shown.

814 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Offset an Object
Offset an object to create a new object whose shape is parallel to the original
object.
For example, if you offset a circle or an arc, a larger or smaller circle or arc is
created, depending on which side you specify for the offset. If you offset a
polyline, the result is a polyline that parallels the original.

TIP An effective drawing technique is to offset objects and then trim or extend
their ends.

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 815

Use OFFSET to offset the following object types:
■

Lines

■

Arcs

■

Circles

■

Ellipses and elliptical arcs (resulting in an oval-shaped spline)

■

2D polylines

■

Construction lines (xlines) and rays

■

Splines

Special Cases for Offset Polylines and Splines
2D polylines are offset as individual line segments, resulting in either
intersections or gaps between segments. To complete the offset, intersecting
lines are trimmed and gaps are filled.

816 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Splines are trimmed automatically when the offset distance is larger than can
otherwise be accommodated.

Offset the Edges of Faces on Solids and Surfaces
The OFFSETEDGE command creates a closed polyline or a spline from the
edges of a planar face on a 3D solid or surface. Splines result when one or
more edge segments cannot be represented as lines, arcs, or a circle. For
example
■

In the left illustration, the edge of the top surface of the solid was offset,
resulting in the closed, yellow polyline shown.

■

In the middle illustration, the polyline was extruded.

■

In the right illustration, the polyline was extruded and then subtracted.

With the Corner option, you can specify sharp corners or rounded corners
for the polyline. External and internal corners create rounded corners
differently depending whether the corners are concave or convex—the radius
of the arcs maintain the specified offset distance.

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 817

To offset an object by specifying a distance

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset.
2 Specify the offset distance.
You can enter a value or use the pointing device.
3 Select the object to offset.
4 Specify a point to indicate whether the object is to be offset inside or
outside of the original object.
5 Select another object to offset, or press Enter to end the command.

To offset an object through a point

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset.
2 Enter t (Through).
3 Select the object to offset.
4 Specify a point through which the offset object is to pass.
5 Select another object to offset, or press Enter to end the command.

To create a polyline or a spline that is offset from the edges of a face

1 Click Solid tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Offset Edge.
2 Select a planar face on a 3D solid or surface.
3 Specify a point location inside or outside the edges of the face, or enter
an option to specify an offset distance or a corner style.
4 Select another face to offset, or press Enter to end the command.

818 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Quick Reference
Commands
OFFSET
Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves.
OFFSETEDGE
Creates a closed polyline or spline object that is offset at a specified distance
from the edges of a selected planar face on a 3D solid or surface.

System Variables
OFFSETDIST
Sets the default offset distance.
OFFSETGAPTYPE
Controls how potential gaps between segments are treated when polylines
are offset.

Mirror Objects
You can flip objects about a specified axis to create a symmetrical mirror image.
Mirroring is useful for creating symmetrical objects because you can quickly
draw half the object and then mirror it instead of drawing the entire object.
You flip objects about an axis called a mirror line to create a mirror image. To
specify this temporary mirror line, you enter two points. You can choose
whether to erase or retain the original objects.

By default, when you mirror text, hatches, attributes, and attribute definitions,
they are not reversed or turned upside down in the mirror image. The text

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 819

has the same alignment and justification as before the object was mirrored.
If you do want text to be reversed, set the MIRRTEXT system variable to 1.

MIRRTEXT affects text that is created with the TEXT, ATTDEF, or MTEXT
commands; attribute definitions; and variable attributes. Text and constant
attributes that are part of an inserted block are reversed when the block is
mirrored regardless of the value of MIRRTEXT.
MIRRHATCH affects hatch objects created with the GRADIENT or HATCH
commands. Use the MIRRHATCH system variable control whether hatch
pattern direction is mirrored or retained.

Mirror in 3D
With MIRROR3D, you can mirror objects across a specified mirroring plane.
The mirroring plane can be one of the following:
■

The plane of a planar object

■

A plane parallel to the XY, YZ, or XZ plane of the current UCS that passes
through a specified point

■

A plane defined by three specified points (2, 3, and 4)

To mirror objects in 2D

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.
2 Select the objects to mirror.
3 Specify the first point of the mirror line.

820 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

4 Specify the second point.
5 Press Enter to retain the original objects, or enter y to erase them.

To mirror objects in 3D

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Mirror.
2 Select the object to mirror.
3 Specify three points to define a mirroring plane.
4 Press Enter to retain the original objects, or enter y to delete them.

Quick Reference
Commands
MIRROR
Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects.
MIRROR3D
Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects across a mirroring plane.

System Variables
MIRRHATCH
Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns.
MIRRTEXT
Controls how MIRROR reflects text.

Change the Size and Shape of Objects
There are several methods for adjusting the lengths of existing objects relative
to other objects, both symmetrically and asymmetrically.

Trim or Extend Objects
You can shorten or lengthen objects to meet the edges of other objects.

Change the Size and Shape of Objects | 821

This means you can first create an object such as a line and then later adjust
it to fit exactly between other objects.
Objects you select as cutting edges or boundary edges are not required to
intersect the object being trimmed. You can trim or extend an object to a
projected edge or to an extrapolated intersection; that is, where the objects
would intersect if they were extended.
If you do not specify a boundary and press Enter at the Select Objects prompt,
all displayed objects become potential boundaries.
NOTE To select cutting edges or boundary edges that include blocks, you can
use only the single selection, Crossing, Fence, and Select All options.

Trim Objects
You can trim objects so that they end precisely at boundary edges defined by
other objects.
For example, you can clean up the intersection of two walls smoothly by
trimming.

An object can be one of the cutting edges and one of the objects being
trimmed. For example, in the illustrated light fixture, the circle is a cutting
edge for the construction lines and is also being trimmed.

When you trim several objects, the different selection methods can help you
choose the current cutting edges and objects to trim. In the following example,
the cutting edges are selected using crossing selection.

822 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

The following example uses the fence selection method to select a series of
objects for trimming.

You can trim objects to their nearest intersection with other objects. Instead
of selecting cutting edges, you press Enter. Then, when you select the objects
to trim, the nearest displayed objects act as cutting edges. In this example,
the walls are trimmed so that they intersect smoothly.

NOTE You can extend objects without exiting the TRIM command. Press and
hold Shift while selecting the objects to be extended.

Extend Objects
Extending operates the same way as trimming. You can extend objects so they
end precisely at boundary edges defined by other objects. In this example,
you extend the lines precisely to a circle, which is the boundary edge.

Change the Size and Shape of Objects | 823

Extending a spline preserves the shape of the original portion of the spline,
but the extended portion is linear and tangent to the end of the original spline.

NOTE You can trim objects without exiting the EXTEND command. Press and
hold Shift while selecting the objects to be trimmed.

Trim and Extend Wide Polylines
2D wide polylines trim and extend at their centerlines. The ends of wide
polylines are always square. Trimming a wide polyline at an angle causes
portions of the end to extend beyond the cutting edge
If you trim or extend a tapered 2D polyline segment, the width of the extended
end is corrected to continue the original taper to the new endpoint. If this
correction gives the segment a negative ending width, the ending width is
forced to 0.

Trim and Extend Spline-Fit Polylines
Trimming a spline-fit polyline removes the curve-fit information and changes
the spline-fit segments into ordinary polyline segments.

824 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Extending a spline-fit polyline adds a new vertex to the control frame for the
polyline.

Trim or Extend in 3D
You can trim or extend an object to any other object in 3D space, regardless
of whether the objects are on the same plane or parallel to the cutting or
boundary edges. In the TRIM and EXTEND commands, use the Project and
Edge options to select one of three projections for trimming or extending:
■

The XY plane of the current UCS

■

The plane of the current view

■

True 3D, which is not a projection

See also:
■

Break and Join Objects on page 843

To extend an object

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Extend.
2 Select the objects to serve as boundary edges.
To select all displayed objects as potential boundary edges, press Enter
without selecting any objects.
3 Select the objects to extend.

To trim an object

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim.
2 Select the objects to serve as cutting edges.
To select all displayed objects as potential cutting edges, press Enter
without selecting any objects.
3 Select the objects to trim.

Change the Size and Shape of Objects | 825

To extend objects in 3D wireframe models

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Extend

2 Select the boundary edge for extending (1).
3 Enter e (Edge).
4 Enter e (Extend).
5 Enter p (Project).
6 Enter u (UCS).
7 Select the object to extend (2).

To trim in 3D using the current view plane

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim
2 Select the cutting edge for trimming (1).
3 Enter p (Project).
4 Enter v (View).
5 Select the object to trim (2).

826 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

To trim objects in 3D wireframe models

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim

2 Select the cutting edges to use for trimming (1).
3 Enter p (Project).
4 Enter n (None).
5 Select the object to trim (2 and 3).

Quick Reference
Commands
BREAK
Breaks the selected object between two points.
EXTEND
Extends objects to meet the edges of other objects.
JOIN
Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.
LENGTHEN
Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
TRIM
Trims objects to meet the edges of other objects.

Change the Size and Shape of Objects | 827

System Variables
EDGEMODE
Controls how the TRIM and EXTEND commands determine cutting and
boundary edges.
PROJMODE
Sets the current Projection mode for trimming or extending.

Resize or Reshape Objects
You can resize objects to make them longer or shorter in only one direction
or to make them proportionally larger or smaller.
You can also stretch certain objects by moving an endpoint, vertex, or control
point.

Lengthen Objects
With LENGTHEN, you can change the included angle of arcs and the length
of the following objects:
■

Lines

■

Arcs

■

Open polylines

■

Elliptical arcs

■

Open splines.

The results are similar to extending and trimming. You can
■

Drag an object endpoint dynamically

■

Specify a new length or angle as a percentage of the total length or angle

■

Specify an incremental length or angle measured from an endpoint

■

Specify the object's total absolute length or included angle

828 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Stretch Objects
With STRETCH, you relocate the endpoints of objects that lie across or within
a crossing selection window.
■

Objects that are partially enclosed by a crossing window are stretched.

■

Objects that are completely enclosed within the crossing window, or that
are selected individually, are moved rather than stretched.

You stretch an object by specifying a base point and then a point of
displacement.

Use object snaps, grid snaps, and relative coordinate entry to stretch with
precision.

Scale Objects Using a Scale Factor
With SCALE, you can make an object uniformly larger or smaller. To scale an
object, you specify a base point and a scale factor. Alternatively, you can
specify a length to be used as a scale factor based on the current drawing units.
A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor between 0 and
1 shrinks the object.
Scaling changes the size of all dimensions of the selected object. A scale factor
greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor less than 1 shrinks the object.

NOTE When you use the SCALE command with annotative on page 2289 objects,
the position or location of the object is scaled relative to the base point of the
scale operation, but the size of the object is not changed.

Change the Size and Shape of Objects | 829

Scale Objects Using a Reference Distance
You can also scale by reference. Scaling by reference uses an existing distance
as a basis for the new size. To scale by reference, specify the current distance
and then the new desired size. For example, if one side of an object is 4.8 units
long and you want to expand it to 7.5 units, use 4.8 as the reference length.
You can use the Reference option to scale an entire drawing. For example, use
this option when the original drawing units need to be changed. Select all
objects in the drawing. Then use Reference to select two points and specify
the intended distance. All the objects in the drawing are scaled accordingly.
See also:
■

Break and Join Objects on page 843

To stretch an object

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Stretch.
2 Select the object using a crossing window selection.
The crossing window must include at least one vertex or endpoint.
3 Do one of the following:
■

Enter the displacement in the form of a relative Cartesian, polar,
cylindrical, or spherical coordinate. Do not include the @ sign, because
a relative coordinate is assumed. Press Enter at the prompt for the
second point of displacement.

■

Specify the base point for the stretch, and then specify a second point,
to determine the distance and direction.

Any objects with at least one vertex or endpoint included within the
crossing window are stretched. Any objects that are completely within
the crossing window, or selected individually, are moved without
stretching.

To scale an object by a scale factor

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Scale.
2 Select the object to scale.

830 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

3 Specify the base point.
4 Enter the scale factor or drag and click to specify a new scale.

To scale an object by reference

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Scale.
2 Select the object to scale.
3 Select the base point.
4 Enter r (Reference).
5 Select the first and second reference points, or enter a value for the
reference length.

To change the length of an object by dragging
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Lengthen.
2 Enter dy (Dynamic Dragging mode).
3 Select the object you want to lengthen.
4 Drag the endpoint closest to the point of selection, and specify a new
endpoint.
The selected object is lengthened or shortened without changing its
location or orientation.

Quick Reference
Commands
JOIN
Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.
LENGTHEN
Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs.
PEDIT
Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes.

Change the Size and Shape of Objects | 831

PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
SCALE
Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object
the same after scaling.
SPLINEDIT
Modifies the parameters of a spline or converts a spline-fit polyline to a
spline.
STRETCH
Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon.

System Variables
PLINECONVERTMODE
Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines.

Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects
You can change objects to meet in rounded or flattened corners. You can also
create or close gaps in objects.

Create Fillets
A fillet connects two objects with an arc that is tangent to the objects and has
a specified radius.

An inside corner is called a fillet and an outside corner is called a round; you
can create both using the FILLET command.
You can fillet
■

Arcs

■

Circles

832 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

■

Ellipses and elliptical arcs

■

Lines

■

Polylines

■

Rays

■

Splines

■

Xlines

■

3D solids

FILLET can be used to round all corners on a polyline using a single command.
Also, you can use the Multiple option to fillet more than one set of objects
without leaving the command.
NOTE Filleting a hatch boundary that was defined from line segments removes
hatch associativity. If the hatch boundary was defined from a polyline, associativity
is maintained.
If both objects being filleted are on the same layer, the fillet arc is created on
that layer. Otherwise, the fillet arc is created on the current layer. The layer
affects object properties including color and linetype.
Instead of an arc, you can use BLEND to create a spline that connects two
lines or curves, and is tangent to them.

Set the Fillet Radius
The fillet radius is the radius of the arc that connects filleted objects. Changing
the fillet radius affects subsequent fillets. If you set the fillet radius to 0, filleted
objects are trimmed or extended until they intersect, but no arc is created.

You can press and hold Shift while selecting the objects to override the current
fillet radius with a value of 0.

Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects | 833

Trim and Extend Filleted Objects
You can use the Trim option to specify whether the selected objects are
trimmed or extended to the endpoints of the resulting arc or left unchanged.

Control the Location of the Fillet
Depending on the locations you specify, more than one possible fillet can
exist between the selected objects. Compare the selection locations and
resulting fillets in the illustrations.

Fillet Line and Polyline Combinations
To fillet lines with polylines, each line or its extension must intersect one of
the polyline line segments. If the Trim option is on, the filleted objects and
the fillet arc join to form a single new polyline.

834 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Fillet an Entire Polyline
You can fillet an entire polyline or remove fillets from an entire polyline.
If you set a nonzero fillet radius, FILLET inserts fillet arcs at the vertex of each
polyline segment that is long enough to accommodate the fillet radius.

If two linear segments in a polyline are separated by an arc segment between
them, FILLET removes the arc segment and replaces it with a new arc segment
of the current fillet radius.

If you set the fillet radius to 0, no fillet arcs are inserted. If two linear polyline
segments are separated by one arc segment, FILLET removes that arc and
extends the linear segments until they intersect.

Fillet Parallel Lines
You can fillet parallel lines, xlines, and rays. The current fillet radius
temporarily adjusts to create an arc that is tangent to both objects and located
in the plane common to both objects.
The first selected object must be a line or a ray, but the second object can be
a line, an xline, or a ray. The fillet arc connects as shown in the illustration.

Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects | 835

To set the fillet radius

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet.
2 Enter r (Radius).
3 Enter the fillet radius
4 Select the objects to fillet.

To fillet two line segments

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet.
2 Select the first line.
3 Select the second line.

To fillet without trimming

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet.
2 If necessary, enter t (Trim). Enter n (No Trim).
3 Select the objects to fillet.

To fillet an entire polyline

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet.
2 Enter p (Polyline).
3 Select the polyline.

To fillet multiple sets of objects

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet.

836 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

2 Enter m (Multiple).
The main prompt is displayed.
3 Select the first line, or enter an option and complete the prompts for that
option. Select the first line.
4 Select the second line.
The main prompt is displayed again.
5 Select the first line for the next fillet, or press Enter or Esc to end the
command.

Quick Reference
Commands
FILLET
Rounds and fillets the edges of objects.
FILLETEDGE
Rounds and fillets the edges of solid objects.

System Variables
FILLETRAD
Stores the current fillet radius for 2D objects.
TRIMMODE
Controls whether selected edges for chamfers and fillets are trimmed.

Create Chamfers
A chamfer connects two objects to meet in a flattened or beveled corner.
A chamfer connects two objects with an angled line. It is usually used to
represent a beveled edge on a corner.

Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects | 837

You can chamfer
■

Lines

■

Polylines

■

Rays

■

Xlines

■

3D solids

CHAMFER can be used to bevel all corners of a polyline using a single
command.
NOTE Chamfering a hatch boundary that was defined from line segments removes
hatch associativity. If the hatch boundary was defined from a polyline, associativity
is maintained.
If both objects being chamfered are on the same layer, the chamfer line is
created on that layer. Otherwise, the chamfer line is created on the current
layer. The layer affects object properties including color and linetype.
Use the Multiple option to chamfer more than one set of objects without
leaving the command.

Chamfer by Specifying Distances
The chamfer distance is the amount each object is trimmed or extended to
meet the chamfer line or to intersect the other. If both chamfer distances are
0, chamfering trims or extends the two objects until they intersect but does
not create a chamfer line. You can press and hold Shift while selecting the
objects to override the current chamfer distances with a value of 0.

In the following example, you set the chamfer distance to 0.5 for the first line
and 0.25 for the second line. After you specify the chamfer distance, you select
the two lines as shown.

838 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Trim and Extend Chamfered Objects
By default, objects are trimmed when chamfered, but you can use the Trim
option to specify that they remain untrimmed.

Chamfer by Specify Length and Angle
You can chamfer two objects by specifying where on the first selected object
the chamfer line starts, and then the angle the chamfer line forms with this
object.
In this example, you chamfer two lines so that the chamfer line starts 1.5
units from the intersection along the first line and forms an angle of 30 degrees
with this line.

Chamfer Polylines and Polyline Segments
If the two objects you select for chamfering are segments of a polyline, they
must be adjacent or separated by no more than one arc segment. If they are
separated by an arc segment, as shown in the illustration, chamfering deletes
the arc and replaces it with a chamfer line.

Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects | 839

Chamfer an Entire Polyline
When you chamfer an entire polyline, each intersection is chamfered. For
best results, keep the first and second chamfer distances equal.
In this example, the chamfer distances are set to equal values.

When you chamfer an entire polyline, only the segments that are long enough
to accommodate the chamfer distance are chamfered. The polyline in the
following illustration has some segments too short to be chamfered.

To set chamfer distances

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer.
2 Enter d (Distances).
3 Enter the first chamfer distance.
4 Enter the second chamfer distance.
5 Select the lines for chamfering.

840 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

To chamfer two nonparallel line segments

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer.
2 Select the first line.
3 Select the second line.

To chamfer by specifying chamfer length and angle

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer.
2 Enter a (Angle).
3 Enter the distance from the corner to be chamfered along the first line.
4 Enter the chamfer angle.
5 Select the first line. Then select the second line.

To chamfer without trimming

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer.
2 Enter t (Trim Control).
3 Enter n (No Trim).
4 Select the objects to chamfer.

To chamfer an entire polyline

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer.
2 Enter p (Polyline).
3 Select the polyline.
The polyline is chamfered using the current chamfer method and the
default distances.

Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects | 841

To chamfer multiple sets of objects

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer.
2 Enter m (Multiple).
The main prompt is displayed.
3 Select the first line, or enter an option and complete the prompts for that
option and then select the first line.
4 Select the second line.
The main prompt is displayed again.
5 Select the first line for the next chamfer, or press Enter or Esc to end the
command.

Quick Reference
Commands
CHAMFER
Bevels the edges of objects.
CHAMFEREDGE
Bevels the edges of 3D solids and surfaces.

System Variables
CHAMFERA
Sets the first chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0.
CHAMFERB
Sets the second chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0.
CHAMFERC
Sets the chamfer length when CHAMMODE is set to 1.
CHAMFERD
Sets the chamfer angle when CHAMMODE is set to 1.

842 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

CHAMMODE
Sets the input method for CHAMFER
PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY
TRIMMODE
Controls whether selected edges for chamfers and fillets are trimmed.

Break and Join Objects
You can break an object into two objects with or without a gap between them.
You can also join objects to create single object or multiple objects.

Break Objects
Use BREAK to create a gap in an object, resulting in two objects with a gap
between them. BREAK is often used to create space for block or text.

To break an object without creating a gap, specify both break points at the
same location.
You can create breaks in most geometric objects except blocks, dimensions,
multilines, and regions. As an alternative, use EXPLODE on these types of
objects, and create breaks in the dissociated geometry.

Join Objects
Use JOIN to combine lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, polylines, 3D polylines, helixes,
and splines by their endpoints into a single object.
The result of the join operation varies depending on the objects selected.
Typical applications include
■

Replacing two collinear lines with a single line.

■

Closing the gap in a line that resulted from a BREAK.

■

Completing an arc into a circle or an elliptical arc into an ellipse. To access
the Close option, select a single arc or elliptical arc.

Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects | 843

■

Combining several long polylines in a topographic map.

■

Joining two splines, leaving a kink between them.

In general cases, joining objects that touch end-to-end, but that are not in
the same plane result in 3D polylines and splines.
NOTE You can also use the Join option of the PEDIT command to combine a series
of lines, arcs, and polylines into a single polyline
See also:
■

Modify Polylines on page 846

■

Modify Splines on page 853

■

Modify Multilines on page 860

To break an object

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Break.
2 Select the object to break.
By default, the point at which you select the object is the first break point.
To select a different pair of break points, enter f (First) and specify the
first break point.
3 Specify the second break point.
To break an object without creating a gap, enter @0,0 to specify the
previous point.

To join objects

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Join.
2 Select a source object or select multiple objects to join together.
3 Valid objects include lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, polylines, 3D polylines,
and splines.

844 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Quick Reference
Commands
BREAK
Breaks the selected object between two points.
JOIN
Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.

Disassociate Compound Objects (Explode)
You can convert a compound object, such as a polyline, dimension, hatch,
or block reference, into individual elements.
You can explode a compound object, such as a polyline, dimension, hatch,
or block reference, to convert it into individual elements. For example,
exploding a polyline breaks it down to simple lines and arcs. Exploding a
block reference or an associative dimension replaces it with copies of the
objects that compose the block or dimension.

Explode Dimensions and Hatches
When you explode a dimension or a hatch, all associativity is lost and the
dimension or hatch object is replaced by individual objects such as lines, text,
points, and 2D solids. To explode dimensions automatically when you create
them, set the DIMASSOC system variable to 0.

Explode Polylines
When you explode a polyline, any associated width information is discarded.
The resulting lines and arcs follow the polyline's centerline. If you explode a
block that contains a polyline, you need to explode the polyline separately.
If you explode a donut, its width becomes 0.

Explode Block References
If you explode a block with attributes, the attribute values are lost, leaving
only the attribute definitions. The colors and linetypes of objects in exploded
block references can change.
NOTE Blocks inserted with MINSERT (multiple insert) result in an minsert block
object, and cannot be exploded directly. You can convert the minsert block object
into a block object with the FLATTEN Express Tool.

Disassociate Compound Objects (Explode) | 845

Explode External References
An external reference (xref) is a drawing file linked (or attached) to another
drawing. You cannot explode xrefs and their dependent blocks.

To explode an object

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Explode.
2 Select the objects to be exploded.
For most objects, exploding has no visible effect.

Quick Reference
Commands
EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
XPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects.

System Variables
DIMASSOC
Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are
exploded.
EXPLMODE
Controls whether the EXPLODE command supports nonuniformly scaled
(NUS) blocks.

Modify Polylines
Change the shape and display of polyline objects with polyline editing options.
You can also join separate polylines.
You can modify polylines using PEDIT, the Properties palette, or grips.
■

Move, add, or delete individual vertices

846 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

■

Set a uniform width for the entire polyline or control the width of each
segment

■

Create an approximation of a spline called a spline-fit polyline

■

Display noncontinuous linetypes with or without a dash before and after
each vertex

■

Change the orientation of text in a polyline’s linetype by reversing its
direction

Modify Polylines with Grips
NOTE For general information about working with grips, see Modify Objects Using
Grips on page 777.
Polyline grips offer some grip-specific options, depending on
■

The grip’s location (vertex or midpoint)

■

The segment type (line or arc)

■

The type of Polyline (standard, curve-fit, or spline-fit)

Polyline grip menu options
Option

Animation

Stretch or Stretch Vertex. Specify a
stretch point.
Add Vertex. Specify a point for the new
vertex.
Remove Vertex. Delete the selected vertex.
Convert to Arc. Specify the midpoint of a
straight segment to convert it to an arc
segment.
Convert to Line. Specify the midpoint of
an arc segment to convert into a straight
segment.

Modify Polylines | 847

Option

Animation

Tangent Direction. Manipulate the tangent directions to redefine the shape of a
curve-fit polyline.

Modify a Segment Within a Polyline
To select individual segments (or subobjects) of a polyline, press Ctrl while
clicking the segments. You can use grips to modify the segments. You can use
the Properties palette to change the width of individual segments; changing
any other property affects the entire polyline even if only a segment is selected.
TIP The GRIPSUBOBJMODE system variable controls whether grips are
automatically selected (or made “hot”) when subobjects are selected.

Join Polyline Segments
You can join a line, an arc, or another polyline to an open polyline if their
ends connect or are close to each other.
If the ends are not coincident but are within a distance that you can set, called
the fuzz distance, the ends are joined by either trimming them, extending
them, or connecting them with a new segment.
Spline-fit polylines return to their original shape when joined. Polylines cannot
be joined into a Y shape.
If the properties of several objects being joined into a polyline differ, the
resulting polyline inherits the properties of the first object that you selected.
See also:
■

Choose a Method to Modify Objects on page 776

■

Modify Objects Using Grips on page 777

848 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

■

Overview of Constraints on page 865

■

Trim or Extend Objects on page 821

■

Break and Join Objects on page 843

To modify a polyline
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline.
2 Select the polyline to modify.
NOTE To select a single arc or line segment, press Ctrl while clicking the
segment.
3 If the selected object is a spline, line, or an arc, the following prompt is
displayed:
Object selected is not a polyline.
Do you want it to turn into one? : Enter y or n, or press Enter
If you enter y, the object is converted into a single-segment 2D polyline
that you can edit.
Before the selected spline is converted to a polyline, the following prompt
is displayed:
Specify a precision <10>: Enter a new precision value or press Enter
The PLINECONVERTMODE system variable determines whether the
polylines are created with linear or arc segments. When the PEDITACCEPT
system variable is set to 1, this prompt is suppressed, and the selected
object is automatically converted to a polyline.
4 Edit the polyline by entering one or more of the following options:
■

Enter c (Close) to create a closed polyline.

■

Enter j (Join) to join contiguous lines, splines, arcs, or polylines.

■

Enter w (Width) to specify a new uniform width for the entire polyline.

■

Enter e (Edit Vertex) to edit a vertex.

■

Enter f (Fit) to create an arc-fit polyline, a smooth curve consisting of
arcs joining each pair of vertices

■

Enter s (Spline) to create an approximation of a spline.

Modify Polylines | 849

■

Enter d (Decurve) to remove extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline
curve and to straighten all segments of the polyline.

■

Enter L (Ltype Gen) to generate the linetype in a continuous pattern
through the vertices of the polyline.

■

Enter r (Reverse) to reverse the order of vertices of the polyline.

■

Enter u (Undo) to reverse actions back to the start of PEDIT.

5 Enter x (Exit) to end a command option. Press Enter to exit the PEDIT
command.

To reverse lines, polylines, splines, or helixes

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Reverse.
2 Select a line, polyline, spline, or helix to reverse.
3 Press Enter to end the command.

To join polylines, splines, lines, and arcs into a single polyline
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline.
2 Select a polyline, spline, line, or arc to edit. If you selected a spline, line,
or arc, press Enter to convert the selected object into a polyline.
3 Enter j (Join).
4 Select one or more polylines, splines, lines, or arcs that are located end
to end.
Each selected polyline, spline, line, or arc is now joined into a single
polyline.
5 Press Enter to end the command.

To delete a vertex in a polyline
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline.
2 Select a polyline.
3 Enter e (Edit vertex).

850 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

The first vertex is marked with an X. Use the Next option to move the X
to the vertex preceding the one that you want to delete.
4 Enter s (Straighten).
5 Use the Next option to move the X to the vertex immediately following
the one that you want to delete.
6 Enter g (Go).
The vertex on the polyline is deleted. The vertices on either side of the
deleted vertex are joined by a straight polyline segment.
7 Enter x (Exit) to end editing vertices.
8 Press Enter to end the command.

To taper the width of individual polyline segments
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline.
2 Select the polyline to edit.
3 Enter e (Edit Vertex).
The first vertex is marked with an X. Move to the appropriate vertex with
Next or Previous.
4 Enter w (Width).
5 Enter new starting and ending widths, and press Enter to move to the
next vertex. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each segment.
6 Enter u (Undo) to reverse actions back to the start of PEDIT.
7 Enter x (Exit) to end editing vertices.
8 Press Enter to end the command.

Quick Reference
Commands
PEDIT
Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes.

Modify Polylines | 851

JOIN
Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.
REVERSE
Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which
is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing
beginning and ending widths.

System Variables
GRIPS
Controls the color of selected grips.
GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL
Specifies the access methods for multi-functional grip options.
GRIPSUBOBJMODE
Controls whether grips are automatically selected (made “hot”) when
subobjects are selected.
PEDITACCEPT
Suppresses display of the Object Selected Is Not a Polyline prompt in PEDIT.
PLINECONVERTMODE
Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines.
SPLINESEGS
Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline
generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command.
SPLINETYPE
Sets the type of curve generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command.
SURFTYPE
Controls the type of surface-fitting to be performed by the Smooth option
of the PEDIT command.
SURFU
Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the M direction and the U
isolines density on surface objects.

852 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

SURFV
Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the N direction and the V
isolines density on surface objects.

Modify Splines
See also:
■

Draw Splines on page 723

■

Break and Join Objects on page 843

■

Use Object Grips on page 778

■

Edit NURBS Surfaces on page 1225

■

Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves on page 1227

Several methods are available for editing splines and changing their underlying
mathematical parameters.
You can edit splines using multi-functional grips, SPLINEDIT, 3DEDITBAR,
and the Properties palette. In addition to these operations, splines can be
trimmed, extended, and filleted.

Edit Splines with Multi-Functional Grips
Multi-functional grips provide options that include adding control vertices
and changing the tangent direction of the spline at its endpoints. Display a
menu of options by hovering over a grip.

The editing options available with multi-functional grips differ depending on
whether the spline is set to display control vertices or fit points. The spline on
the left displays control vertices, and the one on the right displays fit points.

Modify Splines | 853

To switch between displaying control vertices and displaying fit points, click
the triangular grip.

IMPORTANT Switching from displaying control vertices to fit points automatically
changes the selected spline to degree 3. Splines originally created using
higher-degree equations will likely change shape as a result.
In general, editing a spline with control vertices provides finer control over
reshaping a small section of the curve than editing a spline with fit points.

You can insert additional control vertices to a section of a spline to obtain
greater control in that section at the expense of making the shape of the spline
more complicated. The Refine option adds a knot to the spline resulting in
replacing the selected control vertex with two control vertices.

854 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Edit Splines with SPLINEDIT
SPLINEDIT provides additional editing options, such as adding a kink to the
spline, and joining a spline to another contiguous object, such as a line, arc,
or other spline. As shown, objects are joined to splines with C0 continuity.

Edit Splines with 3DEDITBAR
3DEDITBAR displays a gizmo that can move a portion of a spline
proportionately, or change the direction and magnitude of the tangent at a
specified base point on the spline. To display a menu of control options,
right-click the gizmo.
The gizmo in the illustration is the default setting, which is the Move Point
Location option. The square grip is located at a specified base point on the
spline, and is used to stretch a portion of the spline.

The red and green axis arrow grips constrain the movement of the square grip
in their respective directions.

Modify Splines | 855

TIP Not visible in the illustration is a blue axis arrow grip that points toward you.
This axis is visible in other views such as a 3D isometric view, and can be used to
modify the shape of a spline in 3D.
Click the downward-pointing triangular grip to switch to the Move Tangent
Direction option as illustrated below. Even though the axes of the gizmo
change their location, the base point remains the same. With this option,
moving the square grip changes the slope of the tangent at the base point.
The tangent arrow grip changes the magnitude of the tangent at the base
point, creating either a sharper or a flatter curvature at the base point. In the
illustration, the magnitude of the tangent is being increased.

Edit Splines with a Palette
The Properties palette provides access to several spline parameters and options,
including the degree of the spline, the weight for each control point, the knot
parameterization method used in conjunction with fit points, and whether the
spline is closed. For more information, see Draw Splines on page 723.

Trim, Extend, and Fillet Splines
Trimming a spline shortens it without changing the shape of the portion that
remains. Extending a spline lengthens it by adding a linear portion that is
tangent to the end of the spline (C1 continuity). If the shape of the spline is
later changed, the tangency of the linear portion is not maintained.

Trimming a spline shortens it without changing the shape of the portion that
remains.
Filleting a spline creates an arc that is tangent to the spline and the other
selected object. The spline might be extended with a linear portion to complete
the fillet operation.

856 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

For more information, see Modify Objects Using Grips on page 777.

To convert a spline to a polyline
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Spline.
2 Select the spline to convert.
3 Enter p to convert to Polyline.
4 Specify a precision value or press Enter to end the command.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DEDITBAR
Reshapes splines and NURBS surfaces, including their tangency properties.
CVSHOW
Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves.
CVADD
Adds control vertices to NURBS surfaces and splines.
CVHIDE
Turns off the display of control vertices for all NURBS surfaces and curves.
CVREBUILD
Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves.
CVREMOVE
Removes control vertices from NURBS surfaces and curves.

Modify Splines | 857

JOIN
Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.
SPLINE
Creates a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of fit points, or that
is defined by the vertices in a control frame.
SPLINEDIT
Modifies the parameters of a spline or converts a spline-fit polyline to a
spline.
REVERSE
Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which
is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing
beginning and ending widths.

System Variables
GRIPS
Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
PLINECONVERTMODE
Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines.

Modify Helixes
You can use grips or the Properties palette to modify the shape and size of a
helix.
You can use the grips on a helix to change the following properties:
■

Start point

■

Base radius

■

Top radius

■

Height

■

Location

When you use a grip to change the base radius of a helix, the top radius scales
to maintain the current ratio. Use the Properties palette to change the base
radius independent of the top radius.

858 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

You can use the Properties palette to change other helix properties, such as
■

Number of turns (Turns)

■

Turn height

■

Direction of the twist — clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW)

With the Constrain property, you can specify that the Height, Turns, or Turn
Height properties of the helix are constrained. The Constrain property affects
how the helix changes when the Height, Turns, or Turn Height properties are
changed either through the Properties palette or through grip editing. The
table below shows the behavior of the helix depending on which property is
constrained.
Constrained
property

Property to
change

Height

Turns

Turn Height

Effect on these helix properties
Height

Turns

Turn Height

Height

Changed

Fixed

Changed

Turns

Fixed

Changed

Turn Height

Fixed

Changed

Height

Changed

Fixed

Changed

Turns

Fixed

Changed

Turn Height

Changed

Fixed

Changed

Height

Changed

Fixed

Turns

Changed

Fixed

Turn Height

Fixed

Changed

See also:
■

Draw Helixes on page 728

Modify Helixes | 859

Quick Reference
Commands
HELIX
Creates a 2D spiral or 3D spring.

Modify Multilines
Multiline objects are composed of 1 to 16 parallel lines, called elements. To
modify multilines or their elements, you can use common multiline editing
commands.
Special multiline editing features are available with the MLEDIT command
including the following:
■

Add or delete a vertex

■

Control the visibility of corner joints

■

Control the style of intersection with other multilines

■

Open or close gaps in a multiline object

Add and Delete Multiline Vertices
You can add or delete any vertex in a multiline.

Edit Multiline Intersections
If you have two multilines in a drawing, you can control the way they intersect.
Multilines can intersect in a cross or a T shape, and the crosses or T shapes
can be closed, open, or merged.

860 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Edit Multiline Styles
You can use MLSTYLE to edit multiline styles to change the properties of
multiline elements or the end caps and background fill of subsequently created
multilines.
Multiline styles control the number of line elements in a multiline and the
color, linetype, lineweight, and offset of each element. You can also modify
the display of joints, end caps, and background fill.
Multiline styles have the following limitations:
■

You cannot edit the element and multiline properties of the STANDARD
multiline style or any multiline style already used in the drawing.

■

To edit an existing multiline style, you must do so before you draw any
multilines in that style.

NOTE If you use MLSTYLE to create a multiline style without saving it, and then
select another style or create a new style, the first MLSTYLE properties are lost. To
maintain the properties, save each multiline style to an MLN file before creating
a new one.

Use Common Editing Commands on Multilines
You can use most of the common editing commands on multilines except
■

BREAK

■

CHAMFER

■

FILLET

■

LENGTHEN

■

OFFSET

To perform these operations, first use EXPLODE to replace the multiline object
with separate line objects.

Modify Multilines | 861

NOTE If you trim or extend a multiline object, only the first boundary object
encountered determines the shape of the end of the multiline. A multiline cannot
have a complex boundary at its endpoint.
See also:
■

Draw Multiline Objects on page 701

To delete a vertex from a multiline
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Multiline.
2 In the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box, select Delete Vertex.
3 In the drawing, specify the vertex to delete. Press Enter.

To create a closed cross intersection
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Multiline.
2 In the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box, select Closed Cross.
3 Select the multiline for the foreground.
4 Select the multiline for the background.
The intersection is modified. You can continue selecting intersecting
multilines to modify, or press Enter to end the command. Press Enter
again to redisplay the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box.

To edit a multiline style

1 Click Format menu ➤ Multiline Style.
2 In the Multiline Styles dialog box, select the style name from the list.
Click Modify.
3 Click Element Properties.
4 In the Modify Multiline Styles dialog box, change the settings as needed.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Multiline Styles dialog box, click Save to save the changes to the
style in the MLN file.
7 Click OK.

862 | Chapter 19 Select and Modify Objects

Quick Reference
Commands
MLEDIT
Edits multiline intersections, breaks, and vertices.
MLSTYLE
Creates, modifies, and manages multiline styles.

Modify Multilines | 863

864

Add Constraints to
Geometry

With parametric drawing, you can add constraints to geometry to ensure that the design
conforms to specified requirements.

Overview of Constraints
Parametric drawing is a technology that is used for designing with constraints.
Constraints are associations and restrictions applied to 2D geometry.
There are two general types of constraints:
■

Geometric constraints control the relationships of objects with respect to each
other

■

Dimensional constraints control the distance, length, angle, and radius values
of objects

The following illustration displays geometric and dimensional constraints using
the default format and visibility.

A blue cursor icon always displays when you move the cursor over an object
that has constraints applied to it.

865

In the design phase of a project, constraints provide a way to enforce
requirements when experimenting with different designs or when making
changes. Changes made to objects can adjust other objects automatically, and
restrict changes to distance and angle values.
With constraints, you can
■

Maintain design specifications and requirements by constraining the
geometry within a drawing

■

Apply multiple geometric constraints to objects instantly

■

Include formulas and equations within dimensional constraints

■

Make design changes quickly by changing the value of a variable

BEST PRACTICE It is recommended that you first apply geometric constraints to
determine the shape of a design, and then apply dimensional constraints to
determine the size of objects in a design.

Design Using Constraints
When you are creating or changing a design, a drawing will be in one of three
states:
■

Unconstrained. No constraints are applied to any geometry.

■

Underconstrained. Some constraints are applied to the geometry.

■

Fully constrained. All relevant geometric and dimensional constraints are
applied to the geometry. A fully constrained set of objects also needs to
include at least one Fix constraint to lock the location of the geometry.

866 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

Thus, there are two general methods for designing with constraints:
■

You can work in an underconstrained drawing and make changes as you
go, using a combination of editing commands, grips, and adding or
changing constraints.

■

You can create and fully constrain a drawing first, and then control the
design exclusively by relaxing and replacing geometric constraints, and
changing the values in dimensional constraints.

The method that you choose depends on your design practices and the
requirements of your discipline.
NOTE The program prevents you from applying any constraints that result in an
overconstrained condition.

Use Constraints with Blocks and Xrefs
You can apply constraints between
■

An object in the drawing and an object within a block reference

■

An object within a block reference and an object within a different block
reference (not between objects within the same block reference)

■

The insertion point of an xref and an object or a block, but not to any
objects within xrefs

When you apply constraints to block references, the objects contained within
the block are automatically available for selection. You do not need to press
Ctrl for subobject selection. Adding constraints to a block reference can cause
it to move or rotate as a result.
NOTE Applying constraints to dynamic blocks suppresses the display of their
dynamic grips. You can still change the values in a dynamic block using the
Properties palette, but to redisplay the dynamic grips, the constraints must first
be removed from the dynamic block.
Constraints can be used in block definitions, resulting in dynamic blocks. You
can control the size and shape of dynamic blocks directly from within the
drawing. For more information, see Add Constraints to Dynamic Blocks on
page 976.

Overview of Constraints | 867

Remove or Relax Constraints
There are two ways to cancel the effects of constraints when you need to make
design changes:
■

Delete the constraints individually and later apply new constraints. While
the cursor hovers over a geometric constraint icon, you can use the Delete
key or the shortcut menu to delete the constraint.

■

Relax the constraints temporarily on selected objects to make the changes.
With a grip selected or when you specify options during an editing
command, tap the Shift key to alternate between relaxing constraints and
maintaining constraints.

Relaxed constraints are not maintained during editing. Constraints are restored
automatically if possible when the editing process is complete. Constraints
that are no longer valid are removed.
NOTE The DELCONSTRAINT command deletes all geometric and dimensional
constraints from an object.

Quick Reference
AUTOCONSTRAIN
Applies geometric constraints to a selection set of objects based on orientation
of the objects relative to one another.
CONSTRAINTBAR
Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.
CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars.
DCDISPLAY
Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of
objects.
DELCONSTRAINT
Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of
objects.

868 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

DIMCONSTRAINT
Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or
converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.
GEOMCONSTRAINT
Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
PARAMETERSCLOSE
Closes the Parameters Manager palette.
TEXTEDIT
Edits a selected multiline or single-line text object, or the text in a dimension
object.
CCONSTRAINTFORM
Controls whether annotational or dynamic constraints are applied to objects.
CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY
Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when
you select geometrically constrained drawings.
CONSTRAINTBARMODE
Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars.
CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT
Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
CONSTRAINTRELAX
Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE
Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints.

Overview of Constraints | 869

DIMCONSTRAINTICON
Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints.
DYNCONSTRAINTMODE
Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are
selected.
PARAMETERCOPYMODE
Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when
constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts,
and block definitions.
PARAMETERSSTATUS
Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden.

Constrain Objects Geometrically
Geometric constraints determine the relationships between 2D geometric
objects or points on objects relative to each other.

Overview of Geometric Constraints
You can specify geometric constraints between 2D objects or points on objects.
When you later edit the constrained geometry, the constraints are maintained.
Thus, using geometric constraints, you have a method of including design
requirements in your drawing.
For example, in the illustration below, the following constraints are applied
to the geometry.
■

Every endpoint is constrained to remain coincident with the endpoint of
every adjacent object—these constraints are displayed as small blue squares

■

The vertical lines are constrained to remain parallel with each other and
to remain equal to each other in length

■

The left vertical line is constrained to remain perpendicular to the
horizontal line

■

The horizontal line is constrained to remain horizontal

■

The location of the circle and the horizontal line are constrained to remain
fixed in space—these constraints are displayed as lock icons

870 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

NOTE The locked geometry is not associated to the other geometry without
geometric constraints linked to it.

The geometry is not fully constrained, however. Using grips, you can still change
the radius of the arc, the diameter of the circle, the length of the horizontal
line, and the length of the vertical lines. To specify these distances, you need
to apply dimensional constraints.
NOTE Constraints can be added to segments within a polyline as if they were
separate objects.
See also:
■

Overview of Dimensional Constraints on page 888

Quick Reference
Commands
AUTOCONSTRAIN
Applies geometric constraints to a selection set of objects based on orientation
of the objects relative to one another.
CONSTRAINTBAR
Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.
CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars.
DELCONSTRAINT
Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of
objects.

Overview of Geometric Constraints | 871

GEOMCONSTRAINT
Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.

System Variables
CONSTRAINTBARMODE
Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars.
CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY
Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when
you select geometrically constrained drawings.
CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT
Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
CONSTRAINTRELAX
Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE
Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints.

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints
Geometric constraints associate geometric objects together, or specify a fixed
location or angle.
For example, you can specify that a line should always be perpendicular to
another one, that an arc and a circle should always remain concentric, or that
a line should always be tangent to an arc.

872 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

When you apply a constraint, two things occur:
■

The object that you select adjusts automatically to conform to the specified
constraint

■

By default, a gray constraint icon displays near the constrained object as
shown in the previous illustration, and a small blue glyph displays with
your cursor when you move it over a constrained object

Once applied, constraints permit only those changes to the geometry that do
not violate the constraints. This provides a method for exploring design options
or making design changes while maintaining the requirements and
specifications of the design.
NOTE The order in which you select two objects when you apply a constraint is
important in some cases. Normally, the second object you select adjusts to the
first object. For example, when you apply a perpendicular constraint, the second
object you select will adjust to become perpendicular to the first.
You can apply geometric constraints to 2D geometric objects only. Objects
cannot be constrained between model space and paper space.

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints | 873

Specify Constraint Points
With some constraints, you specify constraint points on objects instead of
selecting the objects. This behavior is similar to that of object snaps, but the
locations are limited to endpoints, midpoints, center points, and insertion
points.
For example, a coincident constraint can restrict the location of the endpoint
of one line to the endpoint of another line.
The following glyph is displayed on the object as you roll over the object.

You use this glyph to confirm whether you are specifying the intended point
to constrain.
The fix, horizontal, and vertical constraint icons indicate whether the
constraints are applied to an object or a point.
Constraint

Point

Object

Fix

Horizontal

Vertical

The symmetric constraint icons indicate whether it identifying a symmetrical
point or object, or the symmetrical line.
Constraint

Point

Object

Line

Symmetric

When rolling over any icon, the constraint point markers are displayed
indicating the constrained points. You do not need to roll over the icon to
identify the constraints that are applied to the points of the selected object.

874 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

A different set of constraint bar icons are displayed when a horizontal or
vertical constraint is not parallel or perpendicular with the current UCS.

Use Fix Constraints
A fix constraint associates a constraint point on an object, or the object itself
with a fixed location with respect to the World Coordinate System.
It is often advisable to specify a fix constraint at an important geometric
feature. This locks the location of that point or object, and prevents geometry
from relocating when you make changes to the design.
When you fix an object, the angle of a line, or the center of an arc or circle is
also fixed.

Apply Multiple Geometric Constraints
You can apply multiple geometric constraints to objects either manually or
automatically.
When you want to apply all essential geometric constraints to a design
automatically, you can use AUTOCONSTRAIN with the objects that you select
in your drawing. This helps constrain the geometric shape of the
design—depending on your design, there might be cases where you need to
apply additional geometric constraints.
AUTOCONSTRAIN also provides settings in which you can specify the
following options:
■

What geometric constraints to apply

■

What order to apply geometric constraints

■

What tolerances are used to determine whether objects are horizontal,
vertical, or touching

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints | 875

NOTE Fix constraint is not applied with AUTOCONSTRAIN. You must apply the
constraint individually. Equal constraint applied with AUTOCONSTRAIN resizes
the selected arcs to the same radius only. It is not applied to the arc length.
To fully constrain the size and proportions of a design, you will later need to
apply dimensional constraints.

Remove Geometric Constraints
A geometric constraint cannot be modified, but you can delete it and apply
a different one. Several constraint options, including Delete, are available from
the shortcut menu that is displayed when you right-click a constraint icon in
the drawing.
You can delete all constraints from a selection set in a single operation with
DELCONSTRAINT.

To set the order for applying multiple geometric constraints to an object

1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ AutoConstrain.
2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Settings).
3 In the Constraint Settings dialog box, on the AutoConstrain tab, select
a Constraint Type.
4 Click Move Up or Move Down. This changes the priority for a constraint
when you use the AUTOCONSTRAIN command on an object.
5 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
CONSTRAINTBAR
Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.
CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars.

876 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

GCCOINCIDENT
Constrains two points together or a point to a curve (or an extension of a
curve).
GCCOLLINEAR
Causes two or more line segments to lie along the same line.
GCCONCENTRIC
Constrains two arcs, circles, or ellipses to the same center point.
GCEQUAL
Resizes selected arcs and circles to the same radius, or selected lines to the
same length.
GCFIX
Locks points and curves in position.
GCHORIZONTAL
Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current
coordinate system.
GCPARALLEL
Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each other.
GCPERPENDICULAR
Causes selected lines to lie 90 degrees to one another.
GCSMOOTH
Constrains a spline to be contiguous and maintain G2 continuity with
another spline, line, arc, or polyline.
GCSYMMETRIC
Causes selected objects to become symmetrically constrained about a selected
line.
GCTANGENT
Constrains two curves to maintain a point of tangency to each other or their
extensions.
GCVERTICAL
Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current
coordinate system.

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints | 877

GEOMCONSTRAINT
Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.

Display and Verify Geometric Constraints
You can determine visually what objects are associated with any geometric
constraint, or what constraints are associated with any object.
Constraint icons provide information about how objects are constrained. A
constraint bar displays one or more icons that represent the geometric
constraints applied to an object.

You can drag constraint bars when you need to move them out of the way,
and you can also control whether they are displayed or hidden.

Verify the Geometric Constraints on Objects
You can confirm the association of geometric constraints with objects in two
ways.
■

When you roll over a constraint icon on a constraint bar, the objects
associated with that geometric constraint are highlighted.

878 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

■

When you roll over an object that has geometric constraints applied to it,
all constraint bars that are associated with the object are highlighted.

These highlighting features simplify working with constraints especially when
you have many constraints applied throughout a drawing.

Control the Display of Constraint Bars
Geometric constraints and constraint bars can be displayed or hidden, either
individually or globally. You can do any of the following:
■

Display or hide all geometric constraints

■

Display or hide specified types of geometric constraints

■

Display or hide all geometric constraints associated with a selected object

■

Temporarily display the geometric constraints of the selected object

Use the Constraint Settings dialog box to control the types of geometric
constraints that are displayed or hidden on constraint bars.

Display and Verify Geometric Constraints | 879

You can set the constraint bars to automatically and temporarily display when
the constrained geometry is selected. When the geometry is no longer selected,
the temporarily displayed constraint bars are hidden.

Hiding geometric constraints is useful when you analyze a design and want
to filter the display of geometric constraints. For example, you can choose to
display the icons for Parallel constraints only. Next, you might choose to
display the icons for Perpendicular constraints only.
NOTE To reduce clutter, Coincident constraints display by default as small,
light-blue squares. You can use an option in the Constraint Settings dialog box to
turn them off if necessary.

To display or hide a geometric constraint

1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Show/Hide.
2 Select the constrained objects.
3 Press Enter.
4 Select one of following:
■

Show. Displays the geometric constraints.

■

Hide. Hides the geometric constraints.

■

Reset. Displays the geometric constraints and resets the contraint bar
to the default position relative to the parameters they are associated
with.

To display all geometric constraints

➤

Click Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Show All.

880 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

To hide all geometric constraints

➤

Click Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Hide All.

To change the constraint bar settings using the constraint bar shortcut menu
1 Select a constrained object.
2 Ensure that the constraint bar is visible for the selected object.
3 Right-click the constraint bar, and click Constraint Bar Settings.
4 In the Constraint Settings dialog box, on the Geometric tab, select or
clear the appropriate check boxes.
5 Use the slider, or enter a value, to set the transparency level of constraint
bars in the drawing. The default value is 50.
6 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
GEOMCONSTRAINT
Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.
CONSTRAINTBAR
Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.
CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars.

Display and Verify Geometric Constraints | 881

CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT
Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
CONSTRAINTRELAX
Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE
Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints.

Modify Objects with Geometric Constraints Applied
You can edit constrained geometric objects with grips, editing commands, or
by relaxing or applying geometric constraints.
By definition, geometric constraints that are applied to geometric objects limit
the editing actions that you perform on the objects.

Modify Constrained Objects with Grips
You can modify constrained geometry using grip editing modes. The geometry
will maintain all applied constraints.
For example, if a line object is constrained to remain tangent to a circle, you
can rotate the line and change its length and endpoints, but the line or its
extension will remain tangent to the circle.

If the circle was an arc instead, the line or its extension would remain tangent
to the arc or its extension.
The results of modifying underconstrained objects are based on what
constraints have already been applied and the object types involved. For
example, if the Radius constraint had not been applied, the radius of the circle
would have been modified instead of the tangent point of the line.

882 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

The CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE system variable determines the way an object
behaves when constraints are applied or when grips are used to edit it.
BEST PRACTICE You can limit unexpected changes by applying additional
geometric or dimensional constraints. Common choices include coincident and
fix constraints.

Modify Constrained Objects with Editing Commands
You can use editing commands such as MOVE, COPY, ROTATE, SCALE, and
STRETCH to modify constrained geometry. The results maintain the constraints
applied to the objects.
NOTE The TRIM, EXTEND, BREAK, and JOIN commands in some circumstances
can remove constraints.
By default, if an editing command results in copying the constrained objects,
the constraints applied to the original objects will also be duplicated. This
behavior is controlled by the PARAMETERCOPYMODE system variable. Using
the copying technique, you can save work by taking advantage of multiple
instances of objects, bilateral symmetry, or radial symmetry.
For information about temporarily relaxing constraints, see Overview of
Constraints on page 865.

To grip-edit constrained geometry
1 Select the constrained object.
2 Click the grips and drag it to edit the geometry.

To turn a constraint off
1 Click the constrained object to select it.
2 Move your mouse over a grip.

Modify Objects with Geometric Constraints Applied | 883

The grips are displayed in red to show that the object is selected.
3 Click the grip.
4 Press and release the Shift key.
5 Move the object. The object moves freely as it is no longer constrained.
Constraint bars will no longer be displayed (if enabled) for the object, as
the constraints are turned off.

To delete a geometric constraint
1 Select a constrained object.
2 Ensure that the constraint bar is visible for the selected object.
3 Right-click the constraint bar. Click Delete.
Constraint bars for the deleted constraint will no longer display for the
object.

To delete all geometric constraints from an object
1 Select a constrained object.

2 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Delete Constraint.
NOTE All geometric and dimensional constraints are removed from the
object.
3 Press Enter.

Quick Reference
Commands
GEOMCONSTRAINT
Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.
CONSTRAINTBAR
Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.

884 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars.

System Varaibles
CONSTRAINTBARMODE
Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars.
CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY
Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when
you select geometrically constrained drawings.
CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT
Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
CONSTRAINTRELAX
Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE
Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints.

Infer Geometric Constraints
You can automatically apply geometric constraints while creating and editing
geometric objects.
Enabling Infer Constraints mode automatically applies constraints between the
object you are creating or editing and the object or points associated with
object snaps.
Similar to the AUTOCONSTRAIN command, constraints are applied only if
the objects meet the constraint conditions. Objects are not repositioned as a
result of inferring constraints.
With Infer Constraints turned on, the object snaps that you specify when
creating geometry are used to infer geometric constraints. However, the
following object snaps are not supported: Intersection, Apparent Intersection,
Extension, and Quadrant.
The following constraints cannot be inferred:
■

Fix

■

Smooth

Infer Geometric Constraints | 885

■

Symmetric

■

Concentric

■

Equal

■

Collinear

Infer Constraints with Line and Polyline
Certain object creation and editing commands can infer constraints regardless
of the current object snap settings.
LINE and PLINE commands infer coincident point-to-point constraints. The
Close option infers a coincident constraint between the start point of the first
line and the endpoint of the last line.

Infer Constraints with Rectangle, Fillet, and Chamfer
The RECTANG, FILLET, and CHAMFER commands infer constraints as follows:
■

RECTANG applies a pair of parallel constraints and a perpendicular
constraint to the closed polyline.

■

FILLET applies tangent and coincident constraints between the newly
created arc and the existing trimmed or extended pair of lines.

■

CHAMFER applies coincident contraints between the newly created line
and the existing trimmed or extended pair of lines.

The following commands are unaffected by the Infer Constraints setting:
■

SCALE

■

MIRROR

■

OFFSET

■

BREAK

■

TRIM

■

EXTEND

■

ARRAY

886 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

Infer Constraints with Move, Copy, and Stretch
When moving, copying, or stretching with the Infer Constraints on, you can
apply coincident, perpendicular, parallel, or tangent constraints between the
object being edited and the object being snapped to if the base point of the
edited object is a valid constraint point of that object.
For example, if a line is stretched and snapped to an endpoint of another line,
a coincident constraint is applied between the endpoints of the two lines.
A vertical or horizontal constraint can be applied between objects when you
move, copy, or stretch an object from a valid constraint point while object
tracking vertically or horizontally along a valid constraint point on another
object.
See also:
■

Use Object Snaps on page 626

To turn on and off inferred constraints
1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Constraint Settings,
Geometric.
2 In the Constraint Settings dialog box, Geometric tab, click or clear Infer
Geometric Constraints.
3 Click OK.
NOTE Alternatively, you can click the Infer Constraints button on the Status bar.

Quick Reference
Commands
CHAMFER
Bevels the edges of objects.
CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars.
DIMCONSTRAINT
Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or
converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.

Infer Geometric Constraints | 887

FILLET
Rounds and fillets the edges of objects.
LINE
Creates straight line segments.
PLINE
Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc
segments.
RECTANG
Creates a rectangular polyline.

System Variables
CONSTRAINTINFER
Controls whether the geometric constraints are inferred while drawing and
editing geometry.

Constrain Distances and Angles between Objects
You can control distances or angles between 2D geometric objects or points
on objects applying dimensional constraints and specifying values. You can
also constrain geometry with variables and equations.

Overview of Dimensional Constraints
Dimensional constraints control the size and proportions of a design. They
can constrain the following:
■

Distances between objects, or between points on objects

■

Angles between objects, or between points on objects

■

Sizes of arcs and circles

For example, the following illustration includes linear, aligned, angular, and
diameter constraints.

888 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

If you change the value of a dimensional constraint, all the constraints on the
object are evaluated, and the objects that are affected are updated
automatically.
Also, constraints can be added directly to segments within a polyline as if they
were separate objects.
NOTE The number of decimal places displayed in dimensional constraints is
controlled by the LUPREC and AUPREC system variables.

Compare Dimensional Constraints with Dimension Objects
Dimensional constraints are different from dimension objects in the following
ways:
■

Dimensional constraints are used in the design phase of a drawing, but
dimensions are typically created in the documentation phase

■

Dimensional constraints drive the size or angle of objects, but dimensions
are driven by objects

■

By default, dimensional constraints are not objects, display with only a
single dimension style, maintain the same size during zoom operations,
and are not outputted to a device

If you need to output a drawing with dimensional constraints or use dimension
styles, you can change the form of a dimensional constraint from dynamic
to annotational. See Apply Dimensional Constraints on page 892 for more
detail.

Overview of Dimensional Constraints | 889

Define Variables and Equations
With the Parameters Manager, you can define custom user variables that you
can reference from within dimensional constraints and other user variables.
The expressions that you define can include a variety of predefined functions
and constants.

For more information about using variables and equations with constraints,
see Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations on page 903
See also:
■

Overview of Geometric Constraints on page 870

■

Apply Dimensional Constraints on page 892

■

Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations on page 903

890 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

DIMCONSTRAINT
Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or
converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
-PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
PARAMETERSCLOSE
Closes the Parameters Manager palette.
TEXTEDIT
Edits a selected multiline or single-line text object, or the text in a dimension
object.

System Variables
CCONSTRAINTFORM
Controls whether annotational or dynamic constraints are applied to objects.
CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT
Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
CONSTRAINTRELAX
Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE
Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints.
DIMCONSTRAINTICON
Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints.

Overview of Dimensional Constraints | 891

DYNCONSTRAINTMODE
Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are
selected.
PARAMETERCOPYMODE
Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when
constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts,
and block definitions.
PARAMETERSSTATUS
Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden.

Apply Dimensional Constraints
Dimensional constraints maintain specified distances and angles between
geometric objects or points on objects.
For example, you can specify that the length of a line should always remain
at 6.00 units, that the vertical distance between two points be maintained at
1.00 unit, and that a circle should always remain at 1.00 unit in diameter.

When you apply a dimensional constraint to an object, a constraint variable is
automatically created for maintaining the constraint value. By default, these
are assigned names such as d1 or dia1, but you can rename them in the
Parameters Manager.
Dimensional constraints can be created in one of the following forms:
■

Dynamic constraints

■

Annotational constraints

The forms have different purposes. In addition, any dynamic or annotational
constraint can be converted to a reference parameter.

892 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

Dynamic Constraints
By default, dimensional constraints are dynamic. They are ideal for normal
parametric drawing and design tasks.
Dynamic constraints have the following characteristics:
■

Maintain the same size when zooming in or out

■

Can easily be turned on or off globally in the drawing

■

Display using a fixed, predefined dimension style

■

Position the textual information automatically, and provide triangle grips
with which you can change the value of a dimensional constraint

■

Do not display when the drawing is plotted

If you need to control the dimension style of dynamic constraints, or if you
need to plot dimensional constraints, use the Properties palette to change
dynamic constraints to annotational constraints.

Annotational Constraints
Annotational constraints are useful when you want dimensional constraints
to have the following characteristics:
■

Change their size when zooming in or out

■

Display individually with layers

■

Display using the current dimension style

■

Provide grip capabilities that are similar to those on dimensions

■

Display when the drawing is plotted

NOTE To display the text used in annotational constraints in the same format as
used in dimensions, set the CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT system variable to 1.
After plotting, you can use the Properties palette to convert annotational
constraints back to dynamic constraints.

Reference Parameters
A reference parameter is a driven dimensional constraint, either dynamic or
annotational. This means that it does not control the associated geometry,
but rather reports a measurement similar to a dimension object.

Apply Dimensional Constraints | 893

You use reference parameters as a convenient way to display measurements
that you would otherwise have to calculate. For example, the width in the
illustration is constrained by the diameter constraint, dia1, and the linear
constraint, d1. The reference parameter, d2, displays the total width but does
not constrain it. The textual information in reference parameters is always
displayed within parentheses.

You can set the Reference property in the Properties palette to convert a
dynamic or annotational constraint to a reference parameter.
NOTE You cannot change a reference parameter back to a dimensional constraint
if doing so would overconstrain the geometry.

To convert associative dimensions to dimensional constraints
1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Convert.
2 Select the associative dimensions you want to convert.
3 Press Enter.

To change the dimension name format
1 Select an annotational constraint, right-click in the drawing area, and
click Dimension Name Format.
2 Select Value, Name, or Name and Expression.
The Expression reflects the selected dimension name format.

894 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

Quick Reference
Commands
DCALIGNED
Constrains the distance between two points on different objects.
DCANGULAR
Constrains the angle between line or polyline segments, the angle swept out
by an arc or a polyline arc segment, or the angle between three points on
objects.
DCCONVERT
Converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.
DCDIAMETER
Constrains the diameter of a circle or an arc.
DCDISPLAY
Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of
objects.
DCFORM
Specifies whether the dimensional constraint being created is dynamic or
annotational.
DCHORIZONTAL
Constrains the X distance between points on an object, or between two
points on different objects.
DCLINEAR
Creates a horizontal, vertical, or rotated constraint based on the locations
of the extension line origins and the dimension line.
DCRADIUS
Constrains the radius of a circle or an arc.
DCVERTICAL
Constrains the Y distance between points on an object, or between two points
on different objects.

Apply Dimensional Constraints | 895

DELCONSTRAINT
Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of
objects.
DIMCONSTRAINT
Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or
converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
-PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
PARAMETERSCLOSE
Closes the Parameters Manager palette.
TEXTEDIT
Edits a selected multiline or single-line text object, or the text in a dimension
object.

896 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

Control the Display of Dimensional Constraints
You can display or hide dynamic and annotational constraints within a
drawing.

Display or Hide Dynamic Constraints
You can hide all dynamic constraints to reduce clutter when you want to work
with geometric constraints only, or when you need to continue other work
in the drawing. You can turn on their display when needed from the ribbon
or with the DCDISPLAY command.
By default, if you select an object associated with a hidden dynamic constraint,
all dynamic constraints associated with that object are temporarily displayed.
You can display or hide the dynamic constraints for all objects or for a selection
set.

Display or Hide Annotational Constraints
You control the display of annotational constraints as you would with
dimension objects—you assign them to a layer and turn the layer on or off as
needed. You can also specify object properties for annotational constraints
such as dimension style, color, and lineweight.

To display or hide dynamic dimensional constraints

1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Show/Hide.
2 Select the constrained objects.

Control the Display of Dimensional Constraints | 897

3 Press Enter.
4 Select one of following:
■

Show. Displays the dimensional constraints.

■

Hide. Hides the dimensional constraints.

Quick Reference
Commands
DCDISPLAY
Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of
objects.
DELCONSTRAINT
Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of
objects.
DIMCONSTRAINT
Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or
converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
-PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
PARAMETERSCLOSE
Closes the Parameters Manager palette.
TEXTEDIT
Edits a selected multiline or single-line text object, or the text in a dimension
object.

898 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

System Variables
CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT
Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
CONSTRAINTRELAX
Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE
Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints.
DIMCONSTRAINTICON
Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints.
DYNCONSTRAINTMODE
Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are
selected.
PARAMETERCOPYMODE
Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when
constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts,
and block definitions.
PARAMETERSSTATUS
Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden.

Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied
You can control lengths, distances, and angles of objects by changing
constraint values, by manipulating dimensional constraints using grips, or by
changing user variables or expressions associated with dimensional constraints.

Edit Dimensional Constraint Names, Values, and Expressions
You can edit the names, values, and expressions that are associated with
dimensional constraints using in-place editing:
■

Double-click the dimensional constraint, select the dimensional constraint
and use the shortcut menu, or the TEXTEDIT command

■

Open the Properties palette and select the dimensional constraint

■

Open the Parameters Manager and select the dimensional constraint either
from the list or from within the drawing

Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied | 899

■

Customize the Quick Properties palette to display several constraint
properties

You can reference other dimensional constraints by selecting them during an
in-place editing operation.
NOTE You cannot edit the Expression and Value properties for a reference
parameter.

Modify Dimensional Constraints Using Their Grips
You can modify a constrained object either by using the triangular grips or
the square grips on the associated dimensional constraint.
The triangular grips on dimensional constraints provide a way of changing
the constraint value while maintaining the constraint.
For example, you can change the length of the diagonal line by using the
triangular grips on the Aligned dimensional constraint. The diagonal line
maintains its angle and the location of one of its endpoints.

The square grip on dimensional constraints provides a way of changing the
location of the text and other elements.

900 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

Dynamic dimensional constraints are more limited than annotational
dimensional constraints in where the text can be located.
NOTE Triangular grips are not available for dimensional constraints that reference
other constraint variables in expressions.
For information about temporarily relaxing constraints, see Overview of
Constraints on page 865.
See also:
■

Overview of Constraints on page 865

To grip-edit a dimensional constraint
1 Select a constrained object.
2 Click the grips and drag to edit the geometry.

To edit a dimensional constraint in-place
1 Double-click a dimensional constraint to display the in-place text editor.
2 Enter the new name, value, or expression (name=value).
3 Press Enter to confirm the change.

To edit a dimensional constraint using the Properties palette
1 Select a dimensional constraint, right-click in the drawing area, and click
Properties.
2 Enter the new values for Name, Expression, and Description text boxes.

To turn a dimensional constraint off
1 Click a constrained object in a drawing to select it.
The grips are displayed on the object to show that it is selected.
2 Move your cursor over a grip. The grip color turns red.
3 Click the grip.
4 Press and release the Shift key.
5 Move the object to the desired location.

Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied | 901

The constraint is relaxed for the object, and you should be able to move
it.

To edit the dimensions using the Parameters Manager palette

1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager.
2 Double-click the variable you want to edit.
3 Press Tab to navigate across the columns.
4 Change the values in the appropriate column.
NOTE You can modify only the Name, Expression, and Description columns.
5 Press Enter.

902 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

-PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
PARAMETERSCLOSE
Closes the Parameters Manager palette.
TEXTEDIT
Edits a selected multiline or single-line text object, or the text in a dimension
object.

Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations
You can control geometry using mathematical expressions that include the
names of dimensional constraints, user variables, and functions.

Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations | 903

Overview of Formulas and Equations
Formulas and equations can be represented either as expressions within
dimensional constraint parameters or by defining user variables. For example,
the following illustration represents a design that constrains a circle to the
center of the rectangle with an area equal to that of the rectangle.

The Length and Width dimensional constraint parameters are set to constants.
The d1 and d2 constraints are simple expressions that reference the Length
and Width. The Radius dimensional constraint parameter is set to an expression
that includes the square root function, parentheses to determine the
precedence of operations, the Area user variable, the division operator, and
the constant, PI. These parameters are all displayed in the Parameters Manager.

As you can see, part of the equation for determining the area of the circle is
included in the Radius dimensional constraint parameter and part was defined
as a user variable. Alternatively, the entire expression, sqrt (Length * Width /
PI), could have been assigned to the Radius dimensional constraint parameter,
defined in a user variable, or some other combination.

904 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

Protect Expressions in Dynamic Constraints
When a dynamic dimensional constraint references one or more parameters, the
prefix fx: is added to the name of the constraint. This prefix is displayed only
in the drawing. Its purpose is to help you avoid accidentally overwriting
parameters and formulas when the dimension name format is set to Value or
Name, which suppresses the display of the parameters and formulas.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMCONSTRAINT
Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or
converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.
PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
-PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.

Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager
The Parameters Manager lists dimensional constraint parameters, reference
parameters, and user variables, which you can also create, edit, and organize.
You can easily create, modify, and delete parameters from the Parameters
Manager.
The Parameters Manager supports the following operations:
■

Click the name of a dimensional constraint parameter to highlight the
constraint in the drawing.

■

Double-click a name or expression to edit it.

■

Right-click and click Delete to remove a dimensional constraint parameter
or user variable.

Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager | 905

Click a column heading to sort the list of parameters by name, expression,
or value.

■

Use Operators in Expressions
Dimensional constraint parameters and user variables support the following
operators within expressions:
Operator Description
+

Addition

Subtraction or unary negation

Floating point modulo

Multiplication

Division

Exponentiation

()

Parenthesis, expression delimiter

Decimal separator

NOTE With imperial units, the Parameters Manager interprets a minus or a dash
(-) as a unit separator rather than a subtraction operation. To specify subtraction,
include at least one space before or after the minus sign. For example, to subtract
9" from 5', enter 5' -9" rather than 5'-9".

Understand Precedence in Expressions
Expressions are evaluated according to the following standard mathematical
rules of precedence:
1 Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set
2 Operators in standard order: (1) unary negation, (2) exponents, (3)
multiplication and division, and (4) addition and subtraction
3 Operators of equal precedence from left to right

906 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

Functions Supported in Expressions
The following functions are available for use in expressions:
Function

Syntax

Cosine

cos(expression)

Sine

sin(expression)

Tangent

tan(expression)

Arc cosine

acos(expression)

Arc sine

asin(expression)

Arc tangent

atan(expression)

Hyperbolic cosine

cosh(expression)

Hyperbolic sine

sinh(expression)

Hyperbolic tangent

tanh(expression)

Arc hyperbolic cosine

acosh(expression)

Arc hyperbolic sine

asinh(expression)

Arc hyperbolic tangent

atanh(expression)

Square root

sqrt(expression)

Signum function (1,0,1)

sign(expression)

Round to nearest integer

round(expression)

Truncate decimal

trunc(expression)

Round down

floor(expression)

Round up

ceil(expression)

Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager | 907

Function

Syntax

Absolute value

abs(expression)

Largest element in array

max(expression1;expression2)

Smallest element in array

min(expression1;expression2)

Degrees to radians

d2r(expression)

Radians to degrees

r2d(expression)

Logarithm, base e

ln(expression)

Logarithm, base 10

log(expression)

Exponent, base e

exp(expression)

Exponent, base 10

exp10(expression)

Power function

pow(expression1;expression2)

Random decimal, 0-1

Random

In addition to these functions, the constants Pi and e are also available for use
in expressions.

To reference a variable within an expression

1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager.
2 Double-click the variable you want to reference.
3 Right-click the cell in the Name column, and click Copy.
4 Double-click the Expression column where you want to include the
referenced variable.
5 Right-click the Expression column, and click Paste.

908 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

To include a function in an expression

1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager.
2 Double-click the Expression column of the variable to which you want
to add the function.
3 Right-click the Expression column, and click Expressions.
4 Select the function to insert it in the Expression column.

To modify a user parameter

1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager.
2 Double-click the columns of the variable you want to edit.
3 Change the values of the appropriate columns.
NOTE You can modify only the Name, Expression, and Description columns.
4 Press Enter.

To select a constrained object associated with a user parameter

1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager.
2 Click the dimensional variable to view the associated object in the
drawing.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMCONSTRAINT
Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or
converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.

Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager | 909

PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
-PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.

Organize Parameters into Groups
Organize dimensional and user-defined parameters into groups, and control
whether they are displayed in the Parameters Manager list.
When many dimensional and user-defined parameters are defined in a drawing,
it can be useful to use the Parameters Manager to create several parameter
groups, and then assign the parameters to one or more of the groups with a
simple drag and drop operation. The result lets you view one group of
parameters at a time, organizing and limiting their display in the Parameters
Manager. Thus, parameter groups are used as a display filter for the parameter
list.
Expanding the filter tree in the Parameters Manager displays all group filters
created in the current space, Model space or a layout. There are two predefined
filters displayed in the filter tree that cannot be edited:
■

All. Lists all parameters in the current space.

■

All Used in Expressions. Lists all parameters used in expressions or defined
by an expression.

When you use the Invert Filter option, it will display all the parameters not
in the group instead of displaying only the parameters belonging to the group.

Search For Parameters
You can enter characters and wildcards such as * in the edit box of the
Parameters Manager to search for parameters by name. This immediately filters
the parameter list as you enter the characters.

910 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

To create, modify, or delete a parameter group
1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager.
2 In the Parameters Manager, you can do the following:
■

Create a parameter group. Click the Parameter Group button and
specify a group name.

■

Rename a parameter group. Right-click the parameter group, choose
Rename, and specify a new group name.

■

Delete a parameter group. Right-click the parameter group and choose
Delete.

To add or remove parameters to or from parameter groups
1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager.
2 In the Parameters Manager, you can do the following:
■

Add parameters to any user-defined parameter group. Select the
parameters that you want to add to a parameter group. Drag and drop
the selected parameters into a parameter group in the filter tree.
A parameter can belong to multiple groups.

■

Remove parameters from a group. Select the parameters you want to
remove. Right-click the selected parameters and choose Remove from
Group Filter.

Quick Reference
Commands
PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
-PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.

Organize Parameters into Groups | 911

PARAMETERSCLOSE
Closes the Parameters Manager palette.

912 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry

Part 7: Define and
Reference Blocks

913

914

Work with Blocks

A block is one or more objects combined to create a single object. Blocks help you reuse objects
in the same drawing or in other drawings.

Overview of Blocks
How Blocks Are Stored and Referenced
Every drawing file has a block definition table that stores all block definitions,
which consist of all information associated with the block. It is these block
definitions that are referenced when you insert blocks in your drawing.
Each rectangle below represents a separate drawing file and is divided into two
parts:
■

The block definition table

■

The objects in the drawing

915

When you insert a block you are inserting a block reference. The information
is not copied from the block definition to the drawing area. Instead, a link is
established between the block reference and the block definition. Therefore,
if the block definition is changed, all references are updated automatically.
Use PURGE to remove unused block definitions from a drawing.

Blocks and Layers
A block can be composed of objects drawn on several layers with various
colors, linetypes, and lineweight properties. Although a block is always inserted
on the current layer, the block reference preserves information about the
original layer, color, and linetype properties of the objects that are contained
in the block. You can control whether objects in a block retain their original
properties or inherit their properties from the current layer, color, linetype,
or lineweight settings.

Annotative Blocks
You can also create annotative on page 2289 blocks. For more information about
creating and working with an annotative blocks, see Create Annotative Blocks
and Attributes on page 1346.
See also:
■

Scale Annotations on page 1324

■

Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes on page 1346

Quick Reference
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.
PURGE
Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.
WBLOCK
Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file.
MAXSORT
Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block names sorted by listing
commands.

916 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks

Insert Blocks
When you insert a block, you create a block reference and specify its location,
scale, and rotation.

Scale Block References
You can specify the scale of a block reference using different X, Y, and Z values.

A block that uses different drawing units than the units specified for the
drawing is automatically scaled by a factor equivalent to the ratio between
the two units.

Edit Custom Properties and Attribute Values
If you insert a block reference that includes editable custom properties or
attributes, you can change the values of these custom properties and attributes
in the Properties palette while you insert the block. The block’s custom
properties and attributes become editable in the Properties palette after the
block is specified in one of the following ways:
■

In the Insert dialog box after clicking OK.

■

Using the -INSERT command after entering the block name.

■

Clicking a block tool on a tool palette.

Insert a Drawing File as a Block
When you insert an entire drawing file into another drawing, the drawing
information is copied into the block table of the current drawing as a block
definition. Subsequent insertions reference the block definition with different
position, scale, and rotation settings, as shown in the following illustration.

Insert Blocks | 917

Xrefs contained in a drawing you insert may not be displayed properly unless
the xref was previously inserted or attached to the destination drawing.

Insert Blocks from Tool Palettes
You can insert blocks from tool palettes by dragging the block tool into the
drawing or by clicking the block tool and then specifying an insertion point.
You can choose to be prompted for a rotation angle (starting from 0) when
you click and place the block. When you select this option, the angle that is
specified under Rotation in the Tool Properties dialog box is ignored. The
prompt for a rotation angle is not shown if you drag the block or xref or, if at
the initial insertion Command prompt, you enter rotate.
Blocks that are placed by dragging from a tool palette must often be rotated
or scaled after they are placed. You can use object snaps when dragging blocks
from a tool palette; however, grid snap is suppressed during dragging.
When a block is dragged from a tool palette into a drawing, it is scaled
automatically according to the ratio of units defined in the block and defined
in the current drawing. For example, if the current drawing uses meters as its
units and a block is defined using centimeters as its units, the ratio of the
units is 1 m/100 cm. When the block is dragged into the drawing, it is inserted
at 1/100 scale.
NOTE In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, the Source Content Units
and Target Drawing Units settings are used when Drag-and-Drop Scale is set to
Unitless, either in the source block or target drawing.

Insert Blocks from Block Libraries
You can insert one or more block definitions from an existing drawing file
into your current drawing file. Choose this method when retrieving blocks

918 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks

from block library drawings. A block library drawing contains block definitions
of symbols with similar functions. These block definitions are stored together
in a single drawing file for easy accessibility and management.

Insert Blocks with DesignCenter
Use DesignCenter to insert blocks from the current drawing or from another
drawing. Drag and drop the block names for quick placement. Double-click
the block names to specify the precise location, rotation, and scale of the
blocks.
See also:
■

Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks on page 931

■

Overview of Blocks on page 915

■

Create Block Libraries on page 937

■

Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings on page 922

■

Add Text and Blocks to Tables on page 1514

■

Add Content with DesignCenter on page 91

■

Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images on page 62

To insert a block defined in the current drawing

1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Insert.
2 In the Insert dialog box, in the Name box, select a name from a list of
block definitions.
3 If you want to use the pointing device to specify the insertion point,
scale, and rotation, select Specify On-Screen. Otherwise, enter values in
the Insertion Point, Scale, and Rotation boxes.

Insert Blocks | 919

4 If you want the objects in the block to be inserted as individual objects
instead of as a single block, select Explode.
5 Click OK.

To insert a drawing file as a block by dragging
1 From Windows Explorer or any folder, drag the drawing file icon into
the drawing area.
When you release the button, you are prompted for an insertion point.
2 Specify the insertion point and scale and rotation values.

To insert a block using DesignCenter
1 If DesignCenter is not already open, click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤
DesignCenter.
2 Do one of the following to list the content you want to insert:
■

On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Tree View Toggle. Click the folder
that contains the drawing you want to insert.

■

Click the icon of a drawing file displayed in the tree view.

3 Do one of the following to insert the content:
■

Drag the drawing file or block into your current drawing. Use this
option when you want to insert blocks quickly and move or rotate
the blocks to their precise locations later.

■

Double-click the drawing file or block that you want to insert into
your current drawing. Use this option when you want to specify the
exact placement, rotation, and scale of the block as you insert it. Use
this option also when you want to update a block reference in your
drawing from the original source drawing file.

To change properties of a block as you insert it
1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Insert.
3 In the Insert dialog box, in the Name box, select a name from a list of
block definitions.

920 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks

4 Select Specify On-Screen to use the pointing device to specify one or more
of the following:
■

Insertion Point

■

Scale

■

Rotation

5 Click OK.
6 In the Properties palette, change the properties of the block (or dynamic
block).

Quick Reference
ADCENTER
Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.
DIVIDE
Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter
of an object.
INSERT
Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
MEASURE
Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or
perimeter of an object.
ATTDIA
Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value
entry.
INSNAME
Sets a default block name for the INSERT command.
INSUNITS
Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or
xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing.
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE
Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.

Insert Blocks | 921

INSUNITSDEFTARGET
Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.

Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings
A dynamic block reference can be changed in a drawing while you work.

Overview of Dynamic Blocks
Dynamic block references contain grips or custom properties that change the
way the reference is displayed in the drawing after it is inserted. For example,
a dynamic block reference of a door can change size after you insert the block
reference into your drawing. Dynamic blocks allow you to insert one block
that can change shape, size, or configuration, instead of inserting one of many
static block definitions.

Work with Action Parameters
Dynamic blocks that contain action parameters display grips that are associated
with a point, object, or region in the block definition. When you edit the grip,
an associated action is triggered that changes the way the block reference is
displayed.
You can hover over a grip to display a tooltip or prompt that explains the
parameter related to the grip. The display of the tooltip is controlled by the
GRIPTIPS system variable.

922 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks

Some dynamic blocks are defined so that geometry within the block can only
be edited to certain sizes specified in the block definition. When you use a
grip to edit the block reference, tick marks are displayed at the locations of
valid values for the block reference. If you change a block property value to
a value other than one specified in the definition, the parameter will adjust
to the closest valid value.

Quick Reference
ATTSYNC
Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified
block definition.
INSERT
Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
RESETBLOCK
Resets one or more dynamic block references to the default values of the
block definition.
BTMARKDISPLAY
Controls whether or not value set markers are displayed for dynamic block
references.
GRIPTIPS
Controls the display of grip tips when the cursor hovers over grips on dynamic
blocks and custom objects that support grip tips.

Work With Action Parameters in Blocks
Use grips or the Properties palette to manipulate a block reference that contains
action parameters.

Use Grips to Change Blocks Containing Action Parameters
You can manipulate a block that contains action parameters with custom
grips. For example, when you drag the grip on the chair in the block reference
below, the chair moves.

Work With Action Parameters in Blocks | 923

The following table shows the different types of custom grips that can be
included in a dynamic block.
Grip Type

How the Grip Can Be Manipulated in a Drawing

Standard

Within a plane in any direction

Linear

Back and forth in a defined direction or along an axis

Rotation

Around an axis

Flip

Clicked to flip the dynamic block reference

Alignment

Within a plane in any direction; when moved over an
object, triggers the block reference to align with the object

Lookup

Clicked to display a list of items

Work with Custom Properties
When you select a dynamic block reference, custom properties are listed in
the Properties palette under Custom. When you change the value of the custom
property, the block reference is updated accordingly.

924 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks

Work With Lookup Grips
A block reference that contains a lookup grip allows you to specify a preset
value that changes the way the block reference is displayed. The new size is
displayed in the Properties palette under Custom.

Control Visibility of Block References
A block definition can contain a visibility state grip, which determines several
graphical representations of the same block reference.

Work With Action Parameters in Blocks | 925

Reset a Block to Display Default Geometry
When you reset a block reference, the block changes back to the default
specified in the block definition. For example, you can make a block dynamic
again if you non-uniformly scale or explode a dynamic block reference.

Quick Reference
RESETBLOCK
Resets one or more dynamic block references to the default values of the
block definition.
GRIPDYNCOLOR
Controls the color of custom grips for dynamic blocks.

Work With Constraint Parameters in Blocks
Use the Parameters Manager to manipulate a block reference that contains
constraint parameters.
Constraint parameters are authored with mathematical expressions that affect
the geometry of the block reference. They display dynamic, editable custom
properties that can be manipulated outside of the Block Editor, similar to
action parameters.

block reference with constraint (gray) and constraint
parameter (blue, with grip)

When you select a block reference that contains constraint parameters, the
editable parameters are listed in the Parameters Manager. When you change
the value of the parameter, the block reference is updated accordingly.

926 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks

Quick Reference
PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.

Remove Block Definitions
To reduce the size of a drawing, you can remove unused block definitions.
You can remove a block reference from your drawing by erasing it; however,
the block definition remains in the drawing's block definition table.
To remove unused block definitions and decrease the drawing size, use PURGE
at any time in your drawing session.
All references to a block must be erased before you can purge the block
definition.
See also:
■

Overview of Blocks on page 915

To remove a block definition

1 Click File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Purge.
The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of named objects that can be
purged.
2 To purge blocks, use one of the following methods:
■

To purge all unreferenced blocks, select Blocks. To include nested
blocks, select Purge Nested Items.

■

To purge specific blocks, double-click Blocks to expand the Block tree
view. Select the blocks to be purged.

Remove Block Definitions | 927

To confirm the purging of each item, respond to the prompt by choosing
Yes or No, or Yes to All if more than one item is selected.
5 Select more items to purge, or click Close.

Quick Reference
PURGE
Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.

928 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks

Create and Modify Blocks

A block definition is a set of objects that are grouped together as one named object with a
base point and unique properties.

Define Blocks
You create blocks by associating objects and giving them a name.

Create Blocks Within a Drawing
After you define a block in a drawing, you can insert a block reference in the
drawing as many times as necessary. Use this method to create blocks quickly.
Each block definition includes a block name, one or more objects, the coordinate
values of the base point to be used for inserting the block, and any associated
attribute data.
The base point is used as a reference for positioning the block when you insert
it. Suppose you specify that the base point is at the lower-left corner of an object
in the block. Later, when you insert the block, you are prompted for an insertion
point. The block base point is aligned at the insertion point you specified.
The block definition in the illustration comprises a name, PLUG_VALVE, four
lines, and a base point at the intersection of the two diagonal lines. For an
explanation of the schematic representation shown, see Overview of Blocks on
page 915.

929

The illustration shows a typical sequence for creating a block definition within
a drawing.

You can also use the Block Editor to create blocks that are saved within a
drawing.
See also:
■

Overview of Blocks on page 915

■

Overview of the Block Editor on page 968

To define a block for the current drawing
1 Create the objects you want to use in the block definition.

2 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create.
3 In the Block Definition dialog box, enter a block name in the Name box.
4 Under Objects, select Convert to Block.
If you want the original objects used to create the block definition to
remain in your drawing, make sure the Delete option is not selected. If

930 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

this option is selected, the original objects are erased from the drawing.
If necessary, you can use OOPS to restore them.
5 Click Select Objects.
6 Use your pointing device to select the objects to be included in the block
definition. Press Enter to complete object selection.
7 In the Block Definition dialog box under Base Point, specify the block
insertion point using one of these methods.
■

Click Pick Point to specify a point using the pointing device.

■

Enter the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the point.

8 In the Description box, enter a description for the block definition. This
description is displayed in DesignCenter™ (ADCENTER).
9 Click OK.
The block is defined in the current drawing and can be inserted at any
time.

Quick Reference
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.

Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks
You can create drawing files for the purpose of inserting them into other
drawings as blocks. Individual drawing files are easy to create and manage as
the source of block definitions. Collections of symbols can be stored as
individual drawing files and grouped in folders.

Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks | 931

Create a New Drawing File
You have two methods for creating drawing files:
■

Create and save a complete drawing file using SAVE or SAVEAS.

■

Create and save only selected objects from your current drawing to a new
drawing using EXPORT or WBLOCK.

With either method, you create an ordinary drawing file that can be inserted
as a block into any other drawing file. Using WBLOCK is recommended when
you need to create several versions of a symbol as separate drawing files, or
when you want to create a drawing file without leaving the current drawing.

Change the Base Point of Drawings to Be Used as Blocks
By default, the WCS (world coordinate system) origin (0,0,0) is used as the
base point for drawing files inserted as blocks. You can change the base point
by opening the original drawing and using BASE to specify a different base
point for insertion. The next time you insert the block, the new base point is
used.

Update Changes in the Original Drawing
If you change the original drawing after inserting it, the changes have no
effect on the current drawing. If you expect the original drawing to change,
and you want the changes to be reflected in the current drawing, you may
want to attach it as an external reference instead of inserting it as a block. For
more information about external references, see Reference Other Drawing
Files on page 1771.

Use Paper Space Objects in Blocks
Objects in paper space are not included when you insert a drawing as a block.
To transfer paper space objects to another drawing, make the objects into a
block or save them in a separate drawing file, and then insert the block or
drawing file into the other drawing.

To create a new drawing file from selected objects
1 Open an existing drawing or create a new drawing.
2 At the Command prompt, enter wblock.
3 In the Write Block dialog box, select Objects.

932 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

If you want the original objects used to create the new drawing to remain
in your drawing, make sure the Delete From Drawing option is not
selected. If this option is selected, the original objects are erased from the
drawing. If necessary, you can use OOPS to restore them.
4 Click Select Objects.
5 Use your pointing device to select the objects to be included in the new
drawing. Press Enter to complete object selection.
6 In the Write Block dialog box under Base Point, specify the point to be
the origin point (0,0,0) for the new drawing using one of these methods:
■

Click Specify Point to specify a point using the pointing device.

■

Enter the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the point.

7 Under Destination, enter a file name and path for the new drawing, or
click the [...] button to display a standard file selection dialog box.
8 Click OK.
A new drawing is created with the selected objects.

To create a new drawing file from an existing block definition

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create.
2 In the Block Definition dialog box, in the Name box, select the block to
modify.
3 In the Name box, enter a new name.
4 In the Description box, enter or modify the description for the new
drawing file. Click OK.

Quick Reference
ADCENTER
Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.
BASE
Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing.

Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks | 933

BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.
EXPORT
Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format.
INSERT
Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
OOPS
Restores erased objects.
WBLOCK
Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file.

Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks
Assign Color and Linetype Properties
Generally when you insert a block, the color, linetype, and lineweight of
objects in the block retain their original settings regardless of the current
settings in the drawing. However, you can create blocks with objects that
inherit the current color, linetype, and lineweight settings. These objects have
floating properties.
You have three choices for how the color, linetype, and lineweight properties
of objects are treated when a block reference is inserted.
■

Objects in the block do not inherit color, linetype, and lineweight
properties from the current settings. The properties of objects in the block
do not change regardless of the current settings.
For this choice, it is recommended that you set the color, linetype, and
lineweight properties individually for each object in the block definition:
do not use BYBLOCK or BYLAYER color, linetype, and lineweight settings
when creating these objects.

■

Objects in the block inherit color, linetype, and lineweight properties from
the color, linetype, and lineweight assigned to the current layer only.
For this choice, before you create objects to be included in the block
definition, set the current layer to 0, and set the current color, linetype,
and lineweight to BYLAYER.

934 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

■

Objects inherit color, linetype, and lineweight properties from the current
color, linetype, and lineweight that you have set explicitly, that is, that
you have set to override the color, linetype, or lineweight assigned to the
current layer. If you have not explicitly set them, then these properties are
inherited from the color, linetype, and lineweight assigned to the current
layer.
For this choice, before you create objects to be included in the block
definition, set the current color or linetype to BYBLOCK.

If you want objects in a Create objects on these Create objects with
block to
layers
these properties
Retain original properties

Any but 0 (zero)

Any but BYBLOCK or
BYLAYER

Inherit properties from the
current layer

0 (zero)

BYLAYER

Inherit individual properties
first, then layer properties

Any

BYBLOCK

Floating properties also apply to nested blocks when the nested block references
and the objects they contain use the settings required for floating properties.

Change the Color and Linetype in a Block
You can change the color and linetype of the objects within a block only if
the objects in that block were created with floating properties.
If a block was not created using objects with floating color and linetype
properties, the only way to change these properties is to redefine the block.
See also:
■

Control the Properties of Objects on page 507

Quick Reference
COLOR
Sets the color for new objects.
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.

Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks | 935

LINETYPE
Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Nest Blocks

The only restriction on nested blocks is that you cannot insert blocks that
reference themselves.
You can apply geometric constraints and constraint parameters to nested
objects in blocks. AutoCAD detects the nested entity or valid constraint point
for the nested entity regardless of the nesting level of the object.
NOTE Constraints can only be applied between nested objects in the block and
objects in the drawing file, not between pairs of nested objects in the block
reference.
When a block definition is redefined, AutoCAD will re-evaluate the constraints
between geometry in the drawing and the nested geometry in the block
references. The drawing will then be updated appropriately. If a constraint
cannot be resolved as a result of the change to the block definition, then the
constraint is removed and an unresolved constraints message is displayed at
the command line.

936 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

See also:
■

Overview of Blocks on page 915

■

Add Constraints to Dynamic Blocks on page 976

Quick Reference
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.

Create Block Libraries
A block library is a collection of block definitions stored in a single drawing
file. You can use block libraries supplied by Autodesk or other vendors or
create your own.
You can organize a set of related block definitions by creating the blocks in
the same drawing file. Drawing files used this way are called block, or symbol,
libraries. These block definitions can be inserted individually into any drawing
that you are working on. Block library drawings are not different from other
drawing files except in how they are used.
When you use BLOCK to define each block definition in the block library
drawing, you can include a short description of the block.
Optionally, you can also document each block definition by inserting it in
the drawing area of the library drawing. In addition to the block geometry,
you can include text that provides the block name, the date of creation, the
date of the last modification, and any special instructions or conventions.
This creates a visual index of the blocks in the block library drawing.

Use DesignCenter to view and copy block definitions individually from block
library drawings (or from any existing drawing) to your current drawing.
DesignCenter does not overwrite an existing block definition in a drawing
with one that comes from another drawing.

Create Block Libraries | 937

To create a block library drawing
1 Begin a new drawing.
2 Define a block.
3 Repeat step 2 for as many related block definitions as you want to make.
4 Save the drawing using a name appropriate for a library drawing.
These blocks can be inserted into any drawing using DesignCenter
(ADCENTER).

Quick Reference
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.

Use Tool Palettes to Organize Blocks
You can use tool palettes to organize blocks that are stored in one drawing
file or separate drawing files.
Once you've added a block tool to a tool palette, you can insert the block
reference by dragging it from the tool palette to the drawing or by clicking
and placing it in the drawing. For information about using tool palettes to
organize and insert blocks, see Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images
on page 62.

Quick Reference
TOOLPALETTES
Opens the Tool Palettes window.

Create Construction Geometry Within a Block
You can convert objects to construction geometry in the Block Editor.
You can create construction geometry that will display within the Block Editor,
but not in the drawing editor.
In the example below, a symmetric constraint has been added to the block
definition on the left. However, you may not want the line of symmetry to

938 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

be displayed when the block is inserted into your drawing. In the example on
the right, the line of symmetry has been converted to a dashed line that will
not display when the block is inserted into a drawing.

You can add construction geometry (BCONSTRUCTION command) to the
selection sets of legacy actions. The construction geometry is not affected by
the visibility states. It is filtered from the selection set in the BVSTATE
command when you add or remove geometry from a visibility state.
NOTE When you explode a block containing construction geometry in previous
versions of AutoCAD, the geometry is hidden in the drawing.
See also:
■

Draw Construction and Reference Geometry on page 730

■

Add Constraints to Geometry on page 865

Quick Reference
BCONSTRUCTION
Converts geometry into construction geometry.
BVSTATE
Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block.
BLOCKTESTWINDOW
Indicates whether or not a test block window is current.

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)
You can attach information to blocks and later extract the information to
create a bill of materials or other report.

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) | 939

Overview of Block Attributes
An attribute is a label or tag that attaches data to a block. Examples of data
that might be contained in an attribute are part numbers, prices, comments,
and owners' names. The tag is equivalent to a column name in a database
table. The following illustration shows a block with four attributes: type,
manufacturer, model, and cost.

The attributes in the illustration are single-line attributes. You can also create
multiple-line attributes to store data such as addresses and descriptions.
Attribute information extracted from a drawing can be used in a spreadsheet
or database to produce a parts list or a bill of materials. You can associate more
than one attribute with a block, provided that each attribute has a different
tag.
Attributes also can be "invisible." An invisible attribute is not displayed or
plotted; however, the attribute information is stored in the drawing file and
can be written to an extraction file for use in a database program.
Whenever you insert a block that has a variable attribute, you are prompted
to enter data to be stored with the block. Blocks can also use constant
attributes, attributes whose values do not change. Constant attributes do not
prompt you for a value when you insert the block.
You can also create annotative on page 2289 attributes. For more information
about creating and working with an annotative attributes, see Create
Annotative Blocks and Attributes on page 1346.
See also:
■

Modify a Block Attribute Definition on page 957

940 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

■

Modify the Data in Block Attributes on page 956

■

Scale Annotations on page 1324

Quick Reference
ATTDEF
Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block.
ATTDISP
Controls the visibility overrides for all block attributes in a drawing.
ATTEDIT
Changes attribute information in a block.
ATTIPEDIT
Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block.
DDEDIT
Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control
frames.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
AFLAGS
Sets options for attributes.
ATTDIA
Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value
entry.
ATTIPE
Controls the which Text Formatting toolbar is used with the in-place editor
for modifying multiline attributes.
ATTMODE
Controls display of attributes.
ATTMULTI
Controls whether multiline attributes can be created.

Overview of Block Attributes | 941

ATTREQ
Controls whether INSERT uses default attribute settings during insertion of
blocks.

Define Block Attributes
The characteristics include the tag, which is a name that identifies the attribute,
the prompt displayed when you insert the block, value information, text
formatting, location within the block, and any optional modes (Invisible,
Constant, Verify, Preset, Lock Position, and Multiple Lines).
If you plan to extract the attribute information for use in a parts list, you may
want to keep a list of the attribute tags you have created. You will need this
tag information later when you create the attribute template file.

Choose Attribute Modes
Attribute modes control the behavior of attributes in blocks. For example, you
can control
■

Whether an attribute is visible or invisible in the drawing

■

Whether an attribute has a constant value, such as a part number

■

Whether the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block

■

Whether the attribute is a single-line attribute or a multiple-line attribute

If an attribute has a constant value, you will not be prompted for its value
when you insert the block. If an attribute has a variable value, such as the
asset number of a computer, you will be prompted when you insert the block.

Understand Single-Line and Multiple-Line Attributes
There are several differences between single-line and multiple-line attributes.
■

Single-line attributes are limited to 255 characters from the user interface.

■

Multiple-line attributes provide more formatting options than single-line
attributes.

■

When editing single-line and multiple line attributes, different editors are
displayed.

■

Multiple line attributes display four grips similar to MTEXT objects, while
single-line attributes display only one grip.

942 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

■

When a drawing is saved to AutoCAD 2007 or earlier, a multiple-line
attribute is converted to several single-line attributes, one for every line of
text in the original multiple-line attribute. If the drawing file is opened in
the current release, these single line attributes are automatically merged
back into a multiple-line attribute.

NOTE If a multiple-line attribute makes a round trip to an earlier release, the
differences between these two types of attributes might result in truncating very
long lines of text and loss of formatting. However, before any characters are
truncated, AutoCAD displays a message box that lets you cancel the operation.

Correct Mistakes in Block Attribute Definitions
If you make a mistake, you can use the Properties palette or DDEDIT to make
limited changes to an attribute definition before it is associated with a block.
If you need to make more extensive changes, delete the attribute definition
and create a new one.

Attach Attributes to Blocks
After you create one or more attribute definitions, you attach the attributes
to a block when you define or redefine that block. When you are prompted
to select the objects to include in the block definition, include in the selection
set any attributes you want to attach to the block.
To use several attributes together, define them and then include them in the
same block. For example, you can define attributes tagged "Type,"
"Manufacturer," “Model,” and “Cost,” and then include them in a block called
CHAIR.

Usually, the order of the attribute prompts is the same as the order in which
you selected the attributes when you created the block. However, if you used
crossing or window selection to select the attributes, the order of the prompts
is the reverse of the order in which you created attributes. You can use the
Block Attribute Manager to change the order in which you are prompted for
attribute information when you insert the block reference.

Define Block Attributes | 943

When you open a block definition in the Block Editor, you can use the
Attribute Order dialog box (BATTORDER command) to change the order in
which you are prompted for attribute information when you insert the block
reference.

Use Attributes Without Attaching Them to Blocks
Stand-alone attributes can also be created. Once attributes have been defined,
and the drawing is saved, this drawing file can be inserted into another
drawing. When the drawing is inserted, you are prompted for the attribute
values.

To create an attribute definition

1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Define Attributes.
2 In the Attribute Definition dialog box, set the attribute modes and enter
tag information, location, and text options.
3 (Optional) Under Text Settings, Boundary Width, specify a value.
4 (Optional) Click the Multiline In-Place Text Editor button to use the
in-place text editor to format the attribute in the drawing.
5 Click OK.
After creating the attribute definition, you can select it as an object while
creating a block definition. If the attribute definition is incorporated into
a block, whenever you insert the block, you are prompted with the text
string you specified for the attribute. Each subsequent instance of the
block can have a different value specified for the attribute.

To edit an attribute definition before it is associated with a block

1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Text.
2 Select the attribute to edit.
3 In the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box, specify the attribute tag,
prompt, and default value. Then click OK.

944 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

To change the prompt order of attribute definitions

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 In the Block Editor, select a block attribute.
3 Right-click in the Block Editor drawing area.
4 Click Attribute Order.
5 In the Attribute Order dialog box, select an attribute definition.
6 Click Move Up or Move Down to change the prompt order of the attribute
definitions.
7 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the attribute definition list is in the desired
order.
8 Click OK.

Quick Reference
ATTDEF
Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block.
ATTDISP
Controls the visibility overrides for all block attributes in a drawing.
BATTORDER
Specifies the order of attributes for a block.
DDEDIT
Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control
frames.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
AFLAGS
Sets options for attributes.

Define Block Attributes | 945

ATTIPE
Controls the which Text Formatting toolbar is used with the in-place editor
for modifying multiline attributes.
ATTMULTI
Controls whether multiline attributes can be created.

Extract Data from Block Attributes
Extracting attribute information is an easy way to produce a schedule or bill
of materials directly from your drawing data. For example, a facilities drawing
might contain blocks representing office equipment. If each block has attributes
identifying the model and manufacturer of the equipment, you can generate
a report that estimates the cost of the equipment.
The Data Extraction wizard guides you through selecting drawings, block
instances, and attributes. The wizard can also create a file with a .dxe file
extension that contains all the settings for later reuse.

Output to a Table
If you extract attribute data to a table, the table is inserted in the current
drawing and current space (model space or paper space) and on the current
layer.
When you update the table, the attribute information is extracted again and
the data rows in the table are replaced. If you have included a title row or one
or more header rows in the table, they are not replaced during the update.
NOTE For access to shortcut menus in the drawing area that are needed for editing
and updating tables, the Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area must be checked in the
Options dialog box, User Preferences tab.

Output to a File
If you save the data to an external file, the comma-separated (CSV),
tab-separated (TXT), Microsoft Excel (XLS), and Microsoft Access (MDB) file
formats are available.
When the characters period (.), comma (,), or pound sign (#) are written to
an Excel or Access file, they are replaced with their Unicode representation.

946 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

See also:
■

Extract Data from Drawings and Spreadsheets on page 1969

Quick Reference
DATAEXTRACTION
Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data
extraction table or external file.
DXEVAL
Controls when data extraction tables are compared against the data source,
and if the data is not current, displays an update notification.

Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced)
You can extract attribute information from a drawing and create a separate
text file for use with database software. This feature is useful for creating parts
lists with information already entered in the drawing database. Extracting
attribute information does not affect the drawing.
To create a parts list
■

Create and edit an attribute definition

■

Enter values for the attributes as you insert the blocks

■

Create a template file and then extract attribute information to a text file

To extract attribute information, you first create an attribute template file
using any text processor, then generate the attribute extraction file using
AutoCAD, and, finally, open the attribute extraction file in a database
application. If you plan to extract the attribute information to a DXF (drawing
interchange format) file, it is not necessary to first create an attribute template
file.
NOTE Make sure that the attribute extraction file does not have the same name
as the attribute template file.

Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) | 947

Create an Attribute Extraction Template File
Before you extract attribute information, you must create an ASCII template
file to define the structure of the file that will contain the extracted attribute
information. The template file contains information about the tag name, data
type, field length, and number of decimal places associated with the
information you want to extract.
Each field in the template file extracts information from the block references
in the drawing. Each line in the template file specifies one field to be written
to the attribute extraction file, including the name of the field, its character
width, and its numerical precision. Each record in the attribute extraction file
includes all the specified fields in the order given by the template file.
The following template file includes the 15 possible fields. N means numeric,
C means character, www means a 3 digit number for the total width of the
field, and ddd means a 3 digit number representing how many numeric decimal
places are to be displayed to the right of the decimal point.
BL:NAME Cwww000 (Block name)
BL:LEVEL Nwww000 (Block nesting level)
BL:X Nwwwddd(X coordinate of block insertion point)
BL:Y Nwwwddd(Y coordinate of block insertion point)
BL:Z Nwwwddd(Z coordinate of block insertion point)
BL:NUMBER Nwww000 (Block counter; the same for MINSERT)
BL:HANDLE Cwww000 (Block handle; the same for MINSERT)
BL:LAYER Cwww000 (Block insertion layer name)
BL:ORIENT Nwwwddd(Block rotation angle)
BL:XSCALE Nwwwddd(X scale factor)
BL:YSCALE Nwwwddd(Y scale factor)
BL:ZSCALE Nwwwddd(Z scale factor)
BL:XEXTRUDE Nwwwddd(X component of block extrusion direction)
BL:YEXTRUDE Nwwwddd(Y component of block extrusion direction)
BL:ZEXTRUDE Nwwwddd(Z component of block extrusion direction)
numericNwwwddd (Numeric attribute tag)
characterCwww000 (Character attribute tag)
The template file can include any or all of the BL:xxxxxxx field names listed,
but must include at least one attribute tag field. The attribute tag fields
determine which attributes, hence which blocks, are included in the attribute
extraction file. If a block contains some, but not all, of the specified attributes,
the values for the absent ones are filled with blanks or zeros, depending on
whether the field is a character field or a numeric field.
Comments should not be included in an attribute template file.

948 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

The illustration and table show an example of the type of information you're
likely to extract, including block name, manufacturer, model number, and
cost.

Field

(C)haracter or
(N)umeric data

Maximum field
length

Decimal places

Block name

040

000

Manufacturer

006

000

Model

015

000

Cost

006

002

You can create any number of template files, depending on how you'll use
the data. Each line of a template file specifies one field to be written in the
attribute extraction file.
Follow these additional guidelines:
■

Be sure to place a space between the attribute tag and the character or
numeric data. Use Spacebar, not Tab, to enter the space.

■

Press Enter at the end of each line, including the last line.

■

Each attribute extraction template file must include at least one attribute
tag field, but the same field can appear only once in the file.

The following is a sample template file.
BL:NAME C008000 (Block name, 8 characters)
BL:X N007001 (X coordinate, format nnnnnn.d)
BL:Y N007001 (Y coordinate, format nnnnnn.d)
SUPPLIER C016000 (Manufacturer's name, 16 characters)
MODEL C009000 (Model number, 9 characters)

Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) | 949

PRICE N009002 (Unit price, format nnnnnnnn.dd)
NOTE The format code for a numeric field includes the decimal point in the total
field width. For example, the minimum field width to accommodate the number
249.95 would be 6 and would be represented as N006002. Character fields do
not use the last three digits of the format code.

Create an Attribute Extraction File
After creating a template file, you can extract the attribute information using
one of the following formats:
■

Comma-delimited format (CDF)

■

Space-delimited format (SDF)

■

Drawing interchange format (DXF)

The CDF format produces a file containing one record for each block reference
in a drawing. A comma separates the fields of each record, and single quotation
marks enclose the character fields. Some database applications can read this
format directly.
The SDF format also produces a file containing one record for each block
reference in a drawing. The fields of each record have a fixed width and employ
neither field separators nor character-string delimiters. The dBASE III Copy .
. . SDF operation also produces SDI-format files. The Append From... SDF
operation can read a file in dBASE IV format, which user programs written in
FORTRAN can easily process.
DXF produces a subset of the drawing interchange format containing only
block reference, attribute, and end-of-sequence objects. This option requires
no attribute extraction template. The file extension .dxx distinguishes an
extraction file in DXF format from normal DXF files.

Use the Attribute Extraction File
The attribute extraction file lists values and other information for the attribute
tags you specified in the template file.
If you specified a CDF format using the sample template, the output might
appear as follows:
'DESK', 120.0, 49.5, 'ACME INDUST.', '51-793W', 379.95
'CHAIR', 122.0, 47.0, 'ACME INDUST.', '34-902A', 199.95
'DESK', -77.2, 40.0, 'TOP DRAWER INC.', 'X-52-44',249.95

950 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

By default, character fields are enclosed with single quotes (apostrophes). The
default field delimiter is a comma. The following two template records can be
used to override these defaults:
C:QUOTE c (Character string delimiter)
C:DELIM c (Field delimiter)
The first nonblank character following the C:QUOTE or C:DELIM field name
becomes the respective delimiter character. For example, if you want to enclose
character strings with double quotes, include the following line in your
attribute extraction template file:
C:QUOTE "
The quote delimiter must not be set to a character that can appear in a
character field. Similarly, the field delimiter must not be set to a character
that can appear in a numeric field.
If you specified an SDF format using the sample template, the file might be
similar to the following example.
(NAME)

(X)

(Y)

(SUPPLIER)

(MODEL)

(PRICE)

DESK

120.0

49.5

ACME INDUST.

51-793W

379.95

CHAIR

122.0

47.0

ACME INDUST.

34-902A

199.95

DESK

-77.2

40.0

TOP DRAWER
INC.

X-52-44

249.95

The order of the fields corresponds to the order of the fields in the template
files. You can use these files in other applications, such as spreadsheets, and
you can sort and manipulate the data as needed. See the documentation for
your spreadsheet program for information about how to use data from other
applications. If you open the file in a text editor or a word processor, you can
paste the information back into the drawing as text.

Nested Blocks
The line BL:LEVEL in a template file reports the nesting level of a block
reference. A block that is inserted in a drawing has a nesting level of 1. A block
reference that is part of (nested within) another block has a nesting level of
2, and so on.

Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) | 951

For a nested block reference, the X,Y, Z coordinate values, scale factors,
extrusion direction, and rotation angle reflect the actual location, size,
orientation, and rotation of the nested block in the world coordinate system.
In some complex cases, nested block references cannot be correctly represented
with only two scale factors and a rotation angle, for example, if a nested block
reference is rotated in 3D. When this happens, the scale factors and rotation
angle in the extracted file record are set to zero.

Error Handling
If a field is not wide enough for the data that is to be placed in it, the data is
truncated and the following message is displayed:
** Field overflow in record
This could happen, for example, if you have a BL:NAME field with a width of
8 characters and a block in your drawing has a name 10 characters long.

To create an attribute extraction template file
1 Start Notepad.
You can use any text editor or word processor that can save a text file in
ASCII format.
2 Enter template information in Notepad. See Extract Block Attribute Data
(Advanced) on page 947 for format information.
3 Save the file with a .txt file extension.
To extract data about a specific tag, insert the tag name in place of the
"numeric" or "character" fields.
WARNING Do not use tab characters when constructing the template file with a
word processor. If you use tab character alignment, the attribute information file
is not created. To align the columns, insert ordinary spaces by pressing SPACEBAR.
The use of tab characters may cause inconsistent alignment.

To extract attribute information
1 At the Command prompt, enter attext.
2 In the Attribute Extraction dialog box, specify the appropriate file format:
CDF, SDF, or DXF.
3 Specify the objects to extract attributes from by choosing Select Objects.
You can select a single block or multiple blocks in the drawing.

952 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

4 Specify the attribute template file to use by entering the file name or by
choosing Template File and browsing.
5 Specify the output attribute information file by entering the file name
or by choosing Output File and browsing.
6 Click OK.

Quick Reference
ATTEXT
Extracts attribute data, informational text associated with a block, into a file.
DATAEXTRACTION
Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data
extraction table or external file.

Modify Blocks
You can modify a block definition or a block reference already inserted in the
drawing.

Modify a Block Definition
You can redefine block definitions in your current drawing. Redefining a block
definition affects both previous and future insertions of the block in the current
drawing and any associated attributes.
There are two methods for redefining a block definition:
■

Modify the block definition in the current drawing.

■

Modify the block definition in the source drawing and reinsert it into the
current drawing.

The method you choose depends on whether you want to make changes in
the current drawing only or in a source drawing also.

Modify a Block Definition in the Current Drawing
To modify a block definition, follow the procedure to create a new block
definition, but enter the name of the existing block definition. This replaces

Modify Blocks | 953

the existing block definition, and all the references to that block in the drawing
are immediately updated to reflect the new definition.
To save time, you can insert and explode an instance of the original block
and then use the resulting objects in creating the new block definition.

Update a Block Definition That Originated from a Drawing File
Block definitions created in your current drawing by inserting a drawing file
are not updated automatically when the original drawing is modified. You
can use INSERT to update a block definition from the drawing file.

Update a Block Definition That Originated from a Library Drawing
(Advanced)
DesignCenter does not overwrite an existing block definition in a drawing
with one that comes from another drawing. To update a block definition that
came from a library drawing, use WBLOCK to create a separate drawing file
from the library drawing block. Then, use INSERT to overwrite the block
definition in the drawing that uses the block.
NOTE Block descriptions are stripped off when using INSERT. Use the Clipboard
to copy and paste a block description displayed in the Block Definition dialog box
from one block definition to another.

Modify the Description of a Block
To modify the DesignCenter description of a block definition, use BLOCK.
You can also add descriptions to any number of existing blocks in the Block
Definition dialog box.

Redefine Block Attributes
You can attach attributes to a block when you define or redefine that block.
When you are prompted to select the objects to include in the block definition,
include the desired attributes in the selection set. Redefining the attributes in
the block definition has the following effects on block references that were
previously inserted:
■

Constant attributes, which have a fixed value, are lost and replaced by any
new constant attributes.

■

Variable attributes remain unchanged, even if the new block definition
has no attributes.

■

New attributes do not appear in the existing block references.

954 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

See also:
■

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) on page 939

■

Modify Dynamic Block Definitions on page 974

To modify an existing block definition
1 Select the block to modify.
2 Right-click the block and click Properties on the shortcut menu.
3 In the Properties palette, select and modify X and Y position, scale, rotation
values, or other properties.

To update a block definition that originated from a drawing file
1 If DesignCenter is not already open, click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤
DesignCenter.
2 In the tree view, click the folder that contains the drawing file from which
the block originated.
3 In the content area (on the right side), right-click the drawing file.
4 On the shortcut menu, click Insert as Block.
5 In the Insert dialog box, click OK.
6 In the Block - Redefine Block dialog box, click Redefine Block.
7 Press ESC to exit the command.

To modify a block description
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Block Description.
2 In the Block Definition dialog box, in the Name list, select the block for
which you want to modify the block description.
3 In the Description box, enter or modify the description of the block.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Block - Redefine Block dialog box, click Redefine Block.

Modify a Block Definition | 955

Quick Reference
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.
EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Modify the Data in Block Attributes
You can use any of the following methods to edit the values of attributes
attached to a block:
■

Double-click the block to display the Enhanced Attributes Editor

■

Press Ctrl and double-click the attribute to display the in-place editor

■

Open the Properties palette and select the block

You can also change the location of attributes in a block using grips. With
multiple-line attributes, you can also move grips to resize the width of the
text.
NOTE If you press Ctrl and double-click an attribute that includes a hyperlink, the
hyperlink opens the web page. To edit the attribute, use one of the other methods
listed.
See also:
■

Modify a Block Definition on page 953

To edit attribute data

1 Click Modify menu ➤ Objects ➤ Attribute ➤ Single.
2 Select the block to edit.
3 In the Edit Attributes dialog box, retype the attribute information as
necessary and click OK.

956 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

Quick Reference
ATTEDIT
Changes attribute information in a block.
ATTIPEDIT
Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block.
ATTSYNC
Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified
block definition.
BATTMAN
Manages the attributes for a selected block definition.
EATTEDIT
Edits attributes in a block reference.
ATTIPE
Controls the which Text Formatting toolbar is used with the in-place editor
for modifying multiline attributes.
ATTMULTI
Controls whether multiline attributes can be created.

Modify a Block Attribute Definition
You can modify attributes in block definitions with the Block Attribute
Manager. For example, you can modify the following:
■

Properties that define how values are assigned to an attribute and whether
or not the assigned value is visible in the drawing area

■

Properties that define how attribute text is displayed in the drawing

■

Properties that define the layer that the attribute is on and the attribute
line's color, weight, and type

By default, attribute changes you make are applied to all existing block
references in the current drawing.

Modify a Block Attribute Definition | 957

Changing the attribute properties of existing block references does not affect
the values assigned to those blocks. For example, in a block containing an
attribute whose tag is Cost and value is 19.99, the 19.99 value is unaffected
if you change the tag from Cost to Unit Cost.
Updating attributes with duplicate tag names can lead to unpredictable results.
Use the Block Attribute Manager to find duplicate tags and change tag names.
If constant attributes or nested attributed blocks are affected by your changes,
use REGEN to update the display of those blocks in the drawing area.

Change the Prompt Order for Attribute Values
When you define a block, the order in which you select the attributes
determines the order in which you are prompted for attribute information
when you insert the block. You can use the Block Attribute Manager to change
the order of prompts that request attribute values.

Remove Block Attributes
You can remove attributes from block definitions and from all existing block
references in the current drawing. Attributes removed from existing block
references do not disappear in the drawing area until you regenerate the
drawing using REGEN.
You cannot remove all attributes from a block; at least one attribute must
remain. If you need to remove all attributes, redefine the block.

Update Block References
You can update attributes in all block references in the current drawing with
changes you made to the block definition. For example, you may have used
the Block Attribute Manager to modify attribute properties in several block
definitions in your drawing but elected not to automatically update existing
block references when you made the changes. Now that you are satisfied with
the attribute changes you made, you can apply those changes to all blocks in
the current drawing.
You can also use ATTSYNC to update attribute properties in block references
to match their block definition, or to update a block instance after you redefine
a block attribute using BLOCK, -BLOCK, or BEDIT.
Updating attribute properties in block references does not affect any values
that have been assigned to those attributes.

958 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

Edit Attributes in a Block Reference
You can select an attribute in a block reference and use the Properties palette
to change its properties, or you can use the Enhanced Attribute Editor to
modify all the attributes in a selected block reference.
See also:
■

Define Block Attributes on page 942

■

Modify a Block Definition on page 953

To edit attributes assigned to a block definition

1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes.
2 In the Block Attribute Manager, select a block from the Block list, or click
Select Block and select a block in the drawing area.
3 In the list of attributes, double-click the attribute you want to edit, or
select the attribute and click Edit.
4 In the Edit Attribute dialog box, make the attribute changes you want,
and then click OK.

To specify whether changes are applied to existing block references

1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes.
2 In the Block Attribute Manager, click Settings.
3 In the Settings dialog box, do one of the following:
■

To apply changes to existing block references, select the Apply Changes
to Existing References option.

■

To apply changes only to new block insertions, clear the Apply
Changes to Existing References option.

4 Click OK.

Modify a Block Attribute Definition | 959

To highlight duplicate attribute tags in a block

1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes.
2 In the Block Attribute Manager, click Settings.
3 In the Settings dialog box, select Emphasize Duplicate Tags.
4 Click OK.

To change the prompt order for attribute values

1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes.
2 In the Block Attribute Manager, select a block from the Block list, or click
Select Block and select a block in the drawing area.
For the selected block, attributes are listed in their prompt order.
3 To move an attribute up in the prompt order, select the attribute, and
then click Move Up; to move an attribute down in the prompt order,
select the attribute, and then click Move Down.
NOTE The Move Up and Move Down buttons are unavailable for attributes
with constant values (Mode=C).

To remove an attribute from a block definition and all block references

1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes.
2 In the Block Attribute Manager, select a block from the Block list, or click
Select Block and select a block in the drawing area.
3 (Optional) If you do not want attributes removed from existing instances
of the block, click Settings, and, in the Settings dialog box, clear Apply
Changes to Existing References.
4 In the Block Attribute Manager, select an attribute from the attribute list,
and then click Remove.
Attributes removed from existing block instances do not disappear until
you regenerate the drawing using REGEN.

960 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

To update existing block references with attributes you have modified

To update the attributes in block references for a selected block definition

1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Synchronize Attributes.
2 At the prompt, do one of the following:
■

Enter name, and then enter the name of the block whose block
references you want to update.

■

Enter ? to view a list of blocks, and then enter name, followed by the
name of the block.

■

Press Enter, and then use your pointing device to select a block in the
drawing area.

If you specify a block that does not exist, or if the block exists but does
not contain attributes, an error message is displayed.
Alternate

1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit Single Attribute.
2 In the drawing area, select the block you want to edit.
3 In the Enhanced Attribute Editor, select the attribute you want to edit.
You can change the attribute value or choose another tab and edit other
attribute properties.
4 Make the attribute changes you want, and then do one of the following:
■

Click Apply to save your changes. The Enhanced Attribute Editor
remains open.
If you click Cancel later to exit the Enhanced Attribute Editor, attribute
changes you made prior to choosing Apply are not reversed.

Modify a Block Attribute Definition | 961

■

Click OK to save your changes and close the Enhanced Attribute
Editor.

■

Click Select Block to edit the attributes of a different block. If you
made changes to the current block, but have not saved them, you are
prompted to do so before selecting a new block.

Quick Reference
ATTIPEDIT
Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block.
ATTSYNC
Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified
block definition.
BATTMAN
Manages the attributes for a selected block definition.
EATTEDIT
Edits attributes in a block reference.
ATTIPE
Controls the which Text Formatting toolbar is used with the in-place editor
for modifying multiline attributes.
ATTMULTI
Controls whether multiline attributes can be created.

Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode)
If you need to modify one or more objects within a block separately, you can
disassemble, or explode, the block reference into its component objects. After
making the changes, you can
■

Create a new block definition

■

Redefine the existing block definition

■

Leave the component objects uncombined for other uses

962 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks

When you explode a block reference, the block reference is disassembled into
its component objects; however, the block definition still exists in the drawing
for insertion later.
You can automatically explode block references as you insert them by selecting
the Explode option in the Insert dialog box.

To control properties while you explode an object
1 Enter xplode.
2 Select the objects to be exploded.
3 If you selected more than one object, enter i to control properties for
individual objects, or enter g to control properties for all the selected
objects.
4 Enter an option for a property you want to change.
The property is applied to the compound object and the prompt is
redisplayed.
5 Enter another option, or enter e to explode the selected objects.
The selected objects are exploded and the properties you specified are
applied to the component objects.

Quick Reference
EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
XPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects.

Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode) | 963

964

Add Behaviors to Blocks
(Dynamic Blocks)

Instead of being a fixed part of a drawing, a dynamic block reference can be changed or
manipulated as you work in a drawing.

Overview of Dynamic Blocks
Dynamic block definitions allow you to edit a block reference outside of the
Block Editor. They contain rules, or parameters, for how to change the
appearance of the block reference when it is inserted in the drawing.
A dynamic block reference inserts one block that can be edited in several different
ways. For example, instead of creating multiple interior door blocks of different
sizes, you can create one resizable door block.
You author dynamic blocks with either constraint parameters or action
parameters.
NOTE Using both constraint parameters and action parameters in the same block
definition is not recommended.

Constrain Block Definitions
In a block definition, constraint parameters
■

Associate objects with one another

■

Restrict geometry or demensions

Once the block is inserted into the drawing, the constraint parameters can be
edited as properties by using the Properties Manager.

965

Add Actions and Parameters to Block Definitions
In a block definition, actions and parameters provide rules for the behavior
or a block once it is inserted into the drawing.

Depending on the specified block geometry, or parameter, you can associate
an action to that parameter. The parameter is represented as a grip in the
drawing. When you edit the grip, the associated action determines what will
change in the block reference.
Just as with constraint parameters, action parameters can have editable
properties that are changed using the Properties Manager.

Quick Start to Creating Dynamic Blocks
Plan the block content.

Know how the block should change or move, and
----- what parts will depend on the others.
Example: The block will be resizable, and after it
is resized, additional geometry is displayed.

Draw the block geometry in the drawing area or
the Block Editor.
Draw the geometry.

Add parameters.

NOTE If you will use visibility states to change
----- how geometry is displayed, you may not want to
include all the geometry at this point. For more
information, see Control the Visibility of Objects
in a Block on page 1017.

Add either individual parameters or parameter
----- sets to define geometry that will be affected by
an action or manipulation. Keep in mind the
objects that will be dependent on one another.

966 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Add actions.

If you are working with action parameters on
----- page 989, if necessary, add actions to define what
will happen to the geometry when it is
manipulated.

Define custom properties.

Add properties that determine how the block is
----- displayed in the drawing area. Custom properties
affect grips, labels, and preset values for block
geometry.

Test the block.

On the ribbon, in the Block Editor contextual tab,
----- Open/Save panel, click Test Block to test the block
before you save it.

Quick Reference
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.
BTESTBLOCK
Displays a window within the Block Editor to test a dynamic block.

Create and Edit Dynamic Blocks
The Block Editor provides tools for adding dynamic behavior to block
definitions.

Create and Edit Dynamic Blocks | 967

Overview of the Block Editor
In the Block Editor, you can
■

Define a block

■

Add a geometric or dimensional constraint

■

Add an action parameter

■

Define attributes

■

Manage visibility states

■

Test and save the block definition

UCS in the Block Editor
Within the Block Editor, the origin of the UCS icon defines the base point for
the block. You can change the base point for the block by moving the geometry
relative to the origin of the UCS icon, or by adding a base point parameter.
The UCS command is disabled in the Block Editor. Keep the following in mind:
■

While you can assign parameters to an existing 3D block definition, the
block reference cannot be edited along the Z axis.

■

While you can add actions to a dynamic block that contains solid objects,
you can't perform solid editing features within a dynamic block reference
(for example, stretch a solid, move a hole within a solid, and so on).

NOTE The Command window should be displayed in the Block Editor, as it displays
prompts for many aspects of creating dynamic blocks.
See also:
■

Define Block Attributes on page 942

To open an existing block definition in the Block Editor

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit.
2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, do one of the following:
■

Select a block definition from the list.

968 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

■

Select if the drawing is the block definition you
want to open.

3 Click OK.

To create a new block definition in the Block Editor

1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create.
2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, enter a name for the new block
definition. Click OK.

3 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
NOTE This saves the block definition even if you have not added any objects
in the Block Editor drawing area.
4 Click Close Block Editor.

To open a drawing file saved as a block (not dynamic) in the Block Editor
1 Click the Application button, and click Open ➤ Drawing.
2 Open the drawing file that is saved as a block.

3 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit.
4 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, select . Click
OK.

To open a drawing file saved as a dynamic block in the Block Editor
1 Click the Application button, and click Open ➤ Drawing.
2 Open the drawing file that is saved as a block.
An alert is displayed that states that the drawing file contains authoring
elements.
3 In the alert dialog box, click Yes to open the drawing in the Block Editor.

Overview of the Block Editor | 969

To view properties of a block definition in the Block Editor

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit.
2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, do one of the following:
■

Select a block definition from the list.

■

Select if the drawing is the block definition you
want to open.

3 Click OK.

4 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
5 In the Properties Palette window, under Block, view the properties of the
block definition.

Quick Reference
BCLOSE
Closes the Block Editor.
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
BLOCKEDITLOCK
Disallows opening of the Block Editor and editing of dynamic block
definitions.

Create Custom Block Authoring Tools
Use the Block Authoring palettes to create custom tools for authoring dynamic
blocks.

970 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Similar to tool palettes, you can also use these palettes to add parameters and
actions to your dynamic block definition.

Change Properties of Tools
In the Tool Properties dialog box, you can change the following properties of
custom tools:
■

Tool description

■

Parameter type

■

Associated action(s)

■

Key point on the parameter to which the action is tied (if applicable)

■

Tool palette image

NOTE You cannot drag parameters and actions from the Block Editor onto a
regular tool palette.

Use Parameter Sets
The Parameter Sets tab of the Block Authoring palettes allows you to add
commonly paired parameters and actions to your dynamic block definition.
When you first add a parameter set to your dynamic block definition, a yellow
alert icon is displayed next to each action. This indicates that you need to
associate a selection set with each action. You can double click the yellow
alert icon (or use the BACTIONSET command) and follow the Command
prompts to associate the action with a selection set.
NOTE When you insert a lookup parameter set and double click the yellow alert
icon, the Property Lookup Table dialog box is displayed. Lookup actions are
associated with the data you add to this table, not a selection set.
See also:
■

Add Parameters to Dynamic Blocks on page 988

■

Overview of Actions on page 989

■

Control Tool Properties on page 72

■

Organize Tool Palettes on page 79

Create Custom Block Authoring Tools | 971

To make a copy of a parameter set

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, Under Block To Create or Edit,
select a name from the list and then, click OK.

3 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Authoring Palettes.
4 In the Block Authoring Palettes window, Parameters Sets tab, right-click
a parameter set. Click Copy.
5 Right-click anywhere on the palette to which you want to add the
parameter set (except on a parameter set). Click Paste.

To add or remove an action from a parameter set

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, Under Block To Create or Edit,
select a name from the list and then, click OK.

3 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Authoring Palettes.
4 In the Block Authoring Palettes window, Parameters Sets tab, right-click
a parameter set. Click Properties.
5 In the Tool Properties dialog box, under Parameter, click Actions, and
then click the [...] button.
6 In the Add Actions dialog box, under Action Object to Add, select an
action from the list.
7 Click either Add or Delete.
8 (Optional) Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add or remove additional actions.
9 Click OK.
10 In the Tool Properties dialog box, click OK.

972 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Quick Reference
BAUTHORPALETTE
Opens the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor.
BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE
Closes the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor.
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
TOOLPALETTES
Opens the Tool Palettes window.
BLOCKEDITOR
Indicates whether or not the Block Editor is open.

Test Blocks Within the Block Editor
Test your block definition before you save or exit the Block Editor.
The test block window reflects the current block definition in the Block Editor.
The test block window closes when you
■

Open a different block definition

■

Save the current block definition with a different name

■

Exit the Block Editor

NOTE If you exit AutoCAD while in the Test Block window, you will not be
prompted to save the file.

Quick Reference
BTESTBLOCK
Displays a window within the Block Editor to test a dynamic block.
BLOCKTESTWINDOW
Indicates whether or not a test block window is current.

Test Blocks Within the Block Editor | 973

Modify Dynamic Block Definitions
Correct Errors in Action Parameters
A yellow alert icon is displayed when
■

A parameter is not associated with an action

■

An action is not associated with a parameter or selection set

To correct these errors, hover over the yellow alert icon until the tooltip
displays a description of the problem. Then double-click the constraint and
follow the prompts.

Save Dynamic Blocks
When you save a block definition, the current values of the geometry and
parameters in the block become the default values for the block reference.
The default visibility state for the block reference is the visibility state at the
top of the list in the Manage Visibility States dialog box.
NOTE If you click File menu ➤ Save while you are in the Block Editor, you will
save the drawing but not the block definition. You must specifically save the block
definition while you are in the Block Editor.

To save a copy of the current block definition in the Block Editor under a
new name

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block As.
3 In the Save Block As dialog box, enter a name for the new block definition.
Click OK.
4 To save the block definition in the drawing, click File menu ➤ Save.

974 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

To save the current block definition as a new drawing file

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block As.
3 In the Save Block As dialog box, enter a name for the new block definition.
4 Select the Save Block Definition to Drawing File check box. Click OK.
5 In the Browse For Drawing File dialog box, click Save.

Quick Reference
BACTION
Adds an action to a dynamic block definition.
BACTIONTOOL
Adds an action to a dynamic block definition.
BACTIONSET
Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic
block definition.
BASSOCIATE
Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition.
BCLOSE
Closes the Block Editor.
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
BGRIPSET
Creates, deletes, or resets grips associated with a parameter.
BPARAMETER
Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition.

Modify Dynamic Block Definitions | 975

BLOOKUPTABLE
Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition.
BSAVE
Saves the current block definition.
BSAVEAS
Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.
BVSTATE
Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block.

Add Constraints to Dynamic Blocks
You can add geometric and dimensional constraints to a dynamic block.

Overview of Constraints in Dynamic Blocks
When you add constraints to a dynamic block definition, you have the option
of adding editable properties that control the parameters once they are inserted
in a drawing.

Geometric Constraints in Block Definitions
You can add geometric constraints to blocks the same way you would to
geometry outside of the Block Editor. Geometric constraints are available both
on the ribbon and on the Block Authoring palettes.

Dimensional Constraints in Block Definitions
A dimensional constraint applied within the Block Editor using the
BCPARAMETER command is called a constraint parameter. While you can use
both dimensional constraints and constraint parameters in a block definition,
only constraint parameters will display editable custom properties for that
block reference.
Constraint parameters contain parameter information that can be displayed
or edited for the block reference.

976 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

The above block definition contains both a linear constraint and a horizontal
constraint parameter. The horizontal constraint parameter includes a grip,
while the linear constraint does not. The horizontal constraint parameter is
also dynamic, while the linear constraint is not.
See also:
■

Constrain Objects Geometrically on page 870

■

Apply Dimensional Constraints on page 892

■

Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks on page 1003

■

Associative Dimensions on page 1527

To convert a dimensional constraint into a constraint parameter

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Convert.
3 Select a dimensional constraint in the Block Editor or enter a constraint
parameter type option in the command line.

Quick Reference
BCPARAMETER
Applies constraint parameters to selected objects, or converts dimensional
constraints to parameter constraints.
DIMCONSTRAINT
Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or
converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.

Overview of Constraints in Dynamic Blocks | 977

BCONSTATUSMODE
Turns the constraint display status on and off and controls the shading of
objects based on their constraint level.

Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks
You can control the geometry of constraint parameters with mathematical
expressions.
While you can insert both user variables and user parameters in the Block
Editor, only user parameters are displayed as editable custom properties for a
block reference.
There are several types of user parameters. For more information, see Parameters
Manager - Block Editor.
NOTE User parameters can be exposed as custom properties of the block reference.
If it does not define an equation, then the property can be edited. If it is an
equation, then the property is read-only.
See also:
■

Parameters Manager - Block Editor

■

Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations on page 903

■

Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks on page 1003

To create a new user parameter

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Block Table.
3 In the Block Properties Table dialog box, click New Properties.
4 In the New Parameter dialog box, specify a name and a value. Click OK.

978 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Quick Reference
BCPARAMETER
Applies constraint parameters to selected objects, or converts dimensional
constraints to parameter constraints.
BTABLE
Displays a dialog box to define variations of a block.
DIMCONSTRAINT
Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or
converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.
BCONSTATUSMODE
Turns the constraint display status on and off and controls the shading of
objects based on their constraint level.

Control Constrained Blocks with the Parameters Manager
The Parameters Manager allows you to display and edit constraints, user
parameters, action parameters, and block attributes from within the Block
Editor.
Within the Block Editor, the Parameters Manager displays and controls the
following categories:
■

Action Parameters

■

Dimensional Constraint Parameters

■

Reference Parameters

■

User Parameters

■

Attributes

For each of the above categories, you can display and control the following:
■

Name

■

Expression

■

Value

■

Type

Control Constrained Blocks with the Parameters Manager | 979

■

Show or Hide Information

■

Display Order

■

Description

For more information on the Parameters Manager in the Block Editor, see
Parameters Manager - Block Editor.

To display or hide additional columns in the Parameters Manager
■

In the Parameters Manager, right-click a column header and select or
de-select a column name.

Quick Reference
PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
PARAMETERSCLOSE
Closes the Parameters Manager palette.
PARAMETERSSTATUS
Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden.

Use a Block Properties Table
You can define and control values for parameters and properties within a
block definition using a Block Properties table.
The Block Properties Table dialog box consists of a grid with parameters
defining column headings and rows defining the different property set values.
When selecting a block reference, it can be set to the values defined by one
of the rows in the block properties table.

980 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

A table can include any of the following parameters and properties:
■

Action parameters

■

User parameters

■

Constraint parameters

■

Attributes

NOTE Only one table is allowed in the block definition.
You can restrict the property set for block references to only values defined
by one of the rows of the table. You can also change individual properties of
the reference so that the property set no longer matches one of the defined
rows.

To add parameter properties to a block table

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 In the Block Editor, double-click a block properties table in the block
definition.
3 In the Block Properties Table dialog box, click Add Properties.

Use a Block Properties Table | 981

4 In the Add Parameter Properties dialog box, under the Parameter
Properties list, select the parameter properties you want to add to the
block table. Hold Ctrl to select more than one property.
5 Click OK.

To check for errors in a block properties table
1 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Block Table.
2 In the Block Properties Table dialog box, click Audit.

Identify Fully Constrained Objects
When an object is fully constrained, all relevant geometric and dimensional
constraints are applied to the geometry.
You should always fully constrain geometry in a dynamic block definition
that contains constraints. If a block definition is not fully constrained, you
may get unpredictable behavior when the block is inserted in a drawing.
For more information on fully constrained objects, see Overview of Constraints
on page 865.

982 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Work with Fully Constrained Block Definitions
You can identify fully constrained objects with the constrained status mode
in the Block Editor. The BCONSTATUSMODE system variable allows you to
switch between the constrained status modes. You can also use the ribbon to
switch between modes while in the Block Editor.
The constrained geometry is represented with different colors. For more
information see the Block Editor Settings dialog box.
NOTE A fully constrained block definition must contain at least one fixed geometric
constraint.
See also:
■

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints on page 872

To identify the constrained objects

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Constraint Status.
The constrained objects are represented with the constraint status colors
specified in the Block Editor Settings dialog box.

To specify color assignment for the constraint display status

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Block Editor Settings.
3 In the Block Editor Settings dialog box, under Constraint Status, specify
colors for the following constrained objects:
■

Unconstrained

■

Partially Constrained

■

Fully Constrained

■

Improperly Constrained

Identify Fully Constrained Objects | 983

4 Click OK.

Quick Reference
BESETTINGS
Displays the Block Editor Settings dialog box.
BCONSTATUSMODE
Turns the constraint display status on and off and controls the shading of
objects based on their constraint level.

Add Action Parameters to Dynamic Blocks
You can add actions and parameters to dynamic blocks to determine how a
block should behave when it is inserted into a drawing.

Overview of Actions and Parameters
Parameters, actions, and their relationships (dependencies) are displayed in
different ways in the Block Editor. You can specify settings for some of these
elements.

Actions
An action displays its name and icon (a lightning bolt) in the Block Editor.
Actions are grouped into bars, which display all actions associated with a
parameter.

984 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Hover the cursor over an action icon to display
■

The associated parameter

■

The associated selection set

■

Additional objects that belong to the action

NOTE In order to use the BASSOCIATE command, you must first set
BACTIONBARMODE to 0.

Custom Tools
You can create custom block authoring tools, which you access from the block
authoring palettes. In order to preserve the default tools on the block authoring
palettes, you should create a new palette for custom block authoring tools.
You can then copy a parameter set tool from one of the existing palettes and
paste the copy onto the new palette.

Overview of Actions and Parameters | 985

Dependencies
When you select a parameter, grip, or action in the Block Editor, its associated
objects are highlighted. This is called dependency highlighting. You can turn
dependency highlighting on or off.
The following example shows how dependency highlighting creates a halo
effect for the associated parameter (labeled Distance) and action (labeled
Stretch) when you select the custom grip in the Block Editor.

The following table details what is dependency highlighted when you select
an element in the Block Editor.
Selected object in
the Block Editor

Objects that are dependency highlighted

Parameter

Associated grips and actions

Grip

Associated parameter and actions

Action

Associated parameters, grips, and the selection set (geometry)

To specify settings for parameters and actions in the Block Editor

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Dialog box launcher.
3 In the Block Editor Settings dialog box, set the desired options.
4 Click OK.

To specify the text color for actions in the Block Editor
1 At the Command prompt, enter bactionbarmode.
2 Enter 0 to view legacy action objects.

986 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

3 At the Command prompt, enter bactioncolor.
4 Enter one of the following values:
■

BYLAYER

■

BYBLOCK

■

An integer from 1 to 255.

■

A true color specified by three integers each ranging from 1 to 255 in
the following format: RGB:000,000,000.

5 Press Enter.
6 At the Command prompt, enter regen to regenerate the drawing.

Quick Reference
BACTIONBAR
Displays or hides action bars for a selection set of parameter objects.
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
BESETTINGS
Displays the Block Editor Settings dialog box.
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.
REGEN
Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport.
BACTIONBARMODE
Indicates whether the action bars or the legacy action objects are displayed
in the Block Editor.
BACTIONCOLOR
Sets the text color of actions in the Block Editor.
BDEPENDENCYHIGHLIGHT
Controls whether or not dependent objects are dependency highlighted
when a parameter, action, or grip is selected in the Block Editor.

Overview of Actions and Parameters | 987

BGRIPOBJCOLOR
Sets the color of grips in the Block Editor.
BGRIPOBJSIZE
Sets the display size of custom grips in the Block Editor relative to the screen
display.
BPARAMETERCOLOR
Sets the color of parameters in the Block Editor.
BPARAMETERFONT
Sets the font used for parameters and actions in the Block Editor.
BPARAMETERSIZE
Sets the size of parameter text and features in the Block Editor relative to the
screen display.
BPTEXTHORIZONTAL
Forces the text displayed for action parametes and constraint parameters in
the Block Editor to be horizontal.
BTMARKDISPLAY
Controls whether or not value set markers are displayed for dynamic block
references.
BVMODE
Controls how objects that are made invisible for the current visibility state
are displayed in the Block Editor.

Add Parameters to Dynamic Blocks
Grips
When you add a parameter to a dynamic block definition, grips are added to
key points of the parameter. Key points are the parts of a parameter that you
use to manipulate the block reference. For example, a linear parameter has
key points at its base point and end point. You can manipulate the parameter
distance from either key point.
You can specify grip size and color for display in the Block Editor. This setting
does not affect the size and color of the grips in a block reference.

988 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

See also:
■

Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks on page 1008

■

Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks on page 1003

■

Extract Data from Block Attributes on page 946

■

Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) on page 947

Quick Reference
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
BPARAMETER
Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition.
BSAVE
Saves the current block definition.

Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks
Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference will move or
change when the custom properties of the block reference are manipulated
in a drawing.

Overview of Actions
In general, you associate an action with a parameter and the following:
■

Key point. The point on a parameter that drives the action.

■

Selection set. The geometry that will be affected by the action.

Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 989

When you move the grip in the example above, only the geometry in the
selection set is stretched.

Quick Reference
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
BACTION
Adds an action to a dynamic block definition.
BACTIONSET
Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic
block definition.
BASSOCIATE
Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition.
BLOOKUPTABLE
Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Move Actions
Move selected objects a specified distance and angle.

Apply a Move Action to a Point Parameter
A move action associated with a point parameter moves all objects in a
selection set in any direction. The point parameter is the location of the grip
for the move action in the block reference.

990 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Apply a Move Action to a Linear Parameter
A move action associated with a linear parameter moves all objects in a
selection set only in the direction of the linear parameter. The parameter key
point is the location of the grip in the block reference.

Apply a Move Action to a Polar Parameter
A move action associated with a polar parameter moves all objects in a selection
set in any direction. In the block reference, the parameter key point is
■

The location of the move grip

■

The offset distance from the selected objects

Applying a move action to a polar parameter gives the same result as applying
a move action to a point parameter.

Scale Actions
Scale selected objects relative to the base point specified by the action.

Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 991

Apply a Scale Action to a Linear Parameter
A scale action applied to a linear parameter scales the selected objects in the
direction of the parameter.

Apply a Scale Action to a Polar Parameter
A scale action applied to a polar parameter scales the selected objects by the
specified distance and angle. While the resulting geometry behaves in the
same way as a scale action applied to a linear parameter, the way the grips are
manipulated is different in the Properties palette.

Apply a Scale Action to an XY Parameter
A scale action applied to an XY parameter scales the selected objects only in
the X and Y direction specified by the parameter. While the resulting geometry
behaves in the same way as a scale action applied to a linear parameter, the
way the grips are manipulated is different in the Properties palette.

992 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Stretch Actions
Move and stretch objects a specified distance in a specified direction relative
to the base point specified by the action.

Apply a Stretch Action to a Point Parameter
A stretch action applied to a point parameter moves and stretches selected
objects a specified distance in any direction.

Apply a Stretch Action to a Linear or Polar Parameter
A stretch action applied to a linear parameter moves and stretches selected
objects a specified distance in the direction of the parameter.

Apply a Stretch Action to an XY Parameter
A stretch action applied to an XY parameter stretches the selected objects only
in the X and Y direction specified by the parameter.

Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 993

Polar Stretch Actions
Rotate, move, and stretch objects a specified angle and distance.

Apply a Polar Stretch Action to a Polar Parameter
A polar stretch action can only be applied to a polar parameter. Like the stretch
action, selected objects stretch when this action is applied. However, a polar
stretch action also allows you to stretch the objects at any angle.

Rotate Actions
Rotate selected objects.
A rotate action is always associated with a rotate parameter.

Dependent and Independent Base Points
When you apply a rotate action, you can choose to make the base point of
the action dependent or independent of the parameter’s base point.

994 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Flip Actions
Mirror selected objects in a dynamic block reference about a specified reflection
line.
A flip action is always associated with a flip parameter.

Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 995

BASSOCIATE
Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition.
BLOOKUPTABLE
Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Array Actions
Copy and array objects in a rectangular pattern.

Apply an Array Action to a Linear Parameter
An array action applied to a linear parameter copies and arrays selected objects
in a rectangular pattern along the parameter only.

Apply an Array Action to a Polar Parameter
An array action applied to a polar parameter copies and arrays selected objects
in a rectangular pattern in any direction and angle.

Apply an Array Action to an XY Parameter
An array action applied to an XY parameter copies and arrays selected objects
in a rectangular pattern only in the X and Y direction specified by the
parameter.

996 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Lookup Actions
Lookup tables associate parameter values for the dynamic block reference with
other specified data (for example, a model or part number).
You can extract data from block references just as you would extract block
attribute data.
When the parameter values in a dynamic block reference match a row of input
property values in the lookup table, the corresponding lookup property values
are assigned to the block reference. These lookup properties and values are
displayed in the Properties palette under Custom.
Lookup tables support the following:
■

All numeric parameter properties (for example, distance and angles for
point, linear, polar, XY, and rotation parameters)

■

Text string parameter properties (for example, flip and visibility parameter
values)

NOTE Constraint parameters cannot be added to a lookup table. Instead, you
should use a Block Properties Table. For more information, see Use a Block
Properties Table on page 980.

Add Properties and Values to a Lookup Table
The Property Lookup Table consists of input properties and lookup properties.
■

Input properties. Parameters. Each parameter can correspond to one column
(except for lookup, alignment, and base point parameters). The parameter
label is used as the property name.

■

Lookup properties. Lookup parameters. Each lookup parameter can
correspond to one column. The lookup parameter label is used as the
property name.

Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 997

To add values to the cells in each column, click a cell and enter a value. If you
defined a value set for an input property (parameter) in the table, a drop-down
list of available values will display. Make sure to follow the guidelines in Specify
Values for Lookup Tables on page 998.

Custom Values
In a lookup table that does not use value sets, parameter values that do not
match a row of input property values from the lookup table are assigned the
lookup property value that corresponds to . The default value
is Custom.

Enable Reverse Lookup
A lookup property with reverse lookup enabled adds a lookup grip to the
dynamic block reference. When you click this grip, a drop-down list of that
column’s lookup values is displayed. The corresponding input property values
of the selected list item are assigned to the block reference.

To enable reverse lookup for a lookup property, each row in the lookup table
must be unique. To check for errors and empty cells, in the Property Lookup
Table dialog box, click the Audit button. You can also use the shortcut menu
options to insert, delete, or reorder rows.

Specify Values for Lookup Tables
The following rules apply when you specify values in lookup tables:
■

Use a comma as the delimiter between values.

■

You can specify any number of unique values separated by commas. For
example: 5,6,7 5.5,6.25

998 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

■

To specify a range, use brackets [ ] to specify that the range includes the
values separated by a comma, or use parentheses ( ) to specify that the
range does not include the values separated by a comma.

■

For a continuous range, use a pair of values separated by a comma, enclosed
in brackets or parentheses. For example: [3,10] specifies any value between
3 and 10, including 3 and 10 (3,10) specifies any value between 3 and 10,
not including 3 and 10.

■

For an open-ended range, use one value with a comma, enclosed in brackets
or parentheses. For example: [,5] specifies less than or equal to 5; (5,)
specifies greater than 5.

■

Use no more than 256 characters in a table cell.

■

You can use architectural and mechanical unit syntax (for example,
15'1/4").

■

If you enter a value in an invalid format, the value will be reset to the last
value when you move to another cell in the table.

See also:
■

Extract Data from Block Attributes on page 946

■

Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) on page 947

To add a lookup action to a dynamic block definition

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 In the Block Editor, in the Block Authoring Palettes window, Actions tab,
click the Lookup Action tool.
3 In the Block Editor drawing area, select one or more lookup parameters
to associate with the action. (You can associate only a lookup action with
lookup parameters.)
4 Specify the location of the action.
5 In the Property Lookup Table dialog box, complete the table as necessary.
6 Click OK.

Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 999

7 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
8 If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor.

To edit a lookup table while the action bars are displayed in the Block Editor
1 Hover the cursor over the lookup action icon.
2 Right-click and select Display Lookup Table.

To display and add properties to a lookup table
1 In the Block Editor, double-click a lookup action in a dynamic block
definition.
2 In the Property Lookup Table dialog box, click Add Properties.
3 In the Add Parameter Properties dialog box, in the bottom-left corner of
the dialog box, click Add Input Properties or Add Lookup Properties.
4 In the Parameter Properties list, select the parameter properties you want
to add to the lookup table. Hold Ctrl down to select more than one
property.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Property Lookup Table dialog box, click an empty cell and do one
of the following:
■

Select a value from the drop-down list. (A drop-down list only displays
if a value set has been defined for the parameter.)

■

Enter a value.

7 Click OK.

To allow or disallow reverse lookup

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 In the Block Editor, double-click a lookup action in a dynamic block
definition.

1000 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

3 In the Property Lookup Table dialog box, at the bottom of a Lookup
Property column, do one of the following:
■

Click Read Only, and then select Allow Reverse Lookup from the list.

■

Click Allow Reverse Lookup, and then select Read Only from the list.

NOTE You can only select Allow Reverse Lookup if you have entered data in
the column.
4 Click OK.

Quick Reference
BACTION
Adds an action to a dynamic block definition.
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
BLOOKUPTABLE
Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition.
BPARAMETER
Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition.

Use Chained Actions
Point, linear, polar, XY, and rotation parameters have a property called Chain
Actions. This property affects the parameter behavior if the parameter is part
of an action's selection set.
For example, you might include a point parameter in the selection set of a
stretch action that is associated with a linear parameter. When the linear
parameter is edited in a block reference, its associated stretch action triggers
a change in its selection set. Because the point parameter is included in the
selection set, the point parameter is edited by the change in the linear
parameter.
The following example shows a block definition in the Block Editor. The point
parameter (labeled Position) is included in the stretch action's selection set.

Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 1001

If the Chain Actions property for the point parameter is set to Yes, a change
in the linear parameter will trigger the move action associated with the point
parameter, just as if you edited the point parameter in the block reference
through a grip or custom property.

If the Chain Actions property is set to No, the point parameter's associated
move action is not triggered by the changes to the linear parameter. Thus, the
circle doesn't move.

To specify the Chain Actions property for a point, linear, polar, XY, or
rotation parameter

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

1002 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

2 In the Block Editor, click Tools menu ➤ Properties. The Properties palette
is displayed.
3 In the Block Editor, select a point, linear, polar, XY, or rotation parameter.
4 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Chain Actions.
5 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No.

6 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
7 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block
Editor.

Quick Reference
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
BPARAMETER
Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks
Control the way parameters are displayed using the Properties palette.

Custom Properties
In the Block Editor, you can specify properties for a parameter in a dynamic
block definition. Some of these properties can be displayed as custom properties
for the dynamic block reference when it is in a drawing. These properties are
displayed under Custom in the Properties palette.
Other parameter properties, such as Value Set properties and Chain Actions,
define how the block reference will function in a drawing.

Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks | 1003

Assign Labels to Parameters
When you select the dynamic block reference in a drawing, parameter labels
are assigned to custom properties in the Properties palette. You can specify
whether or not these custom properties are displayed for the block reference
when it is selected in a drawing. These properties can also be extracted using
the Attribute Extraction wizard.
It is good practice to specify unique parameter labels within the block.

Distance Multiplier Overrides
Use the distance multiplier property to change a parameter value by a specified
factor. For example, if you set the distance multiplier property to 2 for a stretch
action, the associated geometry in the block reference would increase and
double the distance of the grip movement.

Angle Offset Overrides
Use the angle offset property to increase or decrease the angle of a changed
parameter value by a specified amount. For example, if you set the angle offset
property of a move action to 90, the block reference would move 90 degrees
beyond the angle value of the grip movement.

List of Properties for Action Parameters
The following properties are available to customize the way your action
parameters behave.
Property name

Description

Associated
parameter

■

Angle Name

■

Point

■

Distance Name

■

Linear

■

Flip Name

Defines a label for the parameter. Displayed in the drawing space of the Block
Editor and the custom properties of the
block reference when the grip is selected.

■

Polar

■

Hor Distance
Name

■

Rotation

■

Lookup Name

■

Flip

■

Position Name

■

Visibility

■

Ver Distance
Name

■

Lookup

■

Visibility Name

1004 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Property name

Description

Associated
parameter

■

Angle Description

■

Point

■

Distance Description

■

Linear

■

Polar

■

Flip Description

Defines a description that will further explain the purpose of the parameter. The
text string will display in the tooltip when
the mouse pointer hovers over the position
name.

■

Hor Distance Description

■

Rotation

■

Position Description

Flip

■

Visibility

■

Lookup

■

Ver Distance Description

■

Visibility Description

■

Lookup Description

■

Base State Name

■

Flipped State
Name

In a Flip parameter, displays the label that
will be displayed when the specified object
is displayed as it was drawn (Base State)
or as manipulated (Flipped State). Displayed in the custom properties of the
block reference when the grip is selected.

Flip

Base Type

In a Rotate action, specifies whether the
base point for the rotation is dependent
on the base point of the parameter or an
independent base point that you specify
in the block definition.

Rotate

Distance Type

Specifies whether the distance applied to
the move is the parameter's X value, Y
value, or X an Y coordinate value from the
parameter's base point.

■

Move

■

Stretch

Specifies whether custom properties will
be displayed in the Properties palette for
the selected block reference.

■

Point

■

Linear

■

Polar

Show Properties

Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks | 1005

Property name

Description

Associated
parameter
■

■

Rotate

■

Flip

■

Visibility

■

Lookup

See also:
■

Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks on page 978

■

Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks on page 1008

■

Use Chained Actions on page 1001

■

Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks on page 1011

■

Extract Data from Block Attributes on page 946

To specify the display of custom properties in a dynamic block reference
1 Ensure that the Properties palette is displayed. If not, click Tools
menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Properties.

2 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
3 In the Block Editor, select a parameter.
4 In the Properties palette, under Misc., click Show Properties.
5 On the drop-down list, do one of the following:
■

Select Yes to display custom properties for the block reference.

■

Select No to specify that the custom properties will not display for a
block reference.

6 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.

1006 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

7 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block
Editor.

To specify that dynamic block reference can be exploded
1 Open a block definition in the Block Editor
2 In the Block Editor, make sure nothing is selected.
3 In the Properties palette, under Block, click Allow Exploding.
4 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No.

5 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
6 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block
Editor.

To prevent non-uniform scaling in dynamic block reference
1 Open a block definition in the Block Editor
2 In the Block Editor, make sure nothing is selected.
3 In the Properties palette, under Block, click Scale Uniformly.
4 On the drop-down list, select Yes.

5 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
6 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block
Editor.

Quick Reference
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
BPARAMETER
Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition.

Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks | 1007

PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks
A value set is a range or list of values specified for a parameter. These values
can be displayed for the block reference as a drop-down list next to the
parameter label under Custom in the Properties palette. When you define a
value set for a parameter, the parameter is limited to these values when the
block reference is manipulated in a drawing. For example, if you define a linear
parameter in a block that represents a window to have a value set of 20, 40,
and 60, the window can only be stretched to 20, 40, or 60 units.

When you create a value list for a parameter, the value of the parameter as it
exists in the definition is automatically added to the value set. This is the
default value for the block reference when you insert it in a drawing.
NOTE If you redefine the values in a value set after you've added the parameter
properties to a lookup table, make sure to update the lookup table to match the
new values in the value set.

To add or remove a value set for a parameter
1 Ensure that the Properties palette is displayed. If not, click Tools
menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Properties.

2 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
3 In the Block Editor, select a parameter.
4 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click one of the following:
■

Ang Type

1008 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

■

Dist Type

■

Hor Type

■

Ver Type

5 On the drop-down list, select List.
6 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click one of the following:
■

Ang Value List

■

Dist Value List

■

Hor Value List

■

Ver Value List

7 Click the [...] button.
8 In the Add Distance Value/Angle dialog box, enter one value or two or
more values separated by commas, or to delete a value, select it from the
list.
9 Click Add or Delete.
10 Click OK.

11 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
12 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block
Editor.

To specify an incremental value set for a linear, polar, XY, or rotation
parameter
1 Ensure that the Properties palette is displayed. If not, click Tools
menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Properties.

2 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
3 In the Block Editor, select a linear, polar, XY, or rotation parameter.
4 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click Dist Type, Ang Type, Hor
Type, or Ver Type.

Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks | 1009

5 On the drop-down list, select Increment.
6 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click Dist Increment, Ang
Increment, Hor Increment, or Ver Increment, and then enter an
incremental value for the parameter.
7 Click Dist Minimum, Ang Minimum, Hor Minimum, or Ver Minimum,
and then enter a minimum value for the parameter.
8 Click Dist Maximum, Ang Maximum, Hor Maximum, or Ver Maximum,
and then enter a maximum value for the parameter.

9 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
10 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block
Editor.

To specify minimum and maximum values for a linear, polar, XY, or rotation
parameter
1 Ensure that the Properties palette is displayed. If not, click Tools
menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Properties.

2 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
3 In the Block Editor, select a linear, polar, XY, or rotation parameter.
4 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click Dist Minimum, Ang
Minimum, Hor Minimum, or Ver Minimum, and then enter a minimum
value for the parameter.
5 Click Dist Maximum, Ang Maximum, Hor Maximum, or Ver Maximum,
and then enter a maximum value for the parameter.

6 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
7 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block
Editor.

1010 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Quick Reference
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
BPARAMETER
Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Specify Distance and Angle Values
Action overrides are properties of actions that have no effect on the block
reference until it is manipulated in a drawing. Use distance multiplier overrides
with the following actions:
■

Move on page 990

■

Stretch on page 993

■

Polar Stretch on page 994

You can specify these action override properties by following the Command
prompts when you add an action to a dynamic block definition. You can also
specify these properties in the Properties palette when you select an action in
the Block Editor.

Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks
Parameter Type
Point

Grip Type

Actions You Can Associate with a Parameter

Standard

Move, Stretch

Specify Distance and Angle Values | 1011

Parameter Type

Grip Type

Actions You Can Associate with a Parameter

Linear

Move, Scale, Stretch, Array

Polar

Standard

Move, Scale, Stretch, Polar
Stretch, Array,

Standard

Move, Scale, Stretch, Array

Rotation

Rotate

Flip

Alignment

None (The action is implied and contained within
the parameter.)

Visibility

Lookup

None (The action is implied and controlled by
visibility states.)

Lookup

Base

Standard

None

When you add a parameter to a dynamic block definition, custom grips
associated with key points of the parameter are automatically added to the
block.
All parameters (except the alignment parameter, which always displays one
grip) have a property called Number of Grips. When you select a parameter in
the Block Editor, the Number of Grips property is displayed in the Properties
palette. This property allows you to specify, from a preset list, the number of
grips you want to display for the parameter.

1012 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

NOTE Parameters that are not associated with an action do not display grips.
If you specify that a parameter has 0 grips, you can still edit the dynamic block
reference through the Properties palette (if the block is defined that way).
If a dynamic block definition contains visibility states on page 1017 or a lookup
table on page 997, you can define the block so that the only grip that is
displayed is a lookup grip. When you click this grip on the block reference, a
drop-down list is displayed. When you select an item from the list, the display
of the block reference may change.

Grips are automatically added at key points on the parameter. You can
reposition a grip anywhere in the block space relative to its associated key
point on the parameter. When you reposition a grip, it is still tied to the key
point with which it is associated.
NOTE Grips are not displayed for key points that are not associated with an action.
The type of parameter you add to the dynamic block definition determines
the type of grips that are added to the block..
Grip
Type

How the Grip Can Be Manipulated in a Drawing

Associated Parameters

Standard

Within a plane in any direction

Base, Point, Polar, and
XY

Linear

Back and forth in a defined direction
or along an axis

Linear

Rotation

Around an axis

Rotation

Flip

Click to flip the dynamic block reference

Flip

Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks | 1013

Grip
Type

How the Grip Can Be Manipulated in a Drawing

Associated Parameters

Alignment

Within a plane in any direction; when
moved over an object, triggers the
block reference to align with the object

Alignment

Lookup

Click to display a list of items

Visibility, Lookup

Specify Tooltips on Grips
Each of the dynamic block parameters has one or more description fields with
the exception of the basepoint and alignment parameters.
Paramet- Description
er
Point

Position description

Linear

Distance description

Polar

Distance description, angle description

Horizontal distance description, vertical distance description

Rotation

Angle description

Flip

Flip description

Visibility

Visibility description

Lookup

Lookup description

Alignment

Set to “Aligns block to object”

Basepoint

No special tooltip is required

Specify Insertion Cycling for Grips in Dynamic Blocks
Grips in dynamic blocks have a property called Cycling. When this property
is set to Yes, the grip becomes an available insertion point for the dynamic

1014 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

block reference. When you insert the dynamic block reference in a drawing,
you can use the Ctrl key to cycle through the available grips to select which
grip will be the insertion point for the block.

To specify the number of custom grips displayed for a parameter in a dynamic
block

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 In the Block Editor, select a parameter.
3 On the Properties palette, under Misc, click Number of Grips, and then
select the number of grips you want to display for the parameter.

4 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
5 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block
Editor.

To reposition a grip in a dynamic block definition

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 In the Block Editor, select a custom grip (not the standard grip associated
with the key point of the parameter).
3 Do one of the following to reposition the grip:
■

Drag the grip to another position in the block space.

■

On the Properties palette, under Geometry, enter values for the Base
X and Base Y properties. (These values are relative to the base point
of the parameter.)

4 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
5 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block
Editor.

Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks | 1015

To reset grips in a dynamic block definition to their default locations

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 In the Block Editor, at the Command prompt, enter bgripset.
3 Select the grip for which you want to reset the grip position(s).
4 At the Command prompt, enter reposition.

5 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
6 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block
Editor.

To turn insertion cycling on or off for a custom grip in a dynamic block
reference

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 In the Block Editor, at the Command prompt, enter bcycleorder.
3 In the Insertion Cycling Order dialog box, select a grip from the list, and
click Cycling to turn cycling on or off for the grip. (A check mark in the
Cycling column indicates that cycling is turned on for the grip.)
4 Click OK.

5 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
6 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block
Editor.

To modify the insertion cycling order for custom grips in a dynamic block
reference

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 In the Block Editor, enter bcycleorder at the Command prompt.

1016 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

3 In the Insertion Cycling Order dialog box, select a grip from the list, and
click Move Up or Move Down. (A check mark in the Cycling column
indicates that cycling is turned on for the grip.)
4 Repeat step 2 until you are finished modifying the grip cycling order.
5 Click OK.

6 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
7 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block
Editor.

Quick Reference
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
BCYCLEORDER
Changes the cycling order of grips for a dynamic block reference.
BGRIPSET
Creates, deletes, or resets grips associated with a parameter.
BPARAMETER
Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition.
GRIPTIPS
Controls the display of grip tips when the cursor hovers over grips on dynamic
blocks and custom objects that support grip tips.

Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block
Using visibility states, you can create a block with different graphical
representations.
For example, you have the following four different weld symbols. Using
visibility states, you can combine these weld symbols into a single dynamic
block.

Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block | 1017

After you combine the geometry in the Block Editor, you add a visibility
parameter.
You can then create and name a different visibility state for each weld symbol
(for example, WLD1, WLD2, WLD3, and WLD4). In the following example,
the WLD1 visibility state is displayed in the Block Editor. The geometry that
displays in a dimmed state is invisible for the WLD1 visibility state.

The Block Editor contextual tab displays the name of the current visibility
state. This area of the tool bar also provides several tools for working with
visibility states.
When you work with visibility states, you may or may not want to see the
geometry that is invisible for a given state. Use the Visibility Mode button
(BVMODE) to determine whether geometry is displayed.

To create a new visibility state

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

1018 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States.
3 In the Visibility States dialog box, click New.
4 In the New Visibility State dialog box, enter a name for the new visibility
state.
5 Do one of the following:
■

Click Hide All Existing Objects in New State

■

Click Show All Existing Objects in New State

■

Click Leave Visibility of Existing Objects Unchanged in New State

6 Click OK.

To make a visibility state current

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States.
3 Select the visibility state that you want to set as the current state.

To rename or delete a visibility state

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States.
3 In the Visibility States dialog box, select a visibility state from the list.
4 Do one of the following:
■

Click Rename and enter a new name for the visibility state

■

Click Delete

5 Click OK.

Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block | 1019

To make objects visible or invisible in the current visibility state

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 Do one of the following:

■

Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Make Visible.

■

Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Make Invisible.

3 In the drawing area, select the objects. Press Enter.
4 At the Command prompt, enter current. Press Enter.

To make objects visible or invisible in all visibility states

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 In the Block Editor drawing area, select the objects that you want to make
visible in all visibility states.
3 Right-click in the drawing area and click one of the following:
■

Object Visibility ➤ Show For All States

■

Object Visibility ➤ Hide For All States

To show or hide invisible geometry for visibility states

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility Mode.

1020 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

To change the order of the visibility states list for a dynamic block reference

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States.
3 In the Visibility States dialog box, select a visibility state in the list.
4 Click Move Up or Move Down to change the order.
5 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the list of visibility states is in the desired order.
6 Click OK.

To set the default visibility state for the dynamic block reference

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.

2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States.
3 In the Visibility States dialog box, select a visibility state in the list.
4 Click Move Up until the selected visibility state is at the top of the list.
5 Click OK.

Quick Reference
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
BPARAMETER
Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition.
BVHIDE
Makes objects invisible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in
a dynamic block definition.

Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block | 1021

BVSHOW
Makes objects visible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in a
dynamic block definition.
BVSTATE
Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block.
BVMODE
Controls how objects that are made invisible for the current visibility state
are displayed in the Block Editor.

1022 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks)

Part 8: Work with 3D
Models

1023

1024

Create 3D Models

Use 3D models to help you visualize and test your designs.

Overview of 3D Modeling
AutoCAD 3D modeling allows you to create drawings using solid, surface, and
mesh objects.
Solid, surface, and mesh objects offer different functionality, that, when used
together, offer a powerful suite of 3D modeling tools. For example, you can
convert a primitive solid to a mesh to take advantage of mesh creasing and
smoothing. You can then convert the model to a surface to take advantage of
associativity and NURBS modeling.

Solid Modeling
A solid model is an enclosed 3D body that has properties such as mass, volume,
center of gravity, and moments of inertia.

Start with primitive solids such as cones, boxes, cylinders, and pyramids and
modify and recombine them to create new shapes. Or draw a custom polysolid

1025

extrusion and use various sweeping operations to create solids from 2D curves
and lines.

Surface Modeling
A surface model is a thin shell that does not have mass or volume. AutoCAD
offers two types of surfaces: procedural and NURBS. Use prodecural surfaces
to take advantage of associative modling, and use NURBS surfaces to take
advantage of sculpting with control vertices.
A typical modeling workflow is to create a basic model using mesh, solids,
and procedural surfaces, and then convert them to NURBS surfaces. This allows
you to utilize not only the unique tools and primitive shapes offered by solids
and meshes, but also the shaping capabilities provided by surfaces - associative
modeling and NURBS modeling.

You create surface models using some of the same tools that you use for solid
models: sweeping, lofting, extruding, and revolving. You can also create
surfaces by blending, patching, offsetting, filleting, and extending other
surfaces.

1026 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Mesh Modeling
A mesh model consists of vertices, edges, and faces that use polygonal
representation (including triangles and quads) to define a 3D shape.

Unlike solid models, mesh has no mass properties. However, as with 3D solids,
you can create primitive mesh forms such as boxes, cones, and pyramids,
starting in . You can modify mesh models in ways that are not available for
3D solids or surfaces. For example you can apply creases, splits, and increasing
levels of smoothness. You can drag mesh subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices)
to deform the object. To achieve more granular results, you can refine the
mesh in specific areas before modifying it.

Use mesh models to provide the hiding, shading, and rendering capabilities
of a solid model without the physical properties such as mass, moments of
inertia, and so on.

Advantages of 3D Modeling
Modeling in 3D has several advantages. You can
■

View the model from any vantage point

■

Generate reliable standard and auxiliary 2D views automatically

■

Create sections and 2D drawings

■

Remove hidden lines and do realistic shading

■

Check interferences and perform engineering analysis

■

Add lighting and create realistic rendering

■

Navigate through the model

Overview of 3D Modeling | 1027

■

Use the model to create an animation

■

Extract manufacturing data

See also:
■

Enter 3D Coordinates on page 614

■

Control the User Coordinate System (UCS) on page 594

■

Use the Dynamic UCS with Solid Models on page 601

Quick Reference
Commands
BOX
Creates a 3D solid box.
CONE
Creates a 3D solid cone.
CONVTOMESH
Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh
objects.
CONVTONURBS
Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces.
CONVTOSOLID
Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids.
CONVTOSURFACE
Converts objects to 3D surfaces.
CYLINDER
Creates a 3D solid cylinder.
EXTRUDE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object.

1028 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

LOFT
Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections.
MESH
Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid,
sphere, wedge, or torus.
POLYSOLID
Creates a 3D wall-like polysolid.
PLANESURF
Creates a planar surface.
PYRAMID
Creates a 3D solid pyramid.
REVOLVE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis.
SPHERE
Creates a 3D solid sphere.
SURFBLEND
Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces.
SURFNETWORK
Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions
(including surface and solid edge subobjects).
SURFOFFSET
Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface.
SURFPATCH
Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed
loop.
SWEEP
Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject
along a path.
TORUS
Creates a donut-shaped 3D solid.

Overview of 3D Modeling | 1029

UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
WEDGE
Creates a 3D solid wedge.

System Variables
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
PSOLWIDTH
Controls the default width for a swept solid object created with the
POLYSOLID command.
PSOLHEIGHT
Controls the default height for a swept solid object created with the
POLYSOLID command.
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE
Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted
when you roll over them.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY
Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from
which they were created.
SURFACEMODELINGMODE
Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS
surfaces.

Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves
Use lines and curves to extrude, sweep, loft, and revolve 3D solids, surfaces,
and NURBS surfaces.

Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces
Understand the differences between creating solids and surfaces with the
EXTRUDE, SWEEP, LOFT, and REVOLVE commands.

1030 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

See also:
■

Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding on page 1034

■

Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping on page 1038

■

Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting on page 1042

■

Create a Solid or Surface by Revolving on page 1046

Create Surfaces or Solids With the Same Commands
When you extrude, sweep, loft, and revolve curves, you can create both solids
and surfaces. Open curves always create surfaces, but closed curves can create
either solids or surfaces depending on the situation.
If you select a closed curve and click EXTRUDE, SWEEP, LOFT, and REVOLVE
on the ribbon, you create:
■

A solid if the Mode option is set to Solid.

■

A surface if the Mode option is set to Surface.
■

A procedural surface if the SURFACEMODELINGMODE system
variable is set to 0.

■

A NURBS surface if the SURFACEMODELINGMODE system variable
is set to 1.

■

An associative surface if the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY system variable
is on.

In this illustration, the same profile creates a solid (left), a procedural surface
(middle), and a NURBS surface (right).

Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces | 1031

Geometry That Can Be Used As Profiles and Guide Curves
The curves that you use as profile and guide curves when you extrude, sweep,
loft, and revolve can be:
■

Open or closed

■

Planar or non-planar

■

Solid and surface edge subobjects

■

A single object (to extrude multiple lines, convert them to a single object
with the JOIN command)

■

A single region (to extrude multiple regions, convert them to a single object
with the REGION command)

Example: Use Splines to Create 3D NURBS Surfaces
Splines are one of the many 2D object types that can be lofted, extruded,
swept, and revolved to create NURBS surfaces. Other 2D objects that can be
used include lines, polylines, arcs, and circles. Splines, however, are the only
2D object customized to create NURBS surfaces. Because they allow you to
adjust tolerance, degree, and tangency, they are better suited than other types
of 2D profiles (line, plines, circles) for surface modeling.

1032 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Many of the same commands used with NURBS surfaces, can also be used
with CV splines. These include:
■

CVADD

■

CVREMOVE

■

CVREBUILD

■

CVSHOW

■

CVHIDE

For more information, see Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves
on page 1030.

Create Associative Surfaces
Surfaces can be associative while solids cannot. If surface associativity is on
when a surface is created, it maintains a relationship with the curve from
which it is was generated (even if the curve is the subobject of another solid
or surface). If the curve is reshaped, the surface profile automatically updates.
See Create Associative Surfaces on page 1103.
NOTE To modify a surface that is associative, you must modify the generating
curve and not the surface itself. If you reshape the surface, its link to the generating
curve will be broken and the surface will lose associativity and become a generic
surface.

Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces | 1033

Deleting the Curves that Generate the Solid or Surface
The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the curves that generate an
object are automatically deleted after the solid or surface is created. However,
if surface associativity is on, the DELOBJ setting is ignored and the generating
curves are not deleted.

Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding
Create a 3D solid or surface by stretching curves into 3D space.
The EXTRUDE command creates a solid or surface that extends the shape of
a curve. Open curves create surfaces and closed curves create solids or surfaces.
See Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces on page 1030.

Options for Extrusion
When you extrude objects, you can specify any of the following options:
■

Mode. Sets whether the extrude creates a surface or a solid.

■

Specify a path for extrusion. With the Path option, create a solid or surface
by specifying an object to be the path for the profile, or shape, of the
extrusion. The extruded object starts from the plane of the profile and
ends on a plane perpendicular to the path at the endpoint of the path. For
best results, use object snaps to make sure that the path is on or within
the boundary of the object being extruded.

1034 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Extruding is different from sweeping. When you extrude a profile along a
path, the profile follows the shape of the path, even if the path does not
intersect the profile. Sweeping usually provides greater control and better
results.
■

Taper angle. Tapering the extrusion is useful for defining part that require
a specific taper angle, such as a mold used to create metal products in a
foundry.

■

Direction. With the Direction option, you can specify two points to set
the length and direction of the extrusion.

■

Expression. Enter a mathematical expression to constrain the height of
the extrusion. See Create Geometric Relationships between Associative
Surfaces on page 1106.

Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding | 1035

To extrude a NURBS surface

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ NURBS Creation.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Surface panel ➤ Extrude.
3 Select the objects or edge subobjects to extrude.
4 Specify the height.
After the extrusion, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending
on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable.

To extrude a solid

1 Click Solid tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude.
2 Select the objects or edge subobjects to extrude.
3 Specify the height.
After the extrusion, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending
on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable.

To extrude a procedural surface along a path
1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude.
2 Select the objects or edge subobjects to extrude.
3 At the Command prompt, enter p (Path).
4 Select the object or edge subobject to use as the path.
After the extrusion, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending
on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable.

1036 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Quick Reference
Commands
3DOSNAP
Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.
BREP
Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity
from surfaces.
EXTRUDE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object.
JOIN
Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
REGION
Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object.

Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding | 1037

SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY
Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from
which they were created.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG
Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces.
SURFACEMODELINGMODE
Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS
surfaces.

Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping
Create a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a profile along a path.
The SWEEP command creates a solid or surface by extending a profile shape
(the object that is swept) along a specified path. When you sweep a profile
along a path, the profile is moved and aligned normal (perpendicular) to the
path. Open profiles create surfaces and closed curves create solids or surfaces.
See Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces on page 1030.
You can sweep more than one profile object along a path.

Options for Sweeping
When you extrude objects, you can specify any of the following options:
■

Mode. Sets whether the sweep creates a surface or a solid.

■

Alignment. If the profile is not on the same plane as the sweep path, specify
how the profile aligns with the sweep path.

1038 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

■

Base Point. Specify a base point on the profile to sweep along the profile.

■

Scale. Specify a value that will change the size of the object from the
beginning of the sweep to the end. Enter a mathematical expression to
constrain the object scaling. See Create Geometric Relationships between
Associative Surfaces on page 1106.

■

Twist. By entering a twist angle, the object rotates along the length of the
profile. Enter a mathematical expression to constrain the object ‘s twist
angle. See Create Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces
on page 1106.

See also:
■

Create Associative Surfaces on page 1103

■

Create Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces on page 1106

Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping | 1039

■

Draw Splines on page 723

■

Modify Splines on page 853

To create a solid by sweeping an object along a path

1 Click Solid tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Sweep.
2 Select objects to sweep.
3 Press Enter.
4 Select an object or edge subobject as a sweep path.
After the sweep, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending
on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable.

To create a surface by sweeping an object along a path

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Sweep.
2 Select objects to sweep.
3 Press Enter.
4 Select an object or edge subobject as a sweep path.
After the sweep, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending
on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DOSNAP
Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.
BREP
Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity
from surfaces.

1040 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

JOIN
Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
REGION
Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object.
SWEEP
Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject
along a path.

System Variables
3DOSMODE
Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps.
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
SOLIDHIST
Controls whether new composite solids retain a history of their original
components.
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE
Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted
when you roll over them.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY
Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from
which they were created.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG
Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces.

Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping | 1041

SURFACEMODELINGMODE
Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS
surfaces.

Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting
Create a 3D solid or surface by lofting a profile through a set of two or more
cross-section profiles.
The cross-section profiles define the shape of the resulting solid object.
Cross-section profiles can be open or closed curves. Open curves create surfaces
and closed curves create solids or surfaces. See Overview of Creating Solids
and Surfaces on page 1030.

Options for Lofting
■

Mode. Sets whether the loft creates a surface or a solid.

■

Cross-section profiles. Select a series of cross-section profiles to define the
shape of the new 3D object.

lofted objects with different cross-section settings

As you create a lofted object, you can adjust its shape by specifying how
the profile passes through the cross sections (for example, a sharp or smooth
curve). You can also modify the settings later in the Properties palette. For
more information, see Modify the Properties of 3D Solids, Surfaces, and
Meshes on page 1213.

1042 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

■

Paths. Specify a path for the loft operation to obtain more control over
the shape of the lofted object. For best results, start the path curve on the
plane of the first cross section and end it on the plane of the last cross
section.

■

Guide curves. Specify guide curves to match points on corresponding cross
sections. This method prevents undesired results, such as wrinkles in the
resulting 3D object.

Each guide curve must meet the following criteria:
■

Intersects each cross section

■

Starts on the first cross section

■

Ends on the last cross section

See also:
■

Create Associative Surfaces on page 1103

■

Create Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces on page 1106

■

Draw Splines on page 723

■

Modify Splines on page 853

Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting | 1043

To create a NURBS surface by lofting

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ NURBS Creation.

2 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Loft.
3 In the drawing area, select cross-section profiles and press Enter. (Select
them in the order in which you want the new 3D object to pass through
the cross sections.)
After the loft operation, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending
on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable.

To create a solid by lofting through a set of cross-section profiles

1 Click Solid tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Loft.
2 In the drawing area, select cross-section profiles and press Enter. (Select
them in the order in which you want the new 3D object to pass through
the cross sections.)
3 Do one of the following:
■

Use cross-section profiles only. Press Enter again or enter c (Cross
sections only).
In the Loft Settings dialog box, modify the options to control the
shape of the new object. Click the Preview Changes box to preview
the changes as you make them.
Click OK when finished.

■

Follow guide curves. Enter g (Guide curves). Select the guide curves
and press Enter.

■

Follow a path. Enter p (Path). Select a path and press Enter.

After the loft operation, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending
on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable.

1044 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Quick Reference
Commands
3DOSNAP
Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.
BREP
Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity
from surfaces.
JOIN
Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
LOFT
Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections.
REGION
Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object.

System Variables
3DOSMODE
Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps.
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY
Controls the transparency of the preview generated while using SURFBLEND,
SURFPATCH, SURFFILLET, FILLETEDGE, CHAMFEREDGE, and LOFT.
SOLIDHIST
Controls whether new composite solids retain a history of their original
components.

Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting | 1045

SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE
Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted
when you roll over them.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY
Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from
which they were created.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG
Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces.
SURFACEMODELINGMODE
Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS
surfaces.

Create a Solid or Surface by Revolving
Create a 3D object by revolving curves about an axis.
When the Mode option is set to Surface, you will create a surface and if Mode
is set to Solid you will create a solid regardless of whether the curve is open
or closed. See Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces on page 1030 for more
information. When revolving a solid, you can only use a revolve angle of 360
degrees.

Options for Revolving
■

Mode. Sets whether the revolve creates a surface or a solid.

■

Start Angle. Specifies an offset for the revolution from the plane of the
object being revolved.

■

Reverse. Changes the direction of the revolve.

■

Expression. Enter a formula or equation to specify the revolve angle. This
option is only available if you are creating associative surfaces. See Create
Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces on page 1106.

See also:
■

Create Associative Surfaces on page 1103

■

Draw Splines on page 723

■

Modify Splines on page 853

1046 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

To revolve objects about an axis to create a NURBS surface

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Revolve.
2 Select the objects or edge subobjects to revolve.
3 To specify the axis of revolution, specify one of the following:
■

The start and endpoint. Click to points on the screen to set the axis
orientation. The axis points must be on one side of the revolved object.
The positive axis direction extends from the start point to the
endpoint.

■

The X, Y, or Z axis. Enter x, y, or z.

■

An object. Select a line, a linear edge of a polyline segment, or the
linear edge of a surface or solid.

4 Specify the angle of revolution.

To revolve objects about an axis to create a solid

1 Click Solid tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Revolve.
2 Select the objects or edge subobject to revolve.
3 To specify the axis of revolution, specify one of the following:
■

■

The X, Y, or Z axis. Enter x, y, or z.

■

An object. Select a line, a linear edge of a polyline segment, or the
linear edge of a surface or solid.

4 Press Enter. To create a solid the angle must be 360 degrees. If you enter
a smaller angle of revolution, a surface is created instead of a solid.

Create a Solid or Surface by Revolving | 1047

Quick Reference
Commands
3DOSNAP
Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.
BREP
Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity
from surfaces.
JOIN
Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
REGION
Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object.
REVOLVE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis.

1048 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Create Solids
Create 3D solids from primitives or by combining or extending existing objects.

Overview of Creating 3D Solids
3D solid objects often start as one of several basic shapes, or primitives, that
you can then modify and recombine. A 3D solid can also be the result of
extruding a 2D shape to follow a specified path in 3D space.

About Solid Primitives
You can create several basic 3D shapes, known as solid primitives: boxes, cones,
cylinders, spheres, wedges, pyramids, and tori (donuts).

By combining primitive shapes, you can create more complex solids. For
example, you can join two solids, subtract one from the other, or create a
shape based on the intersection of their volumes.

Create Solids | 1049

About Solids Based on Other Objects
You can also create 3D solids from 2D geometry or other 3D objects.

The following methods are available:
■

Sweep. Extends a 2D object along a path.

■

Extrusion. Extends the shape of a 2D object in a perpendicular direction
into 3D space.

■

Revolve. Sweeps a 2D object around an axis.

■

Loft. Extends the contours of a shape between one or more open or closed
objects.

■

Slice. Divides a solid object into two separate 3D objects.

■

Sculpting Surfaces. Converts and trims a group of surfaces that enclose a
watertight area into a solid.

■

Conversion. Converts mesh objects and planar objects with thickness into
solids and surfaces.

Quick Reference
Commands
BOX
Creates a 3D solid box.

1050 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

CONE
Creates a 3D solid cone.
CONVTOSOLID
Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids.
CONVTOSURFACE
Converts objects to 3D surfaces.
CYLINDER
Creates a 3D solid cylinder.
EXTRUDE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object.
INTERSECT
Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces,
or regions.
INSERT
Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
LOFT
Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections.
PYRAMID
Creates a 3D solid pyramid.
REVOLVE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis.
SLICE
Creates new 3D solids and surfaces by slicing, or dividing, existing objects.
SUBTRACT
Combines selected 3D solids or 2D regions by subtraction.
SURFSCULPT
Trims and combines surfaces that bound a watertight area to create a solid.

Overview of Creating 3D Solids | 1051

SWEEP
Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject
along a path.
TORUS
Creates a donut-shaped 3D solid.
UNION
Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition.
VISUALSTYLES
Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.
WEDGE
Creates a 3D solid wedge.

System Variables
SURFACEMODELINGMODE
Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS
surfaces.
FACETRES
Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with
hidden lines removed.
ISOLINES
Specifies the number of contour lines displayed on the curved surfaces of 3D
solids.

Create 3D Solid Primitives
Start with standard shapes known as solid primitives to create boxes, cones,
cylinders, spheres, tori (donuts), wedges, and pyramids.

Create a Solid Box
Create a rectangular or cubical solid box.

1052 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

The base of the box is always drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current
UCS (work plane).

Box Creation Options
Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the boxes you
create:
■

Create a cube. Use the Cube option of the BOX command to create a box
with sides of equal length.

■

Specify rotation. Use the Cube or Length option if you want to set the
rotation of the box in the XY plane.

■

Start from the center point. Use the Center Point option to create a box
using a specified center point.

To create a solid box based on two points and a height
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Box.
2 Specify the first corner of the base.
3 Specify the opposite corner of the base.
4 Specify the height.

To create a solid cube
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Box.
2 Specify the first corner, or enter c (Center) to specify the center point of
the base.

Create 3D Solid Primitives | 1053

3 At the Command prompt, enter c (Cube). Specify the length of the cube
and a rotation angle.
The length value sets both the width and height of the cube.

Quick Reference
Commands
BOX
Creates a 3D solid box.

System Variables
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

Create a Solid Wedge
Create a solid wedge with rectangular or cubical faces.

The base of the wedge is drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS
with the sloped face opposite the first corner. The height of the wedge is
parallel to the Z axis.

1054 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Wedge Creation Options
Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the wedges you
create:
■

Create a wedge with sides of equal length. Use the Cube option of the
WEDGE command.

■

Specify rotation. Use the Cube or Length option if you want to set the
rotation of the wedge in the XY plane.

■

Start from the center point. Use the Center Point option to create a wedge
using a specified center point.

To create a solid wedge based on two points and a height
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Wedge.
2 Specify the first corner of the base.
3 Specify the opposite corner of the base.
4 Specify the height of the wedge.

To create a solid wedge with equal length, width, and height
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Wedge.
2 Specify the first corner or enter c (Center) to set the center point of the
base.
3 At the Command prompt, enter c (Cube). Specify the length of the wedge
and a rotation angle.
The length value sets both the width and height of the wedge.

Create 3D Solid Primitives | 1055

Quick Reference
Commands
WEDGE
Creates a 3D solid wedge.

System Variables
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

Create a Solid Cone
Create a pointed or frustum of a cone with a circular or elliptical base.

By default, the base of the cone lies on the XY plane of the current UCS. The
height of the cone is parallel to the Z axis.

Cone Creation Options
Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the cones you
create:
■

Set the height and orientation. Use the Axis Endpoint option of the CONE
command. Use the Top Radius option to specify the axis endpoint as the
point of the cone or the center of the top face. The axis endpoint can be
located anywhere in 3D space.

■

Create a frustum of a cone. Use the Top Radius option of the CONE
command to create a frustum, which tapers to an elliptical or planar face.

1056 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

The Frustum tool is also available from the Modeling tab of the tool palette.
You can also use grips to modify the tip of a cone and convert it to a flat
face.
■

Specify circumference and base plane. The 3P (Three Points) option of the
CONE command defines the size and plane of the base of the cone
anywhere in 3D space.

■

Define the angle of the taper. To create a conical solid that requires a
specific angle to define its sides, draw a 2D circle. Then use EXTRUDE and
the Taper Angle option to taper the circle at an angle along the Z axis. This
method, however, creates an extruded solid, not a true solid cone primitive.

See also:
■

Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces on page 1183

To create a solid cone with a circular base
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cone.
2 Specify the center point of the base.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.
4 Specify the height of the cone.

To create a solid cone with an elliptical base
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cone.
2 At the Command prompt, enter e (Elliptical).
3 Specify the start point of first axis.
4 Specify the endpoint of the first axis.

Create 3D Solid Primitives | 1057

5 Specify the endpoint (length and rotation) of the second axis.
6 Specify the height of the cone.

To create a frustum of a solid cone
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cone.
2 Specify the center point of the base.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.
4 At the Command prompt, enter t (Top radius). Specify the top radius.
5 Specify the height of the cone.

To create a solid cone with the height and orientation specified by the axis
endpoint
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cone.
2 Specify the center point of the base.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.
4 At the Command prompt, enter a (Axis endpoint). Specify the endpoint
and rotation of the cone.
This endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space.

Quick Reference
Commands
CONE
Creates a 3D solid cone.

System Variables
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

1058 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Create a Solid Cylinder
Create a solid cylinder with a circular or elliptical base.

By default, the base of the cylinder lies on the XY plane of the current UCS.
The height of the cylinder is parallel to the Z axis.

Cylinder Creation Options
Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the cylinders you
create:
■

Set rotation. Use the Axis Endpoint option of the CYLINDER command
to set the height and rotation of the cylinder. The center point of the top
plane of the cylinder is the axis endpoint, which can be located anywhere
in 3D space.

■

Use three points to define the base. Use the 3P (Three Points) option to
define the base of the cylinder. You can set three points anywhere in 3D
space.

■

Construct a cylindrical form with special detail, such as grooves. Create a
closed polyline (PLINE to represent a 2D profile of the base. Use EXTRUDE
to define the height along the Z axis. The resulting extruded solid is not
a true solid cylinder primitive.

To create a solid cylinder with a circular base
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cylinder.
2 Specify the center point of the base.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.

Create 3D Solid Primitives | 1059

4 Specify the height of the cylinder.

To create a solid cylinder with an elliptical base
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cylinder.
2 At the Command prompt, enter e (Elliptical).
3 Specify the start point of the first axis.
4 Specify the endpoint of the first axis.
5 Specify the endpoint (length and rotation) of the second axis.
6 Specify the height of the cylinder.

To create a solid cylinder with the height and rotation specified (axis
endpoint)
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cylinder.
2 Specify the center point of the base.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.
4 At the Command prompt, enter a (Axis endpoint). Specify the axis
endpoint of the cylinder.
This endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space.

Quick Reference
Commands
CYLINDER
Creates a 3D solid cylinder.

System Variables
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

1060 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Create a Solid Sphere
Create a solid sphere using one of several methods.

When you start with the center point, the central axis of the sphere parallels
the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS).

Sphere Creation Options
Use the following options to draw a sphere with the SPHERE command:
■

Specify three points to set the size and plane of the circumference or
radius. Use the 3P (Three Points) option to define the size of the sphere
anywhere in 3D space. The three points also define the plane of the
circumference.

■

Specify two points to set the circumference or radius. Use the 2P (Two
Points) option to define the size of the sphere anywhere in 3D space. The
plane of the circumference matches the Z value of the first point.

■

Set the size and location of the sphere based on other objects. Use the
Ttr (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) option to define a sphere that is tangent
to two circles, arcs, lines, and some 3D objects. The tangency points are
projected onto the current UCS.

To create a solid sphere
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Sphere.
2 Specify the center of the sphere.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the sphere.

To create a solid sphere defined by three points
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Sphere.

Create 3D Solid Primitives | 1061

2 At the Command prompt, enter 3p (Three Points). Specify the first point.
3 Specify the second point.
4 Specify the third point.

Quick Reference
Commands
SPHERE
Creates a 3D solid sphere.

System Variables
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

Create a Solid Pyramid
Create a solid pyramid with up to 32 sides.

You can create a pyramid that tapers to a point, or create a frustum of a
pyramid, which tapers to a planar face.

1062 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Pyramid Creation Options
Use the following options to control the size, shape, and rotation of the
pyramids you create:
■

Set the number of sides. Use the Sides option of the PYRAMID command
to set the number of sides for the pyramid.

■

Set the length of the edges. Use the Edges option to specify the dimension
of the sides at the base.

■

Create a frustum of a pyramid. Use the Top Radius option to create a
frustum, which tapers to a planar face. The frustum face is parallel to, and
has the same number of sides as, the base.

■

Set the height and rotation of the pyramid. Use the Axis Endpoint option
of the PYRAMID command to specify the height and rotation of the
pyramid. This endpoint, or top of the pyramid, can be located anywhere
in 3D space.

To create a solid pyramid
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Pyramid.
2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Sides). Enter the number of sides to
use.
3 Specify the center point of the base.
4 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.
5 Specify the height of the pyramid.

Create 3D Solid Primitives | 1063

To create a frustum of a solid pyramid
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Pyramid.
2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Sides). Enter the number of sides to
use.
3 Specify the center point of the base.
4 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.
5 Enter t (Top radius). Specify the radius of the planar face at the top of
the pyramid.
6 Specify the height of the pyramid.

Quick Reference
Commands
PYRAMID
Creates a 3D solid pyramid.

System Variables
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

Create a Solid Torus
Create a ring-shaped solid that resembles the inner tube of a tire.

A torus has two radius values. One value defines the tube. The other value
defines the distance from the center of the torus to the center of the tube. By

1064 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

default, a torus is drawn parallel to and is bisected by the XY plane of the
current UCS.
A torus can be self-intersecting. A self-intersecting torus has no center hole
because the radius of the tube is greater than the radius of the torus.

Torus Creation Options
Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the tori you
create.
■

Set the size and plane of the circumference or radius. Use the 3P (Three
Points) option to define the size of the torus anywhere in 3D space. The
three points also define the plane of the circumference. Use this option to
rotate the torus as you create it.

■

Set the circumference or radius. Use the 2P (Two Points) option to define
the size of the torus anywhere in 3D space. The plane of the circumference
matches the Z value of the first point.

■

Set the size and location of the torus based on other objects. Use the Ttr
(Tangent, Tangent, Radius) option to define a torus that is tangent to two
circles, arcs, lines, and some 3D objects. The tangency points are projected
onto the current UCS.

Quick Reference
Commands
TORUS
Creates a donut-shaped 3D solid.

Create 3D Solid Primitives | 1065

System Variables
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

To create a solid torus
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Torus.
2 Specify the center of the torus.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the path that is swept by the torus tube.
4 Specify the radius or diameter of the tube.

Create a Polysolid
Use the same techniques you use to create polylines to create a polysolid
object.

The POLYSOLID command provides a quick way to draw 3D walls. A polysolid
is like an extruded, wide polyline. In fact, you can draw polysolids the same
way that you draw a polyline, using both straight and curved segments. Unlike
extruded polylines, which lose any width properties upon extrusion, polysolids
retain the width of their line segments.
You can also convert objects such as a line, 2D polyline, arc, or circle to a
polysolid.
Polysolids are displayed as swept solids in the Properties palette.

1066 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Polysolid Creation Options
Use the following options to control the size and shape of the polysolids you
create:
■

Create arced segments. Use the Arc option to add curved segments to the
polysolid. The profile of a polysolid with curved segments remains
perpendicular to the path.

■

Create a polysolid from a 2D object. Use the Object option to convert an
object such as a polyline, circle, line, or arc to a polysolid. The DELOBJ
system variable controls whether the path (a 2D object) is automatically
deleted when you create a polysolid.

■

Close the gap between the first and last points. Use the Close option to
create a connecting segment.

■

Set the height and width. Use the Height and Width options for the
POLYSOLID command. The values you set are stored in the PSOLWIDTH
and PSOLHEIGHT system variables.

■

Set where the object is drawn in relation to the specified points. Use the
Justification option to place the path of the polysolid to the right, to the
left, or down the center of the points you specify.

To draw a polysolid
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Polysolid.
2 Specify a start point.
3 Specify the next point.
To create a curved segment, at the Command prompt, enter a (Arc) and
specify the next point.
4 Repeat step 3 to complete the desired solid.

Create a Polysolid | 1067

5 Press Enter.

To create a polysolid from an existing object
1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Polysolid.
2 At the Command prompt, enter o (Object).
3 Select a 2D object such as a line, polyline, arc, or circle.
A 3D polysolid is created using the current height and width settings.
The original 2D object is deleted or retained, depending on the setting
of the DELOBJ system variable.

Quick Reference
Commands
POLYSOLID
Creates a 3D wall-like polysolid.

System Variables
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
PSOLHEIGHT
Controls the default height for a swept solid object created with the
POLYSOLID command.
PSOLWIDTH
Controls the default width for a swept solid object created with the
POLYSOLID command.

Create 3D Solids from Objects
Convert existing objects to 3D solids.
You can use several methods to convert objects in your drawing to 3D solids:
■

Convert surfaces and objects with Thickness to 3D Solids

■

Convert a group of surfaces to a 3D solid

1068 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

■

Convert mesh to 3D solids

■

Thicken surfaces to convert them to 3D solids

mesh and polyline with thickness converted to optimized 3D solids

The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the objects you select are
automatically deleted when the 3D object is created.

Convert Surfaces and Objects with Thickness to 3D Solids
You can convert different types of objects into extruded 3D solids with the
CONVTOSOLID command. These objects include closed polylines and circles
with thickness, as well as watertight meshes and surfaces. For a complete list
of objects that can be converted using this method, see CONVTOSOLID.

Convert a Group of Surfaces to a 3D Solid
Use the SURFSCULPT command to convert a group of surfaces that enclose a
watertight region to a 3D solid.

Convert Mesh to 3D Solids
When you convert mesh objects to 3D solids, the shape of the new solid object
approximates, but does not exactly duplicate, the original mesh object. You
can control the differentiation somewhat by specifying whether the result is
smooth or faceted (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT). You can also specify whether
the resulting faces are merged (optimized).

Create 3D Solids from Objects | 1069

For example, if you convert a mesh box to a solid object, following options
are available:
■

Smoothed and optimized. Coplanar faces are merged into a single face.
The overall shape of some faces can change. Edges of faces that are not
coplanar are rounded. (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 0)

■

Smoothed and not optimized. Each original mesh face is retained in the
converted object. Edges of faces that are not coplanar are rounded.
(SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 1)

■

Faceted and optimized. Coplanar faces are merged into a single, flat face.
The overall shape of some faces can change. Edges of faces that are not
coplanar are creased, or angular. (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 2)

■

Faceted and not optimized. Each original mesh face is converted to a flat
face. Edges of faces that are not coplanar are creased, or angular.
(SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 3)

1070 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

You cannot convert the following types of mesh objects to a 3D solid:
■

Mesh with gaps between faces. Gizmo editing can sometimes result in
gaps, or holes between the faces. In some cases, you can close the gaps by
smoothing the mesh object.

■

Mesh that has self-intersecting boundaries. If you have modified a mesh
object so that one or more faces intersect faces in the same object, you
cannot convert it to a 3D solid.

In some cases, mesh that is not eligible to be converted to a solid object can
be converted to a surface.

Thicken Surfaces to Convert Them to 3D Solids
You can convert 3D surface objects to 3D solids with the THICKEN command.

Grip editing is limited for objects that are created using this method.

Create 3D Solids from Objects | 1071

To convert objects with thickness to extruded solids

1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Convert to Solid.
2 Select one or more of the following types of objects and press Enter:
■

Uniform-width polylines with thickness

■

Closed, 0-width polylines with thickness

■

Circles with thickness

To convert one or more surfaces to solids

1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Thicken.
2 Select the surfaces you want to thicken. Press Enter.
3 Specify a thickness for the solid. Press Enter.

To convert contiguous surfaces that enclose a volume to a 3D solid object
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Sculpt.
2 Select surfaces that enclose a watertight region.
A solid is created.
3 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Convert to Solid.
4 Select the new compound object.

To convert a mesh object to a 3D solid
1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Convert Mesh panel ➤ Convert Options
drop-down.
2 Specify one of the following conversion options:
■

Smooth, optimized. The resulting model is smoothed, with merged
faces (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 0).

■

Smooth, not optimized. The resulting model is smooth, with the same
number of faces as the original mesh object (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT
= 1).

1072 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

■

Faceted, optimized. The resulting model is angular, with merged,
planar faces (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 2).

■

Faceted, not optimized. The resulting model is angular, with the same
number of faces as the original mesh object (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT
= 3).

3 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Convert Mesh panel ➤ Convert to Solid.
4 Select a mesh object that has no gaps or intersecting faces.

Quick Reference
Commands
CONVTOSOLID
Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids.
SURFSCULPT
Trims and combines surfaces that bound a watertight area to create a solid.
THICKEN
Converts a surface into a 3D solid with a specified thickness.
UNION
Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition.

System Variables
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
SMOOTHMESHCONVERT
Sets whether mesh objects that you convert to 3D solids or surfaces are
smoothed or faceted, and whether their faces are merged.

Combine or Slice 3D Objects
Create new composite 3D objects or slice objects to divide them.

Combine or Slice 3D Objects | 1073

Create Composite Objects
Create composite 3D objects by combining, subtracting, or finding the
intersecting mass of two or more 3D solids, surfaces, or regions.
Composite solids are created from two or more solids, surfaces, or regions
through any of the following commands: UNION, SUBTRACT, and INTERSECT.
3D solids record a history of how they were created. This history allows you to
see the original forms that make up composite solids. For more information,
see Display Original Forms of Composite Solids on page 1203.

Methods for Creating Composite Objects
Three methods are available for creating composite solids, surfaces, or regions:
■

Combine two or more objects.
With UNION, you can combine the total volume of two or more objects.

■

Subtract one set of solids from another.
With SUBTRACT, you can remove the common area of one set of solids
from another. For example, you can use SUBTRACT to add holes to a
mechanical part by subtracting cylinders from the object.

■

Find the common volume.
With INTERSECT, you can create a composite solid from the common
volume of two or more overlapping solids. INTERSECT removes the portions

1074 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

that do not overlap and creates a composite solid from the common
volume.

Create Composites from Mixed Object Types
In addition to creating composite objects from the same object types, you can
also create composites from mixed surfaces and solids.
■

Mixed intersections. Combining a solid and a surface through intersection
results in a surface.

■

Mixed subtractions. Subtracting a 3D solid from a surface results in a
surface. However, you cannot subtract a surface from a 3D solid object.

■

Mixed unions. You cannot create a union between 3D solid and surface
objects.

You cannot combine solids with mesh objects. However, you can convert
them to 3D solids in order to combine them with solids.
If a selection set of mixed objects contains regions, the regions are ignored.

To combine objects
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Union.
2 Select the 3D solid, surface, or region objects to combine. Press Enter.

To subtract objects from one another
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Subtract.
2 Select the 3D solid, surface, or region to subtract from. Press Enter.
3 Select the 3D solid, surface, or region to subtract. Press Enter.

Combine or Slice 3D Objects | 1075

To create a compound object from the intersection with other objects
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Intersect.
2 Select the 3D solid, surface, or region to intersect. Press Enter.

Quick Reference
Commands
INTERSECT
Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces,
or regions.
SUBTRACT
Combines selected 3D solids or 2D regions by subtraction.
UNION
Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition.

System Variables
SHOWHIST
Controls the Show History property for solids in a drawing.
SOLIDHIST
Controls whether new composite solids retain a history of their original
components.

Create 3D Solids by Slicing
Create new 3D solids by slicing, or dividing, existing objects.
When you use the SLICE command to slice a 3D solid, you can define the
cutting plane in several ways. For example, you can specify three points, an
axis, a surface, or a planar object to act as a cutting plane. You can retain one
or both halves of the sliced object.

1076 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Sliced 3D solids do not retain a history of the original forms that created them.
However, they do retain the layer and color properties of the original objects.
For a complete list of objects that can be used for a slice operation, see SLICE.
See also:
■

Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models on page 1269

To slice solids
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Slice.
2 Select the 3D solid or surface objects to slice. Press Enter.
3 Specify two points to define the cutting plane.
4 Specify which side to retain, or enter b (Both) to retain both sides.

To slice solids with a planar object
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Slice.
2 Select the 3D solid or surface objects to slice. Press Enter.
3 At the Command prompt, enter o (Object). Press Enter.
4 Select a circle, ellipse, arc, 2D spline, or 2D polyline to use as the cutting
plane.
5 Specify which side to retain, or enter b (Both) to retain both sides.

To slice solids or surfaces with a surface
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Slice.

Combine or Slice 3D Objects | 1077

2 Select the 3D solid or surface objects to slice. Press Enter.
3 At the Command prompt, enter s (Surface).
4 Press Enter.
5 Select a surface to use as the cutting plane.
6 Specify which side to retain, or enter b (both) to retain both sides.

Quick Reference
Commands
SLICE
Creates new 3D solids and surfaces by slicing, or dividing, existing objects.

Check 3D Models for Interferences
Find areas where 3D solids or surfaces intersect or overlap.
Use the INTERFERE command to check for areas of interference within a set
of 3D solid or surface models. You can compare two sets of objects or check
all 3D solids and surfaces in a drawing.
Interference checking creates temporary solid or surface objects and highlights
where the models intersect.

If the selection set contains both 3D solids and surfaces, the resulting
interference object is a surface.
You cannot check interference for mesh objects. However, if you select mesh
objects, you can choose to convert them to a solid or surface object and
continue the operation.
During the checking operation, you can use the Interference Checking dialog
box to cycle through and zoom to interference objects. You can also specify
whether to delete the temporary objects that are created during interference
checking.

1078 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Methods for Checking Interference
You can check interference using the following methods:
■

Define one selection set. Check the interference of all the 3D solids and
surfaces in a single selection set.

■

Define two selection sets. Check the interference of the objects in the first
set of objects against the objects in the second selection set.

■

Individually specify solids that are nested within blocks or xrefs.
Individually select 3D solid or surface objects that are nested in blocks and
external references (xrefs) and compare them against other objects in the
selection set.

To check for interferences within a solid model
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Interference Checking.
2 Select the first set of 3D solids and surfaces in the model. Press Enter.
3 Select the second set of 3D solids and surfaces in the model. Press Enter.
The Interference Checking dialog box is displayed. The areas of
interference are displayed as new, highlighted solid objects.
4 To cycle through the interference objects, in the Interference Checking
dialog box, click Next and Previous.
5 To retain the new interference objects after you close the Interference
Checking dialog box, clear Delete Interference Objects Created on Close.
6 Click Close.
If Delete Interference Objects on Close is selected, the new interference
objects are deleted.

To change the display of interference objects
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Interference Checking.
2 Enter s (Settings). Press Enter.
3 In the Interference Settings dialog box, change any of the settings and
click OK.

Check 3D Models for Interferences | 1079

Quick Reference
Commands
INTERFERE
Creates a temporary 3D solid from the interferences between two sets of
selected 3D solids.

System Variables
INTERFERECOLOR
Sets the color for interference objects.
INTERFEREOBJVS
Sets the visual style for interference objects.
INTERFEREVPVS
Specifies the visual style for the viewport during interference checking.

Create Surfaces
Create procedural surfaces and NURBS surfaces from curves or by combining
or extending existing surfaces.

Overview of Creating Surfaces
Surface modeling provides the ability to edit multiple surfaces as an associative
group or in a more free-form way.
In addition to 3D solid and mesh objects, AutoCAD offer two type of surfaces:
procedural and NURBS.
■

Procedural Surfaces can be associative, maintaining relationships with
other objects so that they can be manipulated as a group.

■

NURBS Surfaces - are not associative. Instead, they have control vertices
that allow you to sculpt shapes in a more natural way.

Use procedural surfaces to take advantage of associative modeling, and use
NURBS surfaces to take advantage of sculpting with control vertices. The
illustration below shows a procedural surface on the left, and a NURBS surface
on the right.

1080 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Choose a Surface Creation Method
Create procedural and NURBS surfaces using the following methods:
■

Create surfaces from profiles on page 1030. Create surfaces from profile
shapes composed of lines and curves with EXTRUDE, LOFT, PLANESURF,
REVOLVE, SURFNETWORK, and SWEEP.

■

Create surfaces from other surfaces on page 1086. Blend, patch, extend,
fillet, and offset surfaces to create new surfaces (SURFBLEND, SURFPATCH,
SURFEXTEND, SURFFILLET and SURFOFFSET).

■

Convert objects into procedural surfaces on page 1097. Convert existing
solids (including composite objects), surfaces, and meshes into procedural
surfaces (CONVTOSURFACE command).

■

Convert procedural surfaces into NURBS surfaces on page 1097. Some objects
cannot be converted directly to NURBS (for example, mesh objects). In
that case, convert the object to a procedural surface and then convert it
to a NURBS surface. (CONVTONURBS command).

Overview of Creating Surfaces | 1081

Understand Surface Continuity and Bulge Magnitude
Surface continuity and bulge magnitude are properties that are frequently
used when creating surfaces. When you create a new surface, you can specify
the continuity and bulge magnitude with special grips.
Continuity is a measure of how smoothly two curves or surfaces flow into
each other. The type of continuity can be important if you need to export
your surfaces to other applications.
Continuity types include the following:
■

G0 (Position). Measures location only. If the edge of each surface is
collinear, the surfaces are positionally continuous (G0) at the edge curves.
Note that two surfaces can meet at any angle and still have positional
continuity.

1082 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

■

G1 (Tangency). Includes both positional and tangential continuity (G0 +
G1). With tangentially continuous surfaces, the end tangents match at the
common edges. The two surfaces appear to be traveling in the same
direction at the join, but they may have very different apparent “speeds”
(or rates of change in direction, also called curvature).

■

G2 (Curvature). Includes positional, tangential, and curvature continuity
(G0 + G1+G2). The two surfaces share the same curvature.

Bulge magnitude is a measure of how much surface curves or “bulges” as it
flows into another surface. Magnitude can be between 0 and 1 where 0 is flat
and 1 curves the most.

Set Surface Properties Before and After Creation
Set defaults that control a variety of surface properties before and after you
create the surface objects.
■

Surface Modeling System Variables. There are a number of system variables
that are frequently used and changed during surface creation:
SURFACEMODELINGMODE, SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY,
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG, SURFACEAUTOTRIM, and
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE.

Overview of Creating Surfaces | 1083

■

Properties palette. Modifies properties for both the surface objects and
their subobjects after they are created. For example, you can change the
number of isolines in the U and V directions.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DOSNAP
Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.
ANALYSISZEBRA
Projects stripes onto a 3D model to analyze surface continuity.
BREP
Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity
from surfaces.
CONVTONURBS
Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces.
CONVTOSURFACE
Converts objects to 3D surfaces.
EXTRUDE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object.
JOIN
Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.
LOFT
Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections.
PLANESURF
Creates a planar surface.
REVOLVE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis.
SURFBLEND
Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces.

1084 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

SURFNETWORK
Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions
(including surface and solid edge subobjects).
SURFOFFSET
Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface.
SURFPATCH
Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed
loop.
SWEEP
Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject
along a path.
VISUALSTYLES
Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.

System Variables
3DOSMODE
Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps.
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
FACETRES
Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with
hidden lines removed.
ISOLINES
Specifies the number of contour lines displayed on the curved surfaces of 3D
solids.
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE
Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted
when you roll over them.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY
Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from
which they were created.

Overview of Creating Surfaces | 1085

SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG
Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces.
SURFACEMODELINGMODE
Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS
surfaces.

Create Procedural Surfaces
Create procedural surfaces by blending, patching, and offsetting existing
surfaces or by converting 3D solids, meshes and other planar geometry.

Create Surfaces from Other Surfaces
There are many ways to create procedural surfaces from existing surfaces.
These include blending, patching, and offsetting or creating network and
planar surfaces.
When you create procedural surfaces, use SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY to work
with the surfaces as a group. Just as you can modify the face of a solid and
have the entire solid update, when you modify a group of surfaces that are
associative, all of the surfaces update accordingly.

Create Planar Surfaces
Create planar surfaces in the space between edge subobjects, splines and other
2D and 3D curves.
Create planar surfaces with the PLANESURF command Planar surfaces can be
created from multiple closed objects and the curves can be surface or solid
edge subobjects. During creation, specify the tangency and bulge magnitude.
See also:
■

Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1080

To create a planar surface

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Planar.

1086 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

2 Click and drag an area onscreen.
3 Hold Shift and press the mouse wheel to orbit and inspect the planar
surface.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DOSNAP
Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
PLANESURF
Creates a planar surface.
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
VISUALSTYLES
Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.

Create Procedural Surfaces | 1087

Create Network Surfaces
Create non-planar surfaces in the space between edge subobjects, splines and
other 2D and 3D curves.
Create non-planar, network surfaces with the SURFNETWORK command.
Network surfaces are similar to lofted surfaces in that they are created in the
space between several curves in the U and V directions. The curves can be
surface or solid edge subobjects. When you create the surface you can specify
the tangency and bulge magnitude of the surface edges.
See also:
■

Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1080

To create a network surface

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Network.
2 In the drawing area, select cross section curves in the first direction (U
or V) and press Enter.
3 Select cross sections in the second direction and press Enter.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DOSNAP
Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.

1088 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
SURFNETWORK
Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions
(including surface and solid edge subobjects).
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
VISUALSTYLES
Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.

System Variables
3DOSMODE
Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps.
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE
Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted
when you roll over them.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY
Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from
which they were created.

Create Procedural Surfaces | 1089

Blend a Surface
Create a transition surface between two existing surfaces.
Use SURFBLEND to create a new surface between existing surfaces and solids.
When you blend surfaces together, specify the surface continuity and bulge
magnitude for the start and end edges.
See also:
■

Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1080

To create a blend surface between a surface and a solid

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Blend.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Edge.
NOTE If the drawing area is very busy, use the CULLINGOBJ and the
CULLINGOBJSELECTION to further filter out unneeded objects.
3 In the drawing area, select a surface edge subobject and a solid edge
subobject.
4 Specify the continuity and bulge magnitude for each edge and press Enter.

1090 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

SURFBLEND
Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces.
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
VISUALSTYLES
Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.

System Variables
3DOSMODE
Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps.
CULLINGOBJ
Controls whether 3D subobjects that are hidden from view can be highlighted
or selected.
CULLINGOBJSELECTION
Controls whether 3D objects that are hidden from view can be highlighted
or selected.
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY
Controls the transparency of the preview generated while using SURFBLEND,
SURFPATCH, SURFFILLET, FILLETEDGE, CHAMFEREDGE, and LOFT.
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE
Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted
when you roll over them.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY
Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from
which they were created.

Patch a Surface
Create a surface by patching a closed surface or curve.

Create Procedural Surfaces | 1091

Use SURFPATCH to create a surface inside a closed curve (such as a closed
spline) that is another surface’s edge. You can also draw a guide curve to
constrain the shape of the patch surface with the constrain geometry option.
When you patch surfaces, specify the continuity and bulge magnitude.
See also:
■

Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1080

To patch the top of a closed surface

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Patch.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Edge.
NOTE If the drawing area is very busy, use the CULLINGOBJ and the
CULLINGOBJSELECTION to further filter out unneeded objects.
3 In the drawing area, select a surface edge subobject.
4 Specify the continuity and bulge magnitude and press Enter.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DOSNAP
Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
SURFPATCH
Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed
loop.

1092 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
VISUALSTYLES
Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.

Offset a Surface
Create a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface.
With SURFOFFSET specify the offset distance and whether or not the offset
surface maintains associativity with the original surface. You can also specify
the offset distance with a mathematical expression. See Constrain a Design
with Formulas and Equations on page 903.

Create Procedural Surfaces | 1093

Surface Offset Options
When you offset a surface, you can do the following:
■

Change the offset direction with the Flip option

■

Offset in both directions to create two new surfaces

■

Create a solid between the offset surfaces

■

If you are offsetting more than one surface, you can specify whether the
offset surfaces remain connected.

1094 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

■

Enter an expression that will constrain the distance of the offset surface
to the original surface. This option only appears if associativity is on. See
Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations on page 903.

See also:
■

Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1080

To create a solid from an offset surface

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Offset.
2 In the drawing area, select a surface and press Enter. Arrows display to
show the offset direction.
3 Enter s and press Enter.
4 Enter an offset distance and press Enter.
The surface creates a parallel surface and connects the two to form a 3D solid
object.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DOSNAP
Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.

Create Procedural Surfaces | 1095

LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
SURFOFFSET
Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface.
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
VISUALSTYLES
Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.

System Variables
3DOSMODE
Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps.
CULLINGOBJ
Controls whether 3D subobjects that are hidden from view can be highlighted
or selected.
CULLINGOBJSELECTION
Controls whether 3D objects that are hidden from view can be highlighted
or selected.
DELOBJ
Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE
Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted
when you roll over them.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY
Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from
which they were created.

1096 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Convert Objects to Procedural Surfaces
Convert 3D solids, meshes, and 2D geometry to procedural surfaces.
Use CONVTOSURFACE to convert any of the following objects into surfaces:
■

2D solids

■

Meshes

■

Regions

■

Open, zero-width polylines with thickness

■

Lines with thickness

■

Arcs with thickness

■

Planar 3D faces

To convert one or more objects to surfaces

1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Convert to Surface.
2 Select the objects you want to convert and press Enter.

Quick Reference
Commands
CONVTOSURFACE
Converts objects to 3D surfaces.

Create NURBS Surfaces
See also:
■

Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves on page 1030

■

Create Surfaces from Other Surfaces on page 1086

■

Edit NURBS Surfaces on page 1225

■

Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves on page 1227

Create NURBS Surfaces | 1097

■

Draw Splines on page 723

■

Modify Splines on page 853

Create NURBS surfaces by enabling NURBS creation and using many of the
same commands used to create procedural surfaces. You can also convert
existing procedural surfaces into NURBS surfaces.
NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines) surfaces are part of the suite of 3D
modeling objects that AutoCAD offers (in addition to 3D solids, procedural
surfaces, and meshes).
NURBS surfaces are based on Bezier curves or splines. Therefore, settings such
as degree, fit points, control vertices, weights, and knot parameterization are
important in defining a NURBS surface or curve. AutoCAD splines are
optimized to create NURBS surfaces allowing you to control many of these
options (see SPLINE and SPLINEDIT). The illustration below shows the control
vertices that display when you select a NURBS surface or spline.

Two Methods for Creating NURBS Surfaces
There are two ways to create NURBS surfaces:
■

SURFACEMODELINGMODE system variable - Use any of the surface creation
commands while this system variable is set to 1.

■

CONVTONURBS command - Convert any existing surfaces with this
command.

It is important to plan ahead with NURBS modeling, since NURBS surfaces
cannot be converted back into procedural surfaces.

1098 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

To create a NURBS surface by lofting

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ NURBS Creation
already enabled).

(if it is not

2 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Loft.
3 Select the cross section profiles and press Enter. Select them in the order
in which you want the new 3D object to pass through them.
After the loft operation, the original objects are deleted or retained,
depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable.

To convert a solid into a NURBS surface

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices panel ➤ Convert to NURBS.
2 Select a solid and press Enter. The object is converted into multiple NURBS
surfaces (each face becomes a separate surface).
NOTE To display the control vertices, click Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices

panel ➤ Show CV.

To convert a mesh object into a NURBS surface

1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Convert Mesh ➤ Convert to Surface.
2 Select a mesh object and press Enter.
The object is converted to a procedural surface.

3 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ NURBS Creation.
The object is converted to a NURBS surface.

Create NURBS Surfaces | 1099

NOTE To display the control vertices, click Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices
panel ➤ Show CV.

Quick Reference
Commands
CONVTONURBS
Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces.
CVSHOW
Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves.
EXTRUDE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
LOFT
Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
REVOLVE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis.
SPLINE
Creates a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of fit points, or that
is defined by the vertices in a control frame.
SPLINEDIT
Modifies the parameters of a spline or converts a spline-fit polyline to a
spline.
SURFBLEND
Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces.

1100 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

SURFEXTEND
Lengthens a surface by a specified distance.
SURFFILLET
Creates a filleted surface between two other surfaces.
SURFNETWORK
Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions
(including surface and solid edge subobjects).
SURFOFFSET
Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface.
SURFPATCH
Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed
loop.
SWEEP
Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject
along a path.

System Variables
SURFACEMODELINGMODE
Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS
surfaces.

Using the Spline tool to create NURBS Surfaces and Splines
See also:
■

Draw Splines on page 723

■

Modify Splines on page 853

The spline tool is optimized to work with NURBS modeling
NURBS surfaces can be created from a number of 2D objects, including edge
subobjects, polylines, and arcs. But the spline tool is the only object that has
options that are compatible with creating NURBS surface. Not only do splines
consists of Bezier arcs, but they also can be defined with both control vertices

Create NURBS Surfaces | 1101

and fit points. The fit points and control vertices offer different editing options
such as knot parameterization and degree options.

Moving Fit Points vs. Moving Control Vertices
NURBS curves have both fit points and control vertices. The fit points lie on
the line, and the control vertices lay outside the line. Use fit points to make
a change to one small part of a curve; use control vertices to make changes
that will affect the shape of the curve as a whole.

Clamp Surfaces and Curves with Open and Closed Geometry
NURBS surfaces and curves can have a clamp, closed, or open form. The form
affects how the object deforms.
■

Open Curves and surfaces - have their start and end CVs in different
positions - it doesn’t form a loop. If you snap the start and end CVs of an
open curve to the same position, it’s still an open curve, because you can
still drag these points away from one another.

■

Closed Curves and Surfaces - a loop with coinciding start and end CVs.
Where they meet is called a seam. If you move one CV, the other moves
with it.

■

Clamp Curve - is a closed loop with a seam that creates extra, unseen CVs.
These unseen CVs can cause the shape to wrinkle and crease when it is
reshaped.

Quick Reference
Commands
SPLINE
Creates a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of fit points, or that
is defined by the vertices in a control frame.
SPLINEDIT
Modifies the parameters of a spline or converts a spline-fit polyline to a
spline.

1102 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

System Variables
SURFACEMODELINGMODE
Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS
surfaces.

Create Associative Surfaces
Associative surfaces automatically adjust to changes made to other, related
objects.
When surface associativity is on, surfaces are created with a relationship to
the surface or profiles that created them.
Associativity allows you to:
■

Reshape the generating profiles to automatically reshape the surface.

■

Work with a group of surfaces as if they were one object. Just as reshaping
one face of a solid box adjusts the entire primitive, reshaping one surface
or edge in a group of associated surfaces adjusts the entire group.

■

Use geometric constraints on the 2D profiles of a surface.

■

Assign mathematical expressions to derive properties of surfaces, such as
height and radius. For example, specify that the height of an extruded
surface be equal to one half the lengh of another object.

As you add more objects and edit them, all these objects become related and
create a chain of dependency. Editing one object can ripple through and affect
all associated objects.
It is important to understand the chain of associativity because moving or
deleting one of the links in the chain can break the relationship between all
the objects.
NOTE To modify the shape of a surface that is generated from a curve or spline,
you must select and modify the generating curve or spline, not the surface itself.
If you modify the surface itself, you will lose associativity.
When associativity is on, the DELOBJ system variable is ignored. If Surface
Associativity and NURBS Creation are both on, surface are created as NURBS
surfaces, not associative surfaces.

Create Associative Surfaces | 1103

Save time by planning your model ahead; you cannot go back and add
associativity after the model has been created. Also, be careful not to
accidentally break associativity by dragging objects away from the group.

To create an associative surface
■

Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Surface Associativity.
Any new procedural surfaces will be associative.
NOTE NURBS creation overrides Surface Associativity. If Surface Associativity
and NURBS Creation are both on, surface associativity will not work.

To see what objects a surface is associated with
1 In a drawing, select an associative surface.
2 Open the properties palette, in Surface Associativity, select Show from
the Show Associativity drop-down list.
3 Roll over the surface and nearby objects.
The associated objects, such as generating curves or edge subobjects highlight
as well as the surface itself.

To turn associativity off for a particular surface
1 In a drawing, select an associative surface.
2 Open the properties palette, in Surface Associativity, select Non from the
Maintain Associativity drop-down list.
The surface maintains its associativity to other objects. But any new objects
that are created will not be associated with this surface. It breaks the chain of
associativity.

To remove associativity from a surface
1 In a drawing, select an associative surface.
2 Open the properties palette, in Surface Associativity, select Remove from
the Maintain Associativity drop-down list.
The surface becomes a generic surface. You can no longer change any or its
properties in the properties palette and it loses its relationship with other
objects.

1104 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Quick Reference
Commands
BREP
Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity
from surfaces.
EXTRUDE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object.
JOIN
Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
LOFT
Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
PLANESURF
Creates a planar surface.
PROJECTGEOMETRY
Projects points, lines, or curves onto a 3D solid or surface from different
directions.
REVOLVE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis.
SURFBLEND
Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces.
SURFNETWORK
Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions
(including surface and solid edge subobjects).
SURFOFFSET
Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface.

Create Associative Surfaces | 1105

SURFPATCH
Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed
loop.
SWEEP
Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject
along a path.
VISUALSTYLES
Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.

System Variables
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY
Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from
which they were created.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG
Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces.

Create Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces
Use geometric constraints to constrain and restrict surfaces. And use
mathematical expressions to derive surface properties.

Use Geometric Constraints with Surface Profiles
Just as with 2D drafting, geometric constraints can be used to restrict the
movement of 3D surfaces. For example, you can specify that a surface remain
fixed in a perpendicular or parallel location to another object. In the example
below, an offset surface is locked in a parallel position to its original surface.

Constraints are applied to the 2D profile object used to create the surface, not
the surface itself. Use selection cycling to be sure that you are selecting the

1106 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

profile curve and not the surface or the edge subobject. See Apply or Remove
Geometric Constraints on page 872.

Use Mathematical Expressions to Derive Surface Properties
Dimensional constraints are user-defined expressions that are applied in the
Properties palette for that surface.

For a complete list of operators and functions allowed in expressions, see
Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager on page 905. The following
table lists the surface types and their properties that accept expressions
Type of Surface

Surface properties that can be constrained.

Blend Surface

Bulge Magnitude

Extend Surface

Extension Distance

Extruded Surface

■

Height

■

Taper

Fillet Surface

Fillet Radius

Loft Surface

Bulge Magnitude

Network Surface

Bulge Magnitude

Offset Surface

Offset Distance

Patch Surface

Bulge Magnitude

Create Associative Surfaces | 1107

Type of Surface

Surface properties that can be constrained.

Revolve Surface

Revolve Angle

To create a parallel relationship between two surfaces
1 Enter dsettings and select the Selection Cycling tab.
2 Click Allow Selection Cycling to turn selection cycling on.
3 Enter geomconstraint. Enter pa to select the parallel option.
4 Select the first and second profile objects. Be careful not to select the
surface or the edge subobject.
If the surfaces were not already parallel, they are moved into a parallel location
and the parallel constraint symbol appears.

To add a user expression to specify the height of a surface
1 Right-click on a surface and select Properties.
The properties palette displays.
2 In the Geometry section, enter an expression in the Height field.
A symbol appears next to that field to indicate that a dimensional
constraint is applied to this property.

1108 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

DCDISPLAY
Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of
objects.
DELCONSTRAINT
Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of
objects.
DIMCONSTRAINT
Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or
converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.
GEOMCONSTRAINT
Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.
PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
-PARAMETERS
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional
constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current
drawing.
PARAMETERSCLOSE
Closes the Parameters Manager palette.
TEXTEDIT
Edits a selected multiline or single-line text object, or the text in a dimension
object.

Create Associative Surfaces | 1109

System Variables
CCONSTRAINTFORM
Controls whether annotational or dynamic constraints are applied to objects.
CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY
Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when
you select geometrically constrained drawings.
CONSTRAINTBARMODE
Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars.
CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT
Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
CONSTRAINTRELAX
Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE
Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints.
DIMCONSTRAINTICON
Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints.
DYNCONSTRAINTMODE
Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are
selected.
PARAMETERCOPYMODE
Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when
constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts,
and block definitions.
PARAMETERSSTATUS
Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY
Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from
which they were created.

1110 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Create Meshes
Create meshes from primitive forms or by filling between points on other
objects.

Overview of Creating Meshes
Mesh tessellation provides enhanced capabilities for modeling object shapes
in a more detailed way.

Starting with , the default mesh object type can be smoothed, creased, split,
and refined. Although you can continue to create the legacy polyface and
polygon mesh types, you can obtain more predictable results by converting
to the newer mesh object type.

Methods for Creating Mesh
You can create mesh objects using the following methods:
■

Create mesh primitives. Create standard shapes, such as boxes, cones,
cylinders, pyramids, spheres, wedges, and tori (MESH).

■

Create mesh from other objects. Create ruled, tabulated, revolved, or
edge-defined mesh objects, whose boundaries are interpolated from other
objects or points (RULESURF, TABSURF, REVSURF, EDGESURF).

■

Convert from other object types. Convert existing solid or surface models,
including composite models, to mesh objects (MESHSMOOTH).
You can also convert the legacy style of mesh to the new mesh object type.

■

Create custom meshes (legacy). Use 3DMESH to create polygon meshes,
usually scripted with AutoLISP routines, to create open-ended mesh. Use
PFACE to create mesh with multiple vertices defined by coordinates that

Create Meshes | 1111

you specify. Although you can continue to create legacy polygonal and
polyface meshes, it is recommended that you convert to the enhanced
mesh object type to obtain enhanced editing capabilities.

About Tessellation
Tessellation is a collection of planar shapes that tile a mesh object. The
tessellation divisions, visible in unselected mesh objects, mark the edges of
the editable mesh faces. (To see these divisions in the Hidden or Conceptual
visual styles, VSEDGES must be set to 1.)
When you smooth and refine mesh objects, you increase the density of the
tessellation (the number of subdivisions).
■

Smoothing. Increases how closely the mesh surface adheres to a rounded
form. You can increase mesh smoothness levels for selected objects in
increments or by changing the smoothness level in the Properties palette.
Smoothness level 0 (zero) applies the lowest level of smoothing to a mesh
object. Smoothness level 4 applies a high degree of smoothness.

■

Refinement. Quadruples the number of subdivisions in a selected mesh
object or in a selected subobject, such as a face. Refinement also resets the
current smoothness level to 0, so that the object can no longer be sharpened
beyond that level. Because refinement greatly increases the density of a
mesh, you might want to restrict this option to areas that require finely
detailed modification. Refinement also helps you mold smaller sections
with less effect on the overall shape of the model.

1112 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

While highly refined mesh gives you the ability to make detailed modifications,
it also comes at a cost: it can decrease program performance. By maintaining
maximum smoothness, face, and grid levels, you can help ensure that you do
not create meshes that are too dense to modify effectively. (Use
SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV, SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE, and
SMOOTHMESHGRID.)

Set Mesh Properties Before and After Creation
You can set defaults that control a variety of mesh properties before and after
you create the mesh objects.
■

Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. Sets the density of the tessellation (the
number of subdivisions) per dimension for each type of mesh object you
create.

■

Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box. Sets the default settings for 3D solid
or surface objects that you convert to mesh. Options define how closely
mesh faces adhere to the shape of the object and level of smoothness. You
can also set the default to prefer the settings in the Mesh Primitive Options
dialog box for object conversions.

■

Properties palette. Modifies properties for both the mesh object and its
subobjects after they are created. For a selected mesh object, you can modify
the level of smoothness. For faces and edges, you can apply or remove
creasing, and modify crease retention levels.

■

Level of smoothness. By default, the mesh primitive objects that you create
have no smoothness. You can change this default with the Settings option
of the MESH command. The modified smoothness value is maintained
only during the current drawing session.

Overview of Creating Meshes | 1113

See also:
■

Modify Mesh Objects on page 1238

To set the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects
1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshmaxlev.
2 Enter a value from 1 to 255.
(Use lower numbers to prevent extremely dense meshes that might affect
program performance.)

To set the maximum number of faces for mesh objects
1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshmaxface.
2 Enter a value from 1 to 16,000,000.

To control the display of the mesh facet grid
1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshgrid.
2 Set the smoothness level at which the mesh object displays the underlying
facet grid:
■

0 hides the display of the underlying facet grid.

■

1 displays the facet grid for smoothness levels 0 and 1.

■

2 or higher specifies the highest level of smoothness at which the
facet grid is displayed.

To change the default level of smoothness of new mesh primitive objects
1 At the Command prompt, enter mesh. Then enter se (SEttings).
2 Enter a smoothness value and press Enter.
(A smoothness level of 5 or less is recommended.)
3 Press Esc to end the command or specify a mesh primitive type to create.
The smoothness value is retained for the current drawing session.

1114 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Quick Reference
Commands
3DFACE
Creates a three-sided or four-sided surface in 3D space.
3DMESH
Creates a free-form polygon mesh.
EDGESURF
Creates a mesh between four contiguous edges or curves.
MESH
Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid,
sphere, wedge, or torus.
MESHOPTIONS
Displays the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box, which controls default
settings for converting existing objects to mesh objects.
MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS
Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation
defaults for primitive mesh objects.
MESHSMOOTH
Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh
objects.
PFACE
Creates a 3D polyface mesh vertex by vertex.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
REVSURF
Creates a mesh by revolving a profile about an axis.
RULESURF
Creates a mesh that represents the surface between two lines or curves.
TABSURF
Creates a mesh from a line or curve that is swept along a straight path.

Overview of Creating Meshes | 1115

System Variables
SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV
Sets the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects.
SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE
Sets the maximum number of faces permitted for mesh objects.
SMOOTHMESHGRID
Sets the maximum level of smoothness at which the underlying mesh facet
grid is displayed on 3D mesh objects.
VSEDGES
Controls the types of edges that are displayed in the viewport.

Create 3D Mesh Primitives
Create mesh boxes, cones, cylinders, pyramids, spheres, wedges, and tori.

Create a Mesh Box
Create a rectangular or cubical mesh box.

The base of the mesh box is drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS
(work plane).
The following system variables are used to control the number of divisions
for each dimension of a new mesh box:
■

DIVMESHBOXHEIGHT

■

DIVMESHBOXLENGTH

■

DIVMESHBOXWIDTH

1116 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

You can also use the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box to set the default
number of divisions for a mesh box.
After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object
can be modified.

Mesh Box Creation Options
The Box option of the MESH command provides several methods for
determining the size and rotation of the mesh boxes you create.
■

Create a cube. Use the Cube option to create a mesh box with sides of
equal length.

■

Specify rotation. Use the Cube or Length option if you want to set the
rotation of the box in the XY plane.

■

Start from the center point. Use the Center option to create a box using
a specified center point.

To create a mesh box based on two points and a height

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Box.
2 Specify the first corner of the base.
3 Specify the opposite corner of the base.
4 Specify the height.

To create a mesh box based on length, width, and height

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Box.
2 Specify the first corner of the base.
3 At the Command prompt, enter l (Length). Specify the length of the base.
4 Specify the width of the base.
5 Specify the height.

Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1117

To create a mesh box based on a center point, corner of base, and height

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Box.
2 At the Command prompt, enter c (Center). Specify the center point of
the base.
3 To set the location of the corner of the base, use one of the following
methods:
■

To set the length and width simultaneously: Specify the location of
one corner of the base.

■

To set the length and width separately: At the Command prompt,
enter l (Length) and specify the length. Then specify the width.

■

Specify the height.

To create a mesh cube

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Box.
2 Specify the first corner or enter c (Center) and specify the center point
of the base.
3 At the Command prompt, enter c (Cube). Specify the length of the cube
and a rotation angle.

Quick Reference
Commands
MESH
Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid,
sphere, wedge, or torus.
MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS
Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation
defaults for primitive mesh objects.

1118 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

System Variables
DIVMESHBOXHEIGHT
Sets the number of subdivisions for the height of a mesh box along the Z
axis.
DIVMESHBOXLENGTH
Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh box along the X
axis.
DIVMESHBOXWIDTH
Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of a mesh box along the Y axis.
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

Create a Mesh Cone
Create a pointed or frustum mesh cone with a circular or elliptical base.

By default, the base of the mesh cone lies on the XY plane of the current UCS
and the height of the cone is parallel to the Z axis.
The following system variables are used to control the number of divisions
for each dimension of a new mesh cone:
■

DIVMESHCONEAXIS

■

DIVMESHCONEBASE

■

DIVMESHCONEHEIGHT

You can also use the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box to set the default
number of divisions for a mesh cone.

Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1119

After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object
can be modified.

Mesh Cone Creation Options
The Cone option of the MESH command provides several methods for
determining the size and rotation of the mesh cones you create.
■

Set the height and orientation. Use the Axis Endpoint option when you
want to reorient the cone by placing the tip or axis endpoint anywhere in
3D space.

■

Create a frustum of a cone. Use the Top Radius option to create a frustum
of a cone, which tapers to an elliptical or planar face.

■

Specify circumference and base plane. The 3P (Three Points) option defines
the size and plane of the base of the cone anywhere in 3D space.

■

Create an elliptical base. Use the Elliptical option to create a cone base
whose axes are different lengths.

■

Set the location to be tangent to two objects. Use the Ttr (Tangent,
Tangent, Radius) option to define points on two objects. Depending on
the radius distance, the new cone is located as near as possible to the
tangent points you specify. You can set up tangency with circles, arcs,
lines, and some 3D objects. The tangency points are projected onto the
current UCS. The appearance of tangency is affected by the current level
of smoothness.

To create a mesh cone with a circular base

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cone.
2 Specify the center point of the base.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.
4 Specify the height of the cone.

To create a mesh cone with an elliptical base

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cone.
2 At the Command prompt, enter e (Elliptical).

1120 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

3 Specify the start point of first axis.
4 Specify the endpoint of the first axis.
5 Specify the endpoint (length and rotation) of the second axis.
6 Specify the height of the cone.

To create a frustum of a mesh cone

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cone.
2 Specify the center point of the base.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.
4 At the Command prompt, enter t (Top radius). Specify the top radius.
5 Specify the height of the cone.

To create a mesh cone with the height and orientation specified by the axis
endpoint

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cone.
2 Specify the center point of the base.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.
4 At the Command prompt, enter a (Axis endpoint). Specify the endpoint
and rotation of the cone.
This endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space.

Quick Reference
Commands
MESH
Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid,
sphere, wedge, or torus.

Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1121

MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS
Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation
defaults for primitive mesh objects.

System Variables
DIVMESHCONEAXIS
Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cone base.
DIVMESHCONEBASE
Sets the number of subdivisions between the perimeter and the center point
of the mesh cone base.
DIVMESHCONEHEIGHT
Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the point or top of
the mesh cone.
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

Create a Mesh Cylinder
Create a mesh cylinder with a circular or elliptical base.

By default, the base of the mesh cylinder lies on the XY plane of the current
UCS. The height of the cylinder is parallel to the Z axis.
The following system variables are used to control the number of divisions
for each dimension of a new mesh cylinder:
■

DIVMESHCYLAXIS

1122 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

■

DIVMESHCYLBASE

■

DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT

You can also use the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box to set the default
number of divisions for a mesh cylinder.
After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object
can be modified.

Mesh Cylinder Creation Options
The Cylinder option of the MESH command provides several methods for
determining the size and rotation of the mesh cylinders you create.
■

Set rotation. Use the Axis Endpoint option to set the height and rotation
of the cylinder. The center point of the top plane of the cylinder is the
axis endpoint, which can be located anywhere in 3D space.

■

Use three points to define the base. Use the 3P (Three Points) option to
define the base of the cylinder. You can set three points anywhere in 3D
space.

■

Create an elliptical base. Use the Elliptical option to create a cylinder base
whose axes are different lengths.

■

Set the location to be tangent to two objects. Use the Ttr (Tangent,
Tangent, Radius) option to define points on two objects. Depending on
the radius distance, the new cylinder is located as near as possible to the
tangent points you specify. You can set up tangency with circles, arcs,
lines, and some 3D objects. The tangency points are projected onto the
current UCS. The appearance of tangency is affected by the current level
of smoothness.

To create a mesh cylinder with a circular base

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cylinder.
2 Specify the center point of the base.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.
4 Specify the height of the cylinder.

Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1123

To create a mesh cylinder with an elliptical base

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cylinder.
2 At the Command prompt, enter e (Elliptical).
3 Specify the start point of the first axis.
4 Specify the endpoint of the first axis.
5 Specify the endpoint (length and rotation) of the second axis.
6 Specify the height of the cylinder.

To create a mesh cylinder with the height and rotation specified (axis
endpoint)

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cylinder.
2 Specify the center point of the base.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.
4 At the Command prompt, enter a (Axis endpoint). Specify the axis
endpoint of the cylinder.
This endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space.

1124 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

System Variables
DIVMESHCYLAXIS
Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cylinder
base.
DIVMESHCYLBASE
Sets the number of radial subdivisions from the center of the mesh cylinder
base to its perimeter.
DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT
Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh
cylinder.
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

Create a Mesh Pyramid
Create a mesh pyramid with up to 32 sides.

Create a pyramid that tapers to a point, or create a frustum of a pyramid,
which tapers to a planar face.
The following system variables are used to control the number of divisions
for each dimension of a new mesh pyramid:
■

DIVMESHPYRBASE

■

DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT

■

DIVMESHPYRLENGTH

You can also use the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box to set the default
number of divisions for a mesh pyramid.

Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1125

After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object
can be modified.

Mesh Pyramid Creation Options
The Pyramid option of the MESH command provides several methods for
determining the size and rotation of the mesh pyramids you create.
■

Set the number of sides. Use the Sides option to set the number of sides
for the mesh pyramid.

■

Set the length of the edges. Use the Edges option to specify the dimension
of the sides at the base.

■

Create a frustum of a pyramid. Use the Top Radius option to create a
frustum, which tapers to a planar face. The frustum face is parallel to, and
has the same number of sides as, the base.

■

Set the height and rotation of the pyramid. Use the Axis Endpoint option
to specify the height and rotation of the pyramid. This endpoint is the top
of the pyramid. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space.

■

Set the perimeter to be inscribed or circumscribed. Specify whether the
pyramid base is drawn inside or outside of the radius.

1126 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

To create a mesh pyramid

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Pyramid.
2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Sides). Enter the number of sides to
use.
3 Specify the center point of the base.
4 Specify the radius or diameter of the base.
5 Specify the height of the pyramid.

To create a frustum of a mesh pyramid

Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1127

System Variables
DIVMESHPYRBASE
Sets the number of radial subdivisions between the center of the mesh
pyramid base and its perimeter.
DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT
Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh
pyramid.
DIVMESHPYRLENGTH
Sets the number of subdivisions along each dimension of a mesh pyramid
base.
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

Create a Mesh Sphere
Create a mesh sphere using one of several methods.

When you start with the center point, the central axis of the mesh sphere
parallels the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS).
The following system variables are used to control the number of divisions
for each dimension of a new mesh sphere:
■

DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS

■

DIVMESHSPHEREHEIGHT

You can also use the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box to set the default
number of divisions for a mesh sphere.

1128 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object
can be modified.

Mesh Sphere Creation Options
The Sphere option of the MESH command provides several methods for
determining the size and rotation of the mesh spheres you create.
■

■

Set the location to be tangent to two objects. Use the Ttr (Tangent,
Tangent, Radius) option to define points on two objects. Depending on
the radius distance, the sphere is located as near as possible to the tangent
points you specify. You can set up tangency with circles, arcs, lines, and
some 3D objects. The tangency points are projected onto the current UCS.
The appearance of tangency is affected by the current level of smoothness.

To create a mesh sphere

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Sphere.
2 Specify the center of the sphere.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the sphere.

To create a mesh sphere defined by three points

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Sphere.
2 Specify the center of the sphere.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the sphere.

Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1129

System Variables
DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS
Sets the number of radial subdivisions around the axis endpoint of the mesh
sphere.
DIVMESHSPHEREHEIGHT
Sets the number of subdivisions between the two axis endpoints of the mesh
sphere.
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

Create a Mesh Wedge
Create a mesh wedge with rectangular or cubical faces.

The base of the wedge is drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS
with the sloped face opposite the first corner. The height of the wedge is
parallel to the Z axis.

1130 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

The following system variables are used to control the number of divisions
for each dimension of a new mesh wedge:
■

DIVMESHWEDGEBASE

■

DIVMESHWEDGEHEIGHT

■

DIVMESHWEDGELENGTH

■

DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE

■

DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH

You can also use the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box to set the default
number of divisions for a mesh wedge.
After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object
can be modified.

Mesh Wedge Creation Options
The Wedge option of the MESH command provides several methods for
determining the size and rotation of the mesh wedges you create.
■

Create a wedge with sides of equal length. Use the Cube option.

■

Specify rotation. Use the Cube or Length option if you want to set the
rotation of the mesh wedge in the XY plane.

■

Start from the center point. Use the Center Point option.

To create a mesh wedge based on two points and a height

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Wedge.
2 Specify the first corner of the base.
3 Specify the opposite corner of the base.
4 Specify the height of the wedge.

To create a mesh wedge based on length, width, and height

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Wedge.

Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1131

2 Specify the first corner of the base.
3 At the Command prompt, enter l (Length). Specify the length of the base.
4 Specify the width of the base.
5 Specify the height of the wedge.

To create a mesh wedge based on a center point, corner of base, and height

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Wedge.
2 At the Command prompt, enter c (Center). Specify the center point of
the base.
3 To set the location of a corner of the base, use one of the following
methods:
■

To set the length and width simultaneously: Specify the location of
one corner of the base.

■

To set the length and width separately: At the Command prompt,
enter l (Length) and specify the length. Then specify the width.

4 Specify the height of the wedge.

To create a mesh wedge with equal length, width, and height

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Wedge.
2 Specify the first corner or enter c (Center) to set the center point of the
base.
3 At the Command prompt, enter c (Cube). Specify the length of the wedge
and a rotation angle.
The length value sets both the width and height of the wedge.

1132 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

System Variables
DIVMESHWEDGEBASE
Sets the number of subdivisions between the midpoint of the perimeter of
triangular dimension of the mesh wedge.
DIVMESHWEDGEHEIGHT
Sets the number of subdivisions for the height of the mesh wedge along the
Z axis.
DIVMESHWEDGELENGTH
Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh wedge along the X
axis.
DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE
Sets the number of subdivisions in the slope that extends from the apex of
the wedge to the edge of the base.
DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH
Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of the mesh wedge along the
Y axis.
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

Create a Mesh Torus
Create a ring-shaped solid that resembles the inner tube of a tire.

Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1133

A mesh torus has two radius values. One value defines the tube. The other
value defines the path, which is equivalent to the distance from the center of
the torus to the center of the tube. By default, a torus is drawn parallel to and
is bisected by the XY plane of the current UCS.
A mesh torus can be self-intersecting. A self-intersecting mesh torus has no
center hole because the radius of the tube is greater than the radius of the
torus.
The following system variables are used to control the number of divisions
for each dimension of a new mesh torus:
■

DIVMESHTORUSPATH

■

DIVMESHTORUSSECTION

You can also use the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box to set the default
number of divisions for a mesh torus.
After a mesh primitive is created, the current level of smoothness for the object
can be modified.

Torus Creation Options
The Torus option of the MESH command provides several methods for
determining the size and rotation of the mesh tori you create.
■

Set the size and plane of the circumference or radius. Use the 3P (Three
Points) option to define the size of the mesh torus anywhere in 3D space.
The three points also define the plane of the circumference. Use this option
to rotate the mesh torus as you create it.

■

Set the circumference or radius. Use the 2P (Two Points) option to define
the size of the mesh torus anywhere in 3D space. The plane of the
circumference matches the Z value of the first point.

■

Set the location to be tangent to two objects. Use the Ttr (Tangent,
Tangent, Radius) option to define points on two objects. Depending on
the specified radius distance, the path of the torus is located as near as

1134 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

possible to the tangent points you specify. You can set up tangency with
circles, arcs, lines, and some 3D objects. The tangency points are projected
onto the current UCS. The appearance of tangency is affected by the current
level of smoothness.

To create a mesh torus

1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Torus.
2 Specify the center of the torus.
3 Specify the radius or diameter of the overall path that is swept by the
torus tube.
4 Specify the radius or diameter of the tube.

System Variables
DIVMESHTORUSPATH
Sets the number of subdivisions in the path that is swept by the profile of a
mesh torus.
DIVMESHTORUSSECTION
Sets the number of subdivisions in the profile that sweeps the path of a mesh
torus.
DRAGVS
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh
primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes.

Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1135

Construct Meshes from Other Objects
Create mesh forms by filling the space between other objects such as lines
and arcs.
You can use a variety of methods to create mesh objects whose edges are
defined by other objects. The MESHTYPE system variable controls whether
the new objects are valid mesh objects, or whether they are created using
legacy polyface or polygon geometry.
You can control whether the mesh is displayed as a wireframe, hidden, or
conceptual image by changing the visual style (VISUALSTYLES).

Types of Meshes Created from Other Objects
You can create several types of meshes that are based on existing objects.
■

Ruled mesh. RULESURF creates a mesh that represents the ruled surface
between two lines or curves.

■

Tabulated mesh. TABSURF creates a mesh that represents a general
tabulated surface. The surface is defined by the extrusion of a line or curve
(called a path curve) in a specified direction and distance (called a direction
vector or path).

1136 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

■

Revolved mesh. REVSURF creates a mesh that approximates a surface of
revolution by rotating a profile about a specified axis. A profile can consist
of lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, splines, closed
polylines, polygons, closed splines, and donuts.

■

Edge-defined mesh. EDGESURF creates a mesh approximating a Coons
surface patch mesh from four adjoining edges. A Coons surface patch mesh
is a bicubic surface that is interpolated between four adjoining edges (which
can be general space curves).

Create a Ruled Mesh
There are several methods for creating meshes.
With RULESURF, you create a mesh between two lines or curves. Use two
different objects to define the edges of the ruled mesh: lines, points, arcs,
circles, ellipses, elliptical arcs, 2D polylines, 3D polylines, or splines.
Both objects that are used as the “rails” of a ruled mesh must be either open
or closed. You can pair a point object with either an open or a closed object.

Construct Meshes from Other Objects | 1137

You can specify any two points on closed curves to complete the operation.
For open curves, construction of the ruled mesh is based on the locations of
the specified points on the curves.

Create a Tabulated Mesh
With the TABSURF command, you can create a mesh that represents a general
tabulated surface defined by a path curve and a direction vector. The path
curve can be a line, arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, 2D polyline, 3D polyline,
or spline. The direction vector can be a line or an open 2D or 3D polyline.
TABSURF creates the mesh as a series of parallel polygons running along a
specified path. The original object and the direction vector must already be
drawn, as shown in the following illustrations.

1138 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Create a Revolved Mesh
Use the REVSURF command to create a revolved mesh by rotating a profile
of the object about an axis. REVSURF is useful for mesh forms with rotational
symmetry.

The profile is called a path curve. It can consist of any combination of lines,
circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, splines, closed polylines,
polygons, closed splines, or donuts.

Create an Edge-Defined Mesh
With the EDGESURF command, you can create a Coons surface patch mesh, as
shown in the following illustration, from four objects called edges. Edges can
be arcs, lines, polylines, splines, or elliptical arcs that form a closed loop and
share endpoints. A Coons patch is a bicubic surface (one curve in the M
direction and another in the N direction) interpolated between the four edges.

Construct Meshes from Other Objects | 1139

To create a ruled mesh

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Ruled Surface.
2 Select an object to act as the first defining curve.
3 Select a second object as the second defining curve.
Mesh segments are drawn between the defining curves. The number of
segments equals the value set for SURFTAB1.
4 Erase the original curves if necessary.

To create a tabulated mesh

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Tabulated Surface.
2 Specify an object to define the overall shape of the tabulated surface (the
path curve).
The object can be a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or a 2D or 3D polyline.
3 Specify an open line or polyline that defines the direction vector.
The mesh is extended from the start point to the endpoint of the direction
vector.
4 Erase the original objects if necessary.

To create a revolved mesh

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Revolved Surface.
2 Specify an object to define the path curve.
The path curve, which defines the N direction of the mesh, can be a line,
arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, 2D polyline, 3D polyline, or spline. If you
select a circle, closed ellipse, or closed polyline, the mesh is closed in the
N direction.
3 Specify an object to define the axis of revolution.
The direction vector can be a line or an open 2D or 3D polyline. If you
choose a polyline, the vector sets the rotation axis from its first vertex to

1140 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

its last vertex. Any intermediate vertices are ignored. The axis of revolution
determines the M direction of the mesh.
4 Specify the start angle.
If you specify a nonzero start angle, the mesh is generated at a position
offset from the path curve by that angle.
5 Specify the included angle.
The included angle specifies how far the mesh extends around the axis
of revolution.
6 Erase the original objects if necessary.

To create an edge-defined Coons surface patch mesh

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Edge Surface.
2 Select four objects to define the four adjoining edges of the mesh patch.
The objects can be arcs, lines, polylines, splines, or elliptical arcs that
form a closed loop and share endpoints.
The first edge you select determines the M direction of the mesh.

Quick Reference
Commands
EDGESURF
Creates a mesh between four contiguous edges or curves.
PEDIT
Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes.
PFACE
Creates a 3D polyface mesh vertex by vertex.
REVSURF
Creates a mesh by revolving a profile about an axis.
RULESURF
Creates a mesh that represents the surface between two lines or curves.

Construct Meshes from Other Objects | 1141

TABSURF
Creates a mesh from a line or curve that is swept along a straight path.
VISUALSTYLES
Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.

System Variables
FACETRATIO
Controls the aspect ratio of faceting for cylindrical and conic solids.
MESHTYPE
Controls the type of mesh that is created by REVSURF, TABSURF, RULESURF
and EDGESURF.
PLINECONVERTMODE
Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines.
PFACEVMAX
Sets the maximum number of vertices per face.
SURFTAB1
Sets the number of tabulations to be generated for the RULESURF and
TABSURF commands.
SURFTAB2
Sets the mesh density in the N direction for the REVSURF and EDGESURF
commands.
SURFTYPE
Controls the type of surface-fitting to be performed by the Smooth option
of the PEDIT command.
SURFU
Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the M direction and the U
isolines density on surface objects.
SURFV
Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the N direction and the V
isolines density on surface objects.

1142 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Create Meshes by Conversion
Convert solids, surfaces, and legacy mesh types to mesh objects.
You can use the MESHSMOOTH command to convert certain objects to mesh.
Convert 3D solids, surfaces, and legacy mesh objects to the enhanced mesh
object in order to take advantage of capabilities such as smoothing, refinement,
creasing, and splitting.

Object Types That Can Be Converted
You obtain the most predictable results when you convert primitive solid
objects to mesh. That is, the resulting mesh adheres closely to the shape of
the original solid model.
You can also convert other types of objects, although the conversion results
may differ from what you expect. These objects include swept surfaces and
solids, legacy polygon and polyface mesh objects, regions, closed polylines,
and objects created with 3DFACE. For these objects, you can often improve
results by adjusting the conversion settings.

Adjust Mesh Conversion Settings
If the conversion does not work as expected, try changing the following system
variables:
■

FACETERDEVNORMAL

■

FACETERDEVSURFACE

■

FACETERGRIDRATIO

■

FACETERMAXEDGELENGTH

■

FACETERMAXGRID

Create Meshes by Conversion | 1143

■

FACETERMESHTYPE

■

FACETERMINUGRID

■

FACETERMINVGRID

■

FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE

■

FACETERSMOOTHLEV

Settings can also be changed using the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box.
For example, if the smooth mesh optimized mesh type (FACETERMESHTYPE
system variable) results in incorrect conversions, you can set the tessellation
shape to be Triangle or Mostly Quads.
You also can control the adherence to the original shape by setting the
maximum distance offset, angles, aspect ratios, and edge lengths for new faces.
The following example shows a 3D solid helix that has been converted to
mesh using different tessellation settings. The optimized mesh version has
been smoothed, but the other two conversions have no smoothness. Notice,
however, that the mostly quads conversion with the lower tessellation values
creates a mesh object that adheres most closely to the original version.
Smoothing this object improves its appearance even more.

Similarly, if you notice that a converted mesh object has a number of long,
slivered faces (which can sometimes cause gaps), try decreasing the maximum
edge length for new faces value (FACETERMAXEDGELENGTH system varaible).
If you are converting primitive solid objects, this dialog box also offers the
option of using the same default settings used to create primitive mesh objects.
When you select conversion candidates directly from this dialog box, you can
preview the results before you accept them.

1144 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

See also:
■

Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh

To convert objects to mesh using defaults

1 Click Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Smooth Object.
2 Select an object such as a 3D solid or surface.
(For a list of eligible objects, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.)
The objects are converted to mesh using the settings in the Mesh
Tessellation Options dialog box.

To modify conversion settings as you convert objects to mesh
1 Click Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ dialog box launcher.
2 In the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box, update the settings that
you want to change.
3 Click Select Objects to Tessellate.
4 Select an object such as a 3D solid or surface and press Enter.
(For a list of eligible objects, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.)
5 To display a preview of the converted object, click Preview.
The updated object is displayed in the drawing area.
6 Do one of the following:
■

To adjust the settings, press Esc to display the dialog box again. Repeat
steps 2 to 6.

■

To accept the conversion, press Enter.

To modify mesh conversion settings
1 Click Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ dialog box launcher.
2 In the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box, update the settings that
you want to change and click OK.

Create Meshes by Conversion | 1145

Quick Reference
Commands
MESHOPTIONS
Displays the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box, which controls default
settings for converting existing objects to mesh objects.
MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS
Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation
defaults for primitive mesh objects.
MESHSMOOTH
Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh
objects.

System Variables
FACETERDEVNORMAL
Sets the maximum angle between the surface normal and contiguous mesh
faces.
FACETERDEVSURFACE
Sets how closely the converted mesh object adheres to the original shape of
the solid or surface.
FACETERGRIDRATIO
Sets the maximum aspect ratio for the mesh subdivisions that are created
for solids and surfaces converted to mesh.
FACETERMAXEDGELENGTH
Sets the maximum length of edges for mesh objects that are created by
conversion from solids and surfaces.
FACETERMAXGRID
Sets the maximum number of U and V grid lines for solids and surfaces
converted to mesh.
FACETERMESHTYPE
Sets the type of mesh to be created.

1146 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

FACETERMINUGRID
Sets the minimum number of U grid lines for solids and surfaces that are
converted to mesh.
FACETERMINVGRID
Sets the minimum number of V grid lines for solids and surfaces that are
converted to mesh.
FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE
Specifies whether smoothness settings for objects that are converted to mesh
are derived from the Mesh Tessellation Options or the Mesh Primitive Options
dialog box.
FACETERSMOOTHLEV
Sets the default level of smoothness for objects that are converted to mesh.

Create Custom Mesh (Legacy)
Create custom polygon or polyface mesh by specifying vertices.
Specify individual vertices when you create mesh using the 3DMESH, PFACE,
and 3DFACE commands.

Understand Legacy Mesh Construction
The mesh density controls the number of facets in legacy polygonal and
polyface meshes. Density is defined in terms of a matrix of M and N vertices,
like a grid consisting of columns and rows. M and N specify the column and
row position, respectively, of any given vertex.
A mesh can be open or closed. If the start and end edges of the mesh do not
touch, a mesh is open in a given direction, as shown in the following
illustrations.

Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) | 1147

Create a Rectangular Mesh
With the 3DMESH command, you can create polygon meshes that are open
in both the M and N directions (like the X and Y axes of an XY plane). In most
cases, you can use 3DMESH in conjunction with scripts or AutoLISP routines
when you know the mesh points.

As you create the mesh, you specify the size of the mesh in the M and N
directions. The total number of vertices you specify for the mesh is equal to
the M value times the N value.

1148 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

You can close the meshes with PEDIT. You can use 3DMESH to construct
irregular meshes.

Example:
In the following example of text at the Command prompt, you enter the
coordinate values for each vertex to create the mesh in the illustration.
Command: 3dmesh
Mesh M size: 4
Mesh N size: 3
Vertex (0, 0): 10,1, 3
Vertex (0, 1): 10, 5, 5
Vertex (0, 2): 10,10, 3
Vertex (1, 0): 15,1, 0
Vertex (1, 1): 15, 5, 0
Vertex (1, 2): 15,10, 0
Vertex (2, 0): 20,1, 0
Vertex (2, 1): 20, 5, -1
Vertex (2, 2): 20,10 ,0
Vertex (3, 0): 25,1, 0
Vertex (3, 1): 25, 5, 0
Vertex (3, 2): 25,10, 0

Create a Polyface Mesh
The PFACE command produces a polyface (polygon) mesh, with each face
capable of having numerous vertices. PFACE is typically used by applications
rather than by direct user input.
Creating a polyface mesh is like creating a rectangular mesh. To create a
polyface mesh, you specify coordinates for its vertices. You then define each
face by entering vertex numbers for all the vertices of that face. As you create

Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) | 1149

the polyface mesh, you can set specific edges to be invisible, assign them to
layers, or give them colors.
To make the edge invisible, enter the vertex number as a negative value. For
instance, to make the edge between vertices 5 and 7 invisible in the following
illustration, you enter the following:
Face 3, vertex 3: -7
In the illustration, face 1 is defined by vertices 1, 5, 6, and 2. Face 2 is defined
by vertices 1, 4, 3, and 2. Face 3 is defined by vertices 1, 4, 7, and 5, and face
4 is defined by vertices 3, 4, 7, and 8.

Create Polyface Mesh Vertex by Vertex
With the 3DFACE command, you can create three-dimensional polyface mesh
by specifying each vertex. You can control visibility of each mesh edge
segment.
If you select a 3DFACE object during some mesh smoothing operations (such
as with MESHSMOOTHMORE), you are prompted to convert 3DFACE objects
to mesh objects.

Create a Predefined 3D Mesh
The 3D command creates the following 3D shapes: boxes, cones, dishes, domes,
meshes, pyramids, spheres, tori (donuts), and wedges.
In the following illustrations, the numbers indicate points you specify to create
the mesh.

1150 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

To view the objects you are creating with the 3D command more clearly, set
a viewing direction with 3DORBIT, DVIEW, or VPOINT.

To create a rectangular mesh
1 At the Command prompt, enter 3dmesh.
2 Specify the M size, using an integer from 2 through 256.
3 Specify the N size, using an integer from 2 through 256.
4 Specify the vertex points as prompted. The number of vertices equals the
M value times the N value. Specifying the last vertex point completes the
mesh.

Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) | 1151

Quick Reference
Commands
3DFACE
Creates a three-sided or four-sided surface in 3D space.
3DMESH
Creates a free-form polygon mesh.
PEDIT
Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes.
PFACE
Creates a 3D polyface mesh vertex by vertex.

System Variables
PFACEVMAX
Sets the maximum number of vertices per face.

Create Wireframe Models
A wireframe model is an edge or skeletal representation of a real-world 3D
object using lines and curves.
You can specify a wireframe visual style to help you see the overall structure
of 3D objects such as solids, surfaces, and meshes. In older drawings, you
might also encounter wireframe models that were created using legacy
methods.

1152 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Wireframe models consist only of points, lines, and curves that describe the
edges of the object. Because each object that makes up a wireframe model
must be independently drawn and positioned, this type of modeling can be
the most time-consuming.
You can use a wireframe model to
■

View the model from any vantage point

■

Generate standard orthographic and auxiliary views automatically

■

Generate exploded and perspective views easily

■

Analyze spatial relationships, including the shortest distance between
corners and edges, and checking for interferences

■

Reduce the number of prototypes required

The ISOLINES system variable controls the number of tessellation lines used
to visualize curved portions of the wireframe. The FACETRES system variable
adjusts the smoothness of shaded and hidden-line objects.

Methods for Creating Wireframe Models
You can create wireframe models by positioning any 2D planar object anywhere
in 3D space, using the following methods:
■

Use the XEDGES command to create wireframe geometry from regions,
3D solids, surfaces, and meshes. XEDGES extracts all the edges on the

Create Wireframe Models | 1153

selected objects or subobjects. The extracted edges form a duplicate
wireframe composed of 2D objects such as lines, circles, and 3D polylines.
■

Enter 3D coordinates that define the X, Y, and Z location of the object.

■

Set the default work plane (the XY plane of the UCS) on which to draw the
object.

■

Move or copy the object to its proper 3D location after you create it.

Wireframe modeling is a skill that requires practice and experience. The best
way to learn how to create wireframe models is to begin with simple models
before attempting models that are more complex.

Tips for Working with Wireframe Models
Creating 3D wireframe models can be more difficult and time-consuming
than creating their 2D views. Here are some tips that will help you work more
effectively:
■

Plan and organize your model so that you can turn off layers to reduce the
visual complexity of the model. Color can help you differentiate between
objects in various views.

■

Create construction geometry to define the basic envelope of the model.

■

Use multiple views, especially isometric views, to make visualizing the
model and selecting objects easier.

■

Become adept at manipulating the UCS in 3D. The XY plane of the current
UCS operates as a work plane to orient planar objects such as circles and
arcs. The UCS also determines the plane of operation for trimming and
extending, offsetting, and rotating objects.

■

Use object snaps and grid snap carefully to ensure the precision of your
model.

■

Use coordinate filters to drop perpendiculars and easily locate points in
3D based on the location of points on other objects.

To drop a perpendicular line from a 3D point down to the XY plane
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line.
2 Use an object snap to specify a point on an object that is not on the XY
plane of the UCS.
This location defines the first point of the line.

1154 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

3 Enter .xy and then enter @ at the Of prompt.
This operation extracts the X and Y coordinate values from the first point.
4 Enter 0 to specify the Z value.
The X and Y values extracted from the first point are combined with a
new Z value (0) to finish the definition of the second point.
5 Press Enter to end the command.

To create wireframe geometry by extracting edges
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Extract Edges.
2 Select one or more of the following objects:
■

3D solids

■

Surfaces

■

Meshes

■

Regions

■

Edges (on 3D solids, surfaces, or meshes)

■

Faces (on 3D solids or meshes)

3 Press Enter.
Objects such as lines, arcs, splines, or 3D polylines are created along the
edges of the selected objects or subobjects.

Quick Reference
Commands
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
XEDGES
Creates wireframe geometry from the edges of a 3D solid, surface, mesh,
region, or subobject.

Create Wireframe Models | 1155

System Variables
ELEVATION
Stores the current elevation of new objects relative to the current UCS.
FACETRES
Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with
hidden lines removed.
ISOLINES
Specifies the number of contour lines displayed on the curved surfaces of 3D
solids.

Add 3D Thickness to Objects
Use the thickness property to give objects a 3D appearance.
The 3D thickness of an object is the distance that object is extended, or
thickened, above or below its location in space. Positive thickness extrudes
upward in the positive Z direction; negative thickness extrudes downward
(negative Z). Zero (0) thickness means that there is no 3D thickening of the
object.

The orientation of the UCS when the object was created determines the Z
direction. Objects with a non-zero thickness can be shaded and can hide other
objects behind them.
The thickness property changes the appearance of the following types of
objects:
■

2D solids

■

Arcs

■

Circles

■

Lines

1156 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

■

Polylines (including spline-fit polylines, rectangles, polygons, boundaries,
and donuts)

■

Text (only if created as a single-line text object using an SHX font)

■

Traces

■

Points

Modifying the thickness property of other types of objects does not affect
their appearance.
You can set the default thickness property for new objects you create by setting
the THICKNESS system variable. For existing objects, change the thickness
property on the Properties palette.
The 3D thickness is applied uniformly to an object; a single object cannot
have different thicknesses.
You might need to change the 3D viewpoint to see the effect of thickness on
an object.
NOTE Although the THICKNESS variable sets an extruded thickness for new 2D
objects, those objects continue to be 2D objects. The THICKEN command adds
volume to a surface object, converting it to a 3D solid.
See also:
■

Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves on page 1030

To set the 3D thickness of new objects
1 Click Format menu ➤ Thickness.
2 At the Command prompt, enter the value for the thickness distance.
When new objects are created, they have the specified 3D thickness.

To change the 3D thickness of existing objects
1 Select the objects whose 3D thickness you want to change.
2 Right-click one of the objects. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, select Thickness and enter a new value.
The selected objects change to display the specified 3D thickness.

Add 3D Thickness to Objects | 1157

Quick Reference
Commands
ELEV
Sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
THICKEN
Converts a surface into a 3D solid with a specified thickness.

System Variables
BACKZ
Stores the back clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current
viewport, in drawing units.
FRONTZ
Stores the front clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current
viewport, in drawing units.
THICKNESS
Sets the current 3D thickness.
VIEWMODE
Stores the View mode for the current viewport.

1158 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models

Modify 3D Models

Change a 3D solid, surface or mesh with grips and gizmos, editing commands, properties,
and by modifying its component subojects.

Overview of Modifying 3D Objects
3D modeling tools range from entering precise measurements in the Properties
palette, to more free-form methods such as grip and gizmo editing. Some
methods are specific to 3D solids, surfaces or meshes. Other methods are shared.

Convert to Other Object Types
In many cases, you can convert from one object type to another to take
advantage of specific editing capabilities.
For example you can convert selected surfaces, solids, and legacy mesh types
to mesh objects so that you can take advantage of smoothing and modeling
capabilities.

1159

Similarly, you can convert mesh to 3D solids and surfaces to accomplish some
composite object modeling tasks that are available only for those objects.
Conversion is often offered as a choice when you start activities that are
available only for solids and surfaces.

View Your Model from All Angles
When you work with any 3D object, you can easily make changes that are
not accurately reflected in the current view. To ensure that your modifications

1160 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

conform to your expectations, make sure you understand and use the
following:
■

Manipulate the 3D workplane (UCS). To understand how your model is
projected in 3D space, learn how to use the X, Y, and Z axes. For more
information, see Overview of Coordinate Entry.

■

Rotate the view to display the model from different viewpoints. Several
navigation tools, including 3D Orbit and the ViewCube tool, are available
to help you rotate around your workspace. For more information, see Use
Viewing Tools on page 323.

■

Display multiple viewports. Set up two or more viewports with different
viewing angles and visual styles. When you make a change in one viewport,
you can see its impact from several viewpoints at the same time. For more
information, see Display Multiple Views in Model Space on page 413.

See also:
■

Control the User Coordinate System (UCS) on page 594

■

Use Viewing Tools on page 323

■

Display Multiple Views in Model Space on page 413

Use Gizmos to Modify Objects
Use gizmos to move, rotate, or scale objects and subobjects in a 3D view.

Overview of Using Gizmos
Gizmos help you move, rotate, or scale a set of objects along a 3D axis or
plane.
There are three types of gizmos:
■

3D Move gizmo. Relocates selected objects along an axis or plane.

■

3D Rotate gizmo. Rotates selected objects about a specified axis.

■

3D Scale gizmo. Scales selected objects along a specified plane or axis, or
uniformly along all 3 axes.

Use Gizmos to Modify Objects | 1161

By default, gizmos are displayed automatically when you select an object or
subobject in a view that has a 3D visual style. Because they constrain
modifications along specific planes or axes, gizmos help ensure more
predictable results.
You can specify which gizmos are displayed when an object is selected, or you
can suppress their display.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DMOVE
In a 3D view, displays the 3D Move gizmo to aid in moving 3D objects a
specified distance in a specified direction.
3DROTATE
In a 3D view, displays the 3D Rotate gizmo to aid in revolving 3D objects
around a base point.
3DSCALE
In a 3D view, displays the 3D Scale gizmo to aid in resizing 3D objects.

1162 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

GTAUTO
Controls whether 3D gizmos are automatically displayed when you select
objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style.
GTDEFAULT
Controls whether the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale operation starts
automatically when you start the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command in
a viewport with a 3D visual style.
GTLOCATION
Controls the initial location of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo
when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a
3D visual style.

Use the Gizmos
Gizmos help move, rotate, and scale 3D objects and subobjects.

Display the Gizmos
Gizmos are available only in 3D views that are set to use a 3D visual style such
as Hidden. You can set the gizmo to be displayed automatically when you
select a 3D object or subobject. Gizmos are also displayed during the 3DMOVE,
3DROTATE, and 3DSCALE commands.
If the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe, entering 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, or
3DSCALE automatically converts the visual style to 3D Wireframe.
By default, the gizmo is initially placed in the center of the selection set.
However, you can relocate it anywhere in 3D space. The center box (or base
grip) of the gizmo sets the base point for the modification. This behavior is
equivalent to temporarily changing the position of the UCS as you move or
rotate the selected objects. The axis handles on the gizmo constrain the
movement or rotation to an axis or plane.

Use the Gizmos | 1163

For best results, use object snaps to locate the grip center box.

Switch Between the Gizmos
Whenever you select an object in a 3D view, the default gizmo is displayed.
You can select a different default on the ribbon, or change the value of the
the DEFAULTGIZMO system variable. You can also suppress the display of
gizmos when objects are selected.
After the gizmo is active, you can also switch to a different type of gizmo. The
switching behavior differs, depending on when you select the objects:
■

Select objects first. If a gizmo operation is in progress, you can press the
Spacebar repeatedly to cycle through the other gizmo types. When you
switch gizmos this way, the gizmo activity is constrained to the originally
selected axis or plane.
During a gizmo operation, you can also select a different gizmo type on
the shortcut menu.

■

Run the command first. When you start the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D
Scale operation before selecting objects, the gizmo is placed at the center
of the selection set. Use the Relocate Gizmo option on the shortcut menu
to relocate the gizmo anywhere in 3D space. You can also choose a different
type of gizmo on the shortcut menu.

Change the Gizmo Settings
The following settings affect the display of gizmos:
■

Default gizmo. The DEFAULTGIZMO system variable specifies which gizmo
is displayed by default when an object is selected in a view with a 3D visual
style. You can turn off display of the gizmo. This setting is also available
on the ribbon.

■

Default location. The GTLOCATION system variable sets the default
location of the gizmo. The gizmo can be displayed at the center of the
selection set (default), or it can be positioned at the 0,0,0 coordinates of
the current UCS.

■

Automatic display. The GTAUTO system variable sets whether gizmos are
displayed automatically whenever you select objects in a 3D view that is
set to a 3D visual style (default). If you turn off this system variable, the
grips are not displayed until the gizmos are active.

■

Conversion of move, rotate, and scale operations from 2D to 3D. Turn on
the GTDEFAULT system variable to start the 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, or

1164 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

3DSCALE command automatically when the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE
command is started in a 3D view. This system variable is turned off by
default.
■

Active status of subobject grips. If you select a subobject on page 2321, the
GRIPSUBOBJMODE system variable sets whether the subobject grips are
active immediately. Setting subobject grips to be active upon selection
helps you modify groups of mesh subobjects without selecting them again.

To specify which 3D gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected
■

Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ Move Gizmo, Rotate Gizmo, or
Scale Gizmo.

To suppress the display of the 3D gizmo when an object is selected
■

Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ No Gizmo.

To set the default location for gizmos
1 At the Command prompt, enter gtlocation.
2 Do one of the following:
■

Enter 1 to set the location at the geometric center of the selection set.

■

Enter 0 to set the location to overlap the UCS icon.

3 Press Enter.

To relocate a gizmo
1 Right-click the center box (base grip) of the gizmo. Click Relocate Gizmo.
2 Click in the drawing area to specify a new location.

To change the type of gizmo while moving, rotating, or scaling objects
1 Select the 3D objects that you want to move, rotate, or scale.
■

To modify the entire object, select the object.

■

To modify a subobject (face, edge, or vertex), press Ctrl+click the
subobject. (You can limit the selection set by specifying a subobject
selection filter on the shortcut menu.)

Use the Gizmos | 1165

2 Hover the cursor over an axis handle on the gizmo until it turns yellow
and the axis vector displays. Then click the axis handle.
3 Press the Spacebar to cycle through the gizmo types until the correct
gizmo is displayed.
When you change gizmos this way, the movement remains constrained
to the selected axis.
NOTE You cannot use the Spacebar to change the type of gizmo when the
3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, or 3DSCALE command is active.

System Variables
DEFAULTGIZMO
Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during
subobject selection.
GRIPSUBOBJMODE
Controls whether grips are automatically selected (made “hot”) when
subobjects are selected.
GTAUTO
Controls whether 3D gizmos are automatically displayed when you select
objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style.

1166 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

GTDEFAULT
Controls whether the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale operation starts
automatically when you start the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command in
a viewport with a 3D visual style.
GTLOCATION
Controls the initial location of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo
when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a
3D visual style.

Move 3D Objects
Move a selection set of objects and subobjects freely or constrain the movement
to an axis or plane.
To move 3D objects and subobjects, click and drag the gizmo anywhere in 3D
space. This location (indicated by the center box [or base grip] of the gizmo)
sets the base point for the movement and temporarily changes the position
of the UCS while you move the selected objects.

To move the objects freely, drag outside the gizmo or specify the axis or plane
to which you will constrain the movement.

Constrain the Movement to an Axis
You can use the Move gizmo to constrain the movement to an axis. As the
cursor hovers over an axis handle on the gizmo, a vector aligned with the axis
is displayed, and the specified axis turns yellow. Click the axis handle.

Move 3D Objects | 1167

As you drag the cursor, movement of the selected objects and subobjects is
constrained to the highlighted axis. You can click or enter a value to specify
the distance of the move from the base point. If you enter a value, the
movement direction of the object follows the initial direction of the cursor
movement.

Constrain the Movement to a Plane
You can use the Move gizmo to constrain the movement to a plane. Each
plane is identified by a rectangle that extends from the respective axis handles.
You can specify the plane of movement by moving the cursor over the
rectangle. When the rectangle turns yellow, click it.

As you drag the cursor, the selected objects and subobjects move only along
the highlighted plane. Click or enter a value to specify the distance of the
move from the base point.

1168 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

To move objects in 3D space along a specified axis

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move Gizmo.
2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to move using the following
methods:
■

Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices).

■

Release Ctrl to select entire objects.

NOTE If a subobject filter is active, you do not need to press Ctrl to select a
subobject. To select the entire object, turn off the filter.
3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter.
The Move gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected objects.
4 Move the cursor over an axis handle on the gizmo until it turns yellow
and the vector is displayed. Then click the axis handle.
5 Click another location or enter a value to specify the distance of the
move.

To move objects in 3D space constrained to a specified plane

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move Gizmo.
2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to move using the following
methods:
■

Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices).

Move 3D Objects | 1169

■

Release Ctrl to select entire objects.

NOTE If a subobject filter is active, you do not need to press Ctrl to select a
subobject. To select the entire object, turn off the filter.
3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter.
The Move gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected objects.
4 Move the cursor over the planar rectangle that intersects the axis handles
that define the plane of constraint. When the rectangle turns yellow,
click it.
5 Click a different location or enter a value to specify the distance of the
move.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DMOVE
In a 3D view, displays the 3D Move gizmo to aid in moving 3D objects a
specified distance in a specified direction.

System Variables
DEFAULTGIZMO
Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during
subobject selection.

Rotate 3D Objects
Constrain the rotation of 3D objects and subobjects to an axis.
After you select the objects and subobjects that you want to rotate, the gizmo
is located at the center of the selection set. This location is indicated by the
center box (or base grip) of the gizmo. It sets the base point for the movement
and temporarily changes the position of the UCS while you rotate the selected
objects.

1170 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

You then rotate the objects freely by dragging outside the gizmo. You can also
specify an axis about which to constrain the rotation.
If you want to realign the center of rotation, you can relocate the gizmo by
using the Relocate Gizmo option on the shortcut menu.

Constrain the Rotation to an Axis
You can constrain the rotation to a specified axis. As you move the cursor
over the rotation paths on the 3D rotate gizmo, a vector line representing the
axis of rotation is displayed. Specify an axis of rotation by clicking the rotation
path when it turns yellow.

When you drag the cursor, the selected objects and subobjects rotate about
the base point along the specified axis. The gizmo displays the degree of
rotation from the original position of the object as the object moves. You can
click or enter a value to specify the angle of the rotation.

Rotate 3D Objects | 1171

To rotate objects in 3D space along a specified axis

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate Gizmo.
2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to rotate using the following
methods:
■

Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices).

■

Release Ctrl to select entire objects.

3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter.
The rotate gizmo is displayed attached to the cursor.
4 Click to place the rotate gizmo, specifying the base point for the move.
5 Hover the cursor over an axis path on the gizmo until it turns yellow and
the vector that represents the axis of rotation is displayed. Click the path.
6 Click or enter a value to specify the angle of the rotation.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DROTATE
In a 3D view, displays the 3D Rotate gizmo to aid in revolving 3D objects
around a base point.

System Variables
DEFAULTGIZMO
Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during
subobject selection.

Scale 3D Objects
Change the size of 3D objects uniformly or along a specified axis or plane.
After you select the objects and subobjects to scale, constrain the object scaling
by clicking the gizmo axis, plane, or the portion of the gizmo between all
three axes.

1172 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

NOTE Non-uniform scaling (along an axis or a plane) is only available for meshes,
it is not available for solids and surfaces.

Scale a 3D Object Along an Axis
Constrain mesh object scaling to a specified axis. As you move the cursor over
the axes on the 3D Scale gizmo, a vector line representing the axis of scale is
displayed. Specify an axis of scale by clicking the axis when it turns yellow.

When you drag the cursor, the selected objects and subobjects are resized
along the specified axis. Click or enter a value to specify the scale from the
selected base point.

Scale a 3D Object Along a Plane
Constrain the mesh object scaling to a specified plane. Each plane is identified
by a bar that extends from the outer ends of the respective axis handles. Specify
the plane of scale by moving the cursor over one of the bars. When the bar
turns yellow, click it.

Scale 3D Objects | 1173

As you drag the cursor, the selected objects and subobjects are scaled only
along the highlighted plane. Click or enter a value to specify the scale from
the selected base point.

Scale a 3D Object Uniformly
Scale solid, surface, and mesh objects uniformly along all axes. As you move
the cursor toward the center point of the gizmo, a highlighted triangular area
indicates that you can click to scale the selected objects and subobjects along
all three axes.

As you drag the cursor, the selected objects and subobjects are scaled uniformly.
Click or enter a value to specify the scale from the selected base point.

To scale a 3D object along a specified axis

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify ➤ Scale Gizmo.
2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to scale using the following
methods:
■

Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices).

■

Release Ctrl to select entire objects.

3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter.
The Scale gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected object or objects.
4 Specify a base point for the scale.
5 Hover the cursor over one of the axes of the gizmo until it turns yellow.
Click the yellow axis.
6 Click or enter a value to specify the scale of the selected object.

1174 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

To scale a 3D object along a specified plane

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify ➤ Scale Gizmo.
2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to scale using the following
methods:
■

Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices).

■

Release Ctrl to select entire objects.

3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter.
The Scale gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected object or objects.
4 Specify a base point for the scale.
5 Hover the cursor over one of the bars found between each of the axes of
the gizmo until it turns yellow. Click the yellow bar.
6 Click or enter a value to specify the scale of the selected object.

To scale a 3D object uniformly

1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify ➤ Scale Gizmo.
2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to scale using the following
methods:
■

Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices).

■

Release Ctrl to select entire objects.

3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter.
The Scale gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected object or objects.
4 Specify a base point for the scale.
5 Hover the cursor over the triangular area closest to the center point of
the gizmo until it turns yellow. Click the yellow area.
6 Click or enter a value to specify the scale of the selected object.

Scale 3D Objects | 1175

Quick Reference
Commands
3DSCALE
In a 3D view, displays the 3D Scale gizmo to aid in resizing 3D objects.

System Variables
DEFAULTGIZMO
Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during
subobject selection.

Use Grips to Modify Solids and Surfaces
Use grips to change the shape and size of solids and surfaces.

Use 3D Subobject Grips
Select faces, edges, and vertices on 3D objects.
A subobject is a face, edge or vertex of a solid, surface, or mesh object.

Select Subobjects
To select a face, edge, or vertex of a 3D object, press and hold Ctrl as you select
the object. (If you have set a subobject filter, you do not need to hold Ctrl
first.)
Selected subobjects display different types of grips, depending on the subobject
type.

You can select one or more subobjects on any number of 3D objects. The
selection set can include more than one type of subobject. Press and hold Ctrl

1176 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

to select subobjects at the selection prompts of the MOVE, ROTATE, SCALE,
and ERASE commands.

You can remove an item from the selection set by pressing and holding Shift
and selecting it again.

Select Subobjects on Composite 3D Solids
Press and hold Ctrl to select faces, edges, and vertices on composite solids. If
the History property of the composite solid is set to Record (On), the first
“pick” might select the history subobject. (The history subobject is the portion
of the original object that was removed during the union, subtract, or intersect
operation.) Continue to hold Ctrl and pick again to select a face, edge, or
vertex on the original form.

If you set a subobject selection filter on page 1179, you can select the face, edge,
or vertex by clicking it once.

To select one or more faces, edges, or vertices on a 3D object
1 Press Ctrl+click a face, edge, or vertex.
NOTE If a subobject selection filter is active, you do not need to press Ctrl
before clicking a face, edge, or vertex.
2 Repeat step 1 until all subobjects are selected.

Use 3D Subobject Grips | 1177

To remove a subobject from a selection set
■

Press and hold Ctrl+Shift. Click a selected face, edge, or vertex.
The grip, if displayed, changes from red to blue.
NOTE If a subobject selection filter is active, you do not need to press Ctrl
before clicking a face, edge, or vertex.

To select a face, edge, or vertex on the history form of a composite solid
1 Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ Edge, Vertex, or Face.
2 On the history form, click a face, edge, or vertex.
NOTE If the Show History property for the history subobject is not turned
on, you can display the history by pressing Ctrl as you move the cursor over
the object.

Quick Reference
Commands
DSETTINGS
Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes,
Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties.
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing.
MOVE
Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction.
ROTATE
Rotates objects around a base point.
SCALE
Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object
the same after scaling.
SELECT
Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.

1178 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

SOLIDEDIT
Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects.

System Variables
GRIPHOVER
Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it.
GRIPOBJLIMIT
Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than
the specified number of objects.
GRIPS
Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
GRIPSIZE
Sets the size of the grip box in pixels.
GRIPSUBOBJMODE
Controls whether grips are automatically selected (made “hot”) when
subobjects are selected.
LEGACYCTRLPICK
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE
Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted
when you roll over them.

Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects
Filter and select faces, edges, and vertices on 3D objects.
A subobject is a face, edge or vertex of a solid, surface, or mesh object.

Cycle Through Multiple Subobjects
In 3D views, some objects or subobjects might be hidden behind others. You
can press Ctrl+Spacebar to cycle through the hidden subobjects until the object
you want to select is highlighted.
For example, when you select faces on a box, the face in the foreground is
detected first. To select a hidden face, press the Spacebar (with Ctrl still
pressed). Release the Spacebar and click to select the face.

Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects | 1179

For best results, make sure that Selection Cycling is turned on in the Selection
Cycling Tab (Draft Settings Dialog Box).

Turn on the Subobject Selection Filter
Selecting a specific type of subobject can be difficult on complex objects, such
as meshes. You can limit the selection to a face, edge, vertex, or history
subobject by setting a subobject selection filter.

When a subobject selection filter is on, you do not need to press and hold
Ctrl to select the face, edge, or vertex of a 3D model. However, you need to
turn off the filter to select the entire object. The current subobject filter setting
is stored in the SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE system variable.
When a subobject filter is turned on, the following icons are displayed near
the cursor:
Vertex filtering is on

Shift + F2

Edge filtering is on

Shift + F3

1180 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

Face filtering is on

Shift + F4

History subobject filtering is on

Shift + F5

Subobject filtering is off

Shift + F1

To cycle through and select subobjects that are overlapping
1 Press and hold Ctrl as you press the Spacebar to cycle through the
subobjects that are both visible and hidden.
2 If the subobject that you want to select is not highlighted during the
cycle, move the cursor and repeat.
3 When the subobject is highlighted, release the Spacebar and click.
The subobject is selected.

To limit selection to a specific type of subobject
1 Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ No Filter, Edge, Vertex, Face, or
Solid History.
2 Click a 3D solid or mesh subobject.
Only the subobject type that you specified can be selected.

Quick Reference
Commands
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing.
MOVE
Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction.
ROTATE
Rotates objects around a base point.

Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects | 1181

SCALE
Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object
the same after scaling.
SELECT
Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.
SOLIDEDIT
Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects.

System Variables
CULLINGOBJ
Controls whether 3D subobjects that are hidden from view can be highlighted
or selected.
CULLINGOBJSELECTION
Controls whether 3D objects that are hidden from view can be highlighted
or selected.
GRIPHOVER
Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it.
GRIPOBJLIMIT
Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than
the specified number of objects.
GRIPS
Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
GRIPSIZE
Sets the size of the grip box in pixels.
GRIPSUBOBJMODE
Controls whether grips are automatically selected (made “hot”) when
subobjects are selected.
LEGACYCTRLPICK
Specifies the keys for selection cycling and the behavior for Ctrl+click.

1182 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE
Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted
when you roll over them.

Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces
Use grips to change the size and shape of some individual solids and surfaces.
The method you use to manipulate the 3D solid or surface depends on the
type of object and the method used to create it.
NOTE For mesh objects, only the center grip is displayed. However you can edit
mesh objects with the 3D Move, Rotate, or Scale gizmos.

Primitive Solid Forms and Polysolids
You can drag grips to change the shape and size of primitive solids and
polysolids. For example, you can change the height and base radius of a cone
without losing the overall cone shape. Drag the top radius grips to transform
the cone to a flat-topped, frustum cone.

Extruded Solids and Surfaces
You can convert 2D objects to solids and surfaces with the EXTRUDE
command. When selected, extruded solids and surfaces display grips on their
profiles. A profile is the original outline that defines the shape of the extruded
solid or surface. Drag profile grips to modify the overall shape of the object.
If the extrusion was created along a sweep path, the path can be manipulated
with grips. If a path was not used, you can modify the height of the object
using a grip at the top of the extruded solid or surface.

Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces | 1183

Swept Solids and Surfaces
Swept solids and surfaces display grips on the swept profile as well as on the
sweep path. You can drag these grips to modify the solid or surface.

When you click and drag a grip on the profile, the changes are constrained
to the plane of the profile curve.

Lofted Solids and Surfaces
Depending on how a lofted solid or surface was created, the solid or surface
displays grips on the following, defining lines or curves:
■

Cross section

■

Path

Drag grips on any of the defining lines or curves to modify the shape. If the
lofted object contains a path, you can only edit the portion of the path that
is between the first and last cross sections.

You cannot use grips to modify lofted solids or surfaces that are created with
guide curves.

1184 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

Revolved Solids and Surfaces
Revolved solids and surfaces display grips on the revolved profile at the start
of the revolved solid or surface. You can use these grips to modify the profile
of the solid of surface.
A grip is also displayed at the axis of revolution endpoint. You can relocate
the axis of revolution by dragging the grip to another location.

See also:
■

Create Solids on page 1049

■

Create a Solid Cone on page 1056

To relocate the axis of revolution for a revolved solid or surface
1 In a drawing, select a revolved solid or surface.
2 Select the grip on the axis of revolution.
3 Click in another location to relocate the axis of revolution.

Quick Reference
Commands
EXTRUDE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object.
SELECT
Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.

Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces | 1185

Modify 3D Subobjects
Modify the shape of a 3D solid or surface by editing its subobjects (faces, edges,
and vertices).

Move, Rotate, and Scale 3D Subobjects
Move, rotate, and scale individual subobjects on 3D solids and surfaces.
Use the same methods to modify a face, edge, or vertex that you use to modify
the entire object:
■

Drag grips

■

Use gizmos (3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, and 3DSCALE)

■

Enter object editing commands (MOVE, ROTATE, and SCALE)

When you move, rotate, or scale a subobject, the subobject is modified in a
way that maintains the integrity of the 3D solid or surface. For example, when
you drag an edge to move it, the adjacent faces are adjusted so that they remain
adjacent to the edge.

1186 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

Several results are possible when you modify a solid or surface. When you
move, rotate, or scale subobjects, you can press Ctrl one or more times as you
drag to cycle through modification options.
The following illustration shows the modification options for moving a face.

Move, Rotate, and Scale Subobjects on Composite Solids
When you modify composite solids, the effect of the edits depends on the
current setting of the History property.
■

To modify subobjects of each history component separately, the History
property must be set to Record (On).

■

To modify subobjects of the combined composite solid as a whole, the
History property must be set to None (Off).

Rules and Limitations When Moving, Rotating, and Scaling Subobjects
You can only move, rotate, and scale subobjects on 3D solids if the operation
maintains the integrity of the solid. The following rules and limitations apply
to moving, rotating, and scaling subobjects:
■

When you use grips to modify subobjects, grips are not displayed on the
subobjects that cannot be moved, rotated, or scaled.

Move, Rotate, and Scale 3D Subobjects | 1187

■

In most cases, you can move, rotate, and scale both planar and non-planar
faces.

■

You can only modify an edge that is a straight line and that has at least
one planar adjacent face. The planes of the adjacent planar faces are
adjusted to contain the modified edge.

■

You cannot move, rotate, or scale edges (or their vertices) that are imprinted
inside faces.

■

You can only modify a vertex if it has at least one planar adjacent face.
The planes of the adjacent planar faces are adjusted to contain the modified
vertex.

■

When you drag a subobject, the final result might be different than the
preview displayed during the modification. This result occurs when the
solid geometry is adjusted in order to maintain its topology. In some cases,
the modification is not possible because it changes the topology of the
solid too severely.

■

If the modification causes spline surfaces to be extended, the operation is
often unsuccessful.

■

You cannot move, rotate, or scale non-manifold edges (edges that are
shared by more than two faces) or non-manifold vertices. Also, if some
non-manifold edges or vertices are present near faces, edges, and vertices
that you modify, the operation might not be possible.

See also:
■

Modify Mesh Objects on page 1238

1188 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

3DSCALE
In a 3D view, displays the 3D Scale gizmo to aid in resizing 3D objects.
MOVE
Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction.
ROTATE
Rotates objects around a base point.
SCALE
Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object
the same after scaling.

Modify Faces on 3D Objects
Modify individual faces on 3D objects using a variety of methods.

Move, Rotate, and Scale Faces on 3D Solids and Surfaces
You can select and modify faces of 3D solids and surfaces.

Modify the location, rotation, and size of faces on a 3D solids and surfaces.

cube with top face moved, rotated, and scaled

Use the MOVE, ROTATE, and SCALE commands to modify faces just as you
would with any other object. Press and hold Ctrl while you select a face on a
solid.

Modify Faces on 3D Objects | 1189

If you move, rotate, or scale a face on a 3D solid primitive, the solid primitive’s
history is removed. The solid is no longer a true primitive and cannot be
manipulated using grips or the Properties palette.

Face Modification Options
As you drag a face, press Ctrl to cycle through modification options.

■

Extend Adjacent Faces. When you move or rotate a face without pressing
Ctrl, the shape and size of the face is maintained. However, the planes of
adjacent faces might change.

■

Move Face.When you move a face and press and release Ctrl once while
dragging, the position of the face is modified within the boundary, or
footprint, of the adjacent faces.

■

Allow Triangulation.When you move or rotate a face and press and release
Ctrl twice while dragging, the size and shape of the face is maintained.
(This behavior is the same as if you had not pressed Ctrl). However, the
adjacent planar faces are triangulated (divided into two or more planar
triangular faces), if necessary.

If you press and release Ctrl a third time, the modification returns to the first
option, as if you had not pressed Ctrl.

1190 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

TIP Rather than pressing Ctrl to cycle through face modification options, hover
over a face grip to display the grip multi-functional menu.

Quick Reference
Commands
MOVE
Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction.
ROTATE
Rotates objects around a base point.
SCALE
Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object
the same after scaling.

System Variables
GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL
Specifies the access methods for multi-functional grip options.

Copy, Delete, and Color Faces on 3D Solids
Copy, remove, or change the color of faces on 3D solid objects.

Copy a Face
You can duplicate the face of a 3D solid object using the copy option of the
SOLIDEDIT command. The selected faces are copied as regions or bodies.

Modify Faces on 3D Objects | 1191

Delete a Face
If you specify two points, the first point is used as a base point and a single
copy is placed relative to the base point. If you specify a single point and press
Enter, the original selection point is used as a base point. The next point is
the point of displacement.
If a face is surrounded by coplanar faces, you can delete it using the following
methods:
■

Select the face and press Delete.

■

Select the face and enter erase.

■

Use the Delete option of the SOLIDEDIT command.

Color a Faces
You can modify the color of a face on a 3D solid by selecting the face and
then changing the Color property in the Properties palette.
See also:
■

Modify Mesh Faces on page 1253

To copy a face on a solid object
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Face Editing drop-down ➤ Copy
Faces.
2 Select the face to copy.
3 Select additional faces or press Enter to copy.
4 Specify the base point for the copy.
5 Specify the second point of displacement and press Enter.

1192 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

NOTE Use EXTRUDE to extrude a copied face.

To delete a face on a solid object
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Face Editing drop-down ➤ Delete

Faces.
2 Select the face to delete. (It must be surrounded by faces that share the
same plane.)
3 Select additional faces or press Enter to delete.
4 Press Enter to complete the command.

To change the color of a face on a solid object
1 Press and hold Ctrl as you click a face on a 3D solid.
2 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the
object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, under General, click the Color arrow and select
a color from the list
For additional color options, click Select Color to display the Select Color
dialog box. Specify a color and click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
SOLIDEDIT
Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects.

Modify Edges on 3D Objects
You can select and modify edges on a 3D solid or surface.

Modify Edges on 3D Objects | 1193

Move, Rotate, and Scale Edges
Move, rotate, and scale the edges on 3D solids and surfaces using grips, gizmos,
and commands.

cubes with edges moved, rotated, and scaled

You can use MOVE, ROTATE, and SCALE to modify edges on 3D solids and
surfaces just as you can for any other object. Press and hold Ctrl to select the
edge.
If you move, rotate, or scale an edge on a 3D solid primitive, the history of
the solid primitive is removed. The solid is no longer a true primitive and
cannot be manipulated using grips and the Properties palette.
Edges on regions can be selected, but do not display grips. These edges can
also be moved, rotated, and scaled.

Edge Modification Options
As you drag an edge, press Ctrl to cycle through modification options.

1194 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

■

Extend Adjacent Faces. When you move, rotate, or scale an edge without
pressing Ctrl, the shared length of the edge and its vertices is maintained.
However, the planes of the adjacent faces adjacent might be changed.

■

Move Edge. When you move, rotate, or scale an edge and press and release
Ctrl once while dragging, the edge is modified without its vertices. The
surfaces of the adjacent faces are maintained, but the length of the modified
edge might change.

■

Allow Triangulation. When you move, rotate, or scale an edge and press
and release Ctrl twice while dragging, the edge and its vertices are modified.
(This behavior is the same as if you had not pressed Ctrl). However, if the
adjacent faces are no longer planar, they are triangulated (divided into two
or more planar triangular faces).

If you press and release Ctrl a third time, the modification returns to the first
option, as if you had not pressed Ctrl.
TIP Rather than pressing Ctrl to cycle through edge modification options, hover
over an edge grip to display the grip multi-functional menu.

Delete Edges
You can also delete edges that completely divide two coplanar faces using one
of the following methods:
■

Select the edge and press Delete.

■

Select the edge and enter the ERASE command.

Modify Edges on 3D Objects | 1195

Fillet and Chamfer 3D Solids
Round, fillet, or bevel the edges of 3D solids using FILLETEDGE and
CHAMFEREDGE.

Use the fillet and chamfer grips to modify the fillet radius or the chamfer
distance. The default fillet radius is set by the FILLETRAD3D system variable.
TIP Use the Chain option of FILLETEDGE to limit selection to tangent edges.

Color Edges
You can modify the color of an edge on a 3D object by selecting the edge and
changing the Color property in the Properties palette.

Copy Edges
You can copy individual edges on a 3D solid object. Edges are copied as lines,
arcs, circles, ellipses, or splines.

If you specify two points, the first point is used as a base point and a single
copy is placed relative to the base point. If you specify a single point, and then
press Enter, the original selection point is used as a base point. The next point
is used as a point of displacement.
See also:
■

Move, Rotate, and Scale 3D Subobjects on page 1186

1196 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

■

Use Gizmos to Modify Objects on page 1161

■

Modify Objects on page 775

■

Move or Rotate Objects on page 787

■

Resize or Reshape Objects on page 828

■

Overview of Modifying Meshes on page 1238

To fillet a solid object

1 Click Solid tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Fillet Edge.
2 Select the edge of the solid to fillet.
3 Specify the fillet radius.
4 Select additional edges or press Enter to fillet.

To chamfer a 3D solid object

1 Click Solid tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Chamfer Edge.
2 Select the edge of the base surface to chamfer.
One of two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge is highlighted.
3 Do one of the following:
■

To select a different surface, enter n (Next).

■

To use the current surface, press Enter.

4 Specify the base surface distance.
The base surface distance is measured from the selected edge to a point
on the base surface. The other surface distance is measured from the
selected edge to a point on the adjacent surface.
5 Specify the location of the chamfer using one of the following options.
■

To specify an individual edge, select the edge.

■

To select all edges around the base surface, enter l (Loop). Specify an
edge.

Modify Edges on 3D Objects | 1197

6 To complete the chamfer, press Enter.

To modify a fillet or chamfer on a 3D solid
1 Press and hold Ctrl as you select a fillet or chamfer on a 3D solid.
2 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the
object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, modify the properties of the fillet or chamfer.

To change the color of an edge on a solid object
1 Press and hold Ctrl as you click an edge on a 3D solid.
2 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the
object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, under General, click the Color arrow and select
a color from the list
For additional color options, click Select Color to display the Select Color
dialog box. Specify a color and click OK.

To copy an edge on a solid object
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Edge Editing drop-down ➤ Copy

Edges.
2 Press Ctrl+click the edge of the face to copy.
3 Select additional edges, if needed, and press Enter.
4 Specify the base point of the copied edges.
5 Specify the second point of displacement to indicate the location of the
copied edges.
6 Press Enter to complete the command.

1198 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

Quick Reference
Commands
EDGE
Changes the visibility of 3D face edges.
CHAMFER
Bevels the edges of objects.
CHAMFEREDGE
Bevels the edges of 3D solids and surfaces.
FILLET
Rounds and fillets the edges of objects.
FILLETEDGE
Rounds and fillets the edges of solid objects.
MOVE
Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
ROTATE
Rotates objects around a base point.
SCALE
Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object
the same after scaling.
SOLIDEDIT
Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects.

System Variables
FILLETRAD3D
Stores the current fillet radius for 3D objects.
GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL
Specifies the access methods for multi-functional grip options.

Modify Edges on 3D Objects | 1199

PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY
Controls the transparency of the preview generated while using SURFBLEND,
SURFPATCH, SURFFILLET, FILLETEDGE, CHAMFEREDGE, and LOFT.

Modify Vertices on 3D Objects
You can select and modify 3D object vertices.

Move, rotate, scale, or drag the vertices of 3D solids and surfaces.

wedge with two vertices moved

You can modify the form of a 3D solid or surface by modifying one or more
vertices. Use grips and gizmos, or run the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command.
When you scale or rotate vertices, you must select two or more vertices to see
a change in the object. Clicking and dragging a vertex “stretches” the 3D
object.
If you move, rotate, or scale one or more vertices on a 3D solid primitive, the
solid primitive history is removed. The solid is no longer a true primitive and
cannot be modified using grips and Properties palette.

Vertex Modification Options
As you drag a vertex, press Ctrl to cycle through modification options.

1200 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

■

Move Vertex. When you move a vertex and press and release Ctrl once,
adjacent planar faces might be adjusted.

■

Allow Triangulation. When you move a vertex without pressing Ctrl, some
adjacent planar faces may be triangulated (divided into two or more planar
triangular faces).

If you press and release Ctrl a second time, the modification returns to the
first option, as if you had not pressed Ctrl.
TIP Rather than pressing Ctrl to cycle through vertex modification options, hover
over a vertex grip to display the grip multi-functional menu.

Delete a Vertex
You can delete a vertex that connects two parallel edges that are collinear and
do not intersect on any other edges.
See also:
■

Move, Rotate, and Scale 3D Subobjects on page 1186

■

Use Gizmos to Modify Objects on page 1161

■

Modify Objects on page 775

■

Overview of Modifying Meshes on page 1238

To move a vertex on a 3D object

1 Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ Vertex.

Modify Vertices on 3D Objects | 1201

2 Click a vertex on a 3D object.
3 Drag the vertex to the required location.

To delete a vertex on a 3D object

1 Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ Vertex.
2 Click a vertex that connects collinear edges are parallel and do not lie on
any other edges.
3 Press Delete.

System Variables
GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL
Specifies the access methods for multi-functional grip options.

Work with Complex 3D Solids and Surfaces
Modify composite solids that are created by a union, subtract, intersect, fillet,
or chamfer process.

1202 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

Display Original Forms of Composite Solids
By default, 3D composite objects retain a history that displays an editable
image of their original component forms.

Retain the History of the Composite Components
After you create a composite object, you can modify the shape of the new
object by modifying a highlighted wireframe image of its original components.
If the Show History property is Yes (On), wireframes of the original
forms—including forms that have been removed—are displayed in a dimmed
state. (The SHOWHIST system variable also controls this setting.)

To retain a history of the original parts of composite solids, the History
property must be set to Record (On) in the Properties palette when the
composite operation occurs. You can also use the SOLIDHIST system variable
to set this property.

Display and Remove the History to Modify the Composite
When you modify the composite object, you can display the history. Then
use the grips on the history subobject to modify the object. For more
information about using grips with composite solids, see Modify Composite
Solids and Surfaces on page 1205.
You can remove the history of a selected composite object by changing its
History setting to None, or by entering the BREP command. After a history
has been removed, you can no longer select and modify the original, removed,
components of the solid. You can restart history retention for the solid by
changing its History setting back to Record.

Display Original Forms of Composite Solids | 1203

Removing a composite history is useful when you work with complex
composite solids. After you create the initial complex form, set History to
None (Off) to remove the history. Then reset the value to Record (On). With
this process, you can create a complex composite object, and then reset it to
serve as a base form for additional composite operations.
See also:
■

Modify Composite Solids and Surfaces on page 1205

To display the original components of a composite solid
1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the
object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties.
2 In a drawing, select a 3D composite solid.
3 On the Properties palette, Solid History area, under Show History, select
Yes.

To remove the history of a solid object
1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the
object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties.
2 In a drawing, select a 3D solid.
3 On the Properties palette, Solid History area, under History, select None.

To set a 3D solid to record a history of its original forms
1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the
object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties.
2 In a drawing, select a solid.

1204 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

3 On the Properties palette, Solid History area, under History, select Record.

Quick Reference
Commands
BREP
Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity
from surfaces.

System Variables
SHOWHIST
Controls the Show History property for solids in a drawing.
SOLIDHIST
Controls whether new composite solids retain a history of their original
components.

Modify Composite Solids and Surfaces
Modify the entire form of a composite 3D object or the original forms that
make up the composite.
You can move, scale, or rotate a selected composite object using grips or
gizmos.

Modify Original Components of Composites
When the History property is set to Record (On), press the Ctrl key to display
any original forms that were removed during a union, subtract, or intersect
operation. If the original, removed form was a solid primitive, you can drag
the displayed grips to change its shape and size. As a result, the composite
object is modified.

Modify Composite Solids and Surfaces | 1205

If the selected individual form does not contain its history, you can move,
rotate, scale, or delete the form.

Modify Complex Composites
A composite object might be made up of other composite objects. You can
select the history images of composite objects by holding down the Ctrl key
as you click the forms. (For best results, set the subobject selection filter to
Solid History.)

You can also change the size and shape of composite objects by clicking and
dragging grips on individual faces, edges, and vertices. For more information,
see Modify 3D Subobjects on page 1186.

Separate Discrete Objects Combined with a Union
If you have combined discrete 3D solids or surfaces using a union operation,
you can separate them into their original components. (Use the Separate
option of the SOLIDEDIT command.) Composite objects cannot overlap or
share a common area or volume to be separated.
After separation, the individual solids retain their original layers and colors.
All nested 3D solid objects are restored to their simplest forms.
See also:
■

Modify Objects Using Grips on page 777

1206 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

■

Overview of Modifying Meshes on page 1238

To select an individual solid that is part of a composite solid
■

Press Ctrl + click an individual solid that is part of a composite solid.

To separate a 3D solid composite into individual solids
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Solid Editing

drop-down ➤ Separate.
2 Select the 3D solid object.
NOTE This operation only applies to non-intersecting objects that have been
combined by union.
3 Press Enter to complete the command.

Quick Reference
Commands
SOLIDEDIT
Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects.

System Variables
LEGACYCTRLPICK

Shell and Remove Redundancies in 3D Objects
Convert 3D solids to shells and remove redundant lines and edges.

Shell 3D Solids
Convert a 3D solid to a hollow wall, or shell.
When you can convert a solid object to a shell, new faces are created by
offsetting existing faces inside or outside their original positions.

Shell and Remove Redundancies in 3D Objects | 1207

Continuously tangent faces are treated as a single face when they are offset.

To create a 3D solid shell
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Solid Editing drop-down ➤ Shell.

2 Select the 3D solid object.
3 Select one or more faces to be excluded from shelling.
4 Press Enter.
5 Specify the shell offset value.
A positive offset value creates a shell wall in a positive direction from the
face. A negative value creates a shell wall in a negative direction from the
face.
6 Press Enter to complete the command.

Quick Reference
Commands
SOLIDEDIT
Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects.

Clean and Check 3D Solids
Remove redundant faces, edges, and vertices from a 3D solid, and verify
whether the 3D solid is valid.

1208 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

You can remove redundant edges or vertices that share the same surface or
vertex definition. This operation merges adjacent faces and deletes all
redundant edges, including imprinted and unused edges.

True 3D solid objects have properties, volume, and mass, that are not shared
by objects created with thickness or closed surfaces. You can check whether
an object is a valid 3D solid by verifying whether it is listed as “3D Solid” on
the Properties palette. You can also use SOLIDEDIT to verify whether a solid
object is a valid 3D solid object.

To remove redundant lines from a 3D solid object
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Solid Editing flyout ➤ Clean.

2 Select the 3D solid object.
3 Press Enter to complete the command.

To validate a 3D solid object
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Solid Editing flyout ➤ Check.

2 Select the 3D solid object.
3 Press Enter to complete the command.
If the object is a valid 3D object, a message is displayed at the Command
prompt. If it is not valid, you continue to be prompted to select a 3D
solid.

Shell and Remove Redundancies in 3D Objects | 1209

Quick Reference
Commands
SOLIDEDIT
Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects.

System Variables
SOLIDCHECK
Turns 3D solid validation on and off for the current session.

Press or Pull Bounded Areas
Create a positive or negative extrusion in the shape of a bounded area.

Press in or pull out bounded, or closed, areas to create 3D holes and positive
extrusions.

object formed using press and pull
operations on an imprinted pyramid

1210 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

In combination with imprinted faces, you can form complex shapes using
press or pull operations to create extrusions and notches.

Methods for Press and Pull Modifications
With the PRESSPULL command, you specify the area to be extruded, and then
move the cursor or enter a value to specify the length of the extrusion. The
result is a single 3D solid object, often with a composite shape.
You can also press Ctrl+Shift+E to initiate a press or pull operation. To limit
the type of objects that can act as boundaries, turn off the IMPLIEDFACE
system variable. When the variable is off, only 3D faces and 3D solid faces
can be extruded using Ctrl+Shift+E. (This variable does not affect the
PRESSPULL command.)
NOTE If you alternatively use EXTRUDE to extend an existing face on a 3D solid,
a separate extruded object is created.

Types of Objects That Can Be Pressed or Pulled
You can press or pull several types of bounded areas, including closed objects,
areas enclosed by coplanar geometry, the faces of 3D solids, and an imprinted
area on the face of a 3D solid. For a complete list of objects that are eligible
for a press or pull extrusion, see PRESSPULL.
You cannot taper the pressed or pulled shape as you create it. However, you
can achieve the same effect later by modifying the edges of the bounded area.

To press or pull a bounded area
1 Press and hold Ctrl+Shift+E.
2 Click any area bounded by coplanar lines or edges.
3 Drag the mouse to press or pull the bounded area.
4 Click two points or enter a value to specify the height or depth of the
extrusion.

Quick Reference
Commands
EXTRUDE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object.

Press or Pull Bounded Areas | 1211

PRESSPULL
Presses or pulls bounded areas.

System Variables
IMPLIEDFACE
Controls the detection of implied faces.

Add Facets to Faces on Solids and Surfaces
Subdivide faces into additional facets on 3D solids and surfaces by imprinting
other objects, such as arcs and circles on them.
With the IMPRINT command, you can add a new facet to a 3D solid by
imprinting a coplanar object that overlaps a face. Imprinting provides
additional edges that you can use to reshape the 3D object.
For example, if a circle overlaps the face of a box, you can imprint it on the
solid.

You can delete or retain the original object when you imprint it.
Objects that can be imprinted on 3D solids include arcs, circles, lines, 2D and
3D polylines, ellipses, splines, regions, bodies, and other 3D solids.

Edit Imprinted Objects
You can edit imprinted objects and subobjects in many of the same ways that
you can edit other faces. For example, you can Ctrl+click to select a new edge
and drag it to a new location, or you can use PRESSPULL on the facet.
The following limitations exist for imprinted objects:
■

You can move the edges of the imprinted face only within the plane of a
face.

1212 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

■

You might be unable to move, rotate, or scale some subobjects.

■

Imprinted edges and faces might be lost when some subobjects are moved,
rotated, or scaled.

Subobjects with editing limitations include
■

Faces with imprinted edges or faces

■

Edges or vertices with adjacent faces that contain imprinted edges or faces

To imprint a 3D solid object
1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Edge Editing

drop-down ➤ Imprint.
2 Select the 3D solid object.
3 Select a co-planar object that you want to imprint.
4 Press Enter to retain the original objects, or enter y to delete them.
5 Select additional objects to imprint or press Enter.
6 Press Enter to complete the command.

Quick Reference
Commands
IMPRINT
Imprints 2D geometry on a 3D solid or surface, creating additional edges on
planar faces.

Modify the Properties of 3D Solids, Surfaces, and Meshes
Modify 3D objects by changing their settings in the Properties palette.
3D solids, surfaces, and meshes, and their subobjects can be modified in the
Properties palette.

Modify the Properties of 3D Solids, Surfaces, and Meshes | 1213

Modify Solid Objects by Changing Properties
By changing settings in the Properties palette, you can modify basic size,
height, and shape characteristics of primitive solids. For example, to change
a four-sided pyramid that ends in a point to an eight-sided pyramid that ends
in a planar surface (pyramid frustum), update the Top Radius and Sides
properties.

Set Whether to Retain Compound Object History
With 3D solids that have been recombined to form compound objects, you
can choose to retain the history subobject, which represents components that
have been removed. The Properties palette controls the availability and display
of these histories. For more information, see Work with Complex 3D Solids
and Surfaces on page 1202.

Modify Surface Objects by Changing Properties
Surface objects have additional properties that are not found in 3D solid or
mesh objects. The properties differ depending on the type of surface (NURBS,
blend, patch, network, offset, fillet, chamfer, extend, loft, extrude, sweep,
planar, or revolve).

1214 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

Surfaces include the following information in the Properties palette:
■

Basic geometric information - Contains information such as radius for
fillet surfaces, offset distance for offset surfaces, and taper angle for extruded
surfaces. You can also enter mathematical expressions to control some of
these properties.

■

Maintain Associativity - Displays whether surface is associative or not. Use
this property to turn associativity off.

■

Show Associativity - Turns dependency highlighting on and off if the
surface is associated with other surfaces.

■

Edge Continuity and Bulge Magnitude - Displays for surfaces that join
other surfaces.

■

Wireframe Display and U/V Isolines - Turns the wireframe and U/V Isoline
display on and off (for non-NURBS surfaces).

■

CV Hull Display and U/V Isoparms - Turns the CV Hull and U/V Isoparm
display on and off (for NURBS surfaces).

■

Trims - Reports whether the surface has any trimmed areas and on which
edges.

Modify Mesh Objects by Changing Properties
Mesh objects have additional properties that control the level of smoothness
and creases. Crease properties of face, edge, and vertex subobjects are also
reflected in the Properties palette.
■

Level of Smoothness. Smooths or sharpens the edges of a mesh object.

Modify the Properties of 3D Solids, Surfaces, and Meshes | 1215

■

Crease Type. Specifies the presence of a crease (or sharpened edge) and
the effect of smoothing. Smoothing does not affect a crease with a value
of Always. A crease set to By Level retains its sharpness until the mesh
object is smoothed to the specified crease level.

■

Crease Level. When a crease is set to By Level, indicates the smoothing
level at which the crease starts to lose its sharpness.

Modify 3D Subobject Properties
In addition to solids, surfaces, and meshes, you can also use the Properties
palette to modify the properties of individual subobjects, such as faces, edges,
and vertices. Different properties are available for different types of subobjects.
In some cases, the application of properties can differ depending on the object
type. For example, you can modify the properties of mesh faces, including
their color. However, the color appearance of a mesh face might differ from
the equivalent color on a 3D solid face. This difference occurs because changing
the color of a face modifies the diffuse color of the face, but not the ambient
color (which is derived from the mesh material property). To obtain a closer
match between the color of 3D solid and mesh faces, you can add lights and
turn off the default lighting (which disables ambient lighting). You can also

1216 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

try assigning a material that has the same ambient and diffuse color. For more
information see Create New Materials on page 2209.
See also:
■

Work with Complex 3D Solids and Surfaces on page 1202

To modify the contour of a lofted solid or surface by changing the surface
normal settings (Properties palette)
1 In a drawing, select a lofted solid or surface that was created with cross
sections.
2 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the
object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties.
3 On the Properties palette, Geometry area, change the Surface Normals
setting. (For a description, see Loft Settings.)

To modify a mesh object in the Properties palette
1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the
object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties.
2 Click the mesh object to select it.
3 In the Properties palette, modify the properties you want to change.

To modify a mesh face, edge, or vertex in the Properties palette
1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the
object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties.
2 Press Ctrl+click the mesh face, edge, or vertex that you want to modify.
NOTE If you cannot select a specific subobject, verify whether subobject
selection filtering is turned on for a different subobject type. (Right-click in
the drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter.)
3 In the Properties palette, modify the properties you want to change.

Modify the Properties of 3D Solids, Surfaces, and Meshes | 1217

Quick Reference
Commands
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

System Variables
FILLETRAD
Stores the current fillet radius for 2D objects.
FILLETRAD3D
Stores the current fillet radius for 3D objects.
LOFTANG1
Sets the draft angle through the first cross section in a loft operation.
LOFTANG2
Sets the draft angle through the last cross section in a loft operation.
LOFTMAG1
Sets the magnitude of the draft angle through the first cross section in a loft
operation.
LOFTMAG2
Sets the magnitude of the draft angle through the last cross section in a loft
operation.

Modify Surfaces
Reshape surfaces, and then analyze and rebuild the model if necessary to
ensure quality and smoothness.

Overview of Modifying Surfaces
Fillet, extend, and trim surfaces or modify NURBS surfaces with control vertices.
Procedural and NURBS surfaces can be edited with basic editing tools such as
trimming, extending and filleting. NURBS surfaces can be modified with these
tools as well, but they can also be reshaped by stretching control vertices.

1218 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

When your surface design is complete, use the surface analysis tools to ensure
the quality of your model and to rebuild it if necessary.
■

Trim and Untrim Surfaces

■

Extend Surfaces

■

Fillet Surfaces

Overview of Modifying Surfaces | 1219

■

Edit NURBS Surfaces

Trim and Untrim Surfaces
Trim and untrim surfaces to meet the edges of other objects.
An important step in the surface modeling workflow is trimming surfaces.
You can trim a surface where it meets an intersecting object or you can project
geometry onto a surface as a trimming edge.
When a surface is trimmed, the removed surface areas can be replaced with
SURFUNTRIM.

1220 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

NOTE SURFUNTRIM does not restore areas removed by the SURFAUTOTRIM
system variable and PROJECTGEOMETRY. It only restores areas trimmed with
SURFTRIM.
The Properties palette indicates if the surface contains any trimmed edges.

Projecting Geometry onto Surfaces, Solids, and Regions
Similar to projecting a movie onto a screen, you can project geometry onto
3D solids, surfaces, and regions from different directions to create trimming
edges. The PROJECTGEOMETRY command creates a duplicate curve on the
object that you can move and edit. You can also trim against 2D curves that
do not actually touch the surface, but that appear to intersect the object in
the current view.
Use the SURFACEAUTOTRIM system variable to automatically trim a surface
when you project geometry onto it.

Options for Projecting Geometry
Project geometry from 3 different angles: the Z axis of the current UCS, the
current view, or a path between two points.
■

Project to UCS - Projects the geometry along the positive or negative Z axis
of the current UCS.

■

Project to View - Projects the geometry based on the current view.

■

Project to Two Points - Projects the geometry along a path between two
points.

To trim a surface

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Trim.
2 Select the surface and press Enter.
3 Select the cutting curves and press Enter.
4 Select the surface areas to remove and press Enter.
The selected areas are removed.

Trim and Untrim Surfaces | 1221

To untrim a surface

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Untrim.
2 Select a visible part of the surface and press Enter.
The trimmed areas are replaced.
NOTE When you trim a surface multiple times, you may lose some of the original
trimming edges. In this case, some untrim actions may not be possible if the
trimming edge has been lost.

To automatically trim areas to projected curves

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Project Geometry panel ➤ Auto Trim.

2 Click Surface tab ➤ Project Geometry panel ➤ Project to View.
3 Select the curve to project onto the surface and press Enter.
4 Select a surface as the target and press enter.
The area is automatically trimmed.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DOSNAP
Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.
PROJECTGEOMETRY
Projects points, lines, or curves onto a 3D solid or surface from different
directions.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

1222 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

SURFTRIM
Trims portions of a surface where it meets another surface or type of geometry.
SURFUNTRIM
Replaces surface areas removed by the SURFTRIM command.
VISUALSTYLES
Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport.

System Variables
3DOSMODE
Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps.
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE
Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted
when you roll over them.
SURFACEAUTOTRIM
Controls whether surfaces are automatically trimmed when you project
geometry onto them.

Extend a Surface
Create a new surface by extending it to meet the edge of another object or by
specifying an extension length.
There are two types of extend surfaces: merge and append. The merge surface
is a continuation of the surface with no seam. The append surface extends the
surface by adding a second surface with a seam. Because it creates a seam,
append surfaces have continuity and bulge magnitude on page 1082 properties.
For both surface types, use the Properties palette to change the length or to
derive the length from a mathematical expression.

Extend a Surface | 1223

To create a new surface by extending a surface
1 Select a surface.
2 Right-click and select Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, under Geometry, change the desired settings.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
SURFEXTEND
Lengthens a surface by a specified distance.

Fillet a Surface
Create a new transition surface that fillets an area between two existing surfaces
or regions.
Create a tangent surface between two surfaces or regions with a constant radius
profile. The original surfaces will trim to meet the fillet surface.
By default, the fillet surface uses the radius value set in the FILLETRAD3D
system variable. Change the radius while you are creating the surface with
the radius option or by dragging the fillet grip. Use the Properties palette to
change the fillet radius or to derive the radius using a mathematical expression.

To create a fillet surface

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Fillet.
2 Select the first and second surfaces.
The fillet surface is created and the originating are surfaces automatically
trimmed if necessary.

1224 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

Quick Reference
Commands
SURFFILLET
Creates a filleted surface between two other surfaces.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

System Variables
FILLETRAD3D
Stores the current fillet radius for 3D objects.
PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY
Controls the transparency of the preview generated while using SURFBLEND,
SURFPATCH, SURFFILLET, FILLETEDGE, CHAMFEREDGE, and LOFT.

Edit NURBS Surfaces
Change the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves by using the 3D Edit Bar or
by editing control vertices.
Use the Control Vertices Edit Bar (3DEDITBAR) to drag and reshape surfaces.
A second way to edit NURBS surfaces is to drag and edit the control vertices
directly. Press and hold Shift to select multiple control vertices.

Edit NURBS Surfaces | 1225

Use CVSHOW to display the control vertices for both NURBS surfaces and
curves.
Drag the control vertices to reshape the curve or surface; you can also add or
delete control vertices in both the U and V directions.
The typical surface modeling workflow is to:
■

Create a model that combines 3D solids, surfaces, and mesh objects.

■

Convert the model to procedural surfaces to take advantage of associative
modeling.

■

Convert the procedural surfaces to NURBS surfaces with CONVTONURBS
to take advantage of NURBS editing.

■

Check for imperfections and wrinkles with the surface analysis tools.

■

If necessary, rebuild the surfaces to restore smoothness with CVREBUILD.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DEDITBAR
CONVTONURBS
Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces.

1226 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

CVSHOW
Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves.
CVADD
Adds control vertices to NURBS surfaces and splines.
CVHIDE
Turns off the display of control vertices for all NURBS surfaces and curves.
CVREBUILD
Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves.
CVREMOVE
Removes control vertices from NURBS surfaces and curves.

System Variables
SURFACEMODELINGMODE
Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS
surfaces.

Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves
Reconstruct NURBS surfaces and curves to a specified degree and number of
control vertices.
Editing a NURBS surface or curve can create discontinuity and wrinkles.
Reconstruct the surface or curve by changing the degree and the number of
control vertices. Rebuilding also allows you to delete the original geometry,
and, for surfaces only, to replace trimmed areas.

To rebuild a NURBS surface

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices panel ➤ Rebuild.
The Rebuild Surface dialog box displays.
2 Select the desired rebuild options and click OK.

Edit NURBS Surfaces | 1227

Quick Reference
Commands
CONVTONURBS
Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces.
CVSHOW
Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves.
CVADD
Adds control vertices to NURBS surfaces and splines.
CVHIDE
Turns off the display of control vertices for all NURBS surfaces and curves.
CVREBUILD
Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves.
CVREMOVE
Removes control vertices from NURBS surfaces and curves.

Analyze Surfaces
Surface analysis tools check the continuity, curvature and draft angles of
surfaces.
Use the surface analysis tools to validate surfaces and curves before
manufacturing. Analysis tools include:
■

Zebra Analysis on page 1232 - Analyzes surface continuity by projecting
parallel lines onto the model.

1228 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

■

Curvature Analysis on page 1235 - Evaluates areas of high and low surface
curvature by displaying a color gradient.

■

Draft Analysis on page 1236 - Evaluates whether a model has adequate draft
between a part and its mold.

Analyze Surfaces | 1229

NOTE Analysis tools only work in the 3D visual styles; they will not work in 2D.

Quick Reference
Commands
ANALYSISCURVATURE
Displays a color gradient onto a surface to evaluate different aspects of its
curvature.
ANALYSISDRAFT
Displays a color gradient onto a 3D model to evaluate whether there is
adequate space between a part and its mold.
ANALYSISOPTIONS
Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis.
ANALYSISZEBRA
Projects stripes onto a 3D model to analyze surface continuity.

1230 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

System Variables
VSACURVATUREHIGH
Sets the value at which a surface displays as green during curvature analysis
(ANALYSISCURVATURE).
VSACURVATURELOW
Sets the value at which a surface displays as blue during curvature analysis
(ANALYSISCURVATURE).
VSACURVATURETYPE
Controls which type of curvature analysis is used with the
(ANALYSISCURVATURE).
VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH
Sets the value at which a model displays as green during draft analysis
(ANALYSISDRAFT).
VSADRAFTANGLELOW
Sets the value at which a model displays as blue during draft analysis
(ANALYSISDRAFT).
VSAZEBRACOLOR1
Sets the first color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis
(ANALYSISZEBRA).
VSAZEBRACOLOR2
Sets the second (contrasting) color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra
analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA).
VSAZEBRADIRECTION
Controls whether zebra stripes display horizontally, vertically, or at an angle
during zebra analysis (ANALYSISBRA).
VSAZEBRASIZE
Controls the width of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis
(ANALYSISZEBRA).
VSAZEBRATYPE
Sets the type of zebra display when using zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA).

Analyze Surfaces | 1231

Analyze Surface Continuity with Zebra Analysis
The zebra analysis tool projects stripes onto a surface so that you can inspect
the continuity between surfaces.
Surface continuity is a measure of how smoothly two surfaces flow into each
other. A car hood, for example, can be composed of multiple small surfaces
that appear to be one because of the smoothness of the surface continuity.
NOTE Analysis tools only work in the 3D visual styles; they will not work in 2D.

How to Interpret the Zebra Stripes
In the seam where two surfaces meet, the way that the zebra stripes align and
curve tells you a lot about the smoothness of the join.
■

G0 Position. The position of the surface edges is collocated; they touch.
But the tangency and curvature do not match. The zebra stripes do not
line up.

■

G1 Tangency. The position and tangency of surfaces is the same. This
indicates G1 (G0 + G1 or position + tangency). The zebra stripes line up,
but they veer away from one another at sharp curves.

1232 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

■

G2 Curvature. The position, tangency, and curvature of the surface edges
is the same. This indicates G2 (G0 + G1 + G2 or position + tangency +
curvature).
The stripes line up, but they do not veer away from each other at sharp
curves (because they share the same curvature). This distinction is subtle
and a little harder to discern from G1 continuity.

To analyze surface continuity

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Zebra.
2 Select a surface and press Enter.
The zebra stripes display.

Analyze Surfaces | 1233

To turn off the zebra display

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options.
2 Click the Clear Zebra Analysis button.
The zebra stripes disappear.

To change the zebra analysis options

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options.
2 In the Zebra tab of the Analysis Options dialog box, select the desired
options and click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
ANALYSISOPTIONS
Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis.
ANALYSISZEBRA
Projects stripes onto a 3D model to analyze surface continuity.

System Variables
VSAZEBRACOLOR1
Sets the first color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis
(ANALYSISZEBRA).
VSAZEBRACOLOR2
Sets the second (contrasting) color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra
analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA).
VSAZEBRADIRECTION
Controls whether zebra stripes display horizontally, vertically, or at an angle
during zebra analysis (ANALYSISBRA).

1234 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

VSAZEBRASIZE
Controls the width of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis
(ANALYSISZEBRA).
VSAZEBRATYPE
Sets the type of zebra display when using zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA).

Analyze the Curvature of a NURBS Surface
Displays a color gradient onto surfaces to evaluate areas of high, low and
Gaussian curvature.
The color gradient allows you to visualize Gaussian, minimum, maximum,
and mean U and V surface curvature. Maximum curvature and a positive
Gaussian value display as red, and minimum curvature and a negative Gaussian
value display as blue. Positive Gaussian curvature means the surface is shaped
like a bowl. Negative Gaussian curvature means the surface is shaped like a
saddle as shown in this illustration. Mean curvature and a zero Gaussian value
means the surface is flat in at least one direction (planes, cylinders, and cones
have zero Gaussian curvature).
The curvature analysis tool ensures that your model stays within a specified
range. You can analyze the following on a point on a surface or curve:
NOTE Analysis tools only work in the 3D visual styles; they will not work in 2D.

To analyze the curvature of a surface

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Curvature.
2 Select a surface and press Enter.
The curvature coloring display.

To turn off the curvature color display

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options.
2 Click the Clear Curvature Analysis button.

Analyze Surfaces | 1235

The curvature coloring disappears.

To change the curvature analysis options

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options.
2 In the Curvature tab of the Analysis Options dialog box, select the desired
options and click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
ANALYSISCURVATURE
Displays a color gradient onto a surface to evaluate different aspects of its
curvature.
ANALYSISOPTIONS
Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis.

Use the Draft Analysis Tool
Evaluates if a model has adequate space between a part and its mold.

1236 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

If you are creating shapes or parts that need to be molded, the draft analysis
tool evaluates if their is adequate draft between a part and its mold (based on
the pull direction).
NOTE Analysis tools only work in the 3D visual styles; they will not work in 2D.

To analyze the draft of a model

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Draft.
2 Select a model and press Enter.
The draft analysis colors display.

To turn off the draft color display

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options.
2 Click the Clear Draft Analysis button.
The draft analysis colors disappears.

To change the draft analysis options

1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options.
2 In the Draft Angle tab of the Analysis Options dialog box, select the
desired options and click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
ANALYSISDRAFT
Displays a color gradient onto a 3D model to evaluate whether there is
adequate space between a part and its mold.

Analyze Surfaces | 1237

ANALYSISOPTIONS
Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis.

System Variables
VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH
Sets the value at which a model displays as green during draft analysis
(ANALYSISDRAFT).
VSADRAFTANGLELOW
Sets the value at which a model displays as blue during draft analysis
(ANALYSISDRAFT).

Modify Mesh Objects
Model mesh objects by changing smoothing levels, refining specific areas, or
adding creases.

Overview of Modifying Meshes
Modeling mesh objects differs from modeling 3D solids and surfaces in some
important ways.
Mesh objects do not have the mass and volume properties of 3D solids.
However, they do offer unique capabilities that enable you to design less
angular, more rounded models. Mesh objects are easier to mold and reshape
than their solid and surface counterparts.

1238 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

NOTE The capabilities described in this section apply only to mesh objects created
in and later. They cannot be used with legacy polyface or polygon mesh.

About Mesh Faces
Mesh objects are composed of faces and facets.

Overview of Modifying Meshes | 1239

Faces are non-overlapping units that—along with their edges and
vertices—form the basic editable units of a mesh object. When you move,
rotate, and scale individual mesh faces, surrounding faces are stretched and
deformed in order to avoid introducing gaps. When gaps occur, you can often
close them by smoothing the object or refining individual faces.

About Mesh Facets
Mesh faces have underlying structures, known as facets. The density of the
facet grid corresponds to the smoothness of the mesh. As the smoothness
level is increased, the density of the underlying facet grid also increases. When
you want to confine detailed mesh editing to a smaller area, you can convert
facets to editable faces by using refinement.
Unlike faces, facets cannot be individually modified. However, you can make
them more visible by modifying the VSLIGHTINGQUALITY system variable.

About Mesh Modeling
You can work with mesh objects in the following ways:
■

Add smoothness. Increase or decrease smoothness levels to round the
overall shape of the model. The underlying density of the mesh facet grid
increases as the mesh object smoothness level increases
(MESHSMOOTHMORE, MESHSMOOTHLESS).

■

Refine the object to reset the baseline smoothness level. Refine a mesh
object to convert the underlying facet grid to editable faces. Refinement

1240 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

also resets the lowest level of smoothness that can be applied to the object
(MESHREFINE).
■

Refine a face. Restrict the refinement to a specific mesh face. This method
avoids resetting the smoothness baseline.

■

Crease an edge. Remove the smoothness from specified edges. You can
also remove an existing crease (MESHCREASE).

■

Split or merge faces. Divide an existing face into separate components
along a specified path. Merge two or more faces to create a single face
(MESHSPLIT MESHMERGE).

■

Collapse vertices. Alter the mesh model by collapsing the vertices of
adjacent faces to a single point (MESHCOLLAPSE.

■

Spin edges. Spin the shared edge of adjacent triangular faces to alter the
shapes and orientation of the faces (MESHSPIN).

■

Extrude a face. Extend a specified face by extruding it into 3D space. Unlike
3D solid extrusion, a mesh extrusion does not create a separate object
(MESHEXTRUDE).

■

Repair holes. Close a gap between faces by selecting the surrounding edges.
Holes in mesh objects can prevent you from converting a mesh object to
a solid object (MESHCAP).

Use Grip Editing with Mesh
Grips, as described in Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces on page 1183, are
not available with meshes. However, you can manipulate the entire mesh
model or individual subobjects using the following methods:
■

Subobject selection and editing. Select faces, edges, and vertices the same
way you select 3D solid subobjects. Press and hold Ctrl while selecting a
subobject. The subobject highlighting indicates what is selected. Press and
hold Shift and click again to remove the selection from a subobject. By
turning on the Subobject Selection Filter, you can restrict selection to a
specific subobject, which you can select without pressing and holding Ctrl.
See Use 3D Subobject Grips on page 1176.

■

Gizmo editing. When you select a mesh object or subobject, the 3D Move,
Rotate, or Scale gizmo is displayed automatically. (You can set which gizmo
is displayed by default.) Use these gizmos to modify the selection uniformly,
or along a specified plane or axis. Form more information, see Use Gizmos
to Modify Objects on page 1161.

Overview of Modifying Meshes | 1241

Because dense meshes can be difficult to work with, you can change settings
to improve the display and behavior of grips.
■

Set the subobject selection filter to select only faces, edges, or vertices:
Set the DEFAULTGIZMO system variable or use the shortcut menu.

■

Set whether a grip on a face, edge, or vertex is active immediately when
you select the subobject: Set the GRIPSUBOBJMODE system variable.

See also:
■

Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces on page 1183

■

Use Gizmos to Modify Objects on page 1161

Quick Reference
Commands
MESHCAP
Creates a mesh face that connects open edges.
MESHCOLLAPSE
Merges the vertices of selected mesh faces or edges.
MESHCREASE
Sharpens the edges of selected mesh subobjects.
MESHEXTRUDE
Extends a mesh face into 3D space.
MESHMERGE
Merges adjacent faces into a single face.
MESHREFINE
Multiplies the number of faces in selected mesh objects or faces.
MESHSMOOTHLESS
Decreases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level.
MESHSMOOTHMORE
Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level.

1242 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

MESHSPIN
Spins the adjoining edge of two triangular mesh faces.
MESHSPLIT
Splits a mesh face into two faces.
MESHUNCREASE
Removes the crease from selected mesh faces, edges, or vertices.

System Variables
DEFAULTGIZMO
Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during
subobject selection.
GRIPSUBOBJMODE
Controls whether grips are automatically selected (made “hot”) when
subobjects are selected.
VSLIGHTINGQUALITY
Sets the lighting quality in the current viewport.

Change Mesh Smoothness Levels
Increase the roundness of mesh objects by increasing the smoothness levels.
Mesh objects are made up of multiple subdivisions, or tessellations, which
define the editable faces. Each face consists of underlying facets. When you
increase smoothness, you increase the number of facets to provide a smoother,
more rounded look.

Change Mesh Smoothness Levels | 1243

Increase or Decrease Smoothness
As you work, you can increase and decrease the level of smoothness. The
differences are apparent both in the wireframe and conceptual visual styles
and in the rendered output.

1244 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

The lowest level of smoothness, or baseline, is 0. By default, Level 0 has no
smoothness. You can increase the smoothness of any mesh object up to the
current limits. However, you cannot decrease the smoothness of a mesh object
whose level of smoothness is zero.
If you have added creases to a mesh object, the effect of smoothing differs,
depending on the crease setting. The effect of creases added to mesh that has
no smoothness (Level 0) is not apparent until the mesh is smoothed.
As you edit an object using gizmos or grips, you might create gaps in the mesh
object. One way to close the gap is to smooth the object or refine individual
subobjects.
NOTE Using hardware acceleration might also help resolve this problem. (For
more information, see Graphics System.)

Limit Mesh Density
Mesh is created at the level of smoothness that you specify. The smoothness
can range from None (0), to the default maximum (6), or to a level that you
specify. As an object is smoothed, the density of the mesh facet grid also
increases. For best results, model mesh objects at lower smoothness levels and
increase the smoothness only after modeling is complete.

Change Mesh Smoothness Levels | 1245

Dense meshes can result in subobjects that are difficult to select and edit. They
can also affect performance. Therefore you might want to set limits that
prevent the mesh from becoming too dense.
■

Maximum level of smoothness at which a grid is displayed
(SMOOTHMESHGRID). Displays the effects of modeling without the
complexity of the underlying facet grid. The default smoothness level is
3. The tessellation display becomes increasingly dense until the maximum
level is exceeded. Beyond that level, the display reverts to the most basic
level, even though the smoothing level can continue to increase.

■

Maximum number of faces in a drawing (SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE). Sets
the maximum number of mesh faces that are permitted per mesh object.

■

Maximum level of smoothness (SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV). Sets the
maximum smoothness level permitted for mesh objects.

To increase the smoothness of a mesh object

1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Smooth More.
2 Select the mesh objects that you want to modify.
The smoothness of each object that you select is increased one level.

To decrease the smoothness of a mesh object

1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Smooth Less.
2 Select the mesh objects that you want to modify.
The smoothness of each object that you select is decreased one level.

To increase or decrease the smoothness of a mesh object (Properties palette)
1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the
object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties.
2 Select the mesh objects that you want to modify.
3 In the Properties palette, Geometry area, Smoothness box, select a new
smoothness level.

1246 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

To control the display of the mesh facet grid
1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshgrid.
2 Enter one of the following values:
■

0 suppresses the display of the underlying mesh facet grid.

■

1 displays the mesh facet grid only when the object has a level of
smoothness of 0 or 1.

■

2 and higher sets the highest level of smoothness at which the facet
grid is displayed.

To set the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects
1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshmaxlev.
2 Enter a value that represents the highest level of smoothness permissible
for mesh objects. The recommended range is 1 - 5.

To set the maximum number of mesh faces
1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshmaxface.
2 Enter the maximum number of faces permitted for an object.
You can set a value up to 16,000,000.

Quick Reference
Commands
MESHSMOOTHLESS
Decreases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level.
MESHSMOOTHMORE
Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Change Mesh Smoothness Levels | 1247

System Variables
SMOOTHMESHGRID
Sets the maximum level of smoothness at which the underlying mesh facet
grid is displayed on 3D mesh objects.
SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE
Sets the maximum number of faces permitted for mesh objects.
SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV
Sets the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects.

Refine Mesh Objects or Subobjects
Refine a mesh object or subobject to convert underlying facets to editable
faces.
You can refine any mesh that has a level of smoothness of 1 or higher.

Refine a Mesh Object and Reset the Baseline
Refining an object increases the number of editable faces by converting the
underlying facets to faces. The number of resulting faces depends on the
current level of smoothness. Higher smoothness levels result in a higher
number of faces after refinement.

In addition to increasing the number of faces, refining a mesh object resets
its level of smoothness back to the baseline. Therefore, an object might appear
to be smoothed, but its smoothness level can still equal 0 (zero).

1248 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

Refine a Mesh Face
You can refine an entire mesh object as shown in the previous illustration, or
select a specific face to refine. A refined face is subdivided into four faces and
the surrounding faces are deformed slightly to accommodate the change.

Refining a mesh face does not affect the overall smoothing level of the mesh
object. Unlike a refined mesh object, refined faces can be refined again
immediately. With mesh face refinement, you can target smaller areas for
detailed modeling.

How Refinement Affects Creases
A crease that is set to Always retains its sharpness no matter how much you
smooth or refine the object. However, the behavior is different when you
assign a crease value. If you refine an object or edge that has a crease value,
the assigned crease value is lowered by the value of the original level of
smoothing. Suppose that you add a crease with a crease value of 4 and then
refine a mesh whose level of smoothness is 2. The new crease value is 2.

Refine Mesh Objects or Subobjects | 1249

If a crease is applied before an object is smoothed or refined, the effect is not
apparent until after the object is smoothed or refined.

To refine a mesh object

1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Refine Mesh.
2 Select the mesh object that you want to refine. (The object must have a
smoothness level of 1 or higher.)
The underlying mesh facets are converted to faces and the level of
smoothness for the object is set to 0. Higher levels of smoothness result
in a higher number of faces.

To refine a mesh face
1 Set the subobject selection filter to select only faces: right-click anywhere
in the drawing area. Click Subobject Selection Filter ➤ Face.

2 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Refine Mesh.
3 Click one or more mesh faces that you want to refine. Press Enter. (The
object must have a smoothness level of 1 or higher.)
Each face is subdivided into four new faces.

Quick Reference
Commands
MESHREFINE
Multiplies the number of faces in selected mesh objects or faces.

Add Creases to Mesh
Add creases to sharpen mesh edges.
You can add creases to mesh objects that have a smoothing level of 1 or higher.

1250 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

Add Creases to Different Subobjects
The result of creasing differs, depending on what type of subobject you select.
■

Edge. The selected edge is sharpened. The adjacent faces are deformed to
accommodate the new crease angle.

■

Face. The selected face is flattened and all edges that bound that face are
sharpened. Adjacent faces are deformed to accommodate the new shape
of the face.

■

Vertex. The point of the vertex and all intersecting edges are sharpened.
Adjacent faces are deformed to accommodate the new vertex angle.

Assign a Crease Value to the Edge
As you apply a crease, you set a crease value that determines how the crease
is affected by smoothing. A value of Always ensures that the crease is always
retained, even when the mesh is repeatedly smoothed. Higher crease values
ensure that the crease is retained through several smoothing processes. (During
smoothing, the assigned crease value is decreased by the value of the original
level of smoothing.)
You can add a crease to mesh that has not been smoothed. However, the effect
is not visible unless you smooth the object.

Remove a Crease
You can restore a crease to a smoothed state that corresponds to the smoothing
level for the object. If you remove a crease that is adjacent to other creased
subobjects, their contours are adjusted.

Add Creases to Mesh | 1251

To add creases to a mesh object
1 (Optional) Specify the type of subobject to crease: right-click in the
drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter ➤ Face, Vertex, or Edge.

2 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Add Crease.
3 Select the mesh edges, faces, or vertices to crease. (If you have set a
subobject selection filter, only one type of subobject can be selected.)
To remove a subobject from the selection set, Shift+click the subobject.
4 Specify the crease value:
■

Always retains the crease at all levels of smoothness.

■

Values of 1 or higher sets the level of smoothness that starts to affect
the crease.

The specified subobjects are creased. A crease is not visible on objects
that have not been smoothed (the level of smoothness = 0).

To change the crease value of an existing mesh crease (Properties palette)
1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the
object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties.
2 Press Ctrl+click the mesh subobject that you want to modify.
NOTE If you cannot select a specific subobject, verify whether subobject
selection filtering is turned on for a different subobject type. (Right-click in
the drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter.)
3 In the Properties palette, Crease area, Type box, change the crease value:
■

None removes the crease and sets the subobject to the current level
of smoothness.

■

Always retains the crease at all levels of smoothness.

■

By Level sets the level of smoothness that starts to affect the crease.
When this setting is selected, you can specify the crease level in the
Level box.

1252 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

To remove an existing mesh crease
1 (Optional) Specify the type of subobject to modify: right-click in the
drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter ➤ Face, Vertex, or Edge.

2 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Remove Crease.
3 Press Ctrl+click the mesh subobjects to be modified and press Enter.
You can also use window selection to specify multiple subobjects.

Quick Reference
Commands
MESHCREASE
Sharpens the edges of selected mesh subobjects.
MESHUNCREASE
Removes the crease from selected mesh faces, edges, or vertices.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Modify Mesh Faces
Split, extrude, merge, collapse, or spin mesh faces to modify their shapes.

Split a Mesh Face
You can split a mesh face to make custom subdivisions. Use this method to
prevent deforming a larger area for small modifications.

Modify Mesh Faces | 1253

Because you specify the start point and end point of the split, this method
also gives you control over the shape of the two new faces. Use the Vertex
option to snap automatically to the vertices of the face. If you plan to split a
face to create—and then spin the edge of—two triangular faces (MESHSPIN),
use the Vertex option to ensure precision.

Extrude Mesh Faces
You can add definition to a 3D object by extruding a mesh face. Extruding
other types of objects creates a separate 3D solid object. However extruding
a mesh face extends, or deforms, the existing object and subdivides the
extruded face.

You can use the same methods for extrusion of the faces of 3D solids and
meshes as you use for other types of objects. For example, you can specify an
extrusion direction, a path, or a taper angle. However, when you extrude mesh
faces, the MESHEXTRUDE command provides an option that sets whether
adjacent faces are extruded individually or whether their shared edges remained
joined.

1254 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

You cannot create joined extrusions for mesh faces in which only the vertices
are shared.
For more information about extrusion, see Create a Solid or Surface by
Extruding on page 1034.

Reconfigure Adjacent Mesh Faces
You can extend your editing options by reconfiguring adjacent faces. Several
options are available:
■

Merge adjacent faces. Combine adjacent faces to form a single face.
Merging works best with faces that are on the same plane.

Although you can merge faces that wrap a corner, additional modifications
to the resulting mesh object can have unexpected results.
■

Collapse the mesh vertices. Merge adjacent vertices of surrounding faces
form a single point. The selected face is removed.

Modify Mesh Faces | 1255

■

Spin edges of triangular faces. Rotate an edge that is shared by two
triangular faces. The shared edge spins to extend from the opposite vertices.
This activity works best when the adjoined triangles form a rectangular,
not a triangular, shape.

See also:
■

Tips for Working with Mesh on page 1261

■

Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding on page 1034

To split a mesh face
1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Split Face.
2 Click the mesh face that you want to split.
3 To snap to a vertex of the face, enter v (Vertex).
4 Click the location where you want to start the split.
5 Click a second location to end the split.
The mesh face is split along the boundary you specified. Surrounding
faces are adjusted.

To extrude mesh faces
1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Extrude Face.
2 To review or change the extrusion method, press s (Setting) and set one
of the following options:
■

To keep adjacent faces joined as you extend them, enter y (Yes).

■

To extend adjacent faces separately, enter n (No).

1256 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

3 Click one or more mesh faces and press Enter.
4 Specify the amount of extrusion using one of the following methods:
■

(Single face extrusion only) Press Enter to set the extrusion
dynamically.

■

Enter a value to indicate the height or depth of the extrusion and
press Enter.

The selected face is extruded.

To merge mesh faces

1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Merge Face.
2 On a mesh object, select two or more mesh faces and press Enter.
The selected faces are combined to form a single face.

To collapse mesh faces
1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Mesh Edit drop-down ➤ Collapse

Face or Edge.
2 Select a mesh face or edge.
NOTE If you cannot select a face or edge, verify whether subobject selection
filtering is turned on for a different subobject type. (Right-click the drawing
area and click Subobject Selection Filter.)
The vertices of the face or edge that you selected are collapsed to a single
point.

To spin the shared edge of triangular mesh faces
1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Mesh Edit drop-down

➤ Spin Triangle Face.
2 Select two triangular mesh faces that are adjacent to one another.

Modify Mesh Faces | 1257

The edge shared by the original triangles rotates, or spins, to connect two
different vertices.

Quick Reference
Commands
MESHCOLLAPSE
Merges the vertices of selected mesh faces or edges.
MESHEXTRUDE
Extends a mesh face into 3D space.
MESHMERGE
Merges adjacent faces into a single face.
MESHSMOOTHLESS
Decreases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level.
MESHSMOOTHMORE
Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level.
MESHSPIN
Spins the adjoining edge of two triangular mesh faces.
MESHSPLIT
Splits a mesh face into two faces.

Create and Close Mesh Gaps
Delete mesh faces or close gaps in mesh objects.

Remove Mesh Faces
You can press Delete or use the ERASE command to remove mesh faces. The
removal leaves a gap in the mesh.
■

Deleting a face removes only the face.

1258 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

■

Deleting an edge removes each adjacent face.

■

Deleting a vertex removes all faces that are shared by the vertex.

If removal of a mesh face creates a gap, the mesh object is not “watertight.”
It can be converted to a surface object, but not to a 3D solid object.

Close Gaps in Mesh Objects
If a mesh object is not watertight due to gaps, or holes, in the mesh, you can
make it watertight by closing the holes. The cap, or new face, spans the
boundary formed by the mesh edges that you specify (MESHCAP).

Create and Close Mesh Gaps | 1259

This process works best when all edges are on the same plane. The edges you
select as boundaries cannot be shared by two faces. For example, you cannot
close the center hole in a mesh torus.
NOTE You can sometimes close gaps in mesh by smoothing the object, by using
MESHCOLLAPSE, or by splitting adjacent faces (MESHSPLIT).
See also:
■

Tips for Working with Mesh on page 1261

To delete faces from a mesh object
1 Press Ctrl+click one of the following mesh subobject types:
■

To remove only that face, click the face.

■

To remove adjacent faces, click their shared edge.

■

To remove all faces that share a vertex, click the vertex.

NOTE If you cannot select the subobject you want, verify whether subobject
selection filtering is turned on for a different subobject type. (Right-click in
the drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter.)
2 Press Delete.
NOTE You can also remove mesh faces with the ERASE command.

To repair a hole in a mesh object

1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Close Hole.

1260 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

2 Select contiguous edges to serve as the boundary for the mesh face that
will span the gap.

Quick Reference
Commands
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing.
MESHCAP
Creates a mesh face that connects open edges.

Tips for Working with Mesh
Learn some best practices for working with mesh models.
Mesh, with its enhanced modeling capabilities, offers a way to create more
fluid, free-form designs. Keep these tips in mind as you work.

Model mesh before you smooth it.
Mesh modeling is a powerful way to design, but higher levels of smoothness
increase complexity and can affect performance. You can work more efficiently
if you complete editing operations such as gizmo editing, extrusion, and face
splitting, on mesh objects that have not been smoothed. (That is, their level
of smoothness is 0.)

mesh sphere modeled by grip editing and
extrusion, then smoothed

Tips for Working with Mesh | 1261

You can quickly switch between the levels of smoothness in the Properties
palette to get a preview of how your activities affect the smoothed object.

Refine or split a face instead of refining the entire object.
Refinement is a powerful way to subdivide faces. However, by increasing the
number of faces, you add to the overall complexity of the model. In addition,
refining an entire mesh object resets the base level of smoothness to 0. This
change can result in a dense grid that can no longer be simplified. For best
results, avoid refining the object, and refine or split only the individual faces
that require more detailed modeling.

mesh box, refined mesh box, and mesh box with one face refined

Refining individual faces does not reset the level of smoothness for the object.

Crease edges to help limit distortion when the object is smoothed.
Creased edges can be set to maintain their sharpness, no matter how much
the object is smoothed. You may also need to crease the edges in surrounding
faces to obtain the result you want.

1262 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

extruded faces on mesh torus, creased and
not creased

Creasing set to Always retains its sharpness after smoothing. If you set a crease
value, the creased edge becomes smoother at the equivalent level of
smoothness.

Use gizmos to model faces, edges, and vertices.
3D Move, 3D Rotate, and 3D Scale gizmos can be used to modify entire mesh
objects, or specific subobjects.

For example, you can rotate and scale an individual face using the 3D Move,
Rotate, and Scale gizmos.
By constraining the modifications to a specified axis or plane, gizmos help
you avoid unexpected results. The default gizmo is displayed whenever you
select an object in a view that uses a 3D visual style. (You can also suppress
this display.) Therefore, you do not have to explicitly start the 3D Move, 3D
Rotate, or 3D Scale command to initiate these activities. You just need to select
an object.
When a gizmo is selected, you can use the shortcut menu to switch to a
different type of gizmo.

Tips for Working with Mesh | 1263

Use subobject selection filters to narrow the available selection candidates.
In a smoothed mesh, trying to select a specific subject can be difficult unless
you turn on subobject selection (shortcut menu). By specifying that the
selection set is limited to faces, edges, vertices, or even solid history subobjects,
you can restrict which subobject type is available for selection.

mesh faces selected when the face
subobject selection filter is on

A filter is especially valuable for selecting mesh vertices, which are not
highlighted as you move the mouse over them.
In order to select the entire mesh object, you need to turn off the subselection
filters.

Model by extruding faces.
A key difference between gizmo editing and extrusion occurs in the way each
face is modified. With gizmo editing, if you select and drag a set of faces,
adjacent faces are stretched to accommodate the modification. When the
object is smoothed, the adjacent faces adapt to the new location of the face.

1264 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

mesh faces extended using 3D Move gizmo

Mesh extrusion, however, inserts additional faces to close the gap between
the extruded face and its original surface. With mesh extrusion, you can set
whether adjacent faces are extruded as a unit (joined) or separately (unjoined).

mesh faces extruded, then smoothed

If you are working on an object that has not been smoothed, try smoothing
it periodically to see how the extrusion is affected by smoothing.

Convert between mesh and 3D solids or surfaces.
Mesh modeling is powerful, but it cannot do everything that solid modeling
can do. If you need to edit mesh objects through intersection, subtraction, or
union, you can convert mesh to 3D solid or surface objects. Similarly, if you
need to apply creasing or smoothing to 3D solid or surface objects, you can
convert those objects to mesh.

Tips for Working with Mesh | 1265

Keep in mind that not all conversions retain complete fidelity to the shape
of the original object. Avoid switching between object types more than once,
if possible. If you notice that the conversion modifies the shape of the object
in an unacceptable way, undo the conversion and try again with different
settings.
The Mesh Tessellation Options Dialog Box (MESHOPTIONS) controls the
smoothness and shape of the faces for 3D solids or surfaces that are converted
to mesh. Although you can convert an object to mesh without opening this
dialog box (MESHSMOOTH), you can more easily experiment with different
conversion settings by launching the conversion operation from within the
dialog box.
The SMOOTHMESHCONVERT system variable sets whether the mesh objects
that you convert to 3D solids or surfaces are smoothed or faceted, and whether
their co-planar faces are optimized (merged).
You might have trouble converting some non-primitive mesh to solid objects
due to the following problems:
■

Gaps in the mesh. If you notice gaps, you can sometimes close them by
smoothing the object or by refining the faces that are adjacent to the gap.

mesh torus that has been twisted using 3D Rotate at various
smoothing levels

You can also close holes by using MESHCAP.
In some cases, you can also obtain better results by using hardware
acceleration to improve your graphics system.
■

Intersecting mesh faces. Be especially careful not to create self-intersections
as you move, rotate, or scale subobjects. (You create self-intersections when
you cause one or more faces to cross, or intersect other faces in the same
mesh model.) View the object from all viewpoints to ensure you create a
viable model.

1266 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

mesh wedge with front faces dragged past the
back faces

Mesh objects that cannot be converted to solids can often be converted to
surfaces instead.

Avoid merging faces that wrap a corner
When you merge faces, you can create a mesh configuration in which the
merged face wraps a corner. If a resulting face has a vertex that has two edges
and two faces, you cannot convert the mesh to a smooth 3D solid object.

Tips for Working with Mesh | 1267

One way to resolve this problem is to convert the mesh to a faceted solid
instead of a smooth solid. You might also be able to repair the problem by
splitting the adjacent faces, starting at the shared vertex (MESHSPLIT).

Modify 3D Solids and Surfaces Using Inventor Fusion
Open and modify 3D solids and surfaces directly in Autodesk Inventor Fusion,
a 3D direct manipulation modeler.
®

Inventor Fusion provides direct modeling capabilities for rapid design changes
without limits.
Without exiting AutoCAD, you can launch Inventor Fusion, use it to modify
3D AutoCAD solid and surface objects, and then continue working on the
modified objects in AutoCAD.

To modify 3D AutoCAD objects using Fusion
1 Select one or more 3D solid or surface objects.
2 Click Plug-Ins tab ➤ Inventor Fusion panel ➤ Edit In Fusion.
3 Make the required changes in Fusion.
4 In Fusion, click Return To AutoCAD.

Quick Reference
Commands
EDITINFUSION
Edits solids and surfaces in Inventor Fusion.

1268 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models

Create Sections and
Drawings from 3D Models

Create cross sections, cutting planes, flattened views, and 2D drawings of 3D objects.

Create Drawings from 3D Models
Create drawings from a variety of 3D models.

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models
Create associative drawings in layouts from AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor
3D models.

Workflow for Creating Associative Drawings from 3D Models
You can generate drawings from 3D models, which are associative to the model
they were generated from. The model can be a model space 3D solid or surface,
or an Autodesk Inventor 3D model.

1269

The basic building block of a drawing is a drawing view.

A drawing view is a rectangular object that contains a 2D projection of the
3D model. The VIEWBASE and VIEWPROJ commands generate drawing views
from the 3D model.
The border of the drawing view is visible only when you create the view or
when you move the cursor over it. Although the view border resides on the
current layer, it does not print.
The view geometry is always visible, and is created on a pre-defined set of
layers (See Change Layer Properties of View Geometry on page 1292 for details).
Since the view geometry is associative with the source 3D model, you cannot
select view geometry to modify them.
The first view you place on a drawing is called a base view. Base views are
drawing views that are derived directly from the 3D model.

1270 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

Once a base view is placed in a layout, you generate projected views from it.
Unlike a base view, projected views are not directly derived off the 3D model.
Instead, they are derived from a base view (or another projected view that
already exists in a layout). The projected views maintain a parent-child
relationship with the view it was generated from. Most settings of a child view
are derived from the parent.

If necessary, you can create more than one base view in a layout. This feature
gives you the ability to create views of multiple parts or assemblies in the same
drawing.
Once you create the views, you can add notes, dimensions, symbols,
centerlines, and other annotations as required.

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models | 1271

When the source 3D models change, drawing views derived from that model
become out-of date. AutoCAD highlights out-of-date drawing views by
displaying red markers on the corners of the view border.

To synchronize an out-of-date view with its source 3d model, update the view.
You can use the EXPORTLAYOUT command to export a layout containing
drawing views to the model space of a new drawing. The exported drawing is
no longer associative with the 3D model, and hence you can edit view
geometry without any restrictions.

Quick Reference
Commands
EXPORTLAYOUT
Creates a visual representation of the current layout in the model space of a
new drawing.
VIEWBASE
Creates a base view from model space or Autodesk Inventor models.

1272 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

VIEWPROJ
Creates one or more projected views from an existing drawing view.

Set Defaults for Drawing Views from 3D Models
Customize the default settings for drawing views.
To ensure that drawing views follow the correct drafting standards, you
customize the default settings using the Drafting Standards dialog box. The
settings you specify impact all new drawing views you create. They have no
effect on any existing drawing view.
The Drafting Standards dialog box displays when you run the VIEWSTD
command. Using this dialog box you can control:
■

The projection type
The ISO standard uses first angle projection. The ANSI standard uses third
angle projection. You select the projection angle corresponding to the
drafting standard the drawing must comply with.

■

The thread style
The ISO standard uses a partial circle to indicate a thread edge. The ANSI
standard uses a full circle to indicate a thread edge. You select the thread

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models | 1273

angle corresponding to the drafting standard the drawing must comply
with.

■

The preview type
The preview is a temporary graphic that is displayed with the cursor at the
time you place a view in the drawing area. Shaded previews provide visual
feedback to enable you to select the desired model orientation during view
creation. However, for large models shaded previews can take time to
generate. For such cases you can change the temporary graphic to a
bounding box, instead of using a shaded preview.

Even though this setting is not related to a drafting standard, it is a setting
you must specify before you create a drawing view.
You can also specify the resolution of the shaded preview. While higher
resolutions provide better quality previews, resolutions above 150 dpi may
not be achievable for larger models. When the specified resolution is not
achievable, the program automatically drops the quality to an achievable
level.

To specify the default projection angle
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Drawing Views panel ➤ Dialog Box Launcher.
2 In the Drafting Standards dialog box, in the Projection type section, click
the desired projection angle.
3 Click OK.

To specify the default thread style
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Drawing Views panel ➤ Dialog Box Launcher.

1274 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

2 In the Drafting Standards dialog box, in the Thread style section, click
the desired thread style.
3 Click OK.

To specify the preview style
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Drawing Views panel ➤ Dialog Box Launcher.
2 In the Drafting Standards dialog box, from the Preview type list, select
the desired preview style.
3 If you selected Shaded, from the Shaded view quality list, select the desired
resolution.
NOTE Resolutions above 150 DPI may not be achievable for larger models.
If you use a high resolution setting, at view creation time, the resolution
adjusts automatically for larger models.
4 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
VIEWSTD
Defines the default settings for drawing views.

Create Base Views from 3D Models
Workflow for creating base views for AutoCAD 3D models and Inventor
models.
The first drawing view you place in a layout is a base view. Base views define
the scale, display settings, and alignment for subsequent views.
The base view creation process begins when you click the Base View button
on the Ribbon, from a layout. The process of selecting the source 3D model
differs depending on whether the source is an AutoCAD 3D model or an
Inventor model. Once the 3D model to use is determined, the following takes
place:
■

The Drawing View Creation contextual ribbon tab is displayed (if the
ribbon is on).

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models | 1275

■

A scaled preview of the model appears on the cross hairs.

■

The command line prompts you to place the base view in model space.

All the options that are available on the Drawing View Creation contextual
ribbon tab are available on the command line as well. The purpose of the
command line is to assist you when the ribbon is turned off. However, if the
ribbon is turned on, we recommend that you use the ribbon. This because the
ribbon hides options or makes them unavailable depending on its relevancy
to the selected model. The command line, on the other hand, displays all
options, even the options that do not apply to the selected model.
The command does not exit as soon as you place the base view in the drawing
area. You can continue to change option settings until you click the OK button
on the ribbon. A typical use of this capability is described below.
You place the base view in the drawing and you realize that the view is too
large. You then use the Scale option on the ribbon and change the scale. Once
you change the scale, you find that the view is not positioned correctly. You
then use the Move command on the ribbon to move the view. Once you are
done you click OK on the ribbon.
By default, the program prompts you to create projected views soon after you
are done with the base view. However, if the model you are creating is large,
creating base views and projected views in the same command session can
take time. In such a scenario, you can use the Type command line option and
specify that you are creating only a base view.

Create Base Views from AutoCAD 3D Models
Additional information specific to creating base views from AutoCAD 3D
models.
The Base View button on the Ribbon (VIEWBASE command), creates base
views from model space solids and surfaces.
The base view contains all visible solids and surfaces in model space. It does
not contain any solid or surface that exists on a layer that is frozen or turned
off. Similarly, if a solid or surface is isolated, only the isolated solid or surface
is included the view.
If frozen layers are thawed, turned off layers are turned on or the isolation is
ended, the base view does not update automatically. You must explicitly use
the Update View (VIEWUPDATE) command to bring in the changes.

1276 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

To create a base view from model space solids and surfaces

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Drawing Views panel ➤ Base View
NOTE
■

You can use this command only from a layout tab.

■

If the layout tab contains a viewport, we recommend that you delete
it before you invoke this command.

2 In the Orientation panel of the Drawing View Creation contextual ribbon
tab, select the orientation for the base view.
3 In the Appearance panel of the Drawing View Creation contextual ribbon
tab, specify the scale and view style.
4 Click in the drawing area to indicate the location to place the base view.
5 Click View Creation tab ➤ Create panel ➤ OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
VIEWBASE
Creates a base view from model space or Autodesk Inventor models.

Create Base Views from Inventor Models
Additional information specific to creating base views from Autodesk Inventor
models.
The base view creation process begins when you click the Base View button
on the Ribbon (VIEWBASE command), from a layout. If model space does not
contain any solids or surfaces, the command displays a file open dialog box
to enable you to select an Inventor model.
In addition to selecting the Inventor model, the dialog box provides access
to some common representation types used by assemblies. You can choose to
ignore them at this time and specify them later. However, specifying these

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models | 1277

options during file open improves performance of large assemblies. This is
because the command can load only the data necessary for your selection.
Like AutoCAD named views, Inventor models contain named view
representations. However, unlike AutoCAD, Inventor models have several types
of view representations, which you can mix and match. While creating base
views, you must specify which of these view representations you are creating
the base view for. The view representation types are:

Design view representations

A design view representation is a display configuration that you can recall by
name. Design views control component visibility and material overrides,
usually to present an uncluttered view of the components you intend to show
in that view.
When you create a base view, you must specify which design view
representation you are creating it for.

Positional representations

A positional representation is one snapshot in a collection of snapshots that
show an assembly in various positions. You can access each positional
representation by name.
When you create a base view, you must specify which design view
representation you are creating it for.

1278 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

Level of detail
A named representation saved in an Inventor assembly file, where unneeded
components are suppressed or replaced with a single part representation in
order to simplify the model.
When you create a base view, you must specify which level of detail
representation you are creating it from.

Weldment states

A weldment is an inseparable assembly formed by welding together two or
more pieces. Inventor models can show the weldment in different states. The
“Assembly” state displays the weldment in its unwelded state. The “Welds”
state displays the weldment after the pieces have been welded in place. The
“Machining” state shows the weldment after post welding machining
operations (if any). Additionally, you can display each individual piece with
any weld preparation it may have.
The illustration shown above depicts a weldment in Assembly state, each piece
in preparatory state and the weldment in Welds state.
When you create a base view, you must specify which state you are creating
it from.

Member
The member view representation type applies only to iAssembly factories or
iPart factories.

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models | 1279

An iAssembly factory is family of assemblies, derived off a single model, by
varying a set of unique identifiers. For example, a family of flywheels with
varying number of shoes.

An iPart factory is a family of parts, derived off a single model by varying
parameters such as size or material. For example, a family of screws of varying
lengths and diameter.
When creating a base view, you must specify which member of the family
you are creating the base view for.

Sheet metal

Sheet metal views are available only on sheet metal part files. When creating
a base view of a sheet metal part, you specify if it is to be created from the
folded model or the flat (unfolded) pattern.
NOTE Flat patterns are available only if they are defined in the sheet metal part
file.

1280 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

Presentation view

A presentation view is an exploded view of an assembly, created to demonstrate
how parts in an assembly interact and fit together.
When you create a base view, you must specify which presentation view you
are creating it for.
NOTE Presentation views are available only if the model you are using is a
presentation (*.ipn) file.

To create a base view from an Inventor model
1 Verify that model space is empty.
2 Click the layout tab you intend to create the drawing in.

3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Drawing Views panel ➤ Base View
NOTE
■

You can use this command only from a layout tab.

■

If the layout tab contains a viewport, we recommend that you delete
it before you invoke this command.

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models | 1281

4 In the Select File dialog box, select the model to generate the base view
from and click Open.
5 In the Representation panel, select the view representations you want to
show in the base view.
NOTE Only the view representations used by the model you selected are
available on the ribbon. For example, if you selected an assembly, the
Weldment, Member, Sheet Metal and Presentation View representations are
disabled.
6 In the Orientation panel of the Drawing View Creation contextual ribbon
tab, select the orientation for the base view.
7 In the Appearance panel of the Drawing View Creation contextual ribbon
tab, specify the scale and view style.
8 Click in the drawing area to indicate the location to place the base view.
9 Click View Creation tab ➤ Create panel ➤ OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
VIEWBASE
Creates a base view from model space or Autodesk Inventor models.

Create Projected Views from Existing Drawing Views
Workflow for creating projected views from existing views.
A projected view is an orthographic or isometric projection of an existing base
view or projected view.
The VIEWPROJ command prompts you to select an existing view as a parent
view. Any existing view can be selected, as long as it is not out-of-date or
unresolved on page 1294. The projected view inherits all its properties from the
parent, including the projection angle (first angle or third angle). You can
change some of the properties after you create the projected view.
Once you select the parent view, a preview of the projected view is attached
to the cursor. The orientation of a projected view depends on its location in

1282 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

relation to the parent view. The preview updates dynamically, to reflect the
orientation, as you move the cursor.

After you place a projected view in the drawing area, the command prompts
repeat. Hence, you can place multiple projected views within the same
command session. You exit the command by selecting the Exit command line
option.

To create projected views

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Drawing Views panel ➤ Projected View.
2 Click the view you want to use as the parent view.
3 Move the preview to the desired location and click to place the view.
NOTE As you move the preview the orientation of the projected view changes
to reflect its relationship to the parent view.
4 Repeat step 4 until all the required projected view are created.
5 Press ENTER.

Quick Reference
Commands
VIEWPROJ
Creates one or more projected views from an existing drawing view.

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models | 1283

Update Drawing Views when Source 3D Models Change
Workflow to make out-of-date drawings current.
While you work on a drawing containing drawing views, the program
periodically checks whether the referenced 3D source model has changed. If
the source has changed, a balloon message displays next to the drawing views
status bar icon in the lower right of the application window. Click the link in
the balloon message to update all out-of-date views.
If you close the balloon without updating the views, a warning badge is
attached to the drawing view status bar icon. Furthermore, AutoCAD highlights
out-of-date drawing views by placing red markers on the corners of the view
border. You update an out-of-date view by right-clicking it and selecting
Update from the menu. Alternatively, you can use the Update View command
(or use the Update All Views command to update all out-of-date views) from
the drawing views ribbon panel.

Unlike Xrefs, drawing views do not update automatically when you open a
drawing. You must explicitly invoke the AMVIEWUPDATE command to update
drawing views.
Depending on the change in the source model, the view may grow or shrink.
There are two ways by which you can anchor a view in the drawing.

You can choose to center justify the view, so that the view grows or shrinks
about its center.

1284 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

You can also choose the “fixed” option, which forces unchanged model
geometry to remain in the location it was prior to the update operation. Often,
this is preferred as less shift occurs.
If you update a view after you have added dimensions to the view geometry,
dimensions are likely to become disassociated. You are then prompted to step
through the affected dimensions and attach the extension-line origin points
of each disassociated dimension to the corresponding geometry. If necessary,
you can skip reassociating dimensions at this time and use the
DIMREASSOCIATE command later.

To update an out-of-date view
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Drawing Views panel ➤ Update View drop-down ➤
Update View.
2 Click the view you want to update.
3 Press ENTER.

To specify how to anchor a view
1 Double-click the view you want to anchor.
2 On the Drawing View Editor contextual ribbon tab, click View Options.
3 From the View Justification list, select the desired anchor option.
■

To anchor the view so that it grows or shrinks around its center, select
Centered.

■

To anchor the view such that unchanged model geometry does not
move, select Fixed.

4 On the Drawing View Editor contextual ribbon tab, click OK.

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models | 1285

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMREASSOCIATE
Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects.
VIEWUPDATE
Updates drawing views that have become out-of-date because the source
model has changed.

Edit Existing Drawing Views
Perform a variety of edit operations on drawing views.

Edit Drawing View Properties
Edit properties such as scale, view options, and view representation, which
control the appearance of drawing views.
The editing process begins when you double-click a drawing view or when
you enter the VIEWEDIT command at the command prompt. Regardless of
the view's typeor state, the view is selected and the Drawing View Editor
contextual ribbon tab is displayed. If the ribbon is turned off, use command
line options to change the properties.
NOTE Although you can inspect properties of a drawing view from the properties
palette and quick properties palette, you cannot change most of them.
If the view is out-of-date it automatically updates when you edit it.
If the selected view is a base view, most properties that were available within
the ribbon at creation time can be changed.
If the selected view is a parent view, when it is edited, the changes are applied
to child views as well. However changes to design view representations are
not applied to child views.
If the selected view is a child view, only the scale and style properties are
available. The default values for these properties are set to "From parent". If
you override these properties, they cease to follow changes made to the parent
view.

1286 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

In general, the options in the Representation Panel of the Drawing View Editor
contextual ribbon tab are available only for base views. The Appearance panel
is available for both base views and projected views.
When a model is large or complex, applying a property can take time. If you
turn Defer Updates, property changes are not applied immediately. Instead,
they are applied only when you click OK, or turn off Defer Updates. This saves
you the trouble of having to wait for the display to update, each time you
change a property.

To change a property of a drawing view
1 Double-click the view you want to edit.
2 On the Drawing View Editor contextual ribbon tab, in the list
corresponding to the property you want to change, select the new
property value.
3 On the Drawing View Editor contextual ribbon tab, click OK.

To turn Defer Updates on or off
1 Double-click the view you want to edit.
2 On the Drawing View Editor contextual ribbon tab, in the Edit panel,
check the status of the Defer Updates button.
If the button is pressed, Defer Updates is on. If the button is released,
Defer Updates is off.
3 Click Defer Updates to change its status.
4 On the Drawing View Editor contextual ribbon tab, click OK.
The state of the Defer Updates button is persistent. The button remembers
its status until you change it again.

Quick Reference
Commands
VIEWEDIT
Edits an existing drawing view.

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models | 1287

Move, Rotate, or Erase drawing views
Move drawing views to a different location on a layout, rotate the view
geometry, or delete drawing views.

Move Drawing Views
You can use the MOVE command to move drawing views.
Orthogonal views are constrained to be aligned to their parent views, while
isometric views are not. Consequently, if you move a parent view, all
orthographic child views also move with it to maintain alignment.

If you move a child view (orthographic), it is constrained to maintain
alignment with the parent.

1288 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

If required, you can display the grip menu of a view and select Break Alignment
to remove the alignment constraint. A child view that you moved in this
manner can be realigned by using the Repair Alignment option in the grip
menu of the view.

Rotate Drawing Views
You can use the ROTATE command to rotate drawing views.
If you select dimensions as part of the selection set, they too are rotated.

When you do not include dimensions within the selection set, only aligned
dimensions rotate with the view. Aligned dimensions continue to remain
aligned while horizontal, vertical, and rotated dimensions continue to remain
as they are.

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models | 1289

Rotating a view breaks all alignment constraints it has with other views.

Erase Drawing Views
You can erase a drawing view using the ERASE command.
If you erase a parent view, its child views are not erased. The child views
automatically assume the role of a parent view. Although child views become
parent views, they do not become base views. Therefore, the "View type"
property within the Properties palette continues to display the "Projected"
value. Furthermore the options on the Drawing View Editor contextual ribbon
tab that apply to base views, continue to be unavailable for child views.
When annotations are associated with the view, unless you explicitly select
them, they are not erased.

Impact of Copy Command and Layout Command
Drawing view objects are filtered out from the COPY command. Hence you
cannot use the COPY command on drawing views.
A layout containing drawing views can be copied using the LAYOUT
command's COPY option. When copying a layout containing views, all views
are filtered from the layout; the new layout is copied without the views.

To move a drawing view
1 Click the view you want to move. A grip appears at the center of the view.
2 Move the cursor over the grip. A menu is displayed.
3 Click Stretch.
4 Move the preview to the desired location and click to place the view.

1290 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

To rotate a drawing view
1 Click the view you want to rotate. A grip appears at the center of the
view.
2 Move the cursor over the grip. A menu is displayed.
3 Click Rotate.
4 Move the preview to the desired location and click to place the view, or
specify the rotation angle and press ENTER.

To remove the alignment constraint on a child view
1 Click the view you want to remove the constraint from. A grip appears
at the center of the view.
2 Move the cursor over the grip. A menu is displayed.
3 Click Break Alignment. The view can now be moved anywhere on the
layout.

To reinstate the alignment constraint on a child view
1 Click the view you want to reinstate the constraint on. A grip appears at
the center of the view.
2 Move the cursor over the grip. A menu is displayed.
3 Click Repair Alignment. The view moves back into alignment with its
parent.

Quick Reference
Commands
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing.
LAYOUT
Creates and modifies drawing layouts.
MOVE
Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction.

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models | 1291

ROTATE
Updates drawing views that have become out-of-date because the source
model has changed.

Change Layer Properties of View Geometry
Change the appearance of view geometry and comply with company layer
naming standards.
When you create a drawing view, the program draws view geometry on pre
determined layers, depending on what the geometry represents. For example,
a groove on the front side of a part is drawn on a layer named “visible” in the
front view. The same groove is drawn on a layer named “hidden” in the back
view, because it represents an invisible edge.
The following table shows the layers on which each entity is drawn on..
Entity Represented by Geo- Layer drawn on
metry

Model Source
Inventor

Model Space

Interference Edge (Hidden)

Hidden Narrow

Yes

Interference Edge (Visible)

Visible Narrow

Yes

Presentation View Trail Line

Tweak Trail

Yes

Reference Part Edge

Reference

Yes

Sheet Metal Bend Centerline
Down

Centerline

Yes

Sheet Metal Bend Centerline
Up

Centerline

Yes

Sheet Metal Bend Extent

Bend Extent

Yes

Sheet Metal Roll Centerline

Centerline

Yes

Simplified Representation (Hidden)

Hidden Narrow

Yes

Simplified Representation (Visible)

Visible Narrow

Yes

1292 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

Entity Represented by Geo- Layer drawn on
metry

Model Source
Inventor

Model Space

Tangent Edge (Hidden)

Hidden Narrow

Yes

Tangent Edge (Visible)

Visible Narrow

Yes

Thread Ends (Visible)

Visible

Yes

Thread Ends (Hidden)

Hidden

Yes

Thread Lines (Visible)

Visible Narrow

Yes

Thread Lines (Hidden)

Hidden

Yes

Thread Lines (Visible)

Hidden Narrow

Yes

View Edge (Hidden)

Hidden

Yes

View Edge (Visible)

Visible

Yes

In the view options dialog box, you can influence how Inventor reference
parts are drawn. If you choose to display reference parts as a regular part, it is
treated as a view edge, and drawn on the Visible or Hidden layers. If you
choose to display the part as a reference part, it is treated as reference part and
is drawn on the Reference layer. You acess the View Options dialog box using
the View Options button on the Drawing View Editor ribbon contextual tab
(VIEWEDIT command). You can also access it while creating a base view, from
the Drawing View Creation ribbon contextual tab.
Layers are created on demand as and when drawing views are created.
Furthermore, only the layers required to support the geometry in a view are
created. For example, a view of a model space solid using the view style
“Wireframe with visible edges only” creates only the Visible layer. For the
same view, changing the visibility option to display tangent edges results in
creation of the Visible Narrow layer.
Once a layer is created, it is not deleted automatically, even if the layer is no
longer used. You must explicitly delete or purge unreferenced layers.
The default line type patterns and line weights are based on ISO 128-20:1996.
You can however use the LAYER command and change these parameters.

Create Drawings from AutoCAD and Inventor 3D Models | 1293

If your company conventions require you to stick to specific layer names, you
can rename the layers, after they are created. Subsequent views that you create
use the renamed layers.
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity on page 516

Quick Reference
Commands
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.
VIEWEDIT
Edits an existing drawing view.
VIEWSETPROJ
Specifies the active project file for drawings containing drawing views from
Inventor models.

Work Around Common Problems
Tips to handle some common issues that you are likely to face.

Empty Drawing Views
The VIEWBASE and VIEWPROJ commands do not allow the creation of empty
drawing views. However, erasing the source geometry from model space or
from the referenced Inventor model results in empty drawing views.
An empty drawing view is displayed as a 50 mm square. Its border is visible
and is drawn in red.

Out-of-Date Inventor Models
An Inventor models can go out-of-date when changes are made directly to
parts referenced by the model. This problem usually occur when parts are
referenced in multiple assemblies.
The program does not prevent you from creating or editing drawing views
derived from out-of-date Inventor models. It however displays a warning

1294 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

message so that you are aware that the drawing views do not show the latest
changes made to the source.
To ensure that the drawing views show the latest changes, use Autodesk
Inventor to update the out-of-date Inventor model.

Unresolved Inventor File References
When files referenced by an Inventor model are not found automatically,
drawing views derived from this model are said to contain unresolved file
references.
A drawing view can contain unresolved file references for any of the following
reasons.
a Paths to referenced files are not specified in the active project.
b The referenced files were renamed, moved, or deleted, and no longer
exists within any of the storage locations defined by the active project.
c AutoCAD is pointing to the wrong active project file, or has not selected
any project file as the active project file.
For cases a and b, use Autodesk Inventor to update the project file to specify
the current location of the files that are not found automatically.
For case c, use the VIEWSETPROJ command to select the correct project file
as the active project file.

Create Drawings from Other 3D CAD Models
Import IGES, CATIA®, Pro/ENGINEER®, STEP, SolidWorks®, JT, NX, Parasolid
and Rhinoceros®(Rhino) files and generate drawings from them.
The IMPORT command lets you import a wide range of file formats into model
space. The 3D CAD file formats you can import include the following:
■

IGES (all versions)

■

STEP (AP214 and AP203E2)

■

Rhinoceros (Rhino)

■

Pro/ENGINEER (up to Wildfire 5.0)

■

CATIA V4 (all revisions)

■

CATIA V5 (R10 - R19)

Create Drawings from Other 3D CAD Models | 1295

■

Parasolid (up to V23)

■

JT (7.0; 8.0; 8.1; 8.2; 9.0-9.5)

■

SolidWorks (2003 - 2010)

After you import the 3D model, the model is available as an AutoCAD 3D
model, in model space. Thereafter you generate drawings for the 3D model
using the workflow for AutoCAD 3D models on page 1269.
Imported models are not associative with the source 3D model. Hence,
drawings created in this manner do not update when the source 3D model
changes.
See also:
■

Import Other File Formats on page 1849

Quick Reference
Commands
IMPORT
Imports files of different formats into the current drawing.

Work with Sections
Create cross sections of 3D models.

Overview of Section Objects
Create a section plane that can be modified and moved to achieve the cross
section view that you need.
With the SECTIONPLANE command, you can create one or more section
objects and place them throughout a 3D model (3D solids, surfaces, or mesh).
By activating live sectioning, you can then view transient cuts in the 3D model
as you move the section object through it. The 3D objects themselves do not
change.

1296 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

Set the Cross-Section with the Section Plane Indicator
Section objects have a transparent section plane indicator that acts as a cutting
plane. This plane can be moved through a 3D model that is composed of 3D
solids, surfaces, or regions to obtain different section views.

Store Properties in Section Lines
The section plane contains a section line that stores section object properties.
You can create multiple section objects to store different properties. For
example, one section object can display a hatch pattern at the section plane
intersection. Another section object can display a specific linetype for the
boundary of the intersected area.

Analyze the Model with Live Sectioning
With live sectioning, you can dynamically analyze the interior details of 3D
objects by moving and adjusting the section plane. You can specify whether
to hide, or cut away, the portion of the model that is on the viewing side of
the section plane indicator.

Overview of Section Objects | 1297

Save and Share Section Images
After you create a sectional view, you can generate an accurate 2D or 3D block
from the 3D model. These blocks can be analyzed or checked for clearances
and interference conditions. They can also be dimensioned, or used as
wireframe or rendered illustrations in documentation and presentation
drawings.
You can also save each section object as a tool on the tool palette. That way,
you can avoid resetting properties each time you create a section object.

Quick Reference
Commands
LIVESECTION
Turns on live sectioning for a selected section object.
SECTIONPLANE
Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects.
SECTIONPLANESETTINGS
Sets display options for the selected section plane.
SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK
Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks.

Create Section Objects
Create cross sections to show interior details of 3D objects.

1298 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

With the SECTIONPLANE command, you create a section object that acts as a
cutting plane through solids, surfaces, meshes, or regions. Then turn on live
sectioning to move the section object through the 3D model to reveal its inner
details in real time.
You can align a section object using several methods.

Align the Section Plane to a 3D Face
One way to set the section plane is to click the face of an existing 3D object.
(As you move the cursor, a dotted outline indicates the side of the plane to
be selected.) The section plane is automatically aligned to the plane of the
face you select.

Section object aligned to face

Create a Straight Cutting Plane
Pick two points to create a straight cutting plane.

Add a Jogged Segment
The section plane can be a straight line or it can have multiple or jogged
sections. For example, a section containing a jog is one that cuts away a pie
slice-shaped wedge from a cylinder.
Create a section line that has jogged segments by using the Draw Section
option of SECTIONPLANE to pick multiple points throughout the 3D model.

Create Section Objects | 1299

Section object with jogged segment

Create Orthographic Sections
You can align section objects to a specified orthographic orientation of the
current UCS, such as front, back, bottom, top, left, or right.

Orthographic section planes are placed so that they pass through the center
of the 3D extents of all 3D objects in the drawing.

Create a Region to Represent the Cross Section
With the SECTION command, you can create a 2D region object that represents
a planar cross section through a 3D solid object. You do not have live
sectioning capabilities when you use this legacy method to create cross sections.

1300 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

Define the plane of the cross section using one of the following methods:
■

Specify three points

■

Specify a 2D object such as a circle, ellipse, arc, spline, or polyline

■

Specify a view

■

Specify the Z axis

■

Specify the XY, YZ, or ZX plane

The new region that represents the cross-sectional plane is placed on the
current layer.
NOTE Before you apply hatching to the cross-sectional cutting plane, align the
UCS with the cutting plane.

To create a section object by selecting a face
1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane.
2 Click to select a face on your model.
A section object is created on the plane of the selected face.
3 Click the section line to display its grips.
4 Select a grip to move the section plane through the 3D object.
A section object is created in the Section Plane state. Live sectioning is
turned on.

Create Section Objects | 1301

To create a section object by specifying two points
1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane.
2 Specify the first point of the section object.
3 Specify the endpoint.
The section object is created between the two points. Live sectioning is turned
off.

To create a section object with jogged segments
1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane.
2 At the Command prompt, enter d (Draw Section).
3 Specify the start point of the section object.
4 Specify a second point to create the first jogged segment.
From this point, you cannot create segments that intersect.
5 Continue specifying segment endpoints, then press Enter.
6 Specify a point in the direction of the sectional cut.
A section object with multiple segments is created in a Section Boundary state.
Live sectioning is turned off.

To create a section object on a preset orthographic plane
1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane.
2 At the Command prompt, enter o (Orthographic).
3 Select an alignment option.
The new section object intersects the center point of the 3D extents of all 3D
objects in the drawing. It is placed on the selected orthographic plane. Live
sectioning is turned on.

To create a region that represents the cross section of a 3D solid object
1 At the Command prompt, enter section.
2 Select the object to cross section.

1302 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

3 Specify three points to define the cross-sectional plane.

Quick Reference
Commands
SECTIONPLANE
Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects.
SECTION
Uses the intersection of a plane and solids, surfaces, or mesh to create a
region.

Modify a Section View
After you create a section, adjust its display or modify its shape and location
to change the represented section view.

Add Jogs to a Section
Add jogs, or angular segments, to existing section lines.

You can create a section plane that has multiple segments (jogs), using the
Draw Section option of the SECTIONPLANE command. You can also add a
jog to an existing section plane by selecting the section you want to add a job
to and then right-clicking. From the shortcut menu, click Add Jog to Section
(SECTIONPLANEJOG).
A jog that is added to an existing section object creates a segment that is
perpendicular to the selected segment. Its viewpoint is oriented in the direction
set by the Direction grip. The Nearest object snap is temporarily turned on to
help you place the jogs on a section.

Modify a Section View | 1303

You cannot add jogs to the side or back lines of the section object.
After adding jogs, you can reposition and resize the jogged sections by dragging
the section object grips.

To add jogs to a section
1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Jog.
2 On a section object, select the section line.
3 Move the cursor over the section line.
4 Select a point on the section line where you want to place a jog that is
perpendicular to the selected segment.
To create additional jogs, repeat the steps.
NOTE You cannot create jogs that cause the line to intersect itself or close.

Quick Reference
Commands
SECTIONPLANE
Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects.
SECTIONPLANEJOG
Adds a jogged segment to a section object.

Use Live Section to Adjust the Cross Section
Use live sectioning to move a section object through the 3D model or region
dynamically.

What Is Live Sectioning?
Live sectioning is an analytical tool for viewing cut geometry in a 3D solid,
surface, or region.

1304 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

You can use live sectioning to analyze a model by moving the section object
through the object. For example, sliding the section object through an engine
assembly helps you visualize its internal components. You can use this method
to create a cross section view that you can save or reuse.

Turn on and Use Live Sectioning
Live sectioning works with 3D objects and regions in model space. When live
sectioning is activated, you can change the viewing planes by using grips to
adjust the location of the section object or its segments.
By turning on cutaway geometry, you can display the entire object that
contains the section plane. This option (available on the shortcut menu) can
only be turned on when section plane is active.

Live sectioning is turned on or off automatically, depending on how you
create the section object. For example, when you select a face to define the
section plane, live sectioning is turned on. When you create sections using
the Draw Section option of the SECTIONPLANE command, live sectioning is
turned off. Live sectioning can be manually turned on or off after a section
object is created.

Modify a Section View | 1305

A drawing can contain multiple section objects. However, live sectioning can
only be active for one section object at a time. Suppose that your model has
two sections objects: Section A and Section B. If Section A has live sectioning
turned on and you activate live sectioning for Section B, live sectioning for
Section A is automatically turned off.
Turning off a section object layer does not turn off live sectioning. However,
freezing the layer turns off live sectioning.

To turn live sectioning on and off
1 Select a section object.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Live Section.

To display cutaway geometry
1 Select a section object.
2 Right-click the section line. Click Show Cut-away Geometry to turn it
on.
The cut geometry is displayed according to the Foreground Line settings
in the Section Settings dialog box.

Use Grips to Modify Section Objects
Section object grips help you move and resize the section object.

1306 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

Grips allow you to adjust the location, length, width, and height of the cutting
area.
■

Base grip. Acts as the basepoint for moving, scaling, and rotating the
section object. It is always adjacent to the Menu grip.

■

Second grip. Rotates the section object around the base grip.

■

Menu grip. Displays a menu of section object states, which control the
display of visual information about the cutting plane.

■

Direction grip. Controls the viewing direction of the 2D section. To reverse
the viewing direction of the section plane, click the Direction grip.

■

Arrow grip. Modifies the section object by modifying the shape and
position of the section plane. Only orthogonal movements in the direction
of the arrow are permitted. (Section Boundary and Volume states only.)

■

Segment end grips. Stretches the vertices of the section plane. You cannot
move segment end grips so that segments intersect. Segment end grips are
displayed at the endpoints of jogged segments. (Section Boundary and
Volume states only.)

You can select only one section object grip at a time.

To adjust a section object using grips
1 In the drawing area, click the section plane.

Modify a Section View | 1307

Depending on the current section plane state, different grips are displayed.
2 Hover over the grip with the cursor until it turns red. Then drag the grip
to a new location.
3 To adjust the height, width, or depth of a section plane, click the Menu
grip and select Section Volume or Section Boundary.

Quick Reference
Commands
SECTIONPLANE
Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects.

System Variables
GRIPSIZE
Sets the size of the grip box in pixels.

Set Section Object States and Properties
Set the display of the section object.

Set Section Object States

Section objects have the following display states:
■

Section Plane. The section line and transparent section plane indicator are
displayed. The cutting plane extends infinitely in all directions.

■

Section Boundary. A 2D box shows the XY extents of the cutting plane.
The cutting plane along the Z axis extends infinitely.

1308 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

■

Section Volume. A 3D box shows the extents of the cutting plane in all
directions.

You can switch between object states by clicking the Menu grip that is
displayed when you select the section object.

Set Section Object Properties
Section objects have properties like other AutoCAD objects. Properties are
stored in the section line and can be accessed in the Properties palette.
For each section object, you can change the name, layer, and linetype. You
can also change the color and transparency of the section plane indicator (the
cutting plane).

To change the state of a section object by using the Menu grip
1 Select the section object to display its grips.
2 Click the Menu grip.
3 On the section state menu, click the state you want to display.
The section display is updated to the selected state.

To change the state of a section object (Properties palette)
1 Right-click the section object. Click Properties.
2 In the Properties palette, under Section Object, change the value for Type.
The section display is updated to the selected state.

To rename a section object
1 Right-click the section object. Click Properties.
2 In the Properties palette, under Section Object, in the Name box, enter
a different name.

To change the transparency and color of the section plane indicator
1 Right-click the section object. Click Properties.
2 In the Properties palette, under Section Object, in the Plane Transparency
box, enter a value of 1-100. Entering 1 makes the section plane indicator
opaque.

Modify a Section View | 1309

3 In the Plane Color box, select a color.
The section plane indicator is updated in the viewport.

To change the height of the section plane indicator
1 Right-click the section object. Click Properties.
2 In the Properties palette, under Geometry, in the Top Plane box, change
the value.
This value changes the distance from the section line to the upper edge
of the section plane.
3 In the Bottom Plane box, enter a value.
This value changes the distance from the section line to the bottom edge
of the section plane.
The section plane indicator is updated in the viewport.

To modify the live section display settings
1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Panel dialog box launcher.
2 Right-click the section object. Click Live Section Settings.
3 In the Section Settings Dialog Box, click Live Section Settings.
4 Modify the sections that you want to change and click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
SECTIONPLANE
Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects.
SECTIONPLANESETTINGS
Sets display options for the selected section plane.
SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK
Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks.

1310 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

Associate Section Objects with Named Views
Associate section objects with named views.
When you activate a named view that has an associated section object, live
sectioning is turned on for that section object. For a 3D model with multiple
section objects, you might want to associate a particular section object to a
view. Later, you can restore a saved sectional view and activate live sectioning
for the associated section object.
For example, you can set up two section objects that cut through the 3D model
in different directions. Section object A cuts the model along its width; Section
object B cuts the model along its length. Perhaps you want to view the sectional
cut that is perpendicular to your line of sight. By associating each section
object with a view, you can quickly switch between the two views and see the
desired cross section.
NOTE A camera is similar to a named view, with the exception of being able to
manipulate the view seen through it using grip editing.

To associate a section object with a named view
1 Click View tab ➤ Views panel ➤ Named Views.
2 In the View Manager, in the left pane, under Model Views, select a named
view.
3 In the General section, in the Live Section drop-down list, select a section
object by name.
4 Click OK.
The section object is now associated with a named view. When the named
view is restored, live sectioning is turned on for the associated section
object.

Quick Reference
Commands
SECTIONPLANE
Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects.

Modify a Section View | 1311

VIEW

Save and Publish Section Objects
Save a section object as a block or tool, or publish it.

Save Sections as Blocks, Drawings, or Tools
Save the representation of the cross-sectional area where a section object
intersects a 3D model as a block.

Save Sections as Blocks or Drawings
You can save the section objects you create as blocks. Working from the
Generate Section/Elevation dialog box, you can choose the type of block that
is created.

For example, suppose your project requires 2D elevation drawings or 2D cross
sections. The 2D Section / Elevation option creates an accurate block
representation that is ready for dimensioning.

1312 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

To publish or render a cutaway of the 3D model, select the 3D Section option.
3D section geometry consists of mostly 3D solids and surfaces. However, profile
outlines and hatch patterns consist of 2D lines.
The display properties of 2D section/elevation blocks and 3D section blocks
are controlled in the Section Settings dialog box.
When you create section blocks, you have the following choices for how they
are handled:
■

Insert the section blocks. At the time of creation, you can insert a 2D or
3D section block into the drawing or save it to an external file. A 2D section
block is inserted on the XY plane of the current UCS, including section
blocks that extend into 3D space.
Inserted section blocks are initially unnamed. You can set the scale,
rotation, and basepoint upon insertion. You can modify and rename them
later by editing the block with BEDIT.

■

Export section blocks to a file. Save and name the new section objects so
they can be inserted later.

■

Save section block components on separate layers. By default, section
block components such as intersection boundary, intersection fill,
background lines, cutaway geometry, and curve tangency lines are saved
on Layer 0. However, you can separate the components of saved section
blocks onto separate layers with a suffix or prefix that you specify.
Assigning a suffix or prefix helps you organize the block components into
layers that you can sort and identify quickly. The Layer properties lists in
the Section Settings dialog box provide the opportunity to customize the
layer names.

■

Specify whether to limit the section block to certain objects. The objects
that are included in a section block vary, depending on which section
object state is selected. You can also select specific objects to be included
as you create the section block.

Save Section Objects as Tools
As with other objects, you can create tools from individual section objects
and then access them in a tool palette when you need them.
If each of several section objects has its own set of properties, you can save
each section object as a tool. Later, you can quickly create new section objects
that use the same settings.

Save and Publish Section Objects | 1313

See also:
■

Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images on page 62

To save and insert a 2D or 3D section as a block
1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Create Block.
2 Select the section object.
3 In the Generate Section/Elevation dialog box, click 2D Section/Elevation
or 3D Section.
4 In the expanded dialog box, select Include All Objects.
5 Under Destination, click Insert as New Block.
6 Click Create.
7 In the drawing area, specify an insertion point for the new block.
An unnamed block is inserted consisting of 2D or 3D geometry.

To save section block components on separate layers
1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Create Block.
2 Click a section object.
3 In the Generate Section/Elevation dialog box, click 2D Section/Elevation
or 3D Section.
4 In the expanded dialog box, click Section Settings.
5 In the Section Settings dialog box, in the list of properties, click the Layer
box under the section component that you want to update.
6 In the expanded Layer list, specify the layer on which to place the section
block component:
■

To set an existing layer name, click *ObjectByLayer* or the name of
another layer. Go to step 7.

■

To create a descriptive label to be added to the block section layer
names, click New Layer Name Settings.

1314 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

7 In the New Layer Name dialog box, specify how the descriptive text will
look:
■

Under Added Text Type, specify whether you want the descriptive
text to be a prefix or a suffix.

■

Under Text Added to the Existing Layer Name, enter descriptive text
to be added to the layer name.

Click OK.
8 In the Section Settings dialog box, click OK.
9 In the Generate Section / Elevation dialog box, click Create.

To save a section object tool as a tool palette tool
1 On a section object, select the section line.
2 Drag the section object to the position on the tool palette where you
want to place the tool.
The black line indicates the new location of the tool.
3 Release the mouse button.
The section object is saved as a tool on the tool palette.

Quick Reference
Commands
BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
SECTIONPLANE
Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects.
SECTIONPLANESETTINGS
Sets display options for the selected section plane.
SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK
Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks.
TOOLPALETTES
Opens the Tool Palettes window.

Save and Publish Section Objects | 1315

Publish Section Objects
Control the visibility of section objects when you render, plot, or view them
in the DWF file viewer.

Render Section Objects
With live sectioning turned on, all lines on a section object are rendered as
2D lines. The section plane indicator is rendered as a transparent material. Its
degree of transparency is controlled in the Properties palette.
If you want to render a 3D cutaway, save the cutaway section as a 3D block
and render the block reference.

Plot Section Objects
When a section object is in a Section Boundary or Section Volume state,
displayed lines cannot be plotted. The section plane indicator is plotted as if
it were transparent. However, it does not have the same visual quality that it
has when it is rendered.
If you do not want to plot the section line, place the section object on a layer
that is turned off.

View Section Objects in the DWF file viewer
When live sectioning is active for a section object, the 3D model is displayed
in the DWF Viewer with the best possible visual quality. Geometry that is
hidden by live sectioning is also hidden in the DWF Viewer.
Display settings for live sections have the same appearance in the viewer as
they have in the drawing. For example, dashed linetypes and hatch patterns
assigned to intersected areas of a 3D model are retained in the DWF Viewer
display.
The section object is not visible in the DWF Viewer.

Quick Reference
Commands
3DDWF
Creates a 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file of your 3D model and displays it in the
DWF Viewer.

1316 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

PLOT
Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.
PUBLISH
RENDER
Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D solid or surface
model.
SECTIONPLANE
Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects.
SECTIONPLANESETTINGS
Sets display options for the selected section plane.
SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK
Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks.

Create a Flattened View
Create a flattened view of the 3D solids and regions in the current view.

Create a 2D Presentation of a 3D Model
With the FLATSHOT command, you can create a flattened, 2D representation
of the 3D model projected onto the XY plane. The resulting objects can be
inserted as a block or saved as a separate drawing.
The process is like taking a photograph of the entire 3D model and then laying
the photograph flat. This feature is useful for creating technical illustrations.

Create a Flattened View | 1317

The flatshot process works only in model space. Start by setting up the view
you want, including orthographic or parallel views. All 3D objects in the model
space viewport are captured. Therefore, be sure to place the objects you do
not want captured on layers that are turned off or frozen.
As you create the block, you can control how hidden lines are displayed by
adjusting the Foreground and Obscured Lines settings in the Flatshot dialog
box. For best results with mesh objects, clear the Show box under Obscured
Lines so that hidden lines are not represented.
Three-dimensional objects that have been sectioned are captured in their
entirety, as if they had not been sectioned.
NOTE To create profile images of 3D solids in paper space, use the SOLPROF
command.

Modify a Block Created with Flatshot
You can modify a flattened view that has been inserted as a block in the same
way that you modify any other 2D block geometry.

1318 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and Drawings from 3D Models

To create a flattened drawing view of a 3D model
1 Set up the view of the 3D model.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Flatshot.
3 In the Flatshot dialog box, under Destination, click one of the options.
4 Change the color and linetype settings for Foreground and Obscured
lines.
5 Click Create.
6 Specify an insertion point on the screen to place the block. Adjust the
basepoint, scale, and rotation if necessary.
A block is created consisting of 2D geometry that is projected onto the
XY plane of the current UCS.

Quick Reference
Commands
FLATSHOT
Creates a 2D representation of all 3D objects based on the current view.
SOLPROF
Creates 2D profile images of 3D solids for display in a layout viewport.
SOLDRAW
Generates profiles and sections in layout viewports created with SOLVIEW.
SOLVIEW
Creates orthographic views, layers, and layout viewports automatically for
3D solids.

Create a Flattened View | 1319

1320

Part 9: Annotate Drawings

1321

1322

Work with Annotations

When you annotate your drawings, you can use certain tools and properties to make working
with annotations easier.

Overview of Annotations
Annotations are notes or other types of explanatory symbols or objects that are
commonly used to add information to your drawing.
Examples of annotations include
■

Notes and labels

■

Tables

■

Dimensions and tolerances

■

Hatches

■

Callouts

■

Blocks

The types of objects that you use to create annotations include
■

Hatches

■

Text (single-line and multiline)

■

Tables

■

Dimensions

■

Tolerances

■

Leaders and multileaders

1323

■

Blocks

■

Attributes

Quick Reference
Commands
ATTDEF
Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block.
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
HATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or
gradient fill.
MLEADERSTYLE
Creates and modifies multileader styles.
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
OBJECTSCALE
Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.
TEXT
Creates a single-line text object.

Scale Annotations
You can automate the process of scaling annotations in various layout
viewports and in model space.

1324 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

Overview of Scaling Annotations
Objects that are commonly used to annotate drawings have a property called
Annotative on page 2289. This property allows you to automate the process of
scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper.
Instead of creating multiple annotations at different sizes and on separate
layers, you can turn on the annotative property by object or by style, and set
the annotation scale for model or layout viewports. The annotation scale
controls the size of the annotative objects relative to the model geometry in
the drawing.
The following objects are commonly used to annotate drawings and contain
an annotative property:
■

Text

■

Dimensions

■

Hatches

■

Tolerances

■

Multileaders

■

Blocks

■

Attributes

When the Annotative property for these objects is turned on (set to Yes), these
objects are called annotative objects.
You define a paper size for annotative objects. The annotation scale on page
2289 you set for layout viewports and model space determines the size of the
annotative objects in those spaces.

Save to Legacy Drawing File Format
Set the system variable SAVEFIDELITY to 1 when you save a drawing that
contains annotative objects to a legacy drawing file format (AutoCAD 2007
or earlier). This preserves the visual fidelity of the drawing when it is opened
in a release earlier than AutoCAD 2008 by saving individual representations
of each scale of each annotative object. The individual objects are saved to
layers that are used to organize objects of the same scale. Setting SAVEFIDELITY
to 0, when opening the drawing in AutoCAD 2008 or later release, results in
improved performance. For more information about saving a drawing to a
previous release, see Save a Drawing on page 238.

Overview of Scaling Annotations | 1325

Workflow for Annotating Drawings
The following steps represent a typical workflow for annotating a drawing so
that your annotations will scale automatically.
1 Create annotative styles on page 1334.
2 In model space, set the annotation scale to the scale at which the
annotations will be plotted or displayed on page 1327.
3 Create annotative objects using annotative styles on page 1334.
If one or more annotative objects needs to be displayed at an additional scale,
follow these steps.
1 Add the additional scale to the annotative objects on page 1353.
2 Set the annotation scale to the new scale on page 1328 (the annotative
objects that support the new scale will be resized based on the annotation
scale).
3 Reposition the annotative objects as needed for the new scale
When you create your layouts, follow these steps.
1 Create a new layout on page 431 or make a layout current on page 439.
2 Create viewports on page 448.
3 Set the annotation scale for each viewport on page 1328. (For each viewport,
the annotation scale and viewport scale should be the same).
For more information about setting visibility for annotative objects, see Display
Annotative Objects on page 1351. For more information about adding scales to
annotative objects, see Add and Modify Scale Representations on page 1353.

Quick Reference
Commands
OBJECTSCALE
Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects.

1326 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

System Variables
ANNOAUTOSCALE
Updates annotative objects to support the annotation scale when the
annotation scale is changed.
CANNOSCALE
Sets the name of the current annotation scale for the current space.
CANNOSCALEVALUE
Returns the value of the current annotation scale.
MSLTSCALE
Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale.

Set Annotation Scale
Annotation scale on page 2289 is a setting that is saved with model space, layout
viewports, and model views. When you add annotative on page 2289 objects to
your drawing, they support the current annotation scale and are scaled based
on that scale setting and automatically displayed at the correct size in model
space.
Before you add annotative objects to your model, you set the annotation scale.
Think about the eventual scale settings of the viewports in which the
annotations will display. The annotation scale should be set to the same scale
as the viewport in which the annotative objects will display in the layout (or
the plot scale if plotting from model space). For example, if the annotative
objects will display in a viewport that has a scale of 1:2, then you set the
annotation scale to 1:2.
When working on the Model layout or when a viewport is selected, the current
annotation scale is displayed on the status bar. You can use the status bars to
change the annotation scale. You can reset the annotation scale list to the
default list of scales stored with your user profile in the Default Scale List dialog
box.
You can use the ANNOAUTOSCALE system variable to update annotative
objects to support the current scale automatically when the annotation scale
is changed. ANNOAUTOSCALE is turned off by default to keep file size down
and improve performance. When ANNOAUTOSCALE is off, this button
is displayed this way on the right side of the status bar.

Set Annotation Scale | 1327

Use the CANNOSCALE system variable to set a default annotation scale setting.
You can reset the list of annotative scales in a drawing to the default list of
either metric or imperial scales defined in the registry with the Default Scale
dialog box. The unused scales in the drawing are purged and the customized
list of scales from your user profile are merged into the drawing
See also:
■

Drawing Status Bar on page 44

To set the annotation scale while working on the Model tab
1 On the right side of the drawing or application status bar, click the arrow
next to the displayed annotation scale.
2 Select a scale from the list.

To set the annotation scale for a layout viewport
1 On a layout tab, select a viewport.
2 On the right side of the drawing or application status bar, click the arrow
next to the displayed annotation scale.
3 Select a scale from the list.

To set the default annotation scale
1 At the command prompt, enter cannoscale.
2 Enter a scale name. Press ENTER

Quick Reference
Commands
OBJECTSCALE
Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects.

System Variables
ANNOAUTOSCALE
Updates annotative objects to support the annotation scale when the
annotation scale is changed.

1328 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

CANNOSCALE
Sets the name of the current annotation scale for the current space.
CANNOSCALEVALUE
Returns the value of the current annotation scale.
MSLTSCALE
Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale.

Create Annotative Objects
Objects that are commonly used to annotate drawings have a property called
Annotative on page 2289. When the Annotative property for these objects is
turned on (set to Yes), these objects are called annotative objects

Overview of Creating Annotative Objects
When you add annotations to your drawing, you can turn on the Annotative
on page 2289 property for those objects. These annotative objects are scaled
based on the current annotation scale on page 2289 setting and are automatically
displayed at the correct size.
Annotative objects are defined at a paper height and display at the size
determined by the annotation scale.
The following objects can be annotative (have an Annotative property):
■

Hatches

■

Text (single-line and multiline)

■

Dimensions

■

Tolerances

■

Leaders and multileaders (created with MLEADER)

■

Blocks

■

Attributes

Create Annotative Objects | 1329

Many of the dialog boxes used to create these objects contain an Annotative
check box where you can make the object annotative. You can also change
existing objects to be annotative by changing the annotative property in the
Properties palette.
When you hover the cursor over an annotative object that supports one

annotation scale, the cursor displays a
more than one annotation scale, it displays a

1330 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

icon. When the object supports
icon.

Text, dimension, and multileader styles can also be annotative. Annotative
styles create annotative objects.

Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects
When working with annotative on page 2289 objects, this option allows you to
maintain visual fidelity for these objects when they are viewed in AutoCAD
2007 and earlier releases. Visual fidelity is controlled by the SAVEFIDELITY
system variable.
If you work primarily in model space, it is recommended that you turn off
visual fidelity (set SAVEFIDELITY to 0). However, if you need to exchange
drawings with other users, and layout fidelity is most important, then visual
fidelity should be turned on (set SAVEFIDELITY to 1).
NOTE The SAVEFIDELITY system variable does not affect saving a drawing to the
drawing or DXF file formats.
Annotative objects may have multiple scale representations on page 2318. When
visual fidelity is on, annotative objects are decomposed and scale
representations are saved (in an anonymous block on page 2289) to separate
layers, which are named based on their original layer and appended with a
number. If you explode the block in AutoCAD 2007 or earlier releases, and
then open the drawing in AutoCAD 2008 or later releases, each scale
representation becomes a separate annotative object, each with one annotation
scale. It is not recommended that you edit or create objects on these layers

Create Annotative Objects | 1331

when working with a drawing created in AutoCAD 2008 and later releases in
AutoCAD 2007 and earlier releases.
When this option is not selected, a single model space representation is
displayed on the Model layout. More annotation objects may be displayed on
the Model layout depending on the ANNOALLVISIBLE setting. Also, more
objects may be displayed in paper space viewports at different sizes than in
AutoCAD 2008 and later releases.
See also:
■

Work with Annotative Styles on page 1333

Quick Reference
Commands
ATTDEF
Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block.
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
HATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or
gradient fill.
MLEADERSTYLE
Creates and modifies multileader styles.
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.
TEXT
Creates a single-line text object.

1332 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

Work with Annotative Styles
You can minimize the steps to annotate a drawing by using annotative styles.
Annotative text, dimension, and multileader styles create annotative on page
2289 objects.
The dialog boxes used to define these objects contain an Annotative check
box where you can make the styles annotative. Annotative styles display a

special
palette.

icon before their names in dialog boxes and the Properties

You should specify the Paper Text Height value for any annotative text styles
you create. The Paper Text Height setting specifies the height of the text in
paper space.
NOTE If you’ve specified the Text Height value for a dimension or multileader
style, this setting overrides the text style Paper Text Height setting.
If you redefine styles to be annotative or non-annotative, existing objects that
reference those styles are not automatically updated to reflect the annotative
property of the style or definition. Use the ANNOUPDATE command to update
the existing objects to the current annotative properties of the style.
When you change the Style property of an existing object (whether it’s
annotative or non-annotative), the object’s annotative properties will match

Create Annotative Objects | 1333

that of the new style. If the style does not have a fixed height (the Text Height
value is 0), the paper height of the object is calculated based on the object’s
current height and the annotation scale.
See also:
■

Work with Text Styles on page 1469

■

Create Annotative Text on page 1335

■

Use Dimension Styles on page 1530

■

Create Annotative Dimensions and Tolerances on page 1339

■

Work with Leader Styles on page 1451

■

Create Annotative Leaders and Multileaders on page 1344

To create an annotative style
■

Follow the steps in one of the following procedures
■

To create a new annotative text style on page 1336

■

To change an existing non-annotative text style to annotative on page
1336

■

To create a new annotative dimension style on page 1340

■

To change an existing dimension style to annotative on page 1341

■

To create a new annotative multileader style on page 1344

■

To change an existing multileader style to annotative on page 1345

To create annotative objects from annotative styles
■

Follow the steps in one of the following procedures
■

To create annotative single-line text on page 1337

■

To create annotative multiline text on page 1337

■

To create an annotative dimension on page 1341

■

To create an annotative multileader on page 1345

1334 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

Quick Reference
Commands
ANNOUPDATE
Updates existing annotative objects to match the current properties of their
styles.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
MLEADERSTYLE
Creates and modifies multileader styles.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

Create Annotative Text
Use annotative on page 2289 text for notes and labels in your drawing. You create
annotative text by using an annotative text style, which sets the height of the
text on the paper.
The current annotation scale on page 2289 automatically determines the display
size of the text in model space or paper space viewports.
For example, you want text to display at a height of 3/16" on the paper, so
you can define a text style to have a paper height of 3/16". When you add
text to a viewport that has a scale of 1/2"=1'0", the current annotation scale,
which is set to the same scale as the viewport’s, automatically scales the text
to display appropriately at 4.5".
You can also change existing non-annotative text to annotative by changing
the text’s Annotative property to Yes (On). This applies to any text created
through text styles or through the TEXT and MTEXT commands.
You can set the orientation of annotative text objects to match the orientation
of the paper. For more information about setting the orientation of annotative
objects, see Set Orientation for Annotations on page 1356.
See also:
■

Create Text on page 1402

■

Work with Annotative Styles on page 1333

Create Annotative Objects | 1335

■

Set Orientation for Annotations on page 1356

To create a new annotative text style

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style.
2 In the Text Style dialog box, click New.
3 In the New Text Style dialog box, enter a new style name.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Text Style dialog box, under Size, select Annotative.
6 In the Paper Text Height box, enter the height of the text as it will display
on paper.
7 Click Apply.
8 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current text style.
9 Click Close.

To change an existing non-annotative text style to annotative

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style.
2 In the Text Style dialog box, Styles list, select a style.

NOTE A
icon next to a text style name indicates that the style is
already annotative.
3 Under Size, select Annotative.
4 In the Paper Text Height box, enter the height of the text as it will display
on paper.
5 Click Apply.
6 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current text style.
7 Click Close.

1336 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

To create annotative single-line text

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style.
2 In the Text Style dialog box, Styles list, select an annotative text style.

NOTE A
annotative.

icon next to a text style name indicates that the style is

3 Click Set Current to set this style as the current text style.
4 Click Close.

5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Single Line Text.
6 Specify the insertion point for the first character.
7 Specify a text rotation angle.
8 Enter the text.

To create annotative multiline text

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Multiline Text.
2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the
multiline text object. The In-Place Text Editor is displayed.
3 Do one of the following:
■

On the Text Formatting toolbar, in the Text Style control, click the
arrow and select an existing annotative text style from the list.

■

Click the Annotative button on the toolbar to create annotative
multiline text.

4 Enter the text.
5 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK.

Create Annotative Objects | 1337

To change existing multiline text to annotative or non-annotative
1 Double-click a multiline text object. The In-Place Text Editor is displayed.

2 Click the Annotative
button on the toolbar to change existing
multiline text to annotative or non-annotative.
When the Annotative button is depressed, the text is annotative. When
the button is not depressed, the text is non-annotative.
3 Click OK to save the changes.

To change existing text (single-line or multiline) to be annotative or
non-annotative
1 In the drawing, select a text object.

2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, under Text, click Annotative.
4 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No.

To update text to reflect the current annotative properties of the text style

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style.
2 In the Text Style dialog box, Styles list, select the style used by the text
that you want to update.

1338 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

7 Click Close.
8 In the drawing, select all the text objects (text and mtext) that you want
to update.
9 At the command prompt, enter annoupdate.

To change the height of annotative text as it will display on the paper
1 In the drawing, select a text object.

2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, under Paper Text Height, enter a new value.

Quick Reference
Commands
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.
TEXT
Creates a single-line text object.

Create Annotative Dimensions and Tolerances
You can create annotative on page 2289 dimensions for measurements in your
drawing through annotative dimension styles.
Annotative dimension styles create dimensions in which all the elements of
the dimension, such as text, spacing, and arrows, scale uniformly by the
annotation scale on page 2289.

Create Annotative Objects | 1339

If you associate a dimension to an annotative object, the associativity of the
dimension is lost.
You can also change an existing non-annotative dimension to annotative by
changing the dimension’s Annotative property to Yes (On).
NOTE When the current dimension style is annotative, the value of DIMSCALE is
automatically set to zero, and does not affect the dimension scale.
You can also create annotative tolerances. Geometric tolerances show
acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout of a
feature.
See also:
■

Dimensions and Tolerances on page 1523

■

Use Dimension Styles on page 1530

■

Work with Annotative Styles on page 1333

To create a new annotative dimension style

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager dialog box, click New.
3 In the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, enter a new style name.
4 Select Annotative.
5 Click Continue.

1340 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

6 In the New Dimension Style dialog box, select the appropriate tab and
make changes to define the dimension style.
7 Click OK.
8 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current dimension
style.
9 Click Close.

To change an existing dimension style to annotative

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select a style.

NOTE A
icon next to a dimension style name indicates that the style
is already annotative.
3 Click Modify.
4 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Scale for
Dimension Features, select Annotative.
5 Click OK.
6 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current dimension
style.
7 Click Close.

To create an annotative dimension

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select an
annotative dimension style.

A
icon next to a dimension style name indicates that the style is
annotative. If an annotative style does not exist, you will need to create

Create Annotative Objects | 1341

one first. For information on creating an annotative dimension style see,
To create a new annotative dimension style on page 1340.
3 Click Set Current.
4 Click Close.
5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension drop-down list
➤ select a dimension type, or at the Command prompt, enter a
dimension command.
If the Select Annotation Scale dialog box is displayed, select the default
scale you want to use for the new dimension object and click OK.
6 Place the dimension in the drawing area.
7 Select the new dimension and right-click. Click Annotative Object Scale
➤ Add/Delete Scales.
8 In the Annotation Object Scale dialog box, click Add.
9 In the Add Scales to Object dialog box, select the object scales you want
to assign to the dimension. Click OK.
10 In the Annotation Object Scale dialog box, click OK.

To change an existing dimension to annotative or non-annotative
1 Select a dimension in a drawing.

2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Annotative.
4 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No.

To update dimensions to reflect the current annotative properties of the
dimension style

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select a style.

1342 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

To create an annotative tolerance
1 Follow the steps in To create geometric tolerances on page 1622.

2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Annotative.
4 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

Create Annotative Objects | 1343

System Variables
DIMANNO
Creates a single-line text object.

Create Annotative Leaders and Multileaders
Leaders and multileaders on page 2309 are used to add call outs to your drawings.
You can create annotative on page 2289 leaders through an annotative dimension
style and multileaders through an annotative multileader style.
When you create a leader, you create two separate objects: the leader and the
text, block, or tolerance associated with the leader. When you create a
multileader, you create a single object.
If the multileader style is annotative, the associated text or tolerance will be
annotative as well, regardless of the annotative setting of the text style or
tolerance.
NOTE It is recommended that you create non-annotative entities when creating
a mleader content block.
Blocks used in leaders and multileaders must be non-annotative.
You can change the Annotative property of leaders and multileaders in the
Properties palette.
See also:
■

Create Leaders on page 1439

■

Work with Leader Styles on page 1451

To create a new annotative multileader style

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Multileader Style.
2 In the Multileader Style Manager dialog box, click New.
3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, enter a new style name,
and select Annotative.
4 Click Continue.

1344 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

5 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, select the appropriate tab and
make changes to define the multileader style.
6 Click OK.
7 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the multileader style.
8 Click Close.

To change an existing multileader style to annotative

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Multileader Style.
2 In the Multileader Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select a style.

NOTE A
icon next to a multileader style name indicates that the style
is already annotative.
3 Click Modify.
4 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, Leader Structure tab, under
Scale, select Annotative.
5 Click OK.
6 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the multileader style.
7 Click Close.

To create an annotative multileader

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Multileader Style.
2 In the Multileader Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select an
annotative multileader style.

NOTE A
is annotative.

icon next to a multileader style name indicates that the style

Create Annotative Objects | 1345

3 Click Set Current.
4 Click Close.

5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Multileader.
6 Choose a point for the leader head.
7 Choose the last point for the leader.
8 Specify the text width.
9 Enter text.
10 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK.

To change an existing leader or multileader to annotative or non-annotative
1 Select a leader or multileader in a drawing.

2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Annotative.
4 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No.

Quick Reference
Commands
MLEADERSTYLE
Creates and modifies multileader styles.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes
If you want to use geometric objects to annotate your drawing, combine the
objects into an annotative block definition.

1346 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

Annotative on page 2289 block definitions create annotative block references.
Annotative block references and attributes initially support the current
annotation scale at the time they are inserted. You should insert annotative
block references with a unit factor of 1.

You cannot change the Annotative property of individual block references.
To set an annotative block’s paper size, you should define the block in paper
space or on the Model layout with the annotation scale on page 2289 set to 1:1.
When creating and working with annotative blocks and annotative objects
within blocks, the following points should be noted:
■

Non-annotative blocks can contain annotative objects, which are scaled
by the block’s scale factor in addition to the annotation scale.

■

Annotative blocks cannot reside in annotative blocks.

■

Annotative block references are scaled uniformly by the current annotation
scale as well as any user scale applied to the block reference.

■

Blocks that contain annotative objects should not be manually scaled.

You can define annotative attributes for annotative and non-annotative blocks.
Use annotative attributes with non-annotative blocks when you want the
geometry in the block to display on the paper based on the scale of the
viewport, but you want the attribute text to display at the Paper Text Height
defined for the attribute.

Create Annotative Objects | 1347

You can set the orientation of annotative blocks to match the orientation of
the paper. For more information about setting the orientation of annotative
objects, see Set Orientation for Annotations on page 1356.
You can use the ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable to specify whether or
not the entire drawing will behave as an annotative block when inserted into
another drawing. The ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable becomes read-only
if the drawing contains annotative objects.
NOTE The INSUNITS setting is ignored when inserting annotative on page 2289
blocks into a drawing.
See also:
■

Work with Blocks on page 915

■

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) on page 939

■

Set Orientation for Annotations on page 1356

To create an annotative block definition

1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create.
2 In the Block Definition dialog box, enter a block name in the Name box.
3 Under Objects, select Convert to Block.
4 Click Select Objects.
5 Under Behavior, select Annotative.
6 Use your pointing device to select objects to be included in block
definition. Press ENTER to complete object selection.
7 In the Block Definition dialog box, under Base Point, specify the block
insertion point.
8 Click OK.

To update existing block references to be annotative

1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create.

1348 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

2 In the Block Definition dialog box, Name box, click the arrow and select
the name of the block you want to update to be annotative.
3 Under Behavior, select Annotative.
4 Click OK.
The existing block references in the drawing are now annotative.

To create an annotative attribute definition
1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Define Attributes.

2 In the Attribute Definition dialog box, set the Attribute Modes and enter
Tag information, Insertion Point and Text Settings.
3 Under Text Settings, select Annotative.
4 Click OK.
5 Specify the start point.
6 Press ENTER.

Quick Reference
Commands
ATTDEF
Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block.
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.

System Variables
ANNOTATIVEDWG
Specifies whether or not the drawing will behave as an annotative block
when inserted into another drawing.

Create Annotative Objects | 1349

Create Annotative Hatches
Use an annotative hatch to symbolically represent material such as sand,
concrete, steel, earth, etc.
An annotative on page 2289 hatch is defined at a paper size. You can create
individual annotative hatch objects as well as annotative hatch patterns.
The hatch pattern definitions stored in the acad.pat file contain information
that indicates whether the pattern is annotative or non-annotative. When
the selected hatch pattern is annotative, the Annotative checkbox in the Hatch
and Gradient dialog box should be selected.
You can use the HPANNOTATIVE system variable to specify whether or notnew
hatches are annotative. By default, new hatch objects are non-annotative.
The orientation of annotative hatches always matches the orientation of the
layout.

See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Pattern Definitions in the Customization Guide

To create an annotative hatch object

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch.

1350 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

2 At the command prompt, enter settings.
3 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, click Add: Select Objects.
4 Specify the object or objects you want to hatch.
5 Under Options, select Annotative.
6 Click OK.

To change an existing hatch object to annotative
1 In model space, at the command prompt, enter cannoscale.
2 Enter the scale set for the viewport in which the hatch is displayed.
3 In the drawing, select the hatch.
4 In the Properties palette, under Pattern, click Annotative.
5 On the drop-down list, select Yes.

Quick Reference
Commands
HATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or
gradient fill.

System Variables
HPANNOTATIVE

Display Annotative Objects
For model space or a layout viewport, you can display all the annotative objects
or only those that support the current annotation scale.
This reduces the need to use multiple layers to manage the visibility of your
annotations.
You use the Annotation Visibility button on the right side of the application
or drawing status bar to choose the display setting for annotative objects.

Display Annotative Objects | 1351

Annotation visibility is turned on by default.
When annotation visibility
is turned on, all annotative objects are displayed. When annotation visibility
is turned off

, only annotative objects for the current scale are displayed.

In general, you should turn off annotation visibility, except when inspecting
a drawing created by another person or when adding scales to existing
annotative objects.
Annotation visibility is also controlled by the ANNOALLVISIBLE system
variable.
In order for an annotative object to be visible, the layer the object is on must
be turned on.
If an object supports more than one annotation scale, the object will display
at the current scale.
When the MSLTSCALE system variable is set to 1 (default), linetypes displayed
on the model tab are scaled by the annotation scale
See also:
■

Drawing Status Bar on page 44

To display or hide annotative objects in a drawing
➤

On the drawing or application status bar, click the Annotation Visibility
button.
When the

button is displayed, all annotative objects are displayed.

When the
button is displayed, only annotative objects that support
the current annotation scale are displayed.

1352 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

Quick Reference
System Variables
ANNOALLVISIBLE
Hides or displays annotative objects that do not support the current
annotation scale.
MSLTSCALE
Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale.
SELECTIONANNODISPLAY
Controls whether alternate scale representations are temporarily displayed
in a dimmed state when an annotative object is selected.

Add and Modify Scale Representations
When you create an annotative on page 2289 object in your drawing, it supports
one annotation scale on page 2289, the annotation scale that was current when
you created the object. You can update annotative objects to support additional
annotation scales.
When you update an annotative object to support additional scales, you add
additional scale representations on page 2318 to the object.
For example, if an annotative multileader supports two annotation scales, it
has two scale representations.
When you select an annotative object, grips are displayed on the scale
representation that supports the current annotation scale. You can use these
grips to manipulate the current scale representation. All other scale
representations of the object are displayed in a dimmed state when the
SELECTIONANNODISPLAY system variable is set to 1 (default).

Add and Modify Scale Representations | 1353

Use the ANNORESET command to reset the location of all scale representations
for an annotative object to that of the current scale representation.

To add the current annotation scale to an annotative object
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales.

2 In a drawing, select one or more annotative objects.
3 Press ENTER.

To delete the current annotation scale from an annotative object
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales.

2 In a drawing, select one or more annotative objects.
3 Press ENTER.

1354 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

To automatically update annotative objects to support the current
annotation scale
■

On the drawing or application status bar, click the button
displays as

so it

To add an annotation scale to an annotative object
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales.

2 In the drawing area, select one or more annotative objects.
3 Press ENTER.
4 In the Annotative Object Scale dialog box, click Add.
5 In the Add Scales to Object dialog box, select one or more scales to add
to the objects. (Press and hold the SHIFT key to select more than one
scale.)
6 Click OK.
7 In the Annotative Object Scale dialog box, click OK.

To delete an annotation scale from an annotative object
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales.

2 In the drawing area, select one or more annotative objects.
3 Press ENTER.
4 In the Annotative Object Scale dialog box, select one or more scales to
delete from the objects. (Press and hold the SHIFT key to select more than
one scale.).
NOTE You cannot delete the 1:1 scale.
5 Click OK.

Add and Modify Scale Representations | 1355

Quick Reference
Commands
ANNORESET
Resets the locations of all alternate scale representations of the selected
annotative objects.
OBJECTSCALE
Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects.

System Variables
SELECTIONANNODISPLAY
Controls whether alternate scale representations are temporarily displayed
in a dimmed state when an annotative object is selected.

Set Orientation for Annotations
Annotative on page 2289 blocks and text can be set so that their orientation
matches the orientation of the layout. The orientation of annotative hatches
always matches the orientation of the layout.
Even if the view in the layout viewport is twisted or if the viewpoint is
non-planar, the orientation of these objects in layout viewports will match
the orientation of the layout.

1356 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

Annotative attributes in blocks match the paper orientation of the block.
See also:
■

Work with Text Styles on page 1469

■

Create Annotative Text on page 1335

■

Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes on page 1346

■

Create Annotative Hatches on page 1350

To match the layout’s orientation for an annotative text style

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style.
2 In the Text Style dialog box, Styles list, select an annotative text style.

NOTE A
annotative.

icon next to a text style name indicates that the style is

3 Under Size, select Match Text Orientation to Layout.

Set Orientation for Annotations | 1357

4 Click Apply.
5 Click Close.

To match the layout’s orientation for an annotative block definition

1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create.
2 In the Block Definition dialog box, under Name, select a block.
3 Under Behavior, select Annotative.
4 Under Behavior, select Match Block Orientation to Layout.
5 Click Close.

To match the layout’s orientation for an existing annotative text object
1 In the drawing, select an annotative text object.

2 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style.
3 In the Text Style dialog box, under Size, select Match Orientation to
Layout.

1358 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations

Hatches, Fills, and
Wipeouts

■
■
■
■
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills on page 1359
Specify Hatch and Fill Areas on page 1367
Control the Appearance of Hatches on page 1372
Modify Hatches and Fills on page 1389
Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects on page 1395

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Hatches and fills do not have to be bounded. In the following illustration, the
concrete hatches are bounded, while the earth hatches are unbounded.

1359

By default, bounded hatches are associative, which means that the hatch object
is associated with the hatch boundary objects, and changes to the boundary
objects are automatically applied to the hatch.

To maintain associativity, the boundary objects must continue to completely
enclose the hatch.
The alignment and orientation of a hatch pattern is determined by the current
location and orientation of the user coordinate system, in addition to controls
in the user interface.

Moving or rotating the UCS is an alternate method for controlling hatch
patterns.
NOTE By default, a preview of the hatch displays as you move the cursor over
enclosed areas. To improve the response time in large drawings, turn off the hatch
preview feature with the HPQUICKPREVIEW system variable, or decrease the time
before the preview is temporarily canceled with the HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT system
variable.
Alternatively, solid-filled areas can be created using
■

2D solids (SOLID)

■

Wide polylines (PLINE)

■

Donuts (DONUT)

■

Traces (TRACE)

1360 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

To drag hatch patterns into your drawing
1 Click Insert tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Design Center.
NOTE This procedure describes how to use DesignCenter to drag hatch
patterns into your drawing. You can also drag hatch patterns from a tool
palette.
2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Search.
3 In the Search dialog box, do the following:
■

From the Look For drop-down list, select Hatch Pattern Files.

■

From the In drop-down list, select the drive where the program is
installed.

■

Confirm that Search Subfolders is selected.

■

On the Hatch Pattern Files tab, in Search for the Name, enter *
(asterisk).

4 Click Search Now.
The default hatch pattern file is acad.pat or acadiso.pat. The search results
may display the same file in different locations.
NOTE For convenient access, you can add the PAT file to Favorites by selecting
the file and clicking the Favorites button. A shortcut to the PAT file is displayed
in the Favorites folder in DesignCenter folders list.
5 In the search results, double-click the filename to load the hatch patterns
into the content area of DesignCenter.
6 (Optional) Right-click a pattern to display a shortcut menu with the
following options:
■

HATCH. Opens the Hatch and Gradient dialog box.

■

Copy. Stores the hatch pattern on the Clipboard.

■

Create Tool Palette. Creates a new tool palette that contains the
selected pattern.

7 From the content area of DesignCenter, drag a hatch pattern into an
enclosed area in your drawing or onto a tool palette.

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills | 1361

NOTE If the hatch pattern scale is too large or small, an error message is
displayed. You can adjust the scale for any hatch pattern by selecting it to
display the Hatch Editor tab. If the ribbon is closed, use the Properties palette
or HATCHEDIT.

To hatch or fill areas (ribbon turned on)

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch.
2 On the Properties panel, select one of the options from the Hatch Type
drop-down list.
3 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern or fill.
4 Specify a point inside each area to be hatched.
5 On the ribbon, make any adjustments as needed.
On the Properties panel, you can change the hatch type and colors or
modify the transparency level, angle, or scale for the hatch.
6 (Optional) Expand the Options panel, and select one of the draw order
options from the bottom drop-down list.
You can change the draw order of the hatch so that the hatch is displayed
either behind or in front of the hatch boundary, or behind or in front of
all other objects.
7 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the
command.

To hatch or fill areas (ribbon turned off)

1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar.
2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, under Boundaries, click Add: Pick
Points.
3 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch, and press Enter.
4 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, select a pattern or Solid from the
Pattern list.
To see how the hatch pattern will look, click the Preview button. Press
Esc when you finish previewing to return to the dialog box.

1362 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

5 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, make adjustments, if necessary.
To access additional options, click the More Options button at the
bottom-right of the dialog box.
6 (Optional) From the Draw Order drop-down list, choose one of the
options.
You can change the draw order of the hatch so that the hatch is displayed
either behind or in front of the hatch boundary, or behind or in front of
all other objects.
7 Click OK to apply the hatch.

To hatch selected objects (ribbon turned on)

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch.
2 On the Boundaries panel, click Select.
3 Select the objects that you want to hatch.
4 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the
command.

To hatch selected objects (ribbon turned off)

1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar.
2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, under Boundaries, click Add: Select
Objects.
3 Select the objects that you want to hatch and press Enter.
4 Click OK to apply the hatch.

Quick Reference
Commands
ADCENTER
Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills | 1363

GRADIENT
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill.
HATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or
gradient fill.
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or fill.
HATCHTOBACK
Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other
objects.
MATCHPROP
Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.

System Variables
GFANG
Specifies the angle of a gradient fill.
GFCLR1
Specifies the color for a one-color gradient fill or the first color for a two-color
gradient fill.
GFCLR2
Specifies the second color for a two-color gradient fill.
GFCLRLUM
Controls the tint or shade level in a one-color gradient fill.
GFCLRSTATE
Specifies whether a gradient fill uses one color or two colors.

1364 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

GFNAME
Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill.
GFSHIFT
Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up
and to the left.
HPANG
Sets the angle for new hatch patterns.
HPANNOTATIVE
Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative.
HPASSOC
Controls whether hatches and fills are associative.
HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR
Controls the background color for hatch patterns.
HPBOUND
Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY.
HPBOUNDRETAIN
Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills.
HPCOLOR
Sets a default color for new hatches.
HPDLGMODE
Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch
Edit dialog box.
HPDOUBLE
Specifies hatch pattern doubling for user-defined patterns.
HPDRAWORDER
Controls the draw order of hatches and fills.
HPGAPTOL
Treats a set of objects that almost enclose an area as a closed hatch boundary.

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills | 1365

HPINHERIT
Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties
option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT.
HPISLANDDETECTION
Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated.
HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE
Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected.
HPLAYER
Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills.
HPMAXAREAS
Sets the maximum number of enclosed areas that a single hatch object can
have and still automatically switch between solid and pattern hatches during
zoom operations.
HPMAXLINES
Sets the maximum number of hatch lines that are generated in a hatch
operation.
HPNAME
Sets the default hatch pattern name.
HPOBJWARNING
Sets the number of hatch boundary objects that can be selected before
displaying a warning message.
HPORIGIN
Sets the hatch origin point for new hatch patterns relative to the current
user coordinate system.
HPORIGINMODE
Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined.
HPQUICKPREVIEW
Controls whether a hatch preview is displayed when specifying a hatch area.
HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT
Sets the maximum time for a hatch preview to generate before the preview
is automatically cancelled.

1366 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

HPSCALE
Sets the hatch pattern scale factor.
HPSEPARATE
Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created
when operating on several closed boundaries.
HPSPACE
Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns.
HPTRANSPARENCY
Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills.
MIRRHATCH
Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns.
PICKSTYLE
Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.

Specify Hatch and Fill Areas
Define boundaries for hatches and fills from existing objects or from specified
boundary points.
Use one of several methods to specify the 2D geometric boundaries of a hatch
or fill.
■

Specify a point in an area that is enclosed by objects.

■

Select objects that enclose an area.

■

Specify boundary points using the Draw option of -HATCH.

■

Drag a hatch into an enclosed area from a tool palette or DesignCenter.

NOTE Enclosed areas can be hatched only if they are in a plane parallel to the XY
plane of the current UCS.

Create Associative Hatches
Associative hatches are automatically updated when their boundary objects
are modified. Minor changes in the boundary of an associative hatch do not
require erasing and re-creating the hatch.

Specify Hatch and Fill Areas | 1367

Hatch associativity is turned on by default and is controlled by the HPASSOC
system variable. You can also control hatch associativity using the following
tools in the user interface:
■

Hatch and Gradient dialog box

■

Hatch Edit dialog box

■

Hatch panel on the ribbon

■

Properties palette

Nonassociative hatches are not updated when their original boundary is
changed.

Hatch Enclosed Areas Within Boundaries
Enclosed areas within hatch boundaries are called islands. There are four island
detection styles available from the user interface:
■

Normal island detection

■

Outer island detection (recommended)

■

Ignore island detection

■

No island detection (legacy behavior that is similar to the Ignore style)

Using Normal island detection, if you specify the internal pick point shown,
islands remain unhatched and islands within islands are hatched.

1368 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

Using the same pick point, the results of the options are compared below.

NOTE Text objects are treated as islands. If island detection is turned on, the result
always leaves a rectangular space around the text.

Include Objects in a Boundary Set
When hatching a small area in a large, complex drawing, you can save time
by selecting a smaller set of objects in the drawing to be used in determining
the hatch boundary.

Identify Gaps in Hatch Boundaries
If the specified internal point is not within a fully enclosed area, red circles
are displayed at the unconnected endpoints of the boundary to identify the
gaps.

Specify Hatch and Fill Areas | 1369

The red circles remain displayed after you exit HATCH. They are removed
when you specify another internal point for the hatch, or when you use
REDRAW, REGEN, or REGENALL.
To hatch an area whose boundary is not quite closed, do one of the following:
■

Locate the gaps and modify the boundary objects so they form a closed
boundary.

■

Set the HPGAPTOL system variable to a value large enough to bridge the
gaps. HPGAPTOL applies only to gaps between geometric objects that
would meet if extended.

NOTE By default, a preview of the hatch displays as you move the cursor over
bounded areas. To improve the response time in large drawings, turn off the hatch
preview feature (HPQUICKPREVIEW system variable), or decrease the preview
timeout value (HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT system variable).
See also:
■

Reshape a Hatch or Fill on page 1392

To define a boundary set in a complex drawing (ribbon turned on)

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch.
2 Expand the Boundaries panel, and click the Select New Boundary Set
button at the bottom-left of the expanded panel.
3 Select the objects to be considered for the hatch and press Enter.
Selecting the objects with a crossing window is often the best method.
4 Specify a point inside each area that you want hatched.
5 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the
command.

1370 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

To define a boundary set in a complex drawing (ribbon turned off)

1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar.
2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, click the More Options button at
the bottom-right.
3 Under Boundary Set, click New.
4 Select the objects to be considered for the hatch and press Enter.
Selecting the objects with a crossing window is often the best method.
5 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, click Add: Pick Points.
6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch.
7 Click OK to apply the hatch.

Quick Reference
Commands
HATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or
gradient fill.
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or fill.

System Variables
HPANG
Sets the angle for new hatch patterns.
HPASSOC
Controls whether hatches and fills are associative.
HPBOUND
Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY.
HPBOUNDRETAIN
Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills.

Specify Hatch and Fill Areas | 1371

HPGAPTOL
Treats a set of objects that almost enclose an area as a closed hatch boundary.
HPISLANDDETECTION
Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated.
HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE
Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected.
HPQUICKPREVIEW
Controls whether a hatch preview is displayed when specifying a hatch area.
HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT
Sets the maximum time for a hatch preview to generate before the preview
is automatically cancelled.
HPSEPARATE
Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created
when operating on several closed boundaries.

Control the Appearance of Hatches
Specify a hatch pattern or fill, and control its alignment and scale.

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill
Choose from three types of hatch patterns, and two types of fills.
■

Predefined hatch patterns. Choose from over 70 ANSI, ISO, and other
industry-standard hatch patterns that are available. You can also use hatch
patterns from hatch pattern libraries supplied by other companies. Hatch
patterns are defined in the acad.pat and acadiso.pat files.

■

User-defined hatch patterns. Define a hatch pattern that uses the current
linetype with a specified spacing and angle.

■

Custom hatch patterns. Define a custom hatch pattern definition in a .pat
file.

■

Solid fill. Fill an area with a solid color by choosing the SOLID predefined
hatch.

1372 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

■

Gradient fill. Fill an enclosed area with a color gradient. A gradient fill can
be displayed as a tint (a color mixed with white), a shade (a color mixed
with black), or a smooth transition between two colors.

Gradients that mimic colors displayed on a cylinder, a sphere, or other shapes
are available.
NOTE You cannot use plot styles to control the plotted color of gradient fills.

Assign a Background Color to Hatch Patterns
Predefined, user defined, and custom hatch patterns, can be assigned a
background fill color. The background fill color shares the same level of
transparency as the pattern itself.
See also:
■

Modify Hatch Properties on page 1389

■

“Overview of Hatch Pattern Definitions” in the Customization Guide

To create a hatch with a predefined hatch pattern (ribbon turned on)

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch.
2 On the Properties panel, click Pattern from the Hatch Type drop-down
list.
3 (Optional) On the Properties panel, click a color override from the Hatch
Color drop-down list. Specify any other options as needed.
4 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern.
5 Specify a point inside each area that you want hatched.
6 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the
command.

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill | 1373

To create a hatch with a predefined hatch pattern (ribbon turned off)

1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar.
2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, Hatch tab, under Type and Pattern,
click Predefined from the Type drop-down list.
3 Select a pattern from the Pattern drop-down list.
4 (Optional) Select a color override from the Color drop-down list. Specify
any other options as needed.
5 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points.
6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch and press Enter.
7 Click OK to apply the hatch.

To fill an area with a solid color (ribbon turned on)

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch.
2 On the Properties panel, click Solid from the Hatch Type drop-down list,
or click Solid on the Pattern panel.
3 (Optional) On the Properties panel, click a color override from the Hatch
Color drop-down list. Specify any other options as needed.
4 Specify a point inside each area that you want to fill.
5 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the
command.

To fill an area with a solid color (ribbon turned off)

1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar.
2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, Hatch tab, under Type and Pattern,
click Predefined from the Type drop-down list.
3 Click Solid from the Pattern drop-down list.
4 (Optional) Select a color override from the Color drop-down list. Specify
any other options as needed.

1374 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

5 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points.
6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch and press Enter.
7 Click OK to apply the hatch.

Quick Reference
Commands
GRADIENT
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill.
HATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or
gradient fill.
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or fill.
HATCHTOBACK
Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other
objects.
MATCHPROP
Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.

System Variables
GFANG
Specifies the angle of a gradient fill.
GFCLR1
Specifies the color for a one-color gradient fill or the first color for a two-color
gradient fill.

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill | 1375

GFCLR2
Specifies the second color for a two-color gradient fill.
GFCLRLUM
Controls the tint or shade level in a one-color gradient fill.
GFCLRSTATE
Specifies whether a gradient fill uses one color or two colors.
GFNAME
Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill.
GFSHIFT
Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up
and to the left.
HPANG
Sets the angle for new hatch patterns.
HPANNOTATIVE
Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative.
HPASSOC
Controls whether hatches and fills are associative.
HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR
Controls the background color for hatch patterns.
HPBOUND
Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY.
HPBOUNDRETAIN
Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills.
HPCOLOR
Sets a default color for new hatches.
HPDOUBLE
Specifies hatch pattern doubling for user-defined patterns.
HPDRAWORDER
Controls the draw order of hatches and fills.

1376 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

HPINHERIT
Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties
option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT.
HPISLANDDETECTION
Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated.
HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE
Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected.
HPLAYER
Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills.
HPMAXAREAS
Sets the maximum number of enclosed areas that a single hatch object can
have and still automatically switch between solid and pattern hatches during
zoom operations.
HPMAXLINES
Sets the maximum number of hatch lines that are generated in a hatch
operation.
HPNAME
Sets the default hatch pattern name.
HPOBJWARNING
Sets the number of hatch boundary objects that can be selected before
displaying a warning message.
HPINHERIT
Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties
option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT.
HPORIGIN
Sets the hatch origin point for new hatch patterns relative to the current
user coordinate system.
HPORIGINMODE
Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined.
HPQUICKPREVIEW
Controls whether a hatch preview is displayed when specifying a hatch area.

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill | 1377

HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT
Sets the maximum time for a hatch preview to generate before the preview
is automatically cancelled.
HPSCALE
Sets the hatch pattern scale factor.
HPSEPARATE
Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created
when operating on several closed boundaries.
HPSPACE
Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns.
HPTRANSPARENCY
Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills.
MIRRHATCH
Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns.

Control the Hatch Origin Point
Each hatch pattern is aligned with an origin point. Changing the origin point
shifts the pattern.
By default, hatch patterns are aligned with the origin point of the user
coordinate system. However, sometimes you need to move the origin point
of the hatch object. For example, if you create a brick pattern, you can start
with a complete brick in the lower-left corner of the hatched area by specifying
a new origin point.

The hatch origin and its behavior depend on settings in the user interface that
control the HPORIGIN, HPORIGINMODE, and HPINHERIT system variables.
Alternatively, you can control hatch patterns by changing the location and
orientation of the user coordinate system.

1378 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

See also:
■

Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation on page 1391

To specify the alignment of a hatch pattern (ribbon turned on)

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch.
2 On the Properties panel, click Pattern from the Hatch Type drop-down
list.
3 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern.
4 On the Origin panel, click Set Origin, and specify a point in the drawing.
The hatch pattern will be aligned to this point.
5 On the Properties panel, specify a hatch angle.
6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch.
7 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the
command.
Alternatively, you can control the origin and rotation of a hatch pattern by
changing the origin and rotation of the user coordinate system (UCS) before
you create the hatch.

To specify the alignment of a hatch pattern (ribbon turned off)

1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar.
2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, Hatch tab, under Type and Pattern,
click Predefined from the Type drop-down list.
3 Select a hatch pattern from the Pattern drop-down list.
4 Under Hatch Origin, click Specified Origin and click Click to Set New
Origin. Specify a point in the drawing.
The hatch pattern will be aligned to this point.
5 Under Angle and Scale, specify a hatch angle to rotate the hatch pattern.
6 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points.
7 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch and press Enter.

Control the Hatch Origin Point | 1379

8 Click OK to apply the hatch.
Alternatively, you can control the origin and rotation of a hatch pattern by
changing the origin and rotation of the user coordinate system (UCS) before
you create the hatch.

Quick Reference
Commands
HATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or
gradient fill.
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or fill.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.

System Variables
HPINHERIT
Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties
option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT.
HPORIGIN
Sets the hatch origin point for new hatch patterns relative to the current
user coordinate system.
HPORIGINMODE
Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined.
HPQUICKPREVIEW
Controls whether a hatch preview is displayed when specifying a hatch area.
HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT
Sets the maximum time for a hatch preview to generate before the preview
is automatically cancelled.

1380 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns
The scale of hatch patterns can be set individually, or it can be set
automatically based on the scale of each layout viewport.
■

If you create hatch patterns exclusively for a single view or at a constant
scale, you can set the current hatch scale manually in the interface or with
the HPSCALE system variable.

■

If you work with layout viewports in different scales, you can apply scale
factors automatically by making them annotative. This method is more
efficient than creating duplicate hatch pattern objects with different scale
factors. For more information about using annotative scaling, see Create
Annotative Hatches on page 1350.

NOTE To prevent accidental creation of an enormous number of hatch lines, the
maximum number of hatch lines created in a single hatch operation is limited.
This limit prevents memory and performance problems. However, you can change
the maximum number of hatch lines with the HPMAXLINES system variable.
Similarly the number of enclosed areas in single hatch is limited by the
HPMAXAREAS system variable.
See also:
■

Scale Annotations on page 1324

■

Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation on page 1391

■

Create Annotative Hatches on page 1350

Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns | 1381

To set the scale of a hatch pattern (ribbon turned on)

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch.
2 On the Properties panel, click Pattern from the Hatch Type drop-down
list.
3 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern.
4 On the Properties panel, enter a hatch pattern scale.
5 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch.
6 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the
command.

To set the scale of a hatch pattern (ribbon turned off)

1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar.
2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, Hatch tab, under Type and Pattern,
click Predefined from the Type drop-down list.
3 Select a pattern from the Pattern drop-down list.
4 Under Angle and Scale, enter a new scale value or click the drop-down
arrow to display a list of scales.
5 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points.
6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch and press Enter.
7 Click OK to apply the hatch.

Quick Reference
Commands
HATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or
gradient fill.
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or fill.

1382 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

MATCHPROP
Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

System Variables
HPANNOTATIVE
Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative.
HPINHERIT
Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties
option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT.
HPMAXAREAS
Sets the maximum number of enclosed areas that a single hatch object can
have and still automatically switch between solid and pattern hatches during
zoom operations.
HPMAXLINES
Sets the maximum number of hatch lines that are generated in a hatch
operation.
HPOBJWARNING
Sets the number of hatch boundary objects that can be selected before
displaying a warning message.
HPINHERIT
Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties
option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT.
HPSCALE
Sets the hatch pattern scale factor.
HPSPACE
Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns.

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills
Control the default color, layer, and transparency of hatch objects separately
from other objects.

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills | 1383

Hatch objects have an additional capability that is not available with other
types of objects. You can specify which layer, color, and transparency settings
will be automatically applied to each new hatch object, regardless of the current
property settings. This can save you time.
For example, you can specify that all new hatch objects are automatically
created on a specified layer regardless of the current layer setting.
NOTE If you do not want to override the current property settings, select Use
Current for the hatch’s layer, color, and transparency settings.
See also:
■

Modify Hatch Properties on page 1389

■

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed on page 587

To set a transparency override for new hatches (ribbon turned on)

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch.
2 On the Properties panel, drag the Hatch Transparency slider or enter a
value.
3 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch.
4 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the
command.
All new hatch objects will use this transparency value instead of the current
transparency value used by all other objects.

To set a transparency override for new hatches (ribbon turned off)

1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar.
2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, under Options, select Specify Value
from the Transparency drop-down list.
3 Enter transparency value or drag the slider.
4 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points.
5 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch and press Enter.

1384 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

6 Click OK to apply the hatch.
All new hatch objects will use this transparency value instead of the current
transparency value used by all other objects.

Quick Reference
Commands
HATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or
gradient fill.
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or fill.
HATCHTOBACK
Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other
objects.
MATCHPROP
Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

System Variables
HPANNOTATIVE
Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative.
HPASSOC
Controls whether hatches and fills are associative.
HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR
Controls the background color for hatch patterns.
HPCOLOR
Sets a default color for new hatches.
HPDRAWORDER
Controls the draw order of hatches and fills.

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills | 1385

HPINHERIT
Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties
option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT.
HPLAYER
Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills.
HPSCALE
Sets the hatch pattern scale factor.
HPSEPARATE
Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created
when operating on several closed boundaries.
HPTRANSPARENCY
Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills.
MIRRHATCH
Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns.

Control the Display of Hatch Boundaries
Hide or remove boundary objects to create hatches without borders.
To create hatches that have no boundary objects, do one of the following:
■

Erase the boundary objects of an existing hatch.

■

Trim an existing hatch to objects that cross the edges of the hatch. After
trimming, erase the objects.

■

Define hatch boundary points with the Draw option of the -HATCH
command.

1386 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

To hide a hatch's boundary objects, assign the boundary objects to a different
layer than the hatch object, and then turn off or freeze the layer of the
boundary objects. This method maintains hatch associativity.
See also:
■

Reshape a Hatch or Fill on page 1392

To create an unbounded hatch
1 At the Command prompt, enter -hatch.
2 Enter p to specify Properties.
3 Enter the name of the pattern. For example, enter earth to specify the
EARTH pattern.
4 Specify the scale and angle for the hatch pattern.
5 Enter w to specify Draw Boundary.
6 Enter n to discard the polyline boundary once the hatch area has been
defined.
7 Specify points to define the boundary. Enter c to close the polyline
boundary.
8 Press Enter twice to create the hatch.

Quick Reference
Commands
-HATCH
Uses command prompts to fill an enclosed area or selected objects with a
hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

System Variables
HPANG
Sets the angle for new hatch patterns.

Control the Display of Hatch Boundaries | 1387

HPBOUNDRETAIN
Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills.
HPCOLOR
Sets a default color for new hatches.
HPDLGMODE
Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch
Edit dialog box.
HPDOUBLE
Specifies hatch pattern doubling for user-defined patterns.
HPMAXAREAS
Sets the maximum number of enclosed areas that a single hatch object can
have and still automatically switch between solid and pattern hatches during
zoom operations.
HPMAXLINES
Sets the maximum number of hatch lines that are generated in a hatch
operation.
HPNAME
Sets the default hatch pattern name.
HPOBJWARNING
Sets the number of hatch boundary objects that can be selected before
displaying a warning message.
HPINHERIT
Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties
option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT.
HPORIGIN
Sets the hatch origin point for new hatch patterns relative to the current
user coordinate system.
HPORIGINMODE
Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined.
HPSCALE
Sets the hatch pattern scale factor.

1388 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

HPSPACE
Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns.
HPTRANSPARENCY
Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills.

Control the Draw Order of Hatches and Fills
Specify the draw order for a hatch object to control whether it is displayed
behind or in front of the hatch boundary, or behind or in front of all other
objects.
This behavior is controlled by the HPDRAWORDER system variable.
In drawings that contain many hatch objects, use the HATCHTOBACK
command to display all hatch objects behind all other objects.

Quick Reference
Commands
HATCHTOBACK
Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other
objects.

System Variables
HPDRAWORDER
Controls the draw order of hatches and fills.

Modify Hatches and Fills
Modify hatch properties and boundaries, or re-create the boundaries hatch
objects.

Modify Hatch Properties
Modify the properties of hatch objects directly or copy them from another
hatch object.

Control the Draw Order of Hatches and Fills | 1389

The following tools are available for modifying hatch properties:
■

Hatch panel controls. Display on the ribbon by selecting a hatch object.

■

Hatch Edit dialog box. Access the dialog box with HATCHEDIT.

■

Properties palette.

■

Hatch shortcut menu. Access the menu by right-clicking a hatch object.

■

Hatch dynamic menu. Access the menu by hovering over the control grip
on a selected hatch.

■

Command line. Enter -HATCHEDIT.

Copy the properties of one hatch to another using the following methods:
■

Inherit Properties button in the Hatch Edit dialog box. Copy all
hatch-specific properties.

■

Match Properties command. Use MATCHPROP to copy general properties
and hatch-specific properties, with the exception of the hatch origin.

See also:
■

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed on page 587

Quick Reference
Commands
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or fill.
HATCHTOBACK
Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other
objects.
MATCHPROP
Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

1390 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

System Variables
HPDLGMODE
Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch
Edit dialog box.
HPINHERIT
Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties
option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT.

Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation
Shift, scale, or rotate hatch patterns to align them with existing objects.
To shift a hatch pattern, relocate the origin point of the hatch object. The
same tools in the user interface as listed in Modify Hatch Properties on page
1389 include options for specifying a new origin point, specifying a different
rotation angle, and changing the scale of the hatch pattern.
In some cases, it might be easier to move or rotate the user coordinate system
to align with existing objects, and then recreate the hatch.

To modify the properties of a hatch object
1 Select a hatch object.
2 Change the desired hatch settings from the Hatch Editor tab on the
ribbon, the Modify menu, Modify toolbar, or enter hatchedit at the
Command prompt.
3 In the user interface, a panel in the Hatch Editor tab, or the Hatch Edit
dialog box, change the hatch settings or properties as needed.

Quick Reference
Commands
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or fill.
MATCHPROP
Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects.

Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation | 1391

PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Reshape a Hatch or Fill
Reshape an associative hatch by modifying the boundary objects. Reshape a
nonassociative hatch by modifying the hatch object.

Modify the Extents of Associative Hatches and Fills
If you modify the boundary objects of an associative hatch, and the result
maintains a closed boundary, the associated hatch object is automatically
updated. If the changes result in an open boundary, the hatch loses its
associativity with the boundary objects, and the hatch remains unchanged.

When you select an associative hatch object, it displays a circular grip, called
the control grip, at the center of the hatch extents. Hover over the control grip
to display a shortcut menu with several hatch options, or right-click to display
additional options.

1392 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

You can also change the hatch object by editing the grips of the associated
boundary objects. To easily select all of the objects in a complex boundary,
use the Display Boundary Objects option.

If the boundary object is a polyline or spline, multi-functional grips are displayed.
For more information, see Use Object Grips on page 778.

Modify the Extents of Non-associative Hatches and Fills
When you select a non-associative hatch, multi-functional grips are displayed
on the hatch. Use these grips to modify the hatch extents and some several
hatch properties.

When you hover over a grip on a nonassociative hatch object, a grip menu
displays several edit options based on the type of grip. For example, a linear
segment grip has an option to convert the segment to an arc, or to add a
vertex.

NOTE For drastic changes, you can use TRIM to reduce the area covered by a
hatch object, or EXPLODE to disassemble a hatch into its component objects.
See also:
■

Modify Objects Using Grips on page 777

Reshape a Hatch or Fill | 1393

Quick Reference
Commands
EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
TRIM
Trims objects to meet the edges of other objects.

System Variables
GRIPS
Controls the display of grips on selected objects.

Re-create the Boundary of a Hatch or Fill
Create a new boundary object for a non-associative or an unbounded hatch
or fill.
Use the Recreate Boundary option to generate a closed polyline or a region
object around a selected hatch or fill. You can also specify that the new
boundary object is associated with the hatch.

To re-create the boundary object of a hatch or fill (ribbon turned on)
1 Select the hatch object.
2 On the ribbon, Boundaries panel, click Recreate Boundary.
3 At the prompt, specify the type of object to create as the new boundary,
and whether to associate the boundary with the hatch.
4 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the
command.

1394 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

To re-create the boundary object of a hatch or fill (ribbon turned off)
1 Start the Modify Hatch command from a menu or toolbar, or enter

hatchedit at the Command prompt.
2 Select the hatch object.
3 In the Hatch Edit dialog box, under Boundaries, click Recreate Boundary.
4 Specify the type of object to create as the new boundary.
5 Specify whether to associate the boundary with the hatch object.
6 Click OK to apply the hatch.

Quick Reference
Commands
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or fill.

System Variables
HPDLGMODE
Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch
Edit dialog box.
HPBOUND
Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY.
HPBOUNDRETAIN
Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills.
HPSEPARATE
Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created
when operating on several closed boundaries.

Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects
Create a polygonal area, called a wipeout to mask underlying objects with the
current background color.

Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects | 1395

A wipeout object covers existing objects with a blank area to make room for
notes or to mask details. This area is defined by the wipeout frame, which you
can turn on for editing, and turn off for plotting.

Use the WIPEOUT command both for creating a wipeout object, and for
controlling whether wipeout frames are displayed or hidden in the drawing.
If a polyline is used to create a wipeout object, the polyline must be closed,
contain line segments only, and have zero width.

Use Wipeout Objects on a Layout
You can create wipeout objects on a layout in paper space to mask objects in
model space. However, in the Page Settings dialog box, under Plot Options,
the Plot Paper Space Last option must be cleared before you plot to ensure
that the wipeout object is plotted correctly.
NOTE Because a wipeout object is similar to a raster image, it has the same
requirements for plotting. You need a raster-capable plotter with either an ADI
4.3 raster-capable driver or the system printer driver.
See also:
■

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed on page 587

To cover existing objects with a blank area

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Markup panel ➤ Wipeout.
2 Specify points in a sequence that defines the perimeter of the area to be
masked.
3 Press Enter to end the command.

1396 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts

To turn all wipeout frames on or off

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Markup panel ➤ Wipeout.
2 At the prompt, enter f (Frames).
3 Enter on or off, and press Enter.

Quick Reference
Commands
WIPEOUT
Creates a wipeout object, and controls whether wipeout frames are displayed
in the drawing.

Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects | 1397

1398

Notes and Labels

You can create and modify several types of text, including text with leaders. You can control
most text style settings by defining text styles.

Overview of Notes and Labels
You can create text in various ways. For short, simple entries, use single-line
text. For longer entries with internal formatting, use multiline text (mtext).
Although all entered text uses the current text style, which establishes the default
font and format settings, you can use several methods to customize the text
appearance. There are several tools that can change text scale and justification,
find and replace text, and check for spelling errors.
Text that is included in a dimension or tolerance is created using the
dimensioning commands. You can also create multiline text with leaders.

To create single-line text

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Single Line Text.
2 Specify the insertion point for the first character. If you press ENTER, the
program locates the new text immediately below the last text object you
created, if any.
3 Specify the height of the text. This prompt is displayed only if text height
is set to 0 in the current text style.
A rubber-band line is attached from the text insertion point to the cursor.
Click to set the height of the text to the length of the rubber-band line.
4 Specify a text rotation angle.

1399

You can enter an angle value or use your pointing device.
5 Enter the text. At the end of each line, press ENTER. Enter more text as
needed.
NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very
large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally
so that you can easily read and edit it.
If you specify another point during this command, the cursor moves to
that point, and you can continue typing. Every time you press ENTER or
specify a point, a new text object is created.
6 Press ENTER on a blank line to end the command.

To create multiline text

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text.
2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the
multiline text object.
If the ribbon is active, the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab displays. If the
ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed.
3 To indent the first line of each paragraph, drag the first-line indent slider
on the ruler. To indent the other lines of each paragraph, drag the
paragraph slider.
4 To set tabs, click the ruler where you want a tab stop.
5 If you want to use a text style other than the default, on the ribbon, click
the Annotate tab, Text panel. Select the desired text style from the
drop-down list.
6 Enter text.
NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very
large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally
so that you can easily read and edit it.
7 To override the current text style, select text as follows:
■

To select one or more letters, click and drag the pointing device over
the characters.

1400 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

■

To select a word, double-click the word.

■

To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph.

8 On the ribbon, make format changes as follows:
■

To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list.

■

To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the
Height box.
NOTE The MText height value is reset to 0 if its default height is not
modified during creation.

■

To format text in a TrueType font with boldface or italics, or to create
underlined or overlined text for any font, click the corresponding
button on the ribbon. SHX fonts do not support boldface or italics.

■

To apply color to selected text, choose a color from the Color list.
Click Other to display the Select Color dialog box.

9 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close
Text Editor.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

Quick Reference
Commands
DDEDIT
Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control
frames.
MLEADER
Creates a multileader object.
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.

Overview of Notes and Labels | 1401

SPELL
Checks spelling in a drawing.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.
TEXT
Creates a single-line text object.

System Variables
DIMASZ
Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads.
DIMLDRBLK
Specifies the arrow type for leaders.

Create Text
You can create text using several methods, depending on your needs.
See also:
■

Use Fields in Text on page 1458

Overview of Creating Text
The text you add to your drawings conveys a variety of information. It may
be a complex specification, title block information, a label, or even part of
the drawing.

Single-Line Text
For short entries that do not require multiple fonts or lines, create single-line
text. Single-line text is most convenient for labels.

Multiline Text
For long, complex entries, create multiline, or paragraph text. Multiline text
consists of any number of text lines or paragraphs that fit within a width you
specify; it can extend vertically to an indefinite length.

1402 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Regardless of the number of lines, each set of paragraphs created in a single
editing session forms a single object, which you can move, rotate, erase, copy,
mirror, or scale.
There are more editing options for multiline text than there are for single-line
text. For example, you can apply underlining, fonts, color, and text height
changes to individual characters, words, or phrases within a paragraph.

Annotative Text
Use annotative on page 2289 text for notes and labels in your drawing. You create
annotative text by using an annotative text style, which sets the height of the
text on the paper.
For more information about creating and working with an annotative text,
see Create Annotative Text on page 1335.
See also:
■

Scale Annotations on page 1324

■

Create Annotative Text on page 1335

To create single-line text

Overview of Creating Text | 1403

NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very
large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally
so that you can easily read and edit it.
If you specify another point during this command, the cursor moves to
that point, and you can continue typing. Every time you press ENTER or
specify a point, a new text object is created.
6 Press ENTER on a blank line to end the command.

To create multiline text

To select one or more letters, click and drag the pointing device over
the characters.

■

To select a word, double-click the word.

■

To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph.

1404 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

8 On the ribbon, make format changes as follows:
■

To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list.

■

To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the
Height box.
NOTE The MText height value is reset to 0 if its default height is not
modified during creation.

■

To apply color to selected text, choose a color from the Color list.
Click Other to display the Select Color dialog box.

9 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close
Text Editor.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

Quick Reference
Commands
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
TEXT
Creates a single-line text object.

System Variables
MTEXTED
Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

Overview of Creating Text | 1405

TEXTED
Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text.
TEXTFILL
Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.
TEXTQLTY
Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.
TEXTSIZE
Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style.
TEXTSTYLE
Sets the name of the current text style.

Create Single-Line Text
You can use single-line text to create one or more lines of text, where each
text line is an independent object that you can relocate, reformat, or otherwise
modify.
Use single-line text (TEXT) to create one or more lines of text, ending each
line when you press Enter. Each text line is an independent object that you
can relocate, reformat, or otherwise modify.
When you create single-line text, you assign a text style and set alignment.
The text style sets the default characteristics of the text object. The alignment
determines what part of the text character aligns with the insertion point. Use
the TEXT command to enter the text in-place, or enter -text to type text at
the Command prompt instead of in-place.
You can insert a field in single-line text. A field is text that is set up to display
data that might change. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field
is displayed.
The text styles used for single-line text are the same as those used for multiline
text. When you create text, you assign an existing style by entering its name
at the Style prompt. If you need to apply formatting to individual words and
characters, use multiline text instead of single-line text.
You can also compress single-line text to fit between points that you specify.
This option stretches or squeezes the text to fill the designated space.
The TEXTED system variable specifies the user interface displayed for editing
single-line text.

1406 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Align Single-Line Text
As you create text, you can align it. That is, you can justify it with one of the
alignment options shown in the following illustrations. Left alignment is the
default. To left-align text, do not enter an option at the Justify prompt.

See also:
■

Use Fields in Text on page 1458

To create single-line text

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Single Line Text.

Create Single-Line Text | 1407

2 Specify the insertion point for the first character. If you press ENTER, the
program locates the new text immediately below the last text object you
created, if any.
3 Specify the height of the text. This prompt is displayed only if text height
is set to 0 in the current text style.
A rubber-band line is attached from the text insertion point to the cursor.
Click to set the height of the text to the length of the rubber-band line.
4 Specify a text rotation angle.
You can enter an angle value or use your pointing device.
5 Enter the text. At the end of each line, press ENTER. Enter more text as
needed.
NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very
large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally
so that you can easily read and edit it.
If you specify another point during this command, the cursor moves to
that point, and you can continue typing. Every time you press ENTER or
specify a point, a new text object is created.
6 Press ENTER on a blank line to end the command.

To specify a text style when you create single-line text

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Single Line Text.
2 Enter s (Style).
3 At the Style Name prompt, enter an existing text style name.
If you first want to see a list of text styles, enter ? and press ENTER twice.
4 Continue creating text.

To align single-line text as you create it

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Single Line Text.
2 Enter j (Justify).

1408 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

3 Enter an alignment option. For example, enter br to align text at its
bottom-right corner.
4 Continue creating text.

Quick Reference
Commands
QTEXT
Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.
TEXT
Creates a single-line text object.

System Variables
FONTALT
Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be
located.
FONTMAP
Specifies the font mapping file to be used.
MIRRTEXT
Controls how MIRROR reflects text.
QTEXTMODE
Controls how text is displayed.
TEXTED
Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text.
TEXTEVAL
Controls how text strings entered with TEXT (using AutoLISP) or with -TEXT
are evaluated.
TEXTFILL
Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.

Create Single-Line Text | 1409

TEXTQLTY
Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.
TEXTSIZE
Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style.
TEXTSTYLE
Sets the name of the current text style.

Create Multiline Text
A multiline text (mtext) object includes one or more paragraphs of text that
can be manipulated as a single object.

Overview of Multiline Text
You can create a multiline text (mtext) object by entering or importing text.
You can create one or more paragraphs of multiline text (mtext) in the In-Place
Text Editor. You can also type text at the Command prompt if you use -MTEXT.
You can insert text from a file saved in ASCII or RTF format.
Before entering or importing text, you specify opposite corners of a text
bounding box that defines the width of the paragraphs in the multiline text
object. The length of the multiline text object depends on the amount of text,
not the length of the bounding box. You can use grips to move or rotate a
multiline text object.
NOTE Multiline text objects and imported text files are limited to 256 KB in size.
The In-Place Text Editor allows you to adjust the bounding box that defines
the size of the multiline text object, as well as create and edit tabs and indents
on the ruler along the top. The editor is transparent, as you create text, you
can see whether the text overlaps other objects.
To turn off transparency while you work, right-click in the In-Place Text Editor
and click Opaque Background from the shortcut menu. You can also make
the background of the finished multiline text object opaque and set its color.
You can also insert fields in multiline text. A field is text that is set up to
display data that might change. When the field is updated, the latest value of
the field is displayed.

1410 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Text Style
Most characteristics of the text are controlled by the text style, which sets the
default font and other options, such as line spacing, justification, and color.
You can use the current text style or select a new one. The STANDARD text
style is the default.
Within the multiline text object, you can override the current text style by
applying formatting such as underlining, boldface, and different fonts to
individual characters. You can also create stacked text, such as fractions or
geometric tolerances and insert special characters, including Unicode
characters, for TrueType fonts.
NOTE Not all SHX and TrueType text fonts support Unicode characters.

Text Properties
In the Properties palette, you can view and change the object properties of a
multiline text object, including properties that apply specifically to text.
■

Justification determines where text is inserted with respect to the bounding
box and sets the direction of text flow as text is entered.

■

Line space options control the amount of space between lines of text.

■

Width defines the width of the bounding box and therefore controls where
the text wraps to a new line.

■

Background inserts an opaque background so that objects under the text
are masked.

To create multiline text

Create Multiline Text | 1411

5 If you want to use a text style other than the default, on the ribbon, click
the Annotate tab, Text panel. Select the desired text style from the
drop-down list.
6 Enter text.
NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very
large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally
so that you can easily read and edit it.
7 To override the current text style, select text as follows:
■

To select one or more letters, click and drag the pointing device over
the characters.

■

To select a word, double-click the word.

■

To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph.

8 On the ribbon, make format changes as follows:
■

To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list.

■

To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the
Height box.
NOTE The MText height value is reset to 0 if its default height is not
modified during creation.

■

To apply color to selected text, choose a color from the Color list.
Click Other to display the Select Color dialog box.

9 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close
Text Editor.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

1412 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

To insert symbols or special characters in multiline text
1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the
MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place
Text Editor is displayed.
2 On either the ribbon contextual tab or expanded toolbar, click Symbol.
3 Click one of the options on the menu, or click Other to display the
Character Map dialog box.
To access the Character Map dialog box, you must have charmap.exe
®
®
installed. See Microsoft Windows Help for information about adding
programs to your system.
4 In the Character Map dialog box, select a font.
5 Select a character, and use one of the following methods:
■

To insert a single character, drag the selected character into the editor.

■

To insert multiple characters, click Select to add each character to the
Characters to Copy box. When you have all the characters you want,
click Copy. Right-click in the editor. Click Paste.

6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close
Text Editor.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

To add an opaque background or fill to a multiline text object
1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the
MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place
Text Editor is displayed.
2 On the ribbon contextual tab, click Background Mask. In the editor,
right-click. Click Background Mask.
3 In the Background Mask dialog box, select Use Background Mask.
4 Enter a value for Border Offset Factor.

Create Multiline Text | 1413

The value is based on the text height. A factor of 1.0 exactly fits the
multiline text object. A factor of 1.5 (the default) extends the background
by 0.5 times the text height.
5 Under Fill Color, do one of the following:
■

Select the Use Drawing Background Color option.

■

Select a color for the background, or click Select Color to open the
Select Color dialog box.

6 Click OK to return to the editor.
7 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close
Text Editor.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

The opaque background is applied when you exit the editor.

To change the Windows font smoothing setting to improve visibility of text
in the Multiline Text editor
1 On the Windows desktop, right-click. Click Properties.
2 In the Display Properties dialog box, click the Appearance tab.
3 Click Effects.
4 In the Effects dialog box, click the Use the Following Method to Smooth
Edges of Screen Fonts to clear the setting.
5 Click OK to exit the Effects dialog box.
6 Click OK to exit the Display Properties dialog box.

Quick Reference
Commands
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.

1414 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

QTEXT
Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

System Variables
MTEXTCOLUMN
Sets the default column setting for an mtext object.
MTEXTED
Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
MTEXTFIXED
Sets the display size and orientation of multiline text in a specified text editor.
MTEXTTOOLBAR
Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar.
MTJIGSTRING
Sets the content of the sample text displayed at the cursor location when
the MTEXT command is started.
QTEXTMODE
Controls how text is displayed.
TEXTFILL
Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.
TEXTQLTY
Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.
TEXTSIZE
Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style.
TEXTSTYLE
Sets the name of the current text style.

Create Multiline Text | 1415

Justify Multiline Text
Justification of multiline text objects controls both text alignment and text
flow relative to the text insertion point.
Justification controls both text alignment and text flow relative to the text
insertion point. Text is left-justified and right-justified with respect to the
boundary rectangle that defines the text width. Text flows from the insertion
point, which can be at the middle, the top, or the bottom of the resulting text
object.
There are nine justification settings for multiline text.
If a single word is longer than the width of the paragraph, the word will extend
beyond the paragraph boundary.

To justify multiline text

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.

1416 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

2 Select the multiline text object.
3 On the Properties palette, select one of the Justification options.
4 Click outside the Properties palette.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Format Characters Within Multiline Text
You can override the text style and apply different formatting to individual
words and characters within multiline text.
The format changes affect only the text you select; the current text style is
not changed.
You can specify a different font and text height and apply boldface, italics,
underlining, overlining, and color. You can also set an obliquing angle, change
the space between characters, and make characters wider or narrower. The
Remove Formatting option on the In-Place Text Editor shortcut menu resets
the character attributes of selected text to the current text style and text color.
The text height setting specifies the height of capitalized text. For more
information about how height is calculated, see MTEXT.
See also:
■

Work with Text Styles on page 1469

■

Use an Alternate Text Editor on page 1497

To format characters in multiline text
1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the
MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place
Text Editor is displayed.

Create Multiline Text | 1417

2 Select the text you want to format:
■

To select one or more letters, click and drag the pointing device over
the characters.

■

To select a word, double-click the word.

■

To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph.

3 On either the ribbon contextual tab or toolbar, make format changes as
follows:
■

To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list.

■

To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the
Height box.

■

To apply color to selected text, select a color from the Color list. Click
Other to display the Select Color dialog box.

■

To set an obliquing angle for the text, enter a value between -85 and
85. A positive value slants text to the right. A negative value slants
text to the left.

■

To change letter spacing in the selected text, enter a new value.

■

To change the width of characters in the selected text, enter a new
value.

4 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close
Text Editor.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

1418 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Quick Reference
Commands
DDEDIT
Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control
frames.
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

System Variables
TEXTFILL
Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.
TEXTSTYLE
Sets the name of the current text style.

Create Lists in Multiline Text
You can create bulleted lists, lettered or numbered lists, or simple outlines in
multiline text.
Lines of multiline text can be formatted as a list. When you add or delete an
item, or move an item up or down a level, the list numbering automatically
adjusts. You can remove and reapply list formatting with the same method
as used in most text editors.

Use Automatic List Formatting
By default, list formatting is applied to all text that looks like a list. Text that
meets all the following criteria is considered to be a list:
■

The line begins with one or more letters or numbers or a symbol.

■

The letters or numbers is followed by punctuation.

Create Multiline Text | 1419

■

A space after the punctuation is created by pressing Tab.

■

The text following the space is ended by Enter or Shift+Enter.

NOTE If you do not want list formatting applied to all text that fits the criteria,
clear the Allow Bullets and Lists option. (Right-click in the In-Place Text Editor,
click Bullets and Lists ➤ Allow Bullets and Lists.) When Allow Bullets and Lists is
not checked, you cannot create new formatted lists in the multiline text object.
To create a list, use one of the following methods:
■

Apply list formatting to new or selected text.

■

Use Auto-list (on by default) and type the elements of a list.

■

With Auto-list off, type the elements of a list and close and reopen the
editor to convert the text to a list.

Apply List Formatting
When you apply list formatting, you can specify bullets, uppercase or lowercase
letters, or numbers. Default settings are used for the type of list you choose.
Letters or numbers are followed by a period. Nested lists use a double bullet,
letter, or number. Items are indented based on the tab stops on the ruler in
the In-Place Text Editor.

Use Auto-list to Type a List
When Auto-list is on, you can create a list as you type. You can use letters,
numbers, or symbols.
For example, in the editor, enter \U+25CB, press Tab, and then enter some
text. This creates a empty circle style bullet.
Not all symbols are available from the character map for a particular text font.
However, if you specify the Unicode text directly (\U+25CB in this case), you
can always get the bullet format of your choice.
NOTE Press Tab after you enter the Unicode text or symbol, or it will remain a
separate character.
You can also paste a symbol from the Character Map dialog box

1420 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

The following characters can be used as punctuation after the number or letter
when you type a list but cannot be used as bullets:
Character

Description

Period

Colon

)

Close parenthesis

Close angle bracket

]

Close square bracket

}

Close curly bracket

Paste a List from Another Document
If you copy a nested bulleted list (a list within a list) from a word processor
and paste the list into a multiline text, the bullets that are displayed as empty
circles might not be formatted like other bullets in multiline text. This is
because the bullet might be a letter, such as o, instead of a bullet for nested
bulleted lists. You can remove formatting from the nested list and reapply to
change the bullets to double bullets.

To format multiline text as a list

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text.
2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the
multiline text object.
3 To expand the Text Formatting toolbar, click Options button ➤ Show
Options.
4 If you are converting multiline text to a list, select the paragraphs.
NOTE List formatting is only available when the Allow Bullets and Lists option
is checked (the default).

Create Multiline Text | 1421

5 On the expanded toolbar, click Numbering, Bullets, or Uppercase Letters.
■

Numbering. Uses numbers with periods for the items in a list.

■

Bullets. Uses a bullet or other character for the items in a list.

■

Uppercase Letters. Uses uppercase letters with periods for the items
in a list. If the list has more items than the alphabet has letters, the
sequence continues by using double letters. To use lowercase letters,
right-click in the editor. Click Bullets and Lists ➤ Lettered ➤
Lowercase.

6 If you are creating new list items, enter the text.
7 To end the list, press ENTER to move to a new line. Click the button that
you clicked to start the list.
8 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close
Text Editor.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

To remove list formatting from multiline text
1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the
MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place
Text Editor is displayed.
2 Select the list items.
3 To expand the Text Formatting toolbar, click Options button ➤ Show
Options.
4 On the expanded toolbar, click the active list button to make it inactive:
Numbering, Bullets, or Uppercase Letters.
NOTE If the list uses lowercase letters, click Uppercase Letters to convert the
list to uppercase. Then click Uppercase Letters to make it inactive.

1422 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

5 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close
Text Editor.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

To create a lettered or numbered list in multiline text as you type

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text.
2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the
multiline text object.
3 To expand the Text Formatting toolbar, click Options button ➤ Show
Options.
4 Click Bullets and Lists. Verify that Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and
Lists are checked.
5 Enter a letter or a number and a period (or other punctuation).
The following characters can be used as punctuation after letters and
numbers: period (.), colon (:), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket
(>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}).
6 Press TAB.
7 Enter the text of the list item. Press ENTER to move to the next item, or
press SHIFT+ENTER to add a plain paragraph before the next item.
The item is automatically lettered or numbered in sequence.
8 Press ENTER twice to end the list.
9 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

■

Click the Close Editor icon in the Multiline Text panel.

Create Multiline Text | 1423

To create a bulleted list in multiline text as you type

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text.
2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the
multiline text object.
3 In the Options panel, click the Options

icon.

4 Click Bullets and Lists. Verify that Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and
Lists are selected (tick mark).
5 Start a line of text by entering \U+2022 (the Unicode string for a bullet)
or by selecting a bullet character or another symbol.
NOTE The following characters cannot be used as bullets: period (.), colon
(:), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket (>), close square bracket (]), and
close curly bracket (}).
6 Alternatively, click Options ➤ Symbol ➤ Other.
The Character Map dialog box appears.
7 Double-click a symbol to copy it to the clipboard.
8 Close the Character Map dialog box.
9 Paste the symbol to the drawing, and press the up-arrow and End key to
return the cursor to the same line.
10 Press TAB.
11 Enter the text of the list item. Press ENTER to move to the next item, or
press SHIFT+ENTER to add a plain paragraph before the next item.
The bullet character is automatically added to the next item.
12 Press ENTER twice to end the list.
13 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close
Text Editor.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

1424 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

To move a list item in multiline text down a level
1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the
MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place
Text Editor is displayed.
2 Place the cursor at the beginning of a list item and press TAB.
The item moves down one level and begins a nested list.
3 Press ENTER to start the next item at the same level, or press SHIFT+TAB
to move the item up a level.
4 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close
Text Editor.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

To separate an existing list
1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the
MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place
Text Editor is displayed.
2 Select a sequence of list items or place the cursor at the beginning of the
item where you want to start the new list.
3 Right-click in the editor. Click Bullets and Lists ➤ Restart.
The selected items are renumbered as a separate sequence. If you select
items in the middle of a list, unselected items below the selected items
also become part of the new list.
4 To continue the original list below the new list, select the first item below
the new list.
5 Right-click in the editor. Click Bullets and Lists ➤ Continue.
The selected item and the items following it are renumbered to continue
the previous list.
6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

Click OK on the toolbar.

Create Multiline Text | 1425

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

To convert the lists in a multiline text object to plain text
1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the
MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place
Text Editor is displayed.
2 Right-click in the editor. Click Bullets and Lists. Remove the check mark
next to Allow Bullets and Lists.
The plain text lists retain their bullets, numbers, or letters. If you add an
item to the list, the number or letter sequence does not change.

System Variables
TEXTFILL
Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.
TEXTQLTY
Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.

1426 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Indent Multiline Text and Use Tabs
You can control how paragraphs are indented in a multiline text (mtext)
object. The ruler in the In-Place Text Editor shows the settings for the current
paragraph.
Tabs and indents that you set before you start to enter text apply to the whole
multiline text object. To apply different tabs and indents to individual
paragraphs, click in a single paragraph or select multiple paragraphs and then
change the settings.
Sliders on the ruler show indentation relative to the left side of the bounding
box. The top slider indents the first line of the paragraph, and the bottom
slider indents the other lines of the paragraph.
The long tick marks on the ruler show the default tab stops. If you click the
ruler to set your own tabs, the ruler displays a small, L-shaped marker at each
custom tab stop. You can delete a custom tab stop by dragging the marker off
the ruler.

To create paragraphs with hanging indentation
1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the
MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place
Text Editor is displayed.
2 Select the paragraphs you want to indent.
3 On the ruler, slide the top indent marker to where you want the first line
of the paragraphs to start.
NOTE The ruler displays the tabs and indents that are set for the selected
paragraphs or, if no text is selected, the paragraph where the cursor is located.
The default tab stops are the long tick marks on the ruler. To set a custom
tab stop, click the ruler where you want the tab stop.

Create Multiline Text | 1427

4 Slide the bottom indent marker to where you want the other lines of the
paragraphs to start.
This step indents turnover lines in paragraphs that are more than one
line long.
5 To change the indentation, select the paragraphs you want to change,
click the ruler to set new tab stops, if needed, and move the indent
markers.
6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close
Text Editor.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

System Variables
TEXTFILL
Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.
TEXTQLTY
Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.

1428 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Specify the Line Spacing Within Multiline Text
Line spacing for multiline text is the distance between the baseline (bottom)
of one line of text and the baseline of the next line of text. The line space
factor applies to the entire multiline text object, not to selected lines.
You can set the spacing increment to a multiple of single line spacing, or as
an absolute distance. Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text
characters.
The default line space style, At Least, automatically increases line spacing to
accommodate characters that are too large to fit the line spacing you set for
the multiline text object. Use the other line space style, Exactly, to line up
text in tables.
To ensure that line spacing is identical in multiple multiline text objects, use
Exactly and set the Line Space Factor to the same value in each multiline text
object.
NOTE Using Exactly can cause text in lines located above or below lines with large
font characters to overlap the larger characters.

To change the line spacing of multiline text

1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
2 Select the multiline text object you want to edit.
3 In the Properties palette, for Line Space Style, select one of the following:
■

At Least. Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height of
the largest character in the line. More space is added between lines
of text with taller characters. This is the default setting.

■

Exactly. Forces the line spacing to be the same size for all lines of text
regardless of format differences such as font or text height.

4 Change the line spacing by entering a new value for either of the
following options. The two line spacing options provide different ways
to set the same thing:
■

Line Space Factor. Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single-line
spacing. Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters.

Create Multiline Text | 1429

■

Line Space Distance. Sets the line spacing to an absolute value
measured in drawing units. Valid values must be between 0.0833 and
1.3333.

NOTE After you exit the Properties palette, the value of the other line spacing
option is updated to correspond with the line spacing value that you entered.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

System Variables
TSPACEFAC
Controls the multiline text line-spacing distance measured as a factor of text
height.
TSPACETYPE
Controls the type of line spacing used in multiline text.

Create Stacked Characters Within Multiline Text
Characters representing fractions and tolerances can be formatted to conform
to several standards.
Stacked text refers to the fraction and tolerance formats applied to characters
within multiline text object and multileaders.

1430 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

You use special characters to indicate how selected text should be stacked.
■

Slash (/) stacks text vertically, separated by a horizontal line.

■

Pound sign (#) stacks text diagonally, separated by a diagonal line.

■

Carat (^) creates a tolerance stack, which is stacked vertically and not
separated by a line.

To stack characters manually within the In-Place Text Editor, select the text
to be formatted, including the special stacking character, and right-click. From
the shortcut menu, click Stack.

Stack Numeric and Tolerance Characters Automatically
You can specify that numeric characters entered before and after a slash, pound
sign, or carat will stack automatically. For example, if you enter 1#3 followed
by a nonnumeric character or space, the AutoStack Properties dialog box is
displayed by default, and you can change the settings in the Stack Properties
dialog box to specify your formatting preferences.
The automatic stacking feature applies only to numeric characters immediately
before and after the slash, pound sign, and carat. For tolerance stacking, the
+, -, and decimal character also stack automatically.

Create Multiline Text | 1431

See also:
■

Work with Text Styles on page 1469

■

Use an Alternate Text Editor on page 1497

To create stacked text

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text.
2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the
multiline text object.
3 In either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab or In-Place Text Editor, set
text style and other multiline text properties as needed.
4 Enter the text you want to stack separated by one of the following
characters:
■

Slash (/) stacks text vertically, separated by a horizontal line.

■

Pound sign (#) stacks text diagonally, separated by a diagonal line.

■

Carat (^) creates a tolerance stack, which is not separated by a line.

If you enter numbers separated by stack characters and then enter a
nonnumeric character or press SPACEBAR, the AutoStack Properties dialog
box is displayed.
5 In the AutoStack Properties dialog box, you can choose to automatically
stack numbers (not nonnumeric text) and to remove leading blanks. You
can also specify whether the slash character creates a diagonal fraction
or creates a vertical fraction. If you do not want to use AutoStack, click
Cancel to exit the dialog box.
6 Select the text that you want to stack, and click the Stack button on the
toolbar.
7 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

Click OK on the toolbar.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

1432 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

To change stack properties
1 Double-click the multiline text object you want to edit.
2 In either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab (Formatting tab drop-down)
or In-Place Text Editor, select the stacked text.
3 Right-click in the editor. Click Properties.
4 In the Stack Properties dialog box, change settings as needed.
5 To set properties for automatic stacking, click Autostack.
6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

Click OK on the toolbar.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

To unstack text
1 Double-click the multiline text object you want to edit.
2 In either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab (Formatting tab drop-down)
or In-Place Text Editor, select the stacked text.
3 Click Stack on the Text Formatting toolbar.
4 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

Click OK on the toolbar.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

Quick Reference
Commands
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.

Create Multiline Text | 1433

System Variables
TSTACKALIGN
Controls the vertical alignment of stacked text.
TSTACKSIZE
Controls the percentage of stacked text fraction height relative to selected
text's current height.

Create and Edit Columns in Multiline Text
You can create and edit multiple columns using the In-Place Text Editor
column options and column grips.
Multiple columns can be created and edited with the In-Place Text Editor and
through grip editing. Editing columns using grips allows you the flexibility
of seeing the changes as you make them.
Columns follow a few rules. All columns have equal width and equal gutters.
A gutter is the space between columns. The height of columns remains constant
unless more text than the column can accommodate is added, or you manually
move the editing grip to adjust the column height.

Editing Columns in the In-Place Text Editor
When you are working with columns in the In-Place Text Editor, the columns
will be in a frame. The ruler bar spans across all columns, but is only active
for the current column.

Adding text to a column with an arbitrary height will not increase the column
height even if text is already filling the column. Text will flow into another
column.
You can also insert a column break to force text to start flowing into the next
column. Anytime a column break is inserted, it is assumed that the current

1434 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

height of the column is fixed. To delete the break, highlight it and delete or
or use the Backspace key right after the break.

Editing Columns in the Properties Palette
You will be able to select Static or Dynamic columns, turn off columns and
change column and gutter width through the Properties palette. Changing
column width in the palette will exhibit results similar to changing width
using grips. The palette is the only place that you can also change gutter
setting.

To create multiple columns in the In-Place Text Editor
1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the
MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place
Text Editor is displayed.
2 In the In-Place Text Editor, select a column option and suboption from
columns list. You have a choice between Dynamic or Static columns.
You have two suboptions with Dynamic Columns – Auto height or
Manual height. Static Columns allows you to choose the number of
columns.
3 Adjust the column height by moving the arrows located on the bottom
left of the first column.
NOTE The arrows on the ruler on the upper right side only adjust gutter
width, not column width.

To adjust columns using grips
1 Select an area outside the mtext object. The In-Place Text Editor toolbar
will disappear.
2 Click once in the text area and grips will appear.
Grips control the location of the mtext object, the gutter width, and
vertical and horizontal movement of colmns.
The following illustration demonstrates how grips are used with Dynamic
Columns - Manual Height.

Create and Edit Columns in Multiline Text | 1435

The following illustration demonstrates how grips are used with Static
Columns.

1436 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

NOTE In general, grips only update the mtext object after the mouse button is
released.

Quick Reference
Commands
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.

System Variables
MTEXTCOLUMN
Sets the default column setting for an mtext object.

Create and Edit Columns in Multiline Text | 1437

Import Text from External Files
You can insert TXT or RTF text files created in word processors into your
drawing by either importing the text or dragging a file icon from Windows
Explorer.
Importing TXT or RTF files from other sources gives you the most flexibility.
For example, you can create a text file of standard notes that you include in
drawings. The imported text becomes a multiline text object, which you can
edit and reformat. Text imported from a TXT file inherits the current text
style. Text imported from an RTF file inherits the current text style name, but
retains its original fonts and format. Imported text files are limited to 256 KB
and must have a file extension of .txt or .rtf.
If you drag a text file into a drawing, text width is determined by line breaks
and carriage returns in the original document. When you drag an RTF file into
a drawing, the text is inserted as an OLE object.
If you use the Clipboard to paste text from another application, the text
becomes an OLE object. If you use the Clipboard to paste text from another
file, the text is inserted as a block reference, and it retains its original text
style.
See also:
■

Import OLE Objects on page 1826

To import text files

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text.
2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the
multiline text object.
3 Right-click in the editor. Click Import Text.
The size limit for an imported file is 256 KB.
4 In the Select File dialog box, double-click the file you want to import, or
select the file. Click Open.
The text is inserted at the cursor location.
5 Change the text as needed.

1438 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

Click OK on the toolbar.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press Ctrl+Enter.

To insert a text file using the drag-and-drop method
1 Open Windows Explorer, but make sure it does not fill the screen.
2 Display the folder that contains the TXT or RTF file you want.
3 Drag the TXT or RTF file icon onto the drawing. TXT files are inserted as
multiline text objects using the current text style. RTF files are inserted
as OLE objects.

Quick Reference
Commands
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.

Create Leaders
You can create, modify and add content to a leader object.

Overview of Leader Objects
A leader object is a line or a spline with an arrowhead at one end and a
multiline text object or block at the other.
In some cases, a short horizontal line, called a landing, connects text or blocks
and feature control frames to the leader line.
The landing and leader line are associated with the multiline text object or
block, so when the landing is relocated, the content and leader line move
along with it.

Create Leaders | 1439

When associative dimensioning is turned on and object snaps are used to
locate the leader arrowhead, the leader is associated with the object to which
the arrowhead is attached. If the object is relocated, the arrowhead is relocated,
and the landing stretches accordingly.
NOTE The leader object should not be confused with the leader line that is
automatically generated as part of a dimension line.

To create a leader with straight lines

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader.
2 At the Command prompt, enter o to select options.
3 Enter l to specify leaders.
4 Enter t to specify the leader type.
5 Enter s to specify straight leaders.
6 In the drawing, click a start point for the leader head.
7 Click an end point for the leader.
8 Enter your MTEXT content.
9 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK.

1440 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Quick Reference
Commands
LEADER
Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature.
MLEADER
Creates a multileader object.
QLEADER
Creates a leader and leader annotation.

System Variables
DIMASSOC
Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are
exploded.
DIMGAP
Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks
to accommodate dimension text.
DIMLDRBLK
Specifies the arrow type for leaders.
MLEADERSCALE
Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects.

Create and Modify Leaders
A leader object typically consists of an arrowhead, an optional horizontal
landing, a leader line or curve, and either a multiline text object or block.
You can create a leader line from any point or feature in a drawing and control
its appearance as you draw. Leaders can be straight line segments or smooth
spline curves.

Create and Modify Leaders | 1441

A multileader object, or mleader, comprises a leader and a note. It can be
created arrowhead first, tail first, or content first. If a multileader style has
been used, then the multileader can be created from that style
Multileader objects can contain multiple leader lines, each of which can have
one or more segments, so that one note can point to multiple objects in your
drawing. You can modify the properties of leader segment in the Properties
palette. Add leaders to or remove leaders from a multileader object with
MLEADEREDIT or choose options from the leader grip menus (see Modify
Leaders Using Grips on page 1449).
Annotative multileaders containing multiple leader segments can have different
head points in each scale representation. Horizontal landings and arrowheads
can have different sizes, and landing gaps can have different distances,
depending on the scale representation. The appearance of the horizontal
landing within a multileader, as well as the type of leader line (straight or
spline) and number of leader segments will remain the same in all scale
representations. For more information, see Create Annotative Leaders and
Multileaders on page 1344.

Arrange Leaders
Multileaders can be arranged to add order and consistency to your drawing.
Multileader objects with blocks as content can be collected and attached to
one landing line. Using MLEADERCOLLECT, multileaders can be collected
horizontally, vertically, or within a specified area depending on your drawing
needs.

1442 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Multileader objects can be sorted evenly along a specified line. Using
MLEADERALIGN, selected multileaders can be aligned and evenly spaced as
specified.

Associate Leaders with Objects
When associative dimensioning is turned on (DIMASSOC system variable),
the leader arrowhead can be associated with a location on an object using an
object snap. If the object is relocated, the arrowhead remains attached to the
object and the leader line stretches, but the multiline text remains in place.
See also:
■

Create Annotative Leaders and Multileaders on page 1344

■

Modify Leaders Using Grips on page 1449

To create a leader with straight lines

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader.
2 At the Command prompt, enter o to select options.
3 Enter l to specify leaders.
4 Enter t to specify the leader type.

Create and Modify Leaders | 1443

5 Enter s to specify straight leaders.
6 In the drawing, click a start point for the leader head.
7 Click an end point for the leader.
8 Enter your MTEXT content.
9 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK.

To create a leader attached to block content at an angle

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style.
2 In the Multileader Style Manager, click New.
3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, specify a name for the
new multileader style.
4 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, Leader Structure tab, under
Landing Settings, uncheck Automatically Include Landing.
5 On the Content tab, next to Multileader Type, choose Block content.
6 Under Block Options, next to Attachment, choose one of the following:
■

Center Extents: Attaches the leader line to the center extent of the
block content

■

Insertion Point: Attaches the leader line to the block content from
any point you specify

7 Click OK.
8 In the Multileader Style Manager, click Close.
9 Do one of the following:
■

Create a multileader object

■

Apply the new multileader style to an existing multileader object

To create a spline leader with text or a block

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader.

1444 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

2 At the Command prompt, enter o to select options.
3 Enter l to specify leaders.
4 Enter t to specify the leader type.
5 Enter p to specify a spline leader.
6 In the drawing, click a start point for the leader head.
7 Click the end point for the leader.
8 Enter your MTEXT content.
9 In the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK.

To edit leader text
1 Double-click the text you want to edit.
If the ribbon is active, the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab is displayed. IF
the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed for both
single-line text and multiline text. The Text Formatting toolbar is not
available for single-line text.
2 Edit the text.

To create multiple leaders from the same annotation
1 Select the multileader.
2 Do one of the following:
■

Hover over the landing grip, and choose Add Leader from the grip
menu.

■

Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Add Leader.

3 Specify the endpoint for the new leader.

Create and Modify Leaders | 1445

To remove leaders from an annotation
1 Select the multileader.
2 Do one of the following:
■

Hover over a leader endpoint grip, and choose Remove Leader from
the grip menu.

■

On the Multileader toolbar, click Remove Leader, and then select the
leaders you want to remove. Press ENTER.

To align and space leaders

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Align.
2 Select the multileaders to be aligned. Press ENTER.
3 Specify a starting point in the drawing to begin the alignment. The point
you select is the position of the landing head.
4 If you want to change the spacing of the multileader objects, enter s and
specify one of the following spacing methods:
■

Distribute. Spaces content evenly between two selected points.

■

Use Current. Uses the current spacing between multileaders.

■

Make Parallel. Places content so that each of the last line segments
in the selected multileaders are parallel.

5 In the drawing click a point to end the alignment.

To collect multiple notes to be attached to a single landing

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Collect.
Multileader toolbar, click Collect Multileaders.

On the

2 Select multileaders in the order you want them to be collected. The last
multileader selected retains its landing. Press ENTER.

1446 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

To create a landing line with multiple segments

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style.
2 In the Multileader Style Manager, click New to create a new multileader
style.
3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, specify a name for the
new multileader style.
4 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, select the Leader Structure
tab.
5 In the Constraints group box, select the Maximum Leader Points check
box. In the box to the right, specify a maximum number of points to be
prompted for upon creation of a new multileader. Click OK.
6 In the Multileader Style Manager, click Set Current to apply the new
multileader style to new multileaders that you create.

To change the properties of a multileader object
1 Press CTRL and select a segment of the leader line.
2 Right-click and then select Properties from the shortcut menu.
3 In the Properties palette, specify the properties of the segment.

Create and Modify Leaders | 1447

MLEADERCOLLECT
Organizes selected multileaders that contain blocks into rows or columns,
and displays the result with a single leader.
MLEADEREDIT
Adds leader lines to, or removes leader lines from, a multileader object.
MLEADERSTYLE
Creates and modifies multileader styles.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

System Variables
DIMASSOC
Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are
exploded.
DIMASZ
Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads.
DIMCLRD
Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines.
DIMGAP
Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks
to accommodate dimension text.
DIMLDRBLK
Specifies the arrow type for leaders.
DIMSCALE
Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify
sizes, distances, or offsets.
DIMTAD
Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line.
DIMTXTDIRECTION
Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text.

1448 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

MLEADERSCALE
Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects.

Modify Leaders Using Grips
You can make many leader edits directly using multi-functional grips. You
can add and remove leaders, add and remove vertices, lengthen or move the
landing line, or move the leader text.
Hover over a grip to access the option you want.

■

From the Landing grip, you can choose:
■

Stretch to move the leader landing.

■

Lengthen Landing to extend the Landing line.

■

Add Leader to add one or more leader lines.

From a leader endpoint grip, you can choose:
■

Stretch to move the leader endpoint.

■

Add Vertex to add a vertex to the leader line.

■

Remove Leader to delete the selected leader line.

From a leader vertex grip, you can choose:
■

Stretch to move the vertex.

■

Add Vertex to add a vertex on the leader line.

■

Remove Vertex to delete the vertex.

Modify Leaders Using Grips | 1449

See also:
■

Modify Leaders Using Grips on page 1449

To modify leaders using grips
1 Select the multileader you want to modify.
2 Hover over a leader endpoint grip, a vertex grip, or the landing grip.
3 Click the option you want.
4 Click to specify a location for the action you’re performing.

Quick Reference
Commands
DDEDIT
Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control
frames.
MLEADER
Creates a multileader object.
MLEADERALIGN
Aligns and spaces selected multileader objects.
MLEADERCOLLECT
Organizes selected multileaders that contain blocks into rows or columns,
and displays the result with a single leader.
MLEADEREDIT
Adds leader lines to, or removes leader lines from, a multileader object.
MLEADERSTYLE
Creates and modifies multileader styles.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

1450 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Work with Leader Styles
The appearance of a leader is controlled by its multileader style. You can use
the default multileader style, STANDARD, or create your own multileader
styles.
The multileader style can specify formatting for landing lines, leader lines,
arrowheads, and content. For example, the STANDARD multileader style uses
a straight leader line with a closed filled arrowhead and multiline text content.

Work with Leader Styles | 1451

NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as either content or arrowheads in
multileader objects.
Once a multileader style has been defined, you can set it as the current
multileader style to be used when the MLEADER command is invoked.

To define a leader style

Type. Determines the type of landing. You can choose a straight
landing, spline landing, or no landing.

■

Color. Determines the color of the landing.

■

Linetype. Determines the linetype of the landing.

■

Lineweight. Determines the lineweight of the landing.

5 Specify a symbol and size for the multileader arrowhead.
6 On the Leader Structure tab, select or clear the following options:
■

Maximum Leader Points. Specifies a maximum number of points for
the multileader landing line.

■

First and Second Segment Angles. Specifies the angle of the first and
second points in the landing.

■

Landing - Keep Horizontal. Attaches a horizontal landing to the
multileader content.

■

Set Landing Distance. Determines the fixed distance for the
multileader landing line.

1452 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

7 On the Content tab, specify either text or block content for the
multileader. If the multileader object will contain text content, then
select or clear the following options:
■

Default Text. Sets default text for the multileader content. A field can
be inserted here.

■

Text Style. Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text.
Currently loaded text styles are displayed.

■

Text Angle. Specifies the rotation angle of the multileader text.

■

Text Color. Specifies the color of the multileader text.

■

Paper Height. Sets the height of the text as it will display in paper
space.

■

Frame Text. Frames the multileader text content with a text box.

■

Attachment. Controls the attachment of the landing to the multileader
text.

■

Landing Gap. Specifies the distance between the landing and the
multileader text.

If block content is specified, then select or clear the following options:
■

Source Block. Specifies the block used for multileader content.

■

Attachment. Specifies the way the block is attached to the multileader
object. You can attach the block by specifying the extents, the
insertion point, or the center point of the block.

■

Color. Specifies the color of the multileader block content. ByBlock
is selected by default.

8 Click OK.

To apply a leader style to an existing leader
1 Select the multileader to which you want to apply a new style.
2 On the ribbon, click the Annotate tab, Multileaders panel. Select the
desired multileader style from the drop-down list.
3 To create a new style, click the Multileader Style icon.

Work with Leader Styles | 1453

Quick Reference
Commands
MLEADERSTYLE
Creates and modifies multileader styles.

System Variables
CMLEADERSTYLE
Sets the name of the current multileader style.

Add Content to a Leader
Leaders can contain multiline text or blocks to label parts of your drawing.

Leaders Containing Multiline Text
Leaders can contain multiline text as content. Text can be inserted by default
when creating a leader style. Text style, color, height, and alignment can be
applied and modified in leader annotations. You can also offset a multiline
text object by specifying a landing gap distance in the current leader style.
You can create annotative multileaders with text as content. The text content
will be scaled according to the specified scale representation. Width,
justification, attachment, and rotation settings for text content can be different
depending on the specified scale representation. Actual text content cannot
change with the scale representation.
There are several options for placing multiline text as content in a leader
object.
Top of top line

Middle of top line

1454 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Bottom of top line

Underline top line

Middle of text

Middle of bottom line

Bottom of bottom line

Underline bottom line

Underline all text

Leaders Containing Blocks
Multileaders can contain blocks as content by applying a multileader style
that references a block in your drawing.

Add Content to a Leader | 1455

NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as either content or arrowheads in
multileader objects.
Blocks can be connected to a multileader by attaching the landing to a selected
insertion point on the block. You can also connect a multileader to a center
point on the selected block.
You can create annotative multileaders with blocks as content. The block
content will be scaled according to the specified scale representation. Any
attributes within the block content will not change with the scale
representation. Non-annotative multileader objects can be scaled using the
MLEADERSCALE system variable.
See also:
■

Use Fields in Text on page 1458

Quick Reference
Commands
DDEDIT
Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control
frames.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
MLEADER
Creates a multileader object.
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
PURGE
Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.

1456 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

QTEXT
Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects.
SPELL
Checks spelling in a drawing.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.
TEXT
Creates a single-line text object.

System Variables
DIMGAP
Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks
to accommodate dimension text.
FONTALT
Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be
located.
FONTMAP
Specifies the font mapping file to be used.
MLEADERSCALE
Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects.
MTEXTED
Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
QTEXTMODE
Controls how text is displayed.
TEXTFILL
Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.
TEXTQLTY
Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.

Add Content to a Leader | 1457

Use Fields in Text
A field is updatable text that is set up to display data that may change during
the life cycle of the drawing. When the field is updated, the latest value of the
field is displayed.

Insert Fields
A field is text that contains instructions to display data that you expect to
change during the life cycle of the drawing.
When a field is updated, the latest data is displayed. For example, the value
of the FileName field is the name of the file. If the file name changes, the new
file name is displayed when the field is updated.
Fields can be inserted in any kind of text (except tolerances), including text
in table cells, attributes, and attribute definitions. When any text command
is active, Insert Field is available on the shortcut menu.
Some sheet set fields can be inserted as placeholders. For example, you can
insert SheetNumberAndTitle as a placeholder. Later, when the layout is added
to a sheet set, the placeholder field displays the correct sheet number and
title.
Block placeholder fields can be used in block attribute definitions while you're
working in the Block Editor.
A field for which no value is available displays hyphens (----). For example,
the Author field, which is set in the Drawing Properties dialog box, may be
blank.
An invalid field displays pound signs (####). For example, the
CurrentSheetName field, which is valid only in paper space, displays pound
signs if it is placed in model space.

Change the Appearance of a Field
The field text uses the same text style as the text object in which it is inserted.
By default, fields are displayed with a light gray background that is not plotted
(FIELDDISPLAY system variable).
Formatting options in the Field dialog box control the appearance of the text
that is displayed. The options that are available depend on the type of field.
For example, the format for date fields includes options for displaying the day
of the week and the time, and the format for named object fields includes
capitalization options.

1458 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Edit a Field
A field is part of a text object and it can be edited from a text editor. The easiest
way to edit a field is to double click the text object that contains the field and
then, to display the Field dialog box, double click the field. These operations
are available on the shortcut menus as well.
If you no longer want to update a field, you can preserve the value that is
currently displayed by converting the field to text.
The field expression, consisting of escape characters and a field code, is shown
in the Field dialog box but cannot be edited.

To insert a field in text
1 Double-click the text to display the appropriate text editing dialog box.
2 Place the cursor where you want the field text to appear and right-click.
Click Insert Field.
For keyboard access, press CTRL+F.
3 In the Field dialog box, in Field Category, select All or select a category.
The fields in the selected category are displayed in the Field Names list.
4 In the Field Names list, select a field.
The current value of most fields is displayed in a shaded text box to the
right of Field Category. The current value of a date field is displayed in
the Examples list.
5 Select a format and any other options.
For example, when the NamedObject field is selected, you select a type
(for example, layer or textstyle) and a name (for example, 0 for layer or
STANDARD for textstyle).
Field Expression displays the expression that underlies the field. The field
expression cannot be edited, but you can learn how fields are constructed
by viewing this area.
6 Click OK to insert the field.
The field displays its current value in the text when the Field dialog box
closes.

To insert a field in a table
1 Double-click inside a cell in a table to select it for editing.

Insert Fields | 1459

2 Place the cursor where you want the field text to appear and right-click.
Click Insert Field.
3 In the Field dialog box, select All or select a category.
4 In the Field Names list, select a field.
The current value of the field is displayed in a shaded text box to the
right of Field Category.
5 Select a format and any other option.
6 Click OK to insert the field.
The field displays its current value when you move to the next cell.

To use a field to display a property of an object
1 Double-click a text object to display the appropriate text editing dialog
box.
2 Place the cursor where you want the field text to appear and right-click.
Click Insert Field.
3 In the Field dialog box, in Field Category, select All.
4 In the Field Names list, select Object.
5 In Object Type, click the Select Object button, and select an object in the
drawing.
6 In the Field dialog box, in Property, select the property whose value you
want to display in the text.
For example, the field could display the radius of a selected circle.
7 Select a format for the text.
8 Click OK.
The current value for the object's property is displayed in the text.

To insert a sheet set placeholder field

1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Define Attributes.
2 In the Attribute Definition dialog box, under Mode, click Preset. Specify
any text options.

1460 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

3 Under Attribute, in the Tag box, enter a name for the field.
4 To the right of the Value box, click the Insert Field button.
5 In the Field dialog box, under Field Category, select SheetSet.
6 In the Field Names list, select SheetSetPlaceholder.
7 In Placeholder Type, select the type of field that you want.
Temporary Value previews the placeholder field.
8 In Format, select a capitalization style for the placeholder field.
When the field is updated, the same style is used for the value of the
field.
9 (Optional) Click Associate Hyperlink if you want the field to serve as a
hyperlink to a location.
NOTE Associate Hyperlink is not available for the ViewportScale field.
10 Click OK to exit the Field dialog box.
The placeholder field displays its name when the Field dialog box closes:
for example, SheetNumber. Later, when the block is inserted from the
Views List tab shortcut menu in the Sheet Set Manager, the field displays
a value based on the sheet it is dragged to: for example, its sheet number.
11 Click OK in the Attribute Definition dialog box. Specify the location for
the field text to appear near the geometry that you have created to use
with the Sheet Set Manager as a callout block or a label block.
12 Create a block that includes the newly created attribute object along with
the geometry for the block.

To format a field value
1 Double-click a text object to display the appropriate text editing dialog
box.
2 Double-click the field you want to format.
The Field dialog box is displayed. If formatting is available for the field,
the Field Format button is displayed.
3 Click Field Format.
In the Additional Format dialog box, the current value of the field is
displayed. When you select an option, the result is displayed in Preview.

Insert Fields | 1461

4 Enter a conversion factor to apply to the current value.
For example, to convert inches to millimeters, enter 0.03937.
5 Enter any text that you want to precede or follow the field value.
For example, enter mm for millimeters.
6 Select a decimal separator. Select None or Comma to group thousands.
7 Select an option for suppressing zeros:
■

Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal field values. For
example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.

■

Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal field values. For
example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30.

■

0 Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches field value
when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes
6 1/2".

■

0 Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches field value
when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0"
becomes 1'.

8 Click OK.
In the Field dialog box, the field value is displayed in Preview with the
formatting you specified.
9 Click OK.

To edit a field
1 Double-click a text object to display the appropriate text editing dialog
box.
2 Double-click the field that you want to edit.
The Field dialog box is displayed.
3 Make any needed changes.
4 Click OK to exit the Field dialog box.
5 Exit the text editor.

1462 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Quick Reference
Commands
FIELD
Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically
as the field value changes.
FIND
Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text.
INSERT
Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
SPELL
Checks spelling in a drawing.
TABLE
Creates an empty table object.
TABLEEXPORT
Exports data from a table object in CSV file format.
TABLESTYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles.
UPDATEFIELD
Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing.

System Variables
CTABLESTYLE
Sets the name of the current table style.
FIELDDISPLAY
Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background.

Insert Fields | 1463

FIELDEVAL
Controls how fields are updated.

Update Fields
When a field is updated, it displays the latest value. You can update fields
individually or update all fields in one or more selected text objects.
You can also set fields to be updated automatically when the drawing is
opened, saved, plotted, regenerated, or sent through ETRANSMIT.
Settings on the User Preferences Tab (Options Dialog Box) control whether
fields are updated automatically or on demand (FIELDEVAL system variable).
The Date field cannot be updated automatically regardless of the setting of
FIELDEVAL.
NOTE When the DEMANDLOAD system variable is set to 2, fields cannot be
updated until you use FIELD or UPDATEFIELD.

Contextual Fields in Blocks and Xrefs
Some fields are contextual; that is, their value is different depending on which
space or layout they reside in. For example, because each layout can have a
different page setup attached, the value displayed by the PlotOrientation field
can be different in different layouts in the same drawing.
List of contextual fields
CurrentSheetCustom

CurrentSheetTitle

CurrentSheetDescription

DeviceName

CurrentSheetNumber

PaperSize

CurrentSheetNumberAndTitle

PlotDate

CurrentSheetSet

PlotOrientation

CurrentSheetSetCustom

PlotScale

CurrentSheetSetDescription

PageSetupName

CurrentSheetSubSet

PlotStyleTable

1464 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

For compatibility with previous releases, contextual fields in blocks and xrefs
are not updated when you insert them in a drawing; instead, the field displays
the last cached value. Therefore, if you want to use a contextual field within
a block, for example, a title block, you must insert the field as an attribute.
For example, a title block can use the CurrentSheetNumber field as an attribute.
When you insert the title block, the field displays the sheet number of the
sheet on which the title block is inserted.
Most fields are not contextual and are updated in blocks and xrefs. Fields in
xrefs are updated based on the host file, not the source xref. These fields do
not have to be placed in attributes. For example, a field that displays the sheet
number of a particular sheet in a sheet set and that updates if that sheet
number changes, is a property of the sheet set. When you create the field, you
select the SheetSet field name, select the sheet set and the sheet that you want
in the tree view, and then select the property SheetNumber for the field value
to be displayed. This field displays the sheet number of that sheet, even if you
put the field in a block and insert it in another drawing. If the sheet is removed
from the sheet set, it no longer has a sheet number, and the field becomes
invalid and displays pound signs.
Some sheet set fields can be inserted as placeholders. For example, when you
create your own callout blocks and label blocks, you can insert the
SheetNumber field as a placeholder. Later, when the block is inserted from
the Views List tab shortcut menu in the Sheet Set Manager, the field displays
the sheet number of the drawing.

Compatibility with Previous Releases
When a drawing with fields is opened in AutoCAD 2004 or earlier, the fields
are not updated; they display the value last displayed in the drawing before
it was opened. If no changes are made to a field, it is updated normally when
it is reopened in a release that supports fields.
See also:
■

Work with AutoCAD Drawings in AutoCAD LT on page 1963

To update a field manually
1 Double-click text.
2 Select the field to update and right-click. Click Update Field.

Update Fields | 1465

To update multiple fields manually

1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Update Fields .
2 At the Select Objects prompt, select the objects that contain the fields
you want to update and press ENTER.
All of the fields in the selected objects are updated.

To update fields automatically
1 At the Command prompt, enter fieldeval.
2 Enter a bitcode that is the sum of any of the following values:
■

0: Not updated

■

1: Updated on open

■

2: Updated on save

■

4: Updated on plot

■

8: Updated on use of ETRANSMIT

■

16: Updated on regeneration

For example, to update fields only when the file is opened, saved, or
plotted, enter 7.

Quick Reference
Commands
FIELD
Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically
as the field value changes.
UPDATEFIELD
Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing.

System Variables
FIELDDISPLAY
Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background.

1466 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

FIELDEVAL
Controls how fields are updated.

Use Hyperlinks in Fields
The Hyperlink field assigns a hyperlink to any piece of text.
The hyperlink works the same way as a hyperlink attached to an object. When
the cursor pauses over the text, a hyperlink cursor is displayed, along with a
tooltip that describes the hyperlink. Hold down the Ctrl key and click to follow
the link.
NOTE The Hyperlink field uses an absolute path to a file; the HYPERLINK command
can create a hyperlink with a relative path.
The fields that point to sheet and view titles and numbers can be assigned a
hyperlink when they are created. When these items are changed or moved in
the Sheet Set Manager, the hyperlinks associated with them still jump to the
correct location.
Hyperlinks in fields are converted from links to DWG files into links to DWF
files when published to a multi-sheet DWF file format.

To add a hyperlink field to text

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text.
2 Place the cursor where you want the hyperlink text to appear.
3 Right-click in the editor. Click Insert Field.
4 In the Field dialog box, in Field Category, select Linked.
5 In Field Names, select Hyperlink, and click Hyperlink.
6 In the Insert Hyperlink dialog box, use one of the following methods to
specify a location:
■

Under Type the File or Web Page Name, enter the path and name of
the file that you want to associate with the hyperlink.

■

Under Browse For, click File, Web Page, or Target. Navigate to the
location to which you want to link. Click Open or OK.

Use Hyperlinks in Fields | 1467

7 (Optional) In Text to Display, select the default text that is displayed,
and enter the link text that you want to appear in the mtext object.
8 Click OK to close each dialog box.
9 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

Click OK on the toolbar.

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

The hyperlink is displayed in the mtext object with the link text that you
entered. Use CTRL+click to jump to the hyperlinked location.

1468 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

TABLEEXPORT
Exports data from a table object in CSV file format.
TABLESTYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles.
UPDATEFIELD
Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing.

System Variables
CTABLESTYLE
Sets the name of the current table style.
FIELDDISPLAY
Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background.
FIELDEVAL
Controls how fields are updated.

Work with Text Styles
When you enter text into your drawing, the current text style determines the
text font, size, angle, orientation, and other text characteristics.

Overview of Text Styles
All text in a drawing has a text style associated with it. When you enter text,
the program uses the current text style.
The current text style sets the font, size, obliquing angle, orientation, and
other text characteristics. If you want to create text using a different text style,
you can make another text style current. The table shows the settings for the
STANDARD text style.
The settings for the current text style are displayed at the Command prompts.
You can use or modify the current text style or create and load a new text
style. Once you've created a text style, you can modify its characteristics,
change its name, or delete it when you no longer need it.

Work with Text Styles | 1469

Create and Modify Text Styles
Except for the default STANDARD text style, you must create any text style
that you want to use.
Text style names can be up to 255 characters long. They can contain letters,
numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen
(-). If you don't enter a text style name, the text styles are automatically named
Stylen, where n is a number that starts at 1.
You can modify an existing text style in the Text Style dialog box by changing
the settings. You can also update existing text of that text style to reflect the
changes.
Certain style settings affect multiline and single-line text objects differently.
For example, changing the Upside Down and Backwards options has no effect
on multiline text objects. Changing Width Factor and Obliquing options has
no effect on single-line text.
If you rename an existing text style, any text using the old name assumes the
new text style name.
You can remove unreferenced text styles from your drawing with PURGE or
by deleting the text styles from the Text Styles dialog box. The STANDARD
text style cannot be removed.

Change Text Style
When you change the text style of a multiline text object, the updated settings
are applied to the entire object, and some formatting of individual characters
might not be retained. The following table describes the effects of text style
change on character formatting.
Formatting

Retained?

Bold

Color

Yes

Font

Height

Italic

Stacking

Yes

1470 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Formatting

Retained?

Underlining

Yes

Annotative Text Styles
Use annotative on page 2289 text for notes and labels in your drawing. You create
annotative text by using an annotative text style, which sets the height of the
text on the paper.
For more information about creating and working with an annotative text,
see Create Annotative Text on page 1335.
See also:
■

Scale Annotations on page 1324

■

Create Annotative Text on page 1335

To set the current text style
■

On the ribbon, click the Annotate tab ➤ Text panel. in the Text Style
drop-down list, select a text style.

Quick Reference
Commands
PURGE
Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

System Variables
FONTALT
Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be
located.
FONTMAP
Specifies the font mapping file to be used.

Overview of Text Styles | 1471

TEXTSIZE
Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style.
TEXTSTYLE
Sets the name of the current text style.

Assign Text Fonts
You can assign a text font as part of the text style definition. Several factors
depend on the type of text you are working with.

Overview of Assigning Text Fonts
Fonts define the shapes of the text characters that make up each character set.
You can use TrueType fonts in addition to compiled SHX fonts.
A single font can be used by more than one text style. If your company has a
standard font, you can modify other text style settings to create a set of text
styles that use this standard font in different ways.
The following illustration shows the same font used by different text styles
that use different obliquing settings to define the slant of the text.

You can assign a font to a text style by selecting a font file from the list in the
Text Style dialog box.

1472 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Quick Reference
Commands
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

System Variables
FONTALT
Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be
located.
FONTMAP
Specifies the font mapping file to be used.

Use TrueType Fonts
Several factors affect the display of TrueType fonts in a drawing.
TrueType fonts always appear filled in your drawing; however, when you plot,
the TEXTFILL system variable controls whether the fonts are filled. By default
TEXTFILL is set to 1 to plot the filled-in fonts.
The In-Place Text Editor can display only fonts that are recognized by the
operating system. Because SHX fonts are not recognized by the operating
system, a TrueType equivalent is supplied in the In-Place Text Editor when
you select an SHX or any other non-TrueType font for editing.
See also:
■

Set Text Height on page 1479

To assign a TrueType font to a text style
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Panel Launcher button.
2 In the Text Style dialog box under Style Name, click New.
3 In the New Text Style dialog box, enter a style name for the new text
style. Click OK.
4 Under Font Name, select a TrueType font from the list.
TrueType fonts display a TrueType icon in front of their names.

Assign Text Fonts | 1473

5 To update text of the current style in the drawing, click Apply.
6 Click Close.

Quick Reference
Commands
QTEXT
Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

System Variables
QTEXTMODE
Controls how text is displayed.
TEXTFILL
Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.
TEXTQLTY
Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.

Use Text Fonts for International Work
Several factors affect your choosing, entering, and displaying international
text in a drawing.
The program supports the Unicode character-encoding standard. An SHX font
encoded using the Unicode standard font can contain many more characters
than are defined in your system; therefore, to use a character not directly
available from the keyboard, you can enter the escape sequence \U+nnnn,
where nnnn represents the Unicode hexadecimal value for the character.
Beginning with AutoCAD 2007, all SHX shape fonts are encoded with the
Unicode standard with the exception of Asian sets, or more commonly known
as Big Fonts. When choosing a text font for international work, you can use
either a TrueType Font or a Big Font.

1474 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Asian Big Font SHX Files
Asian alphabets contain thousands of non-ASCII characters. To support such
text, the program provides a special type of shape definition known as a Big
Font file. You can set a style to use both regular and Big Font files.
Asian Language Big Fonts Included in the Product
Font File Name

Description

@extfont2.shx

Japanese vertical font (a few characters are rotated to work correctly in vertical text)

bigfont.shx

Japanese font, subset of characters

chineset.shx

Traditional Chinese font

extfont.shx

Japanese extended font, level 1

extfont2.shx

Japanese extended font, level 2

gbcbig.shx

Simplified Chinese font

whgdtxt.shx

Korean font

whgtxt.shx

Korean font

whtgtxt.shx

Korean font

whtmtxt.shx

Korean font

When you specify fonts using -STYLE, the assumption is that the first name
is the normal font and the second (separated by a comma) is the Big Font. If
you enter only one name, it's assumed that it is the normal font and any
associated Big Font is removed. By using leading or trailing commas when
specifying the font file names, you can change one font without affecting the
other, as shown in the following table.
Specifying fonts and Big Fonts at the Command prompt
Enter this ...

To specify this ...

[font name],[big font name]

Both normal fonts and Big Fonts

[font name],

Only a normal font (Big Font unchanged)

Assign Text Fonts | 1475

Specifying fonts and Big Fonts at the Command prompt
Enter this ...

To specify this ...

,[big font name]

Only a Big Font (normal font unchanged)

[font name]

Only a normal font (Big Font, if any, removed)

ENTER (null response)

No change

NOTE Long file names that contain commas as font file names are not accepted.
The comma is interpreted as a separator for an SHX font-Big Font pair.
See also:
■

Substitute Fonts on page 1477

To assign an Asian-language SHX font to a text style

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style.
2 In the Text Style dialog box, under Style Name, click New.
3 In the New Text Style dialog box, enter a style name for the new text
style. Click OK.
4 Under Font Name, select the name of an SHX font file, and then select
Use Big Font to select an Asian-language big font.
When you select Use Big Font, the Font Style box changes to a Big Font
Name box. Only SHX fonts are available for selection, and only Big Font
names are shown in the Big Font box.
5 To see the effects on different characters, enter a text string in the sample
text box that is located to the left of the Preview button. Click Preview.
6 To update text of the current style in the drawing, click Apply.
7 Click Close.

1476 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Quick Reference
Commands
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

Substitute Fonts
A font used in a drawing but that is not currently available on your system is
automatically substituted with another font.
The program accommodates a font that is not currently on your system by
substituting another font.

Specify an Alternate Font
If your drawing specifies a font that is not currently on your system, the font
designated as your alternate font is automatically substituted. By default, the
simplex.shx file is used. If you want to specify a different font, enter the alternate
font file name by changing the FONTALT system variable. If you use a text
style that uses a Big Font (or Asian Set), you can map it to another font using
the FONTALT system variable. This system variable uses a default font file
pair: txt.shx and bigfont.shx. For more information, see Use Text Fonts for
International Work on page 1474.
®

In previous releases, you could display PostScript fonts in the drawing. Because
later releases cannot display PostScript fonts, Autodesk has supplied TrueType
font equivalents. These PostScript fonts are mapped to the equivalent TrueType
fonts in a font mapping file. Additionally, when a TrueType font is not
available, you can specify a different TrueType font, making sure that the
fonts are similar to avoid text length or wrapping problems.
If the default font does not support the characters you enter using the In-Place
Text Editor (MTEXT command), an alternative font is substituted.
CIF or MIF codes entered with the In-Place Text Editor or with the TEXT
command are now automatically converted to display the actual characters.

Edit the Font Mapping File
A font mapping file is a list of text fonts and their substitutes. If a text font
used in a drawing cannot be located, another text font is substituted for the
missing font using a font mapping file.

Assign Text Fonts | 1477

Each line in the font mapping file contains the name of a font file (with no
file extension or path) followed by a semicolon (;) and the name of the
substitute font file. The substitute file name includes a file extension such as
.ttf.
A font mapping file is an ordinary ASCII text file with a .fmp extension. The
default font mapping file is acad.fmp. You can change the font assignments
in a font mapping file using any ASCII text editor.
For example, you could use the following entry in a font map file to specify
that the timesnr.pfb font file be substituted with the times.ttf font file:
timesnr;times.ttf
The following table shows the font substitution rules used if a font file cannot
be located when a drawing is opened.
Font substitution
File extension

First mapping order

Second mapping
order

Third mapping or- Fourth mapder
ping order

.ttf

Use font mapping
table

Use font defined in
text style

Windows substitutes
a similar font

.shx

Use font mapping
table

Use font defined in
text style

Use FONTALT

.pfb

Use font mapping
table

Use FONTALT

Prompt for new font

Prompt for new
font

Display Proxy Fonts
For third-party or custom SHX fonts that have no TrueType equivalent, one
of several different TrueType fonts called proxy fonts is substituted. In the
In-Place Text Editor, proxy fonts look different from the fonts they represent
to indicate that the proxy fonts are substitutions for the fonts used in the
drawing.
If you want to format characters by assigning one of these fonts, first create
a text style that uses the font and then apply that text style to the characters.

To specify a font mapping file
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 On the Files tab, in the list, double-click Text Editor, Dictionary, and Font
File Names.

1478 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

3 Double-click Font Mapping File.
The acad.fmp file is specified by default.
4 To change the font mapping file, double-click the arrow line to open the
Select a File dialog box. Select a file and click Open. Click OK.
5 At the Command prompt, enter regen to convert existing text using the
new font mappings.

To specify a default alternate font
1 At the Command prompt, enter fontalt.
2 Enter the name of the font file you want to use as the alternative.

Quick Reference
Commands
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

System Variables
FONTALT
Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be
located.
FONTMAP
Specifies the font mapping file to be used.

Set Text Height
Text height determines the size in drawing units of the letters in the font you
are using.
The exception is TrueType fonts: the value usually represents the size of the
uppercase letters.

Set Text Height | 1479

If you specify a fixed height as part of a text style, the Height prompt is
bypassed when you create single-line text. When the height is set to 0 in the
text style, you are prompted for the height each time you create single-line
text. Set the value to 0 if you want to specify the height as you create text.

TrueType Fonts
For TrueType fonts, the value specified for text height represents the height
of a capital letter plus an ascent area reserved for accent marks and other marks
used in non-English languages. The relative portion of text height that is
assigned to capital letters and ascent characters is determined by the font
designer at the time the font is designed; consequently, it varies from font to
font.
In addition to the height of a capital letter and the ascent area that make up
the text height specified by the user, TrueType fonts have a descent area for
portions of characters that extend below the text insertion line, for example,
y, j, p, g, and q.
When you apply a text height override to all text in the editor, the entire
multiline text object is scaled, including its width.

To set text height in a text style

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style.
2 In the Text Style dialog box, select a style from the Style Name list.
3 Under Font, enter the text height (in drawing units) in the Height box.
4 To update existing text that uses this text style, click Apply.
5 Click Close.

Quick Reference
Commands
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

1480 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

System Variables
TEXTSIZE
Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style.
TEXTSTYLE
Sets the name of the current text style.

Set Text Obliquing Angle
The obliquing angle determines the forward or backward slant of the text.
The angle represents the offset from 90 degrees.

Entering a value between -85 and 85 makes the text oblique. A positive
obliquing angle slants text to the right. A negative obliquing angle slants text
to the left.

To set the obliquing angle in a text style

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style.
2 In the Text Style dialog box, select a text style from the Style Name list.
3 Under Effects, enter an angle between -85 and 85 in the Oblique Angle
box.
A positive value slants text to the right. A negative value slants text to
the left.
4 To update existing text that uses this text style, click Apply.

Set Text Obliquing Angle | 1481

5 Click Close.

Quick Reference
Commands
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

Set Horizontal or Vertical Text Orientation
Text can be vertical or horizontal. Text can have a vertical orientation only if
the associated font supports dual orientation.
Lines of text are oriented to be vertical or horizontal. Text can have a vertical
orientation only if the associated font supports dual orientation. You can
create more than one line of vertical text. Each successive text line is drawn
to the right of the preceding line. The normal rotation angle for vertical text
is 270 degrees.

NOTE Vertical orientation is not supported for TrueType fonts and symbols.
Vertical Text for Asian Languages
■

SHX fonts. Text can be created with SHX fonts and Big Fonts for vertical
display in the same way as for previous releases. For best results, use the
single-line TEXT command, not MTEXT. You can select a vertical style in
the Text Style dialog box.

1482 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

■

TrueType fonts. You still select fonts starting with the @ sign, but now the
text is automatically rotated 270 degrees. (In AutoCAD 2005 and earlier
releases, you had to manually rotate this text.) Vertical cursor movement
is now supported for vertical text.

To set vertical orientation in a text style

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style.
2 In the Text Style dialog box, select a text style from the Style Name list.
3 Under Effects, select Vertical.
4 To update existing text that uses this text style, click Apply.
5 Click Close.

Quick Reference
Commands
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

Change Text
You can change text content, formatting, and properties such as scale and
justification.

Overview of Changing Text
Text, whether created with TEXT, MTEXT, or MLEADER can be modified like
any other object.
You can move, rotate, erase, and copy it. You can change text properties in
the Properties palette.
You can also edit the contents of existing text and create a mirror image of
it. The MIRRTEXT system variable controls whether text is also reversed when
you mirror objects in your drawing.

Change Text | 1483

Quick Reference
Commands
DDEDIT
Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control
frames.
FIND
Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

System Variables
MIRRTEXT
Controls how MIRROR reflects text.
MTEXTTOOLBAR
Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar.
TEXTFILL
Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.
TEXTQLTY
Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.

Change Single-Line Text
You can change the contents, formatting and properties of single-line text.
You can change single-line text with DDEDIT and PROPERTIES. Use DDEDIT
when you need to change only the content of the text, not the formatting or
properties of the text object. Use PROPERTIES when you want to change
content, text style, location, orientation, size, justification, and other
properties.
Text objects also have grips for moving, scaling, and rotating. A text object
has grips at the lower-left corner of the baseline and at the alignment point.

1484 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

The effect of a command depends on which grip you choose.

To edit single-line text
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Edit.
2 Select a single-line text object.
3 In the in-place editor, enter the new text.
4 Press ENTER.
5 Select another text object to edit, or press ENTER to end the command.

To modify properties of single-line text objects
1 Select a single-line text object.
2 Right-click the selected object. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, enter any new text, and then change formatting
and other properties as needed.

Quick Reference
Commands
DDEDIT
Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control
frames.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

Change Single-Line Text | 1485

TEXT
Creates a single-line text object.

System Variables
TEXTED
Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text.
TEXTFILL
Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.
TEXTQLTY
Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.

Change Multiline Text
You can change the location and content of multiline text objects with the
Properties palette, the In-Place Text Editor, and grips.
After you create multiline text, you can use the Properties palette to change
the following:
■

Text style assignment

■

Justification

■

Width

■

Rotation

■

Line spacing

In addition, you can use the following to modify individual formatting, such
as boldface and underlining, and width for multiline text objects:
■

Text Editor ribbon contextual tab

■

Text Formatting toolbar

■

In-Place Text Editor

■

Grips

1486 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Change Text Location
You can use many of the common modifying commands and grips to move
multiline text objects. A multiline text object has grips at the four corners of
the text boundary and, in some cases, at the justification point.
Commands such as DIMLINEAR or LEADER create multiline text automatically
without requiring that a bounding box be specified; these objects have only
a single grip at the justification point.
When you need to align or move multiline text objects, you can use the Node
and Insertion object snaps for precision. If the OSNAPNODELEGACY system
variable is set to 0, the Node object snap ignores multiline text.
See also:
■

Work with Text Styles on page 1469

■

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and
Text on page 582

To change multiline text
1 Select a multiline text object.
2 Right-click the selected object. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, enter any new text and change formatting and
other settings as needed.

To change the width of a multiline text object
1 Double-click the multiline text object.
2 In the In-Place Text Editor, use one of the following methods:
■

Move the cursor over the right end of the ruler until the cursor changes
to a double arrow. As you drag to the right to stretch the ruler, a tooltip
displays the width. Release to set a new width.

■

Right-click the bottom of the ruler. Click Set Mtext Width. In the
dialog box, enter the width in drawing units.

3 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following
methods:
■

On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close
Text Editor.

Change Multiline Text | 1487

■

Click in the drawing outside the editor.

■

Press CTRL+ENTER.

Quick Reference
Commands
DDEDIT
Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control
frames.
FIND
Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text.
MTEDIT
Edits multiline text.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

System Variables
CENTERMT
Controls how grips stretch multiline text that is centered horizontally.
MIRRTEXT
Controls how MIRROR reflects text.
MTEXTED
Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
MTEXTTOOLBAR
Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar.
OSNAPNODELEGACY
Controls whether the Node object snap can be used to snap to multiline text
objects.

1488 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

TEXTFILL
Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting.
TEXTQLTY
Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.

Find and Replace Text
You can easily find and replace text with the FIND command
To search for and replace text, use FIND. Replacement is based on text content
only; character formatting and text properties are not changed.
When searching for text in a 3D environment, the viewport will temporarily
change to a 2D viewport so that text isn’t blocked by 3D objects in your
drawing.
With FIND, you can use wild-card characters in your search.
Character

Definition

# (Pound)

Matches any numeric digit

@ (At)

Matches any alphabetic character

. (Period)

Matches any nonalphanumeric character

* (Asterisk)

Matches any string and can be used anywhere in the search
string

? (Question mark)

Matches any single character; for example, ?BC matches ABC,
3BC, and so on

~ (Tilde)

Matches anything but the pattern; for example; ~*AB*matches
all strings that don't contain AB

[]

Matches any one of the characters enclosed; for example,
[AB]C matches AC and BC

[~]

Matches any character not enclosed; for example, [~AB]C
matches XC but not AC

[-]

Specifies a range for a single character; for example, [A-G]C
matches AC, BC, and so on to GC, but not HC

Find and Replace Text | 1489

Character

Definition

` (Reverse quote)

Reads the next character literally; for example, `~AB matches
~AB

To search for drawing files that contain a specific word or phrase, use the
Search tool in Microsoft® Windows® . You can use the Search tool to find all
textual data except text in tables and fields, and xrefs within drawing files.

To find specified text in a drawing

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Find Text.
2 In Find What, enter the text you want to find.
3 In Find Where, specify the parts of the drawing to search, or click the
Select Objects button to select one or more text objects.
4 Click the Expand Find Options button to specify search options and text
types for the specified text.
5 Click Find.
6 Use one of the following options to view the results of your search:
■

To list all results in a table, click the List Results check box.

■

To zoom to and highlight each result individually, leave the List
Results check box unchecked.

7 Click Close.

To replace text using the Find and Replace Dialog box

1490 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

5 In Replace With, enter the text with which you want to replace the found
text.
6 Click Find.
7 Use one of the following options to view the results of your search:
■

To list all results in a table, click the List Results check box.

■

To zoom to and highlight each result individually, leave the List
Results check box unchecked.

8 Use one of the following methods to replace text:
■

To replace only the found instance of the text string, click Replace.

■

To replace all instances of the text in Find Text String, click Replace
All.

■

If search results have been listed in a table using the List Results
option, then you can select certain results in the list by pressing Click
+ CTRL. Alternately, you can select a range of results in the list by
pressing Shift + Click.

9 Click Close.

Change Text Scale and Justification
Several commands are available for changing the scale of one or more text
and attribute objects, or their insertion points, simultaneously without
changing the location of the objects.
You can change the scale of one or more text objects, attributes, and attribute
definitions, or their insertion points, simultaneously without changing the
location of the objects.

Change the Scale of Multiple Text Objects
A drawing may contain hundreds of text objects that need to be scaled, and
it would be tedious to scale them individually. Use SCALETEXT to change the
scale of one or more text objects such as text, multiline text, and attributes.
You can specify a relative scale factor or an absolute text height, or you can
scale selected text to match the height of existing text. Each text object is
scaled using the same scale factor, and it maintains its current location.

Change Text Scale and Justification | 1491

Convert Text Height Between Model Space and Paper Space
The SPACETRANS command calculates equivalent lengths between model
space units and paper space units. By using SPACETRANS transparently, you
can provide commands with distance or length values relative to another
space. For example, you may want to create a text object in model space that
matches the height of other text in a layout. From model space, you could
enter
Command: text
Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: 1,3
Specify height <0.375>: 'spacetrans
>>Specify paper space distance <1.000>: 3/8
Resuming TEXT command
Specify height <0.375>: 1.173
When the command is complete, a text object is created in model space with
a height of 1.173, which appears as 3/8 when viewed from a layout.
NOTE The SPACETRANS command is not available from the Model tab or in a
perspective view.
For more information about entering commands transparently, see Enter
Commands on the Command Line on page 45.

Change the Justification of Text Objects Without Changing Their Location
Use JUSTIFYTEXT to redefine the insertion point of text without moving the
text. For example, a table or schedule may contain text that is located correctly
but each text object in the table should be right-justified instead of left-justified
for future entries or modifications.

To scale multiline text objects without changing their locations

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Scale.
2 Select one or more multiline text objects and press ENTER.
3 Specify one of the justification options or press ENTER to accept the
existing text justifications.
4 Enter s and enter the scale factor to be applied to each mtxt object.

1492 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Quick Reference
Commands
JUSTIFYTEXT
Changes the justification point of selected text objects without changing
their locations.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
SCALETEXT
Enlarges or reduces selected text objects without changing their locations.
SPACETRANS
Calculates equivalent model space and paper space lengths in a layout.

Check Spelling
You can check the spelling of all text as it is entered in your drawing. You can
also specify the specific language dictionary that is used and customize and
manage multiple custom spelling dictionaries.
You can check the spelling of all text objects in your drawing, including
■

Single and multiline text

■

Dimension text

■

Multileader text

■

Text within block attributes

■

Text within xrefs

With Check Spelling, your drawing or the areas of your drawing’s text that
you specify are searched for misspelled words. If a misspelled word is identified,
the word is highlighted and the drawing area zooms to that word in a scale
that is easy to read.

Check Spelling | 1493

Check Spelling As You Type
By default, you can check spelling as you enter text in the In-Place Text Editor.
Any word you enter is checked for spelling errors when it is completed. A
word is considered completed when one of the following actions are taken:
■

Pressing Spacebar or Enter

■

Moving the cursor to another position within the In-Place Text Editor.

Misspelled words are underlined
with a red dotted line

Any word not found in the current dictionary is underlined as misspelled.
Spelling suggestions are displayed when you right-click the underlined word.

Switch Dictionaries
The Check Spelling feature contains several main dictionaries, which are
available in different languages. You can also create any number of custom
dictionaries and switch between them as needed.
During a spelling check, the words in the drawing are matched to the words
in the current main dictionary. Any words you add are stored in the custom
dictionary that is current at the time of the spelling check. For example, you
can add proper names so they are no longer identified as misspelled words.
NOTE By default AutoCAD provides you with one sample custom dictionary that
contains words such as AutoCAD and Autodesk.
To check spelling in another language, change to a different main dictionary.
You can change dictionaries in the Dictionaries dialog box or by specifying
the dictionary name in the DCTMAIN or DCTCUST system variable. For a list
of the main dictionary file names, see DCTMAIN.
NOTE The filename for a custom dictionary cannot use any non-current code
page characters in its name. If you are sharing a custom dictionary between
different locals or languages do not use non-ASCII characters.

1494 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Create and Edit Custom Dictionaries
A custom dictionary is a list of spelling exceptions that you have identified.
The files that contain them have a .cus file extension. You can use any ASCII
text editor to add or delete words, or combine several dictionaries.

To check spelling

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling.
2 Click an option of where you want to check. Click Start. If no misspelled
words are found, a message is displayed. If a misspelling is found, the
Check Spelling dialog box identifies the misspelled word. The word is
highlighted and zoomed to in the drawing area.
3 Do one of the following:
■

To correct a word, select an alternate word from the Suggestions list
or type a word in the Suggestions box. Click Change or Change All.

■

To leave a word unchanged, click Ignore or Ignore All.

■

To leave a word unchanged and add it to the dictionary, click Add to
Dictionary.

4 Repeat step 3 for each misspelled word. Click Close to exit.
NOTE Click Undo to reverse the preceding Check Spelling action or series of
actions in the Check Spelling dialog box.

To check spelling in a block attribute

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling.
2 In the Check Spelling dialog box, click Settings.
3 In the Check Spelling Settings dialog box, click Block Attributes. Click
OK.
4 In the Check Spelling dialog box, click Start.
5 Do one of the following:
■

To correct a word, select an alternate word from the Suggestions list
or type a word in the Suggestions box. Click Change or Change All.

Check Spelling | 1495

■

To leave a word unchanged, click Ignore or Ignore All.

■

To leave a word unchanged and add it to the dictionary, click Add to
Dictionary.

6 Repeat step 5 for each misspelled word. Click Close to exit.

To switch dictionaries while checking spelling

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling.
2 In the Check Spelling dialog box, click Dictionaries.
3 Do one of the following:
■

To change the main dictionary, select a dictionary from the Current
Main Dictionary list.

■

To change the custom dictionary, select a dictionary under Current
Custom Dictionary.

4 Click Close.

To add a custom dictionary or word list

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling.
2 In the Check Spelling dialog box, click Dictionaries.
3 In the Dictionaries dialog box, in the Current Custom dictionary list,
select Manage Custom Dictionaries.
4 In the Custom Dictionaries list, click Add and browse to the dictionary’s
location. To create a new custom dictionary, click New and enter the
dictionary’s name. The name must contain the .cus extension.
5 Click OK. The newly selected dictionary is highlighted as the current
custom dictionary.
6 If you would like to import a word list into your custom dictionary, click
Import.
7 Click OK.

1496 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

Quick Reference
Commands
SPELL
Checks spelling in a drawing.

System Variables
DCTCUST
Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary.
DCTMAIN
Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary.

Use an Alternate Text Editor
The default text editor is either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab (if the ribbon
is active) or the In-Place Text Editor (if the ribbon is not active), but you can
elect to use any alternate editor that saves files in ASCII format.

Overview of Using an Alternate Text Editor
You can use any text editor, such as Microsoft Notepad, that saves files in
ASCII format.
You can elect to use an alternate editor by specifying the editor with the
MTEXTED system variable.
If you use an alternate text editor for multiline text, you specify the properties
of the multiline text object at the Command prompt first. Then the text editor
opens for entering text. When you close the text editor, the text is inserted
within the width limit you specified.
If you use an alternate editor, you must enter special codes to apply formatting.
To edit text using an alternate text editor, use the same format codes. To avoid
losing format information when you make changes to the text, use the same
text editor you used to create the text.

Use an Alternate Text Editor | 1497

Quick Reference
Commands
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

System Variables
MTEXTED
Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.

Format Multiline Text in an Alternate Text Editor
If you use an alternate text editor, you apply formatting by entering format
codes.
You can underline text, add a line over text, and create stacked text. You can
also change color, font, and text height. You can change the spaces between
text characters or increase the width of the characters themselves. To apply
formatting, use the format codes shown in the following table.
Format codes for paragraphs
Format code

Purpose

Enter this …

\0...\o

Turns overline on
and off

Autodesk \OAutoCAD\o

\L...\l

Turns underline on
and off

Autodesk \LAutoCAD\l

Inserts a nonbreaking
space

Autodesk AutoCAD\~LT

Inserts a backslash

Autodesk \\AutoCAD

1498 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

To produce this …

Format codes for paragraphs
Format code

Purpose

Enter this …

\{...\}

Inserts an opening and
closing brace

Autodesk \{AutoCAD\}

\Cvalue;

Changes to the
specified color

Autodesk \C2;AutoCAD

\File name;

Changes to the
specified font file

Autodesk \Ftimes; AutoCAD

\Hvalue;

Changes to the text
height specified in
drawing units

Autodesk \H2;AutoCAD

\Hvaluex;

Changes the text height
to a multiple of the
current text height

Autodesk \H3x;AutoCAD

\S...^...;

Stacks the subsequent
text at the /, #, or ^ symbol

1.000\S+0.010^-0.000;

\Tvalue;

Adjusts the space between
characters. Valid values
range from a minimum of
.75 to 4 times the original
spacing between characters.

\T2;Autodesk

\Qangle;

Changes obliquing angle

\Q20;Autodesk

\Wvalue;

Changes width factor to
produce wide text

\W2;Autodesk

To produce this …

Format Multiline Text in an Alternate Text Editor | 1499

Format codes for paragraphs
Format code

Purpose

Enter this …

Sets the alignment value;
valid values: 0, 1, 2
(bottom, center, top)

\A1;1\S1/2

Ends paragraph

Autodesk\PAutoCAD

To produce this …

Braces can be nested up to eight levels deep.
You can also use control codes to add special characters, such as tolerance or
dimensioning symbols. See MTEXT.

Example: Formatting Text in an Alternate Text Editor
This example describes how the text in the following illustration was created.

Each line below was entered in an alternate text editor:
{{\H1.5x; Big text} \A2; over text\A1;/\A0; under text}\P
{\A0;Baseline: 1 \S1/2;}\P
{\A1;Center: 1 \S1/2;}\P
{\A2;Topline: 1 \S1/2;}\P
{Tolerances: \A1;1.000\H.75x;\S+0.010^-0.000;}\P
{Architectural: 9-{\H.666x;\A2;11\A1;/\A0;16}\A2;"}\P

1500 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels

To specify an alternate text editor
1 At the Command prompt, enter mtexted.
2 At the prompt do one of the following:
■

Enter the path and name of the executable file for the ASCII text editor
that you want to use to create or edit multiline text.

■

Enter internal to restore the text editor.

To create multiline text in an alternate text editor
1 To specify a text editor, at the Command prompt, enter mtexted. Then
enter the path of the editor you want to use.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text.
3 Specify the first corner of the multiline text boundary rectangle.
4 Specify the opposite corner of the multiline text boundary rectangle.
5 In the text editor, enter the text. Enter \P to end a paragraph and start a
new paragraph on the next line. (Be sure to capitalize the P.)
6 When your text entry is complete, save the changes and exit the text
editor.

Quick Reference
Commands
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

System Variables
MTEXTED
Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.

Format Multiline Text in an Alternate Text Editor | 1501

1502

Tables

A table is a rectangular array of cells that contain annotation, primarily text but also blocks.
Tables appear in many different forms on many of the sheets that make up drawing sets. In
the AEC industry, tables are often referred to as “schedules” and contain information about
the materials needed for the construction of the building being designed. In the manufacturing
industry, they are often referred to as “BOM” (bills of materials).
The table object creates a table of any size that can be used for any purpose, including as a
list or index to a set of drawing sheets.

Create and Modify Tables
A table is an object that contains data in rows and columns. A table object can
be created from an empty table or table style. A table can also be linked to data
in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
After the table has been created, you can click any gridline on the table to select
it and then modify it by using the Properties palette or grips.

1503

When you change the height or width of the table, only the row on page 2317
or column on page 2294 adjacent to the grip you have selected will change. The
table will maintain its height or width. To change the size of the table
proportionally to the size of the row or column you are editing, press Ctrl
while using a column grip.

Break Tables into Multiple Parts
A table with a large amount of data can be broken into primary and secondary
table fragments. Use the table breaking grips found at the bottom of your table
to make a table span multiple columns in your drawing or to manipulate the
different table parts you have already created.

Modify a Table Cell
You can click inside a cell to select it. Grips are displayed in the middle of the
cell borders. Click inside another cell to move selection to that cell. Drag the
grips on a cell to make the cell and its column or row larger or smaller.

NOTE When a cell is selected, double-click to edit the cell text. You can also start
entering text when a cell is highlighted to replace its current content.

1504 | Chapter 30 Tables

To select more than one cell, click and drag over several cells. You can also
hold down Shift and click inside another cell to select those two cells and all
the cells between them.
When you click inside a table cell when the ribbon is active, the Table ribbon
contextual tab is displayed. If the ribbon is not active, the Table toolbar is
displayed. From here, you can
■

Insert and delete rows and columns

■

Merge and unmerge cells

■

Match cell styles

■

Alter the appearance of cell borders

■

Edit data formatting and alignment

■

Lock and unlock cells from editing

■

Insert blocks, fields, and formulas

■

Create and edit cell styles

■

Link the table to external data

With a cell selected, you can also right-click and use the options on the
shortcut menu to insert or delete columns and rows, combine adjacent cells,
or make other changes. When cells are selected, you can use Ctrl+Y to repeat
the last action.
NOTE Using Ctrl+Y to repeat the last action only repeats actions executed through
the shortcut menu, the Table ribbon contextual tab, or the Table toolbar.

Add a Table to a Tool Palette
When you add a table to a tool palette, the table properties (for example, table
style and number of rows and columns) and the cell property overrides (for
example, alignment and border lineweight) are stored in the tool definition.
The text, block content, and character formatting are also stored in the tool
definition.

Customize Display of Column Letters and Row Numbers
By default, the In-Place Text Editor displays column letters and row numbers
when a table cell is selected for editing. Use the TABLEINDICATOR system
variable to turn this display on and off.

Create and Modify Tables | 1505

To set a new background color, select a table, right-click, and click Table
Indicator Color on the shortcut menu. The text color, size, and style and the
line color are controlled by the settings for column heads in the current table
style.
See also:
■

Add Text and Blocks to Tables on page 1514

To create a tool from a table in the current drawing
1 In the current drawing, select the table.
2 Using the right mouse button, drag the table to a tool palette and, without
releasing the mouse button, move the cursor to the place on the tool
palette where you want the tool.
You can switch to a different tab by hovering over the tab for a few
seconds. The black line indicates where the tool will be located.
3 Release the mouse button.
NOTE All formatting, table properties, and cell properties are saved in the
tool palette tool, as well as text and block content.

1506 | Chapter 30 Tables

SPELL
Checks spelling in a drawing.
TABLE
Creates an empty table object.
TABLEDIT
Edits text in a table cell.
TABLEEXPORT
Exports data from a table object in CSV file format.
TABLESTYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles.
UPDATEFIELD
Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing.
CTABLESTYLE
Sets the name of the current table style.
FIELDDISPLAY
Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background.
FIELDEVAL
Controls how fields are updated.
TABLETOOLBAR
Controls the display of the Table toolbar.

Link a Table to External Data
A table can be linked to data in a Microsoft Excel (XLS, .XLSX, or CSV) file.
You can link to an entire spreadsheet, individual row, column, cell, or cell
range in Excel.
NOTE Microsoft Excel must be installed to use Microsoft Excel data links. To link
to the XLSX filetype, Microsoft Excel 2007 must be installed.

Link a Table to External Data | 1507

You can bring data from Microsoft Excel into a table in the following three
ways:
■

As formulas with supported data formats attached.

■

As calculated data from formulas calculated in Excel (supported data formats
not attached).

■

As calculated data from formulas calculated in Excel (with data formats
attached).

A table that contains data links displays indicators around linked cells. If you
hover your mouse cursor over the data link, information about the data link
is displayed.

If a linked spreadsheet has been changed, such as adding a row or column,
the table in your drawing can be updated accordingly using the
DATALINKUPDATEcommand. Likewise, if a change is made to a table in your
drawing, then you can update the linked spreadsheet using the same command.

1508 | Chapter 30 Tables

By default, a data link is locked from editing to prevent undesired changes to
the linked spreadsheet. You can lock cells from data changes, format changes,
or both. To unlock a data link, click Locking on either the Table ribbon
contextual tab or the Table toolbar.
See also:
■

Extract Data from Drawings and Spreadsheets on page 1969

To link to a table in an external spreadsheet
1 In your table, select the table cells to link.
2 On either the Table ribbon contextual tab or Table toolbar, click Link
Cell.
3 In the Data Link Manager tree view, select Click to Create a New Excel
Data Link.
4 In the Enter Data Link Name dialog box, enter a name for the data link.
Click OK.
5 Click the [...] button to browse for the XLS or CSV file to link.
6 In the New Excel Data Link dialog box, do one of the following:
■

Select Link to a Named Range. Click OK.

Link a Table to External Data | 1509

■

Select Link to Range. Enter a valid range from the Excel spreadsheet
(for example, A1:D17). Click OK.

7 Select the new data link in the Data Link Manager tree view. Click OK.

To remove a link to an external spreadsheet
1 Click inside a cell within the data linked table to select the cell.
2 Right-click and click Data Links ➤ Detach Data Link.

To set up a named range in Microsoft Excel
1 In Microsoft Excel, open the workbook or spreadsheet that you want to
access.
2 Select a range of cells to function as a linked range.
3 In the Name Box, enter a name for the range of cells, then press Enter.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3, if desired, to specify additional linked ranges.
5 On the File menu (Microsoft Excel), choose Save.

To open an external spreadsheet from a data link
1 Select any cell in the linked table or range of linked cells.
2 Right-click and click Data Links ➤ Open Data Link File.

Quick Reference
DATALINK
Displays the Data Link dialog box.
DATALINKUPDATE
Updates data to or from an established external data link.
DATALINKNOTIFY
Controls the notification for updated or missing data links.

1510 | Chapter 30 Tables

Work with Table Styles
The appearance of the table is controlled by its table style. You can use the
default table style, STANDARD, or create your own table styles.
When you create a new table style, you can specify a starting table. A starting
table is a table in your drawing that is used as an example for formatting the
new table style. Once a table is selected, you can specify the structure and
contents to copy from that table to the table style.
Cell styles can be created and applied to a table style upon insertion of a new
table. A table style can specify different cell styles in each type of row to display
a different justification and appearance for the text and gridlines. These cell
styles are specified upon insertion of a table. The STANDARD table style, for
example, contains a cell style consisting of merged cells with text that is
centered. This cell style, named Title, can be specified as the first row cell of
the table. This creates a title row at the top of the new table.
The table can read from top to bottom or from the bottom up. The number
of columns and rows is almost unlimited.
The border properties in a table’s cell style control the display of the gridlines
that divide the table into cells. The borders of the title row, the column heads
row, and the data rows can have different lineweight and color and can be
displayed or not displayed. The Cell Style preview image in the bottom right
corner of the Table Style dialog box updates as you select border options.
The appearance of text in the cells of the table is controlled by the text style
that is specified in the current cell style. You can use any text style in the
drawing or create a new one. You can also use DesignCenter to copy table
styles from other drawings.
You can define the data and formatting for any cell style within a table style.
You can also overwrite the data and formatting for specific cells. For example,
you could set the formatting for all column heading rows to display text in
uppercase, and then select a single table cell to display text in lowercase. The
type of data you display in a row and the formatting for that data type is
controlled by the formatting options you select in the Table Cell Format dialog
box.
See also:
■

Work with Text Styles on page 1469

Work with Table Styles | 1511

To define or modify a cell style

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Table Style.
2 Select the table style that contains the cell style you want to modify, or
click New to create a new table style.
3 In the Table Style dialog box, in the Cell Styles drop-down list, select a
cell style to modify, or create a new cell style by clicking the button to
the right of the drop-down list.
4 Click OK.

To create a table style from an existing table
1 Click a gridline to select the table.
2 Right-click and click Table Style ➤ Save as New Table Style.

To create a cell style from an existing cell
1 Click inside the cell to create a cell style from.
2 Right-click and click Cell Style ➤ Save as New Cell Style.

To apply a new table style to a table
1 Click a gridline to select the table.
2 Right-click and select Table Style.
3 On the Table Style flyout, select a table style from the list.
The new table style is applied to the table.
NOTE If the previous table style had a title row and the new one does not,
the title text is placed in the first cell of the table, and the other cells in the
first row are left blank.
4 Press Esc twice to remove selection.

1512 | Chapter 30 Tables

Quick Reference
FIND
Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text.
INSERT
Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
SPELL
Checks spelling in a drawing.
TABLE
Creates an empty table object.
TABLEDIT
Edits text in a table cell.
TABLEEXPORT
Exports data from a table object in CSV file format.
TABLESTYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles.
UPDATEFIELD
Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing.
CTABLESTYLE
Sets the name of the current table style.
FIELDDISPLAY
Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background.
FIELDEVAL
Controls how fields are updated.

Work with Table Styles | 1513

Add Text and Blocks to Tables
Table cell data can include text and multiple blocks.
When a table is created, the first cell is highlighted, and you can begin entering
text. The row height of the cell increases to accommodate the number of lines
of text. To move to the next cell, press Tab, or use the arrow keys to move
left, right, up, and down. You can quickly edit cell text by double-clicking in
a selected cell or start entering text to replace the current content of a cell.
When you insert a block into a table cell, either the block can be automatically
fit to the size of the cell, or the cell can adjust to accommodate the size of the
block.
Blocks can be inserted from the Table toolbar, or from the shortcut menu.
Multiple blocks can be inserted in a table cell. If there is more than one block
in a table cell, use the Manage Cell Content dialog box to customize the way
the cell content is displayed.

Inside the cell, the arrow keys move the cursor. Use the Table toolbar and the
shortcut menu to format text, import text, or make other changes to the text
in the cell.
See also:
■

Use Fields in Text on page 1458

■

Create Multiline Text on page 1410

1514 | Chapter 30 Tables

To define or modify data formats
1 In a table, click the table cells where you want to redefine data and
formatting.
2 On the Table toolbar, click Data Format.
3 Choose a data type, format, and other options for the selected table cells.
4 Enter data in the selected table cells. The data type and format you chose
determines how the data is displayed.
5 Click OK.

To change the properties of cells in a table
1 Click inside the table cell you want to change.
Hold down Shift and click inside another cell to select those two cells
and all the cells between them.
2 Use one of the following methods:
■

To change one or more properties, in the Properties palette, click the
value you want to change and enter or select a new value.

■

To restore the default properties, right-click. Click Remove Property
Overrides.

To copy the properties of a cell to other cells
1 Click inside the table cell whose properties you want to copy.
2 (Optional) To view the current properties of the selected table cell, press
Ctrl+1 to open the Properties palette.
All the properties of the cell are copied except the cell type: text or block.
3 On the Table toolbar, click Match Cell.
The cursor changes to a paintbrush.
4 To copy the properties to another table cell in the drawing, click inside
the cell.
5 Right-click or press Esc to stop copying properties.

To change the lineweight, linetype, or color of the borders of table cells
1 Click inside the table cell you want to change.

Add Text and Blocks to Tables | 1515

Hold down Shift and click inside another cell to select those two cells
and all the cells between them.
2 On the Table toolbar, click Cell Borders.
3 In the Cell Border Properties dialog box, select a lineweight, linetype and
color. To specify a double line border, select Double Line.
Use BYBLOCK to set the border properties to match the settings in the
table style that has been applied to the table.
4 Click one of the border type buttons to specify which borders of the cell
to modify, or select a border in the preview image.
5 Click OK.
6 Move the cursor outside the Properties palette, and press Esc to remove
selection, or select another cell.

To insert a block in a table cell
1 Select and right-click a cell. Click Insert ➤ Block.
2 In the Insert dialog box, select a block from the list of blocks in the
drawing, or click Browse to find a block in another drawing.
3 Specify the following properties for the block:
■

Cell Alignment. Specifies alignment for the block in the table cell. The
block is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and
bottom borders of the cell. The block is center-, left-, or right-aligned
with respect to the left and right borders of the cell.

■

Scale. Specifies the scale for the block reference. Enter a value or select
AutoFit to scale the block to fit in the selected cell.

■

Rotation Angle. Specifies a rotation angle for the block.

4 Click OK.
If the block has attributes attached, the Edit Attributes dialog box is
displayed.

To insert a field in a table cell
1 Double-click inside the table cell.
2 On the Table toolbar, click Insert Field, or press Ctrl+F.

1516 | Chapter 30 Tables

3 In the Field dialog box, select a category in the Field Category list to
display the field names in that category.
4 Select a field.
5 Select the format or other options available for that field.
6 Click OK.

Quick Reference
FIELD
Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically
as the field value changes.
FIND
Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text.
INSERT
Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
MATCHCELL
Applies the properties of a selected table cell to other table cells.
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
SPELL
Checks spelling in a drawing.
TABLE
Creates an empty table object.
TABLEDIT
Edits text in a table cell.
TABLEEXPORT
Exports data from a table object in CSV file format.

Add Text and Blocks to Tables | 1517

TABLESTYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles.
UPDATEFIELD
Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing.
CTABLESTYLE
Sets the name of the current table style.
FIELDDISPLAY
Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background.
FIELDEVAL
Controls how fields are updated.

Use Formulas in Table Cells
Table cells can contain formulas that do calculations using the values in other
table cells.
With a table cell selected, you can insert formulas from the Table toolbar as
well as the shortcut menu. You can also open the In-Place Text Editor and
enter a formula in a table cell manually.

Insert a Formula
In formulas, cells are referred to by their column letter and row number. For
example, the cell at top left in the table is A1. Merged cells use the number
of what would be the top-left cell. A range of cells is defined by the first and
last cells, with a colon between them. For example, the range A5:C10 includes
cells in rows 5 through 10 in columns A, B, and C.
A formula must start with an equal sign (=). The formulas for sum, average,
and count ignore empty cells and cells that do not resolve to a numeric value.
Other formulas display an error (#) if any cell in the arithmetic expression is
empty or contains nonnumeric data.
Use the Cell option to select a cell in another table in the same drawing. When
you have selected the cell, the In-Place Text Editor opens so you can enter the
rest of the formula.

1518 | Chapter 30 Tables

Copy a Formula
When you copy a formula to another cell in the table, the range changes to
reflect the new location. For example, if the formula in A10 sums A1 through
A9, when you copy it to B10, the range of cells changes so that it sums B1
through B9.
If you don't want a cell address to change when you copy and paste the
formula, add a dollar sign ($) to the column or row part of the address. For
example, if you enter $A10, the column stays the same and the row changes.
If you enter $A$10, both column and row stay the same.

Insert Data Automatically
You can automatically increment data in adjacent cells within a table by using
the AutoFill grip. For example, a table with a date column can have the dates
automatically entered by entering the first necessary date and dragging the
AutoFill grip.
Numbers will fill automatically by increments of 1 if one cell is selected and
dragged. Similarly, dates will resolve by increments of one day if only one cell
is selected. If two cells are manually filled with dates one week apart, the
remaining cells are incremented by one week.
See also:
■

Use Fields in Text on page 1458

To add a formula to table cells
1 Select the table cell where you want to place the formula by clicking
inside it. The Table toolbar is displayed.
2 On the Table toolbar, click one of the following:
■

Insert Formula ➤ Average

■

Insert Formula ➤ Sum

■

Insert Formula ➤ Count

■

Insert Formula ➤ Cell

3 Follow the prompts.
4 Edit the formula, if necessary.

Use Formulas in Table Cells | 1519

5 To save your changes and exit the editor, click in the drawing outside
the editor.

To manually enter a formula in a table cell
1 Double-click inside a table cell.
The In-place Text Editor opens.
2 Enter a formula (a function or an arithmetic expression), as in the
following examples:
■

=sum(a1:a25,b1). Sums the values in the first 25 rows of column A
and the first row in column B.

■

=average(a100:d100). Calculates the average of the values in the first
4 columns in row 100.

■

=count(a1:m500). Displays the total number of cells in column A
through column M in rows 1 through 100.

■

=(a6+d6)/e1. Adds the values in A6 and D6 and divides the total by
the value in E1.
Use a colon to define a range of cells and a comma for individual cells.
A formula must start with an equal sign (=) and can contain any of
the following signs: plus (+), minus (-), times (*), divided by (/),
exponent (^), and parentheses ().

3 To save your changes and exit the editor, click in the drawing outside
the editor.
The cell displays the result of the calculation.

To change the background color of column letters and row numbers for
tables
1 Click a grid line to select a table.
2 Right-click. Click Table Indicator Color.
3 In the Select Color dialog box, select a color.
4 Click OK.
The text color, size, and style and the line color are controlled by the
settings for column heads in the current table style.

1520 | Chapter 30 Tables

To insert a Formula field in a table cell
1 Click inside the table cell.
2 On the Table toolbar, click Insert Field.
3 In the Field dialog box, Field Category list, select Objects.
4 In Field Names, select Formula.
5 To enter a formula, do one of the following:
■

Click Average, Sum, or Count. The Field dialog box closes temporarily.
To specify a range, click inside the first and the last cell. The result is
appended to the formula.

■

Click Cell. The Field dialog box closes temporarily. Select a cell in a
table in the drawing. The cell address is appended to the formula.

6 (Optional) Select a format and a decimal separator.
7 Click OK.
8 To save your changes and exit the editor, click in the drawing outside
the editor.
The cell displays the result of the calculation.

To automatically fill cells with incremented data
1 Double-click inside a table cell.
2 Enter a numeric value; for example, 1 or 01/01/2000.
3 Press the down arrow and enter the next desired numeric value.
4 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK.
To change the format of the cell data, right-click the cell. Select Data
Format.
5 Select the cell or cells from which you want to increment data from.
6 Click the grip in the lower right corner of the cell or cells.
To change AutoFill options, right-click the AutoFill grip in the bottom
right-hand corner of the selected cell range and select an AutoFill option.
7 Drag the grip through the cells you would like to automatically increment.
A preview of the value for each cell will display to the right of the selected
grip.

Use Formulas in Table Cells | 1521

Quick Reference
FIELD
Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically
as the field value changes.
MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.
TABLE
Creates an empty table object.
TABLEEXPORT
Exports data from a table object in CSV file format.
TABLESTYLE
Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles.
UPDATEFIELD
Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing.
CTABLESTYLE
Sets the name of the current table style.
FIELDDISPLAY
Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background.
FIELDEVAL
Controls how fields are updated.
TABLEINDICATOR
Controls the display of row numbers and column letters when the In-Place
Text Editor is open for editing a table cell.

1522 | Chapter 30 Tables

Dimensions and Tolerances

You can add measurements to your drawing with several dimensioning commands. Use
dimension styles to format dimensions quickly and maintain industry or project dimensioning
standards.

Understand Basic Concepts of Dimensioning
You can create several types of dimensions, and you can control their appearance
by setting up dimension styles or by editing individual dimensions.

Overview of Dimensioning
Dimensioning is the process of adding measurement annotation to a drawing.
You can create dimensions for a variety of object types in many orientations.
The basic types of dimensioning are
■

Linear

■

Radial (radius, diameter and jogged)

■

Angular

■

Ordinate

■

Arc Length

Linear dimensions can be horizontal, vertical, aligned, rotated, baseline, or
continued (chained). Some examples are shown in the illustration.

1523

NOTE To simplify drawing organization and dimension scaling, it is recommended
that you create dimensions on layouts rather than in model space.

To create a dimension
1 Create a layer designated for dimensions and make it the current layer.
2 Near the bottom-left corner of the application window, click a layout
tab.
3 Click Dimension menu. Click a dimension option.
4 Follow the Command prompts.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMANGULAR
Creates an angular dimension.
DIMARC
Creates an arc length dimension.
DIMBREAK
Breaks or restores dimension and extension lines where they cross other
objects.
DIMDIAMETER
Creates a diameter dimension for a circle or an arc.

1524 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

DIMEDIT
Edits dimension text and extension lines.
DIMBREAK
Adds or removes inspection information for a selected dimension.
DIMJOGGED
Creates jogged dimensions for circles and arcs.
DIMBREAK
Adds or removes a jog line on a linear or aligned dimension.
DIMLINEAR
Creates a linear dimension.
DIMORDINATE
Creates ordinate dimensions.
DIMRADIUS
Creates a radius dimension for a circle or an arc.
DIMREASSOCIATE
Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects.
DIMBREAK
Adjusts the spacing between linear dimensions or angular dimensions.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
DIMTEDIT
Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.
QDIM
Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects.

Overview of Dimensioning | 1525

System Variables
DIMASSOC
Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are
exploded.

Parts of a Dimension
Here is a list of the parts of a dimension along with their descriptions.
Dimensions have several distinct elements: dimension text, dimension lines,
arrowheads, and extension lines.

Dimension text is a text string that usually indicates the measurement value.
The text can also include prefixes, suffixes, and tolerances.
A dimension line indicates the direction and extent of a dimension. For angular
dimensions, the dimension line is an arc.
Arrowheads, also called symbols of termination, are displayed at each end of
the dimension line. You can specify different sizes and shapes for arrowheads
or tick marks.
Extension lines, also called projection lines or witness lines, extend from the
feature to the dimension line.
A center mark is a small cross that marks the center of a circle or arc.
Centerlines are broken lines that mark the center of a circle or arc.

1526 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

Associative Dimensions
Dimensions can be associative, nonassociative, or exploded. Associative
dimensions adjust to changes in the geometric objects that they measure.
Dimension associativity defines the relationship between geometric objects
and the dimensions that give their distance and angles. There are three types
of associativity between geometric objects and dimensions.
■

Associative dimensions. Automatically adjust their locations, orientations,
and measurement values when the geometric objects associated with them
are modified. Dimensions in a layout may be associated to objects in model
space. The DIMASSOC system variable is set to 2.

■

Non-associative dimensions. Selected and modified with the geometry
they measure. Non-associative dimensions do not change when the
geometric objects they measure are modified. The dimension variable
DIMASSOC is set to 1.

■

Exploded dimensions. Contain a collection of separate objects rather than
a single dimension object. The DIMASSOC system variable is set to 0.

You can determine whether a dimension is associative or non-associative by
selecting the dimension and doing one of the following:
■

Use the Properties palette to display the properties of the dimension.

■

Use the LIST command to display the properties of the dimension.

Associative Dimensions | 1527

A dimension is considered associative even if only one end of the dimension
is associated with a geometric object. The DIMREASSOCIATE command displays
the associative and non-associative elements of a dimension.
You can also use the Quick Select dialog box to filter the selection of associative
or non-associative dimensions.

Special Situations and Limitations
You may need to use DIMREGEN to update associative dimensions after
panning or zooming, after opening a drawing that was modified with an earlier
release, or after opening a drawing with external references that have been
modified.
Although associative dimensions support most object types that you would
expect to dimension, they do not support the following:
■

Hatches

■

Multiline objects

■

2D solids

■

Objects with nonzero thickness

■

Images

■

DWF, DGN, and PDF underlays

When selecting objects to dimension, make sure that the objects that you
select do not include a directly overlapping object that does not support
associative dimensioning such as a 2D solid.
Associativity is not maintained between a dimension and a block reference if
the block is redefined.
Associativity is not maintained between a dimension and a 3D solid if the
shape of the 3D solid is modified.
Dimensions created with QDIM are not associative but may be associated
individually with DIMREASSOCIATE.
For information about working with associative dimensions in combination
with previous releases, see Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats
on page 1960.
See also:
■

Change Dimension Associativity on page 1597

1528 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

■

Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats on page 1960

To change the dimension associativity default
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, under Associative
Dimensioning, select or clear Make New Dimensions Associative.
3 Do either or both of the following:
■

Click Apply to record the current Options settings in the system
registry.

■

Click OK to record the current Options settings in the system registry
and close the Options dialog box.

All subsequently created dimensions in the drawing use the new setting. Unlike
most other option settings, dimension associativity is saved in the drawing
file rather than in the system registry.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMDISASSOCIATE
Removes associativity from selected dimensions.
DIMREASSOCIATE
Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects.
DIMREGEN
Updates the locations of all associative dimensions.
EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.
OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

Associative Dimensions | 1529

System Variables
DIMASSOC
Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are
exploded.

Use Dimension Styles
You can control the appearance of dimensions by changing settings. For
convenience and to help maintain dimensioning standards, you can store
these settings in dimension styles.

Overview of Dimension Styles
A dimension style is a named collection of dimension settings that controls
the appearance of dimensions, such as arrowhead style, text location, and
lateral tolerances.
You create dimension styles to specify the format of dimensions quickly, and
to ensure that dimensions conform to industry or project standards.
■

When you create a dimension, it uses the settings of the current dimension
style

■

If you change a setting in a dimension style, all dimensions in a drawing
that use the style update automatically

■

You can create dimension substyles that, for specified types of dimensions,
deviate from the current dimension style

■

If necessary, you can override a dimension style temporarily

To set the current dimension style
■

On the Styles toolbar, in the Dimension Styles control, click the arrow and
select a dimension style from the list.

To create a dimension substyle

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.

1530 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style from which you want
to create a substyle. Click New.
3 In the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, select the type of
dimension that will apply to the substyle from the Use For list. Click
Continue.
4 In the New Dimension Style dialog box, select the appropriate tab and
make changes to define the dimension substyle.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

Compare Dimension Styles and Variables
You can view all the settings in a dimension style. Dimension styles used in
externally referenced drawings are differentiated from those defined in your
current drawing.
You can list the dimension styles in the current drawing. You can also list all
dimensioning system variables and their current status or only the variables
affected by a dimension style.
When you list the current status of all dimensioning system variables, any
running overrides that apply to the current dimension style are listed. You
can also list the differences between a named dimension style and the current
dimension style.

Use Externally Referenced Dimension Styles
The program displays externally referenced dimension style names using the
same syntax as for other externally dependent named objects. When you view
externally referenced dimension styles using the Dimension Style Manager,
the name of the xref displays in the Styles list as Xref:”drawing name” with each
xref style appearing below the drawing name.

Compare Dimension Styles and Variables | 1531

For example, if the drawing file baseplat.dwg has a dimension style called
FRACTIONAL-1, and you attach baseplat.dwg as an xref to a new drawing, then
the xref dimension style is displayed in the Styles list of the Dimension Style
Manager as Xref:”baseplat.dwg”, and FRACTIONAL-1 appears under the drawing
name.
Externally referenced dimension styles can be examined, but they cannot be
modified or made current. You can use an externally referenced dimension
style as a template for creating a new dimension style in your current drawing.

To list all dimension settings for the current dimension style

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style from the Styles list.
3 Click Compare.
The dimensioning system variables, their current settings, and a brief
description are listed. Overrides are included.

To list settings for an existing dimension style

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, enter a dimension style name, or select
a dimension whose dimension style you want to examine.
3 Click Compare.
Affected variables, their settings, and a brief description of each are listed.
Overrides are not included.

To list dimension styles in the current drawing

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, under List, select All Styles or Style in
Use.

1532 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

To compare dimension styles

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style to compare from the
Styles list.
3 Click Compare.
The dimension style is compared to the current dimension style.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

Control Dimension Geometry
You can control the appearance of dimension lines, extension lines,
arrowheads, and center marks.

Control Dimension Lines
You can control dimension line properties including color, lineweight, and
spacing.
You can control several aspects of a dimension line. You can
■

Specify color and lineweight for visual effect and plotting

■

Suppress the dimension line or, if the dimension line is broken by text,
one or both halves

■

Control the spacing between successive dimension lines in baseline
dimensions

Control Dimension Geometry | 1533

■

Control the distance by which the dimension line extends beyond the
extension lines for architectural tick (oblique stroke) arrowheads

To modify the display of dimension lines

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

1534 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

System Variables
DIMCLRD
Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines.
DIMDLE
Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when
oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads.
DIMDLI
Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions.
DIMGAP
Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks
to accommodate dimension text.
DIMLTYPE
Sets the linetype of the dimension line.
DIMLWD
Assigns lineweight to dimension lines.
DIMSD1
Controls suppression of the first dimension line and arrowhead.
DIMSD2
Controls suppression of the second dimension line and arrowhead.
DIMSOXD
Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension
lines.
DIMTOFL
Controls whether a dimension line is drawn between the extension lines
even when the text is placed outside.

Control Extension Lines
You can control extension line properties including color, lineweight,
overshoot, and offset length.

Control Dimension Geometry | 1535

You can
■

Specify color and lineweight for visual effect and plotting

■

Suppress one or both extension lines if they are unnecessary, or if there is
not enough space

■

Specify how far beyond from the dimension line the extension line extends
(overshoot)

■

Control the extension origin offset, the distance between the extension
line origin, and the start of the extension line

■

Specify a fixed length for extension lines, as measured from the dimension
line toward the extension line origin

■

Specify a noncontinuous linetype, typically used for centerlines

■

Modify the angle of the extension lines of a selected dimension to make
them oblique

1536 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Fixed-Length Extension Lines
You can specify a dimension style that sets the total length for extension lines
starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin point.

The extension line offset distance from the origin will never be less than the
value specified by the DIMEXO system variable.
See also:
■

Create Dimensions with Oblique Extension Lines on page 1578

To modify the display of extension lines

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.

Control Dimension Geometry | 1537

3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Lines tab, under Extension
Lines, change the settings as needed.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

System Variables
DIMCLRE
Assigns colors to extension lines, center marks, and centerlines.
DIMDLE
Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when
oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads.
DIMEXE
Specifies how far to extend the extension line beyond the dimension line.
DIMEXO
Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points.
DIMFXL
Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line
toward the dimension origin.
DIMFXLON
Controls whether extension lines are set to a fixed length.
DIMLTEX1
Sets the linetype of the first extension line.
DIMLTEX2
Sets the linetype of the second extension line.

1538 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

DIMLWE
Assigns lineweight to extension lines.
DIMSE1
Suppresses display of the first extension line.
DIMSE2
Suppresses display of the second extension line.

Control Dimension Arrowheads
You can control the arrowhead symbols in dimensions and leaders including
their type, size, and visibility.
You can choose from many standard types of arrowheads, or you can create
your own arrowheads. Additionally, you can
■

Suppress the display of arrowheads, or use one arrowhead only

■

Apply a different type of arrowhead to each end of a dimension line

■

Control the size of arrowheads

■

Flip the direction of an arrowhead using the dimension shortcut menu

NOTE Flipped arrowheads maintain their appearance in versions later than
AutoCAD 2002. However, if you edit a drawing with flipped arrowheads in a
release earlier than AutoCAD 2006, the arrowhead directions will revert to their
original orientations.
See also:
■

Customize Arrowheads on page 1541

To choose an arrowhead

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.

Control Dimension Geometry | 1539

3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab,
under Arrowheads, select the arrowhead type for the first end of the
dimension line.
The second arrowhead is automatically set to the same type.
4 To set the second end of the dimension line to a different arrowhead
type, select an arrowhead type from the Second list.
5 In the Size box, enter a size for the arrowhead.
6 Click OK.
7 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

To flip the direction of an arrowhead
1 At the Command prompt, select a single dimension object near the
arrowhead that you want to flip.
2 Right-click. Click Flip Arrow.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

1540 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Customize Arrowheads
You can create your own custom arrowheads.
Arrowheads are stored as block definitions. To use your own arrowhead,
provide the name of an existing block definition. For information about
creating blocks, see Create Blocks Within a Drawing on page 929.
NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions
or leaders.
Arrowhead sizing relies on the overall dimension scale factor. When you create
a dimension, the block is inserted where the arrowheads would normally go.
The object's X and Y scale factors are set to arrowhead size overall scale. The
dimension line is trimmed by text gap x overall scale units at each end. To trim
the dimension line, the rightmost block is inserted with a zero rotation angle
for horizontal dimensioning. The leftmost block is rotated 180 degrees about
its insertion point.
NOTE The insertion point a block is defined with affects its placement as a custom
arrowhead on a dimension or leader. For information on changing the insertion
point of a block, see Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks on page 931.
If you use paper-space scaling, the scale factor is computed before applying it
to the arrowhead size value.
See also:
■

Create Blocks Within a Drawing on page 929

■

Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks on page 931

To use your own arrowhead symbol

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.
3 In the Dimension Style Manager, Symbols and Arrows tab, under
Arrowheads, select User Arrow from the First arrowhead list.
4 In the Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box, enter the name of your
block. Click OK.

Control Dimension Geometry | 1541

5 To choose a different custom arrowhead for the second arrowhead, repeat
steps 3 and 4, choosing User Arrow from the Second arrowhead list
(optional).
6 Click OK.
7 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

Quick Reference
Commands
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
WBLOCK
Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file.

System Variables
DIMASZ
Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads.
DIMBLK
Sets the arrowhead block displayed at the ends of dimension lines.
DIMBLK1
Sets the arrowhead for the first end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is
on.
DIMBLK2
Sets the arrowhead for the second end of the dimension line when DIMSAH
is on.
DIMCLRD
Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines.

1542 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

DIMDLE
Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when
oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads.
DIMSAH
Controls the display of dimension line arrowhead blocks.
DIMTSZ
Specifies the size of oblique strokes drawn instead of arrowheads for linear,
radius, and diameter dimensioning.

Control Dimension Text
You can control the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, and leader
lines relative to the dimension and extension lines.

Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines
Dimension text and arrowheads usually appear between the extension lines
when there is enough space. You can specify how these elements are placed
when space is limited.
Many factors, such as the size of extension line spacing and arrowhead size,
influence how dimension text and arrowheads fit within the extension lines.
In general, the best fit, given the available space, is applied. If possible, both
text and arrowheads are accommodated between the extension lines, no matter
what fit option you choose.
When creating new dimensions, you can choose to place text by entering a
coordinate or using the pointing device; this is known as user-defined text
placement. Alternatively, the program can compute the text position for you.
The options for automatic fitting of text and arrowheads are listed in the
Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab.
For example, you can specify that text and arrowheads be kept together. In
this case, if there is not room for both between the extension lines, they are
both placed outside. You can specify that if there is room for only text or
arrowheads, then either text only or arrowheads only are placed between the
extension lines.
The following illustrations show how the program applies a "best fit" for
arrowheads and text.

Control Dimension Text | 1543

If there is no room for text between the extension lines, you can have a leader
line created automatically. This is useful in cases where text outside the
extension lines would interfere with other geometry, for example, in continued
dimensions. Whether text is drawn to the right or the left of the leader is
controlled by the horizontal justification setting in the Modify/New Dimension
Style dialog box, Text tab. Also, you can fit text and arrowheads by changing
their size.
Even if the arrowheads are outside the extension lines, you can have a line
drawn between the extension lines. This is called forcing an internal line and
is illustrated as follows.

Fit Diameter Dimension Text
You can draw several different diameter dimensions depending on text
placement, horizontal settings on the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog
box, Text tab, and whether you select the Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines
option on the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab.

1544 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

To place text within extension lines

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Fit Options,
select an option.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.
If there is enough room, text is fit between extension lines.

To force an internal line and choose a fit option

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, Under Fine Tuning,
select Always Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines.
4 Under Fit Options, select an option.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

Control Dimension Text | 1545

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

System Variables
DIMATFIT
Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged when space is not
sufficient to place both within the extension lines.
DIMJUST
Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text.
DIMLWD
Assigns lineweight to dimension lines.
DIMTAD
Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line.
DIMTXTDIRECTION
Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text.
DIMTIH
Controls the position of dimension text inside the extension lines for all
dimension types except Ordinate.
DIMTIX
Draws text between extension lines.
DIMTOFL
Controls whether a dimension line is drawn between the extension lines
even when the text is placed outside.
DIMTOH
Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines.
DIMTVP
Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or below the dimension
line.

1546 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

DIMUPT
Controls options for user-positioned text.

Control the Location of Dimension Text
You can locate dimension text manually and specify its alignment and
orientation.
The program comes with several justification settings that facilitate compliance
with international standards, or you can choose your own location for the
text.

Many of the settings are interdependent. Example images in the Dimension
Style Manager are updated dynamically to illustrate how text appears as you
change the settings.

Align Dimension Text
Whether text is inside or outside the extension lines, you can choose whether
it is aligned with the dimension line or remains horizontal. The following
examples show two combinations of these options.

Control Dimension Text | 1547

The default alignment is horizontal dimension text, even for vertical
dimensions.

Position Dimension Text Horizontally
The position of the text along the dimension line in relation to the extension
lines is referred to as text placement. To place text yourself when you create
a dimension, use the Place Text Manually option on the Modify/New
Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab. Use the text placement options to
automatically place text at the center of the dimension line, at either extension
line, or over either extension line.

First and second extension lines are defined by the order in which you specified
the extension line origins when you created the dimension. For angular
dimensions, the second extension line is counterclockwise from the first. In
the following illustrations, 1 is the first extension line origin and 2 the second.

If you place text manually, you can place the dimension text anywhere along
the dimension line, inside or outside the extension lines, as you create the

1548 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

dimension. This option provides flexibility and is especially useful when space
is limited. However, the horizontal alignment options provide better accuracy
and consistency between dimensions.

Position Dimension Text Vertically
The position of the text relative to the dimension line is referred to as vertical
text placement. Text can be placed above or below or centered within the
dimension line. In the ANSI standards, centered text usually splits the
dimension line. In the ISO standards, it is usually above or outside the
dimension line. For example, ISO standards permit angular dimension text
to appear in any of the ways shown.

Other settings, such as Text Alignment, affect the vertical alignment of text.
For example, if Horizontal Alignment is selected, text inside the extension
lines and centered within the dimension line is horizontal, as shown in the
leftmost illustration above. The text is horizontal even if the dimension line
is not itself horizontal.

To align text with the dimension line

Control Dimension Text | 1549

To place text at the second extension line

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Text tab, under Text
Placement, select Over Ext Line 2 from the Horizontal list box.
The example area reflects your selection.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

To place dimension text manually

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Fine Tuning,
select Place Text Manually When Dimensioning.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.
As you create dimensions, you can move the text along the dimension
line. Use the pointing device or enter coordinates to specify the dimension
line and text locations.

To place text above the dimension line

1550 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
DIMTEDIT
Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line.

System Variables
DIMJUST
Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text.
DIMTAD
Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line.
DIMTXTDIRECTION
Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text.
DIMTIH
Controls the position of dimension text inside the extension lines for all
dimension types except Ordinate.
DIMTOH
Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines.
DIMTVP
Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or below the dimension
line.
DIMUPT
Controls options for user-positioned text.

Control Dimension Text | 1551

Control the Appearance of Dimension Text
You can include prefixes, suffixes, and user-supplied text in dimensions. You
can also control the text style and formatting used in dimension text.
The program supports a mixture of user-supplied text, prefixes and suffixes
supplied by the dimension style, and generated measurements. For example,
you could add a diameter symbol as a prefix to a measurement or add the
abbreviation for a unit, such as mm, as a suffix. Text in this context refers to
all dimension text, prefixes and suffixes, primary and alternate units, and
lateral tolerances. Geometric tolerances are controlled independently.
Dimension text is treated as a single string of text, which you create and format
using your text editor.

Control the Text Style in Dimensions
The appearance of dimension text is governed by the text style selected in the
Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box, Text tab. You can choose a text style
while creating a dimension style and specify a text color and a height
independent of the current text style's height setting. You can also specify the
gap between base dimension text and the box that surrounds it.
The text styles used for dimensions are the same text styles used by all text
created in your drawing.
For more information, see Work with Text Styles on page 1469.

Supply User Text to Dimensions
In addition to the prefixes and suffixes specified for primary and alternate
units, you can supply your own text as you create a dimension. Because the
prefix, suffix, and user-supplied text form a single text string, you can represent
tolerance stacks and apply changes to font, text size, and other characteristics
using the text editor.
To add user text above and below the dimension line, use the separator symbol
\X. Text that precedes this symbol is aligned with and above the dimension
line. Text that follows the \X symbol is aligned with and below the dimension
line. The space between the dimension line and the text is determined by the
value you enter in Offset from Dim Lim on the Modify/New Dimension Style
dialog box, Text tab.

1552 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Example: User Text in Dimensions
In this example, the primary dimension measurement is 5.08, and the alternate
dimension measurement is 2.00. The primary units have the suffix H7/h6, and
the alternate units have the suffix inches.
At the text prompt, while creating the dimension, you enter the following
format string:
<> H7/h6\XSee Note 26\P[ ]
The angle brackets represent the primary units, and the square brackets
represent the alternate units. The \X separates text above the dimension line
from text below the dimension line. The \P is a paragraph break.
The resulting text appears as follows:

To control the text style in dimensions

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Text tab, under Text
Appearance, select a text style.
4 If the current text style does not have a fixed height, enter the height of
dimension text in the Text Height box.
5 Under Tolerances, enter a height for tolerance values in the Scaling for
Height box.
6 In the Offset from Dim Line box, enter a value for the gap around base
dimension text.
7 Select a color from the Text Color box.
8 Click OK
9 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

Control Dimension Text | 1553

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

System Variables
DIMCLRT
Assigns colors to dimension text.
DIMGAP
Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks
to accommodate dimension text.
DIMTFAC
Specifies a scale factor for the text height of fractions and tolerance values
relative to the dimension text height, as set by DIMTXT.
DIMTFILL
Controls the background of dimension text.
DIMTFILLCLR
Sets the color for the text background in dimensions.
DIMTXSTY
Specifies the text style of the dimension.
DIMTXT
Specifies the height of dimension text, unless the current text style has a
fixed height.
DIMTXTDIRECTION
Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text.

Control Dimension Values
The numeric values displayed in dimensions can appear in several formats.
You can also control how numeric distances are represented.

1554 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Control the Display of Dimension Units
The numeric values of dimensions can be displayed as a single measurement
or in two measurement systems. In either case, you can control details of how
the numeric values are presented.
The settings for primary units control the display of the dimension values,
including the unit format, the numeric precision, and the decimal separator
style. For example, you can enter the diameter symbol as a prefix, as shown
in the illustration. Any prefix you specify replaces the prefixes normally used
for diameter and radius dimensions (unicode 2205 and R, respectively).

These settings are available on the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box,
Primary Units tab.

Control the Display of Alternate Units
You can create dimensions in two systems of measurement simultaneously.
A common use of this feature is to add feet and inches dimensions to drawings
created using metric units. The alternate units appear in square brackets ([ ])
in the dimension text. Alternate units cannot be applied to angular dimensions.
If alternate-units dimensioning is on when you edit a linear dimension, the
measurement is multiplied by an alternate scale value that you specify. This
value represents the number of alternate units per current unit of measurement.
The default value for imperial units is 25.4, which is the number of millimeters
per inch. The default value for metric units is about 0.0394, which is the
number of inches per millimeter. The number of decimal places is specified
by the precision value for alternate units.
For example, for imperial units, if the alternate scale setting is the default
value, 25.4, and the alternate precision is 0.00, the dimension might look like
the following figure.

Control Dimension Values | 1555

To add and format primary units

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab, under
Linear or Angular Dimensions, select a unit format and precision value
for the primary units.
4 Under Linear Dimensions, enter any prefix and suffix for the displayed
dimension.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

To add and format alternate units

Select a unit format from the list.

■

Select a precision value for the alternate units.

1556 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

■

Enter any prefix and suffix for the displayed dimension, including a
space character if you want a gap between the dimension and the
prefix or suffix.

5 Click OK.
6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

System Variables
DIMALT
Controls the display of alternate units in dimensions.
DIMALTD
Controls the number of decimal places in alternate units.
DIMALTF
Controls the multiplier for alternate units.
DIMALTTD
Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance values in the alternate
units of a dimension.
DIMALTU
Sets the units format for alternate units of all dimension substyles except
Angular.
DIMALTZ
Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate unit dimension values.
DIMAPOST
Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the alternate dimension
measurement for all types of dimensions except angular.

Control Dimension Values | 1557

DIMAUNIT
Sets the units format for angular dimensions.
DIMDEC
Sets the number of decimal places displayed for the primary units of a
dimension.
DIMDSEP
Specifies a single-character decimal separator to use when creating dimensions
whose unit format is decimal.
DIMLFAC
Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements.
DIMLUNIT
Sets units for all dimension types except Angular.
DIMPOST
Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the dimension measurement.
DIMTDEC
Sets the number of decimal places to display in tolerance values for the
primary units in a dimension.

Round Off Dimension Values
You can round off the numeric values in dimensions and lateral tolerances.
You can round off all dimension values except those for angular dimensions.
For example, if you specify a round-off value of 0.25, all distances are rounded
to the nearest 0.25 unit. The number of digits displayed after the decimal
point depends on the precision set for primary and alternate units and lateral
tolerance values.

1558 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

To round off dimension values

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.
3 In Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab, under Linear
Dimensions, enter the round-off value.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

System Variables
DIMRND
Rounds all dimensioning distances to the specified value.

Suppress Zeros in Dimensions
You can suppress leading and trailing zeros in the numeric portion of
dimension text. You can also specify the sub unit for the dimension distance.
If you suppress leading zeros in decimal dimensions, 0.500 becomes .500. If
you suppress trailing zeros, 0.500 becomes 0.5. You can suppress both leading
and trailing zeros so that 0.5000 becomes .5 and 0.0000 becomes 0.
For dimension distances less than one unit, you can set the dimension distance
to display in sub units. If the distance is shown in m, you can set to display
distances less than one m in cm or mm.
The table shows the effect of selecting each option and provides examples of
the architectural units style. If feet are included with a fractional inch, the

Control Dimension Values | 1559

number of inches is indicated as zero, no matter which option you select.
Thus, the dimension 4'-3/4" becomes 4'-0 3/4".
Zero suppression for feet and inches
Option

Effect

Examples

No options
selected

Includes zero feet and
zero inches

0'-0 1/2"

0'-6"

1'-0"

1'-0
3/4"

0 Inches selected

Suppresses zero inches
(includes zero feet)

0'-0 1/2"

0'-6"

1'-0
3/4"

0 Feet selected

Suppresses zero feet (includes zero inches)

1/2"

1'-0"

1'-0
3/4"

0 Feet and 0
Inches selected

Suppresses zero feet and
zero inches

1/2"

1'-0
3/4"

To suppress zeros in dimension values

Sub-units factor: Suppresses leading zeros in decimal values.

■

Trailing. Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal values.

■

0 Feet. Suppresses display of 0 feet in feet and inches values.

■

0 Inches. Suppresses display of 0 inches in feet and inches values.

4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

1560 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

To display dimension value in sub units

Sub-units factor: Sets the number of sub units to a unit. It is used to
display the dimension distance in a sub unit, for distances less than
one unit. For example, enter 100 if the suffix is m and the sub-unit
suffix is to display in cm.

■

Sub-units suffix: Includes a suffix to the dimension text sub unit. You
can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For
example, enter cm to for .96m to display as 96cm.

4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

System Variables
DIMALTTZ
Controls suppression of zeros in tolerance values.
DIMALTZ
Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate unit dimension values.
DIMAZIN
Suppresses zeros for angular dimensions.
DIMTZIN
Controls the suppression of zeros in tolerance values.

Control Dimension Values | 1561

DIMZIN
Controls the suppression of zeros in the primary unit value.

Display Lateral Tolerances
Lateral tolerances are values indicating the amount a measured distance can
vary. You can control whether lateral tolerances are displayed and you can
choose from several styles of lateral tolerances.
A lateral tolerance specifies the amount by which a dimension can vary. By
specifying tolerances in manufacturing, you can control the degree of accuracy
needed for a feature. A feature is some aspect of a part, such as a point, line,
axis, or surface.
You can apply tolerances directly to a dimension by appending the tolerances
to the dimension text. These dimension tolerances indicate the largest and
smallest permissible size of the dimension. You can also apply geometric
tolerances, which indicate deviations of form, profile, orientation, location,
and runout.
Lateral tolerances can be specified from theoretically exact measurements.
These are called basic dimensions and have a box drawn around them.
If the dimension value can vary in both directions, the plus and minus values
you supply are appended to the dimension value as deviation tolerances. If
the deviation tolerance values are equal, they are displayed with a sign and
they are known as symmetrical. Otherwise, the plus value goes above the
minus value.

If the tolerances are applied as limits, the program uses the plus and minus
values you supply to calculate a maximum and minimum value. These values
replace the dimension value. If you specify limits, the upper limit goes above
the lower.

1562 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Format Lateral Tolerances
You can control the vertical placement of tolerance values relative to the main
dimension text. Tolerances can align with the top, middle, or bottom of the
dimension text.

Along with vertical placement of tolerance values, you can also control the
horizontal alignment of the upper and lower tolerance values. The upper and
lower tolerance values can be aligned using either the operational symbols or
decimal separators.

You can also control zero suppression as you can with the primary and
alternate units. Suppressing zeros in lateral tolerances has the same effect as
suppressing them in the primary and alternate units. If you suppress leading
zeros, 0.5 becomes .5, and if you suppress trailing zeros, 0.5000 becomes 0.5.

Control Dimension Values | 1563

See also:
■

Add Geometric Tolerances on page 1621

To specify methods for lateral tolerances

If you select Limits, enter upper and lower tolerance deviation in the
Upper Value and Lower Value boxes.

■

If you select Symmetrical tolerances, Lower Value is not available,
because you need only one tolerance value.

■

If you select Basic, enter a value in Offset from Dim Line (on the Text
tab) to represent the gap between the text and its enclosing box.

4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

To align and suppress zeros in tolerance values

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Tolerances tab, under
Tolerance Format, select the alignment from the Vertical Position list.
4 To suppress zeros in primary or alternate units, under Zero Suppression,
select Leading to suppress leading zeros. Select Trailing to suppress trailing
zeros.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

1564 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

System Variables
DIMALTTD
Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance values in the alternate
units of a dimension.
DIMALTTZ
Controls suppression of zeros in tolerance values.
DIMGAP
Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks
to accommodate dimension text.
DIMLIM
Generates dimension limits as the default text.
DIMTDEC
Sets the number of decimal places to display in tolerance values for the
primary units in a dimension.
DIMTFAC
Specifies a scale factor for the text height of fractions and tolerance values
relative to the dimension text height, as set by DIMTXT.
DIMTM
Sets the minimum (or lower) tolerance limit for dimension text when
DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on.
DIMTOL
Appends tolerances to dimension text.
DIMTP
Sets the maximum (or upper) tolerance limit for dimension text when
DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on.

Control Dimension Values | 1565

DIMTZIN
Controls the suppression of zeros in tolerance values.

Control the Display of Fractions
You can control the format of the fraction displayed in dimensions.
You can set the fraction format in dimensions using the DIMFRAC system
variable when the DIMLUNIT system variable is set to 4 (architecture) or 5
(fractional).
The following illustration shows the different fraction formats available.

These settings are available on the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box,
Primary Units tab.

To specify the fraction format

Horizontal

■

Diagonal

■

Not Stacked

4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

1566 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

System Variables
DIMFRAC
Sets the fraction format when DIMLUNIT is set to 4 (Architectural) or 5
(Fractional).
DIMLUNIT
Sets units for all dimension types except Angular.

Set the Scale for Dimensions
You can specify the size of dimensions in your drawing. How you set dimension
size depends on the method you use to lay out and plot drawings.
Dimension scale affects the size of the dimension geometry relative to the
objects in the drawing. Dimension scale affects sizes, such as text height and
arrowhead size, and offsets, such as the extension line origin offset.
You should set these sizes and offsets to values that represent their actual
plotted size. Dimension scale does not apply the overall scale factor to
tolerances or measured lengths, coordinates, or angles.
NOTE You can use annotative scaling to control the overall scale of dimensions
displayed in layout viewports. When you create annotative dimensions, they are
scaled based on the current annotation scale setting and automatically displayed
at the correct size.
Setting dimension scale depends on how you lay out your drawing. There are
three methods used to create dimensions in a drawing layout:
■

Dimension in model space for plotting in model space. This is the
traditional method used with single-view drawings. To create dimensions
that are scaled correctly for plotting, set the DIMSCALE system variable to
the inverse of the intended plot scale. For example, if the plot scale is 1/4,
set DIMSCALE to 4.

Set the Scale for Dimensions | 1567

■

Dimension in model space for plotting in paper space. This was the
preferred method for complex, multiple-view drawings prior to AutoCAD
2002. Use this method when the dimensions in a drawing need to be
referenced by other drawings (xrefs) or when creating isometric dimensions
in 3D isometric views. To prevent the dimensions in one layout viewport
from being displayed in other layout viewports, create a dimensioning
layer for each layout viewport that is frozen in all other layout viewports.
To create dimensions that are scaled automatically for display in a paper
space layout, set the DIMSCALE system variable to 0.

■

Dimension in layouts. This is the simplest dimensioning method.
Dimensions are created in paper space by selecting model space objects or
by specifying object snap locations on model space objects. By default,
associativity between paper space dimensions and model space objects is
maintained. No additional scaling is required for dimensions created in a
paper space layout: DIMLFAC and DIMSCALE do not need to be changed
from their default value of 1.0000.

NOTE When you dimension model space objects in paper space using associative
dimensions, dimension values for the display scale of each viewport are
automatically adjusted. This adjustment is combined with the current setting for
DIMLFAC and is reported by the LIST command as a dimension style override. For
nonassociative dimensions, you must set DIMLFAC manually.
See also:
■

Draw, Scale, and Annotate in Model Space on page 425

■

Scale Views in Layout Viewports on page 450

■

Scale Annotations on page 1324

To set the overall dimension scale

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.
3 In Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Scale for Dimension
Features, enter a value for the overall scale.
4 Click OK.

1568 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

To set the dimension scale for model space dimensions in layouts

To set dimension scale for creating dimensions in a layout
1 Click a layout tab to switch to paper space.
2 To create dimensions in paper space with the correct model space
dimension values, use object snap modes to snap to points in model
space from paper space or select the objects directly.
The DIMLFAC system variable can be changed if you need to convert the
linear dimension values between the imperial and metric measurement
systems.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMREGEN
Updates the locations of all associative dimensions.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

System Variables
DIMASSOC
Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are
exploded.

Set the Scale for Dimensions | 1569

DIMLFAC
Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements.
DIMSCALE
Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify
sizes, distances, or offsets.

Create Dimensions
You can create all of the standard types of dimensions.

Create Linear Dimensions
You can create linear dimensions with horizontal, vertical, and aligned
dimension lines. These linear dimensions can also be stacked, or they can be
created end to end.

Overview of Creating Linear Dimensions
Linear dimensions can be horizontal, vertical, or aligned. With aligned
dimensions, the dimension line is parallel to the line (imaginary or real)
between the extension line origins. Baseline (or parallel) and continued (or
chain) dimensions are series of consecutive dimensions that are based on a
linear dimension.
In all four illustrations, the extension line origins are designated explicitly at
1 and 2, respectively. The dimension line location is specified at 3.

1570 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

As you create linear dimensions, you can modify the content of the text, the
angle of the text, or the angle of the dimension line.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMALIGNED
Creates an aligned linear dimension.
DIMBASELINE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the
previous or selected dimension.
DIMCONTINUE
Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created
dimension.
DIMEDIT
Edits dimension text and extension lines.
DIMLINEAR
Creates a linear dimension.

Create Linear Dimensions | 1571

DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
QDIM
Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects.

System Variables
DIMDLI
Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions.

Create Horizontal and Vertical Dimensions
You can create dimensions using only the horizontal or vertical components
of the locations or objects that you specify.
The program automatically applies a horizontal or vertical dimension according
to the extension line origins that you specify or the location where you select
an object; however, you can override this as you create the dimension by
specifying that a dimension be horizontal or vertical. For example, in the
following illustration, a horizontal dimension is drawn by default unless you
specify a vertical one.

To create a horizontal or vertical dimension

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Linear.
2 Press Enter to select the object to dimension, or specify the first and
second extension line origins.

1572 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

3 Before specifying the dimension line location, you can override the
dimension direction and edit the text, the text angle, or the dimension
line angle:
■

To rotate the extension lines, enter r (Rotated). Then enter the
dimension line angle.

■

To edit the text, enter m (multiline text). In the In-place Text Editor,
revise the text. Click OK.
Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or removes
the dimension value calculated by the program. Adding text before
or after the brackets appends text before or after the dimension value.

■

To rotate the text, enter a (Angle). Then enter the text angle.

4 Specify the dimension line location.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMLINEAR
Creates a linear dimension.

System Variables
DIMEXO
Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points.

Create Aligned Dimensions
You can create dimensions that are parallel to the locations or objects that
you specify.
In aligned dimensions, the dimension line is parallel to the extension line
origins. The illustration shows two examples of aligned dimensioning. The
object is selected (1), and the location of the aligned dimension is specified
(2). The extension lines are drawn automatically.

Create Linear Dimensions | 1573

To create an aligned dimension

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Aligned.
2 Press Enter to select the object to dimension, or specify the first and
second extension line origins.
3 Before specifying the dimension line location, you can edit the text or
change the text angle. Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>)
changes or removes the dimension value calculated by the program.
Adding text before or after the brackets appends text before or after the
dimension value.
■

To edit the text using multiline text, enter m (multiline text). In the
In-place Text Editor, revise the text. Click OK.

■

To edit the text using single-line text, enter t (Text). Revise the text
at the Command prompt and press Enter.

■

To rotate the text, enter a (Angle). Then enter the text angle.

4 Specify the dimension line location.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMALIGNED
Creates an aligned linear dimension.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

1574 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

System Variables
DIMEXO
Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points.

Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions
Baseline dimensions are multiple dimensions measured from the same baseline.
Continued dimensions are multiple dimensions placed end to end.
You must create a linear, aligned, or angular dimension before you create
baseline or continued dimensions. You create baseline dimensions
incrementally from the most recently created dimension in the current session.

Both baseline and continued dimensions are measured from the previous
extension line unless you specify another point as the point of origin.
TIP Hover over a dimension line endpoint grip to quickly access the Baseline or
Continued commands from the grip menu. For more information, see Use
Dimension Line Grips on page 1595.

To create a baseline linear dimension

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Baseline.
By default, the origin of the last linear dimension created is used as the
first extension line for the new baseline dimension. You are prompted
for the second dimension line.
2 Use an object snap to select the second extension line origin, or press
Enter to select any dimension as the base dimension.

Create Linear Dimensions | 1575

The program automatically places the second dimension line at the
distance specified by the Baseline Spacing option in the Dimension Style
Manager, Lines tab.
3 Use an object snap to specify the next extension line origin.
4 Continue to select extension line origins as required.
5 Press Enter twice to end the command.

To create a continued linear dimension

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Continue.
The program uses the origin of the second extension line of the existing
dimension as the first extension line origin.
2 Use object snaps to specify additional extension line origins.
3 Press Enter twice to end the command.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMBASELINE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the
previous or selected dimension.
DIMCONTINUE
Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created
dimension.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

System Variables
DIMDLI
Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions.

1576 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Create Rotated Dimensions
In rotated dimensions, the dimension line is placed at an angle to the extension
line origins.
The illustration shows an example of a rotated dimension. In the example,
the angle specified for dimension rotation is equal to the angle of the slot.

To create a rotated dimension

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Linear.
2 Press Enter to select the object to dimension or specify the first and second
extension line origins.
3 To rotate the dimension line, enter r (Rotated). Then enter the dimension
line angle.
4 Specify the dimension line location.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMALIGNED
Creates an aligned linear dimension.
DIMLINEAR
Creates a linear dimension.

Create Linear Dimensions | 1577

Create Dimensions with Oblique Extension Lines
You can create dimensions with extension lines that are not perpendicular to
their dimension lines.
Extension lines are created perpendicular to the dimension line. However, if
the extension lines conflict with other objects in a drawing, you can change
their angle after the dimension has been drawn.
New dimensions are not affected when you make an existing dimension
oblique.

To make extension lines oblique

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Oblique..
2 Select the dimension.
3 Enter a value for the angle of obliqueness, or specify two points.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMEDIT
Edits dimension text and extension lines.

1578 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Create Radial Dimensions
Radial dimensions measure the radii and diameters of arcs and circles with
optional centerlines or a center mark.
There are two types of radial dimensions:
■

DIMRADIUS measures the radius of an arc or circle, and displays the
dimension text with the letter R in front of it.

■

DIMDIAMETER measures the diameter of an arc or circle, and displays the
dimension text with the diameter symbol in front of it.

For horizontal dimension text, if the angle of the radial dimension line is
greater than 15 degrees from horizontal, a hook line, also called a dogleg or
landing, one arrowhead long, is created next to the dimension text.

Control Extension Lines
When an arc is dimensioned, the radial or diametric dimension does not have
to be positioned along the arc directly. If a dimension is positioned past the
end of an arc, either an extension line will be drawn that follows the path of
the arc being dimensioned or no extension line will be drawn. When the
extension line is suppressed (off), the dimension line of the radial or diametric
dimension is drawn through the center point of the arc instead of to the
extension line.

Create Radial Dimensions | 1579

The DIMSE1 system variable controls whether or not a radial or diametric
dimension will be drawn with an extension line when it is positioned off the
end of an arc. When the display of the arc extension line is not suppressed,
a gap between the arc and arc extension line is made. The size of the gap
drawn is controlled with the DIMEXO system variable.

Control Centerlines and Center Marks
Depending on your dimension style settings, center marks and lines generate
automatically for diameter and radius dimensions. They are created only if
the dimension line is placed outside the circle or arc. You can create centerlines
and center marks directly with the DIMCENTER command.
You can control the size and visibility of centerlines and center marks on the
New/Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab, under
Center Marks. You can also access this setting with the DIMCEN system
variable.

1580 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

The size of the centerline is the length of the centerline segment that extends
outside the circle or arc. It is also the size of the gap between the center mark
and the start of the centerline. The size of the center mark is the distance from
the center of the circle or arc to the end of the center mark.

Create Jogged Radius Dimensions
With the DIMJOGGED command, you can create jogged radius dimensions,
also called “foreshortened radius dimensions,” when the center of an arc or
circle is located off the layout and cannot be displayed in its true location.
The origin point of the dimension can be specified at a more convenient
location called the center location override.

You can control the default angle of the jog in the New/Modify Dimension
Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab, under Radius Dimension Jog.

Create Radial Dimensions | 1581

Once a jogged radius dimension is created, you can modify the jog and the
center location override by
■

Using grips to move the features

■

Changing the locations of the features with the Properties palette

■

Using STRETCH

NOTE Jogged radius dimensions can be viewed but not edited in versions previous
to AutoCAD 2006. Also, if you make dramatic changes to the associated geometry,
you may get unpredictable results for the jogged radius dimension.
See also:
■

Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines on page 1543

To create a diameter dimension

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Diameter.
2 Select the arc or circle to dimension.
3 Enter options as needed:
■

To edit the dimension text content, enter t (Text) or m (multiline
text). Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or
removes the dimension value. Adding text before or after the brackets
appends text before or after the dimension value.

■

To change the dimension text angle, enter a (Angle).

4 Specify the leader line location.

To create a radius dimension

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Radius.
2 Select an arc, circle, or polyline arc segment.
3 Enter options as needed:
■

To edit the dimension text content, enter t (Text) or m (multiline
text). Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or

1582 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

removes the dimension value. Adding text before or after the brackets
appends text before or after the dimension value.
■

To edit the dimension text angle, enter a (Angle).

4 Specify the leader line location.

To create a jogged radius dimension

1 Click Dimension menu ➤ Jogged.
2 Select an arc, circle, or polyline arc segment.
3 Specify a point for the dimension origin (the center location override).
4 Specify a point for the dimension line angle and the dimension text
location.
5 Specify another point for the location of the dimension jog.

To create centerlines automatically with radial dimensions

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab,
under Center Marks, click Line.
4 In the Size box, enter the length of the centerline overshoot. Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.
The example area in the dialog box displays the results of your changes.

To create centerlines or center marks on an arc or circle

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.

Create Radial Dimensions | 1583

3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab,
under Center Marks, click Line.
4 In the Size box, enter the length of the centerline overshoot. Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Center Mark.
7 Select an arc or a circle.

To change the display arc extension line for radial or diametric dimensions
1 Select the radial or diametric dimension for which you want to suppress
the arc extension line.
2 Right-click in the drawing. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, Lines & Arrows category, click Ext Line.
4 Click the arrow next to Ext Line, and select On or Off from the list.
■

Select On to display the arc extension line.

■

Select Off to suppress the display of the arc extension line.

5 Press Esc to deselect the selected dimension.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMCENTER
Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs.
DIMDIAMETER
Creates a diameter dimension for a circle or an arc.
DIMJOGGED
Creates jogged dimensions for circles and arcs.
DIMRADIUS
Creates a radius dimension for a circle or an arc.

1584 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

DIMSTYLE
Stores the name of the current dimension style.
QDIM
Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects.

System Variables
DIMATFIT
Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged when space is not
sufficient to place both within the extension lines.
DIMCEN
Controls drawing of circle or arc center marks and centerlines by the
DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS commands.
DIMEXO
Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points.
DIMJOGANG
Determines the angle of the transverse segment of the dimension line in a
jogged radius dimension.
DIMJUST
Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text.
DIMSE1
Suppresses display of the first extension line.
DIMTAD
Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line.
DIMTXTDIRECTION
Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text.
DIMTIH
Controls the position of dimension text inside the extension lines for all
dimension types except Ordinate.
DIMTMOVE
Sets dimension text movement rules.

Create Radial Dimensions | 1585

DIMTOFL
Controls whether a dimension line is drawn between the extension lines
even when the text is placed outside.
DIMTOH
Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines.
DIMUPT
Controls options for user-positioned text.

Create Angular Dimensions
Angular dimensions measure the angle between two lines or three points.
To measure the angle between two radii of a circle, you select the circle and
specify the angle endpoints. With other objects, you select the objects and
then specify the dimension location. You can also dimension an angle by
specifying the angle vertex and endpoints. As you create the dimension, you
can modify the text content and alignment before specifying the dimension
line location.
NOTE You can create baseline and continued angular dimensions relative to
existing angular dimensions. Baseline and continued angular dimensions are limited
to 180 degrees or less. To obtain baseline and continued angular dimensions larger
than 180 degrees, use grip editing to stretch the location of the extension line of
an existing baseline or continued dimension.

Dimension Lines
If you use two straight, nonparallel lines to specify an angle, the dimension
line arc spans the angle between the two lines. If the dimension line arc does
not meet one or both of the lines being dimensioned, The program draws one
or two extension lines to intersect the dimension line arc. The arc is always
less than 180 degrees.

Dimension Circles and Arcs
If you use an arc or a circle or three points to specify an angle, the program
draws the dimension line arc between the extension lines. The extension lines
are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line
arc.

1586 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

The location that you specify for the dimension line arc determines the
quadrant of the dimensioned angle.

Dimension to a Quadrant
Angular dimensions can measure a specific quadrant that is formed when
dimensioning the angle between of the endpoints of a line or arc, center point
of a circle, or two vertices. As an angular dimension is being created, there are
four possible angles that can be measured. By specifying a quadrant it allows
you to ensure that the correct angle is dimensioned. When placing an angular
dimension after a quadrant has been specified, you can place the dimension
text outside of the extension lines of the dimension. The dimension line is
automatically extended.

To create an angular dimension

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Angular.
2 Use one of the following methods:
■

To dimension a circle, select the circle at the first endpoint of the
angle and then specify the second endpoint of the angle.

■

To dimension any other object, select the first line, and then select
the second line.

Create Angular Dimensions | 1587

3 Enter options as needed:
■

To edit the dimension text content, enter t (Text) or m (multiline
text). Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or
removes the calculated dimension value. Adding text before or after
the brackets appends text before or after the dimension value.

■

To edit the dimension text angle, enter a (Angle).

■

To confine the dimension to a quadrant, enter q (Quadrant) and
specify the quadrant to measure.

4 Specify the dimension line arc location.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMANGULAR
Creates an angular dimension.
DIMBASELINE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the
previous or selected dimension.
DIMCONTINUE
Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created
dimension.

System Variables
DIMADEC
Controls the number of precision places displayed in angular dimensions.
DIMAUNIT
Sets the units format for angular dimensions.
DIMDEC
Sets the number of decimal places displayed for the primary units of a
dimension.

1588 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Create Ordinate Dimensions
Ordinate dimensions measure the perpendicular distance from an origin point
called the datum to a feature, such as a hole in a part. These dimensions prevent
escalating errors by maintaining accurate offsets of the features from the
datum.

Ordinate dimensions consist of an X or Y value with a leader line. X-datum
ordinate dimensions measure the distance of a feature from the datum along
the X axis. Y-datum ordinate dimensions measure the distance along the Y
axis.

Locate the Datum
The location and orientation of the current UCS determines the ordinate
values. Before creating ordinate dimensions, you typically set the UCS origin
to coincide with the datum.

Create Ordinate Dimensions | 1589

Locate the Leader
After you specify the feature location, you are prompted for the leader
endpoint. By default, the leader endpoint that you specify automatically
determines whether an X- or a Y-datum ordinate dimension is created. For
example, you can create an X-datum ordinate dimension by specifying a
location for the leader endpoint that is closer to vertical than horizontal.

After creating an ordinate dimension, you can easily relocate the dimension
leader and text using grip editing. The dimension text is always aligned with
the ordinate leader line.

To create ordinate dimensions

1 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Origin.
2 At the Specify New Origin Point prompt, specify an origin point.
The origin point specified is used to define the value assigned to the
ordinate dimension. Typically, the origin point is defined on the model.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Ordinate.
4 If straight ordinate leaders are required, turn Ortho mode on.
5 At the Select Feature Location prompt, specify a point location.
6 Enter x (X Datum) or y (Y Datum).
You can skip this step by making sure that the ordinate leader endpoint
is close to vertical for an X datum or close to horizontal for a Y datum.
7 Specify the ordinate leader endpoint.

1590 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMORDINATE
Creates ordinate dimensions.
QDIM
Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects.
UCS
Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.

Create Arc Length Dimensions
Arc length dimensions measure the distance along an arc or polyline arc
segment.
Typical uses of arc length dimensions include measuring the travel distance
around a cam or indicating the length of a cable. To differentiate them from
linear or angular dimensions, arc length dimensions display an arc symbol
by default.

The arc symbol, also called a hat or cap, is displayed either above the dimension
text or preceding the dimension text. The placement style can be changed on
the New/Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab.
The extension lines of an arc length dimension can be orthogonal or radial.

Create Arc Length Dimensions | 1591

NOTE Orthogonal extension lines are displayed only when the included angle of
the arc is less than 90 degrees.

To create an arc length dimension

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Arc Length.
2 Select an arc or polyline arc segment.
3 Specify the dimension line location.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMARC
Creates an arc length dimension.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

System Variables
DIMARCSYM
Controls display of the arc symbol in an arc length dimension.

Modify Existing Dimensions
You can modify all components of the existing dimension objects in a drawing
either individually or by using dimension styles.

Modify A Dimension
Dimensions can be modified to include more information than just the values
of the dimension. Dimensions can also be modified visually by using breaks
and by adjusting the spacing between them.

1592 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Overview of Modifying Dimensions
After you place a dimension, there are times when you need to modify the
information that the dimension represents. You can add a jog line to a linear
dimension to indicate that the dimension value does not represent the actual
dimensioned value or add an inspection dimension to represent how often a
dimension value of a manufactured part should be checked.
At times you might want to modify a dimension to simply improve readability.
You can make sure that the extension or dimension lines do not obscure any
objects; you can reposition dimension text; and you can adjust the placement
of linear dimensions so they are evenly spaced.
The easiest way to modify dimensions individually is to use the
multi-functional dimension grips.

Modify Dimension Geometry
You can modify dimensions with the editing commands and with grip editing.
Grip editing is the quickest and easiest way to modify dimensions. How you
edit dimensions depends on whether the dimension is associative.

Modify Associative Dimensions
Associative dimensions retain their associativity to dimensioned objects
through many editing commands if both the dimension and the associated
geometry are selected and operated on with a single command. For example,
if a dimension and its associated geometry are moved, copied, or arrayed in
the same command, each dimension retains associativity with its respective
geometry.
In some circumstances, dimensions are automatically disassociated, including
■

If the associated geometric object is erased

■

If the associated geometric object undergoes a boolean operation such as
UNION or SUBTRACT

■

If grip editing is used to stretch a dimension parallel to its dimension line

■

If the association to a geometric object is specified using the Apparent
Intersection object snap, and the geometric object is moved so that the
apparent intersection no longer exists

Modify A Dimension | 1593

In other circumstances, a dimension may become partially associated. For
example, if a linear dimension is associated with the endpoints of two
geometric objects and one of the objects is erased, the remaining association
is preserved. The disassociated end of the linear dimension may then be
associated with another geometric object using DIMREASSOCIATE.
NOTE The Command prompt displays a warning message if a dimension is
disassociated.

Modify Non-associative Dimensions
For non-associative dimensions, when you edit dimensioned objects, you
must include the relevant dimension definition points in the selection set, or
the dimension is not updated. Definition points determine the dimension
location. For example, to stretch a dimension, you must include the appropriate
definition points in the selection set. You can easily include them by turning
on grips and selecting the object so that the grips are highlighted.
The definition points for each type of dimension are indicated in the following
illustrations. The middle point of the dimension text is a definition point for
all dimension types.

1594 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

If no angle vertex is shown, definition points are placed at the ends of the
lines that form the angle. In the two-line angular example, a definition point
is placed at the center point of the dimensioned arc.
NOTE Definition points are drawn on a special layer named DEFPOINTS, which
is not plotted.

Use Dimension Line Grips
Hover over the grip on the endpoint of a dimension line to quickly access the
following functionality:
■

Stretch. Stretches the extension lines to move the dimension line farther
away or closer to the object being dimensioned. Use command line prompts
to specify a different base point or copy the dimension line. This is the
default grip behavior.

Modify A Dimension | 1595

■

Continue dimension. Invokes the DIMCONTINUE command.

■

Baseline dimension. Invokes the DIMBASELINE command.

■

Flip arrow. Flips the direction of the dimension arrowhead.

Modify Exploded Dimensions
You can edit exploded dimensions as you would any other objects because
an exploded dimension is a collection of separate objects: lines, 2D solids, and
text. Occasionally you may need to explode a dimension to make changes
such as creating a break in a dimension line or extension line. Once a
dimension is exploded, you cannot reassociate the dimension into a dimension
object.
See also:
■

Overview of Modifying Dimensions on page 1593

■

Change Dimension Associativity on page 1597

■

Control Dimension Geometry on page 1533

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMEDIT
Edits dimension text and extension lines.
DIMDISASSOCIATE
Removes associativity from selected dimensions.
DIMREASSOCIATE
Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects.
EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
STRETCH
Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon.

1596 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

System Variables
DIMASSOC
Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are
exploded.

Change Dimension Associativity
You may need to change the associativity of dimensions in several
circumstances including adding associativity to dimensions created in previous
releases.
You may need to change the associativity of dimensions in several
circumstances such as the following:
■

Redefine the associativity of dimensions in drawings that have been edited
significantly.

■

Add associativity to dimensions that have been partially disassociated.

■

Add associativity to dimensions in legacy drawings.

■

Remove associativity from dimensions in drawings that will be used by
people working in releases prior to AutoCAD 2002, but who do not want
any proxy objects in the drawings.

Reassociate Dimensions to Different Objects
With DIMREASSOCIATE, you can select one or more dimensions and step
through the extension-line origin points of each dimension. For each
extension-line origin point, you can specify a new association point on a
geometric object. Association points determine the attachment of extension
lines to locations on geometric objects.
NOTE When you create or modify associative dimensions, it is important to locate
their association points carefully so that if you make a future design change, the
geometric objects that you change will also change the dimensions associated
with them.
When you use the DIMREASSOCIATE command, a marker is displayed that
indicates whether each successive extension line origin point of the dimension
is associative or nonassociative. A square with an X in it means that the point
is associated with a location on an object, while an X without the square
means that the point is not associated with an object. Use an object snap to

Modify A Dimension | 1597

specify the new association for the extension-line origin point or press Enter
to skip to the next extension-line origin point.
NOTE The marker disappears if you pan or zoom.

Change Non-associative Dimensions to Associative
You can change all the non-associative dimensions in a drawing to associative.
Select all non-associative dimensions, and then use DIMREASSOCIATE to step
through the dimensions, associating each one with locations on geometric
objects.

Change Associative Dimensions to Non-associative
You can change all associative dimensions in a drawing to nonassociative
dimensions. Select all associative dimensions, and then use DIMDISASSOCIATE
to convert them into nonassociative dimensions.
See also:
■

Associative Dimensions on page 1527

■

Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats on page 1960

To associate or reassociate a dimension

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Reassociate.
2 Select one or more dimensions to associate or reassociate.
3 Do one of the following:
■

Specify the new location of the extension-line origin point.

■

Enter s and select a geometric object to associate with the dimension.

■

Press Enter to skip to the next extension-line origin point.

■

Press Esc to end the command but keep any associations you made
up to that point.

4 Repeat the previous step as needed.

To disassociate a dimension
1 At the Command prompt, enter DIMDISASSOCIATE.

1598 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

2 Select one or more dimensions to disassociate and press Enter when you
finish.

System Variables
DIMASSOC
Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are
exploded.

Modify Dimension Text
Once you've created a dimension, you can change the location and orientation
of the existing dimension text or replace it with new text.
Once you've created a dimension, you can rotate the existing text or replace
it with new text. You can move the text to a new location or back to its home
position, which is the position defined by the current dimension style. In the
following illustration, the home position is above and centered on the
dimension line.

Modify A Dimension | 1599

When you rotate or replace dimension text, you specify the change first, for
example, rotating the text to be at an angle. When you move dimension text,
you select a single dimension to move.
You can move dimension text to the left, right, or center along the dimension
line or to any position inside or outside the extension lines. A quick and simple
way to do this is by using grips. If you move text up or down, the current
vertical alignment of the text relative to the dimension line is not changed,
so the dimension and extension lines are modified accordingly. The following
illustration shows the result of moving text down and to the right. The text
remains centered vertically in relation to the dimension line.

Use Dimension Text Grips
Hover over a dimension text grip to quickly access the following functionality:
■

Stretch. This is the default grip behavior:
■

If the text is positioned on the dimension line, Stretch moves the
dimension line farther away or closer to the object being dimensioned.
Use command line prompts to specify a different base point or copy
the dimension line.

1600 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

■

If the text is positioned away from the dimension line, with or without
a leader, Stretch moves the text without moving the dimension line.

■

Move with Dim Line. Positions text on the dimension line, and moves the
dimension line farther away or closer to the object being dimensioned (no
additional prompts).

■

Move Text Only. Positions the dimension text without moving the
dimension line.

■

Move with Leader. Positions the dimension text with a leader line to the
dimension line.

■

Above Dim Line. Positions the dimension text above the dimension line
(left of the dimension line for vertical dimensions).

■

Center Vertically. Positions the dimension text so that the dimension line
cuts through the vertical center of the text.

■

Reset Text Position. Positions the dimension text back to its default (or
“home”) position based on the active dimension style.

See also:
■

Control Dimension Text on page 1543

■

Overview of Modifying Dimensions on page 1593

To rotate dimension text

1 Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Text Angle.
2 Select the dimension to edit.
3 Enter the new angle for the text.

To return dimension text to its home position
1 Select the dimension text you want to return to its home position.
2 Hover over the text grip and click Rest Text Position on the grip menu.

Modify A Dimension | 1601

To replace existing dimension text with new text
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Edit.
2 Select the dimension text you want to edit.
3 In the In-Place Text Editor, enter the new dimension text. Click OK.

To move text to the left side of the dimension line

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Left Justify.
2 Select the dimension.
The dimension text is left-justified along the dimension line inside the
extension lines. You can choose the Center or Right options to move the
text to the center or right of the dimension line.

To set dimension line spacing for baseline and continued dimensions

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
Click Modify.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Lines tab, under Dimension
Lines, enter in the Baseline Spacing box the offset distance between
dimension lines for baseline and continued dimensions.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

To change the extension origin offset

1602 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.

Quick Reference
Commands
DDEDIT
Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control
frames.
DIMEDIT
Edits dimension text and extension lines.
DIMTEDIT
Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

System Variables
DIMCLRT
Assigns colors to dimension text.
DIMDSEP
Specifies a single-character decimal separator to use when creating dimensions
whose unit format is decimal.
DIMJUST
Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text.
DIMTAD
Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line.
DIMTXTDIRECTION
Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text.
DIMTIH
Controls the position of dimension text inside the extension lines for all
dimension types except Ordinate.

Modify A Dimension | 1603

DIMTMOVE
Sets dimension text movement rules.
DIMTOH
Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines.
DIMTVP
Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or below the dimension
line.
DIMUPT
Controls options for user-positioned text.
MTEXTED
Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.

Dimension Jog
Jog lines are used to represent a dimension value that does not display the
actual measurement in a linear dimension. Typically, the actual measurement
value of the dimension is smaller than the displayed value.
The jog is made up of two parallel lines and a cross line that forms two
40-degree angles. The height of the jog is determined by the linear jog size
value of the dimension style.

Once you add a jog to a linear dimension, you can position it by using grips.
To reposition the jog, select the dimension and then select the grip. Move the
grip to another point along the dimension line. You can also adjust the height
of the jog symbol on a linear dimension on the Properties palette under Lines
& Arrows.

1604 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

To add a jog to a linear dimension

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Jog Line.
2 Select a linear dimension.
3 Specify a point on the dimension line to place the jog.

To add a jog to a linear dimension based on the midpoint of the selected
dimension line

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Jog Line.
2 Select a linear dimension.
3 Press Enter to position the jog at the midpoint of the selected dimension
line.

To reposition a jog using grips
1 With no command active, select the linear dimension that has the jog
you want to reposition.
2 Select the grip in the middle of the jog.
The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is
active.
3 Drag the crosshairs along the dimension line and click to reposition the
jog.
TIP If you want to place the jog along the dimension line without changing
the position of the dimension line, turn Ortho mode on.

To remove a jog

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Jog Line.
2 Enter r (Remove) and press Enter.
3 Select the linear dimension to remove the jog from.

Modify A Dimension | 1605

To modify the height of a jog using the Properties palette
1 With no command active, select the linear dimension with the jog whose
height you want to change.
2 Right-click over the drawing window. Click Properties.
3 On the Properties palette, expand Lines & Arrows.
4 Select Jog Height Factor, and enter a new height for the jog.
5 Click outside the Properties palette. Press Esc.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMALIGNED
Creates an aligned linear dimension.
DIMBASELINE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the
previous or selected dimension.
DIMCONTINUE
Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created
dimension.
DIMJOGLINE
Adds or removes a jog line on a linear or aligned dimension.
DIMLINEAR
Creates a linear dimension.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
QDIM
Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects.

1606 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Convert Dimensions into Inspection Dimensions
Inspection dimensions allow you to effectively communicate how frequently
manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value
and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range.
When working with parts that need to met a specific tolerance or dimension
value before installing them into the final assembled product, you can use an
inspection dimension to specify how often the part should be tested.
You can add an inspection dimension to any type of dimension object; it is
composed of a frame and text values. The frame for an inspection dimension
is made up of two parallel lines and the end is round or square. The text values
are separated by vertical lines. An inspection dimension can contain up to
three different fields of information: inspection label, dimension value, and
inspection rate.

Inspection Dimension Fields
Inspection Label Text used to identify individual inspection dimensions. The
label is located in the leftmost section of the inspection dimension.
Dimension Value Dimension value that is displayed is the same value before
the inspection dimension is added. The dimension value can contain
tolerances, text (both prefix and suffix), and the measured value. The
dimension value is located in the center section of the inspection dimension.
Inspection Rate Text used to communicate the frequency that the dimension
value should be inspected, expressed as a percentage. The rate is located in
the rightmost section of the inspection dimension.
You can add inspection dimensions to any type of dimension. The current
values of an inspection dimension are displayed on the Properties palette,
under Misc. The values include the properties that are used to control the look
of the frame, and the text for both the label and rate values.

Modify A Dimension | 1607

To create an inspection dimension

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Inspect.
2 In the Inspection Dimension dialog box, click Select Dimensions.
The Inspection Dimension dialog box closes. You are prompted to select
dimensions.
3 Select the dimension you want to make an inspection dimension. Press
Enter to return to the dialog box.
4 Under the Shape section, specify the frame type.
5 Under the Label/Inspection rate section, specify the desired options.
■

Select the Label check box, and enter the desired label in the text box.

■

Select the Inspection Rate check box, and enter the desired rate in the
text box.

6 Click OK.

To modify an inspection dimension from the Inspection dialog box

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Inspect.
2 In the Inspection Dimension dialog box, click Select Dimensions.
The Inspection Dimension dialog box closes. You are prompted to select
dimensions.
3 Select the inspection dimension you want to modify. Press Enter to return
to the dialog box.
4 Under the Shape section, make the desired changes to the frame type.
5 Under the Label/Inspection rate section, make the desired changes to the
label and inspection rate.
6 Click OK.

To remove an inspection dimension

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Inspect.

1608 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

2 In the Inspection Dimension dialog box, click Select Dimensions.
The Inspection Dimension dialog box closes. You are prompted to select
dimensions.
3 Select the dimension you want to remove the inspection dimension from.
Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
4 Click Remove Inspection.
5 Click OK.

To modify an inspection dimension using the Properties palette
1 With no command active, select the inspection dimension you want to
modify.
2 Right-click over the drawing window. Click Properties.
3 On the Properties palette, double-click the Misc caption of the pane to
expand it.
4 Specify the new values for the Inspection shape, label, and rate.
5 Click outside the Properties palette. Press Esc.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMINSPECT
Adds or removes inspection information for a selected dimension.

Break a Dimension Line
With dimension breaks, you can keep the dimension, extension, or leader
lines from appearing as if they are a part of the design.
Dimension breaks can be added to a dimension or a multileader automatically
or manually. The method that you choose to place dimension breaks depends
on the number of objects that intersect a dimension or multileader.

Modify A Dimension | 1609

You can add dimension breaks to the following dimension and leader objects:
■

Linear dimensions, including aligned and rotated

■

Angular dimensions, including 2- and 3-point

■

Radial dimensions, including radius, diameter, and jogged

■

Arc length dimensions

■

Ordinate dimensions

■

Multileaders that use straight-line leaders

The following dimension and leader objects do not support dimension breaks:
■

Multileaders that use spline leaders

■

Leaders created with the LEADER command

The following table explains the conditions where dimension breaks do not
work or are not supported.
Dimension Break Exceptions
Condition

Description

No break in xrefs or
blocks

Dimension breaks on dimensions or multileaders in xrefs
and blocks are not supported. However, the objects in an
xref or block can be used as the cutting edges for dimension
breaks on dimensions or multileaders that are not in an
xref or block.

No break on arrowhead and dimension
text

Dimension breaks cannot be placed on an arrowhead or
the dimension text. If you want a break to appear at the
dimension text, it is recommended to use the background

1610 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

Dimension Break Exceptions
Condition

Description
mask option. If the intersecting point of an object and the
dimension are at the arrowhead or dimension text, the
break will not be displayed until the intersecting object, or
dimension or multileader are moved.

No break on transspatial dimensions

Automatic breaks are not supported for objects and dimensions or multileaders that are in different spaces. In order
to break a dimension or multileader that is in a different
space, you need to use the Manual option of the DIMBREAK
command.

You can also remove dimension breaks from dimensions or multileaders with
the Remove option of DIMBREAK. When removing them, all dimension breaks
are removed from the selected dimension or multileader, but you can always
add them back individually.
The following objects can be used as cutting edges when adding a dimension
break:
■

Dimension

■

Leader

■

Line

■

Circle

■

Arc

■

Spline

■

Ellipse

■

Polyline

■

Text

■

Multiline text

■

Blocks but limited to the previously mentioned objects in this list

■

Xrefs but limited to the previously mentioned objects in this list

Modify A Dimension | 1611

Automatic Dimension Breaks
To create dimension breaks automatically, you select a dimension or
multileader, and then use the Auto option of the DIMBREAK command.
Automatic dimension breaks are updated any time the dimension or
multileader, or intersecting objects are modified.

Dimension Break Gap Size
You control the size of dimension breaks on the New/Modify Dimension Style
dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab. The specified size is affected by the
dimension break size, dimension scale, and current annotation scale for the
current viewport. For more information about annotation scaling, see Scale
Annotations on page 1324.

Dimension Break Created by Selecting an Object
Instead of placing a dimension break for each object that intersects a dimension
or multileader, you can specify which of the intersecting objects to use.
Dimension breaks that are added by selecting individual intersecting objects
are updated any time the dimension or multileader, or intersecting objects
are modified.

Dimension Break Created by Picking Two Points
You can place a dimension break by picking two points on the dimension,
extension, or leader line to determine the size and placement of the break.
Dimension breaks that are added manually by picking two points are not
automatically updated if the dimension or multileader, or intersecting object
is modified.
So if a dimension or multileader with a manually added dimension break is
moved or the intersecting object is modified, you might have to restore the
dimension or multileader, and then add the dimension break again. The size
of a dimension break that is created by picking two points is not affected by
the current dimension scale or annotation scale value for the current viewport.

To automatically create dimension breaks for each intersecting object

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break.
2 Select a dimension or multileader.
3 Enter a (Auto) and press Enter.

1612 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

To create a single dimension break based on an intersecting object

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break.
2 Select a dimension or multileader.
3 Select an object that intersects the dimension or multileader. Press Enter.

To create a manual dimension break

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break.
2 Select a dimension or multileader.
3 Enter m (Manual) and press Enter.
4 Specify the first point on the dimension, extension, or leader line for the
dimension break.
5 Specify the second point along the dimension, extension, or leader line
for the dimension break.

To create dimension breaks for multiple dimensions or multileaders at one
time

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break.
2 Enter m (Multiple) and press Enter.
3 Select the dimensions or multileaders to which to add the dimension
breaks.
4 Enter a (Auto) and press Enter.

To remove all dimension breaks from a dimension or multileader

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break.
2 Select a dimension or multileader.
3 Enter r (Remove) and press Enter.

Modify A Dimension | 1613

To remove all dimension breaks from multiple dimensions or multileaders

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break.
2 Enter m (Multiple), and press Enter.
3 Select the dimensions or multileaders from which to remove the
dimension breaks, and press Enter.
4 Enter r (Remove), and press Enter.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMBREAK
Breaks or restores dimension and extension lines where they cross other
objects.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.

Adjust Dimension Spacing
You can automatically adjust existing parallel linear and angular dimensions
in a drawing so they are equally spaced or aligned at the dimension line with
each other.
Parallel linear and angular dimensions can be created in a number of different
ways in a drawing. With the DIMLINEAR and DIMANGULAR commands you
can place one dimension at a time; you can use the DIMBASELINE and
DIMCONTINUE commands to help place additional linear dimensions based
on the previous linear dimension placed.
The DIMBASELINE command uses the DIMDLI system variable to create
equally spaced dimensions, but once the dimensions are placed, changing the
value of the system variable has no affect on the spacing of dimensions. If
you change the text size or adjust the scale for the dimensions, they remain
in the original position which can cause problems with overlapping dimension
lines and text.
You can space linear and angular dimensions that overlap or are not equally
spaced with the DIMSPACE command. The dimensions that are selected must

1614 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

be linear or angular, of the same type (rotated or aligned), parallel or concentric
to one another, and on the extension lines of each other. You can also align
linear and angular dimensions by using a spacing value of 0.
The following illustration shows parallel linear dimensions that are not equally
spaced and then those that are equally spaced after using the DIMSPACE
command.

To equally space parallel linear and angular dimensions automatically

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Adjust Space.
2 Select the dimension that you want to use as the base dimension when
equally spacing dimensions.
3 Select the next dimension to equally space.
4 Continue to select dimensions and then press Enter.
5 Enter a (Auto) and press Enter.

To equally space parallel linear and angular dimensions based on a distance

Modify A Dimension | 1615

To align parallel linear and angular dimensions

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Adjust Space.
2 Select the dimension that you want to use as the base dimension when
equally spacing dimensions.
3 Select the next dimension to align.
4 Continue to select dimensions and then press Enter.
5 Enter 0 and press Enter.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMALIGNED
Creates an aligned linear dimension.
DIMANGULAR
Creates an angular dimension.
DIMBASELINE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the
previous or selected dimension.
DIMCONTINUE
Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created
dimension.
DIMLINEAR
Creates a linear dimension.
DIMSPACE
Adjusts the spacing between linear dimensions or angular dimensions.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
QDIM
Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects.

1616 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

System Variables
DIMDLI
Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions.

Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions
You can modify existing dimensions by applying a different dimension style.
If you make changes to a dimension style, you can choose whether to update
the dimensions associated with that dimension style.
When you create a dimension, the current dimension style is associated with
that dimension. The dimension retains this dimension style unless you apply
a new dimension style to it or set up dimension style overrides.
You can modify existing dimensions by applying a different dimension style.
If you make changes to a dimension style, you can choose whether to update
the dimensions associated with that dimension style.
You can restore an existing dimension style or apply the current dimension
style, including any dimension style overrides, to selected dimensions.

To apply the current dimension style to existing dimensions

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Update.
2 Select the dimensions to update to the current dimension style.
3 Press Enter.

To restore a dimension style

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the dimension style to restore.
Click Set Current.
3 Click Close.

Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions | 1617

Alternate
■

On the Styles toolbar, click the arrow in the Dimension Styles control and
select a dimension style.

Quick Reference
Commands
DIMOVERRIDE
Controls overrides of system variables used in selected dimensions.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects.

System Variables
DIMCLRD
Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines.

Override a Dimension Style
With dimension style overrides, you can temporarily change a dimensioning
system variable without changing the current dimension style.
A dimension style override is a change made to specific settings in the current
dimension style. It is equivalent to changing a dimensioning system variable
without changing the current dimension style.
You can define dimension style overrides for individual dimensions, or for
the current dimension style.
■

For individual dimensions, you may want to create overrides to suppress
a dimension's extension lines or modify text and arrowhead placement so
that they do not overlap drawing geometry without creating a different
dimension style.

■

You can also set up overrides to the current dimension style. All dimensions
you create in the style include the overrides until you delete the overrides,
save the overrides to a new style, or set another style current. For example,

1618 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances

if you choose Override in the Dimension Style Manager, and change the
color of extension lines on the Override Current Style dialog box, Lines
tab, the current dimension style remains unchanged. However, the new
value for color is stored in the DIMCLRE system variable. The next
dimension you create will have extension lines in the new color. You can
save the dimension style overrides as a new dimension style.
Some dimension characteristics are common to a drawing or to a style of
dimensioning and are therefore suited to be permanent dimension style
settings. Others generally apply on an individual basis and can be applied
more effectively as overrides. For example, a drawing usually uses a single type
of arrowhead, so it makes sense to define the arrowhead type as part of the
dimension style. Suppression of extension lines, however, usually applies in
individual cases only and is more suited to a dimension style override.
There are several ways to set up dimension style overrides. You can change
options in the dialog boxes or change system variable settings at the Command
prompt. You reverse the override by returning the changed settings to their
original values. The overrides apply to the dimension you are creating and all
subsequent dimensions created with that dimension style until you reverse
the override or make another dimension style current.

Example: Change a Dimension Style Override at the Command Prompt
You can override the current dimension style while creating a dimension by
entering the name of any dimensioning system variable at any prompt. In
this example, the dimension line color is changed. The change affects
subsequent dimensions you create until you reverse the override or make
another dimension style current.
Command: dimoverride
Enter dimension variable name to override or [Clear overrides]: dimclrd
Enter new value for dimension variable : 5
Enter dimension variable name to override: Enter another dimension variable
name or press Enter
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish

To set up dimension style overrides

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, under Styles, select the dimension style
for which you want to create an override. Click Override.

Override a Dimension Style | 1619

3 In the Override Current Style dialog box, make changes to the dimension
style by clicking the appropriate tab.
4 Click OK to return to the Dimension Style Manager.
The dimension style overrides are listed below the style they modify in
the dimension style name list.
5 Click Close.

To apply dimension style overrides

1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, click Override.
3 In the Override Current Style dialog box, enter the style overrides. Click
OK.
The program displays